System Administration Guide:: Adaptive Server Enterprise

System Administration Guide:
Volume 1
Adaptive Server® Enterprise
15.5
DOCUMENT ID: DC31654-01-1550-01
LAST REVISED: November 2009
Copyright © 2009 by Sybase, Inc. All rights reserved.

This publication pertains to Sybase software and to any subsequent release until otherwise indicated in new editions or technical notes.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. The software described herein is furnished under a license agreement,
and it may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that agreement.
To order additional documents, U.S. and Canadian customers should call Customer Fulfillment at (800) 685-8225, fax (617) 229-9845.
Customers in other countries with a U.S. license agreement may contact Customer Fulfillment via the above fax number. All other
international customers should contact their Sybase subsidiary or local distributor. Upgrades are provided only at regularly scheduled
software release dates. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, or translated in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, manual, optical, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Sybase, Inc.
Sybase trademarks can be viewed at the Sybase trademarks page at http://www.sybase.com/detail?id=1011207. Sybase and the marks listed
are trademarks of Sybase, Inc. ® indicates registration in the United States of America.
Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Unicode and the Unicode Logo are registered trademarks of Unicode, Inc.
IBM and Tivoli are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
All other company and product names mentioned may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of DFARS 52.227-7013
for the DOD and as set forth in FAR 52.227-19(a)-(d) for civilian agencies.
Sybase, Inc., One Sybase Drive, Dublin, CA 94568.

Contents
About This Book .......................................................................................................................... xv
PART 1 BASICS OF SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
CHAPTER 1 Overview of System Administration.............................................. 3

Adaptive Server administration tasks ............................................... 3
Roles required for system administration tasks......................... 4
Using isql to perform system administration tasks .................... 7
Using Sybase Central for system administration tasks ............. 8
System tables................................................................................... 9
Querying the system tables ..................................................... 10
Keys in system tables.............................................................. 11
Updating system tables ........................................................... 11
System procedures ........................................................................ 12
Using system procedures ........................................................ 12
System procedure tables......................................................... 13
Creating system procedures ................................................... 14
System extended stored procedures ............................................. 14
Creating system ESPs ............................................................ 15
Logging error messages ................................................................ 15
Connecting to Adaptive Server ...................................................... 16
The interfaces file .................................................................... 16
Directory services .................................................................... 17
LDAP as a directory service .................................................... 18
Security features available in Adaptive Server............................... 20
CHAPTER 2 System and Optional Databases ................................................. 23

Overview of system databases ...................................................... 23
master database ............................................................................ 25
Controlling object creation in master ....................................... 26
Backing up master and keeping copies of system tables........ 26
model database.............................................................................. 27
sybsystemprocs database.............................................................. 28
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 iii

tempdb database............................................................................ 28
Creating temporary tables ....................................................... 29
sybsecurity database...................................................................... 30
sybsystemdb database................................................................... 30
sybmgmtdb database ..................................................................... 31
pubs2 and pubs3 sample databases.............................................. 31
Maintaining the sample databases .......................................... 31
pubs2 image data .................................................................... 32
dbccdb database ............................................................................ 32
sybdiag database ........................................................................... 32
Determining the version of the installation scripts .......................... 32
CHAPTER 3 System Administration for Beginners......................................... 35

Logical page sizes .......................................................................... 35
Using “test” servers ........................................................................ 36
Planning resources .................................................................. 36
Achieving performance goals .................................................. 37
Considerations when installing Sybase products ........................... 37
Check product compatibility..................................................... 37
Install or upgrade Adaptive Server .......................................... 37
Install additional third-party software ....................................... 38
Configure and test client connections...................................... 38
Allocating physical resources ......................................................... 39
Dedicated versus shared servers ............................................ 39
Decision-support and OLTP applications ................................ 40
Advance resource planning ..................................................... 40
Operating system configuration ............................................... 41
Backup and recovery...................................................................... 41
Keep up-to-date backups of master......................................... 42
Automate backup procedures.................................................. 43
Verify data consistency before backing up a database ........... 43
Monitor the log size.................................................................. 44
Ongoing maintenance and troubleshooting.................................... 44
Starting and stopping Adaptive Server .................................... 45
Viewing and pruning the error log............................................ 45
Keeping records ............................................................................. 45
Contact information.................................................................. 46
Configuration information......................................................... 46
Maintenance schedules ........................................................... 46
System information .................................................................. 47
Disaster recovery plan ............................................................. 47
Additional resources ....................................................................... 48
iv Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 4 Introduction to the Adaptive Server Plug-in for Sybase Central 49
Overview for Adaptive Server Sybase Central Plug-in ................... 49
Adaptive Server plug-In and command line updates...................... 50
Using the Adaptive Server Plug-in.................................................. 51
Starting and stopping Sybase Central ............................................ 52
Registering Adaptive Server Plug-in............................................... 53
Performing common tasks.............................................................. 53
Using Interactive SQL..................................................................... 60
Starting Interactive SQL........................................................... 61
CHAPTER 5 Setting Configuration Parameters ............................................... 63

Overview......................................................................................... 63
The Adaptive Server configuration file..................................... 64
Modifying configuration parameters......................................... 64
Required roles for modifying configuration parameters ........... 64
Unit specification using sp_configure ...................................... 66
Getting help information on configuration parameters............. 66
Using sp_configure......................................................................... 67
Syntax elements ...................................................................... 68
Using sp_configure with a configuration file ............................ 69
The parameter hierarchy ......................................................... 73
User-defined subsets of the parameter hierarchy: display levels .
75
Performance tuning with sp_configure and sp_sysmon .......... 77
Using configuration parameters in a clustered environment.... 77
sp_configure output ........................................................................ 78
Named cache configuration parameters......................................... 80
sysconfigures and syscurconfigs tables ......................................... 80
Querying syscurconfigs and sysconfigures: an example......... 81
Configuration parameters ............................................................... 81
Alphabetical listing of configuration parameters ...................... 82
CHAPTER 6 Overview of Disk Resource Issues ............................................ 271

Device allocation and object placement ....................................... 271
Commands for managing disk resources ..................................... 272
Considerations in storage management decisions....................... 274
Recovery................................................................................ 274
Performance .......................................................................... 275
Status and defaults at installation time ......................................... 275
System tables that manage storage ............................................. 276
The sysdevices table ............................................................. 277
The sysusages table.............................................................. 278
The syssegments table.......................................................... 279
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 v

The sysindexes table ............................................................. 279
The syspartitions table........................................................... 279
CHAPTER 7 Initializing Database Devices ..................................................... 281

Database devices ......................................................................... 281
Using the disk init command......................................................... 282
disk init syntax .............................................................................. 282
Specifying a logical device name........................................... 282
Specifying a physical device name........................................ 283
Choosing a device number .................................................... 283
Specifying the device size ..................................................... 284
Specifying the dsync setting (optional) .................................. 285
Using directio to bypass operating system buffer .................. 287
Other optional parameters for disk init................................... 288
Getting information about devices ................................................ 288
Dropping devices.......................................................................... 290
Designating default devices.......................................................... 290
Choosing default and nondefault devices.............................. 291
Increasing the size of devices with disk resize ............................. 292
Insufficient disk space............................................................ 293
CHAPTER 8 Setting Database Options .......................................................... 295

Using the sp_dboption procedure................................................. 295
Database option descriptions ....................................................... 296
Viewing the options on a database............................................... 297
CHAPTER 9 Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and Languages ..... 299
Understanding internationalization and localization ..................... 299
Advantages of internationalized systems ..................................... 300
A sample internationalized system ............................................... 301
Elements of an internationalized system ...................................... 303
Selecting the character set for your server................................... 303
Unicode.................................................................................. 306
Selecting the server default character set ............................. 310
Selecting the sort order ................................................................ 313
Using sort orders ................................................................... 314
Different types of sort orders ................................................. 314
Selecting the default sort order.............................................. 315
Selecting a language for system messages ................................. 321
Setting up your server: examples ................................................. 323
A Spanish-version server....................................................... 323
A U.S.-based company in Japan ........................................... 323
vi Adaptive Server Enterprise

A Japan-based company with multinational clients ............... 324
Changing the character set, sort order, or message language .... 325
Changing the default character set........................................ 325
Changing the sort order with a resources file ........................ 326
Changing the default sort order ............................................. 327
Reconfiguring the character set, sort order, or message language
327
Unicode examples ................................................................. 328
Preliminary steps ................................................................... 330
Setting the user’s default language ....................................... 331
Recovery after reconfiguration............................................... 331
Handling suspect partitions.................................................... 334
Installing date strings for unsupported languages ........................ 335
Server versus client date interpretation ................................. 336
Internationalization and localization files ...................................... 337
Types of internationalization files........................................... 337
Character sets directory structure.......................................... 338
Types of localization files....................................................... 338
Software messages directory structure ................................. 339
Message languages and global variables.............................. 340
CHAPTER 10 Configuring Client/Server Character Set Conversions............ 341

Character set conversion.............................................................. 341
Supported character set conversions ........................................... 342
Conversion for native character sets ..................................... 342
Conversion in a Unicode system ........................................... 343
Adaptive Server direct conversions ....................................... 344
Unicode conversions ............................................................. 344
Choosing a conversion type ......................................................... 344
Non-Unicode client/server systems ....................................... 345
Unicode client/server systems ............................................... 345
Configuring the server ........................................................... 346
Enabling and disabling character set conversion ......................... 347
Characters that cannot be converted..................................... 347
Error handling in character set conversion ................................... 348
Conversions and changes to data lengths ................................... 349
Configuring your system and application............................... 349
Specifying the character set for utility programs........................... 350
Display and file character set command line options............. 350
CHAPTER 11 Diagnosing System Problems.................................................... 353

How Adaptive Server uses error messages ................................. 353
Error messages and message numbers................................ 355
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 vii

Variables in error message text ............................................. 355
Adaptive Server error logging....................................................... 356
Error log format...................................................................... 357
Severity levels........................................................................ 358
Severity levels 10 – 18........................................................... 359
Severity levels 19 – 26........................................................... 362
Reporting errors..................................................................... 364
Backup Server error logging......................................................... 365
Killing processes........................................................................... 366
Using kill with statusonly........................................................ 369
Using sp_lock to examine blocking processes ...................... 369
Housekeeper functionality ............................................................ 370
Housekeeper wash ................................................................ 370
Housekeeper chores.............................................................. 370
Housekeeper garbage collection ........................................... 371
Configuring enable housekeeper GC .................................... 372
Configuring Adaptive Server to save SQL batch text ................... 373
Allocating memory for batch text ........................................... 374
SQL commands not represented by text ............................... 375
Viewing the query plan of a SQL statement .......................... 376
Viewing a nested procedure .................................................. 377
Shutting down servers .................................................................. 378
Shutting down Adaptive Server ............................................. 378
Shutting down a Backup Server ............................................ 379
Learning about known problems .................................................. 380
PART 2 SECURITY ADMINISTRATION
CHAPTER 12 Introduction to Security.............................................................. 383

Introduction to security ................................................................. 383
What is “information security?” ..................................................... 383
Information security standards ..................................................... 384
Common Criteria configuration evaluation............................. 385
FIPS 140-2 validated cryptographic module.......................... 386
CHAPTER 13 Getting Started With Security Administration in Adaptive Server

387
General process of security administration .................................. 387
Recommendations for setting up security .................................... 388
An example of setting up security................................................. 389
Security features in Adaptive Server ............................................ 391
Identification and authentication ............................................ 391
viii Adaptive Server Enterprise

Discretionary access control.................................................. 392
Division of roles ..................................................................... 393
Auditing for accountability...................................................... 394
Confidentiality of data ............................................................ 395
CHAPTER 14 Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and Client

Connections .......................................................................... 397
Choosing and creating a password .............................................. 398
Adding logins to Adaptive Server ................................................. 399
Login failure .................................................................................. 400
Creating groups ............................................................................ 401
Adding users to databases ........................................................... 402
Adding a “guest” user to a database...................................... 403
Adding a guest user to the server.......................................... 405
Adding remote users.............................................................. 405
Number of user and login IDs....................................................... 405
Limits and ranges of ID numbers........................................... 405
Login connection limitations................................................... 406
Creating and assigning roles to users .......................................... 408
System-defined roles ............................................................. 408
System administrator privileges............................................. 409
System security officer privileges .......................................... 409
Operator privileges ................................................................ 410
Sybase Technical Support..................................................... 411
Replication role ...................................................................... 411
Distributed Transaction Manager role.................................... 411
High availability role............................................................... 411
Monitoring and diagnosis....................................................... 412
Job Scheduler roles ............................................................... 412
Real-time messaging role ...................................................... 412
Web Services role.................................................................. 412
Key custodian role ................................................................. 413
User-defined roles ................................................................. 413
Adding and removing passwords from a role ........................ 414
Role hierarchies and mutual exclusivity................................. 415
Role hierarchies and mutual exclusivity................................. 415
Setting up default activation at login ...................................... 418
Activating and deactivating roles ........................................... 419
Setting up groups and adding users............................................. 420
Dropping users, groups, and user-defined roles .......................... 420
Dropping users ...................................................................... 420
Dropping groups .................................................................... 421
Dropping user-defined roles .................................................. 421
Locking or dropping Adaptive Server login accounts ................... 422
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 ix

Locking and unlocking login accounts ................................... 422
Dropping login accounts ........................................................ 423
Locking logins that own thresholds........................................ 423
Changing user information ........................................................... 423
Changing passwords ............................................................. 424
Changing user defaults.......................................................... 426
Changing a user’s group membership................................... 427
Changing user process information ....................................... 427
Using aliases in databases........................................................... 429
Adding aliases ....................................................................... 429
Dropping aliases .................................................................... 430
Getting information about aliases .......................................... 431
Getting information about users ................................................... 431
Reporting on users and processes ........................................ 432
Getting information about login accounts .............................. 433
Getting information about database users............................. 434
Finding user names and IDs.................................................. 434
Displaying information about roles......................................... 435
Establishing a password and login policy ..................................... 438
Setting and changing the maximum login attempts ............... 439
Logging in after losing a password ........................................ 441
Locking and unlocking logins and roles ................................. 442
Displaying password information ........................................... 443
Checking passwords for at least one digit ............................. 444
Setting and changing minimum password length .................. 444
Password complexity checks................................................. 446
Enabling custom password checks........................................ 452
Setting the login and role expiration interval for a password . 454
Securing login passwords stored on disk and in memory...... 459
Using only the SHA-256 algorithm......................................... 460
Character set considerations for passwords.......................... 463
Upgrade and and downgrade behavior ................................. 464
Expiring passwords when allow password downgrade is set to 0
469
Last login and locking inactive accounts................................ 470
Using passwords in a high-availability environment .............. 472
Monitoring license use.................................................................. 473
How licenses are counted...................................................... 474
Configuring the License Use Monitor..................................... 474
Monitoring license use with the housekeeper task ................ 474
Logging the number of user licenses..................................... 475
Getting information about usage: chargeback accounting ........... 476
Reporting current usage statistics ......................................... 476
Specifying the interval for adding accounting statistics ......... 477
x Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 15 Managing Remote Servers ......................................................... 479
Overview....................................................................................... 479
Managing remote servers............................................................. 480
Adding a remote server ......................................................... 481
Managing remote server names ............................................ 482
Setting server connection options.......................................... 483
Getting information about servers.......................................... 485
Dropping remote servers ....................................................... 485
Adding remote logins.................................................................... 486
Mapping users’ server IDs ..................................................... 486
Mapping remote logins to particular local names .................. 487
Mapping all remote logins to one local name ........................ 487
Keeping remote login names for local servers....................... 488
Example of remote user login mapping ................................. 488
Password checking for remote users ........................................... 490
Effects of using the untrusted mode ...................................... 490
Getting information about remote logins....................................... 491
Configuration parameters for remote logins ................................. 491
CHAPTER 16 External Authentication .............................................................. 493

Configuring Adaptive Server for network-based security ............. 494
Security services and Adaptive Server .................................. 495
Administering network-based security ................................... 496
Setting up configuration files for security ............................... 497
Identifying users and servers to the security mechanism ...... 502
Configuring Adaptive Server for security ............................... 503
Adding logins to support unified login .................................... 507
Establishing security for remote procedures.......................... 508
Connecting to the server and using the security services ..... 514
Getting information about available security services............ 517
Using Kerberos ...................................................................... 518
Using principal names ........................................................... 524
Concurrent Kerberos authentication............................................. 530
Configuring Adaptive Server for LDAP user authentication.......... 530
Composed DN algorithm ....................................................... 531
Searched DN algorithm ......................................................... 532
Configuring LDAP .................................................................. 533
LDAP user authentication administration............................... 533
Adaptive Server logins and LDAP user accounts .................. 537
Secondary lookup server support .......................................... 538
LDAP server state transitions ................................................ 540
LDAP user authentication tuning ........................................... 542
Adding tighter controls on login mapping............................... 543
Troubleshooting LDAP user authentication errors................. 546
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xi

Configuring an LDAP server .................................................. 547
LDAPS user authentication enhancements.................................. 548
Automatic LDAP user authentication and failback........................ 548
Setting the LDAP failback time interval.................................. 549
Login mapping of external authentication..................................... 550
Configuring Adaptive Server for authentication using PAM.......... 551
Enabling PAM in Adaptive Server.......................................... 552
Enhanced login controls ............................................................... 555
Forcing authentication ........................................................... 555
Mapping logins using sp_maplogin........................................ 556
CHAPTER 17 Managing User Permissions ...................................................... 559

Overview....................................................................................... 559
Permissions for creating databases ............................................. 561
Changing database ownership .............................................. 561
Database owner privileges ........................................................... 562
Database object owner privileges................................................. 563
Other database user privileges..................................................... 564
Permissions on system procedures.............................................. 564
Granting and revoking permissions .............................................. 565
Object access permissions .................................................... 565
Granting permissions on functions ........................................ 574
Granting and revoking permissions to execute commands ... 574
Granting permissions on dbcc commands............................. 578
Permissions on system tables ............................................... 579
Combining grant and revoke statements ............................... 582
Understanding permission order and hierarchy..................... 583
Grant dbcc and set proxy issue warning for fipsflagger......... 584
Granting and revoking roles ......................................................... 584
Granting roles ........................................................................ 584
Understanding grant and roles .............................................. 585
Revoking roles ....................................................................... 586
Acquiring the permissions of another user ................................... 586
Using setuser......................................................................... 586
Using proxy authorization ...................................................... 587
Reporting on permissions............................................................. 591
Querying the sysprotects table for proxy authorization.......... 592
Displaying information about users and processes ............... 592
Reporting permissions on database objects or users............ 593
Reporting permissions on specific tables .............................. 594
Reporting permissions on specific columns........................... 595
Using views and stored procedures as security mechanisms ...... 596
Using views as security mechanisms .................................... 596
Using stored procedures as security mechanisms ................ 598
xii Adaptive Server Enterprise

Understanding ownership chains........................................... 599
Permissions on triggers ......................................................... 603
Using row-level access control ..................................................... 603
Access rules .......................................................................... 604
Using the Application Context Facility ................................... 613
Creating and using application contexts ................................ 616
SYS_SESSION system application context .......................... 620
Solving a problem using an access rule and ACF ................. 621
Using login triggers ................................................................ 623
Exporting set options from a login trigger .............................. 631
Setting global login triggers ................................................... 633
CHAPTER 18 Auditing ........................................................................................ 635

Introduction to auditing in Adaptive Server................................... 635
Correlating Adaptive Server and operating system audit records
636
The audit system ................................................................... 636
Installing and setting up auditing .................................................. 640
Installing the audit system ..................................................... 641
Setting up audit trail management ......................................... 644
Setting up transaction log management ................................ 650
Enabling and disabling auditing ............................................. 652
Single-table auditing .............................................................. 653
Restarting auditing................................................................. 656
Setting global auditing options...................................................... 657
Auditing options: types and requirements.............................. 657
Hiding system stored procedure and command password
parameters...................................................................... 665
Determining current auditing settings .................................... 665
Adding user-specified records to the audit trail...................... 665
Querying the audit trail ................................................................. 667
Understanding the audit tables..................................................... 667
Reading the extrainfo column ................................................ 668
Monitoring failed login attempts ............................................. 679
Auditing login failures............................................................. 679
CHAPTER 19 Confidentiality of Data ................................................................ 683

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) in Adaptive Server.......................... 683
Internet communications overview ........................................ 684
SSL in Adaptive Server.......................................................... 686
Enabling SSL ......................................................................... 690
Performance .......................................................................... 696
Cipher Suites ......................................................................... 696
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xiii

Setting SSL cipher suite preferences .................................... 697
Using SSL to specify a common name......................................... 703
Specifying a common name with sp_listener......................... 703
Stored procedure sp_addserver changed ............................. 704
Kerberos confidentiality ................................................................ 704
Dumping and loading databases with password protection ......... 704
Passwords and earlier versions of Adaptive Server .............. 705
Passwords and character sets............................................... 705
Index............................................................................................................................................ 707
xiv Adaptive Server Enterprise

About This Book
This manual, the System Administration Guide: Volume 1, describes how

to administer and control Sybase® Adaptive Server® Enterprise databases
independent of any specific database application.
Audience This manual is for Sybase system administrators and database owners.
How to use this book This guide comprises two parts: Part 1 describes basic concepts about
system administration, and includes these chapters:
• Chapter 1, “Overview of System Administration,” describes the
structure of the Sybase system.
• Chapter 2, “System and Optional Databases,” discusses the contents
and function of the Adaptive Server system databases.
• Chapter 3, “System Administration for Beginners,” summarizes
important tasks that new system administrators must perform.
• Chapter 4, “Introduction to the Adaptive Server Plug-in for Sybase
Central,” describes how to start and use Sybase Central, a graphical
user interface for managing Adaptive Server.
• Chapter 5, “Setting Configuration Parameters,” summarizes the
configuration parameters that you set with sp_configure, which
control many aspects of Adaptive Server behavior.
• Chapter 6, “Overview of Disk Resource Issues,” discusses Adaptive
Server and Backup Server™ error handling and how to shut down
servers and kill user processes.
• Chapter 7, “Initializing Database Devices,” describes how to
initialize database devices and assign devices to the default pool of
devices.
• Chapter 8, “Setting Database Options,” describes how to set database
options.
• Chapter 9, “Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and
Languages,” discusses international issues, such as the files included
in the Language Modules and how to configure an Adaptive Server
language, sort order, and character set.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xv

• Chapter 10, “Configuring Client/Server Character Set Conversions,”
discusses character set conversion between Adaptive Server and clients in
a heterogeneous environment.
• Chapter 11, “Diagnosing System Problems,” discusses Adaptive Server
and Backup Server error handling and shows how to shut down servers
and kill user processes.
Part 2, which discusses security administration, includes these chapters::
• Chapter 12, “Introduction to Security,” introduces you to security
concepts.
• Chapter 13, “Getting Started With Security Administration in Adaptive
Server,” is an overview of the security features available in Adaptive
Server.
• Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and
Client Connections,” describes how to manage Adaptive Server login
accounts and database users.
• Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers,” discusses the steps the system
administrator and system security officer of each Adaptive Server must
execute to enable remote procedure calls (RPCs).
• Chapter 16, “External Authentication,” describes the network-based
security services that enable you to authenticate users and protect data
transmitted among machines on a network.
• Chapter 17, “Managing User Permissions,” describes the use and
implementation of user permissions.
• Chapter 18, “Auditing,” describes how to set up auditing for your
installation.
• Chapter 19, “Confidentiality of Data,” describes how to configure
Adaptive Server to ensure that all data is secure and confidential.
Related documents The Adaptive Server® Enterprise documentation set consists of:
• The release bulletin for your platform – contains last-minute information
that was too late to be included in the books.
A more recent version of the release bulletin may be available. To check
for critical product or document information that was added after the
release of the product CD, use the Sybase® Product Manuals Web site.
xvi Adaptive Server Enterprise

About This Book
• The installation guide for your platform – describes installation,

upgrading, and some configuration procedures for all Adaptive Server and
related Sybase products.
• New Feature Summary – describes the new features in Adaptive Server,
the system changes added to support those features, and changes that may
affect your existing applications.
• Active Messaging Users Guide – describes how to use the Active
Messaging feature to capture transactions (data changes) in an Adaptive
Server Enterprise database, and deliver them as events to external
applications in real time.
• Component Integration Services Users Guide – explains how to use
Component Integration Services to connect remote Sybase and non-
Sybase databases.
• The Configuration Guide for your platform – provides instructions for
performing specific configuration tasks.
• Glossary – defines technical terms used in the Adaptive Server
documentation.
• Historical Server Users Guide – describes how to use Historical Server to
obtain performance information from Adaptive Server.
• Java in Adaptive Server Enterprise – describes how to install and use Java
classes as datatypes, functions, and stored procedures in the Adaptive
Server database.
• Job Scheduler Users Guide – provides instructions on how to install and
configure, and create and schedule jobs on a local or remote Adaptive
Server using the command line or a graphical user interface (GUI).
• Migration Technology Guide – describes strategies and tools for migrating
to a different version of Adaptive Server.
• Monitor Client Library Programmers Guide – describes how to write
Monitor Client Library applications that access Adaptive Server
performance data.
• Monitor Server Users Guide – describes how to use Monitor Server to
obtain performance statistics from Adaptive Server.
• Monitoring Tables Diagram – illustrates monitor tables and their entity
relationships in a poster format. Full-size available only in print version; a
compact version is available in PDF format.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xvii

• Performance and Tuning Series – is a series of books that explain how to
tune Adaptive Server for maximum performance:
• Basics – contains the basics for understanding and investigating
performance questions in Adaptive Server.
• Improving Performance with Statistical Analysis – describes how
Adaptive Server stores and displays statistics, and how to use the set
statistics command to analyze server statistics.
• Locking and Concurrency Control – describes how to use locking

schemes to improve performance, and how to select indexes to
minimize concurrency.
• Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon – discusses how to use
sp_sysmon to monitor performance.
• Monitoring Tables – describes how to query Adaptive Server

monitoring tables for statistical and diagnostic information.
• Physical Database Tuning – describes how to manage physical data
placement, space allocated for data, and the temporary databases.
• Query Processing and Abstract Plans – explains how the optimizer
processes queries, and how to use abstract plans to change some of the
optimizer plans.
• Quick Reference Guide – provides a comprehensive listing of the names
and syntax for commands, functions, system procedures, extended system
procedures, datatypes, and utilities in a pocket-sized book (regular size
when viewed in PDF format).
• Reference Manual – is a series of books that contains detailed
Transact-SQL® information:
• Building Blocks – discusses datatypes, functions, global variables,
expressions, identifiers and wildcards, and reserved words.
• Commands – documents commands.
• Procedures – describes system procedures, catalog stored procedures,
system extended stored procedures, and dbcc stored procedures.
• Tables – discusses system tables, monitor tables, and dbcc tables.
• System Administration Guide –
xviii Adaptive Server Enterprise

About This Book
• Volume 1 – provides an introduction to the basics of system

administration, including a description of configuration parameters,
resource issues, character sets, sort orders, and instructions for
diagnosing system problems. The second part of Volume 1 is an in-
depth discussion about security administration.
• Volume 2 – includes instructions and guidelines for managing
physical resources, mirroring devices, configuring memory and data
caches, managing multiprocessor servers and user databases,
mounting and unmounting databases, creating and using segments,
using the reorg command, and checking database consistency. The
second half of Volume 2 describes how to back up and restore system
and user databases.
• System Tables Diagram – illustrates system tables and their entity
relationships in a poster format. Full-size available only in print version; a
compact version is available in PDF format.
• Transact-SQL Users Guide – documents Transact-SQL, the Sybase-
enhanced version of the relational database language. This guide serves as
a textbook for beginning users of the database management system, and
also contains detailed descriptions of the pubs2 and pubs3 sample
databases.
• Troubleshooting: Error Messages Advanced Resolutions – contains
troubleshooting procedures for problems you may encounter. The
problems discussed here are the ones the Sybase Technical Support staff
hear about most often.
• Encrypted Columns Users Guide – describes how to configure and use
encrypted columns with Adaptive Server.
• In-Memory Database Users Guide – describes how to configure and use
in-memory databases.
• Using Adaptive Server Distributed Transaction Management Features –
explains how to configure, use, and troubleshoot Adaptive Server DTM
features in distributed transaction processing environments.
• Using Backup Server with IBM® Tivoli® Storage Manager – describes
how to set up and use the IBM Tivoli Storage Manager to create Adaptive
Server backups.
• Using Sybase Failover in a High Availability System – provides
instructions for using Sybase Failover to configure an Adaptive Server as
a companion server in a high availability system.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xix

• Unified Agent and Agent Management Console – describes the Unified
Agent, which provides runtime services to manage, monitor, and control
distributed Sybase resources.
• Utility Guide – documents the Adaptive Server utility programs, such as
isql and bcp, which are executed at the operating system level.
• Web Services Users Guide – explains how to configure, use, and

troubleshoot Web services for Adaptive Server.
• XA Interface Integration Guide for CICS, Encina, and TUXEDO –
provides instructions for using the Sybase DTM XA interface with
X/Open XA transaction managers.
• XML Services in Adaptive Server Enterprise – describes the Sybase native
XML processor and the Sybase Java-based XML support, introduces
XML in the database, and documents the query and mapping functions
that are available in XML services.
Other sources of Use the Sybase Getting Started CD, the SyBooks™ CD, and the Sybase
information Product Manuals Web site to learn more about your product:
• The Getting Started CD contains release bulletins and installation guides
in PDF format, and may also contain other documents or updated
information not included on the SyBooks CD. It is included with your
software. To read or print documents on the Getting Started CD, you need
Adobe Acrobat Reader, which you can download at no charge from the
Adobe Web site using a link provided on the CD.
• The SyBooks CD contains product manuals and is included with your
software. The Eclipse-based SyBooks browser allows you to access the
manuals in an easy-to-use, HTML-based format.
Some documentation may be provided in PDF format, which you can
access through the PDF directory on the SyBooks CD. To read or print the
PDF files, you need Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the SyBooks Installation Guide on the Getting Started CD, or the
README.txt file on the SyBooks CD for instructions on installing and
starting SyBooks.
• The Sybase Product Manuals Web site is an online version of the SyBooks
CD that you can access using a standard Web browser. In addition to
product manuals, you will find links to EBFs/Maintenance, Technical
Documents, Case Management, Solved Cases, newsgroups, and the
Sybase Developer Network.
xx Adaptive Server Enterprise

About This Book
To access the Sybase Product Manuals Web site, go to Product Manuals at

http://www.sybase.com/support/manuals/.
Sybase certifications Technical documentation at the Sybase Web site is updated frequently.
on the Web
❖ Finding the latest information on product certifications

1 Point your Web browser to Technical Documents at
http://www.sybase.com/support/techdocs/.
2 Click Certification Report.

3 In the Certification Report filter select a product, platform, and timeframe
and then click Go.
4 Click a Certification Report title to display the report.
❖ Finding the latest information on component certifications

1 Point your Web browser to Availability and Certification Reports at
http://certification.sybase.com/.
2 Either select the product family and product under Search by Base
Product; or select the platform and product under Search by Platform.
3 Select Search to display the availability and certification report for the
selection.
❖ Creating a personalized view of the Sybase Web site (including support

pages)
Set up a MySybase profile. MySybase is a free service that allows you to create
a personalized view of Sybase Web pages.
1 Point your Web browser to Technical Documents at
http://www.sybase.com/support/techdocs/.
2 Click MySybase and create a MySybase profile.

Sybase EBFs and
software
maintenance
❖ Finding the latest information on EBFs and software maintenance

1 Point your Web browser to the Sybase Support Page at
http://www.sybase.com/support.
2 Select EBFs/Maintenance. If prompted, enter your MySybase user name

and password.
3 Select a product.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xxi

4 Specify a time frame and click Go. A list of EBF/Maintenance releases is
displayed.
Padlock icons indicate that you do not have download authorization for
certain EBF/Maintenance releases because you are not registered as a
Technical Support Contact. If you have not registered, but have valid
information provided by your Sybase representative or through your
support contract, click Edit Roles to add the “Technical Support Contact”
role to your MySybase profile.
5 Click the Info icon to display the EBF/Maintenance report, or click the
product description to download the software.
Conventions The following sections describe conventions used in this manual.
SQL is a free-form language. There are no rules about the number of words you
can put on a line or where you must break a line. However, for readability, all
examples and most syntax statements in this manual are formatted so that each
clause of a statement begins on a new line. Clauses that have more than one part
extend to additional lines, which are indented. Complex commands are
formatted using modified Backus Naur Form (BNF) notation.
Table 1 shows the conventions for syntax statements that appear in this manual:
Table 1: Font and syntax conventions for this manual
Element Example
Command names,procedure names, utility names, and select
other keywords display in sans serif font. sp_configure
Database names and datatypes are in sans serif font. master database
Book names, file names, variables, and path names are System Administration Guide
in italics. sql.ini file
column_name
$SYBASE/ASE directory
Variables—or words that stand for values that you fill select column_name
in—when they are part of a query or statement, are in from table_name
italics in Courier font. where search_conditions
Type parentheses as part of the command. compute row_aggregate (column_name)
Double colon, equals sign indicates that the syntax is ::=
written in BNF notation. Do not type this symbol.
Indicates “is defined as”.
Curly braces mean that you must choose at least one {cash, check, credit}
of the enclosed options. Do not type the braces.
Brackets mean that to choose one or more of the [cash | check | credit]
enclosed options is optional. Do not type the brackets.
xxii Adaptive Server Enterprise

About This Book
Element Example
The comma means you may choose as many of the cash, check, credit
options shown as you want. Separate your choices
with commas as part of the command.
The pipe or vertical bar ( | ) means you may select only cash | check | credit
one of the options shown.
An ellipsis (...) means that you can repeat the last unit buy thing = price [cash | check | credit]
as many times as you like. [, thing = price [cash | check | credit]]...
You must buy at least one thing and give its price. You may
choose a method of payment: one of the items enclosed in
square brackets. You may also choose to buy additional
things: as many of them as you like. For each thing you
buy, give its name, its price, and (optionally) a method of
payment.
• Syntax statements (displaying the syntax and all options for a command)
appear as follows:
sp_dropdevice [device_name]
For a command with more options:

select column_name
from table_name
where search_conditions
In syntax statements, keywords (commands) are in normal font and
identifiers are in lowercase. Italic font shows user-supplied words.
• Examples showing the use of Transact-SQL commands are printed like
this:
select * from publishers
• Examples of output from the computer appear as follows:
pub_id pub_name city state
------- --------------------- ----------- -----
0736 New Age Books Boston MA
0877 Binnet & Hardley Washington DC
1389 Algodata Infosystems Berkeley CA
(3 rows affected)
In this manual, most of the examples are in lowercase. However, you can
disregard case when typing Transact-SQL keywords. For example, SELECT,
Select, and select are the same.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xxiii

Adaptive Server sensitivity to the case of database objects, such as table names,
depends on the sort order installed on Adaptive Server. You can change case
sensitivity for single-byte character sets by reconfiguring the Adaptive Server
sort order. For more information, see the System Administration Guide.
Accessibility This document is available in an HTML version that is specialized for
features accessibility. You can navigate the HTML with an adaptive technology such as
a screen reader, or view it with a screen enlarger.
Adaptive Server HTML documentation has been tested for compliance with
U.S. government Section 508 Accessibility requirements. Documents that
comply with Section 508 generally also meet non-U.S. accessibility guidelines,
such as the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) guidelines for Web sites.
Note You might need to configure your accessibility tool for optimal use.
Some screen readers pronounce text based on its case; for example, they
pronounce ALL UPPERCASE TEXT as initials, and MixedCase Text as
words. You might find it helpful to configure your tool to announce syntax
conventions. Consult the documentation for your tool.
For information about how Sybase supports accessibility, see Sybase

Accessibility at http://www.sybase.com/accessibility. The Sybase Accessibility
site includes links to information on Section 508 and W3C standards.
If you need help Each Sybase installation that has purchased a support contract has one or more
designated people who are authorized to contact Sybase Technical Support. If
you cannot resolve a problem using the manuals or online help, please have the
designated person contact Sybase Technical Support or the Sybase subsidiary
in your area.
xxiv Adaptive Server Enterprise

PA RT 1 Basics of System
Administration
These chapters introduce the concepts of system

administration in Adaptive Server:
• Chapter 1, “Overview of System Administration,”
describes the structure of the Sybase system.
• Chapter 2, “System and Optional Databases,”
discusses the contents and function of the Adaptive
Server system databases.
• Chapter 3, “System Administration for Beginners,”
summarizes important tasks that new system
administrators must perform.
• Chapter 4, “Introduction to the Adaptive Server Plug-in
for Sybase Central,” describes how to start and use
Sybase Central, a graphical user interface for managing
Adaptive Server.
• Chapter 5, “Setting Configuration Parameters,”
summarizes the configuration parameters that you set
with sp_configure, which control many aspects of
Adaptive Server behavior.
• Chapter 6, “Overview of Disk Resource Issues,”
describes issues relating to physical placement of
databases, tables, and indexes on disks.
• Chapter 7, “Initializing Database Devices,” describes
how to initialize database devices and assign devices to
the default pool of devices.
• Chapter 8, “Setting Database Options,” describes how
to set database options.
• Chapter 9, “Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and
Languages,” discusses international issues, such as the
files included in the Language Modules and how to
configure an Adaptive Server language, sort order, and
character set.
• Chapter 10, “Configuring Client/Server Character Set
Conversions,” discusses character set conversion between
Adaptive Server and clients in a heterogeneous
environment.
• Chapter 11, “Diagnosing System Problems,” discusses
Adaptive Server and Backup Server™ error handling and
how to shut down servers and kill user processes.
CH A PTE R 1 Overview of System
Administration
This chapter introduces the basic topics of Adaptive Server system

administration.
Topic Page
Adaptive Server administration tasks 3
System tables 9
System procedures 12
System extended stored procedures 14
Logging error messages 15
Connecting to Adaptive Server 16
Security features available in Adaptive Server 20
Adaptive Server administration tasks

Adaptive Server administration tasks include:
• Installing Adaptive Server and Backup Server
• Creating and managing Adaptive Server login accounts
• Granting roles and permissions to Adaptive Server users
• Managing and monitoring the use of disk space, memory, and
connections
• Backing up and restoring databases
• Diagnosing system problems
• Configuring Adaptive Server to achieve the best performance
In addition, system administrators may assist with certain database design
tasks that overlap with the work of application designers, such as
enforcing integrity standards.
System Administration Guide: Volume 1 3

Although generally, a system administrator concentrates on tasks that are

independent of the applications running on Adaptive Server, he or she is likely
to have the best overview of all applications. For this reason, a system
administrator can advise application designers about the data that already
exists on Adaptive Server, make recommendations about standardizing data
definitions across applications, and so on.
However, the distinction between what is specific to an application is
sometimes unclear. Owners of user databases may consult certain sections of
this book. Similarly, system administrators and database owners will use the
Transact-SQL Users Guide (especially the chapters on data definition, stored
procedures, and triggers). Both system administrators and application
designers will use the Performance and Tuning Series.
Roles required for system administration tasks

Many of the commands and procedures discussed in this manual require the
system administrator or system security officer role. Other sections in this
manual are relevant to database owners.
Various security-related, administrative, and operational tasks are grouped into
the following user roles:
• system administrator – by default, the system administrator (sa) is
assigned these roles:
• sa_role
• sso_role
• oper_role
• sybase_ts_role
The system administrator’s tasks include:

• Managing disk storage
• Monitoring the Adaptive Server automatic recovery procedure
• Fine-tuning Adaptive Server by changing configurable system
parameters
• Diagnosing and reporting system problems
• Backing up and loading databases
• Modifying and dropping server login accounts
4 Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 1 Overview of System Administration
• Granting and revoking the system administrator role

• Granting permissions to Adaptive Server users
• Creating user databases and granting ownership of them
• Setting up groups, which can be used for granting and revoking
permissions
• System security officer – performs security-related tasks, such as:
• Creating server login accounts, which includes assigning initial
passwords
• Changing the password of any account
• Granting and revoking the system security officer and operator roles
• Creating, granting, and revoking user-defined roles
• Granting the capability to impersonate another user throughout the
server
• Setting the password expiration interval
• Setting up Adaptive Server to use network-based security services
• Managing the audit system
• Operator – backs up and loads databases on a server-wide basis. The
operator role allows a single user to use the dump database, dump
transaction, load database, and load transaction commands to back up and
restore all databases on a server without having to be the owner of each
one. These operations can be performed for an individual database by the
database owner or by a system administrator. However, an operator can
perform them for any database.
These roles provide individual accountability for users performing operational
and administrative tasks. Their actions can be audited and attributed to them.
A system administrator operates outside the discretionary access control
(DAC) protection system; that is, when a system administrator accesses
objects, Adaptive Server does not check the DAC permissions.
In addition, two kinds of object owners have special status because of the
objects they own. These ownership types are:
• Database owner
• Database object owner

Database owner
The database owner is the creator of a database or someone to whom database
ownership has been transferred. A system administrator can use the grant
command to grant users the authority to create databases.
A database owner logs in to Adaptive Server using his or her assigned login
name and password, and has the “dbo” account. When this user logs in to
databases they did not create, this user is known by his or her regular user
name.
A database owner can:
• Run the system procedure sp_adduser to allow other Adaptive Server
users access to the database
• Use the grant command to give other users permission to create objects
and execute commands within the database
Adding users to databases is discussed in Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive
Server Logins, Database Users, and Client Connections.” Granting
permissions to users is discussed in Chapter 17, “Managing User
Permissions.”
The database owner does not automatically receive permissions on objects
owned by other users. However, a database owner can temporarily assume the
permissions of other users in the database at any time by using the setuser
command. Using a combination of the setuser and grant commands, the
database owner can acquire permissions on any object in the database.
Note Because the database owner role is so powerful, the system administrator
should plan carefully who should own databases in the server. The system
security officer should consider auditing the database activity of all database
owners.
Database object owner

A database object owner is a user who creates a database object. Database
objects include tables, indexes, views, defaults, triggers, rules, constraints, and
procedures. Before a user can create a database object, the database owner
must grant the user permission to create objects of a particular type. There is
no special login name or password for a database object owner.
The database object owner creates an object using the appropriate create
statement, and then grants permission to other users.

The creator of a database object is automatically granted all permissions on that

object. The system administrator also has all permissions on the object. The
owner of an object must explicitly grant permissions to other users before they
can access the object. Even the database owner cannot use an object directly
unless the object owner grants him or her the appropriate permission. However,
the database owner can always use the setuser command to impersonate any
other user in the database, including the object owner.
Note When a database object is owned by someone other than the database
owner, the user (including a system administrator) must qualify the name of
that object with the object owner’s name—ownername.objectname—to access
the object. If an object or a procedure must be accessed by a large number of
users, particularly in ad hoc queries, having these objects owned by “dbo”
greatly simplifies access.
Using isql to perform system administration tasks

This book assumes that you use the commmand line utility isql to perform the
system administration tasks described in this guide. This section provides some
basic information about using isql. For complete information, see the Utility
Guide.
You can also use the graphic tool Sybase Central™ to perform many of the
tasks described in this book, as described in “Using Sybase Central for system
administration tasks” on page 8.
Starting isql
To start isql on most platforms, type this command at an operating system
prompt, where username is the system administrator:
isql -Uusername
Adaptive Server prompts you for your password.
Note Do not use the -P option of isql to specify your password; another user
might then see your password.
You can use isql in command line mode to enter many of the Transact-SQL
examples in this manual.

Entering statements
The statements that you enter in isql can span several lines. isql does not process
statements until you type “go” on a separate line. For example:
1> select *
2> from sysobjects
3> where type = "TR"
4> go
The examples in this manual do not include the go command between
statements. If you are typing the examples, you must enter the go command to
see the sample output.
Saving and reusing statements

This manual frequently suggests that you save the Transact-SQL statements
you use to create or modify user databases and database objects. The easiest
way to do this is to create or copy the statements to an ASCII-formatted file.
You can then use the file to supply statements to isql to re-create databases or
database objects later.
The syntax for using isql with an ASCII-formatted file is the following, where
filename is the full path and file name of the file that contains Transact-SQL
statements:
isql -Uusername -ifilename
On UNIX and other platforms, use the “less than” symbol (<) to redirect the
file.
The Transact-SQL statements in the ASCII file must use valid syntax and the
go command.
When reading commands from a file, you must:

• Supply the -Ppassword option at the command line, or,
• Include the named user’s password on the first line of the input file.
Using Sybase Central for system administration tasks

You can perform many system administration tasks using Sybase Central, a
graphic tool that comes with Adaptive Server:
• Initializing database devices

• Setting configuration parameters

• Viewing the amount of free log space in a database
• Generating data definition language (DDL)
• Creating logins
• Adding remote servers
• Creating databases
• Creating stored procedures
• Defining roles
• Adding data caches
• Setting database options
• Backing up and restoring databases
Use the Monitor Viewer feature of Sybase Central to access Adaptive Server
Monitor™. Sybase Central includes extensive online help.
Use the Sybase Central DDL-generation feature to record your work to
Transact-SQL scripts. The DDL-generation feature lets you save to a script the
actions you perform in an entire server or within a specific database.
System tables
The master database contains system tables that keep track of information
about Adaptive Server. In addition, each database (including the master
database) contains system tables that keep track of information specific to that
database.
All the Adaptive Server-supplied tables in the master database (the Adaptive
Server controlling database) are considered system tables. Each user database
is created with a subset of these system tables. The system tables may also be
called the data dictionary or the system catalogs.
A master database and its tables are automatically created when Adaptive
Server is installed. The system tables in a user database are created when the
create database command is issued. The names of all system tables start with
“sys”. You cannot create tables in user databases that have the same names as
system tables. See Reference Manual: Tables for detailed descriptions of
system tables and their columns.

System tables
Querying the system tables

Query system tables in the same manner as any other tables. For example, the
following statement returns the names of all triggers in the database:
select name
from sysobjects
where type = "TR"
In addition, Adaptive Server supplies stored procedures (called system
procedures), many of which provide shortcuts for querying the system tables.
These system procedures provide information from the system tables:
• sp_commonkey • sp_helpremotelogin
• sp_configure • sp_help_resource_limit
• sp_countmedatada • sp_helprotect
• sp_dboption • sp_helpsegment
• sp_estspace • sp_helpserver
• sp_help • sp_helpsort
• sp_helpartition • sp_helptext
• sp_helpcache • sp_helpthreshold
• sp_helpconfig • sp_helpuser
• sp_helpconstraint • sp_lock
• sp_helpdb • sp_monitor
• sp_helpdevice • sp_monitorconfig
• sp_helpgroup • sp_showcontrolinfo
• sp_helpindex • sp_showexeclass
• sp_helpjava • sp_showplan
• sp_helpjoins • sp_spaceused
• sp_helpkey • sp_who
• sp_helplanguage • sp_help_resource_limit
• sp_helplog
For complete information about the system procedures, see the Reference
Manual: Procedures.

Keys in system tables

Primary, foreign, and common keys for system tables are defined in the master
and model databases. You can generate a report on defined keys by executing
sp_helpkey. For a report on columns in two system tables that are likely join
candidates, execute sp_helpjoins.
The Adaptive Server System Tables Diagram shows the relationships between
columns in the system tables.
Updating system tables

The Adaptive Server system tables contain information that is critical to the
operation of your databases. Under ordinary circumstances, you need not
perform direct data modifications to system tables.
Update system tables only when you are instructed to do so by Sybase
Technical Support, by an instruction in the Error Messaging and
Troubleshooting Guide, or in this manual.
Before you update system tables, you must issue an sp_configure command that
enables system table updates. While this command is in effect, any user with
appropriate permission can modify a system table. Other requirements for
direct changes to system tables are:
• Modify system tables only inside a transaction. Issue a begin transaction
command before you issue the data modification command.
• Verify that only the rows you wanted changed have been affected by the
command, and that the data has been changed correctly.
• If the command was incorrect, issue a rollback transaction command. If the
command was correct, issue a commit transaction command.
Warning! Some system tables should not be altered by any user under any
circumstances. Some system tables are dynamically built by system
processes, contain encoded information, or display only a portion of their
data when queried. Imprudent, ad hoc updates to certain system tables can
prevent Adaptive Server from running, make database objects
inaccessible, scramble permissions on objects, or terminate a user session.
Moreover, never attempt to alter the definition of the system tables in any
way. For example, do not alter system tables to include constraints.
Triggers, defaults, and rules are not allowed in system tables. If you create
a trigger, bind a rule, or default to a system table, you see an error message.

System procedures
System procedures
The names of all system procedures begin with “sp_”. They are located in the
sybsystemprocs database, but you can run many of them in any database by
issuing the stored procedure from the database or by qualifying the procedure
name with the database name.
Sybase-supplied system procedures (such as sp_who) are created using the
installmaster installation script. Use sp_version to determine the version of
installmaster was most recently executed. See the Reference Manual: System
Procedures for more information about sp_version.
If you execute a system procedure in a database other than sybsystemprocs, the
procedure operates on the system tables in the database from which it was
executed. For example, if the database owner of pubs2 runs sp_adduser from
pubs2 or issues the command pubs2..sp_adduser, the new user is added to
pubs2..sysusers. However, this does not apply to system procedures that update
only tables in the master database.
Permissions on system procedures are discussed in the Reference Manual:
Procedures.
Using system procedures

A parameter is an argument to a stored or system procedure. If a parameter
value for a system procedure contains reserved words, punctuation, or
embedded blanks, you must enclose it in single or double quotes. If the
parameter is an object name, and the object name is qualified by a database
name or owner name, enclode the entire name in single or double quotes.
System procedures can be invoked during a session using either chained or
unchained transaction mode. Chained mode implicitly begins a transaction
before any data retrieval or modification statement. Unchained mode requires
explicit begin transaction statements paired with commit transaction or
rollback transaction statements to complete the transaction. See Chapter 21,
“Transactions: Maintaining Data Consistency and Recovery,” in the Transact-
SQL Users Guide.
You cannot execute the system procedures that modify data in system tables in
the master database from within a transaction, since this may compromise
recovery. You cannot run system procedures that create temporary worktables
from transactions.

If no transaction is active when you execute a system procedure, Adaptive

Server turns off chained mode and sets transaction isolation level 1 for the
duration of the procedure. Before returning, the session’s chained mode and
isolation level are reset to their original settings. See Chapter 21,
“Transactions: Maintaining Data Consistency and Recovery,” in the Transact-
SQL Users Guide.
All system procedures report a return status. For example, the following means
that the procedure executed successfully:
return status = 0
If the system procedures do not execute successfully, the return status is a
number other than 0.
System procedure tables

The system procedures use several system procedure tables in the master and
sybsystemdb databases to convert internal system values (for example, status
bits) into human-readable format. One of these tables, spt_values, is used by a
variety of system procedures, including:
• sp_configure • sp_helpdevice
• sp_dboption • sp_helpindex
• sp_depends • sp_helpkey
• sp_help • sp_helprotect
• sp_helpdb • sp_lock
The spt_values table can be updated only by an upgrade; you cannot modify it.
To see how it is used, execute sp_helptext and look at the text for one of the
system procedures that references it.
The other system procedure tables are spt_monitor, spt_committab, and tables
needed by the catalog stored procedures. (The spt_committab table is located in
the sybsystemdb database.)
In addition, several system procedures create, and then drop, temporary tables.
For example, sp_helpdb creates #spdbdesc, sp_helpdevice creates #spdevtab,
and sp_helpindex creates #spindtab.

System extended stored procedures
Creating system procedures

Many system procedures are explained in this manual, in the sections where
they are relevant. For detailed reference information, see the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
System administrators can write system procedures that can be executed in any
database. Create a stored procedure in sybsystemprocs and assign it a name that
begins with “sp_”. The uid of the stored procedure must be 1, the uid of the
database owner.
Most system procedures that you create query the system tables. Sybase
recommends that you do not create stored procedures that modify the system
tables.
To create a stored procedure that modifies system tables, a system security
officer must first turn on the allow updates to system tables configuration
parameter. Any stored procedure created while this parameter is set on can
always update system tables, even when allow updates to system tables is turned
off. To create a stored procedure that updates the system tables:
1 Use sp_configure to set allow updates to system tables on.
2 Use create procedure to create the stored procedure.
3 Use sp_configure to set allow updates to system tables off.
Warning! Use caution when you modify system tables. Always test the
procedures that modify system tables in development or test databases,
rather than in your production database.
System extended stored procedures

An extended stored procedure (ESP) letes you call external language functions
from within Adaptive Server. Adaptive Server includes a set or predefined
ESPs; users can also create their own. The names of all system extended stored
procedures begin with “xp_”, and are located in the sybsystemprocs database.
One very useful system ESP is xp_cmdshell, which executes an operating
system command on the system that is running Adaptive Server.

Invoke a system ESP just like a system procedure. The difference is that a
system ESP executes procedural language code rather than Transact-SQL
statements. All ESPs are implemented by an Open Server™ application called
XP Server™, which runs on the same machine as Adaptive Server. XP Server
starts automatically on the first ESP invocation.
For information about the system ESPs provided with Adaptive Server, see the
Reference Manual: Procedures.
Creating system ESPs

Use create procedure to create a system ESP in the sybsystemprocs database.
System procedures are automatically included in the sybsystemprocs database.
The name of the ESP, and its procedural language function, must begin with
“xp_”. The uid of the stored procedure must be 1, the uid of the database owner.
For general information about creating ESPs see Chapter 17, “Using Extended
Stored Procedures,” in the Transact-SQL Users Guide.
Logging error messages

Each time it starts, Adaptive Server writes start-up information to a local error
log file. The installation program automatically sets the error log location when
you configure a new Adaptive Server. See the Configuration Guide for your
platform to learn the default location and file name of the error log.
Many error messages from Adaptive Server are written only to the user’s
terminal. However, fatal error messages (severity levels 19 and above), kernel
error messages, and informational messages from Adaptive Server are
recorded in the error log file.
Adaptive Server keeps the error log file open until you stop the server process.
Before deleting old messages to reduce the size of the error log, stop the
Adaptive Server process.
Note On some platforms, such as Windows, Adaptive Server also records error
messages in the operating system event log. See the installation guide and
configuration guide for your platform.

Connecting to Adaptive Server

Adaptive Server can communicate with other Adaptive Servers, Open Server
applications, and client software on the network. Clients can talk to one or
more servers, and servers can communicate with other servers using remote
procedure calls. For products to interact with one another, each must know
where the others reside on the network. This network service information is
stored in the interfaces file.
The interfaces file

The interfaces file is usually named interfaces, interface, or sql.ini, depending
on the operating system.
The interfaces file lists the name and address of every known server. When you
use a client program to connect to a server, the program looks up the server
name in the interfaces file and then connects to the server using the address, as
shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1: Connecting to Adaptive Server
“Connect me
to the TEST
Adaptive Server.”
interfaces
interfaces file
TEST
TEST
Adaptive Server
The name, location, and contents of the interfaces file differ between operating
systems. Also, the format of the Adaptive Server addresses in the interfaces file
differs between network protocols.

The Adaptive Server installation program creates a simple interfaces file that
you can use for local connections to Adaptive Server over one or more network
protocols. As a system administrator, modify the interfaces file and distribute
it to users so that they can connect to Adaptive Server over the network. See
the Configuration Guide for your platform for information about the interfaces
file.
See Chapter 2, “Networks and Performance” in the Performance and Tuning
Series: Basics for more information about the interfaces file and network
listeners.
Directory services
A directory service manages the creation, modification, and retrieval of
network service information. Directory services are provided by platform or
third-party vendors and must be purchased and installed separately from
Adaptive Server. Two examples of directory services are Registry and
Distributed Computing Environment (DCE).
The $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/libtcl.cfg file is a Sybase-supplied
configuration file used by servers and clients to determine:
• Which directory service to use, and
• The location of the specified directory service driver.
If no directory services are installed or listed in the libtcl.cfg file, Adaptive
Server defaults to the interfaces file for obtaining network service information.
The system administrator must modify the libtcl.cfg file as appropriate for the
operating environment.
Some directory services are specific to a given platform; others can be used on
several different platforms. Because of the platform-specific nature of
directory services, see the configuration documentation for your platform for
detailed information about configuring for directory services.

LDAP as a directory service

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is an industry standard for
accessing directory services. Directory services allow components to look up
information by a distinguished name (DN) from an LDAP server that stores
and manages server, user, and software information that is used throughout the
enterprise or over a network.
The LDAP server can be located on a different platform from the one on which
Adaptive Server or the clients are running. LDAP defines the communication
protocol and the contents of messages exchanged between clients and servers.
Messages are operators, such as client requests for read, write and query, and
server responses, including metadata (data about data).
The LDAP server can store and retrieve information about:
• Adaptive Server, such as IP address, port number, and network protocol
• Security mechanisms and filters
• High availability companion server name
• Authentication information for user access to Adaptive Server
You can authenticate users logging in to Adaptive Server through
information stored in the syslogins directory or through a centralized
LDAP server that enables a single login and password throughout the
enterprise. See Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database
Users, and Client Connections.”
You can configure the LDAP server to use these access restrictions:
• Anonymous authentication – all data is visible to any user.
• User name and password authentication – Adaptive Server uses the default
user name and password from the appropriate file:
• UNIX, 32-bit – $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/libtcl.cfg
• UNIX, 64-bit – $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/libtcl64.cfg
• Windows – %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%\ini\libtcl.cfg

User name and password authentication properties establish and end a session
connection to an LDAP server.
Note The default user name and password stored in libtcl.cfg and passed to the
LDAP server for authentication purposes are distinct and different from those
used to access Adaptive Server. The default user name and password allow
access to the LDAP server for administrative tasks.
When an LDAP server is specified in the libtcl.cfg or libtcl64.cfg file

(collectively called libtcl*.cfg file), the server information is then accessible
only from the LDAP server; Adaptive Server ignores the interfaces file.
If multiple directory services are supported in a server, the order in which they
are searched is specified in libtcl*.cfg. You cannot use the dataserver command
line option to specify the search order.
Multiple directory services

Any type of LDAP service, whether it is an actual server or a gateway to other
LDAP services, is called an LDAP server.
You can specify multiple directory services for high-availability failover
protection in libtcl*.cfg. Not every directory service in the list must be an
LDAP server.
In the following example, if the connection to test:389 fails, the connection
fails over to the DCE driver with the specified directory information tree (DIT)
base. If this also fails, a connection to the LDAP server on huey:11389 is
attempted. Different vendors employ different DIT base formats.
[DIRECTORY]
ldap=libdldap.so ldap://test:389/dc=sybase,dc=com
dce=libddce.so ditbase=/.:/subsys/sybase/dataservers
ldap=libdldap.so ldap://huey:11389/dc=sybase,dc=com
See the Open Client Client-Library/C Programmer’s Guide and the Open
Client Client-Library/C Reference Manual.
LDAP directory services versus the Sybase interfaces file

The LDAP driver implements directory services for use with an LDAP server.
The LDAP infrastructure provides:
• A network-based alternative to the traditional Sybase interfaces file

Security features available in Adaptive Server
• A single, hierarchical view of information, including users, software,

resources, networks, files, and so on
Table 1-1 highlights the differences between the Sybase interfaces file and an
LDAP server.
Table 1-1: interfaces file versus LDAP directory services
interfaces file Directory services
Platform-specific Platform-independent
Specific to each Sybase installation Centralized and hierarchical
Contains separate master and query entries One entry for each server that is accessed by both clients and servers
Cannot store metadata about the server Stores metadata about the server
Performance
Performance when using an LDAP server may be slower than when using an
interfaces file because the LDAP server requires time to make a network
connection and retrieve data. Since this connection is made when Adaptive
Server is started, changes in performance are seen at login time, if at all. During
normal system load, the delay should not be noticeable. During high system
load with many connections, especially repeated connections with short
duration, the overall performance difference of using an LDAP server versus
the traditional interfaces file might be noticeable.

Table 1-2 summarizes the major security features that are available for
Adaptive Server. For information about configuring Adaptive Server for
security, see Part 2 of this manual.
Table 1-2: Major security features
Security feature Description Where
Identification and Ensures that only authorized users can log in to the system. “Identification and
authentication controls In addition to password-based login authentication, authentication” on page
Adaptive Server supports external authentication using 391
Kerberos, LDAP, or pluggable authentication modules
(PAM).
Discretionary access Provides access controls that let object owners restrict “Discretionary access
controls (DAC) access to objects, usually with the grant and revoke control” on page 392
commands. This type of control is dependent upon an object
owner’s discretion.

Security feature Description Where

Division of roles Allows an administrator to grant privileged roles to “Division of roles” on
specified users so only designated users can perform certain page 393
tasks. Adaptive Server has predefined roles, called “system
roles,” such as system administrator and system security
officer. In addition, Adaptive Server allows system security
officers to define additional roles, called “user-defined
roles.”
Accountability Provides the ability to audit events such as logins, logouts, “Auditing for
server start operations, remote procedure calls, accesses to accountability” on page
database objects, and all actions performed by a specific 394
user or with a particular role active. Adaptive Server also
provides a single option to audit a set of server-wide,
security-relevant events.
Confidentiality of data Maintains a confidentiality of data using encryption for “Confidentiality of data”
client/server communication, available with Kerberos or on page 395
secure sockets layer (SSL). Inactive data is kept confidential
with password-protected database backup.


CH A PTE R 2 System and Optional Databases
This chapter describes the system databases that reside on all Adaptive
Server systems. It also describes optional Sybase-supplied databases that
you can install, and the sybdiag database, which Sybase Technical Support
may install for diagnostic purposes.
Topic Page
Overview of system databases 23
master database 25
model database 27
sybsystemprocs database 28
tempdb database 28
sybsecurity database 30
sybsystemdb database 30
Chapter , “sybmgmtdb database,” 31
pubs2 and pubs3 sample databases 31
dbccdb database 32
sybdiag database 32
Overview of system databases

A default installation of Adaptive Server includes these system databases:
• The master database
• The model database
• The system procedure database, sybsystemprocs
• The two-phase commit transaction database, sybsystemdb
• The temporary database, tempdb
Optionally, you can install:
• The auditing database, sybsecurity

Overview of system databases
• The sample databases, pubs2 and pubs3

• The dbcc database, dbccdb
• The Job Scheduler database, sybmgmtdb
For information about installing the master, model, sybsystemprocs, tempdb,
and sybmgmtdb databases, see the installation guide for your platform. For
information on installing dbccdb, Chapter 10, “Checking Database
Consistency,” in the System Administration Guide: Volume 2. For information
about using Job Scheduler, see the Job Scheduler Users Guide.
The master, model, sybsystemdb, and temporary databases reside on the master
device which is named during installation. The master database is contained
entirely on the master device and cannot be expanded onto any other device.
Create all other databases and user objects on other devices.
Warning! Do not store user databases on the master device; doing so makes it
difficult to recover both the system databases and any user databases stored on
the master device.
Install the sybsecurity and sybmgmtdb databases on their own devices and
segment. See the installation documentation for your platform.
Install the sybsystemprocs database on a device of your choice. You may want
to modify the installation scripts for pubs2 and pubs3 to share the device you
create for sybsystemprocs.
Use the installjsdb script (located in $SYBASE/ASE-15_0/scripts) to install the
sybmgmtdb database. installjsdb looks for a device named sybmgmtdev on
which to create the sybmgmtdb database and its accompanying tables and
stored procedures. If the sybmgmtdb database already exists, installjsdb creates
the Job Scheduler tables and stored procedures in the existing database. If
installjsdb cannot find either a sybmgmtdev device or a sybmgmtdb database, it
creates sybmgmtdb on the master device. However, Sybase strongly
recommends that you remove the sybmgmtdb database from the master device.
The installpubs2 and the installpubs3 scripts do not specify a device in their
create database statement, so they are created on the default device. During
installation, the master device is the default device. To change this, either edit
the scripts or follow the instructions in Chapter 7, “Initializing Database
Devices.”

CHAPTER 2 System and Optional Databases
master database
The master database controls the operation of Adaptive Server and stores
information about all user databases and their associated database devices.
Table 2-1 describes the information that the master database stores.
Table 2-1: Information the master database stores
Information System table
User accounts syslogins
Remote user accounts sysremotelogins
Remote servers that this server can interact with sysservers
Ongoing processes sysprocesses
Configurable environment variables sysconfigures
System error messages sysmessages
Databases on Adaptive Server sysdatabases
Storage space allocated to each database sysusages
Tapes and disks mounted on the system sysdevices
Active locks syslocks
Character sets syscharsets
Languages syslanguages
Users who hold server-wide roles sysloginroles
Server roles syssrvroles
Adaptive Server engines that are online sysengines
Because the master database stores information about user databases and
devices, you must be in the master database to issue the create database, alter
database, disk init, disk refit, disk reinit, and disk mirroring commands.
The minimum size of your master database depends on your server's logical
page size. The master database must contain at least 6656 logical pages, so its
minimum physical size for each logical page size is:
• 2K page – 13MB
• 16K page – 104MB

master database
Controlling object creation in master

When you install Adaptive Server, only a system administrator can create
objects in the master database, because the system administrator implicitly
becomes “dbo” of any database he or she uses. Any objects created on the
master database should be used only for system administration. Set
permissions in master so that most users cannot create objects there.
Warning! Do not place user objects in master. Storing user objects in master
causes the transaction log to fill quickly. If the transaction log runs out of space
completely, you cannot use dump transaction commands to free space in
master.
You may also want to use sp_modifylogin to change the default database for
users (the database to which a user is connected when he or she logs in). See
“Adding users to databases” on page 402.
Create any system procedures in the sybsystemprocs database rather than in
master.
Backing up master and keeping copies of system tables

To be prepared for hardware or software failure on Adaptive Server:
• Perform frequent backups of the master database and all user databases.
See “Keep up-to-date backups of master” on page 42, and Chapter 13,
“Restoring the System Databases,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.
• Keep a copy (preferably offline) of these system tables: sysusages,
sysdatabases, sysdevices, sysloginroles, and syslogins. See “Keep offline
copies of system tables” on page 42. If you have copies of these scripts,
and a hard-disk failure or other disaster makes your database unusable,
you can use the recovery procedures described in Chapter 13, “Restoring
the System Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2. If you
do not have current copies of your scripts, it is much more difficult to
recover Adaptive Server when the master database is damaged.

model database
Adaptive Server includes the model database, which provides a template, or
prototype, for new user databases. Each time a user enters the create database
command, Adaptive Server makes a copy of the model database and extends
the new database to the size specified by the create database command.
Note New databases must be at least as large as the model database.
The model database contains the required system tables for each user database.
You can modify model to customize the structure of newly created databases—
everything you do to model is reflected in each new database. Some of the
changes that system administrators commonly make to model are:
• Adding user-defined datatypes, rules, or defaults.
• Adding users who need access to all databases on Adaptive Server.
• Granting default privileges, particularly for “guest” accounts.
• Setting database options such as select into/bulkcopy/pllsort. These settings
are reflected in all new databases. The default settings for these options in
model is off. See Chapter 8, “Setting Database Options.”
Typically, most users do not have permission to modify the model database.
There is not much point in granting read permission either, since Adaptive
Server copies its entire contents into each new user database.
The model database cannot be larger than tempdb. By default, the size of model
is six allocation units (an allocation unit is 256 logical pages.). You see error
message if you increase the size of model without making tempdb at least as
large.
Note Keep a backup copy of the model database, and back up model with dump
database each time you change it. In case of media failure, restore model as you
would a user database.

sybsystemprocs database
sybsystemprocs database
Sybase system procedures are stored in the database sybsystemprocs. When a
user in any database executes a system stored procedure (that is, a procedure
whose name begins with sp_), Adaptive Server first looks for that procedure in
the user’s current database. If there is no procedure there with that name,
Adaptive Server looks for it in sybsystemprocs. If there is no procedure in
sybsystemprocs, Adaptive Server looks for the procedure in master.
If the procedure modifies system tables (for example, sp_adduser modifies the
sysusers table), the changes are made in the database from which the procedure
was executed.
To change the default permissions on system procedures, modify those
permissions in sybsystemprocs.
Note Any time you make changes to sybsystemprocs, back up the database.
tempdb database
Adaptive Server has a temporary database, tempdb, that provides a storage
area for temporary tables and other temporary working storage needs. The
space in tempdb is shared among all users of all databases on the server.
The default size of tempdb depends on the logical page size for your server, 2,
4, 8, or 16K. Certain activities may make it necessary for you to increase the
size of tempdb:
• Large temporary tables.
• A lot of activity on temporary tables, which fills up the tempdb logs.
• Large or many simultaneous sorts. Subqueries and aggregates with group
by also cause some tempdb activity.
Use alter database to increase the size of tempdb. tempdb is initially created on
the master device. You can add space to tempdb from the master device or from
any other database device.
If you run update index statistics against large tables, the command fails with
error number 1105 if tempdb is not large enough.

You can create and manage multiple temporary databases in addition to the
system temporary database, tempdb. Multiple temporary databases reduce
contention on system catalogs and logs in tempdb.
Creating temporary tables

No special permissions are required to create temporary tables or to execute
commands that may require storage space in the temporary database.
Create temporary tables either by preceding the table name in a create table
statement with a pound sign (#), or by specifying the name prefix “tempdb..”.
Temporary tables created with a pound sign are accessible only by the current
Adaptive Server session: users on other sessions cannot access them. These
nonsharable, temporary tables are destroyed at the end of each session. The
first 13 bytes of the table’s name, including the pound sign (#), must be unique.
Adaptive Server assigns the names of such tables a 17-byte number suffix.
(You can see the suffix by querying tempdb..sysobjects.)
Temporary tables created with the “tempdb..” prefix are stored in tempdb and
can be shared among Adaptive Server sessions. Adaptive Server does not
change the names of temporary tables created this way. The table exists either
until you restart Adaptive Server or until its owner drops it using drop table.
System procedures work on temporary tables, but only if you use them from
tempdb.
If a stored procedure creates temporary tables, the tables are dropped when the
procedure exits. You can also explicitly drop temporary tables before a session
ends.
Warning! Do not create temporary tables with the “tempdb..” prefix from
inside a stored procedure unless you intend to share those tables among other
users and sessions.
Each time you restart Adaptive Server, it copies model to tempdb, which clears
the database. You cannot recover temporary tables.

sybsecurity database
sybsecurity database
The sybsecurity database, which contains the auditing system for Adaptive
Server, includes :
• The system tables, sysaudits_01, sysaudits_02, ... sysaudits_08, which
contain the audit trail
• The sysauditoptions table, which contains rows describing the global audit
options
• All other default system tables that are derived from model
See Chapter 18, “Auditing.”
sybsystemdb database
The sybsystemdb database stores information about distributed transactions.
Adaptive Server versions 12.0 and later can provide transaction coordination
services for transactions that are propagated to remote servers using remote
procedure calls (RPCs) or Component Integration System (CIS). Information
about remote servers participating in distributed transactions is stored in the
syscoordinations table.
Note Distributed transaction management (DTM) services are available in

Adaptive Server version 12.0 and later as a separately licensed feature. You
must purchase and install a Distributed Transaction Management license
before you can use DTM services. See Using Adaptive Server Distributed
Transaction Management Features and the installation guide.
The sybsystemdb database also stores information about SYB2PC transactions

that use the Sybase two-phase commit protocol. The spt_committab table,
which stores information about and tracks the completion status of each two-
phase commit transaction, is stored in the sybsystemdb database.
See the Configuration Guide for your platform for information about two-
phase commit transactions and how to create the sybsystemdb database.

sybmgmtdb database
The sybmgmtdb database stores jobs, schedules, scheduled jobs information,
and data the internal Job Scheduler task needs for processing. sybmgmtdb also
maintains the output and results from these executed tasks. See the Job
Scheduler Users Guide.
pubs2 and pubs3 sample databases

Installing the pubs2 and pubs3 sample databases is optional. These databases
are provided as a learning tool for Adaptive Server. The pubs2 sample database
is used for most of the examples in the Adaptive Server documentation, except
for examples, where noted, that use the pubs3 database. For information about
installing pubs2 and pubs3, see the installation guide for your platform. For
information about the contents of these sample databases, see the Transact-
SQL Users Guide.
Maintaining the sample databases

The sample databases include a “guest” user login that allows access to the
database by any authorized Adaptive Server user. The “guest” login has been
given a wide range of privileges in pubs2 and pubs3, including permissions to
select, insert, update, and delete user tables. See Chapter 14, “Managing
Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and Client Connections.”
The size of the pubs2 and pubs3 databases are determined by the size of the
logical page size for your server; 2, 4, 8, and 16K. If possible, give each new
user a clean copy of pubs2 and pubs3 so that she or he is not confused by other
users’ changes. To place pubs2 or pubs3 on a specific database device, edit the
installation script before installing the database.
If space is a problem, instruct users to issue the begin transaction command
before updating a sample database. After the user has finished updating one of
the sample databases, he or she can issue the rollback transaction command to
undo the changes.

dbccdb database
pubs2 image data

Adaptive Server includes a script for installing image data in the pubs2
database (pubs3 does not use the image data). The image data consists of six
pictures, two each in PICT, TIF, and Sun raster file formats. Sybase does not
provide any tools for displaying image data. You must use the appropriate
screen graphics tools to display the images after you extract them from the
database.
See the installation documentation for your platform for information about
installing the image data in pubs2.
dbccdb database
dbcc checkstorage records configuration information for the target database,
operation activity, and the results of the operation in the dbccdb database.
Stored in the database are dbcc stored procedures for creating and maintaining
dbccdb and for generating reports on the results of dbcc checkstorage
operations. See Chapter 10, “Checking Database Consistency,” in the System
Administration Guide: Volume 2.
sybdiag database
Sybase Technical Support may create the sybdiag database on your system for
debugging purposes. This database holds diagnostic configuration data, and
should not be used by customers.
Determining the version of the installation scripts

sp_version lets you determine the current version of the scripts (installmaster,
installdbccdb, and so on) installed on Adaptive Server, whether they ran
successfully or not, and the length of time they took to complete.
The syntax for sp_version is:
sp_version [script_file [, “all”]]

where:
• script_file is the name of the installation script (the default value is
NULL).
• all reports details about each script, such as the date executed, and the
length of time for execution.
If you run sp_version without any parameters, it reports on all scripts.
This example describes what installation scripts were run, what time they were
run, and what time they finished:
sp_version null, ‘all’
Script Version
Status
----------- ------------------------------------------------------------
-----------
installmaster 15.0/EBF XXXXX/B/Sun_svr4/OS 5.8/asemain/1/32-bit/OPT/Thu Sep
23 22:12:12 2004
Complete [Started=Sep 24 2004 3:39PM]-[Completed=Sep 24 2004 3:45PM

Determining the version of the installation scripts

CH A PTE R 3 System Administration for
Beginners
This chapter:
• Introduces new system administrators to important topics
• Helps system administrators find information in the Sybase
documentation
Experienced administrators may also find this chapter useful for
organizing ongoing maintenance activities.
Topic Page
Logical page sizes 35
Using “test” servers 36
Considerations when installing Sybase products 37
Allocating physical resources 39
Backup and recovery 41
Ongoing maintenance and troubleshooting 44
Keeping records 45
Additional resources 48
Logical page sizes

Database objects are built with logical pages. A databases and any of its
related objects must use the same logical page size. That is, you cannot
create a server that uses more than one logical page size. Adaptive Server
allows you to create master devices and databases with logical page sizes
of 2K, 4K, 8K, or 16K, but a given server installation can use only one of
these four logical page sizes. All databases in a server—and all objects in
every database—use the same logical page size. For example, all the
pages on a server with a logical page size of 4K must be 4K, even though
you may not use some pages beyond the initial 2K.
Select the page size when you create the master device with dataserver -z.

Using “test” servers
For more information about the dataserver command, which is the command
used to create the master device, see the Utility Guide. For more information
about logical page sizes, see Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System
Using “test” servers

Sybase suggests that you install and use a test or development Adaptive Server,
then remove it before you create the production server. Using a test server
makes it easier to plan and test different configurations and less stressful to
recover from mistakes. It is much easier to learn how to install and administer
new features when there is no risk of having to restart a production server or
re-create a production database.
If you use a test server, Sybase suggests that you do so from the point of
installing or upgrading Adaptive Server through the process of configuring the
server. It is in these steps that you make some of the most important decisions
about your final production system. The following sections describe how using
a test server can help system administrators.
Planning resources
Using a test server helps you plan the final resource requirements for your
system and helps you discover resource deficiencies that you might not have
anticipated.
In particular, disk resources can have a dramatic effect on the final design of
the production system. For example, you may decide that, in the event of a
media failure, a particular database requires nonstop recovery. This means you
must configure one or more additional database devices to mirror the critical
database. Discovering these resource requirements in a test server allows you
to change the physical layout of databases and tables without affecting
database users.
Use a test server to benchmark both Adaptive Server and your applications
using different hardware configurations. This allows you to determine the
optimal setup for physical resources at both the Adaptive Server level and the
operating system level before bringing the entire system online for general use.

CHAPTER 3 System Administration for Beginners
Achieving performance goals

Most performance objectives can be met only by carefully planning a
database’s design and configuration. For example, you may discover that the
insert and I/O performance of a particular table causes a bottleneck. In this
case, the best course of action may be to re-create the table on a dedicated
segment and partition the table. Changes of this nature are disruptive to a
production system; even changing a configuration parameter may require you
to restart Adaptive Server.
Considerations when installing Sybase products

The responsibility for installing Adaptive Server and other Sybase products is
sometimes placed with the system administrator. If installation is one of your
responsibilities, use the following pointers to help you in the process.
Check product compatibility

Before installing new products or upgrading existing products, always read the
release bulletin included with the products to understand any compatibility
issues that might affect your system. Compatibility problems can occur
between hardware and software and between different release levels of the
same software. Reading the release bulletin in advance can save the time and
guesswork of troubleshooting known compatibility problems. Pay particular
attention to the lists of known problems that are included in the release bulletin.
Install or upgrade Adaptive Server

Read through the installation guide for your platform before you begin a new
installation or upgrade. You may also want to consult with the operating system
administrator to discuss operating system requirements for Adaptive Server.
These requirements can include the configuration of memory, raw devices,
asynchronous I/O, and other features, depending on the platform you use.
Many of these tasks must be completed before you begin the installation.

Considerations when installing Sybase products
If you are upgrading a server, back up all data (including the master database,
user databases, triggers, and system procedures) offline before you begin. After
upgrading, immediately create a separate, full backup of your data, especially
if there are incompatibilities between older dump files and the newer versions.
Install additional third-party software

Adaptive Server generally includes support for the network protocols that are
common to your hardware platform. If your network supports additional
protocols, install the required protocol support.
As an alternative to the Sybase interfaces file, you can use a directory service
to obtain a server’s address and other network information. Directory services
are provided by platform or third-party vendors and must be purchased and
installed separately from the installation of Adaptive Server. See also
“Directory services” on page 17 and the Configuration Guide for your
platform for a list of the directory services that Adaptive Server currently
supports.
Configure and test client connections

A successful client connection depends on the coordination of Adaptive
Server, the client software, and network products. If you are using one of the
network protocols installed with Adaptive Server, see the Configuration Guide
for your platform for information about testing network connections. If you are
using a different network protocol, follow the instructions that are included
with the network product. You can also use “ping” utilities that are included
with Sybase connectivity products to test client connections with Adaptive
Server. For a general description of how clients connect to Adaptive Server, see
“Connecting to Adaptive Server” on page 16. For details about the name and
contents of the interfaces file, see the Configuration Guide for your platform

Allocating physical resources

Allocating physical resources is providing Adaptive Server the memory, disk
space, worker processes, and CPU power required to achieve your
performance and recovery goals. When installing a new server, every system
administrator must make decisions about resource utilization. If you upgrade
your platform, or if the design of your database system changes, you must also
reallocate Adaptive Server resources by adding new memory, disk controllers,
or CPUs. Early benchmarking of Adaptive Server and your applications can
help you identify hardware resource deficiencies that create performance
bottlenecks.
See Chapter 16, “Overview of Disk Resources” in Volume 2 of the System
Administration Guide: Volume 2 to understand the kinds of disk resources
required by Adaptive Server. See also see Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,”
in System Administration Guide: Volume 2 and Chapter 5, Managing
Mulitprocessor Servers,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2 for
information about memory and CPU resources.
The following sections provide helpful pointers in determining physical
resource requirements.
Dedicated versus shared servers

The first step in planning Adaptive Server resources to understand the
resources required by other applications running on the same machine.
Generally, system administrators dedicate an entire machine for Adaptive
Server use, which means that only the operating system and network software
consume resources that might otherwise be reserved for Adaptive Server. On a
shared system, other applications, such as Adaptive Server client programs or
print servers, run on the same machine as Adaptive Server. It can be difficult
to calculate the resources available to Adaptive Server on a shared system,
because the types of applications and their pattern of use may change over
time.
It is the system administrator’s responsibility to take into account the resources
used by operating systems, client programs, windowing systems, and so forth
when configuring resources for Adaptive Server. Configure Adaptive Server to
use only the resources that are available to it. Otherwise, the server may
perform poorly or fail to start.

Allocating physical resources
Decision-support and OLTP applications

Adaptive Server contains many features that optimize performance for OLTP,
decision-support, and mixed-workload environments. However, to make
optimal use of these features, determine in advance the requirements of your
system’s applications.
For mixed-workload systems, list the individual tables that you anticipate will
be most heavily used for each type of application; this can help you achieve
maximum performance for applications.
Advance resource planning

It is extremely important that you understand and plan resource usage in
advance. In the case of disk resources, for example, after you initialize and
allocate a device to Adaptive Server, that device cannot be used for any other
purpose (even if Adaptive Server never fills the device with data). Likewise,
Adaptive Server automatically reserves the memory for which it is configured,
and this memory cannot be used by any other application.
When planning resource usage:
• For recovery purposes, always place a database’s transaction log on a
separate physical device from its data. See Chapter 6, “Creating and
Managing User Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
• Consider mirroring devices that store mission-critical data. See Chapter 2,
“Mirroring Database Devices,” in System Administration Guide: Volume
2. If your operating system supports these features, consider using disk
arrays and disk mirroring for Adaptive Server data.
• If you are working with a test Adaptive Server, for convenience, you may
find it easier to initialize database devices as operating system files, rather
than raw devices. Adaptive Server supports either raw partitions or
certified file systems for its devices.
• Changing configuration options can affect the way Adaptive Server
consumes physical resources, especially memory. See Chapter 5, “Setting
Configuration Parameters,” for details about the amount of memory used
by individual parameters.

Operating system configuration

Once you have determined the resources that are available to Adaptive Server
and the resources you require, configure these physical resources at the
operating system level:
• If you are using raw partitions, initialize the raw devices to the sizes
required by Adaptive Server. If you initialize a raw device for Adaptive
Server, you cannot use that device for any other purpose (for example, to
store operating system files). Ask your operating system administrator for
assistance in initializing and configuring raw devices to the required sizes.
• Configure the number of network connections. Make sure that the
machine on which Adaptive Server runs can actually support the number
of connections you configure. See your operating system documentation.
• Additional configuration may be required for your operating system and
the applications that you use. Read the installation guide for your platform.
Also read your client software documentation or consult with your
engineers to understand the operating system requirements for your
applications.
Backup and recovery

Making regular backups of your databases is crucial to the integrity of your
database system. Although Adaptive Server automatically recovers from
system crashes (for example, power outages) or server failures, only you can
recover from data loss caused by media failure.
The following chapters, from the System Adminstration Guide: Volume 2,
describe how to develop and implement a backup and recovery plan:
• Chapter 11, “Developing a Backup and Recovery Plan”
• Chapter 12, “Backing Upa and Restoring User Databases”
• Chapter 13, “Restoring the System Databases”
• Chapter 16, “Managing Free Space with Thresholds”

Backup and recovery
Keep up-to-date backups of master

Backing up the master database is the most crucial element of any backup and
recovery plan. The master database contains details about the structure of your
entire database system. Its stores information about the Adaptive Server
databases, devices, and device fragments that make up those databases.
Because Adaptive Server needs this information for recovery, it is crucial that
you maintain an up-to-date backup copy of the master database at all times.
To ensure that your backup of master is always up to date, back up the database
after each command or procedure that affects disks, storage, databases, or
segments, including:
• Creating or deleting databases
• Initializing new database devices
• Adding new dump devices
• Using any device mirroring command
• Creating or dropping system stored procedures, if they are stored in master
• Creating, dropping, or modifying a segment
• Adding new Adaptive Server logins
To back up master to a tape device, start isql and enter the command:
dump database master to "tape_device"
where tape_device is the name of the tape device (for example, /dev/rmt0).
Keep offline copies of system tables

In addition to backing up master regularly, keep offline copies of these system
tables: sysdatabases, sysdevices, sysusages, sysloginroles, and syslogins. Use
the bcp utility described in the Utility Guide and store a printed copy of the
contents of each system table. Create a printed copy by printing the output of:
select * from sysusages order by vstart
select * from sysdatabases
select * from sysdevices
select * from sysloginroles
select * from syslogins
If you have copies of these tables, and a hard-disk failure or other disaster
makes your database unusable, you can use the recovery procedures described
in Chapter 13, “Restoring the System Databases,” in System Administration
Guide: Volume 2.

Also keep copies of all data definition language (DDL) scripts for user objects,
as described under “Keeping records” on page 45.
Automate backup procedures

Creating an automated backup procedure makes the process easier and quicker
to perform. Automating backups can be as simple as using an operating system
script or a utility (for example, the UNIX cron utility) to perform the necessary
backup commands. Or you can automate the procedure further by using
thresholds, which are discussed in Chapter 16, “Managing Free Space with
Thresholds,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2 .
❖ Creating an automated backup procedure

Although the commands required to create an automated script vary, depending
on the operating system you use, all scripts should accomplish the same basic
steps:
1 Start isql and dump the transaction log to a holding area (for example, a
temporary file).
2 Rename the dump file to a name that contains the dump date, time, and
database name.
3 In a history file, record information about the new backup.
4 In a separate file, record any errors that occurred during the dump.
5 Automatically send mail to the system administrator for any error
conditions.
Verify data consistency before backing up a database

Your database backups must be consistent and accurate, especially for master.
If you back up a database that contains internal errors, the errors persist in a
restored version of the database.
Use the dbcc commands to check a database for errors before backing it up.
Always use dbcc commands to verify the integrity of a database before
dumping it. If dbcc detects errors, correct them before dumping the database.

Ongoing maintenance and troubleshooting
Over time, if you discover few or no errors while running dbcc, you may decide
that the risk of database corruption is small and that you need to run dbcc only
occasionally. If the consequences of losing data are too high, continue to run
dbcc commands each time you back up a database.
Note For performance considerations, many sites choose to run dbcc checks
outside of peak hours or on separate servers.
See Chapter 10, “Checking Database Consistency,” in the System

Monitor the log size

When the transaction log becomes nearly full, it may be impossible to use
standard procedures to dump transactions and reclaim space. The system
administrator should monitor the log size and perform regular transaction log
dumps (in addition to regular database dumps) to avoid this situation. Set up a
threshold stored procedure that notifies you (or dumps the log) when the log
reaches a certain capacity. See Chapter 16, “Managing Free Space with
Thresholds,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2. Sybase also suggests
that, to shorten the time required to dump and load the database, dump the
transaction log immediately prior to performing a full database dump.
You can also monitor the space used in the log segment manually using
sp_helpsegment, as described under Chapter 8, “Creating and Using Segments in
System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
Ongoing maintenance and troubleshooting

In addition to making regularly scheduled backups, the system administrator
performs the maintenance activities throughout the life of a server discussed in
this section.

Starting and stopping Adaptive Server

Most system administrators automate the procedure for starting Adaptive
Server to coincide with the start-up of the server machine. Do this by editing
operating system start-up scripts, or by using other operating system
procedures. See the configuration documentation for your platform to
determine how to start and stop Adaptive Server.
Viewing and pruning the error log

Examine the contents of the error log on a regular basis to determine whether
serious errors have occurred. You can also use operating system scripts to scan
the error log for particular messages and to automatically notify the system
administrator when specific errors occur. Checking the error log regularly may
help determine whether there are continuing problems of the same nature, or
whether a particular database device is likely to fail. See Chapter 11,
“Diagnosing System Problems,” for more information about error messages
and their severity.
The error log file can grow large over time, since Adaptive Server appends
informational and status messages to it each time it starts. You can periodically
“prune” the log file by opening the file and deleting old records. Keeping the
log file to a manageable size saves disk space and makes it easier to locate
current errors.
Keeping records
Keeping records about your Adaptive Server system is an important part of
your job as a system administrator. Accurate records of changes and problems
that you have encountered can be a valuable reference when you are contacting
Sybase Technical Support or recovering databases. They can also provide vital
information for administrators who manage the Adaptive Server system in
your absence.

Keeping records
Contact information
Maintain a list of contact information for yourself as well as the System
Security Officer, Operator, and database owners on your system. Also, record
secondary contacts for each role. Make this information available to all
Adaptive Server users so that the appropriate contacts receive enhancement
requests and problem reports.
Configuration information
Ideally, create databases and database objects, and configure Adaptive Server
using script files that you store in a safe place. Storing the script files makes it
possible to re-create your entire system in the event of a disaster. You can also
use script files to quickly re-create database systems for evaluation purposes on
new hardware platforms. If you use a third-party tool to perform system
administration, remember to generate equivalent scripts after performing
administration tasks.
Consider recording the following kinds of information:
• Commands used to create databases and database objects (DDL scripts)
• Commands that add new Adaptive Server logins and database users
• The current Adaptive Server configuration file, as described in “Using
sp_configure with a configuration file” on page 69
• The names, locations, and sizes of all files and raw devices initialized as
database devices
Maintain a dated log of all changes to the Adaptive Server configuration. Mark
each change with a brief description of when and why you made the change, as
well a summary of the end result.
Maintenance schedules
Keep a calendar of regularly scheduled maintenance activities; list any of the
procedures you perform at your site:
• Using dbcc to check database consistency
• Backing up user and system databases
• Monitoring the space left in transaction logs (if this is not done
automatically)

• Dumping the transaction log

• Examining the error log contents for Adaptive Server, Backup Server, and
Adaptive Server Monitor
• Running the update statistics command (see Chapter 1, “Using the set
statistics Commands,” in Performance and Tuning Series: Improving
Performance with Statistical Analysis)
• Examining auditing information, if the auditing option is installed
• Recompiling stored procedures
• Monitoring resource utilization of the server machine
System information
Record information about the hardware and operating system on which you run
Adaptive Server, including:
• Copies of operating system configuration files or start-up files
• Copies of network configuration files (for example, the hosts and services
files)
• Names and permissions for the Adaptive Server executable files and
database devices
• Names and locations of the tape devices used for backups
• Copies of operating system scripts or programs for automated backups,
starting Adaptive Server, or performing other administration activities
Disaster recovery plan

Consolidate the basic backup and recovery procedures, the guidelines in
“Backup and recovery” on page 41, and your personal experiences in
recovering data into a concise list of recovery steps tailored to your system.
This can be useful to both yourself and to other system administrators who may
need to recover a production system in the event of an emergency.

Additional resources
Additional resources
The amount of information for system administrators to learn may seem
overwhelming. There are several software tools that can help you learn and
facilitate basic administration tasks. These include Adaptive Server Monitor,
used for monitoring server performance and other activities, and Sybase
Central, which simplifies many administration tasks. There are also many
third-party software packages available designed to help system administrators
manage daily maintenance activities.

CH A PTE R 4 Introduction to the Adaptive
Server Plug-in for Sybase Central
This chapter describes how to use Sybase Central to manage Adaptive

Server. This chapter is meant as an overview to introduce you to Sybase
Central. For a complete description of the Adaptive Server plug-in
features, see the Sybase Central online help.
Topic Page
Overview for Adaptive Server Sybase Central Plug-in 49
Using the Adaptive Server Plug-in 51
Starting and stopping Sybase Central 52
Registering Adaptive Server Plug-in 53
Performing common tasks 53
Using Interactive SQL 60
Overview for Adaptive Server Sybase Central Plug-in

Sybase Central is a graphical user interface (GUI) management tool.
Sybase Central accepts a variety of “plug-ins” that allow you to manage
specific Sybase products. The Adaptive Server plug-in allows you to
manage Adaptive Server and helps you perform complex administration
tasks without the need to remember the syntax of Transact-SQL
commands or system stored procedures. You can use the Adaptive Server
plug-in to:
• Manage multiple servers from one console – You can manage all the
Adaptive Server installations from the Sybase Central main window.
• Generate database definition language (DDL) – You can generate
DDL for the objects in Adaptive Server.

Adaptive Server plug-In and command line updates
• Visually represent objects – You can see the databases and logins in each
Adaptive Server and the objects in each database, and windows expand
and contract to display information about databases and logins. The
Adaptive Server plug-in expands to display information about many
items, including:
• Databases and tables
• Disk devices
• Active processes and locks
• Logins and users
• Data caches
• ASE Replicator, Job Scheduler, and Messaging Services
• Access to other utilities such as Interactive SQL (for sending queries
and displaying query results).
• Navigate between related objects – To get more information about a
database object related to the one whose property sheet you are displaying,
navigate directly through the displayed object’s dialog box to the related
object.
• Create a cluster – The Adaptive Server plug-in allows you to create a
cluster if you have purchased Adaptive Server Cluster Edition. See the
online help and the User Guide to Clusters.
Adaptive Server plug-In and command line updates

The Adaptive Server Plug-in for Sybase Central manages various Adaptive
Server Enterprise products. In versions earlier than 15.0.3, the Adaptive Server
plug-in ran on Sybase Central 4.3. In 15.0.3 the Adaptive Server plug-in runs
on Sybase Central 6.00. These features are new to version 15.0.3, Sybase
Central 6.00:
• A Search tool helps you find objects displayed by plug-ins. Select View |
Search Pane to select objects according to the plug-in they belong to.
• The Connection Profile Description, Import, and Export options allow you
to add a text description to a profile connection. You can also import and
export connection profiles to and from files, allowing them to be shared
among users.

CHAPTER 4 Introduction to the Adaptive Server Plug-in for Sybase Central
• Better support for Windows Vista.

These features are new to the version 15.0.3 Adaptive Server plug-in.
• Create objects by selecting the Add icon from a context-sensitive toolbar,
located below the Sybase Central context bar, which in turn is under the
standard toolbar.
• Stored procedures and SQLJ procedures are located in the Procedures
folder.
• Scalar functions, or user-defined functions, are now supported, and are
located, along with SQLJ functions, in the Functions folder. They are also
documented in the Adaptive Server plug-in Help.
• Utilities items are now accessible from the menu on the context-sensitive
toolbar, or Context Bar, under the Standard Toolbar.
DBISQL11, which was previously shipped as part of Adaptive Server plug-in,
is now a separate product, version 11.0, and includes these enhanced features:
• The number of multiple result sets is no longer limited to 10.
• The login dialog for Adaptive Server now retains and displays the last five
connected server names.
• DBISQL11, or interactive SQL, now supports connection favorites, which
are similar to connection profiles.
• The SQL statements pane now contains line numbers.
• The Results pane now shows using select all, insert/update/delete SQL
statements, and sorting and generating, from selected rows.
Using the Adaptive Server Plug-in

The Adaptive Server plug-in for Sybase Central provides you with an intuitive
and easy way to administer Adaptive Server Enterprise. Sybase Central
displays the Adaptive Server plug-in in its left-hand pane. Included in this pane
is a hierarchical list of folders that represent different objects the plug-in can
manage, including:
• Viewing and changing the characteristics of the object
• Creating another object:

Starting and stopping Sybase Central
• Generating the SQL text for creating an object (which allows you to
reverse engineer Adaptive Server objects)
• Deleting an object
• Configuring Adaptive Server
• Managing:
• Database devices
• Proxy and temporary databases
• Indexes
• Partitions
• Segments
• Triggers
• Logins and roles
• Views
• ASE Replicator
• Configuring Adaptive Server jobs with Job Scheduler
• Starting and stopping Adaptive Server
• Executing queries
• Logging SQL statements generated by the plug-in, based on a user’s
actions.
Starting and stopping Sybase Central

To start Sybase Central:
• On UNIX, move to the $SYBASE/shared/sybcentral600 directory and run
the scjview.sh script.
• On Windows, choose Programs | Sybase | Sybase Central v6 from the Start
menu, or
On Windows, move to the %SYBASE%\Shared\Sybase Central 6.0.0\
directory and run the scjview.bat script.
To stop Sybase Central, select File | Exit

Registering Adaptive Server Plug-in

The Adaptive Server plug-in is registered in Sybase Central as part of the
server installation. However, if Adaptive Server plug-in is not correctly
registered, you can manually register the Adaptive Server plug-in:
• On Unix, run $SYBASE/ASEP/bin/registerASEP.
• On Windows, run %SYBASE%\ASEP\bin\registerASEP.bat
• You can register the Adaptive Server plug-in manually by:
a Select Register from Tools | Plug-ins. A registration wizard appears.
b Select Register
c Select “Register a plug-in by specifying a plug-in registration file.”
d Click Browse.
e Navigate to $SYBASE/ASEP/bin (%SYBASE%\ASEP\bin on
Windows) and select ASEPlugin.jpr. Follow the wizard to register the
Adaptive Server plug-in.
Performing common tasks

The following are some common tasks users perform with the Adaptive Server
plug-in.
For more information about all the following tasks, see the Adaptive Server
plug-in online help.
Starting and stopping If the Unified Agent is monitoring Adaptive Server, you can start, stop, and
Adaptive Server restart the server by right-clicking on the server and selecting Shutdown, Start,
or Restart.
If the Unified Agent is not monitoring Adaptive Server, you can shutdown the
server by selecting Shutdown.
Connecting to You can connect to an Adaptive Server by any of these methods:
Adaptive Server
• Select the Connect icon from the tool bar.
• Right click on Adaptive Server Enterprise and select Connect from the
menu.
• Right click on any server group and select Connect from the menu.

The connected server is displayed in the Default server group if the

connection is initiated from the Adaptive Server Enterprise folder or the
connect icon. The plug-in displays “Connected to server” in the
corresponding server group if the connection is initiated from the server
group.
You can also specify a server to which you want to connect by any of the
following:
• Specifying the server’s host name and port number in the Connect dialog
box.
• Selecting a pre-defined Adaptive Server from the server name dropdown
list. This drop down list is derived from the servers listed in the interfaces
file (UNIX) and sql.ini files (Windows) and LDAP servers.
• Discover which Adaptive Servers are available by clicking on Find in the
Connect dialog. Before you can use this method, you must first define the
discovery servers in Server Discovery tab located in the Adaptive Server
Enterprise property page.
Creating a database Before creating a database, make sure enough space is available on the
database devices you plan to use.
To create a database:
• Right-click on the Add Database icon in the right-hand panel, or,
1 Select the Databases folder.
2 Choose File | New | Database or click on the Add Database option in the
Databases folder. The Create a New Database wizard opens. The Create a
New Database wizard asks for the following information:

Table 4-1: Inputs to create a new database wizard

Input Description
Database name Enter a name for the database
Database device Specify the database device or devices on which to allocate the
new database
Database device Specify a size for each database device
size
Data or log Specify whether the database device will store data or the
transaction log.
With override Specify with override if you want to store data and log on the
same device.
For load If you are creating the database so you can restore it from a
backup, check the For Load check box. This is the case only if
you are recovering from media failure or if you are moving a
database from one location to another.
Guest account Specify whether to create a guest user in the database.
If you do not enter a size, Adaptive Server allocates either the value of the
database size configuration variable or the size of the model database,
whichever is larger.
If you have limited storage and must put the transaction log and the data on the
same logical device, specifying With Override allows Adaptive Server to
maintain the log on separate device fragments from the data.
You cannot remove or change a database device after creating the database
unless you first delete the database.
Warning! Deleting a database also deletes all its objects.
Deleting a database Only the owner of a database can delete it.

To delete a database:
1 Select the database icon.
2 Choose Edit | Delete.
3 Confirm the deletion in the confirmation dialog box.
Note Sybase recommends that you back up the master database after you
delete a user database.
Adding a user Database owners can add and delete users in the databases they own.

To create a user:
1 Expand the databases folder (select the “+” icon) and select the Users
folder.
2 Choose File | New | User.
The Add a New User wizard opens and asks for this information:
Table 4-2: Inputs to Add a New User wizard
Input Description
Name A name for the user. The name does not have to be the same as the
login.
Login name Login to which this user is assigned.
Group Optionally, assign a group to the user. Default: public
Note A user can be a member of one assigned group or the default “public”
group.
You can also select the Users folder. In the right pane, double-click the Add
User icon.
Deleting a user You cannot delete a user who owns objects. Since there is no command to
transfer ownership of objects, you must delete objects owned by a user before
you can delete the user. Also, you cannot delete a user who has granted
permissions to other users without first revoking the permissions with cascade.
If appropriate, re-grant the permissions to the other users.
Locking a login is a simple alternative to deleting a user.
To delete a user:
1 Select the user icon.
2 Choose Edit | Delete.
3 Confirm the deletion in the confirmation dialog box.
You can also select the user folder by right-clicking on the user icon and select
Delete.
Before you delete a user:
1 Revoke the user’s command and object permissions with cascade.
2 Re-grant the permissions to the other users, if appropriate.
3 Delete the user’s objects.

Creating a table Only a database owner or a user with create table permission can create a table.
To create a table:
1 In a database you are working in, select the User Tables folder.
2 Choose File | New | Table or click on the Add Table icon in the User Tables
folder.
The Table Editor opens.
3 In the Name box, enter a name.
4 From the Owner list, choose an owner. The default is “dbo”.
You can also select the User Tables folder. In the right pane, double-click the
Add Table icon.
Deleting a table Before you delete a table, be sure that no other objects reference it. If any
objects reference it, edit those objects to avoid errors. To find out if other
objects reference a table, check its dependencies.
Note When you delete a table, Adaptive Server deletes the indexes and triggers
associated with the table and unbinds the rules or defaults that are bound to its
columns.
Only table owners can delete tables.

To delete a table:
• Follow these steps:
• Select the table icon.
• Choose Edit | Delete.
• Confirm the deletion in the confirmation dialog box, or,
• You can also select the table by right-clicking on the table icon and
selecting Delete.
Creating a server To create a server group:
group
1 Select Adaptive Server Enterprise
2 Choose File | New | Server Group
3 Follow the steps provided by the Create New Server Group wizard.
You can also add a server group by double-clicking on the Add Server Group
from the right-hand pane.

Getting server status If the Unified Agent is monitoring Adaptive Server, check the server status by
any of the following:
• Click on the server group to which the server belongs. Check the Status
column in the Details pane of the server group.
• Click on the Adaptive Server Enterprise listed under Sybase Central, and
then click on Servers tab on the right hand side panel. The server status is
printed in the Status column.
• A green triangle on the lower right-hand side of the server icon indicates
that Adaptive Server is running. A red square indicates that Adaptive
Server is stopped.
Note By default, the Adaptive Server plug-in does not have Check Server
Status enabled. To enable Unified Agent to monitor Adaptive Server:
• Right click on Adaptive Server Enterprise and select Properties.
• Select Preferences and check “Enable Unified Agent (UA) related
features.”
Getting the server log If the Unified Agent is monitoring Adaptive Server, retrieve the server log by
selecting the server and clicking on the Server Log tab in the right-hand pane.
The server log is retrieved based on how you have configured the filter for the
the server log. To configure the server log filtering, right-click on the server
and select Server Log Filter. By default, the Adaptive Server plug-in retrieves
the last 1000 lines from the server log. You can configure the server filter to
retrieve:
• The entire log file.
• The last n number of lines.
• The log from the last n number of days.
• The lines that match the regular expression
Logging SQL To log all SQL statements executed through the Adaptive Server plug-in:
statements
• Right click on a server and select “Log SQL Statement.”
• Select whether you want SQL statements logged directly to a window or
to a file.
Executing SQL Execute SQL statements from within the Adaptive Server plug-in by using the
statements Interactive SQL query tool. To start the Interactive SQL tool, you can either:

• Right-click the server on which you want to execute the SQL statements
and select Open Interactive SQL from the menu, or
1 Click on Adaptive Server Enterprise.
2 Click the Utilities tab on the right-hand pane and select Interactive SQL
Execute SQL statements simultaneously on a set of servers belonging to a
server group:
1 Right -click the server group and choose Execute SQL.
2 Select the servers on which you want to execute the SQL statements
3 Click Execute.
The result set for each server is listed in the Result Set pane of the SQL
Execution dialog.
Viewing SQL Use the Adaptive Server plug-in to view a GUI version of the SQL execution
execution plan and plan for individual queries (much like a GUI version of showplan) and
cost information
execution plans for all queries in a stored procedure. This GUI display includes
nodes for each of the operators of the execution plan.
To get the GUI plan:
1 Start Interactive SQL.
2 Execute the query or stored procedure
3 Click on the plan tab in the Results pane of Interactive SQL
4 Select a query from the queries drop down list.
5 Click the Details tab to see the GUI plan of the selected query. Click on an
operator node to see the detailed statistics for that node.
6 Click on the XML tab to see an XML representation of the execution plan
for the selected query
7 Click on the Text tab to see the execution plan in a text format for the
submitted queries
For more information about Interactive SQL, see “Starting Interactive
SQL” on page 61.
Viewing and updating View and modify the configuration of any object represented in the Adaptive
object properties Server plug-in using the Property dialog.
To bring up the Property dialog:
1 Click on the object you want to view or modify.

Using Interactive SQL
2 Right-click on the object and select Properties.

3 Select the appropriate tab to perform your task.
4 Make any modification in the Property dialog.
5 Click on Apply, OK, or Cancel.
Generate the SQL text Generate the SQL text required for creating an object, which allows you to
for creating an object reverse engineer the object. To generate SQL text, right-click on the object and
select “Generate DDL.”
Viewing and updating View and update the Adaptive Server configuration parameters using the
Adaptive Server Server Properties dialog.
configuration
parameters 1 Right click on the server and select Configuration in the menu
2 Select the functional group from the drop down list in the Show
Configuration Parameters
3 Find and select the parameter you want to view or update
4 Enter new valuing the value column if update is necessary
5 Click on Apply/OK/Cancel accordingly

Interactive SQL allows you to execute SQL statements, build scripts, and
display database data to the server. You can use it to:
• Browse the information in a database.
• Test SQL statements that you plan to include in an application.
• Save query results to a file.
• Edit data in result sets.
• Load data into a database and carry out administrative tasks.
In addition, Interactive SQL can run command files or script files. For
example, you can build repeatable scripts to run against a database and then use
Interactive SQL to execute these scripts as batches.

Starting Interactive SQL

To start Interactive To start Interactive SQL, either:
SQL from Sybase
Central • Select a database in Sybase Central and select File | Open Interactive SQL.
Interactive SQL connects to the database. You can also right-click on the
database and select Open Interactive SQL.
The menu item Open Interactive SQL opens a connection to a server.
However, when you select the menu item for a server, Interactive SQL
opens a connection to the default database for that server. When you select
a specific database from the Open Interactive SQL menu, Interactive SQL
opens to the selected database.
• Select Tools | Adaptive Server Enterprise | Open Interactive SQL to start
Interactive SQL without a connection to a server. The Connect dialog
appears.
To start Interactive How you start Interactive SQL from the command line depends on your
SQL from the operating system.
command line
If you start Interactive SQL independently, the Connect dialog appears, which
lets you connect to a database just as you would in Sybase Central.
• For UNIX, change to the $SYBROOT/DBISQL/bin directory and enter:
dbisql
On Windows, change to the %SYBROOT%\DBISQL\bin directory and
enter:
dbisql.bat
• In the Connection dialog, enter the information to connect to a database in
the Connect dialog box and click OK.
To open a new Interactive SQL window:
1 Choose Window | New Window. The Connect dialog appears.
2 In the Connect dialog, enter connection options, and click OK to connect.
The connection information (including the database name, your user ID,
and the database server) appears on the title bar above the SQL Statements
pane.
You can also connect to or disconnect from a database with the Connect and
Disconnect commands in the SQL menu, or by executing a connect or
disconnect statement in the SQL Statements pane.


CH A PTE R 5 Setting Configuration
Parameters
This chapter describes the Adaptive Server configuration parameters,

which are listed here alphabetically.
A configuration parameter is a user-definable setting that you set with
sp_configure. Configuration parameters are used for a wide range of
services, from basic to specific server operations, and for performance
tuning.
Topic Page
Overview 63
Using sp_configure 67
sp_configure output 78
Named cache configuration parameters 80
sysconfigures and syscurconfigs tables 80
Configuration parameters 81
Overview
Configuration parameters are user-definable settings that control various
aspects of Adaptive Server behavior. Adaptive Server supplies default
values for all configuration parameters. Use configuration parameters to
tailor Adaptive Server for an installation’s particular needs.
Read this chapter carefully to determine which configuration parameters
you should reset to optimize server performance.
Warning! Change configuration parameters with caution. Arbitrary

changes in parameter values can adversely affect Adaptive Server
performance and other aspects of server operation.

Overview
The Adaptive Server configuration file

Adaptive Server stores the values of configuration parameters in a
configuration file, which is an ASCII text file. When you install a new
Adaptive Server, your parameters are set to the default configuration; the
default name of the file is server_name.cfg, and the default location of the file
is the Sybase Adaptive Server home directory ($SYBASE_ASE). Each time
you modify a configuration parameter, Adaptive Server creates a copy of the
outdated configuration file, using the naming convention server_name.001,
server_name.002, server_name.003...server_name.999. Adaptive Server
writes the new values to the file server_name.cfg or to a file name you specify
at start-up.
Modifying configuration parameters

Set or change configuration parameters in one of the following ways:
• By executing sp_configure with the appropriate parameters and values,
• By editing your configuration file and then invoking sp_configure with the
configuration file option, or
• By specifying the name of a configuration file at start-up.

Configuration parameters are either dynamic or static. Dynamic parameters
take effect as soon as you execute sp_configure. Static parameters require
memory to be reallocated, so they take effect only after you have restarted
Adaptive Server. The description of each parameter in this chapter indicates
whether it is static or dynamic.
Adaptive Server writes the new value to the system table sysconfigures and to
the configuration file when you change the value. The current configuration
file and sysconfigures reflect configured values, not run values. The system
table syscurconfigs reflects current run values of configuration parameters.
Required roles for modifying configuration parameters

The roles required for using sp_configure:
• Any user can execute sp_configure to display information about
parameters and their current values.
• Only a system administrator or a system security officer can execute
sp_configure to modify configuration parameters.

CHAPTER 5 Setting Configuration Parameters
• Only a system security officer can execute sp_configure to modify values

for:
• allow procedure grouping
• allow remote access
• allow sendmsg
• allow updates to system tables
• auditing
• audit queue size
• check password for digit
• current audit table
• enable ldap user auth
• enable pam user auth
• enable ssl
• log audit logon failure
• log audit logon success
• maximum failed logins
• minimum password length
• msg confidentiality reqd
• msg integrity reqd
• secure default login
• select on syscomments.text
• SQL Perfmon Integration
• syb_sendmsg port number
• suspended audit when device full
• systemwide password expiration
• unified login required
• use security services

Overview
Unit specification using sp_configure

sp_configure allows you to specify the value for configuration parameters in
unit specifiers. The unit specifiers are p or P for pages, m or M for megabytes,
and g or G for gigabytes. If you do not specify a unit, and you are configuring
a parameter that controls memory, Adaptive Server uses the logical page size
for the basic unit.
Note When you are configuring memory-related parameters, use only the P
(page size) parameter for your unit specification. If you use any other
parameter to configure memory related parameters, Adaptive Server may issue
an arithmetic overflow error message.
The syntax to indicate a particular unit specification is:

sp_configure "parameter name", 0, "p|P|k|K|m|M|g|G"
You must include the “0” as a placeholder.
You can use this unit specification to configure any parameter. For example,
when setting number of locks to 1024 you can enter:
sp_configure "number of locks", 1024
or:
sp_configure "number of locks", 0, "1K"
This functionality does not change the way in which Adaptive Server reports
sp_configure output.
Getting help information on configuration parameters

Use either sp_helpconfig or sp_configure to display information on a particular
configuration parameter. For example:
sp_helpconfig "number of open"
Configuration option is not unique.
option_name config_value run_value
------------------------------ ------------ -----------
number of open databases 12 12
number of open indexes 500 500
number of open objects 500 500
sp_helpconfig "number of open indexes"

number of open indexes sets the maximum number of indexes that can be open at
one time on SQL Server. The default value is 500.
Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Current Value Memory Used
------------- ------------- ------------- ------------- -----------
100 2147483647 500 500 208
sp_configure "number of open indexes"

Parameter Name Default Memory Used Config Value Run Value
----------------------- ------- ----------- ------------ ---------
number of open indexes 500 208 500 500
See Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System Administration Guide:

Volume 2.
Using sp_configure
sp_configure displays and resets configuration parameters. You can restrict the
number of parameters that sp_configure shows by using sp_displaylevel to set
your display level to one of:
• Basic
• Intermediate
• Comprehensive
For information about display levels, see “User-defined subsets of the
parameter hierarchy: display levels” on page 75. For information about
sp_displaylevel, see the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Table 5-1 describes the syntax for sp_configure. The information in the
“Effect” column assumes that your display level is set to “comprehensive.”
Table 5-1: sp_configure syntax
Command Effect
sp_configure Displays all configuration parameters by group, their current values, their
default values, the value to which they have most recently been set, and
the amount of memory used by this particular setting.
sp_configure “parameter” Displays current value, default value, most recently changed value, and
amount of memory used by the specified parameter.
sp_configure “parameter”, value Resets parameter to value.

Using sp_configure
Command Effect
sp_configure “parameter”, 0, “default” Resets the specified parameter to its default value.
sp_configure “group_name” Displays all configuration parameters in group_name, their current values,
their default values, the values to which they were recently set, and the
amount of memory used by each.
sp_configure “configuration file”, 0, Sets configuration parameters from the configuration file. See “Using
“sub_command”, “file_name” sp_configure with a configuration file” on page 69 for descriptions of the
parameters.
Syntax elements
The commands in Table 5-1 use the following variables:
• parameter – is any valid Adaptive Server configuration parameter or
parameter substring.
• value – is any integer within the valid range for that parameter. (See the
descriptions of the individual parameters for valid range information.)
Parameters that work as toggles have only two valid values: 1 (on) and 0
(off).
• group_name – is the name of any group in the parameter hierarchy.
Parameter parsing
sp_configure parses each parameter (and parameter name fragment) as
“%parameter%”. A string that does not uniquely identify a particular
parameter returns values for all parameters matching the string.
The following example returns values for all configuration parameters that
include “lock,” such as lock shared memory, number of locks, lock promotion
HWM, server clock tick length, print deadlock information, and deadlock retries:
sp_configure "lock"
Note If you attempt to set a parameter value with a nonunique parameter name
fragment, sp_configure returns the current values for all parameters matching
the fragment and asks you to specify a unique parameter name.

Using sp_configure with a configuration file

Configure Adaptive Server either interactively, by using sp_configure as
described above, or noninteractively, by instructing Adaptive Server to read
values from an edited or restored version of the configuration file.
By making your changes from the configuration file, you can:
• Replicate a specific configuration across multiple servers by using the
same configuration file.
• Use a configuration file as a baseline for testing configuration values on
your server.
• Use a configuration file to perform validation checking on parameter
values before actually setting the values.
• Create multiple configuration files and switch between them as your
resource needs change.
For information on editing the file, see “Editing the configuration file” on page
71. For information on specifying the name of the configuration file at start-up,
see “Starting Adaptive Server with a configuration file” on page 72.
Naming tips for the configuration file

To work with a configuration file that has a name other than the default name,
keep the server_name part of the file name, and include at least one alphabetic
character in the extension (for example my_server.A001). Alternatively, you
can change the server_name part of the file name (for example,
A_my_server.001). Doing this avoids confusion with the backup configuration
files generated by Adaptive Server when you modify a parameter.
Using sp_configure to read or write the configuration file

The syntax for using the configuration file option with sp_configure is:
sp_configure "configuration file", 0, "subcommand", "file_name"
where:
• “configuration file” – including quotes, specifies that this command uses the
configuration file.
• 0 – required—for backward compatibility—after the configuration file
parameter.
• “subcommand” – is one of:

Using sp_configure
• write – creates a file named file_name with the current configuration.

If file_name already exists, a message is written to the error log; the
existing file is renamed using the convention server_name.001,
server_name.002, and so on. If you have changed a static parameter,
but you have not restarted your server, write displays the currently
running value for that parameter. If you do not specify a directory with
file_name, the file is written to the directory from which Adaptive
Server was started.
• read – performs validation checking on values contained in file_name
and reads those values that pass validation into the server. If any
parameters are missing from file_name, the current values for those
parameters are used.
If the value of a static parameter in file_name is different from its
current running value, read fails and a message is printed. However,
validation is still performed on the values in file_name.
• verify – performs validation checking on the values in file_name. This
is useful if you have edited the configuration file, as it prevents you
from attempting to configure your server with invalid configuration
values.
• restore – creates file_name with the most recently configured values.
If you have configured static parameters to new values, this
subcommand writes the configured, not the currently running, values
to the file. This is useful if all copies of the configuration file have
been lost and you must generate a new copy. If you do not specify a
directory with file_name, the file is written to the directory from
which Adaptive Server was started.
• file_name – specifies the configuration file to use in conjunction with any
subcommand. If you do not specify a directory as part of the file name, the
directory where Adaptive Server was started is used.
Examples Example 1 Performs validation checking on the values in the file srv.config
and reads the parameters that pass validation into the server. Current run values
are substituted for values that do not pass validation checking:
sp_configure "configuration file", 0, "read", "srv.config"
Example 2 Creates the file my_server.config and writes the current
configuration values the server is using to that file:
sp_configure "configuration file", 0, "write", "my_server.config"

Editing the configuration file

The configuration file is an ASCII file that you can edit with any text editor that
can save files in ASCII format. The syntax for each parameter is:
parameter_name={value | DEFAULT}
where:
• parameter_name – is the name of the parameter you want to specify.
• value – is the numeric value for set parameter_name.
• “DEFAULT” – specifies that you want to use the default value for
parameter_name.
Examples Example 1 This example specifies that the transaction can retry its attempt to
acquire a lock one time when deadlocking occurs during an index page split or
shrink:
deadlock retries = 1
Example 2 This example specifies that the default value for the parameter
cpu accounting flush interval should be used:
cpu accounting flush interval=DEFAULT

When you edit a configuration file, your edits are not validated until you check
the file using the verify option, read the file with the read option, or restart
Adaptive Server with that configuration file.
If all your configuration files are lost or corrupted, you can re-create one from
a running server by using the restore subcommand and specifying a name for
the new file. The parameters in the new file are set to the values with which
your server is currently running.

Using sp_configure
Permissions for configuration files

Configuration files are nonencrypted ASCII text files. By default, they are
created with read and write permissions set for the file owner, and read
permission set for all other users. If you created the configuration file at the
operating system level, you are the file owner; if you created the configuration
file from Adaptive Server, using the write or restore parameter, the file owner
is the user who started Adaptive Server. Usually, this is the user “sybase.” To
restrict access to configuration files, use your operating system’s file
permission command to set read, write, and execute permissions as
appropriate.
Note You must set permissions accordingly on each configuration file created.
Backing up configuration files

Configuration files are not automatically backed up when you back up the
master database. They are operating system files—back them up in the same
way you back up your other operating system files.
Checking the name of the configuration file currently in use

Due to space limitations, sp_configure output truncates the name of the
configuration file. To see the full name of the configuration file, use:
select s1.value2
from syscurconfigs s1, sysconfigures s2
where s1.config = s2.config
and s2.name = "configuration file"
Starting Adaptive Server with a configuration file

By default, Adaptive Server reads the configuration file server_name.cfg in the
start-up directory when it starts. If this file does not exist, it creates a new file
and uses Adaptive Server defaults for all values.
You can start Adaptive Server with a specified configuration file. For more
information, see the Utility Guide.
If the configuration file you specify does not exist, Adaptive Server prints an
error message and does not start.

If the command is successful, the file server_name.bak is created. This file

contains the configuration values stored in sysconfigures prior to the time
sysconfigures was updated with the values read in from the configuration file
you specified. This file is overwritten with each subsequent start-up.
Configuration file errors

When there are errors in the configuration file, Adaptive Server may not start,
or may use default values.
Adaptive Server uses default values if:
• There are illegal values. For example, if a parameter requires a numeric
value, and the configuration file contains a character string, Adaptive
Server uses the default value.
• Values are below the minimum allowable value.
The parameter hierarchy

Configuration parameters are grouped according to the area of Adaptive Server
behavior they affect. This makes it easier to identify all parameters that you
might need to tune to improve a particular area of Adaptive Server
performance.
Although each parameter has a primary group to which it belongs, many have
secondary groups to which they also belong. For example, number of remote
connections belongs primarily to the network communication group, but it also
belongs secondarily to the memory use group. This reflects the fact that some
parameters have implications for a number of areas of Adaptive Server
behavior. sp_configure displays parameters in all groups to which they belong.
Table 5-2 lists the configuration parameter groups.
Table 5-2: Configuration groups
Parameter group Configures Adaptive Server for
Backup/Recovery Backing up and recovering data
Cache manager Data and procedure caches
Component Integration Services Component Integration Services
administration
DTM administration Distributed transaction management (DTM) facilities
Diagnostics Diagnostic principles
Disk I/O Disk I/O

Using sp_configure
Parameter group Configures Adaptive Server for

Error log Error log, and the logging of Adaptive Server events to the Windows event log
Extended stored procedures The behavior of extended stored procedures (ESPs).
General information Basic system administration
Java services Memory for Java in Adaptive Server
See the Java in Adaptive Server Enterprise manual for complete information
about Java in the database.
If you use method calls to JDBC, you may need to increase the size of the
execution stack available to the user. See “stack size” on page 249.
Languages Languages, sort orders, and character sets
Lock manager Locking
Memory use Memory consumption
Metadata caches Setting the metadata cache size for frequently used system catalog information.
The metadata cache is a reserved area of memory used for tracking information
on databases, indexes, or objects. The greater the number of open databases,
indexes, or objects, the larger the metadata cache size. For a discussion of
metadata caches in a memory-usage context, see Chapter 3, “Configuring
Memory,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
Monitoring Collecting monitoring information. By default, Adaptive Server does not collect
monitoring information.
See Chapter 2, “Monitoring Tables,” in the Performance and Tuning Guide:
Monitoring and Analyzing.
Network communication Communication between Adaptive Server and remote servers, and between
Adaptive Server and client programs
O/S resources Use of operating system resources
Physical memory Your machine’s physical memory resources
Processors Processors in an SMP environment
Query Tuning Query optimization
RepAgent thread administration Replication via Replication Server
SQL Server administration General Adaptive Server administration.
Security related Security-related features
Unicode Unicode-related features
User environment User environments
The syntax for displaying all groups and their associated parameters, and the
current values for the parameters, is:

sp_configure
Note The number of parameters returned by sp_configure depends on the value

to which you have your display level set. See “User-defined subsets of the
parameter hierarchy: display levels” on page 75.
The following is the syntax for displaying a particular group and its associated
parameter:
sp_configure "group_name"
For example, to display the disk I/O group, enter:
sp_configure "Disk I/O"
Group: Disk I/O
Parameter Name Default Memory Used Config Value Run Value
unit type
-------------- ------- ----------- ------------ ---------
------ -------------
allow sql server async i/o 1 0 1 1
switch static
diable disk mirroring 1 0 1 1
switch static
disk i/o structures 256 0 256 256
number dynamic
number of devices 10 0 10 10
number dynamic
number of large I/O buffers 6 12352 6 6
number dynamic
page utilization percent 95 0 95 95
percent dynamic
Note If the server uses a case-insensitive sort order, sp_configure with no

parameters returns a list of all configuration parameters and groups in
alphabetical order with no grouping displayed.
User-defined subsets of the parameter hierarchy: display levels

Depending on how you use Adaptive Server, you may need to adjust some
parameters more frequently than others. It may be easier to work with a subset
of parameters.

Using sp_configure
The default display level is comprehensive. When you set your display level,
the setting persists across multiple sessions. However, you can reset it at any
time.
• Basic – shows only the most basic parameters, and is appropriate for
general server tuning.
• Intermediate – includes parameters that are somewhat more complex, in
addition to the basic parameters.
• Comprehensive – includes all the parameters, including the most complex
ones. This level is appropriate for users doing highly detailed server
tuning.
The syntax for showing your current display level is:
sp_displaylevel
To set the display level, use:
sp_displaylevel user_name[, basic | intermediate | comprehensive]
where user_name is your Adaptive Server login name.
The effect of the display level on sp_configure output

If your display level is set to either basic or intermediate, sp_configure returns
only a subset of the parameters that are returned when your display level is set
to comprehensive. For instance, if your display level is set to intermediate, and
you want to see the parameters in the languages group, enter:
sp_configure "Languages"
The output looks like this:
sp_configure
Group: Languages
Parameter Name Default Memory Used Config Value Run Value Unit Type
--------------- ------- ----------- ------------ --------- ---- ----
default character set 1 0 1 1 id static
default language id 0 0 0 0 id dyna
. . .
This represents only a subset of the parameters in the languages group; some
language parameters appear only when your display level is comprehensive.

Performance tuning with sp_configure and sp_sysmon

sp_sysmon monitors Adaptive Server performance and generates statistical
information that describes the behavior of your Adaptive Server system. See
the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with
sp_sysmon.
You can run sp_sysmon before and after using sp_configure to adjust
configuration parameters. The output gives you a basis for performance tuning
and allows you to observe the results of configuration changes.
Using configuration parameters in a clustered environment

For the Cluster Edition, Sybase supports both cluster-wide and instance-
specific configuration. Cluster-wide configuration parameters are applied to all
instances in the cluster. Local configuration parameters are applied only to a
specified instance.
• Local configuration overrides cluster-wide configuration.
• If an instance-specific configuration has not been applied, the cluster-wide
configuration applies.
• Some parameters, such as default character set id, cannot be applied to a
specific instance. These parameters can only be used over an entire cluster.
The cluster configuration file includes an instance-specific configuration
block. Parameter settings in the instance-specific block override cluster-wide
settings. For example:
max online engines = DEFAULT
[Instance:ase1]
max online engines = 5
[Instance:ase2]
max online engines = 3
See the Users Guide to Clusters.

sp_configure output
sp_configure output
The sample output below shows the type of information sp_configure prints if
your display level is comprehensive, and you execute sp_configure with no
parameters. The values it prints vary, depending on your platform and on what
values you have already changed.
sp_configure
Group: Configuration Options
Group: Backup/Recovery
Parameter Name Default Memory Used Config Value Run Value Unit Type
-------------- ------- ----------- ------------ --------- ---- ----
allow remote access 1 0 1 1 switch dyn
print recovery info 0 0 0 0 switch dyn
recovery interval in m 5 0 5 5 minutes dyn
...
Note All configuration groups and parameters appears in output if your

display level is set to “comprehensive.”
Where:
• The “Default” column displays the default value. If you do not explicitly
reconfigure a parameter, it retains its default value.
• “Memory Used” shows the amount of memory, in kilobytes, used by the
parameter at its current value. Some related parameters draw from the
same memory pool. For instance, the memory used for stack size and stack
guard size is already accounted for in the memory used for number of user
connections. If you added the memory used by each of these parameters
separately, the sume is more than the amount actually used. Parameters
that “share” memory with other parameters are marked with a hash mark
(“#”).
• “Config Value” displays the most recent value to which the configuration
parameter has been set. When you execute sp_configure to modify a
dynamic parameter:
• The configuration and run values are updated.
• The configuration file is updated.
• The change takes effect immediately.
When you modify a static parameter:

• The configuration value is updated.

• The configuration file is updated.
• The change takes effect only when you restart Adaptive Server.
• “Run Value” displays the value Adaptive Server is currently using. It
changes when you modify a dynamic parameter’s value and, for static
parameters, after you restart Adaptive Server.
• “Unit” displays the unit value of the configuration parameter. Adaptive
Server displays information in the following units:
Name of unit Unit description
number Number of items.
clock ticks Number of clock ticks.
microseconds Number of microseconds.
milliseconds Number of millisecond.s
seconds Number of seconds.
minutes Number of minutes.
hours Number of hours.
bytes Number of bytes.
days Number of days.
kilobytes Number of kilobytes.
megabytes Number of megabytes.
memory pages (2K) Number of 2K memory pages.
virtual pages (2K) Number of 2K virtual pages.
logical pages Number of logical pages. This value depends on the logical page size your server is using: 2,
4, 8, or 16K.
percent Value of the configured parameter as a percentage.
ratio Value of the configured parameter as a ratio.
switch Value of the parameter is either TRUE (the parameter is turned on), or FALSE.
id ID of the configured parameter you are investigating.
name Character string name assigned to the run or configure value of the parameter. For example,
“binary” appears under the “Run Value or “Config Value” column for the output of
sp_configure "lock scheme".
row Number of rows
• “Type” displays whether the configuration option is static or dynamic.

Changes to static parameters require that you restart Adaptive Server for
the changes to take effect. Changes to dynamic parameters take effect
immediately without having to restart Adaptive Server.

Named cache configuration parameters
Named cache configuration parameters

The Named Cache configuration parameter group provides details for named
caches:
• cache size - size of the cache. By default Adaptive Server creates 8MB
caches. Change this parameter dynamically with sp_cacheconfig, or
change the value in the server configuration file to have the change take
place after the next server restart.
• cache status – status of the cache. One of default data cache, log on
ly, mixed, or in-memory storage. The default data cache must have a
cache status of default data cache, and cannot be changed. cache
status for named caches can be log only, mixed, or, for in-memory
databases, in-memory storage (you cannot change the cache status for
in-memory databases).
You cannot dynamically change the cache status in a clustered
environment from log only on a local cache while other instance use a
different cache status.
• cache replacement – describes the cache replacement policy. For named
caches and default data caches, the replacement policy is strict LRU or
relaxed LRU. Change this parameter dynamically with sp_cacheconfig,
or change the value in the server configuration file to have the change take
place after the next server restart. The cache replacement policy must be
none for in-memory databases because they do not use buffer or page
replacement.
• local cache partition number – number of cache partitions. You may
partition a named cache into multiple cache partitions. The acceptable
values are 0, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 or 128. You cannot change the number of
cache partitions dynamically; you must restart Adaptive Server for the
change to take effect.
sysconfigures and syscurconfigs tables

The report displayed by sp_configure is constructed mainly from the
master..sysconfigures and master..syscurconfigs system tables, with additional
information provided from sysattributes, sysdevices, and other system tables.

The value column in the sysconfigures table records the last value set from
sp_configure or the configuration file; the value column in syscurconfigs stores
the value currently in use. For dynamic parameters, the two values match; for
static parameters, which require a restart of the server to take effect, the two
values are different if the values have been changed since Adaptive Server was
last started. The values may also be different when the default values are used.
In this case, sysconfigures stores 0, and syscurconfigs stores the value that
Adaptive Server computes and uses.
sp_configure performs a join on sysconfigures and syscurconfigs to display the
values reported by sp_configure.
Querying syscurconfigs and sysconfigures: an example

You might want to query sysconfigures and syscurconfigs to get information
organized the way you want. For example, sp_configure without any arguments
lists the memory used for configuration parameters, but does not list minimum
and maximum values. Use this query to get a complete list of current memory
usage, as well as minimum, maximum, and default values:
select b.name, memory_used, minimum_value,
maximum_value, defvalue
from master.dbo.sysconfigures b,
master.dbo.syscurconfigs c
where b.config *= c.config and parent != 19
and b.config > 100
Configuration parameters
In many cases, the maximum allowable values for configuration parameters are
usually limited by available memory, rather than by sp_configure limitations.
Note To find the maximum supported values for your platform and version of
Adaptive Server, see “Adaptive Server Specifications” in the Installation
Guide for your platform.

Alphabetical listing of configuration parameters

The following sections include both summary and detailed information about
each configuration parameter.
abstract plan cache
Summary information
Default value 0 (off)
Range of values 0 (off), 1 (on)
Status Dynamic
Display level Comprehensive
Required role System administrator
Configuration group Query Tuning
abstract plan cache enables caching of abstract plan hash keys. See Chapter 12,
“Creating and Using Abstract Plans” in the Performance and Tuning Series:
Query Processing and Abstract Plans. abstract plan load must be enabled for
plan caching to take effect.
abstract plan dump
Summary information
Status Dynamic
abstract plan dump enables the saving of abstract plans to the ap_stdout abstract
plans group. See Chapter 12, “Creating and Using Abstract Plans” in the
Performance and Tuning Series: Query Processing and Abstract Plans.
abstract plan load
Summary information

Summary information
Status Dynamic
abstract plan load enables association of queries with abstract plans in the
ap_stdin abstract plans group. See Chapter 12, “Creating and Using Abstract
Plans” in the Performance and Tuning Series: Query Processing and Abstract
Plans.
abstract plan replace
Summary information
Status Dynamic
abstract plan replace enables plan replacement for abstract plans in the
ap_stdout abstract plans group. See Chapter 12, “Creating and Using Abstract
Plans” in the Performance and Tuning Series: Query Processing and Abstract
Plans. abstract plan load must be enabled for replace mode to take effect.
additional network memory
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values 0 – 2147483647
Status Dynamic
Display level Intermediate
Configuration groups Memory Use, Network Communication, Physical
Memory

additional network memory sets the maximum size of additional memory that
can be used for network packets that are larger than the default packet size.
Adaptive Server rounds down the value you enter to the nearest 2K value. The
default value indicates that no extra space is allocated for large packets.
When a login requests a large packet size, Adaptive Server verifies it has
sufficient memory available to satisfy the request. If it does not, Adaptive
Server finds the largest available block of memory and tries the appropriate
size (which is a multiple of default network packet size) less than the largest
memory block. If that fails, Adaptive Server decreases the value of the request
by the number of bytes equal to default network packet size, if this is available.
Adaptive Server continues for 10 iterations, or until the size equals the value of
default network packet size, whichever comes first. On the tenth iteration,
Adaptive Server uses the value of the default network packet size for the packet
size.
If you increase max network packet size, you must increase additional network
memory because all allocated network memory is reserved for users at the
default size. Adaptive Server guarantees that every user connection can log in
at the default packet size.
If you increase max network packet size but do not increase additional network
memory, Adaptive Server does not guarantee that clients who request network
packet sizes larger than the default size can login at the requested packet size.
Increasing additional network memory may improve performance for
applications that transfer large amounts of data. To determine the value for
additional network memory when your applications use larger packet sizes:
1 Estimate the number of simultaneous users who will request the large
packet sizes, and the sizes their applications will request,
2 Multiply this sum by three, since each connection needs three buffers,
3 Add two percent for overhead for 32-bit servers, or four percent for 64-bit
servers, and
4 Round the value to the next highest multiple of 2048.
For example, if you estimate these simultaneous needs for larger packet sizes:
Application Packet size Overhead
bcp 8192
Client-Library 8192
Client-Library 4096
Client-Library 4096
Total 24576

Application Packet size Overhead

Multiply by 3 buffers/user * 3=73728
Compute 2% overhead * .02=1474
Add overhead + 1474
Additional network memory 75202
Round up to multiple of 2048 75776
Set additional network memory to 75,776 bytes.
allocate max shared memory
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Physical Memory
allocate max shared memory determines whether Adaptive Server allocates all
the memory specified by max memory at start-up or only the amount of memory
the configuration parameter requires.
By setting allocate max shared memory to 0, you ensure that Adaptive Server
uses only the amount of shared memory required by the current configuration,
and allocates only the amount of memory required by the configuration
parameters at start-up, which is a smaller value than max memory.
If you set allocate max shared memory to 1, Adaptive Server allocates all the
memory specified by max memory at start-up. If you set allocate max shared
memory to 1, and if you increase max memory, Adaptive Server attempts to
allocate the memory immediately. If the memory allocation fails, Adaptive
Server writes messages to the error log. Check the error log to verify that no
errors have occurred.
A successful memory allocation means that Adaptive Server always has the
memory required for any memory configuration changes you make and there
is no performance degradation while the server readjusts for additional
memory. However, if you do not predict memory growth accurately, and max
memory is set to a large value, you may waste total physical memory.

allow backward scans
Summary information
Default value 1 (on)
Valid values 0 (off), 1 (on)
Status Dynamic
allow backward scans controls how the optimizer performs select queries that
contain the order by...desc command:
• When the value is set to 1, the optimizer can access the index or table rows
by following the page chain in descending index order.
• When the value is set to 0, the optimizer selects the rows into a worktable
by following the index page pointers in ascending order, and then sorts the
worktable in descending order.
The first method—performing backward scans—can speed access to tables
that need results ordered by descending column values. Some applications,
however, may experience deadlocks due to backward scans. In particular, look
for increased deadlocking if you have delete or update queries that scan
forward using the same index. There may also be deadlocks due to page splits
in the index.
Use print deadlock information to send messages about deadlocks to the error
log. See “print deadlock information” on page 223. Alternatively, you can use
sp_sysmon to check for deadlocking. See the Performance and Tuning Series:
Locking and Concurrency Control.
allow nested triggers
Summary information
Status Static
Configuration group SQL Server Administration

allow nested triggers controls the use of nested triggers. When the value is set
to 1, data modifications made by triggers can fire other triggers. Set allow
nested triggers to 0 to disable nested triggers. A set option, self_recursion,
controls whether the modifications made by a trigger can cause that trigger to
fire again.
allow procedure grouping
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Required role System security officer
Configuration group Security Related
allow procedure grouping controls the ability to group stored procedures of the
same name so that they can be dropped with a single drop procedure statement.
allow remote access
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Backup/Recovery, Network Communication
allow remote access controls logins from remote Adaptive Servers. The default
value of 1 allows Adaptive Server to communicate with Backup Server.
Note Setting the value to 0 disables server-to-server RPCs. Since Adaptive

Server communicates with Backup Server via RPCs, setting this parameter to
0 makes it impossible to back up a database.
Since other system administration actions are required to enable remote servers
other than Backup Server to execute RPCs, leaving this option set to 1 does not
constitute a security risk.

allow resource limits
Summary information
Status Static
Configuration groups Memory Use, SQL Server Administration
allow resource limits controls the use of resource limits. When the value is set to
1, the server allocates internal memory for time ranges, resource limits, and
internal server alarms. The server also internally assigns applicable ranges and
limits to user sessions. The output of showplan and statistics io displays the
optimizer’s cost estimate for a query. Set allow resource limits to 0 to disable all
resource limits.
allow sendmsg
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Network Communication
allow sendmsg enables or disables sending messages from Adaptive Server to

a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port. When allow sendmsg is set to 1, any user
can send messages using sp_sendmsg or syb_sendmsg. To set the port number
used by Adaptive Server, see “syb_sendmsg port number” on page 254.
Note Sending messages to UDP ports is not supported on Windows.
allow sql server async i/o
Summary information

Summary information
Status Static
Configuration group Disk I/O
allow sql server async i/o enables Adaptive Server to run with asynchronous
disk I/O. To use asynchronous disk I/O, enable it on both Adaptive Server and
your operating system. See your operating system documentation for
information on enabling asynchronous I/O at the operating system level.
Disk I/O always runs faster asynchronously than synchronously. This is
because when Adaptive Server issues an asynchronous I/O, it does not have to
wait for a response before issuing further I/Os.
allow updates to system tables
Summary information
Status Dynamic
allow updates to system tables enables users with the system administrator role
to make changes to the system tables and to create stored procedures that can
modify system tables. A database administrator can update system tables in
any tables that he or she owns if allow updates to system tables is enabled.
System tables include:
• All Sybase-supplied tables in the master database

• All tables in user databases that begin with “sys” and that have an ID value
in the sysobjects table of less than or equal to 100
Warning! Incorrect alteration of a system table can result in database

corruption and loss of data. To protect against errors that might corrupt
your databases, always use begin transaction when modifying a system
table. Immediately after finishing your modifications, disable allow
updates to system tables.
Stored procedures and triggers you create while allow updates to system tables
is set on can update the system tables, even after the parameter has been set off.
When you set allow updates to system tables to on, you create a “window of
vulnerability,” a period of time during which users can alter system tables or
create a stored procedure with which the system tables can be altered in the
future.
Because the system tables are so critical, Sybase suggests that you set this
parameter to on only in highly controlled situations. To guarantee that no other
users can access Adaptive Server while the system tables can be directly
updated, restart Adaptive Server in single-user mode. For details, see
startserver and dataserver in the Utility Guide.
Note The server-wide configuration option allow updates to system tables takes
precedence over the stored procedure settings for allow updates to system
tables. If you do not enable allow updates to system tables at the server level,
individual stored procedure settings determine whether you can modify system
catalogs.
average cap size
Summary information
Default value 200
Status Static
Display level
Required role
Configuration group Diagnostics
Reserved for future use.

audit queue size
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Security Related
The in-memory audit queue holds audit records generated by user processes
until the records can be processed and written to the audit trail. To change the
size of an audit queue, a system security officer can use audit queue size. When
you configure the queue suze, there is a trade-off between performance and
risk. If the queue is too large, records can remain in it for some time. As long
as records are in the queue, they are at risk of being lost if the system fails.
However, if the queue is too small, it can repeatedly become full, which affects
overall system performance; user processes that generate audit records sleep if
the audit queue is full.
Following are some guidelines for determining how big your audit queue
should be. You must also take into account the amount of auditing to be
performed at your site.
• The memory requirement for a single audit record is 424 bytes; however,
a record can be as small as 22 bytes when it is written to a data page.
• The maximum number of audit records that can be lost in a system failure
is the size of the audit queue (in records), plus 20. After records leave the
audit queue, they remain on a buffer page until they are written to the
current audit table on the disk. The pages are flushed to disk every 20
records, less if the audit process is not constantly busy.
• In the system audit tables, the extrainfo field and fields containing names
are of variable length, so audit records that contain complete name
information are generally larger.
The number of audit records that can fit on a page varies from 4 to as many as
80 or more. The memory requirement for the default audit queue size of 100 is
approximately 42K.

auditing
Summary information
Status Dynamic
auditing enables or disables auditing for Adaptive Server.
automatic cluster takeover
Summary information
Default value 1
Valid values 1 (enabled), 0 (disabled)
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Shared disk cluster
Setting automatic cluster takeover to 1 allows an instance that is starting to

automatically recover from an abrupt total cluster failure. If you set automatic
cluster takeover to 0, the cluster may not be able to recover from an abrupt
cluster failover unless you include the --cluster_takeover parameter.
The Cluster Edition uses quorum heartbeats and a cluster takeover algorithm to
determine when cluster takeover should be performed. This algorithm allows
an instance that is starting to distinguish between an inability to join the cluster
because the cluster has crashed (in which case takeover is appropriate) and an
inability to join the cluster because the instance that is starting does not have
network connectivity (in which case takeover is not appropriate).
If you disable automatic cluster takeover (set it to 0), The Cluster Edition writes
the results of the algorithm to the error log as an advisory message and then
exits.
If you enable auotomatic cluster takeover (set it to 1), the Cluster Edition starts
as the cluster coordinator and recovers the databases. This is guaranteed to be
a safe operation in environments that have I/O fencing enabled.

In environments without I/O fencing, a malfunction of the algorithm could

introduce data corruption, so you can set the configuration parameter to 0 to
disable this algorithm. However, environments without I/O fencing have a risk
of data corruption, and disabling automatic cluster takeover does not mitigate
all of those risks.
builtin date strings
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values 0–1
Status Dynamic
Display level
Required role
Configuration group Query tuning
If a string is given as an argument in place of the chronological value the server

interprets it as a datetime value regardless of its apparent precision. This default
behavior may be changed by setting the configuration parameter builtin date
strings or the set option builtin_date_strings. When these options are set the
server will interpret strings given to chronological builtins as bigdatetimes.
caps per ccb
Summary information
Default value 50
Status Static
Display level
Required role
check password for digit
Summary information

Summary information
Range of values 1 (on), 0 (off)
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
The system security officer can tell the server to check for at least one character
or digit in a password using the server-wide configuration parameter check
password for digit. If set, this parameter does not affect existing passwords.
CIPC large message pool size
Summary information
Default value 512
Valid values 512 – 2147483647
Status Static
CIPC large message pool size specifies the number of large message buffers
allocated by CIPC at start-up time.
CIPC regular message pool size
Summary information
Default value 8192
Valid values 2048 – 2147483647
Status Static
CIPC regular message pool size specifies the number of regular message buffer
allocated by CIPC at start-up time.

cis bulk insert array size
Summary information
Default value 50
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Component Integration Services
When performing a bulk transfer of data from one Adaptive Server to another
Adaptive Server, CIS internally buffers rows, and asks the Open Client bulk
library to transfer them as a block. The size of the array is controlled by cis bulk
insert array size.
cis bulk insert batch size
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
cis bulk insert batch size determines how many rows from the source tables are
to be bulk copied into the target table as a single batch using select into.
If you leave cis bulk insert batch size at 0, all rows are copied as a single batch.
Otherwise, after the count of rows specified by this parameter has been copied
to the target table, the server issues a bulk commit to the target server, causing
the batch to be committed.
If a normal client-generated bulk copy operation (such as that produced by the
bcp utility) is received, the client is expected to control the size of the bulk
batch, and the server ignores the value of this configuration parameter.

cis connect timeout
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
cis connect timeout determines the wait time, in seconds, for a successful
Client-Library connection.
cis cursor rows
Summary information
Default value 50
Status Dynamic
cis cursor rows specifies the cursor row count for cursor open and cursor fetch
operations. Increasing this value means more rows are fetched in one
operation. This increases speed but requires more memory.
cis idle connection timeout
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

cis idle connection timeout configures Adaptive Server to check for CIS
connections to any remote server that have been unused longer than the
specified number of seconds. Adaptive Server deletes the unused connections
and reallocates their resources.
Although the number you specify is in seconds, the housekeeper task wakes up,
at most , once a minute, so idle connections may be idle for much longer than
the configured value. Adaptive Server does not drop idle connections if a
transaction is active on the connection, and reestablishes the connection
automatically if the user executes any command that accesses the connection.
cis packet size
Summary information
Default value 512
Status Dynamic
cis packet size specifies the size of Tabular Data Stream™ (TDS) packets that
are exchanged between the server and a remote server when a connection is
initiated.
The default packet size on most systems is 512 bytes, and this may be adequate
for most applications. However, larger packet sizes may result in significantly
improved query performance, especially when text, unitext, and image or bulk
data is involved.
If you specify a packet size larger than the default, then the target server must
be configured to allow variable-length packet sizes, using:
• additional netmem
• maximum network packet size
cis rpc handling
Summary information
Default value 0 (off), default value of 1 for the Cluster Edition

Summary information
Status Dynamic
cis rpc handling specifies the default method for remote procedural call (RPC)
handling. Setting cis rpc handling to 0 sets the Adaptive Server site handler as
the default RPC handling mechanism. Setting the parameter to 1 forces RPC
handling to use Component Integration Service access methods. See set cis rpc
handling in the Component Integration Services Users Guide.
cluster heartbeat interval
Summary information
Default value 10
Valid values 1– 127
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Shared Disk Cluster
cluster heartbeat interval controls the interval that cluster instances use to send
and check the heartbeat status.
Using a lower value for cluster heartbeat interval reduces the failure detection
time but increases the risk of a false failure because of a transient problem
(such as an overloaded CPU). Tuning cluster heartbeat interval to a larger value
reduces the risk of a false failure but increases the time needed to detect a
failure.
cluster heartbeat retries
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic

Summary information
cluster heartbeat retries controls the number of times an instance retries a failed
cluster heartbeat before entering failure mode.
Tuning cluster heartbeat retries to a lower value reduces the time to detect
failure but increases the risk of a false failure because of a transient problem
(such as an overloaded CPU). Tuning cluster heartbeat retries to a larger value
reduces the risk of a false failure but increases the time needed to detect a
failure.
cluster vote timeout
Summary information
Default value 60
Status Dynamic
cluster vote timeout controls the maximum amount of time an instance waits for
other instances to vote during the voting period. An instance waits only for
those instances which it believes are running.
Tuning cluster vote timeout to a lower value can reduce failover time, but
increases the risk that an instance that is running is excluded from the new
cluster view. Tuning cluster vote timeout to a larger value reduces the risk that
an running instance is excluded from the new cluster view, but may increase
failover time.
compression memory size
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

Summary information
Configuration group Physical Memory
Used while loading a compressed dump into an archive database. compression

memory size determines the size (in 2KB pages) of the memory pool Adaptive
Server uses to decompress a compressed dump. When you set compression
memory size to 0, no pool is created and a compressed dump cannot be loaded.
See “Creating a compression memory pool” in Chapter 14, “Archive Database

Access,” in the System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
configuration file
Summary information
Range of values One of: 0, verify, read, write, or restore
Status Dynamic
Configuration group General Information
configuration file specifies the location of the configuration file currently in use.
See “Using sp_configure with a configuration file” on page 69 for a complete
description of configuration files.
In sp_configure output, the “Run Value” column displays only 10 characters, so
the output may not display the entire path and name of your configuration file.
cost of a logical io
Summary information
Default value 2
Status Dynamic
cost of a logical io specifies the cost of a single logical I/O.

cost of a physical io
Summary information
Default value 25
Status Dynamic
cost of a phsyical io specifies the cost of a single physical I/O.
cost of a cpu unit
Summary information
Default value 1000
Status Dynamic
cost of a cpu unit specifies the cost of a single CPU operation.
The cost of a serial plan in the optimizer is described by this formula:

Cost = PIO X estimated_pio + LIO X estimated_lio + 100 X estimated_cpu / CPU
Where the default values are:
• estimated_pio = 25
• estimated_lio = 2
• estimated_cpu = 1000
If your Adaptive Server has sufficient memory, then all tables exist in memory,
and a value of 0 for cost of a physical io is appropriate.
If your CPU is fast enough so the value for cost of a cpu unit is not a issue, use
this formula to determine the cost of CPU, which combines 2 LIO and 25 PIO
(the default values):
CPU X 100/configuration_value

The default value for configuration_value is 1000.

As you increase the value for cost of a cpu unit, this formula reduces the impact
of CPU on cost.
cpu accounting flush interval
Summary information
Default value 200
Status Dynamic
cpu accounting flush interval specifies the amount of time, in machine clock
ticks (non-Adaptive Server clock ticks), that Adaptive Server waits before
flushing CPU usage statistics for each user from sysprocesses to syslogins, a
procedure used in charge-back accounting.
When a user logs in to Adaptive Server, the server begins accumulating figures
for CPU usage for that user process in sysprocesses. When a user logs off
Adaptive Server, or when the value of cpu accounting flush interval is exceeded,
the accumulated CPU usage statistics are flushed from sysprocesses to
syslogins. These statistics continue accumulating in syslogins until you clear
the totals. Display the current totals from syslogins using sp_reportstats.
The value to which you set cpu accounting flush interval depends on the type of
reporting you intend to do. If you run reports on a monthly basis, set cpu
accounting flush interval to a relatively high value. With infrequent reporting, it
is less critical that the data in syslogins be updated frequently.
However, if you perform periodic ad hoc selects on the totcpu column in
syslogins to determine CPU usage by process, set cpu accounting flush interval
to a lower value to increase the likelihood of the data in syslogins being up-to-
date when you execute your selects.

Setting cpu accounting flush interval to a low value may cause the lock manager
to mistakenly identify processes as potential deadlock victims. When the lock
manager detects a deadlock, it checks the amount of CPU time accumulated by
each competing processes. The process with the lesser amount is chosen as the
deadlock victim and is terminated by the lock manager. Additionally, when cpu
accounting flush interval is set to a low value, the task handlers that store CPU
usage information for processes are initialized more frequently, thus making
processes appear as if they have accumulated less CPU time than they actually
have. Because of this, the lock manager may select a process as the deadlock
victim when, in fact, that process has more accumulated CPU time than the
competing process.
If you do not intend to report on CPU usage at all, set cpu accounting flush
interval to its maximum value. This reduces the number of times syslogins is
updated, and reduces the number of times its pages must be written to disk.
cpu grace time
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
cpu grace time, together with time slice, specifies the maximum amount of time
that a user process can run without yielding the CPU before Adaptive Server
preempts it and terminates it with a timeslice error. The units for cpu grace time
are time ticks, as defined by sql server clock tick length. See “sql server clock
tick length” on page 244.
When a process exceeds cpu grace time Adaptive Server “infects” it by
removing the process from the internal queues. The process is killed, but
Adaptive Server is not affected. This prevents runaway processes from
monopolizing the CPU. If any of your user processes become infected, you
may be able to temporarily fix the problem by increasing the value of cpu grace
time. However, be sure that the problem really is a process that takes more than
the current value of cpu grace time to complete, rather than a runaway process.

Temporarily increasing the cpu grace time value is a workaround, not a

permanent fix, since it may cause other complications; see “time slice” on page
258. Also, see Chapter 4, “Using Engines and CPUs” in the Performance and
Tuning Series: Basics for a more detailed discussion of task scheduling.
current audit table
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
current audit table establishes the table where Adaptive Server writes audit
rows. A system security officer can change the current audit table, using:
sp_configure "current audit table", n
[, "with truncate"]
where n is an integer that determines the new current audit table, as follows:
• 1 means sysaudits_01, 2 means sysaudits_02, and so forth, up to 8.
• 0 tells Adaptive Server to set the current audit table to the next table. For
example, if your installation has three audit tables, sysaudits_01,
sysaudits_02, and sysaudits_03, Adaptive Server sets the current audit
table to:
• 2 if the current audit table is sysaudits_01
"with truncate" specifies that Adaptive Server should truncate the new table if it
is not already empty. sp_configure fails if this option is not specified and the
table is not empty.
Note If Adaptive Server truncates the current audit table, and you have not
archived the data, the table’s audit records are lost. Be sure that the audit data
is archived before using the with truncate option.

To execute sp_configure to change the current audit table, you must have the
sso_role active. You can write a threshold procedure to change the current audit
table automatically.
deadlock checking period
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Lock Manager
deadlock checking period specifies the minimum amount of time (in

milliseconds) before Adaptive Server initiates a deadlock check for a process
that is waiting on a lock to be released. Deadlock checking is time-consuming
overhead for applications that experience no or very few deadlocks, and the
overhead grows as the percentage of lock requests that must wait for a lock also
increases.
If you set deadlock checking period to a nonzero value (n), Adaptive Server
initiates a deadlock check after a process waits at least n milliseconds. For
example, you can make a process wait at least 700 milliseconds for a lock
before each deadlock check by entering:
sp_configure "deadlock checking period", 700
If you set deadlock checking period to 0, Adaptive Server initiates deadlock
checking when each process begins to wait for a lock. Any value less than the
number of milliseconds in a clock tick is treated as 0. See “sql server clock tick
length” on page 244.
Configuring deadlock checking period to a higher value produces longer delays
before deadlocks are detected. However, since Adaptive Server grants most
lock requests before this time elapses, the deadlock checking overhead is
avoided for those lock requests. If your applications deadlock infrequently, set
deadlock checking period to a higher value. Otherwise, the default value of 500
should suffice.
Use sp_sysmon to determine the frequency of deadlocks in your system and the
best setting for deadlock checking period. See the Performance and Tuning
Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.

deadlock pipe active
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Monitoring
deadlock pipe active controls whether Adaptive Server collects deadlock

messages. If both deadlock pipe active and deadlock pipe max messages are
enabled, Adaptive Server collects the text for each deadlock. Use
monDeadLock to retrieve these deadlock messages.
deadlock pipe max messages
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Monitoring
deadlock pipe max messages determines the number of deadlock messages

Adaptive Server stores per engine. The total number of messages in the
monSQLText table is the value of sql text pipe max messages times the number
of engines running.
deadlock retries
Summary information
Default value 5
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Lock Manager, SQL Server Administration

deadlock retries specifies the number of times a transaction can attempt to

acquire a lock when deadlocking occurs during an index page split or shrink.
For example, Figure 5-1 illustrates the following scenario:
• Transaction A locks page 1007 and needs to acquire a lock on page 1009
to update the page pointers for a page split.
• Transaction B is also inserting an index row that causes a page split, holds
a lock on page 1009, and needs to acquire a lock on page 1007.
In this situation, rather than immediately choosing a process as a deadlock
victim, Adaptive Server relinquishes the index locks for one of the
transactions. This often allows the other transaction to complete and release its
locks.
For the transaction that surrendered its locking attempt, the index is rescanned
from the root page, and the page split operation is attempted again, up to the
number of times specified by deadlock retries.

Figure 5-1: Deadlocks during page splitting in a clustered index

Page 1001
Bennet 1007
Karsen 1009
Smith 1062
Page 1007 Page 1009

Bennet 1132 Karsen 1315
Transaction A: Greane 1133 Lemmon 1220 Transaction B:
Splitting index Hunter 1127 Perkins 1257 Splitting index
page 1007; holds Irons 1218 Quigley 1254 page 1009; holds
lock on 1007; lock on 1009;
needs to acquire a needs to acquire
lock on 1009 to a lock on 1007 to
update its update its
previous-page next-page pointer
pointer
Page 1007 Page 1033 Page 1009 Page 1044

Bennet 1132 Hunter 1127 Karsen 1315 Perkins 1257
Greane 1133 Irons 1218 Lemmon 1220 Quigley 1254
Grizley 1127 Mouton 1244
sp_sysmon reports on deadlocks and retries. See the Performance and Tuning
Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
default character set id
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Static
Configuration group Languages

default character set id specifies the number of the default character set used by
the server. The default is set at installation, and can be changed later with the
Sybase installation utilities. See Chapter 9, “Configuring Character Sets, Sort
Orders, and Languages.”
default database size
Summary information
Default value 3MB
Range of values 2a –10000
a. Minimum determined by server’s logical page size.
Status Dynamic
default database size sets the default number of megabytes allocated to a new
user database if create database is issued without any size parameters. A
database size given in a create database statement takes precedence over the
value set by this configuration parameter.
If most of the new databases on your Adaptive Server require more than one
logical page size, you may want to increase the default.
Note If you alter the model database, you must also increase the default
database size, because the create database command copies model to create a
new user database.
default exp_row_size percent
Summary information
Default value 5
Status Dynamic

default exp_row_size percent reserves space for expanding updates in data-

only-locked tables, to reduce row forwarding. An “expanding update” is any
update to a data row that increases the length of the row. Data rows that allow
null values or that have variable-length columns may be subject to expanding
updates. In data-only-locked tables, expanding updates can require row
forwarding if the data row increases in size so that it no longer fits on the page.
The default value sets aside 5 percent of the available data page size for use by
expanding updates. Since 2002 bytes are available for data storage on pages in
data-only-locked tables, this leaves 100 bytes for expansion. This value is
applied only to pages for tables that have variable-length columns.
Setting default exp_row_size percent to 0 means that all pages are completely
filled and no space is left for expanding updates.
default exp_row_size percent is applied to data-only-locked tables with
variable-length columns when exp_row_size is not explicitly provided with
create table or set with sp_chgattribute. If a value is provided with create table,
that value takes precedence over the configuration parameter setting. See the
Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
default fill factor percent
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
default fill factor percent determines how full Adaptive Server makes each index
page when it is creating a new index on existing data, unless the fill factor is
specified in the create index statement. The fillfactor percentage is relevant only
when the index is created. As data changes, pages are not maintained at any
particular level of fullness.
default fill factor percent affects:
• The amount of storage space used by your data – Adaptive Server

redistributes the data as it creates the clustered index.
• Performance – splitting up pages uses Adaptive Server resources.

There is seldom a reason to change default fill factor percent, especially since
you can override it in the create index command. See “create index” in the
Reference Manual: Commands.
default language id
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
default language id is the number of the language that is used to display system
messages unless a user has chosen another language from those available on
the server. us_english always has an ID of NULL. Additional languages are
assigned unique numbers as they are added.
default network packet size
Summary information
Default value 2048
Range of values 512– 65024
Status Static
Configuration groups Memory Use, Network Communication, User
Environment
default network packet size configures the default packet size for all Adaptive
Server users. You can set default network packet size to any multiple of 512
bytes; values that are not even multiples of 512 are rounded down.
Memory for all users who log in with the default packet size is allocated from
the Adaptive Server memory pool, as set with total logical memory. This
memory is allocated for network packets when Adaptive Server is started.
Each Adaptive Server user connection uses:
• One read buffer

• One buffer for messages

• One write buffer
Each of these buffers requires default network packet size bytes. The total
amount of memory allocated for network packets is:
(number of user connections + number of worker processes) * 3 * default network
packet size
For example, if you set default network packet size to 1024 bytes, and you have
50 user connections and 20 worker processes, the amount of network memory
required is:
(50 + 20) * 3 * 1024 = 215040 bytes
If you increase default network packet size, you must also increase max network
packet size to at least the same size. If the value of max network packet size is
greater than the value of default network packet size, increase the value of
additional network memory. See “additional network memory” on page 83.
Use sp_sysmon to see how changing the default network packet size parameter
affects network I/O management and task switching. For example, try
increasing default network packet size and then checking sp_sysmon output to
see how this affects bcp for large batches. See the Performance and Tuning
Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.
Requesting a larger packet size at login

The default packet size for most client programs like bcp and isql is set to 512
bytes. If you change the default packet size, clients must request the larger
packet size when they connect. Use the -A flag to Adaptive Server client
programs to request a large packet size. For example:
isql -A2048
default sortorder id
Summary information
Default value 50
Status Static

default sortorder id is the number of the sort order that is installed as the default
on the server. To change the default sort order, see Chapter 9, “Configuring
Character Sets, Sort Orders, and Languages.”
default unicode sortorder
Summary information
Default value binary
Range of values Not currently used
Status Static
Configuration group Unicode
default unicode sortorder is a string parameter that uniquely defines the default
Unicode sort order installed on the server. To change the Unicode default sort
order, see Chapter 9, “Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and
Languages.”
default XML sortorder
Summary information
Default value binary
Range of values (not currently used)
Status Static
default XML sortorder is a string parameter that defines the sort order used by
the XML engine. A string parameter is used rather than a numeric parameter to
guarantee a unique ID. See Chapter 6, “XML Support for I18N” in XML
Services in Adaptive Server Enterprise.
deferred name resolution
Summary information
Default value 0 (disabled)

Summary information
Range of values 0 to 1
Status dynamic
Configuration group Query tuning
When deferred name resolution is active (1), deferred name resolution is

applied globally to all server connections; all procedures you create in the
server are created using deferred name resolution.
Therefore, the stored procedures are created without resolving the objects
referenced inside the stored procedure, postponing object resolution
processing to the execution time. See Chapter 17, “Using Stored Procedures,”
in the Transact-SQL Users Guide
disable character set conversions
Summary information
Default value 0 (enabled)
Status Static
Changing disable character set conversions to 1 turns off character set

conversion for data moving between clients and Adaptive Server. By default,
Adaptive Server performs conversion on data moving to and from clients that
use character sets that are different than the server’s. For example, if some
clients use Latin-1 (iso_1) and Adaptive Server uses Roman-8 (roman8) as its
default character set, data from the clients is converted to Roman-8 when being
loaded into Adaptive Server. For clients using Latin-1, the data is reconverted
when it is sent to the client; for clients using the same character set as Adaptive
Server, the data is not converted.
By setting disable character set conversions, you can request that no conversion
take place. For example, if all clients are using a given character set, and you
want Adaptive Server to store all data in that character set, set disable character
set conversions to 1, and no conversion takes place.

disable disk mirroring
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Static
disable disk mirroring enables or disables disk mirroring for Adaptive Server.
This is a global variable; Adaptive Server does not perform any disk mirroring
after this configuration parameter is set to 1 and Adaptive Server is restarted.
Setting disable disk mirroring to 0 enables disk mirroring.
Note You must disable disk mirroring if your Adaptive Server is configured
for failover.
disk i/o structures
Summary information
Default value 256
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Disk I/O, Memory Use
disk i/o structures specifies the initial number of disk I/O control blocks
Adaptive Server allocates at start-up.
User processes require a disk I/O control block before Adaptive Server can
initiate an I/O request for the process. The memory for disk I/O control blocks
is preallocated when Adaptive Server starts. To minimize the chance of
running out of disk I/O structures, you should configure disk i/o structures to as
high a value as your operating system allows. See your operating system
documentation for information on concurrent disk I/Os.

Use sp_sysmon to determine whether to allocate more disk I/O structures. See
sp_sysmon. You can set the max async i/os per server configuration parameter
to the same value as disk i/o structures. See “max async i/os per server” on page
159.
DMA object pool size
Summary information
Default value 4096
Valid values 2048 – 2147483647
Status Static
DMA object pool size specifies the number of DMA (direct memory access)
objects allocated by CIPC at start-up time.
dtm detach timeout period
Summary information
Default value 0 (minutes)
Valid values 0 – 2147483647 (minutes)
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
Configuration group DTM Administration
dtm detach timeout period sets the amount of time, in minutes, that a distributed
transaction branch can remain in the detached state. In some X/Open XA
environments, a transaction may become detached from its thread of control
(usually to become attached to a different thread of control). Adaptive Server
permits transactions to remain in a detached state for the length of time
specified by dtm detach timeout period. After this time has passed, Adaptive
Server rolls back the detached transaction.

dtm lock timeout period
Summary information
Default value 300 (seconds)
Valid values 1 – 2147483647 (seconds)
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
dtm lock timeout period sets the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that a
distributed transaction branch waits for lock resources to become available.
After this time has passed, Adaptive Server considers the transaction to be in a
deadlock situation, and rolls back the transaction branch that triggered the
deadlock. This ultimately rolls back the entire distributed transaction.
Distributed transactions may potentially deadlock themselves if they propagate
a transaction to a remote server, and in turn, the remote server propagates a
transaction back to the originating server. This situation is shown in Figure 5-
2. The work of distributed transaction “dxact1” is propagated to Adaptive
Server 2 via “rpc1.” Adaptive Server 2 then propagates the transaction back to
the coordinating server via “rpc2.” “rpc2” and “dxact1” share the same gtrid but
have different branch qualifiers, so they cannot share the same transaction
resources. If “rpc2” is awaiting a lock held by “dxact1,” a deadlock situation
exists.
Figure 5-2: Distributed transaction deadlock
dxact1 ASE1
ASTC
rpc1 rpc2
ASE2
ASTC
Adaptive Server cannot detect interserver deadlocks. Instead, it relies on dtm

lock timeout period. In Figure 5-2, after dtm lock timeout period has expired, the
transaction created for “rpc2” is aborted. This causes Adaptive Server 2 to
report a failure in its work, and “dxact1” is ultimately aborted as well.

The value of dtm lock timeout period applies only to distributed transactions.
Local transactions may use a lock timeout period with the server-wide lock wait
period parameter.
Note Adaptive Server does not use dtm lock timeout period to detect deadlocks
on system tables.
dump on conditions
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Group Diagnostics
dump on conditions determines whether Adaptive Server generates a dump of

data in shared memory when it encounters the conditions specified in maximum
dump conditions.
Note The dump on conditions parameter is included for use only by Sybase
Technical Support. Do not modify it unless you are instructed to do so by
Sybase Technical Support.
dynamic allocation on demand
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
dynamic allocation on demand determines when memory is allocated for

changes to dynamic memory configuration parameters.

If you set dynamic allocation on demand to 1, memory is allocated only as it is

needed. That is, if you change the configuration for number of user connections
from 100 to 200, the memory for each user is added only when the user
connects to the server. Adaptive Server continues to add memory until it
reaches the new maximum for user connections.
If dynamic allocation on demand is set to 0, all the memory required for any
dynamic configuration changes is allocated immediately. That is, when you
change the number of user connections from 100 to 200, the memory required
for the extra 100 user connections is immediately allocated.
enable backupserver HA
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
Setting enable backupserver HA to 1 starts the high availability Backup Server

for the cluster. Setting enbale backupserver HA to 0 disables the high
availability Backup Server on the cluster.
enable cis
Summary information
Status Static
enable cis enables or disables Component Integration Service.

enable DTM
Summary information
Valid values 0 (off), 1(on)
Status Static
Display level 10
Configuration groups DTM Administration, SQL Server Administration
enable DTM enables or disables the Adaptive Server distributed transaction

management (DTM) feature. When DTM is enabled, you can use Adaptive
Server as a resource manager in X/Open XA and MSDTC systems. You must
restart the server for this parameter to take effect. See the XA Interface
Integration Guide for CICS, Encina, and TUXEDO for more information about
using Adaptive Server in an X/Open XA environment. See Using Adaptive
Server Distributed Transaction Management Features for information about
transactions in MSDTC environments, and for information about Adaptive
Server native transaction coordination services.
Note The license information and the run value for enable DTM are
independent of each other. Whether or not you have a license for DTM, the run
value and the configuration value are set to 1 after you restart Adaptive Server.
You cannot run DTM until you install a valid license. If you have not installed
a valid license, Adaptive Server logs an error message and does not activate the
feature. See the installation guide for your platform for information about
installing license keys.
enable encrypted columns
Summary information
Range of values 0 (off), 1(on)
Status Dynamic
enable encrypted columns enables encrypted columns.

You cannot set enable encrypted columns unless you have purchased, installed,
and registered the ASE_ENCRYPTION license on your server. Any attempt to
set it without such licensing results in Msg. 10834:
Configuration parameter 'enable encrypted columns'
cannot be enabled without license 'ASE_ENCRYPTION'
Note Using encrypted columns increases the logical memory used by 8198
kilobytes.
enable enterprise java beans
Summary information
Status Static
Configuration group Java Services
enable enterprise java beans enables and disables EJB Server in the Adaptive
Server database. You cannot use EJB Server until the Adaptive Server is
enabled for EJB Server.
Note The license information and the run value for enable java beans are
independent of each other. Whether or not you have a license for Java, the run
value and the config value are set to 1 after you restart Adaptive Server. You
cannot run EJB Server until you have a license. If you have not installed a valid
license, Adaptive Server logs an error message and does not activate the
enable file access
Summary information
Status Static

Summary information
enable file access enables access through proxy tables to the external file
system. Requires a license for ASE_XFS.
enable full-text search
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Static
enable full-text search enables Enhanced Full-Text Search services. Requires a

license for ASE_EFTS.
enable HA
Summary information
Status Static
Set enable HA to 1 to configure Adaptive Server as a companion server in an

active-active high availability subsystem. Set enable HA to 2 to configure
Adaptive Server as a companion server in an active-passive high availability
subsystem.

Adaptive Server uses Sybase Failover to interact with the high availability
subsystem. You must set enable HA to 1 before you run the installhasvss script
(insthasv on Windows), which installs the system procedures for Sybase
Failover.
Note The license information and the run value for enable HA are independent
of each other. Whether or not you have a license for Sybase Failover, the run
value and the config value are set to 1 when you restart Adaptive Server. Until
you have a license, you cannot run Sybase Failover. If you have not installed a
valid license, Adaptive Server logs an error message and does not activate the
Setting enable HA to 1 or 2 does not mean that Adaptive Server is configured

to work in a high availability system. You must perform the steps described in
Using Sybase Failover in a High Availability System to configure Adaptive
Server to be a companion server in a high availability system.
When enable HA is set to 0, you cannot configure for Sybase Failover, and you
cannot run installhasvss (insthasv on Windows).
enable housekeeper GC
Summary information
Status Dynamic
The housekeeper garbage collection task performs space reclamation on data-

only-locked tables. When a user task deletes a row from a data-only-locked
table, a task is queued to the housekeeper to check the data and index pages for
committed deletes.
The housekeeper garbage collection task is controlled by enable housekeeper
GC. See Chapter 3, “Using Engines and CPUs” in the Performance and Tuning
Series: Basics.
These are valid values for enable housekeeper GC:

• 0 – disables the housekeeper garbage collection task, but enables the delete
command’s lazy garbage collection. You must use reorg reclaim_space to
deallocate empty pages. This is the cheapest option with the lowest
performance impact, but it may cause performance problems if many
empty pages accumulate. Sybase recommends that you do not use this
value.
• 1 – enables lazy garbage collection for the housekeeper garbage collection
task and the delete command. If more empty pages accumulate than your
application allows, consider options 4 or 5. You can use the optdiag utility
to obtain statistics of empty pages.
• 2 – reserved for future.
• 3 – reserved for future.
• 4 – enables aggressive garbage collection for the housekeeper garbage
collection task and the delete command. This option is the most effective,
but the delete command is expensive. This option is ideal if the deletes on
your DOL tables are in a batch.
• 5 – enables aggressive garbage collection for the housekeeper, and lazy
garbage collection for the delete command. This option is less expensive
for deletes than option 4. This option is suitable when deletes are caused
by concurrent transactions
sp_sysmon reports on how often the housekeeper garbage collection task
performed space reclamation and how many pages were reclaimed. See the
Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.
enable i/o fencing
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
Setting enable i/o fencing to 1 enables I/O fencing for each database device that
supports the SCSI-3 Persistent Group Reservation (PGR) standard.

enable java
Summary information
Default value 0 (disabled)
Range of values 0 (disabled), 1 (enabled)
Status Static
Configuration group Java Services
enable java enables and disables Java in the Adaptive Server database. You
cannot install Java classes or perform any Java operations until the server is
enabled for Java.
Note The license information and the run value for enable java are independent
of each other. Whether or not you have a license for java, the run value and the
config value are set to 1 after you restart Adaptive Server. You cannot run Java
until you have a license. If you have not installed a valid license, Adaptive
Server logs an error message and does not activate the feature. See the
installation guide for your platform for information about installing license
keys.
enable job scheduler
Summary information
Status Dynamic
enable job scheduler determines whether Job Scheduler starts when Adaptive
Server starts.

enable ldap user auth
Summary information
Valid values 0 (off) – allows only syslogins authentication.
1 (on) – allows both LDAP and syslogins
authentication.
2 (on) – allows only LDAP authentication.
Status Dynamic
When enable ldap user auth is 1, Adaptive Server searches the LDAP server to
authenticate each user. If the LDAP authentication fails, Adaptive Server
searches syslogins to authenticate the user. Use level 1 when you are migrating
users from Adaptive Server authentication to LDAP authentication.
enable literal autoparam
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values 1 (enabled), 0 (disabled)
Status Dynamic
enable literal autoparam enables and disables literal server-wide

parameterization.
enable logins during recovery
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic

Summary information
enable logins during recovery determines whether non-system administrator

logins are allowed during database recovery. A value of 1 indicates that logins
are allowed during recovery, and a value of 0 indicates that logins are not
allowed during recovery, that is, only the system administrator can log in to
Adaptive Server.
enable merge join
Summary information
Default value 2
Range of values 0 – disables merge joins at the server level.
1 – enables merge joins at the server level.
2 – sets merge joins to their default values at the
server level.
Status Dynamic
enable merge join enables or disables merge join at the server level.
The default value for merge join depends on current value of the optimization
goal configuration parameter:
Value for optimization goal Default value for merge join

allrows_mix on
allrows_dss on
allrows_oltp off
enable metrics capture
Summary information
Status Dynamic

Summary information
enable metrics capture enables Adaptive Server to capture metrics at the server
level. Metrics for ad hoc statements are captured in the system catalogs;
metrics for statements in a stored procedure are saved in the procedure cache.
enable monitoring
Summary information
Status Dynamic
enable monitoring controls whether Adaptive Server collects the monitoring

table data. enable monitoring acts as a master switch that determines whether
any Monitoring configuration parameters are enabled.
enable pam user auth
Summary information
Range of values 0 (off) – allows only syslogins authentication.
1 (on) – allows both PAM and syslogins authentication.
2 (on) – allows only PAM authentication.
Status Dynamic
enable pam user auth controls the ability to authenticate users using pluggable
authentication modules (PAM).

When enable pam user auth is set to 1, Adaptive Server uses the PAM provider
to authenticate each user. If the PAM authentication fails, Adaptive Server
searches syslogins to authenticate the user. Use level 1 when you are migrating
users from Adaptive Server authentication to PAM authentication.
enable pci
Summary information
Valid values 0 (off), 1 (on), 2 (on with operating system
override)
Status Dynamic
Required role System Administrator
Configuration group User Environment
enable pci enables or disables the Java PCI Bridge for Adaptive Server.
Note Do not use setting “2” (on with operating system override) unless
instructed to do so by Sybase Technical Support. This setting enables the PCI
Bridge on operating system versions that may not fully or correctly support
PCI functionality.
enable query tuning mem limit
Summary information
Status Dynamic
enable query tuning mem limit enables the query tuning memory limit.

enable query tuning time limit
Summary information
Status Intermediate
enable query tuning time limit enables the query tuning time limit.
enable real time messaging
Summary information
Status Dynamic
enable real time messaging enables the real time messaging services.
enable rep agent threads
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Rep Agent Thread Administration
enable rep agent threads enables the RepAgent thread within Adaptive Server.
Other steps are also required to enable replication. For more information, see
the Replication Server documentation.

enable row level access control
Summary information
Status Dynamic
enable row level access control enables row level access control. You must have
the security services license key enabled before you can configure enable row
level access control.
enable semantic partitioning
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
enable semantic partitioning enables partitioning other than round-robin (for

example list, hash, and range partitioning) in Adaptive Server. Before you use
any of these partitioning schemes, you must first have the appropriate license.
enable sort-merge join and JTC
Summary information
Status Dynamic

Used when Adaptive Server is in compatibility mode. Once enabled, when

Adaptive Server compiles a query in compatibility mode, enable sort-merge
join and JTC allows the query processor to select a sort merge or a nested loop
join. enable sort-merge join and JTC enables join transitive closure (JTC),
which allows the query processor for releases earlier than 15.0 to use additional
join clauses.
For more information about compatibility mode, see the Migration Technology
Guide.
enable sql debugger
Summary information
Status Static
Enables and disables the Adaptive Server SQL debugger, which allows you to
step through your T-SQL code.
enable ssl
Summary information
Status Static
enable ssl enables or disables Secure Sockets Layer session-based security.
enable stmt cache monitoring
Summary information

Summary information
Status Dynamic
Required role System administration
enable stmt cache monitoring enables or disables Adaptive Server to collect

monitoring information about the statement cache. Once enabled,
monStatementCache and monCachedStatement display valid data.
enable surrogate processing
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Activates the processing and maintains the integrity of surrogate pairs in

Unicode data. If enable surrogate processing is disabled, the server ignores the
presence of surrogate pairs in the Unicode data, and all code that maintains the
integrity of surrogate pairs is skipped. This enhances performance, but restricts
the range of Unicode characters that can appear in the data.
enable unicode conversion
Summary information
Default value 1
Range of values 0 – uses only the built-in character-set conversion.
1 – uses the built-in conversion. If it cannot find a
built-in conversion, Adaptive Server uses the
Unilib character conversion
2 – uses the appropriate Unilib conversion
Status Dynamic

Summary information
Configuration groups Languages, Unicode
enable unicode conversion activates character conversion using Unilib for the
char, varchar, and text datatypes.
enable unicode normalization
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Activates Unilib character normalization. The normalization process modifies

the data so there is only a single representation in the database for a given
sequence of abstract characters. Often, characters followed by combined
diacritics are replaced by precombined forms.
Set enable unicode normalization to 1 to use the built-in process that enforces
normalization on all incoming Unicode data. If this parameter is disabled (set
to 0), the normalization step is bypassed and the client code is responsible for
normalization rather than the server. If normalization is disabled, performance
is improved—but only if all clients present Unicode data to the server using the
same representation.
Note Once disabled, you can turn normalization on again. This prevents non-
normalized data from entering the data base.
enable webservices
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

Summary information
Enables Webservices.
enable xact coordination
Summary information
Status Static
Display level 10
enable xact coordination enables or disables Adaptive Server transaction

coordination services. When this parameter is set to 1 (on), coordination
services are enabled, and the server can propagate transactions to other
Adaptive Servers. This may occur when a transaction executes a remote
procedure call (RPC) to update data in another server, or updates data in
another server using Component Integration Services (CIS). Transaction
coordination services ensure that updates to remote Adaptive Server data
commit or roll back with the original transaction.
If this parameter is set to 0 (off), Adaptive Server does not coordinate the work
of remote servers. Transactions can still execute RPCs and update data using
CIS, but Adaptive Server cannot ensure that remote transactions are rolled
back with the original transaction or that remote work is committed along with
an original transaction, if remote servers experience a system failure. This
corresponds to the behavior of Adaptive Server versions earlier than version
12.x.
enable xml
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

Summary information
Enables XML services.
engine memory log size
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Display level
Required role
engine memory log size is for diagnostic use only and has no relevance in a
production environment. It should be left at the default setting unless otherwise
requested by Sybase Tech Support.
errorlog pipe active
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
errorlog pipe active controls whether Adaptive Server collects error log
messages. If both errorlog pipe active and errorlog pipe max messages are
enabled, Adaptive Server collects all the messages sent to the error log. Use
monErrorLog to retrieve these error log messages.

errorlog pipe max messages
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
errorlog pipe max messages determines the number of error log messages
monSQLText table is the value of sql text pipe max messages times the number
of engines running.
esp execution priority
Summary information
Default value 8
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Extended Stored Procedure
esp execution priority sets the priority of the XP Server thread for ESP
execution. Over long periods of time ESPs can be CPU-intensive. Also, since
XP Server resides on the same machine as Adaptive Server, XP Server can
impact Adaptive Server performance.
See the Open Server Server-Library/C Reference Manual for information
about scheduling Open Server threads.
esp execution stacksize
Summary information
Default value 34816
Status Static

Summary information
esp execution stacksize sets the size of the stack, in bytes, to be allocated for
ESP execution.
Use this parameter if you have your own ESP functions that require a larger
stack size than the default, 34816.
esp unload dll
Summary information
Status Dynamic
esp unload dll specifies whether DLLs that support ESPs should be
automatically unloaded from XP Server memory after the ESP call has
completed.
If esp unload dll is set to 0, DLLs are not automatically unloaded. If it is set to
1, they are automatically unloaded.
If esp unload dll is set to 0, you can still unload individual DLLs explicitly at
runtime, using sp_freedll.
event buffers per engine
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Static

event buffers per engine specifies the number of events per Adaptive Server
engine that can be monitored simultaneously by Adaptive Server Monitor.
Events are used by Adaptive Server Monitor for observing Adaptive Server
performance; if you are not using Adaptive Server Monitor, set this parameter
to 1.
The value to which you set event buffers per engine depends on the number of
engines in your configuration, the level of activity on your Adaptive Server,
and the types of applications you are running.
Setting event buffers per engine to a low value may result in the loss of event
information. The default value is likely to be too low for most sites. Values of
2000 and greater may be more reasonable for general monitoring. However,
experiment to determine the appropriate value for your site.
In general, setting event buffers per engine to a high value may reduce the
amount of performance degradation that Adaptive Server Monitor causes
Adaptive Server.
Each event buffer uses 100 bytes of memory. To determine the total amount of
memory used by a particular value for event buffers per engine, multiply the
value by the number of Adaptive Server engines in your configuration.
event log computer name (Windows only)
Summary information
Default value LocalSystem
Valid values • Name of an Windows machine on the network
configured to record Adaptive Server messages
• LocalSystem
• NULL
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Error Log
event log computer name specifies the name of the Windows PC that logs
Adaptive Server messages in its Windows Event Log. This feature is available
on Windows servers only.
A value of LocalSystem or NULL specifies the default local system.
You can also use the Server Config utility to set the event log computer name
parameter by specifying the Event Log Computer Name under Event Logging.

Setting the event log computer name parameter with sp_configure or specifying
the Event Log Computer Name under Event Logging overwrites the effects of
the command line -G option, if it was specified. If Adaptive Server was started
with the -G option, you can change the destination remote machine by setting
event log computer name.
For more information about logging Adaptive Server messages to a remote

site, see the Configuration Guide for Windows.
event logging (Windows only)
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
event logging enables and disables the logging of Adaptive Server messages in
the Windows Event Log.
The default value of 1 enables Adaptive Server message logging in the
Windows Event Log; a value of 0 disables it.
Use the Server Config utility to set the event logging parameter by selecting Use
Windows Event Logging under Event Logging.
Setting the event logging parameter or selecting Use Windows Event Logging
overwrites the effects of the command line -G option, if it was specified.
executable codesize + overhead
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Calculated
Display level Basic
Configuration group Memory Use

executable codesize + overhead reports the combined size, in kilobytes, of the

Adaptive Server executable and overhead. This a calculated value that is not
user-configurable.
extended cache size
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
Configuration group Cache Manager
extended cache size specifies the size of the secondary cache.
FIPS login password encryption
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
Configuration group Security related
Enabling FIPS login password encryption requires a Security and Directory

Services license. This parameter provides FIPS 140-2 cryptographic module
support for encrypting passwords in transmission, in memory, and on disk.
Adaptive Server uses the FIPS 140-2 certified Certicom security provider for
login encryption. If this configuration is not enabled, Adaptive Server uses the
OpenSSL security provider to perform login password encryption.
global async prefetch limit
Summary information
Default value 10

Summary information
Status Dynamic
global async prefetch limit specifies the percentage of a buffer pool that can hold
the pages brought in by asynchronous prefetch that have not yet been read. This
parameter sets the limit for all pools in all caches for which the limit has not
been set explicitly with sp_poolconfig.
If the limit for a pool is exceeded, asynchronous prefetch is temporarily
disabled until the percentage of unread pages falls below the limit. See Chapter
6, “Tuning Asynchronous Prefetch” in the Performance and Tuning Series:
Basics.
global cache partition number
Summary information
Default value 1
Range of values 1 – 64, as powers of 2
Status Static
global cache partition number sets the default number of cache partitions for all
data caches. The number of partitions for a particular cache can be set using
sp_cacheconfig; the local value takes precedence over the global value.
Use cache partitioning to reduce cache spinlock contention; in general, if

spinlock contention exceeds 10 percent, partitioning the cache should improve
performance. Doubling the number of partitions cuts spinlock contention by
about one-half.
See Chapter 4, “Configuring Data Caches,” in the System Administration
Guide: Volume 2 for information on configuring cache partitions. Also see
Chapter 6, “Tuning Asynchronous Prefetch” in the Performance and Tuning
Series: Basics.

heap memory per user
Summary information
Default value 4K
Valid values 0 – 2147483647 bytes
Status Dynamic
heap memory per user configures the amount of heap memory per user. A heap
memory pool is an internal memory created at start-up that tasks use to
dynamically allocate memory as needed. This memory pool is important if you
are running tasks that use wide columns, which require a lot of memory from
the stack. The heap memory allocates a temporary buffer that enables these
wide column tasks to finish. The heap memory the task uses is returned to the
heap memory pool when the task is finished.
The size of the memory pool depends on the number of user connections.
Sybase recommends that you set heap memory per user to three times the size
of your logical page.
histogram tuning factor
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Dynamic
histogram tuning factor controls the number of steps Adaptive Server analyzes
per histogram for update statistics, update index statistics, update all statistics,
and create index. A value of 1 disables the parameter.
Note For Adaptive Server versions 15.0.2 ESD #2 and later, if you set
histogram tuning factor to the default value of 20 and a large number of steps are
requested for the histogram, the actual step count used for the histogram is
limited to the value that reduces the procedure cache usage:

min (max (400, requested_steps),

histogram_tuning_factor X requested_steps)
In the following example, Adaptive Server generates an intermediate 20-step

histogram with 30 values:
sp_configure 'histogram tuning factor',20
update statistics tab using 30 values
Adaptive Server analyzes the histogram and compresses it into the resulting
histogram according to the following parameters:
• The first step is copied unchanged.
• The high-frequency steps are copied unchanged.
• The consecutive range steps are collapsed into the resulting step, so the
total weight of the collapsed step is no bigger than one-thirtieth of the
value.
The final histogram in sysstatistics:
• Has range steps generated in a way similar for a 30-step update statistics,
and high frequency ranges are isolated as if the histogram were created
with 600 steps.
• The total number of steps in the resulting histogram may differ between 30
and 600 values.
• For equally distributed data, the value should be very close to 30.
• More “frequent” values in the table means more steps in the histogram.
• If a column has few different values, all those values may appear as high-
frequency cells.
You can achieve the same result by increasing the number of histogram steps to
600, but this uses more resources in the buffer and procedure cache
histogram tuning factor minimizes the resources histograms consume, and
increases resource usage only when it is in the best interest for optimization,
for example, when there is uneven distribution of data in a column, or highly
duplicated values within a column. In this situation, up to 600 histogram steps
are used. However, in most cases, histogram tuning factor uses the default value
(30 in the example above).

housekeeper free write percent
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
housekeeper free write percent specifies the maximum percentage by which the
housekeeper wash task can increase database writes.
For example, to stop the housekeeper task from working when the frequency
of database writes reaches 5 percent above normal, set housekeeper free write
percent to 5.
When Adaptive Server has no user tasks to process, the housekeeper wash task
automatically begins writing changed pages from cache to disk. These writes
result in improved CPU utilization, decreased need for buffer washing during
transaction processing, and shorter checkpoints.
In applications that repeatedly update the same database page, the housekeeper
wash may initiate some unnecessary database writes. Although these writes
occur only during the server’s idle cycles, they may be unacceptable on
systems with overloaded disks.
The table and index statistics that are used to optimize queries are maintained
in memory structures during query processing. When these statistics change,
the changes are not written to the systabstats table immediately, to reduce I/O
contention and improve performance. Instead, the housekeeper chores task
periodically flushes statistics to disk.
The default value allows the housekeeper wash task to increase disk I/O by a
maximum of 1 percent. This results in improved performance and recovery
speed on most systems.
To disable the housekeeper wash task, set the value of housekeeper free write
percent to 0.
Set this value to 0 only if disk contention on your system is high, and it cannot
tolerate the extra I/O generated by the housekeeper wash task.
If you disable the housekeeper tasks, keep statistics current. Commands that
write statistics to disk are:

• update statistics
• dbcc checkdb (for all tables in a database) or dbcc checktable (for a single
table)
• sp_flushstats
Run one of these commands on any tables that have been updated since the last
time statistics were written to disk, at the following times:
• Before dumping a database
• Before an orderly shutdown
• After restarting, following a failure or orderly shutdown; in these cases,
you cannot use sp_flushstats—you must use update statistics or dbcc
commands
• After any significant changes to a table, such as a large bulk copy
operation, altering the locking scheme, deleting or inserting large numbers
of rows, or performing a truncate table command
To allow the housekeeper wash task to work continuously, regardless of the
percentage of additional database writes, set housekeeper free write percent to
100.
Use sp_sysmon to monitor housekeeper performance. See the Performance
and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.
You might also want to look at the number of free checkpoints initiated by the
housekeeper task. The Performance and Tuning Series: Basics describes this
output.
i/o accounting flush interval
Summary information
Default value 1000
Status Dynamic
i/o accounting flush interval specifies the amount of time, in machine clock ticks,
that Adaptive Server waits before flushing I/O statistics for each user from
sysprocesses to syslogins. This is used for charge-back accounting.

When a user logs in to Adaptive Server, the server begins accumulating I/O
statistics for that user process in sysprocesses. When the value of i/o accounting
statistics interval is exceeded, or a user logs off Adaptive Server, the
accumulated I/O statistics for that user are flushed from sysprocesses to
syslogins. These statistics continue accumulating in syslogins until you clear
the totals by using sp_clearstats. You can display the current totals from
syslogins by using sp_reportstats.
The value to which you set i/o accounting flush interval depends on the type of
reporting you intend to do. If you run reports on a monthly basis, set i/o
accounting flush interval to a relatively high value. With infrequent reporting, it
is less critical that the data in syslogins be updated frequently.
If you perform periodic ad hoc selects on the totio column syslogins to
determine I/O volume by process, set i/o accounting flush interval to a lower
value. Doing so increases the likelihood of the data in syslogins being current
when you execute your selects.
If you do not report on I/O statistics at all, set i/o accounting flush interval to its
maximum value. This reduces the number of times syslogins is updated and the
number of times its pages must be written to disk.
i/o batch size
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
i/o batch size sets the number of writes issued in a batch before the task goes to
sleep. Once this batch is completed, the task is woken up, and the next batch of
writes are issued, ensuring that the I/O subsystem is not flooded with many
simultaneous writes. Setting i/o batch size to the appropriate value can improve
the performance of operations like checkpoint, dump database, select into, and
so on.

i/o polling process count
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Dynamic
i/o polling process count specifies the maximum number of processes that
Adaptive Server can run before the scheduler checks for disk and network I/O
completions. Tuning i/o polling process count affects both the response time and
throughput of Adaptive Server.
Adaptive Server checks for disk or network I/O completions:
• If the number of tasks run since the last time Adaptive Server checked for
I/O completions equals the value for i/o polling process count, and
• At every Adaptive Server clock tick.
As a general rule, increasing the value of i/o polling process count increases
throughput for applications that generate a lot of disk and network I/O.
Conversely, decreasing the value improves process response time in these
applications, possibly at the risk of lowering throughput.
If your applications create both I/O and CPU-bound tasks, tuning i/o polling
process count to a low value (1 – 2) ensures that I/O-bound tasks get access to
CPU cycles.
For OLTP applications (or any I/O-bound application with user connections
and short transactions), tuning i/o polling process count to a value in the range
of 20 – 30 may increase throughput, but may also increase response time.
When tuning i/o polling process count, consider three other parameters:
• sql server clock tick length, which specifies the duration of the Adaptive
Server clock tick in microseconds. See “sql server clock tick length” on
page 244.
• time slice, which specifies the number of clock ticks the the Adaptive
Server scheduler allows a user process to run. See “time slice” on page
258.

• cpu grace time, which specifies the maximum amount of time, in clock
ticks, a user process can run without yielding the CPU before Adaptive
Server preempts it and terminates it with a timeslice error. See “cpu grace
time” on page 103.
Use sp_sysmon to determine the effect of changing i/o polling process count.
See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server with
sp_sysmon.
identity burning set factor
Summary information
Default value 5000
Status Static
IDENTITY columns are of type numeric and scale zero whose values are
generated by Adaptive Server. Column values can range from a low of 1 to a
high determined by the column precision.
For each table with an IDENTITY column, Adaptive Server divides the set of
possible column values into blocks of consecutive numbers, and makes one
block at a time available in memory. Each time you insert a row into a table,
Adaptive Server assigns the IDENTITY column the next available value from
the block. When all the numbers in a block have been used, the next block
becomes available.
This method of choosing IDENTITY column values improves server
performance. When Adaptive Server assigns a new column value, it reads the
current maximum value from memory and adds 1. Disk access becomes
necessary only after all values within the block have been used. Because all
remaining numbers in a block are discarded in the event of server failure (or
shutdown with nowait), this method can lead to gaps in IDENTITY column
values.
Use identity burning set factor to change the percentage of potential column
values that is made available in each block. This number should be high
enough for good performance, but not so high that gaps in column values are
unacceptably large. The default value, 5000, releases .05 percent of the
potential IDENTITY column values for use at one time.

To get the correct value for sp_configure, express the percentage in decimal
form, and then multiply it by 10 7 (10,000,000). For example, to release 15
percent (.15) of the potential IDENTITY column values at a time, specify a
value of .15 times 107 (or 1,500,000) in sp_configure.
identity grab size
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
identity grab size allows each Adaptive Server process to reserve a block of
IDENTITY column values for inserts into tables that have an IDENTITY
column.
This is useful if you are performing inserts, and you want all the inserted data
to have contiguous IDENTITY numbers. For instance, if you are entering
payroll data, and you want all records associated with a particular department
to be located within the same block of rows, set identity grab size to the number
of records for that department.
identity grab size applies to all users on Adaptive Server. Large identity grab size
values result in large gaps in the IDENTITY column when many users insert
data into tables with IDENTITY columns.
Sybase recommends that you set identity grab size to a value large enough to
accommodate the largest group of records you want to insert into contiguous
rows.
identity reservation size
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic

Summary information
identity reservation size sets a limit for the number of identity values.
idle migration timeout
Summary information
Default value 60
Valid values 0 – 32767
Status Dynamic
idle migration timeout specifies the amount of time after which an idle
connection is closed without invalidating the migration request sent to the
client, allowing you to stop an instance after a specified period of time without
waiting for idle client connections to migrate.
Setting idle migration timeout to a high value slows down a graceful shutdown
because the instance must wait the specified period of time for all idle
connections that issued a migration request without the client having initiated
migration.
job scheduler interval
Summary information
Default value 1 (in minutes)
Status Dynamic
job scheduler interval sets the interval when the Job Scheduler checks which
scheduled jobs are due to be executed.

job scheduler tasks
Summary information
Default value 32
Status Dynamic
job scheduler tasks sets the maximum number of jobs that can run
simultaneously through Job Scheduler.
license information
Summary information
Default value 25
Valid values 0–231
Status Dynamic
license information allows Sybase system administrators to monitor the number

of user licenses used in Adaptive Server. Enabling this parameter only
monitors the number of licenses issued; it does not enforce the license
agreement.
If license information is set to 0, Adaptive Server does not monitor license use.
If license information is set to a number greater than 0, the housekeeper chores
task monitors the number of licenses used during the idle cycles in Adaptive
Server. Set license information to the number of licenses specified in your
license agreement.
If the number of licenses used is greater than the number to which license
information is set, Adaptive Server writes this message to the error log:
WARNING: Exceeded configured number of user licenses
At the end of each 24-hour period, the maximum number of licenses used
during that time is added to the syblicenseslog table. The 24-hour period
restarts if Adaptive Server is restarted.

See “Monitoring license use” on page 473.
lock address spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Static
For Adaptive Servers running with multiple engines, the address lock spinlock
ratio sets the number of rows in the internal address locks hash table that are
protected by one spinlock.
Adaptive Server manages the acquiring and releasing of address locks using an
internal hash table with 1031 rows (known as hash buckets). This table can use
one or more spinlocks to serialize access between processes running on
different engines.
The default value for address lock spinlock ratio defines 11 spinlocks for the
address locks hash table. The first 10 spinlocks protect 100 rows each, and the
eleventh spinlock protects the remaining 31 rows. If you specify a value of
1031 or greater for address lock spinlock ratio, Adaptive Server uses only 1
spinlock for the entire table.
lock hashtable size
Summary information
Default value 2048
Status Static
Configuration groups Lock Manager, Memory Use

lock hashtable size specifies the number of hash buckets in the lock hash table.
This table manages all row, page, and table locks, and all lock requests. Each
time a task acquires a lock, the lock is assigned to a hash bucket, and each lock
request for that lock checks the same hash bucket. Setting this value too low
results in large numbers of locks in each hash bucket and slows the searches.
On Adaptive Servers with multiple engines, setting this value too low can also
lead to increased spinlock contention. Do not set the value to less than the
default value, 2048.
lock hashtable size must be a power of 2. If the value you specify is not a power
of 2, sp_configure rounds the value to the next highest power of 2 and prints an
informational message.
The optimal hash table size is a function of the number of distinct objects
(pages, tables, and rows) that can be locked concurrently. The optimal hash
table size is at least 20 percent of the number of distinct objects that need to be
locked concurrently. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and
Concurrency Control.
lock scheme
Summary information
Default value allpages
Range of values allpages, datapages, datarows
Status Dynamic
lock scheme sets the default locking scheme to be used by create table and
select into commands when a lock scheme is not specified in the command.
The values for lock scheme are character data, so you must use 0 as a
placeholder for the second parameter, which must be numeric, and specify
allpages, datapages, or datarows as the third parameter:
sp_configure "lock scheme", 0, datapages
lock shared memory
Summary information

Summary information
Status Static
lock shared memory disallows swapping of Adaptive Server pages to disk and
allows the operating system kernel to avoid the server’s internal page locking
code. This can reduce disk reads, which are expensive.
Not all platforms support shared memory locking. Even if your platform does,
lock shared memory may fail due to incorrectly set permissions, insufficient
physical memory, or for other reasons. See operating system documentation for
your platform for information on shared memory locking.
lock spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 85
Status Static
Adaptive Server manages the acquiring and releasing of locks using an internal
hash table with a configurable number of hash buckets. On SMP systems, this
hash table can use one or more spinlocks to serialize access between processes
running on different engines. To set the number of hash buckets, use lock
hashtable size.
For Adaptive Servers running with multiple engines, lock spinlock ratio sets a
ratio that determines the number of lock hash buckets that are protected by one
spinlock. If you increase lock hashtable size, the number of spinlocks
increases, so the number of hash buckets protected by one spinlock remains the
same.
The Adaptive Server default value for lock spinlock ratio is 85. With lock
hashtable size set to the default value of 2048, the default spinlock ratio defines
26 spinlocks for the lock hash table. See Chapter 5, Managing Mulitprocessor
Servers,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.

sp_sysmon reports on the average length of the hash chains in the lock hash
table. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server
with sp_sysmon.
lock table spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Static
For Adaptive Servers running with multiple engines, table lock spinlock ratio
sets the number of rows in the internal table locks hash table that are protected
by one spinlock.
Adaptive Server manages the acquiring and releasing of table locks using an
internal hash table with 101 rows (known as hash buckets). This table can use
one or more spinlocks to serialize access between processes running on
different engines.
The Adaptive Server default value for table lock spinlock ratio is 20, which
defines 6 spinlocks for the table locks hash table. The first 5 spinlocks protect
20 rows each; the sixth spinlock protects the last row. If you specify a value of
101 or greater for table lock spinlock ratio, Adaptive Server uses only 1 spinlock
for the entire table.
lock wait period
Summary information
Default value 2147483647
Status Dynamic

lock wait period limits the number of seconds that tasks wait to acquire a lock
on a table, data page, or data row. If the task does not acquire the lock within
the specified time period, Adaptive Server returns error message 12205 to the
user and rolls back the transaction.
The lock wait option of the set command sets a session-level number of seconds
that a task waits for a lock. It overrides the server-level setting for the session.
lock wait period, used with the session-level setting set lock wait nnn, is
applicable only to user-defined tables. These settings have no influence on
system tables.
At the default value, all processes wait indefinitely for locks. To restore the
default value, reset the value to 2147483647 or enter:
sp_configure "lock wait period", 0, "default"
log audit logon failure
Summary information
Status Dynamic
log audit logon failure specifies whether to log unsuccessful Adaptive Server
logins to the Adaptive Server error log and, on Windows servers, to the
Windows Event Log, if event logging is enabled.
log audit logon success
Summary information
Status Dynamic

log audit logon success specifies whether to log successful Adaptive Server
logins to the Adaptive Server error log and, on Windows servers, to the
Windows Event Log, if event logging is enabled.
max async i/os per engine
Summary information
Default value Platform dependent
Range of values 1– platform-dependent value
Status Static
Configuration group O/S Resources
max async i/os per engine specifies the maximum number of outstanding
asynchronous disk I/O requests for a single engine at one time.
On the Linux platform

On the Linux platform, max async i/os per engine controls the number of
asynchronous IOs each engine reserves from the operating system when the
machine starts. Your system may benefit from using a number greater than the
default value.
You can use sp_sysmon to help tune max async i/os per engine. sp_sysmon’s
disk i/o section contains information about the maximum number of
outstanding IOs for each engine during the sample period and the number of
I/Os that were delayed because of engine or operating system limits. Generally,
any I/Os delayed by engine limits indicate that you should increase the value
of max async i/os per engine.
Whether Adaptive Server can perform asynchronous IO on a device depends
on whether or not this device support kernel asynchronous I/O (KAIO). The
Linux kernel requires that you implement kernel asynchronous I/O support at
the file system level. Most major file systems provide support for kernel
asynchronous I/O, including ext3, xfs, jfs, and raw devices. The tmpfs file
system does not support kernel asynchronous I/O. If the device does not
support kernel asynchronous I/O, Adaptive Server cannot perform
asyncronous IO on that device, and instead reverts to standard synchronous IO
for all reads and writes to that device. Adaptive Server prints a message similar
to the following in the error log indicating that the device has switched to
synchronous IO:

00:00000:00001:2006/12/15 11:47:17.98 kernel Virtual device

'/dev/shm/tempdb.dat' does not support kernel asynchronous i/o. Synchronous i/o
will be used for this device.
max async i/os per server
Summary information
Default value Platform dependent
Range of values 1– platform dependent value
Status Static
max async i/os per server specifies the maximum number of asynchronous disk
I/O requests that can be outstanding for Adaptive Server at one time. This limit
is not affected by the number of online engines per Adaptive Server. max async
i/os per engine limits the number of outstanding I/Os per engine.
Most operating systems limit the number of asynchronous disk I/Os that can be
processed at any one time; some operating systems limit the number per
operating system process, some limit the number per system, and some do
both. If an application exceeds these limits, the operating system returns an
error message. Because operating system calls are relatively expensive, it is
inefficient for Adaptive Server to attempt to perform asynchronous I/Os that
get rejected by the operating system.
To avoid this, Adaptive Server maintains a count of the outstanding
asynchronous I/Os per engine and per server; if an engine issues an
asynchronous I/O that would exceed either max async i/os per engine or max
async i/os per server, Adaptive Server delays the I/O until enough outstanding
I/Os have completed to fall below the exceeded limit.
For example, assume an operating system limit of 200 asynchronous I/Os per
system and 75 per process and an Adaptive Server with three online engines.
The engines currently have a total of 200 asynchronous I/Os pending,
distributed according to the following table:
Number of
Engine I/Os pending Outcome
0 60 Engine 0 delays any further asynchronous I/Os until the total for the server is under the
operating system per-system limit and then continues issuing asynchronous I/Os.

Number of
Engine I/Os pending Outcome
1 75 Engine 1 delays any further asynchronous I/Os until the per-engine total is under the
operating system per-process limit and then continues issuing asynchronous I/Os.
2 65 Engine 2 delays any further asynchronous I/Os until the total for server is under the
operating system per-system limit and then continues issuing asynchronous I/Os.
All I/Os (both asynchronous and synchronous) require a disk I/O structure, so
the total number of outstanding disk I/Os is limited by the value of disk i/o
structures. It is slightly more efficient for Adaptive Server to delay the I/O
because it cannot get a disk I/O structure than because the I/O request exceeds
max i/os per server. Set max async i/os per server equal to the value of disk i/o
structures. See “disk i/o structures” on page 115.
If the limits for asynchronous I/O can be tuned on your operating system, make
sure they are set high enough for Adaptive Server. There is no penalty for
setting them as high as needed.
Use sp_sysmon to see if the per server or per engine limits are delaying I/O on
your system. If sp_sysmon shows that Adaptive Server exceeded the limit for
outstanding requests per engine or per server, raise the value of the
corresponding parameter. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring
Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.
max cis remote connections
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
max cis remote connections specifies the maximum number of concurrent

Client-Library connections that can be made to remote servers by Component
Integration Services.
By default, Component Integration Services allows up to four connections per
user to be made simultaneously to remote servers. If you set the maximum
number of users to 25, as many as 100 simultaneous Client-Library
connections are allowed by Component Integration Services.

If this number does not meet the needs of your installation, you can override
the setting by specifying exactly how many outgoing Client-Library
connections you want the server to be able to make at one time.
max concurrently recovered db
Summary information
Default value 0
Valid values 1– number of engines at start-up minus 1
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Backup/Recovery
max concurrently recovered db determines the degree of parallelism. The

minimum value is 1, which uses serial recovery, but you can also use the
default value of 0, to use a self-tuning approach. The maximum value is the
number of engines at start-up minus 1. max concurrently recovered db is also
limited by the value of the configuration parameter number of open databases.
max memory
Summary information
Default value Platform-dependent
Range of values Platform-dependent minimum – 2147483647
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
max memory specifies the maximum amount of total physical memory that you
can configure Adaptive Server to allocate. max memory must be greater than
the total logical memory consumed by the current configuration of Adaptive
Server.
There is no performance penalty for configuring Adaptive Server to use the
maximum memory available to it on your computer. However, assess the other
memory needs on your system, or Adaptive Server may not be able to acquire
enough memory to start.

See see Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System Administration Guide:

Volume 2.
If Adaptive Server cannot start

When allocate max shared memory is set to 1, Adaptive Server must have the
amount of memory available that is specified by max memory. If the memory
is not available, Adaptive Server does not start. If this occurs, reduce the
memory requirements for Adaptive Server by manually changing the value of
max memory in the server’s configuration file. You can also change the value
of allocate max shared memory to 0 so that not all memory required by max
memory is required at start-up.
You may also want to reduce the values for other configuration parameters that
require large amounts of memory. Then restart Adaptive Server to use the
memory specified by the new values. If Adaptive Server fails to start because
the total of other configuration parameter values is higher than the max memory
value, see Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2 for information about configuration parameters that use memory.
max native threads per engine
Summary information
Default value 50
Maximum values 50 – 1000
Status Dynamic
max native threads per engine defines the maximum number of native threads
the server spawns per engine. When the limit for the native threads is reached,
Adaptive Server sessions that require a native thread sleep until another session
releases a native thread.
max nesting level

In Adaptive Server 15.0.3 and later, the maximum nesting level has been
increased to 100, and the default value to 50.
Summary information
Default value 50

Summary information
Status Static
Configuration group User environment
maximum nesting level sets the maximum nesting level for stored procedures
and triggers. Each increased nesting level requires about 160 bytes of
additional memory. For example, if you increase the nesting level from 16 to
26, Adaptive Server requires an additional 1600 bytes of memory.
max network packet size
Summary information
Default value 512
Status Static
max network packet size specifies the maximum network packet size that can
be requested by clients communicating with Adaptive Server.
If some of your applications send or receive large amounts of data across the
network, these applications can achieve significant performance improvement
by using larger packet sizes. Two examples are large bulk copy operations and
applications that read or write large text, unitext, and image values.
Generally, you want:
• default network packet size to be small for users who perform short queries,
and
• max network packet size to be large enough to allow users who send or
receive large volumes of data to request larger packet sizes.
max network packet size must always be as large as, or larger than, the default
network packet size. Values that are not even multiples of 512 are rounded
down.

For client applications that explicitly request a larger network packet size to
receive, you must also configure additional network memory. See “additional
network memory” on page 83.
Open Client Server cannot accept a network packet size greater than 64K.
See bcp and isql in the Utility Guide for information on using larger packet sizes
from these programs. Open Client Client-Library documentation includes
information on using variable packet sizes.
Choosing packet sizes

For best performance, choose a server packet size that works efficiently with
the underlying packet size on your network. The goals are:
• Reducing the number of server reads and writes to the network
• Reducing unused space in network packets (increasing network
throughput)
For example, if your network packet size carries 1500 bytes of data, setting the
Adaptive Server packet size to 1024 (512*2) will probably achieve better
performance than setting it to 1536 (512*3). Figure 5-3 shows how four
different packet size configurations would perform in such a scenario.

Figure 5-3: Factors in determining packet size

Underlying network packets: 1500 bytes after overhead
Packet size 512

Used 1024 bytes
Unused 476 bytes
Depending on amount of data, network packets may have
% Used: 68%
1 or 2 packets
2 server reads
Packet size 1024

Used 1024 bytes
Unused 476 bytes Should yield improved performance over default of 512
% Used: 68%
1 server read
Packet size 2560

Used 2560 bytes
Unused 440 bytes
% Used 85%
2 server reads
Possibly the best option of illustrated choices
Packet size 1536

Used 1536 bytes
Unused 1464 bytes
% Used 51%
2 server reads
Probably the worst option of illustrated choices
Key:
Overhead Data Unused
After you determine the available data space of the underlying packets on your
network, perform your own benchmark tests to determine the optimum size for
your configuration.

Use sp_sysmon to see how changing max network packet size affects network
I/O management and task switching. For example, try increasing max network
packet size and then checking sp_sysmon output to see how this affects bcp for
large batches. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive
Server with sp_sysmon.
max number network listeners
Summary information
Default value 5
Status Static
Configuration groups Memory Use, Network Communication
max number network listeners specifies the maximum number of network

listeners allowed by Adaptive Server at one time.
Each master port has one network listener. Generally, there is no need to have
multiple master ports, unless your Adaptive Server must communicate over
more than one network type. Some platforms support both socket and TLI
(Transport Layer Interface) network interfaces. See the Configuration Guide
for your platform for information on supported network types.
max online engines
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Static
Configuration groups Memory Use, Processors
The role of max online engines is to set a high value of engines to be taken
online at any one time in an SMP environment. It does not take the number of
CPUs available at start-up into account, and allows users to add CPUs at a later
date.

max engines online specifies the maximum number of Adaptive Server engines
that can be online at any one time in an SMP environment. See Chapter 5,
Managing Mulitprocessor Servers,” in System Administration Guide: Volume
2 for a detailed discussion of how to set this parameter for your SMP
environment.
At start-up, Adaptive Server starts with a single engine and completes its
initialization, including recovery of all databases. Its final task is to allocate
additional server engines. Each engine accesses common data structures in
shared memory.
When tuning the max engines online parameter:
• Never have more online engines than there are CPUs.
• Depending on overall system load (including applications other than
Adaptive Server), you may achieve optimal throughput by leaving some
CPUs free to run non-Adaptive Server processes.
• You can achieve better throughput by running fewer engines with high
CPU use, rather than by running more engines with low CPU use.
• Scalability is application-dependent. Conduct extensive benchmarks on
your application to determine the best configuration of online engines.
• You can use sp_engine to take engines offline or to bring them online. You
can take all engines offline except engine zero.
See Chapter 3, “Using Engines and CPUs” in the Performance and Tuning
Series: Basics .
max online Q engines
Summary information
Default value 0
Status static
Configuration group
max online Q engines required for MQ. Specifies the maximum number of Q
engines you can have online. You may need to increase max online engines to
accommodate the number of max online Q engines.

max parallel degree
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
max parallel degree specifies the server-wide maximum number of worker

processes allowed per query. This is called the “maximum degree of
parallelism.”
If max parallel degree is too low, the performance gain for a given query may
not be as significant as possible; if max parallel degree is too high, the server
may compile plans that require more processes than are actually available at
execution time, or the system may become saturated, resulting in decreased
throughput. To enable parallel partition scans, set this parameter to be equal to
or greater than the number of partitions in the table you are querying.
The value of this parameter must be less than or equal to the current value of
number of worker processes.
If you set max parallel degree to 1:

• Adaptive Server scans all tables or indexes serially.
• Adaptive Server forces serial query execution and the optimizer may
select plans with a higher parallel degree than if it is disabled.
Changing max parallel degree causes all query plans in the procedure cache to
be invalidated, and new plans are compiled the next time you execute a stored
procedure or trigger.
See Chapter 9, “Parallel Sorting” in the Performance and Tuning Series:
Query Processing and Abstract Plans.
max pci slots
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static

Summary information
Sets the maximum number of PCI slots Adaptive Server allows. The values
are:
• 0, 1 – default bridge with one PCA.
Note JVM support requires a single slot. Do not increase the number of
slots.
• 2 – 30 – allocated for future releases.

For more information about PCI slots, see Java in Adaptive Server Enterprise.
max query parallel degree
Summary information
Default value 1
Status Static
Used when Adaptive Server is in compatibility mode. Defines the number of

worker processes to use for a given query. This parameter is relevant only if
you do not want to enable parallelism globally. The value for number of worker
process cannot be less than the value for max query parallel degree.
See Chapter 5, “Parallel Query Processing,” in the Performance and Tuning

Series: Query Processing and Abstract Plans.
For more information about compatibility mode, see the Migration Technology
Guide.

max repartition degree
Summary information
Default value 1
Range of values 1 – value of max parallel degree
Status Dynamic
max repartition degree configures the amount of dynamic repartitioning

Adaptive Server requires, which enables Adaptive Server to use horizontal
parallelism. However, if the number of partitions is too large, the system is
flooded with worker processes that compete for resources, which degrades
performance. The value for max repartition degree enforces the maximum
number of partitions created for these resources. If all of the tables and indexes
are unpartitioned, Adaptive Server uses the value for max repartition degree to
provide the number of partitions to create as a result of repartitioning the data.
max resource granularity
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Dynamic
max resource granularity indicates the maximum percentage of the system’s

resources a query can use. This parameter is not enforced at execution time, but
is only a guide for the query optimizer, and does not prevent the query
processor from running queries in parallel. The query engine can avoid some
memory-intensive strategies by using max resource granularity as a guide.
max scan parallel degree
Summary information
Default value 1

Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
max scan parallel degree specifies the server-wide maximum degree of

parallelism for hash-based scans which may be used for the following access
methods:
• Parallel index scans for partitioned and nonpartitioned tables
• Parallel table scans for nonpartitioned tables
max scan parallel degree applies per table or index; that is, if max scan parallel
degree is 3, and one table in a join query is scanned using a hash-based table
scan and the second can best be accessed by a hash-based index scan, the query
can use 9 worker processes (as long as max scan parallel degree is set to 9 or
higher.
The optimizer uses max scan parallel degree as a guideline when it selects the
number of processes to use for parallel, nonpartition-based scan operations. It
does not apply to parallel sort. Because there is no partitioning to spread the
data across devices, parallel processes can be accessing the same device during
the scan. This can cause additional disk contention and head movement, which
may degrade performance. To prevent multiple disk accesses from becoming a
problem, use max scan parallel degree to reduce the maximum number of
processes that can access the table in parallel.
If this number is too low, the performance gain for a given query is not as
significant as possible; if the number is too large, the server may compile plans
that use enough processes to make disk access less efficient. A general rule is
to set this parameter to no more than 2 or 3, because it takes only 2 to 3 worker
processes to fully utilize the I/O of a given physical device.
Set the value of max scan parallel degree to less than or equal to the current
value of max parallel degree. Adaptive Server returns an error if you specify a
number larger than the max parallel degree value.
If you set max scan parallel degree to 1, Adaptive Server does not perform hash-
based scans.
Changing max scan parallel degree causes all query plans in the procedure
cache to be invalidated, and new plans are compiled the next time you execute
a stored procedure or trigger.

max SQL text monitored
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
max SQL text monitored specifies the amount of memory allocated per user
connection for saving SQL text to memory shared by Adaptive Server Monitor.
If you do not allocate enough memory for the batch statements, the text you
want to view may be truncated. Sybase recommends that you use an initial
value of 1024 bytes of memory per user connection.
The total memory allocated from shared memory for the SQL text is the
product of max SQL text monitored multiplied by the currently configured
number of user connections.
See “Configuring Adaptive Server to save SQL batch text” on page 373.
max transfer history
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Adaptive Server Administration
max transfer history controls how many transfer history entries Adaptive Server
retains in the spt_TableTransfer table in each database. For each table tracked,
spt_TableTransfer retains:
(N successful entries) + (N unsuccessful entries)

Where N is the value for max transfer history.

Lowering this parameter does not automatically remove any entries from
spt_TableTransfer. Entries are removed for a given transferred table the next
time you initiate a transfer for that table. The table’s successful transfer entries
are cleared if the transfer succeeds. If the transfer is unsuccessful, its failed
transfer entries are cleared.
For example, if a table has 12 successful and 9 unsuccessful history entries in
spt_configure, and you change max transfer history to 5, the next successful
transfer of that table places 5 successful entries in spt_configure, but
spt_configure retains the previous 9 failed entries.
maximum dump conditions
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Static
maximum dump conditions sets the maximum number of conditions you can
specify under which Adaptive Server generates a dump of data in shared
memory.
Note This parameter is included for use only by Sybase Technical Support. Do
not modify it unless you are instructed to do so by Sybase Technical Support.
max buffers per lava operator
Summary information
Default value 2048
Status Dynamic

maximum buffers per lava opeator sets an upper limit for the number of buffers
used by Lava operators that perform sorting or hashing (which are “expensive”
in terms of processing). Lava operators use buffers from the session’s tempdb
data cache pool as a work area for processing rows.
Lava operators often recurse through their input streams. Sorting requires
subsequent merge passes until there are enough buffers available to merge all
of the remaining runs. Hashing requires subsequent passes to build hash tables
on any spilled sets until all of the remaining data can fit into an in-memory hash
table. Some queries require less I/O if you increase max buffers per lava
operator. This is particularly true for queries that use the HASH DISTINCT,
HASH VECTOR AGGREGATE, and HASH UNION operators.
Be careful when you increase the default value of maximum buffers per lava
operator for servers with many concurrent users: Adaptive Server may allocate
more buffers solely for expensive operators, reducing the number of buffers
available for caching user’s tables and other session’s worktables. Use
sp_sysmon to analyze tempdb's data caching effectiveness.
maximum buffers per lava operator works with max resource granularity to limit
the number of buffers used. The limit is set to the minimum of:
• The value of maximum buffers per lava operator, or,
• (max resource granularity) X (the number of data buffers in tempdb’s
pagesize pool)
See “number of sort buffers” on page 206 for information about setting the
amount of memory allocated for sort buffers.
maximum failed logins
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values -1 – 32767
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
maximum failed logins allows you to set the server-wide maximum number of
failed login attempts for logins and roles.

A value of -1 indicates that the failed login count in the syslogins column
logincount is updated whenever an authentication failure occurs, but that the
account is not locked. Compare with a 0 (zero) value, which avoids
incrementing the column for every failed authentication and avoids locking the
account due to authentication failures.
See the Reference Manual: Procedures for information about using
sp_modifylogin to change the maximum failed logins for a specific role. See the
Reference Manual: Commands for information about using alter role to change
the maxiumum failed logins.
maximum job output
Summary information
Default value 32768
Status Dynamic
maximum job output sets limit, in bytes, on the maximum output a single job can
produce. If a job produces more output than specified in maximum job output,
all the data returned above the value you enter is discarded.
memory alignment boundary
Summary information
Default value Logical page size
Range of values 2048a – 16384
a. Minimum determined by server’s logical page size
Status Static
memory alignment boundary determines the memory address boundary on

which data caches are aligned.

Some machines perform I/O more efficiently when structures are aligned on a
particular memory address boundary. To preserve this alignment, values for
memory alignment boundary should always be powers of two between the
logical page size and 2048K.
Note The memory alignment boundary parameter is included for support of

certain hardware platforms. Do not modify it unless you are instructed to do so
by Sybase Technical Support.
memory per worker process
Summary information
Default value 1024
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
memory per worker process specifies the amount of memory, in bytes, used by
worker processes. Each worker process requires memory for messaging during
query processing. This memory is allocated from a shared memory pool; the
size of this pool is memory per worker process multiplied by number of worker
processes. For most query processing, the default size is more than adequate.
If you use dbcc checkstorage, and have set number of worker processes to 1, you
may need to increase memory per worker process to 1792 bytes.
See Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.
messaging memory
Summary information
Default value 400
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Memory Use, Physical Memory

Configures the amount of memory available for Sybase messaging.
metrics elap max
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
metrics elap max configures maximum elapsed time and thresholds for QP
metrics
metrics exec max
Summary information
Default value 0
Status dynamic
metrics exec max configures maximum execution time and thresholds for QP
metrics.
metrics lio max
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

metrics lio max configures maximum logical I/O and thresholds for QP metrics.
metrics pio max
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Configuration group
metrics pio max configures maximum physical I/O and thresholds for QP
metrics.
min pages for parallel scan
Summary information
Default value 200
Range of values 20 - 2147483647
Status dynamic
min pages for parallel scan controls the number of tables and indexes that
Adaptive Server can access in parallel. If the number of pages in a table is
below the value you set, the table is accessed serially. min pages for parallel scan
does not consider page size. If Adaptive Server accesses the indexes and tables,
Adaptive Server attempts to repartition the data, if that is appropriate, and to
use parallelism above the scans, if that is appropriate.
minimum password length
Summary information
Default value 6
Status Dynamic

Summary information
Display level 10
minimum password length allows you to customize the length of server-wide

password values or per-login or per-role password values. The per-login or per-
role minimum password length value overrides the server-wide value. Setting
minimum password length affects only the passwords you create after you have
set the value; existing password lengths are not changed.
Use minimum password length to specify a server-wide value for minimum
password length for both logins and roles. For example, to set the minimum
password length for all logins and roles to 4 characters, enter:
sp_configure "minimum password length", 4
To set minimum password length for a specific login at creation, use
sp_addlogin. For example, to create the new login “joe” with the password
“Djdiek3”, and set minimum password length for “joe” to 4, enter:
sp_addlogin joe, "Djdiek3", minimum password length=4
To set minimum password length for a specific role at creation, use create role.
To create the new role “intern_role” with the password “temp244” and set the
minimum password length for “intern_role” to 0, enter:
create role intern_role with passwd "temp244", minimum password length 0

The original password is seven characters, but the password can be changed to
one of any length because the minimum password length is set to 0.
Use sp_modifylogin to set or change minimum password length for an existing
login. sp_modifylogin only effects user roles, not system roles. For example, to
change minimum password length for the login “joe” to 8 characters, enter:
sp_modifylogin "joe", @option="minimum password length", @value="8"
Note The value parameter is a character datatype; therefore, quotes are

required for numeric values.
To change the value of the overrides for minimum password length for all logins
to 2 characters, enter:
sp_modifylogin "all overrides", "minimum password length", @value="2"
To remove the overrides for minimum password length for all logins, enter:

sp_modifylogin "all overrides", @option="minimum password length", @value="-1"

Use alter role to set or change the minimum password length for an existing role.
For example, to set the minimum password length for “physician_role”, an
existing role, to 5 characters, enter:
alter role physician_role set minimum password length 5
To override the minimum password length for all roles, enter:
alter role "all overrides" set minimum password length -1
mnc_full_index_filter
Summary information
Default value 2
• 0 – disable.
• 1 – enable.
• 2 – set according to the optimization goal setting.
Status Dynamic
Required roles System administrator
mnc_full_index_filter prevents Adaptive Server from considering noncovered

indexes that do not have a limiting search argument at the server level, if there
is:
• A column in the index
• A predicate that does not have a histogram
You can use mnc_full_index_filter on data-only-locked (DOL) tables in which
you have the intelligent index scan, even though the intelligent index scan
manufactures search arguments.
Changing the value of mnc_full_index_filter does not increase the amount of
memory Adaptive Server uses.
mnc_full_index_filter is not enabled for any specific optional goal; the only way
to obtain the behavior is to explicitly enable it.

msg confidentiality reqd
Summary information
Status Dynamic
msg confidentiality reqd requires that all messages into and out of Adaptive
Server be encrypted. The use security services parameter must be 1 for
messages to be encrypted.
msg integrity reqd
Summary information
Status Dynamic
msg integrity reqd requires that all messages be checked for data integrity. use
security services must be 1 for message integrity checks to occur. If msg
integrity reqd is set to 1, Adaptive Server allows the client connection to
succeed unless the client is using one of the following security services:
message integrity, replay detection, origin checks, or out-of-seq checks.
net password encryption required
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

net password encryption reqd restricts login authentication to use only RSA
encryption algorithm or the Sybase proprietary algorithm. Table 5-3 describes
valid values for net password encryption reqd.
Table 5-3: Values and descriptions for net password encryption reqd
Value Description
0 Allows the client to choose the encryption algorithm used for login passwords on the network,
including no password encryption.
1 Restricts clients to use either RSA or Sybase proprietary encryption algorithms to encrypt login
passwords on the network. This provides an incrementally restrictive setting that allows clients who
have previously connect to reconnect with the Sybase proprietary algorithm and new clients to
connect with the stronger RSA algorithm. A client that attempts to connect without using password
encryption fails.
2 Restricts clients to use only the RSA encryption algorithms to encrypt login passwords on the
network. This provides strong RSA encryption of passwords. Clients that attempt to connect without
using the RSA encryption fail.
When a connection is refused because network password encryption is

required, the client receives:
Msg 1640, Level 16, State 2:
Adaptive Server requires encryption of the login
password on the network.
number of alarms
Summary information
Default value 40
Status Dynamic
number of alarms specifies the number of alarm structures allocated by

Adaptive Server.
The Transact-SQL command waitfor defines a specific time, time interval, or
event for the execution of a statement block, stored procedure, or transaction.
Adaptive Server uses alarms to correctly execute waitfor commands. Other
internal processes require alarms.

When Adaptive Server needs more alarms than are currently allocated, this
message is written to the error log:
uasetalarm: no more alarms available
The number of bytes of memory required for each alarm structure is small. If
you raise the number of alarms value significantly, adjust max memory
accordingly.
number of aux scan descriptors
Summary information
Default value 200
Status Dynamic
number of aux scan descriptors sets the number of auxiliary scan descriptors
available in a pool shared by all users on a server.
Each user connection and each worker process has 48 scan descriptors
exclusively allocated to it. Of these, 16 are reserved for user tables, 12 are
reserved for worktables, and 20 are reserved for system tables (with 4 of these
set aside for rollback conditions). A descriptor is needed for each table
referenced, directly or indirectly, by a query. For user tables, a table reference
includes:
• All tables referenced in the from clause of the query
• All tables referenced in a view named in the query (the view itself is not
counted)
• All tables referenced in a subquery
• All tables that need to be checked for referential integrity (these are used
only for inserts, updates, and deletes)
• A table created with select...into
• All worktables created for the query

If a table is referenced more than once (for example, in a self-join, in more than
one view, or in more than one subquery) the table is counted each time. If the
query includes a union, each select statement in the union query is a separate
scan. If a query runs in parallel, the coordinating process and each worker
process needs a scan descriptor for each table reference.
When the number of user tables referenced by a query scan exceeds 16, or the
number of worktables exceeds 12, scan descriptors from the shared pool are
allocated. Data-only-locked tables also require a system table descriptor for
each data-only-locked table accessed with a table scan (but not those accessed
with an index scan). If more than 16 data-only-locked tables are scanned using
table scans in a query, auxiliary scan descriptors are allocated for them.
If a scan needs auxiliary scan descriptors after it has used its allotted number,
and there are no descriptors available in the shared pool, Adaptive Server
displays an error message and rolls back the user transaction.
If none of your queries need additional scan descriptors, you may still want to
leave number of aux scan descriptors set to the default value in case your system
requirements grow. Set it to 0 only if you are sure that users on your system will
never run queries on more than 16 tables and that your tables will always have
few or no referential integrity constraints. See “Monitoring scan descriptor
usage” on page 185.
If your queries need more scan descriptors, use one of these methods to remedy
the problem:
• Rewrite the query, or break it into steps using temporary tables. For data-
only-locked tables, consider adding indexes if there are many table scans.
• Redesign the table’s schema so that it uses fewer scan descriptors, if it uses
a large number of referential integrity constraints. You can find how many
scan descriptors a query would use by enabling set showplan, noexec on
before running the query.
• Increase the number of aux scan descriptors setting.
The following sections describe how to use sp_monitorconfig to monitor the
current and high-water-mark usage to avoid running out of descriptors, and
how to estimate the number of scan descriptors you need.

Monitoring scan descriptor usage

sp_monitorconfig reports the number of unused (free) scan descriptors, the
number of auxiliary scan descriptors currently being used, the percentage that
is active, and the maximum number of scan descriptors used since the server
was last started. Run it periodically, at peak periods, to monitor scan descriptor
use.
This example shows scan descriptor use with 500 descriptors configured:
sp_monitorconfig "aux scan descriptors"
Usage information at date and time: Apr 22 2002 2:49PM.
Name num_free num_active pct_act Max_Used Reused
-------------- -------- --------- -------- -------- ------
number of aux 260 240 48.00 427 NA
Only 240 auxiliary scan descriptors are being used, leaving 260 free. However,
the maximum number of scan descriptors used at any one time since the last
time Adaptive Server was started is 427, leaving about 20 percent for growth
in use and exceptionally heavy use periods. “Re-used” does not apply to scan
descriptors.
Estimating and configuring auxiliary scan descriptors

To get an estimate of scan descriptor use:
1 Determine the number of table references for any query that references
more than 16 user tables, or for those that have a large number of
referential constraints, by running the query with set showplan and set
noexec enabled. If auxiliary scan descriptors are required, showplan
reports the number needed:
Auxiliary scan descriptors required: 17
The reported number includes all auxiliary scan descriptors that are
required for the query, including those for all worker processes. If your
queries involve only referential constraints, you can also use
sp_helpconstraint, which displays a count of the number of referential
constraints per table.
2 For each query that uses auxiliary scan descriptors, estimate the number of
users who would run the query simultaneously and multiply. If 10 users are
expected to run a query that requires 8 auxiliary descriptors, a total of 80
will be needed at any one time.
3 Add the per-query results to calculate the number of needed auxiliary scan
descriptors.

number of backup connections
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
number of backup connections sets the maximum number of user connections

Backup Server establishes to dump or load in-memory databases. The value of
number of backup connections restricts the maximum number of stripes for an
archived database because Backup Server requires one user connection per
stripe when you run dump or load database, and requires an extra connection
to run the dump database command.
number of backup connections is a limit, and does not consume any resources.
Setting number of backup connections to 0 means that Backup Server can use
the maximum number of user connections.
number of ccbs
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
Display level
Required role
number of checkpoint tasks
Summary information
Default value 1
Valid values 1– 8
Status Dynamic

Summary information
number of checkpoint tasks configures parallel checkpoints. The value of

number of checkpoint tasks must be less than or equal to the value of number
of engines at start-up. The maximum value is limited by the value of the
configuration parameters number of engines online at startup and number of
open databases, with a maximum of 8.
The default value sets serial checkpoints as the default behavior.
number of devices
Summary information
Default value 10
Range of values 1–2,147,483,647
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Disk I/O, Memory Use
number of devices controls the number of database devices Adaptive Server can
use. It does not include devices used for database or transaction log dumps.
When you execute disk init, you can also assign the virtual device number (the
vdevno), although this value is optional. If you do not assign the vdevno,
Adaptive Server assigns the next available virtual device number.
If you do assign the virtual device number, each device number must be unique
among the device numbers used by Adaptive Server. The number 0 is reserved
for the master device. You can enter any unused device number that falls in the
valid range of values.
To determine which numbers are currently in use, enter:
select vdevno from master..sysdevices
where status & 2 = 2

Here, “status 2” specifies physical disk.
Note On UNIX platforms: If you are using a large number of devices, Sybase
recommends that you set the appropriate number of devices and user
connections in the configuration file and then restart Adaptive Server.
Attempting to configure a large number of devices dynamically using
sp_configure may fail.
number of dtx participants
Summary information
Default value 500
Valid values 100 – 2147483647
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
Configuration groups DTM Administration, Memory Use
number of dtx participants sets the total number of remote transactions that the
Adaptive Server transaction coordination service can propagate and coordinate
simultaneously. A DTX participant is an internal memory structure that the
coordination service uses to manage a remote transaction branch. As
transactions are propagated to remote servers, the coordination service must
obtain new DTX participants to manage those branches.
Setting number of dtx participants to a number smaller than the default reduces
the number of remote transactions that the server can manage. If no DTX
participants are available, new distributed transactions cannot start. In-progress
distributed transactions may abort if no DTX participants are available to
propagate a new remote transaction.
Setting number of dtx participants to a number larger than the default increases
the number of remote transaction branches that Adaptive Server can handle,
but also consumes more memory.
Optimizing the number of DTX participants for your system

During a peak period, use sp_monitorconfig to examine the use of DTX
participants:
sp_monitorconfig "number of dtx participants"


-------------- -------- ---------- --------- -------- ------
number of dtx 80 20 4.00 210 NA
If the num_free value is zero or very low, new distributed transactions may be
unable to start due to a lack of DTX participants. Consider increasing the
number of dtx participants value.
A low Max_used value may indicate that unused DTX participants are
consuming memory that could be used by other server functions. Consider
reducing the value of number of dtx participants.
number of dump threads
Summary information
Default value Disabled
Range of values 1 (disabled, no parallelism) – 8 (fully parallel)
Status Dynamic
number of dump threads controls the number of threads that Adaptive Server
spawns to perform a memory dump. Using the appropriate value for number of
dump threads can reduce the amount of time the engines are halted during the
memory dump.
When you are determining the number of threads for memory:
• Use a value of 8 if the machine has enough free memory for the file system
cache to hold the entire memory dump.
• If you do not know whether the machine has enough free memory, the
value for number of dump threads depends on many factors, including the
speed of the I/O system, the speed of the disks, the controller’s cache,
whether the dump file lives in a logical volume manager created on several
disks, and so on.
• Disable parallel processing (by assigning a value of 1) if you do not halt
the engines when performing memory dumps, described below.

When Adaptive Server performs a memory dump, the number of files it

creates is the sum of the number of memory segments that it has allocated
multiplied by the number of threads configured. Adaptive Server uses
separate threads to write on separate files. When this job completes, the
engines are restarted, and the files are merged into the target dump file.
Because of this, the time to dump the shared memory in parallel is greater
than doing it serially.
• If you halt the engines during the memory dump, using a value other than
1 may reduce the amount of time the engines spend stopped while
dumping the memory.
number of engines at startup
Summary information
Default value 1
Range of values 1 – number of CPUs on machine
Status Static
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Java Services, Memory Use, Processors
Adaptive Server allows users to take all engines offline, except engine zero.
number of engines at startup is used exclusively during start-up to set the
number of engines brought online. It allows great flexibility in the number of
engines brought online, subject to the restriction that you cannot set the value
of number of engines at startup to a value greater than the number of CPUs on
your machine, or to a value greater than the configuration of max online
engines. Users who do not intend to bring engines online after start-up should
set max online engines and number of engines at startup to the same value. A
difference between number of engines at startup and max online engines wastes
approximately 1.8 MB of memory per engine.
number of histogram steps
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Dynamic

Summary information
number of histogram steps specifies the number of steps in a histogram.
number of index trips
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
number of index trips specifies the number of times an aged index page traverses
the most recently used/least recently used (MRU/LRU) chain before it is
considered for swapping out. As you increase the value of number of index trips,
index pages stay in cache for longer periods of time.
A data cache is implemented as an MRU/LRU chain. As the user threads
access data and index pages, these pages are placed on the MRU end of the
cache’s MRU/LRU chain. In some high transaction environments (and in some
benchmarks), you may want to keep index pages in cache, since they will
probably be needed again soon. Setting number of index trips higher keeps index
pages in cache longer; setting it lower allows index pages to be swapped out of
cache sooner.

You need not set the number of index trips for relaxed LRU pages. See Chapter
4, “Configuring Data Caches,” in the System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
Note If the cache used by an index is relatively small (especially if it shares

space with other objects) and you have a high transaction volume, do not set
number of index trips too high. The cache can flood with pages that do not age
out, and this may lead to the timing out of processes that are waiting for cache
space.
Before changing the value of number of index trips to a number other than 0,
make sure the application has sufficient cache to store all index, OAM, and
data pages. Consult Sybase Technical Support before changing the value of
number of index trips.
number of java sockets
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Java Services, Memory Use
number of java sockets enables the Java VM and the java.net classes Sybase
supports.
number of large i/o buffers
Summary information
Default value 6
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Disk I/O, Memory Use, SQL Server Administration

number of large i/o buffers sets the number of allocation unit-sized buffers
reserved for performing large I/O for certain Adaptive Server utilities. These
large I/O buffers are used primarily by the load database command, which uses
one buffer to load the database, regardless of the number of stripes it specifies.
load database then uses as many as 32 buffers to clear the pages for the
database it is loading. These buffers are not used by load transaction. To
perform more than six load database commands concurrently, configure one
large I/O buffer for each load database command.
create database and alter database use these buffers for large I/O while clearing
database pages. Each instance of create database or load database can use as
many as 32 large I/O buffers.
These buffers are also used by disk mirroring and by some dbcc commands.
Note In Adaptive Server version 12.5.0.3 and later, the size of the large I/O
buffers is one allocation (256 pages), not one extent (8 pages). The server thus
requires more memory allocation for large buffers. For example, a disk buffer
that required memory for 8 pages in earlier versions now requires memory for
256 pages.
number of locks
Summary information
Default value 5000
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
number of locks sets the total number of available locks for all users on
Adaptive Server.
The total number of locks needed by Adaptive Server depends on the number
of concurrent and parallel processes, and the types of actions performed by the
transactions. To see how many locks are in use at a particular time, use sp_lock.
For serial operation, Sybase suggests that you start by assigning 20 locks for
each active, concurrent connection.

Parallel execution requires more locks than serial execution. For example, if
you find that queries use an average of five worker processes, try increasing by
one-third the number of locks configured for serial operation.
If the system runs out of locks, Adaptive Server displays a server-level error
message. If users report lock errors, you may need to increase number of locks;
but remember that locks use memory. See Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,”
in the System Administration Guide Volume 2.
Note Datarows locking may require that you change the value for number of
locks. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency
Control.
number of mailboxes
Summary information
Default value 30
Status Dynamic
number of mailboxes specifies the number of mailbox structures allocated by

Adaptive Server. Mailboxes, which are used with messages, are used internally
by Adaptive Server for communication and synchronization between kernel
service processes. Mailboxes are not used by user processes. Do not modify
this parameter unless instructed to do so by Sybase Technical Support.
number of messages
Summary information
Default value 64
Status Dynamic

number of messages specifies the number of message structures allocated by

Adaptive Server. Messages, which are used with mailboxes, are used internally
by Adaptive Server for communication and synchronization between kernel
service processes. Messages are also used to coordinate between a family of
processes in parallel processing. Do not modify this parameter unless
instructed to do so by Sybase Technical Support.
number of oam trips
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
number of oam trips specifies the number of times an object allocation map
(OAM) page traverses the MRU/LRU chain before it is considered for
swapping out. The higher the value of number of oam trips, the longer aged
OAM pages stay in cache.
Each table, and each index on a table, has an OAM page, which holds
information on pages allocated to the table or index and is checked when a new
page is needed for the index or table. (See “page utilization percent” on page
216. ) A single OAM page can hold allocation mapping for between 2,000 and
63,750 data or index pages.
The OAM pages point to the allocation page for each allocation unit where the
object uses space. The allocation pages, in turn, track the information about
extent and page usage within the allocation unit.

In some environments and benchmarks that involve significant allocations of

space (that is, massive bulk copy operations), keeping OAM pages in cache
longer improves performance. Setting number of oam trips to a higher value
keeps OAM pages in cache.
Note If the cache is relatively small and used by a large number of objects, do
not set number of oam trips too high. This may result in the cache being flooded
with OAM pages that do not age out, and user threads may begin to time out.
Before changing the value of number of oam trips to a number other than 0,
make sure the application has sufficient cache to store all index, OAM, and
data pages. Consult Sybase Technical Support before changing the value of
number of oam trips.
number of open databases
Summary information
Default value 12
Range of values 6 –2147483647
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Meta-Data Caches, SQL Server
Administration
number of open databases sets the maximum number of databases that can be
open simultaneously on Adaptive Server.
When you calculate a value, include the system databases master, model,
sybsystemprocs, and tempdb. If you have installed auditing, include the
sybsecurity database. Also, count the sample databases pubs2 and pubs3, the
syntax database sybsyntax, and the dbcc database dbccdb if they are installed.
If you are planning to make a substantial change, such as loading a large
database from another server, use sp_helpconfig to calculate an estimated
metadata cache size by using sp_helpconfig. sp_helpconfig displays the amount
of memory required for a given number of metadata descriptors, as well as the
number of descriptors that can be accommodated by a given amount of
memory. A database metadata descriptor represents the state of the database
while it is in use or cached between uses.

❖ Optimizing the number of open databases

If Adaptive Server displays a message saying that you have exceeded the
allowable number of open databases, adjust the value.
1 Use sp_countmetadata to find the total number of database metadata
descriptors:
sp_countmetadata "open databases"
The best time to run sp_countmetadata is when there is little activity on the
server. Running sp_countmetadata during a peak time can cause
contention with other processes.
Suppose Adaptive Server reports the following information:
There are 50 databases, requiring 1719 Kbytes of
memory. The 'open databases' configuration parameter
is currently set to 500.
2 Configure number of open databases with the value of 50:
sp_configure "number of open databases", 50
This new configuration number is only a starting point; base the ideal size
on the number of active metadata database cache descriptors, not the total
number of databases.
3
During a peak period, find the number of active metadata descriptors:
sp_monitorconfig "open databases"
-------------- -------- --------- -------- -------- ------
number of open 50 20 40.00 26 No
In this example, 20 metadata database descriptors are active; the

maximum number of descriptors that have been active since the server was
last started is 26.
See sp_monitorconfig in the Reference Manual: Procedures for more
information.
4 Configure number of open databases to 26, plus additional space for 10
percent more (about 3), for a total of 29:
sp_configure "number of open databases", 29

If there is a lot of activity on the server, for example, if databases are being
added or dropped, periodically run sp_monitorconfig. Reset the cache size
as the number of active descriptors changes.
number of open indexes
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Meta-Data Caches
number of open indexes sets the maximum number of indexes that can be used
simultaneously on Adaptive Server.
If you are planning to make a substantial change, such as loading databases
with a large number of indexes from another server, use sp_helpconfig to
calculate an estimated metadata cache size. sp_helpconfig displays the amount
of memory required for a given number of metadata descriptors, as well as the
number of descriptors that can be accommodated by a given amount of
memory. An index metadata descriptor represents the state of an index while it
is in use or cached between uses.
❖ Optimizing number of open indexes

If the default value of number of open indexes is insufficient, Adaptive Server
displays a message after trying to reuse active index descriptors, and you must
adjust this value.
1
Use sp_countmetadata to find the total number of index metadata
descriptors:
sp_countmetadata "open indexes"
The best time to run sp_countmetadata is when there is little activity in the
There are 698 user indexes in all database(s),
requiring 286.289 Kbytes of memory. The 'open

indexes' configuration parameter is currently set to

500.
2 Configure the number of open indexes parameter to 698:
sp_configure "number of open indexes", 698
This new configuration is only a starting point; base the ideal size on the
number of active index metadata cache descriptors, not the total number
of indexes.
3 During a peak period, find the number of active index metadata
descriptors:
sp_monitorconfig "open indexes"
-------------- -------- --------- -------- -------- ------
number of open 182 516 73.92 590 No
In this example, 590 is the maximum number of index descriptors that

have been used since the server was last started.
See sp_monitorconfig in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
4 Configure the number of open indexes configuration parameter to 590, plus
additional space for 10 percent more (59), for a total of 649:
sp_configure "number of open indexes", 649
If there is a lot of activity on the server, for example, if tables are being
added or dropped, periodically run sp_monitorconfig. Reset the cache size
as the number of active descriptors changes.
number of open objects
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Meta-Data Caches, SQL Server
Administration

number of open objects sets the maximum number of objects that can be open
simultaneously on Adaptive Server.
If you are planning to make a substantial change, such as loading databases
with a large number of objects from another server, use sp_helpconfig to
recalculate an estimated metadata cache size. sp_helpconfig displays the
amount of memory required for a given number of metadata descriptors, as
well as the number of descriptors that can be accommodated by a given amount
of memory. An object metadata descriptor represents the state of an object
while it is in use, or cached between uses.
❖ Optimizing number of open objects

If the default number of open objects is insufficient, Adaptive Server displays a
message after trying to reuse active object descriptors.
1 Use sp_countmetadata to find the total number of object metadata cache
descriptors:
sp_countmetadata "open objects"
Suppose Adaptive Server reports this information:
There are 1340 user objects in all database(s),
requiring 1443 Kbytes of memory. The 'open objects'
configuration parameter is currently set to 500.
2 Configure number of open objects to account for the number of open
objects:
sp_configure "number of open objects", 1407
1407 covers the 1340 user objects, plus 5 percent to accommodate
temporary tables.
This new configuration is only a starting point; base the ideal number on
the active object metadata cache descriptors, not the total number of
objects.
3 During a peak period, find the number of active metadata cache
descriptors:
sp_monitorconfig "open objects"
Usage information at date and time: Aug 20 2007 1:32PM..
Name Num_free Num_active Pct_act Max_Used
Num_reuse

-------------- -------- --------- -------- --------

------
number of open objects 560 847 71.40 1497
0
In this example, 1497 is the maximum number of object descriptors that
4 Configure the number of open objects to 1397, plus 10 percent (140), for a
total of 1537:
sp_configure "number of open objects", 1537
If there is a lot of activity on the server, for example, if tables are being added
or dropped, periodically run sp_monitorconfig. Reset the cache size as the
number of active descriptors changes. See sp_monitorconfig in the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
number of open partitions
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Meta-Data Caches
Specifies the number of partitions that Adaptive Server can access at one time.
Optimizing the If the default value of number of open partitions is insufficient, Adaptive Server
number of open displays a message after trying to reuse active partition descriptors. You must
partitions parameter
for your system adjust this value.
1 Use sp_countmetadata to find the total number of open partitions. For
example:
sp_countmetadata "open partitions"
There are 42 user partitions in all database(s),
requiring 109 Kbytes of memory. The 'open

partitions' configuration parameter is currently set

to 110.
2 Configure number of open partitions to 110, as reported by
sp_countmetadata:
sp_configure "number of open partitions", 110
3 During a peak period, find the number of active metadata cache
descriptors, for example:
sp_monitorconfig "open partitions"
Usage information at date and time: Jun 30 2008 3:15PM.
Name Num_free Num_active Pct_act

Max_Used Reuse_cnt
--------------------------- -------------- --------- --------
----------- ---------
number of open partitions 27 57 51.8
83 0
In this example, 83 is the maximum number of partition descriptors that
4 Configure the number of open partitions to 83, plus 10 percent (8), for a
total of 91:
sp_configure "number of open partitions", 91
If there is a lot of activity on the server, for example, if tables are being added
or dropped, periodically run sp_monitorconfig. Reset the cache size as the
number of active descriptors changes. See sp_monitorconfig in the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
number of pre-allocated extents
Summary information
Default value 2
Status Dynamic

number of pre-allocated extents specifies the number of extents (eight pages)

allocated in a single trip to the page manager. Currently, this parameter is used
only by bcp to improve performance when copying in large amounts of data.
By default, bcp allocates two extents at a time and writes an allocation record
to the log each time.
Setting number of pre-allocated extents means that bcp allocates the specified
number of extents each time it requires more space, and writes a single log
record for the event.
An object may be allocated more pages than actually needed, so the value of
number of pre-allocated extents should be low if you are using bcp for small
batches. If you are using bcp for large batches, increase the value of number of
pre-allocated extents to reduce the amount of overhead required to allocate
pages and to reduce the number of log records.
Using a value of 32 for the number of pre-allocated extents

Using a value of 32 for number of pre-allocated extents has a special
significance for configuration and impacts the space allocations Adaptive
Server performs internally. If you set number of pre-allocated extents to 32,
Adaptive Server reserves an entire allocation unit worth of extents for utility
operations like bcp-in and select into, both of which use the large-scale
allocation scheme of space reservation. This greatly improves the performance
of these utilities, particularly when you run them concurrently on multiple
nodes. Consequently, using a value of 32 guarantees that each node of a cluster
is able to work independently on its own allocation unit without interference
from the other nodes.
In earlier versions of Adaptive Server, the number of pre-allocated extents
parameter specified the number of extents reserved in a single allocation call
for tables of all sizes.
With this version of Adaptive Server, the value of number of pre-allocated
extents is ignored for large tables with 240 or more pages for these commands
only:
• alter table table_name add column_name . . .
• alter table table_name modify column_name . . .
• alter table table_name drop column_name . . .
• alter table lock . . .
• reorg rebuild

When you run these command on tables larger than 240 pages, Adaptive Server
reserves an entire allocation unit (32 extents), which greatly improves
performance, particularly when you run them concurrently on multiple nodes.
The value of number of pre-allocated extents continues to be observed for the
above commands for tables with fewer than 240 pages, and for all commands
(such as select into, bcp, alter table partition) for tables of all sizes.
number of Q engines at startup
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Static
Configuration group Processors
number of Q engines at startu, which specifies the number of Q engines that are
online when the server starts, is required for MQ. You may need to increase
max online engines to accommodate the number of max online Q engines.
number of remote connections
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Static
number of remote connections specifies the number of logical connections that

can simultaneously be open to and from an Adaptive Server. Each
simultaneous connection to XP Server for ESP execution uses up to one remote
connection each. See Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers.”

number of remote logins
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Static
number of remote logins controls the number of active user connections from
Adaptive Server to remote servers. Each simultaneous connection to XP Server
for ESP execution uses up to one remote login each. Set this parameter to the
same (or a lower) value as number of remote connections. See Chapter 15,
“Managing Remote Servers.”
number of remote sites
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Static
number of remote sites determines the maximum number of remote sites that
can simultaneously access Adaptive Server. Each Adaptive Server-to-XP
Server connection uses one remote site connection.
Internally, number of remote sites determines the number of site handlers that
can be active at any one time; all server accesses from a single site are managed
with a single site handler. For example, if you set number of remote sites to 5,
and each site initiates three remote procedure calls, sp_who shows 5 site
handler processes for the 15 processes. See Chapter 15, “Managing Remote
Servers.”

number of sort buffers
Summary information
Default value 500
Status Dynamic
number of sort buffers specifies the amount of memory allocated for buffers
used to hold pages read from input tables and perform index merges during
sorts. number of sort buffers is used only for parallel sorting. Parallel sorts are
used when you:
• Run updates statistics
• Create indexes
See Chapter 10, “Using Statistics to Improve Performance,” in the
Performance and Tuning Series: Query Processing and Abstract Plans.
The value you use for number of sort buffers depends on the page size of the
server.
Sybase recommends that you leave this parameter set to the default except
when you are creating indexes in parallel.
Setting the value too high can rob nonsorting processes of access to the buffer
pool in caches being used to perform sorts.
If you configure a high number of sort buffers, a sort on a large table may
require more procedure cache. The effect is more pronounced with tables that
have smaller row sizes, because the number of rows per page is higher.
This equation estimates the amount of procedure cache required (in bytes):
(Number of sort buffers) X (rows per page) X 100
If you do not configure enough procedure cache for the number of sort buffers,
the sort may fail with error message 701. If this occurs, reconfigure Adaptive
Server with a lower number of sort buffers and retry the sort.
See “max buffers per lava operator” on page 173 for information about setting
an upper limit for the number of buffers used by an operator.

number of user connections
Summary information
Default value 25
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, User Environment
number of user connections sets the maximum number of user connections that
can simultaneously be connected to Adaptive Server. It does not refer to the
maximum number of processes; that number depends not only on the value of
this parameter but also on other system activity.
Upper limit to the The maximum allowable number of file descriptors per process is operating-
maximum number of system-dependent; see the configuration documentation for your platform.
user connections
The number of file descriptors available for Adaptive Server connections is
stored in the global variable @@max_connections. You can report the
maximum number of file descriptors your system can use with:
select @@max_connections
The return value represents the maximum number of file descriptors allowed
by the system for your processes, minus overhead. Overhead increases with the
number of engines. For more information on how multiprocessing affects the
number file descriptors available for Adaptive Server connections, see Chapter
5, Managing Mulitprocessor Servers,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.
In addition, you must reserve a number of connections for the following items,
which you also set with configuration parameters:
• The database devices, including mirror devices
• Site handlers
• Network listeners
The number of user connections + (number of devices * max online engines * 2)
+ number of remote sites + max number network listeners cannot be greater than
the value of @@max_connections.

Reserved connections One connection from the configured number of connections is reserved for
temporary administrative tasks to make sure that database administrators can
connect to Adaptive Server. A reserved connection has a total login time of 15
minutes, and can be is allocated only to a user who has the sa_role. Adaptive
Server terminates the connection after 15 minutes to ensure the availability of
the reserved connection at an installation with multiple database
administrators.
Adaptive Server also automatically uses this reserved connection when a client
uses the last resource for connecting to Adaptive Server.
If Adaptive Server is using a reserved connection, the following informational
message appears when the user logs in to Adaptive Server:
There are not enough user connections available; you are being connected
using a temporary administrative connection which will time out after '15'
minutes. Increase the value of th 'number of user connections' parameter
Adaptive Server also prints a message similar to the following to the error log
when the final connection to Adaptive Server terminates due to a timeout:
00:00000:00008:2003/03/14 11:25:31.36 server Process '16' has been
terminated as it exceeded the maximum login time allowed for such processes.
This process used a connection reserved for system administrators and has a
maximum login period of '15' minutes
Optimizing max There is no formula to determine how many connections to allow for each user.
number of user You must estimate this number, based on the system and user requirements.
connections
You must also take into account that on a system with many users, connections
needed only occasionally or transiently can generally be shared among users.
The following processes require user connections:
• One connection is needed for each user running isql.
• Application developers use one connection for each editing session.

• The number of connections required by users running an application

depends on how the application has been programmed. Users executing
Open Client programs need one connection for each open DB-Library
dbprocess or Client-Library™ cs_connection.
Note Sybase suggests that you estimate the maximum number of

connections used by Adaptive Server and update number of user
connections as you add physical devices or users to the system.
Periodically use sp_who to determine the number of active user
connections on your Adaptive Server.
Certain other configuration parameters, including stack size and default network
packet size, affect the amount of memory for each user connection.
User connections for Adaptive Server uses the value of number of user connections to establish the
shared memory—EJB number of shared-memory connections for EJB Server. Thus, if number of user
Server
connections is 30, Adaptive Server establishes 10 shared-memory connections
for EJB Server. Shared-memory connections are not a subset of user
connections, and are not subtracted from the number of user connections.
To increase the number of user connections for shared memory, you must:
1 Increase number of user connections to a number one-third of which is the
number of desired shared-memory connections.
2 Restart Adaptive Server.
Although number of user connections is a dynamic configuration parameter,
you must restart the server to change the number of user connections for shared
memory. See the EJB Server Users Guide.
With Adaptive Server version 12.5.3 ESD #2, no sockets are automatically
reserved for EJB. However, you can enable trace flag 1642 to revert to the
functionality of earlier version, reserving one-third of the sockets for EJB.
Enable traceflag 1642 to set up the EJB server. For this version of Adaptive
Server, you can ignore this message, "hbc_ninit: No sockets
available for HBC", in the error log if the EJB server is not configured.
In Adaptive Server version 12.5.3 and later, if the EJB server is enabled and
HBC sockets are not available, "hbc_ninit: No sockets available
for HBC" is reported. If traceflag 1642 is not enabled, set the flag, and restart
Adaptive Server. If the EJB server is not enabled, then no message is reported
and Adaptive Server automatically disables the sockets reserved for EJB
server.

number of worker processes
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Query Tuning
number of worker processes specifies the maximum number of worker

processes that Adaptive Server can use at any one time for all simultaneously
running parallel queries.
Adaptive Server issues a warning message at start-up if there is insufficient
memory to create the specified number of worker processes. memory per
worker process controls the memory allocated to each worker process.
If you have not configured number of worker processes for a sufficient number
of threads from the worker thread pool, Adaptive Server adjusts query plans at
runtime to use fewer worker threads. If Adaptive Server cannot adjust the
queries at runtime, the queries recompile serially. However, alter table and
execute immediate commands are aborted if they do not have sufficient worker
threads.
o/s file descriptors
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values Site-specific
Status Read-only
o/s file descriptors indicates the maximum per-process number of file

descriptors configured for your operating system. This parameter is read-only
and cannot be configured through Adaptive Server.
Many operating systems allow you to configure the number of file descriptors
available per process. See your operating system documentation.

The number of file descriptors available for Adaptive Server connections,

which is less than the value of o/s file descriptors, is stored in the variable
@@max_connections. See “Upper limit to the maximum number of user
connections” on page 207.
object lockwait timing
Summary information
Status Dynamic
object lockwait timing controls whether Adaptive Server collects timing

statistics for requests of locks on objects.
open index hash spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Meta-Data Cache
open index hash spinlock ratio sets the number of index metadata descriptor
hash tables that are protected by one spinlock. This parameter is used only in
multiprocessing systems only.
All the index descriptors belonging to a table are accessible through a hash
table. When you run a query on the table, Adaptive Server uses hash tables to
look up the necessary index information in its sysindexes rows. A hash table is
an internal mechanism used by Adaptive Server to retrieve information
quickly.

Usually, you do not need to change this parameter. In rare instances, however,
you may need to reset it if Adaptive Server demonstrates contention from hash
spinlocks. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive
Server with sp_sysmon.
For more information about configuring spinlock ratios, see Chapter 5,
“Managing Multiprocessor Servers,” in the System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.
open index spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
open index spinlock ratio specifies the number of index metadata descriptors
that are protected by one spinlock.
Adaptive Server uses a spinlock to protect an index descriptor, since more than
one process can access the contents of the index descriptor. open index spinlock
ratio is used only in multiprocessing systems.
The value specified for this parameter defines the ratio of index descriptors per
spinlock.
If one spinlock is shared by too many index descriptors, it can cause spinlock
contention. Use sp_sysmon to get a report on spinlock contention. See the
If sp_sysmon output indicates an index descriptor spinlock contention of more
than 3 percent, try decreasing the value of open index spinlock ratio.
See Chapter 5, Managing Mulitprocessor Servers,” in System Administration
Guide: Volume 2.
open object spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 100

Summary information
Status Dynamic
Configuration group Meta-Data Cache
open object spinlock ratio specifies the number of object descriptors that are
protected by one spinlock. Adaptive Server uses a spinlock to protect an object
descriptor, since more than one process can access the contents of the object
descriptor. open object spinlock ratio is used only in multiprocessing systems..
The default value for this parameter is 100; 1 spinlock for each 100 object
descriptors configured for your server. If your server is configured with only
one engine, Adaptive Server sets only 1 object descriptor spinlock, regardless
of the number of object descriptors.
If one spinlock is shared by too many object descriptors, it causes spinlock
contention. Use sp_sysmon to get a report on spinlock contention. See the
If sp_sysmon output indicates an object descriptor spinlock contention of more
than 3 percent, try decreasing the value of the open object spinlock ratio
parameter.
Guide: Volume 2.
optimization goal
Summary information
Default value allrows_mix
Range of values allrows_oltp, allrows_dss
Status Dynamic

Optimization goals are a convenient way to match user query demands with the
best optimization techniques, ensuring optimal use of the optimizer’s time and
resources. Adaptive Server allows users to configure for two optimization
goals, which you can specify at three tiers: server level, session level, and
query level.
The server-level optimization goal is overridden at the session level, which is
overridden at the query level.
These optimization goals allow you to choose an optimization strategy that best
fits your query environment:
• allrows_oltp – the most useful goal for purely OLTP queries.
• allrows_dss – the most useful goal for operational DSS queries of

medium-to-high complexity.
optimization timeout limit
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Dynamic
optimization timeout limit specifies the amount of time, as a fraction of the

estimated execution time of the query, that Adaptive Server can spend
optimizing a query.
A value of 0 indicates there is no optimization timeout.
page lock promotion HWM
Summary information
Default value 200
Status Dynamic

page lock promotion HWM (high-water mark), with page lock promotion LWM
(low-water mark) and page lock promotion PCT (percentage), specifies the
number of page locks permitted during a single scan session of a page-locked
table or index before Adaptive Server attempts to escalate from page locks to
a table lock.
When the number of page locks acquired during a scan session exceeds page
lock promotion HWM, Adaptive Server attempts to acquire a table lock. page
lock promotion HWM value cannot be higher than number of locks.
For more detailed information on scan sessions and setting up page lock
promotion limits, see Chapter 2, “Locking Configuration and Tuning,” in the
Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
The default value for page lock promotion HWM is appropriate for most
applications. To avoid table locking, you may want to increase the value. For
example, if you know that there are regular updates to 500 pages of an allpages-
locked or datapages-locked table containing thousands of pages, increase
concurrency for the tables by setting page lock promotion HWM to 500.
You can also configure lock promotion of page-locked tables and views at the
object level. See sp_setrowlockpromote in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Use sp_sysmon to see how changing page lock promotion HWM affects the
number of lock promotions. sp_sysmon reports the ratio of exclusive page to
exclusive table lock promotions and the ratio of shared page to shared table
lock promotions. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring
page lock promotion LWM
Summary information
Default value 200
Range of values 2–value of page lock promotion HWM
Status Dynamic
page lock promotion LWM (low-water mark), with page lock promotion HWM
(high-water mark) and the page lock promotion PCT, specify the number of page
locks permitted during a single scan session of a page locked table or an index
before Adaptive Server attempts to promote from page locks to a table lock.

The page lock promotion LWM sets the number of page locks below which
Adaptive Server does not attempt to issue a table lock on an object. page lock
promotion LWM must be less than or equal to page lock promotion HWM.
The default value for page lock promotion LWM is sufficient for most
applications. If Adaptive Server runs out of locks (except for an isolated
incident), increase number of locks.
See the Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
You can also configure page lock promotion at the object level. See
sp_setpglockpromote in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
page lock promotion PCT
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
If the number of locks held on an object is between page lock promotion LWM
(low-water mark) and page lock promotion HWM (high-water mark). page lock
promotion PCT sets the percentage of page locks (based on the table size) above
which Adaptive Server attempts to acquire a table lock.
See Chapter 2, “Locking Configuration and Tuning,” in the Performance and
Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
The default value for page lock promotion PCT is appropriate for most
applications.
You can also configure lock promotion at the object level for page locked
objects. See sp_setpglockpromote in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
page utilization percent
Summary information
Default value 95
Status Dynamic

Summary information
page utilization percent is used during page allocations to control whether

Adaptive Server scans a table’s object allocation map (OAM) to find unused
pages or simply allocates a new extent to the table. See “number of oam trips”
on page 195 for more information on the OAM. The page utilization percent
parameter is a performance optimization for servers with very large tables; it
reduces the time needed to add new space.
If you set page utilization percent to 100, Adaptive Server scans through all
OAM pages to find unused pages allocated to the object before allocating a
new extent. When this parameter is set lower than 100, Adaptive Server
compares the page utilization percent setting to the ratio of used and unused
pages allocated to the table, as follows:
100 * used pages/(used pages + unused pages)
If page utilization percent is lower than the ratio, Adaptive Server allocates a
new extent instead of searching for the unused pages.
For example, when inserting data into a 10GB table that has 120 OAM pages
and only 1 unused data page:
• A page utilization percent of 100 tells Adaptive Server to scan through all
120 OAM pages to locate an unused data page.
• A page utilization percent of 95 allows Adaptive Server to allocate a new
extent to the object, because 95 is lower than the ratio of used pages to
used and unused pages.
A low page utilization percent value results in more unused pages. A high page
utilization percent value slows page allocations in very large tables, as Adaptive
Server performs an OAM scan to locate each unused page before allocating a
new extent. This increases logical and physical I/O.
If page allocations (especially in the case of large inserts) seem to be slow,
lower the value of page utilization percent, but reset it after inserting the data. A
lower setting affects all tables on the server and results in unused pages in all
tables.
Fast bulk copy ignores the page utilization percent setting and always allocates
new extents until there are no more extents available in the database.

partition groups
Summary information
Default value 1024
Status Dynamic
partition groups specifies the maximum number of partition groups that can be
allocated by Adaptive Server. Partition groups are internal structures used by
Adaptive Server to control access to individual partitions of a table. Partition
groups are used while upgrading or during a load database upgrade to
unpartition Adaptive Server 12.5.x and earlier partitions.
The default value allows a maximum 1024 open partition groups and a
maximum of 2147483647 open partitions. The actual number of partitions may
be slightly less, due to the grouping of partitions.
partition spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 10
Status Dynamic
For Adaptive Servers running with multiple engines, partition spinlock ratio sets
the number of rows in the partition descriptors that are protected by one
spinlock.
Adaptive Server manages access to table partitions using partition descriptors.
Each partition descriptor stores information about a partition (for example, the
last page of the partition) that processes must use when accessing that partition.
Configure partition descriptors using number of open partitions.

The default value of partition spinlock ratio sets 1 spinlock for every 10 partition
caches. Decreasing the value of partition spinlock ratio may have little impact on
the performance of Adaptive Server. The default setting is correct for most
servers.
Guide: Volume 2.
pci memory size
Summary information
Default value 64MB
Status Dynamic
Required role System Administrator
pci memory size sets the size of the pluggable component interface (PCI)
memory pool. All pluggable component adapter (PCA) and JVM plug-ins
running under the PCI Bridge share a single dedicated PCI memory pool. If
you set pci memory size to less than the default, Adaptive Server uses the
default size.
This memory pool is fully dedicated to the PCI bridge and any running
pluggable component. Like all other memory pools, Adaptive Server controls
this memory pool. However, unlike other memory pools, the PCI memory pool
is allocated when you initialize the PCI Bridge and does not grow after that
time.
per object statistics active
Summary information
Status Dynamic

per object statistic active controls whether Adaptive Server collects statistics for
each object.
percent database for history
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Dynamic
percent database for history specifies the percentage of the total space available
in sybmgmtdb that is reserved for the js_history table. Increase percent database
for history if there are more jobs running, or to store historical records about
executed jobs for future queries.
percent database for output
Summary information
Default value 30
Status Dynamic
percent database for output specifies the percentage of the total space available
in sybmgmtdb that is reserved for job output. Increase the default value if there
are more jobs running or jobs that produce lot of output that must be stored for
querying.
percent history free
Summary information
Default value 30

Summary information
Status Dynamic
percent history free specifies the percentage of reserved space in sybmgmtdb to

be kept free For example, if you use the default value, Adaptive Server starts
purging the oldest history records to make room for new records when 70
percent of sybmgmtdb is filled.
percent output free
Summary information
Default value 50
Status Dynamic
Specifies the percentage of reserved space kept free in sybmgmtdb that is

reserved for Job Scheduler output. For example, if you use the default value,
Adaptive Server starts purging the oldest history records to make room for new
records when 50 percent of sybmgmtdb is filled.
performance monitoring option
Summary information
Status Dynamic
performance monitoring option enables the license for the BMC DBXray
graphical performance monitoring and diagnostic tool .

permission cache entries
Summary information
Default value 15
Status Dynamic
permission cache entries determines the number of cache protectors per task,
increasing the amount of memory for each user connection and worker process.
Information about user permissions is held in the permission cache. When
Adaptive Server checks permissions, it looks first in the permission cache; if it
does not find what it needs, it looks in the sysprotects table. This process is
significantly faster if Adaptive Server finds the information it needs in the
permission cache and does not have to read sysprotects.
However, Adaptive Server looks in the permission cache only when it is
checking user permissions, not when permissions are being granted or revoked.
When a permission is granted or revoked, the entire permission cache is
flushed. This is because existing permissions have timestamps that become
outdated when new permissions are granted or revoked.
If users on your Adaptive Server frequently perform operations that require
their permissions to be checked, you may see a small performance gain by
increasing the value of permission cache entries. This effect is not likely to be
significant enough to warrant extensive tuning.
If users on your Adaptive Server frequently grant or revoke permissions, avoid
setting permission cache entries to a large value. The space used for the
permission cache would be wasted, since the cache is flushed with each grant
and revoke command.
plan text pipe active
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

Summary information
plan text pipe active determines whether Adaptive Server collects query plan
text. If both plan text pipe active and plan text pipe max messages are enabled,
Adaptive Server collects the plan text for each query. You can use
monSysPlanText to retrieve the query plan text for all user tasks.
plan text pipe max messages
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
plan text pipe max messages determines the number of query plan text
messages Adaptive Server stores per engine. The total number of messages in
the monSQLText table is the value of sql text pipe max messages multiplied by
the number of engines running.
print deadlock information
Summary information
Valid values 0 (off), 1 (on), 2 (on, print summary)
Status Dynamic
print deadlock information prints deadlock information to the error log.

If you are experiencing recurring deadlocks, setting print deadlock information

to 1 provides you with detailed information in the error log that can be useful
in tracing the cause of the deadlocks. However, setting print deadlock
information to 1 can degrade Adaptive Server performance. For this reason, set
print deadlock information on only when you are trying to determine the cause
of deadlocks.
Use sp_sysmon output to determine whether deadlocks are occurring in your
application. If they are, set print deadlock information to 1 to learn more about
why they are occurring. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring
A value of 2 allows you to print a summary of deadlock information to the error
log (as opposed to the detailed information a value of 1 provides). For example:
Deadlock Id 34: Process (Familyid 0, Spid 70) was waiting for a 'exclusive page'
lock on page 10858346 of the 'equineline_job' table in database 18 but process
(Familyid 0, Spid 88) already held a 'exclusive page' lock on it.
Deadlock Id 34: Process (Familyid 0, Spid 88) was waiting for a 'exclusive page'
lock on page 11540986 of the 'equineline_job' table in database 18 but process
(Familyid 0, Spid 70) already held a 'update page' lock on it.
print recovery information
Summary information
Status Dynamic
print recovery information determines what information Adaptive Server

displays on the console during recovery. (Recovery is performed on each
database at Adaptive Server start-up and when a database dump is loaded.) The
default value means that Adaptive Server displays only the database name and
a message saying that recovery is in progress. A value of 1 indicates that
Adaptive Server displays information about each individual transaction
processed during recovery, including whether it was aborted or committed.

procedure cache size
Summary information
Default value 7000
Range of values 7000 – 2147483647
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
Specifies the size of the procedure cache, in 2K pages. Adaptive Server uses
the procedure cache while running stored procedures. If the server finds a copy
of a procedure already in the cache, it does not need to read it from the disk.
Adaptive Server also uses space in the procedure cache to compile queries
while creating stored procedures.
Since the optimum value for procedure cache size differs from application to
application, resetting it may improve Adaptive Server performance. For
example, if you run many different procedures or ad hoc queries, your
application uses the procedure cache more heavily, so you may want to
increase this value.
Warning! If procedure cache size is too small, Adaptive Server performance

degrades.
If you are upgrading, procedure cache size is set to the size of the original
procedure cache at the time of upgrade.
procedure deferred compilation
Summary information
Default value 1(enabled)
Status dynamic
Display level
Configuration groups Query tuning

When this parameter is enabled, compiling of statements that reference local

variables or temporary tables inside a stored procedure is postponed to
execution time, so that the optimization of those statements can use runtime
values, instead of estimations or magic numbers.
process wait events
Summary information
Status Dynamic
process wait events controls whether Adaptive Server collect statistics for each
wait event for every task. You can get wait information for a specific task using
monProcessWaits.
See Chapter 17, “Using Stored Procedures,” in the Transact-SQL Users Guide.
prod-consumer overlap factor
Summary information
Default value 20
Range of values
Status dynamic
Configuration group
prod-consumer overlap factor affects optimization. Adaptive Server changes the

group by algorithm, and you cannot use set statistics I/O with parallel plans.
quorum heartbeat interval
Summary information
Default value 5

Summary information
Status Dynamic
quorum heartbeat interval specifies the number of seconds between quorum

heartbeats. Setting quorum heartbeat interval to a lower number increases the
heartbeat overhead but speeds the detection of a lost disk link, resulting in a
quicker termination of an instance for which you have set I/O fencing or that
has lost its SAN link. Setting quorum heartbeat interval to a high number
reduces heartbeat overhead, but delays the detection of a lost disk link.
quorum heartbeat retries
Summary information
Default value 2
Status Dynamic
read committed with lock
Summary information
Status Dynamic
read committed with lock determines whether an Adaptive Server using

transaction isolation level 1 (read committed) holds shared locks on rows or
pages of data-only-locked tables during select queries. For cursors, read
committed with lock applies only to read-only cursors declared.

For transaction isolation level 1, select queries on allpages-locked tables

continue to hold locks on the page at the current position. Any updatable cursor
on a data-only-locked table also holds locks on the current page or row. See the
Performance and Tuning Series: Basics.
recovery interval in minutes
Summary information
Default value 5
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
recovery interval in minutes sets the maximum number of minutes per database
that Adaptive Server uses to complete its recovery procedures in case of a
system failure. The recovery procedure rolls transactions backward or forward,
starting from the transaction that the checkpoint process indicates as the oldest
active transaction. The recovery process has more or less work to do,
depending on the value of recovery interval in minutes.
Adaptive Server estimates that 6000 rows in the transaction log require 1
minute of recovery time. However, different types of log records can take more
or less time to recover. If you set recovery interval in minutes to 3, the checkpoint
process writes changed pages to disk only when syslogs contains more than
18,000 rows since the last checkpoint.
Note The recovery interval has no effect on long-running, minimally logged

transactions (such as create index) that are active when Adaptive Server fails.
It may take as much time to reverse these transactions as it took to run them.
To avoid lengthy delays, dump each database after index maintenance
operations.

Adaptive Server uses the recovery interval in minutes setting and the amount of
activity on each database to decide when to checkpoint each database. When
Adaptive Server checkpoints a database, it writes all dirty pages (data pages
in cache that have been modified) to disk. This may create a brief period of high
I/O, called a checkpoint spike. The checkpoint also performs other
maintenance tasks, including truncating the transaction log for each database
for which the truncate log on chkpt option has been set. About once per minute,
the sleeping checkpoint process “wakes up,” checks the truncate log on chkpt
setting, and checks the recovery interval to determine if a checkpoint is needed.
Figure 5-4 shows the logic used by Adaptive Server during this process.

Figure 5-4: The checkpoint process
Sleep
Checkpoint
process
wakes up
and polls
each database
Is truncate log Yes Checkpoint

on chkpt set? performed
No
No Time to Logs
checkpoint? truncated
Yes
Checkpoint
performed
You may want to change the recovery interval if your application and its use
change. For example, you may want to shorten the recovery interval when
there is an increase in update activity on Adaptive Server. Shortening the
recovery interval causes more frequent checkpoints, with smaller, more
frequent checkpoint spikes, and slows the system slightly. However, setting the
recovery interval too high may cause the recovery time to be unacceptably
long. You can reduce the spikes caused by checkpointing by reconfiguring the
housekeeper freewrite percent parameter. See “housekeeper free write percent”
on page 145. For more information on the performance implications of
recovery interval in minutes, see Chapter 5, “Memory Use and Performance,” in
the Performance and Tuning Series: Basics.
Use sp_sysmon to determine how a particular recovery interval affects the
system. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring Adaptive Server
with sp_sysmon.

remote server pre-read packets
Summary information
Default value 3
Status Static
remote server pre-read packets determines the number of packets that are “pre-
read” by a site handler during connections with remote servers.
To reduce the required number of connections, communication between two
servers is managed through a single site handler. The site handler can pre-read
and keep track of data packets for each user process before the receiving
process is ready to accept them.
The default value for remote server pre-read packets is appropriate for most
servers. Increasing the value uses more memory; decreasing the value can slow
network traffic between servers. See Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers.”
restricted decrypt permission
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
restricted decrypt permission enables or disables restricted decrypt permission

in all databases. You must have the sso_role to set this parameter.
When restricted decrypt permission is set to 0 (off), decrypt permission on
encrypted columns acts the same as in versions earlier than 15.0.2:
• The table owner or the SSO explicitly grants decrypt permission.
However, with grant option on decrypt permission is supported.

• Decrypt permission is granted implicitly to table owners and the SSO, as

well as to any user through a chain of ownership. For example, if user Fred
owns the proc1 stored procedure, which selects data from the encrypted
column fred.table1.col1, and if Fred grants exec permission on proc1 to
Harry, then Harry has implicit decrypt permission on fred.table1.col1
• Decrypt permission is not needed for alter table decryp. because the table
owner has implicit decrypt permission on encrypted columns.
When restricted decrypt permission is set to 1 (on):
• Decrypt permission is granted implicitly only to the SSO.
• The SSO can grant decrypt permission using the with grant option
parameter. This allows the SSO to decide who can grant decrypt
permission in the system. For example, if the SSO wants user1 to be able
to grant decrypt permission on user3.user3_tab, the SSO issues:
grant decrypt on user3.user3_tab to user1
with grant option
If you use a system encryption password, Sybase recommends that, to
protect data privacy, you do not grant decrypt permission to the DBO to.
Access to keys through user passwords prevents the DBO and other parties
from accessing the data unless they have a key’s password; however, you
may find it convenient for the DBO to decide which users should see the
decrypted data. If you are not protecting keys and data with user-specified
passwords, the SSO should retain the sole responsibility to grant decrypt
permission.
• Table ownership does not give a user implicit decrypt permission. That is,
if you create a table with encrypted columns, you do not have decrypt
permission on them unless it is explicitly granted to you.
• No user is implicitly granted decrypt permission through an ownership
chain. For example, if Fred owns the proc1 stored procedure, which selects
data from the encrypted column fred.table1.col1, and if Fred grants exec
permission on proc1 to Harry, then Harry must also have explicit decrypt
permission on fred.table1.col1 to see the data.
• Aliased users assume the permissions of the user to whom they are aliased.
Similarly, a user with sa_role, who is implicitly aliased to the DBO in any
database, inherits any decrypt permissions that have been explicitly
granted to the DBO.
• Decrypt permission is required for alter table decrypt statement because the
table owner does not have implicit decrypt permission on the table.

If you change restricted decrypt permission from 0 to 1, currently executing

statements that use implicit decrypt permission finish; however any subsequent
statements that use implicit decrypt permission fail with this error until the
SSO grants the user decrypt permission on the necessary columns:
Msg 10330 "DECRYPT permission denied on object object_name, database
database_name, owner owner_name."
If you change restricted decrypt permission from 1 to 0, the rows that reflect
explicit grants remain in the sysprotects system table. However, these rows
have no effect on implicitly granted decrypt permissions because Adaptive
Server does not check sysprotects to make sure decrypt permission can be
implicitly granted. sp_helprotect displays misleading information for only
those users who were granted or revoked explicit decrypt permission before
you reconfigure the system, and who now have implicit decrypt permission.
Sybase recommends that, to keep the system consistent, you revoke any
explicit decrypt permissions granted to users before you switch between
enabling or disabling restricted decrypt permission to keep the system
consistent.
See the Encrypted Columns Users Guide for more information about decrypt
permissions.
row lock promotion HWM
Summary information
Default value 200
Status Dynamic
row lock promotion HWM (high-water mark), with row lock promotion LWM (low-
water mark) and row lock promotion PCT specifies the maximum number of row
locks permitted during a single scan session of a table or an index before
Adaptive Server attempts to escalate from row locks to a table lock.
When the number of locks acquired during a scan session exceeds row lock
promotion HWM, Adaptive Server attempts to acquire a table lock. The lock
promotion HWM value cannot be higher than the number of locks value.

See Chapter 2, “Locking Configuration and Tuning,” in Performance and

Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
The default value for row lock promotion HWM is appropriate for most
applications. To avoid table locking, you may want to increase the value of row
lock promotion HWM.. For example, if you know that there are regular updates
to 500 rows on a table that has thousands of rows, you can increase
concurrency for the tables by setting row lock promotion HWM to around 500.
You can also configure row lock promotion at the object level. See
row lock promotion LWM
Summary information
Default value 200
Range of values 2–value of row lock promotion HWM
Status Dynamic
row lock promotion LWM (low-water mark), with the row lock promotion HWM
(high-water mark) and row lock promotion PCT specifies the number of row
locks permitted during a single scan session of a table or an index before
Adaptive Server attempts to promote from row locks to a table lock.
row lock promotion LWM sets the number of locks below which Adaptive Server
does not attempt to acquire a table lock on the object. The row lock promotion
LWM must be less than or equal to row lock promotion HWM.
The default value for row lock promotion LWM is sufficient for most
applications. If Adaptive Server runs out of locks (except for an isolated
incident), increase number of locks.
See the Performance and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.
You can also configure lock promotion at the object level. See

row lock promotion PCT
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic
If the number of locks held on an object is between row lock promotion LWM
(low-water mark) and row lock promotion HWM (high-water mark), row lock
promotion PCT sets the percentage of row locks (based on the number of rows
in the table) above which Adaptive Server attempts to acquire a table lock.
The default value for row lock promotion PCT is appropriate for most
applications.
For more information on setting up lock promotion limits, see Chapter 2,
“Locking Configuration and Tuning,” in Performance and Tuning Series:
Locking and Concurrency Control.
You can also configure row lock promotion at the per-object level. See
sp_sterowlockpromote in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
rtm thread idle wait period
Summary information
Default value 600
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups SQL Server Administration
rtm thread idle wait period defines the time, in seconds, a native thread used by
Adaptive Server waits when it has no work to do. When the time set for a native
thread is reached, the thread automatically fades out.

runnable process search count
Summary information
Default value 2000 (default value of 3 for the Cluster Edition)
Status Dynamic
runnable process search count specifies the number of times an engine loops
while looking for a runnable task before relinquishing the CPU to the operating
system.
Adaptive Server engines check the run queue for runnable tasks whenever a
task completes or exceeds its allotted time on the engine. At times, there are no
tasks in the run queues. An engine can either relinquish the CPU to the
operating system or continue to check for a task to run. Setting runnable
process search count higher causes the engine to loop more times, thus holding
the CPU for a longer time. Setting the runnable process search count lower
causes the engine to release the CPU sooner.
If your machine is a uniprocessor that depends on helper threads to perform
I/O, you may see some performance benefit from setting runnable process
search to perform network I/O, disk I/O, or other operating system tasks. If a
client, such as a bulk-copy operation, is running on the same machine as a
single CPU server that uses helper threads, you may need to allow both the
server and the client access to the CPU.
Note If you are having performance problems, try setting runnable process
search count to 3.
For Adaptive Servers running on uniprocessor machines that do not use helper
threads, and for multiprocessor machines, the default value provides good
performance.
With a runnable process search count value of 3, the Cluster Edition can better
share the system CPU with other processes running on the same machine.
However, if runnable process search count is 3 and Adaptive Server is running
as a stand-alone process, users may experience delays in server response times.
In this case, reset runnable process search count to 2000.

Use sp_sysmon to determine how the runnable process search count parameter
affects the Adaptive Server use of CPU cycles, engine yields to the operating
system, and blocking network checks. See the Performance and Tuning Series:
Monitoring Adaptive Server with sp_sysmon.
sampling percent
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values 0 – 100 percent
Status Dynamic
Required role System or database administrator
sampling percent is the numeric value of the sampling percentage, such as 5 for
5%, 10 for 10%, and so on.
To reduce I/O contention and resources, run update statistics using a sampling
method, which can reduce the I/O and time when your maintenance window is
small and the data set is large. If you are updating a large data set or table that
is in constant use, being truncated and repopulated, you may want to perform
a statistical sampling to reduce the time and the size of the I/O.
Use caution with sampling, since the results are not fully accurate. Balance
changes to histogram values against the savings in I/O.
Although a sampling of the data set may not be completely accurate, usually
the histograms and density values are reasonable within an acceptable range.
When you are deciding whether or not to use sampling, consider the size of the
data set, the time constraints you are working with, and if the histogram
produced is as accurate as needed.
The percentage to use when sampling depends on your needs. Test various
percentages until you receive a result that reflects the most accurate
information on a particular data set.
Statistics are stored in the system tables systabstats and sysstatistics.

secure default login
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values 0 (followed by another parameter naming the default
login)
Status Dynamic
secure default login specifies a default login for all users who are
preauthenticated but who do not have a login in master..syslogins.
Establish the secure default login with:
sp_configure "secure default login", 0, default_login_name
where:
• secure default login – is the name of the parameter.
• 0 – is a required parameter because the second parameter of sp_configure

must be a numeric value.
• default_login_name – is the name of the default login for a user who is
unknown to Adaptive Server, but who has already been authenticated by a
security mechanism. The login name must be a valid login in
master..syslogins.
select on syscomments.text
Summary information
Status Dynamic

select on syscomments.text enables protection of the text of database objects

through restriction of the select permission on the text column of the
syscomments table. The default value sets select permission to “public.” Set the
value to 0 to restrict select permission to the object owner and the system
administrator.
send doneinproc tokens
Summary information
Status Dynamic
send doneinproc tokens enables or disables Adaptive Server for sending

doneinproc packets (TDS messages that are sent after each select statement
performed in a stored procedure). send doneinproc tokens replaces dbcc tune
‘doneinproc’ and trace flag 292. Currently running queries immediately take
note of any change in the option.
Setting send doneinproc tokens to 1 is safe in most cases. However some stored
procedures are executed using asynchronous commands from CT-Lib, and
using a value of 0 may cause state-machine errors in some CT-Lib applications.
session migration timeout
Summary information
Default value 600
Status Dynamic
session migration timeout specifies the amount of time available for a client to
complete a migration by connecting to the target instance. If the client does not
migrate to the target instance in the time alloted, Adaptive Server fails the
connection.

session tempdb log cache size
Summary information
Default value The logical page size
Range of values The logical page size up to 2147483647
Status Static
session tempdb log cache size configures the size of the user log cache (ULC),
helping to determine how often it needs flushing.
shared memory starting address
Summary information
Default value 0
Range of values Platform-specific
Status Static
shared memory starting address determines the virtual address where Adaptive
Server starts its shared memory region.
It is unlikely that you will ever have to reconfigure shared memory starting
address. Do so only after consulting with Sybase Technical Support.
number of worker processes, max parallel degree, and max scan parallel degree
control parallel query processing at the server level. Using the parallel_degree,
process_limit_action, and scan_parallel_degree options to the set command can
limit parallel optimization at the session level, and using the parallel keyword
of the select command can limit parallel optimization of specific queries.
size of auto identity column
Summary information
Default value 10

Summary information
Status Dynamic
size of auto identity column sets the precision of IDENTITY columns that are
automatically created with the sp_dboption auto identity and unique
auto_identity index options.
The maximum value that can be inserted into an IDENTITY column is

10precision -1. After an IDENTITY column reaches its maximum value, all
further insert statements return an error that aborts the current transaction.
If you reach the maximum value of an IDENTITY column, you can increase it
with a modify operation in the alter table command. See the Transact-SQL
Users Guide for examples.
You can also use the create table command to create a table that is identical to
the old one, but with a larger precision for the IDENTITY column. After you
have created the new table, use the insert command or bcp to copy data from
the old table to the new one.
size of global fixed heap
Summary information
Default values 150 pages (32-bit version)
300 pages (64-bit version)
Minimum values 10 pages (32-bit version)
Status Dynamic
size of global fixed heap specifies the memory space for internal data structures
and other needs.
If you change size of the global fixed heap, change the total logical memory by
the same amount.

size of process object heap
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
size of process object fixed heap specifies the total memory space for all
processes using the Java VM.
If you change size of process object fixed heap, change the total logical memory
by the same amount.
size of shared class heap
Summary information
Status Dynamic
Display level Basic
size of shared class heap specifies the shared memory space for all Java classes
called into the Java VM. Adaptive Server maintains the shared class heap
server-wide for both user-defined and system-provided Java classes.
If you change the size of shared class heap, change the total logical memory by
the same amount.

size of unilib cache
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
Configuration groups Memory Use, Unicode
size of unilib cache specifies the memory used in bytes rounded up to the nearest
1K in addition to the minimum overhead size, which provides enough memory
to load a single copy of the largest Unilib conversion table plus the largest
Unilib sort table. Asian clients may need to increase size of unilib cache by an
extra 100K for every additional character set they want to support via Unicode-
based conversion.
sproc optimize timeout limit
Summary information
Default value 40
Status Dynamic
sproc optimize timeout limit specifies the amount of time Adaptive Server can
spend optimizing a stored procedure as a fraction of the estimated execution
time.
SQL batch capture
Summary information
Status Dynamic

Summary information
SQL batch capture controls whether Adaptive Server collects SQL text. If both
SQL batch capture and max SQL text monitored are enabled, Adaptive Server
collects the SQL text for each batch for each user task.
SQL Perfmon Integration (Windows only)
Summary information
Status Static
SQL Perfmon Integration enables and disables the ability to monitor Adaptive
Server statistics from the Windows Performance Monitor.
Adaptive Server must be registered as a Windows Service to support monitor
integration. This occurs automatically when:
• You start Adaptive Server using the Services Manager in the Sybase for
the Windows program group.
• You use the Services option in the Control Panel.
• You have configured Windows to start Adaptive Server as an automatic
service.
See Configuring Guide for Windows for a list of the Adaptive Server counters
you can monitor.
sql server clock tick length
Summary information
Default value Platform-specific
Range of values Platform-specific minimum–1000000, in multiples of
default value
Status Static

Summary information
sql server clock tick length specifies the duration of the server’s clock tick, in
microseconds. Both the default value and the minimum value are platform-
specific. Adaptive Server rounds values up to an even multiple of n, where n is
the platform-specific clock-tick default value. Use sp_helpconfig or
sp_configure to find the current values for sql server clock tick length.
In mixed-use applications with some CPU-bound tasks, decrease the value of

sql server clock tick length to:
• Help I/O-bound tasks – a value of 20,000 is reasonable for this. Shortening

the clock-tick length means that CPU-bound tasks exceed the allotted time
on the engine more frequently per unit of time, which allows other tasks
greater access to the CPU
• Marginally increase response times – Adaptive Server runs its service
tasks once per clock tick. Decreasing the clock-tick length means that the
service tasks are run more frequently per unit of time
Increasing sql server clock tick length favors CPU-bound tasks, because they
execute longer between context switches. The maximum value of 1,000,000
may be appropriate for primarily CPU-bound applications. However, any I/O-
bound tasks may suffer as a result. You can mitigate this somewhat by tuning
cpu grace time (see “cpu grace time” on page 103) and time slice (see “time
slice” on page 258).
Note Changing the value of sql server clock tick length can have serious effects
on Adaptive Server performance. Consult with Sybase Technical Support
before resetting this value.
sql text pipe active
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic

Summary information
sql text pipe active controls whether Adaptive Server collects SQL text. If this
option is enabled and sql text pipe max messages is set, Adaptive Server
collects the SQL text for each query. Use monSysSQLText to retrieve the SQL
text for all user tasks.
sql text pipe max messages
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
sql text pipe max messages specifies the number of SQL text messages
monSQLText table is the value of sql text pipe max messages multiplied by the
number of engines running.
stack guard size
Summary information
Default value 4096
Status Static

stack guard size sets the size, in bytes, of the stack guard area, which is an
overflow stack of configurable size at the end of each stack. Adaptive Server
allocates one stack for each user connection and worker process when it starts.
These stacks are located contiguously in the same area of memory, with a guard
area at the end of each stack. At the end of each stack guard area is a
guardword, which is a 4-byte structure with a known pattern. Figure 5-5
illustrates how a process can corrupt a stack guardword.
Figure 5-5: Process about to corrupt stack guardword
Stack 2
guard area
Stack guardwords
Stack 2
Stack 1
guard area Process overflowing stack
area, about to corrupt
stack guardword
Stack 1
Process begins
executing
Adaptive Server periodically checks to see whether the stack pointer for a user
connection has entered the stack guard area associated with that user
connection’s stack. If it has, Adaptive Server aborts the transaction, returns
control to the application that generated the transaction, and generates error
3626:
The transaction was aborted because it used too much

stack space. Either use sp_configure to increase the

stack size, or break the query into smaller pieces.
spid: %d, suid: %d, hostname: %.*s, application name:
%.*s
Adaptive Server also periodically checks the guardword pattern to see if it has
changed, thus indicating that a process has overflowed the stack boundary.
When this occurs, Adaptive Server prints these messages to the error log and
shuts down:
kernel: *** Stack overflow detected: limit: 0x%lx sp: 0x%lx
kernel: *** Stack Guardword corrupted
kernel: *** Stack corrupted, server aborting
In the first message, “limit” is the address of the end of the stack guard area,
and “sp” is the current value of the stack pointer.
In addition, Adaptive Server periodically checks the stack pointer to see
whether it is completely outside both the stack and the stack guard area for the
pointer’s process. If it is, Adaptive Server shuts down, even if the guardword
is not corrupted. When this happens, Adaptive Server prints the following
messages to the error log:
kernel: *** Stack overflow detected: limit: 0x%lx sp: 0x%lx
kernel: *** Stack corrupted, server aborting
The default value for stack guard size is appropriate for most applications.
However, if you experience server shutdown from either stack guardword
corruption or stack overflow, increase stack guard size by a 2K increment. Each
configured user connection and worker process has a stack guard area; thus,
when you increase stack guard size, you use up that amount of memory,
multiplied by the number of user connections and worker processes you have
configured.
Rather than increasing stack guard size to avoid stack overflow problems,
consider increasing stack size (see “stack size” on page 249). The stack guard
area is intended as an overflow area, not as an extension to the regular stack.
Adaptive Server allocates stack space for each task by adding the values of the
stack size and stack guard size parameters. stack guard size must be configured
in multiples of 2K. If the value you specify is not a multiple of 2K, sp_configure
verification routines round the value up to the next highest multiple.

stack size
Summary information
Default value Platform-specific
Range of values Platform-specific minimum–2147483647
Status Static
Display level Basic
stack size specifies the size, in bytes, of the execution stacks used by each user
process on Adaptive Server. To find the stack size values for your platform, use
sp_helpconfig or sp_configure. stack size must be configured in multiples of 2K.
If the value you specify is not a multiple of 2K, sp_configure verification
routines round the value up to the next highest multiple.
An execution stack is an area of Adaptive Server memory where user processes
keep track of their process context and store local data.
Certain queries can contribute to the probability of a stack overflow. Examples
include queries with extremely long where clauses, long select lists, deeply
nested stored procedures, and multiple selects and updates that holdlock. When
a stack overflow occurs, Adaptive Server prints an error message and rolls back
the transaction. See “stack guard size” on page 246, and see the
Troubleshooting and Error Messages Guide for more information on specific
error messages.
The two options for remedying stack overflows are to break the large queries
into smaller queries and to increase stack size. Changing stack size affects the
amount of memory required for each configured user connection and worker
process. See “total logical memory” on page 260.
If you have queries that exceed the size of the execution stack, you may want
to rewrite them as a series of smaller queries, especially if there are only a small
number of such queries, or if you run them infrequently.
There is no way to determine how much stack space a query requires without
actually running the query. Stack space for each user connection and worker
process is preallocated at start-up.

Therefore, determining the appropriate value for stack size is an empirical

process. Test your largest and most complex queries using the default value for
stack size. If they run without generating error messages, the default is
probably sufficient. If they generate error messages, begin by increasing stack
size by a small amount (2K). Re-run your queries and see if the amount you
have added is sufficient. If it is not, continue to increase stack size until queries
run without generating error messages.
If you are using CIS, or if Java is enabled in the database and you want to use
methods that call JDBC, Sybase recommends that you increase the default by
50 percent. If you are not using JDBC or CIS, the standard default value is
usually sufficient.
start mail session (Windows only)
Summary information
Status Dynamic
start mail session enables and disables the automatic initiation of an Adaptive
Server mail session when you start Adaptive Server.
A value of 1 configures Adaptive Server to start a mail session the next time
Adaptive Server is started. A value of 0 configures Adaptive Server not to start
a mail session at the next restart.
If start mail session is 0, you can start an Adaptive Server mail session
explicitly, using the xp_startmail system ESP.
Before setting start mail session, you must prepare your Windows system by
creating a mailbox and mail profile for Adaptive Server. Then, create an
Adaptive Server account for Sybmail. See the Configuration Guide for
Windows.
start xp server during boot
Summary information

Summary information
Status Static
Display level
Required role
Configuration group Extended Stored Procedures
start xp server during boot determines whether XP Server starts when Adaptive
Server starts.
When set to 1, XP Server starts when Adaptive Server starts. If you set start xp
server during boot to 0, XP Server does not start until you run xp_cmdshell.
startup delay
Summary information
Status Dynamic
startup delay controls when RepAgent is started during the server start. By
default, RepAgent starts at the same time as Adaptive Server. Adaptive Server
writes a message to the error log stating the wait time.
statement cache size
Summary information
Default value 0
Valid values Size of cache in 2K pages
Status Dynamic

statement cache size increases the server allocation of procedure cache

memory and limits the amount of memory from the procedure cache pool used
for cached statements.
Note If you enable the statement cache, you must configure set chained on/off
in its own batch.
Because cached statements are transformed into lightweight stored procedures,
statement caching requires additional open object descriptors.
statement pipe active
Summary information
Status Dynamic
statement pipe active controls whether Adaptive Server collects statement-level

statistics. If both statement pipe active and statement pipe max messages are
enabled, Adaptive Server collects the statement statistics for each query. Use
monSysStatement to retrieve the statistics for all executed statements.
statement pipe max messages
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
statement pipe max messages determines the number of statement statistics

messages Adaptive Server stores per engine. The total number of messages in
the monSQLText table is the value of sql text pipe max messages multiplied by
the number of engines running.

statement statistics active
Summary information
Status Dynamic
statement statistic active controls whether Adaptive Server collects monitoring

table statement-level statistics. Use monProcessStatement to get statement
statistics for a specific task.
strict dtm enforcement
Summary information
Status Static
Display level 10
strict dtm enforcement determines whether or not Adaptive Server transaction

coordination services strictly enforce the ACID properties of distributed
transactions.
In environments where Adaptive Server should propagate and coordinate
transactions only to other Adaptive Servers that support transaction
coordination, set strict dtm enforcement on. If a transaction attempts to update
data in a server that does not support transaction coordination services,
Adaptive Server aborts the transaction.
In heterogeneous environments, you may want to make use of servers that do
not support transaction coordination. This includes earlier versions of Adaptive
Server and non-Sybase database stores configured using CIS. Under these
circumstances, set strict dtm enforcement off to allow Adaptive Server to
propagate transactions to legacy Adaptive Servers and other data stores. This
does not, however, ensure that the remote work of these servers is rolled back
or committed with the original transaction.

suspend audit when device full
Summary information
Status Dynamic
suspend audit when device full determines what Adaptive Server does when an
audit device becomes completely full.
Note If you have two or more audit tables, each on a separate device other than
the master device, and you have a threshold procedure for each audit table
segment, the audit devices should never become full. Only if a threshold
procedure is not functioning properly does the “full” condition occur.
Choose one of these values:

• 0 – truncates the next audit table and starts using it as the current audit
table when the current audit table becomes full. If you set suspend audit
when device full to 0, you ensure that the audit process is never suspended.
However, you incur the risk that older audit records are lost if they have
not been archived.
• 1 – suspends the audit process and all user processes that cause an
auditable event. To resume normal operation, the system security officer
must log in and set up an empty table as the current audit table. During this
period, the system security officer is exempt from normal auditing. If the
system security officer’s actions would generate audit records under
normal operation, Adaptive Server sends an error message and
information about the event to the error log.
syb_sendmsg port number
Summary information
Default value 0
Valid values 0, or 1024–65535, or system limit
Status Dynamic

Summary information
syb_sendmsg port number specifies the port number that Adaptive Server uses
to send messages to a UDP (User Datagram Protocol) port with sp_sendmsg or
syb_sendmsg.
If more than one engine is configured, a port is used for each engine, numbered
consecutively from the port number specified. If the port number is set to the
default value, 0 Adaptive Server assigns port numbers.
Note Sending messages to UDP ports is not supported on Windows.
A system security officer must set the allow sendmsg configuration parameter
to 1 to enable sending messages to UDP ports. To enable UDP messaging, a
system administrator must set allow sendmsg to 1. See “allow sendmsg” on
page 88. For more information on UDP messaging, see sp_sendmsg in the
sysstatistics flush interval
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
sysstatiscts flush interval determines the length of the interval, in minutes,

between flushes of sysstatistics.
Adaptive Server dynamically maintains the statistics for the number of rows
and columns modified in a table as part of any DML statement and flushes
them according to the value of sysstatistics flush interval.
Adaptive Server uses these statistics for query optimization since they are more
accurate. The datachange function determines the amount of data that is
changed at the table, column, or partition level since the last update statistics,
and initiates updating statistics on the object.

The in-memory statistics are always flushed to disk during a polite shutdown
of the server. You can configure sysstatistics flush interval to flush these in-
memory statistics to disk by the house keeper task at regular intervals. Set
sysstatistics flush interval to 0 to disable this housekeeper task.
systemwide password expiration
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
systemwide password expiration sets the number of days that passwords remain
in effect after they are changed. If systemwide password expiration is set to 0,
passwords do not expire.
The password expires when the number of specified days passes. For example,
if you create a new login on August 1, 2007 at 10:30 a.m., with a password
expiration interval of 30 days, the password expires on August 31, 2007 at
10:30 a.m.
An account’s password is considered expired if an interval greater than
number_of_days has passed since the last time the password for that account
was changed.
When the number of days remaining before expiration is less than 25 percent
of the value of systemwide password expiration or 7 days, whichever is greater,
each time the user logs in, a message displays, giving the number of days
remaining before expiration. Users can change their passwords anytime before
expiration.
When an account’s password has expired, the user can still log in to Adaptive
Server but cannot execute any commands until he or she has used sp_password
to change his or her password. If the system security officer changes the user’s
password while the account is in sp_password-only mode, the account returns
to normal after the new password is assigned.
This restriction applies only to login sessions established after the password
has expired. Users who are logged in when their passwords expire are not
affected until the next time they log in.

tape retention in days
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
tape retention in days specifies the number of days you intend to retain each
tape after it has been used for either a database or a transaction log dump. This
parameter can keep you from accidentally overwriting a dump tape.
For example, if you have set tape retention in days to 7 days, and you attempt
to use the tape before 7 days have elapsed since the last time you dumped to
that tape, Backup Server issues a warning message.
You can override the warning using the with init option when executing the
dump command. Doing this causes the tape to be overwritten and all data on
the tape to be lost.
Both the dump database and dump transaction commands provide a retaindays
option, which overrides the tape retention in days value for a particular dump.
See Chapter 12, “Backing Upa and Restoring User Databases,” in System
tcp no delay
Summary information
Status Static
Configuration groups Network Communication, O/S Resources
tcp no delay controls TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) packet batching.

The default value means that TCP packets are not batched.

TCP normally batches small logical packets into single, larger, physical
packets, and fills physical network frames with as much data as possible, which
improves network throughput in terminal emulation environments where users
mostly send keystrokes across the network.
However, applications that use small TDS (Tabular Data Stream) packets may
benefit from disabling TCP packet batching.
Note Disabling TCP packet batching means that packets are sent, regardless
of size; this increases the volume of network traffic.
text prefetch size
Summary information
Default value 16
Status Dynamic
Configuration Group Network Communications
text prefetch size limits the number of pages of text, unitext, and image data that
can be prefetched into an existing buffer pool. Adaptive Server prefetches only
text, unitext, and image data that was created with Adaptive Server 12.x or was
upgraded using dbcc rebuild_text.
time slice
Summary information
Default value 100
Status Dynamic

time slice sets the number of milliseconds that the Adaptive Server scheduler
allows a task to run. If time slice is set too low, Adaptive Server may spend too
much time switching between tasks, which increases response time. If it is set
too high, CPU-intensive tasks may monopolize engines, which also increases
response time. The default value allows each task to run for 1/10 of a second
before relinquishing the CPU to another task.
See Chapter 3, “Using Engines and CPUs” in the Performance and Tuning
Series: Basics.
Use sp_sysmon to determine how time slice affects voluntary yields by
Adaptive Server engines. See the Performance and Tuning Series: Monitoring
total data cache size
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Calculated
Display level Basic
Configuration groups Cache Manager, Memory Use
total data cache size reports the amount of memory, in kilobytes, that is
currently available for data, index, and log pages. This parameter is a
calculated value that is not directly user-configurable.
The amount of memory available for the data cache can be affected by a
number of factors, including:
• The amount of physical memory available on your machine
• The values to which the following parameters are set:
• total logical memory
• number of user connections
• total procedure cache percent
• number of open databases
• number of open objects
• number of open indexes

• number of devices
A number of other parameters also affect the amount of available memory, but
to a lesser extent.
For information on how Adaptive Server allocates memory and for information
on data caches, see “Configuration parameters” on page 81.
total logical memory
Summary information
Default value N/A
Range of values N/A
Status Read-only
total logical memory displays the total logical memory for the current
configuration of Adaptive Server. The total logical memory is the amount of
memory that the Adaptive Server current configuration uses. total logical
memory displays the memory that is required to be available, but which may or
may not be in use at any given moment. For information about the amount of
memory in use at a given moment, see total physical memory. You cannot use
total logical memory to set any of the memory configuration parameters.
total physical memory
Summary information
Default value N/A
Range of values N/A
Status Read-only

total physical memory is a read-only configuration parameter that displays the

total physical memory for the current configuration of Adaptive Server. The
total physical memory is the amount of memory that Adaptive Server is using
at a given moment in time. Configure Adaptive Server so that the value for max
memory is larger than the value for total logical memory, and the value for total
logical memory is larger than the value for total physical memory.
transfer utility memory size
Summary information
Default value 4096
Status Dynamic
Adaptive Server maintains a memory pool for the transfer table command and
for tables marked for incremental transfer. This pool provides memory for
maintaining state information about current and past transfers, and for memory
used to write to and read from transfer files. transfer utility memory size
determines the size of this memory pool.
The units for this pool are in memory pages, which are blocks of 2048 bytes.
The default size is large enough to accommodate over 100 tables marked for
incremental transfer, all transferring simultaneously.
If your installation does not include tables marked for incremental transfer, and
does not use the transfer table command, you may set the size of this memory
pool to zero to reclaim this memory.
txn to pss ratio
Summary information
Default value 16
Status Static
Display level 1
Configuration groups DTM Administration, Memory Use

Adaptive Server manages transactions as configurable server resources. Each

time a new transaction begins, Adaptive Server must obtain a free transaction
descriptor from a global pool that is created when the server is started.
Transaction descriptors are internal memory structures that Adaptive Server
uses to represent active transactions.
Adaptive Server requires one free transaction descriptor for:
• The outer block of each server transaction. The outer block of a transaction
may be created explicitly when a client executes a new begin transaction
command. Adaptive Server may also implicitly create an outer transaction
block when clients use Transact-SQL to modify data without using begin
transaction to define the transaction.
Note Subsequent, nested transaction blocks, created with additional begin

transaction commands, do not require additional transaction descriptors.
• Each database accessed in a multidatabase transaction. Adaptive Server

must obtain a new transaction descriptor each time a transaction uses or
modifies data in a new database.
txn to pss ratio determines the total number of transaction descriptors available
to the server. At start-up, this ratio is multiplied by the number of PSS
structures to create the transaction descriptor pool:
# of transaction descriptors = PSS structures * txn to pss ratio
The default value, 16, ensures compatibility with versions of Adaptive Server
earlier than 12.x which also allocated 16 transaction descriptors for each user
connection. In version 12.x and later, the number of simultaneous transactions
is limited only by the number of transaction descriptors available in the server.
Note You can have as many databases in a user transaction as there are in your
Adaptive Server installation. For example, if your Adaptive Server has 25
databases, you can include 25 databases in your user transactions.
Optimizing the txn to pss ratio for your system

During a peak period, use sp_monitorconfig to examine the use of transaction
descriptors:
sp_monitorconfig "txn to pss ratio"

-------------- -------- ---------- --------- -------- ------

txn to pss ratio 784 80 10.20 523 NA
If the num_used value is zero or very low, transactions may be delayed as

Adaptive Server waits for transaction descriptors to become free in the server.
In this case, consider increasing the value of txn to pss ratio.
If the Max_Used value is too low, unused transaction descriptors may be
consuming memory that can be used by other server functions. Consider
reducing the value of txn to pss ratio.
unified login required
Summary information
Status Dynamic
unified login required requires that all users who log in to Adaptive Server be
authenticated by a security mechanism. The use security services parameter
must be 1 to use the unified login security service.
upgrade version
Summary information
Default value 1100
Status Dynamic

upgrade version reports the version of the upgrade utility that upgraded your
master device. The upgrade utility checks and modifies this parameter during
an upgrade.
Warning! Do not reset upgrade version. Doing so may cause serious problems
with Adaptive Server.
You can determine whether an upgrade has been done on your master device
by using upgrade version without specifying a value:
sp_configure "upgrade version"
use security services
Summary information
Status Static
use security services specifies that Adaptive Server uses network-based

security services. If the parameter is set to 0, none of the network-based
security services can be used.
user log cache size
Summary information
Default value Logical page size
Range of values 2048a –2147483647
a. Minimum determined by server’s logical page size
Status Static

user log cache size specifies the size, in bytes, for each user’s log cache. Its size
is determined by the server’s logical page size. There is one user log cache for
each configured user connection and worker process. Adaptive Server uses
these caches to buffer the user transaction log records, which reduces the
contention at the end of the transaction log.
When a user log cache becomes full or another event occurs (such as when the
transaction completes), Adaptive Server “flushes” all log records from the user
log cache to the database transaction log. By first consolidating the log records
in each user’s log cache, rather than immediately adding each record to the
database’s transaction log, Adaptive Server reduces contention of processes
writing to the log, especially for SMP systems that are configured with more
than one engine.
Note For transactions using a database with mixed data and log segments, the
user log cache is flushed to the transaction log after each log record. No
buffering takes place. If your databases do not have dedicated log segments, do
not increase the user log cache size.
Do not configure user log cache size to be larger than the maximum amount of
log information written by an application’s transaction. Since Adaptive Server
flushes the user log cache when the transaction completes, any additional
memory allocated to the user log cache is wasted. If no transaction in your
server generates more than 4000 bytes of transaction log records, set user log
cache size no higher than that value. For example:
sp_configure "user log cache size", 4000
Setting user log cache size too high wastes memory. Setting it too low can
cause the user log cache to fill up and flush more than once per transaction,
increasing the contention for the transaction log. If the volume of transactions
is low, the amount of contention for the transaction log may not be significant.
Use sp_sysmon to understand how this parameter affects cache behavior. See
sp_sysmon.
user log cache spinlock ratio
Summary information
Default value 20
Status Dynamic

Summary information
For Adaptive Servers running with multiple engines, user log cache spinlock
ratio specifies the ratio of user log caches per user log cache spinlock. There is
one user log cache for each configured user connection.
The default specifies 1 spinlock for each 20 user connections configured for
your server.
Use sp_sysmon to understand how this parameter affects cache behavior. See
sp_sysmon.
wait event timing
Summary information
Default value 0
Status Dynamic
wait event timing controls whether Adaptive Server collects statistics for
individual wait events. A task may have to wait for a variety of reasons (for
example, waiting for a buffer read to complete). The monSysWaits table
contains the statistics for each wait event. The monWaitEventInfo table contains
a complete list of wait events.
workload manager cache size
Summary information
Default value 80
Valid values 80 – 2147483647
Status Dynamic

Summary information
workload manager cache size specifies the maximum amount of memory, in 2K

pages, that the workload manager can use. See Chapter 6, “Managing the
Workload,” in the Cluster Users Guide.
xact coordination interval
Summary information
Default value 60 (seconds)
Valid values 1 – 2147483647 (seconds)
Status Dynamic
Display level 10
xact coordination interval defines the length of time between attempts to resolve
transaction branches have been propagated to remote servers.
The coordinating Adaptive Server makes regular attempts to resolve the work
of remote servers participating in a distributed transaction. The coordinating
server contacts each remote server participating in the distributed transaction
in a serial manner, as shown in Figure 5-6. The coordination service may be
unable to resolve a transaction branch for a variety of reasons. For example, if
the remote server is not reachable due to network problems, the coordinating
server reattempts the connection after the time specified by xact coordination
level.

Figure 5-6: Resolving remote transaction branches
Adaptive Server
Coordination Service
“OK” “Network problem”

“OK”
Adaptive Server 2 Adaptive Server 3 Adaptive Server 4
With the default value of xact coordination interval, 60, Adaptive Server
attempts to resolve remote transactions once every minute. Decreasing the
value may speed the completion of distributed transactions, but only if the
transactions are themselves resolved in less than a minute. Under normal
circumstances, there is no performance penalty to decreasing the value of xact
coordination interval.
Setting xact coordination interval to a higher number can slow the completion of
distributed transactions, and cause transaction branches to hold resources
longer than they normally would. Under normal circumstances, do not increase
the value of xact coordination interval beyond its default.
xp_cmdshell context
Summary information
Default value 1
Valid values 0, 1, 2
Status Dynamic
xp_cmdshell context sets the security context for the operating system
command to be executed using the xp_cmdshell system ESP. The values for the
context determines under which account the command runs:
• 0 – command runs under XP Server’s account.
• 1 – command runs under user’s account.

• 2 – command runs under XP Server’s account only if the user has

administrator privileges.
Setting xp_cmdshell context to 1 restricts the xp_cmdshell security context to
users who have accounts at the operating system level. Its behavior is platform-
specific. If xp_cmdshell context is set to 1, to use an xp_cmdshell ESP, an
operating system user account must exist for the Adaptive Server user name.
For example, an Adaptive Server user named “sa” cannot use xp_cmdshell
unless he or she has an operating-system-level user account named “sa”.
On Windows, when xp_cmdshell context is set to 1, xp_cmdshell succeeds only
if the user name of the user logging in to Adaptive Server is a valid Windows
user name with Windows system administration privileges on the system on
which Adaptive Server is running.
On other platforms, when xp_cmdshell context is set to 1, xp_cmdshell succeeds
only if Adaptive Server was started by a user with “superuser” privileges at the
operating system level. When Adaptive Server gets a request to execute
xp_cmdshell, it checks the uid of the user name of the ESP requestor and runs
the operating system command with the permissions of that uid.
If xp_cmdshell context is 0, the permissions of the operating system account
under which Adaptive Server is running are the permissions used to execute an
operating system command from xp_cmdshell. This allows users to execute
operating commands that they would not ordinarily be able to execute under
the security context of their own operating system accounts.


CH A PTE R 6 Overview of Disk Resource
Issues
Topic Page
Device allocation and object placement 271
Commands for managing disk resources 272
Considerations in storage management decisions 274
Status and defaults at installation time 275
System tables that manage storage 276
Many Adaptive Server defaults are set to reasonable values for aspects of
storage management, such as database, table, and index location, and how
much space is allocated for each one. Responsibility for storage allocation
and management is often centralized, and usually, the system
administrator has ultimate control over the allocation of disk resources to
Adaptive Server and the physical placement of databases, tables, and
indexes on those resources.
Device allocation and object placement

When configuring a new system, the system administrator must consider
several issues that have a direct impact on the number and size of disk
resources required. These device allocation issues refer to commands and
procedures that add disk resources to Adaptive Server.
Table 6-1: Device allocation topics
Task Chapter
Initialize and allocate a default pool of database devices Chapter 7, “Initializing Database Devices”
Mirror database devices for recovery Chapter 2, “Mirroring Database
Devices,” in System Administration
Guide: Volume 2

Commands for managing disk resources
After the initial disk resources have been allocated to Adaptive Server, the
system administrator, database owner, and object owners should consider how
to place databases and database objects on specific database devices. These
object placement issues determine where database objects reside on your
system and whether or not the objects share devices. Object placement tasks
are discussed throughout this manual, including the chapters shown in Table 6-
2.
Table 6-2: Object placement topics
Task Chapter
Place databases on specific database devices Chapter 6, “Creating and Managing User
Databases,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2
Place tables and indexes on specific database devices Chapter 6, “Creating and Managing User
Databases,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2
Do not consider allocating devices separately from object placement. For

example, if you decide that a particular table must reside on a dedicated pair of
devices, first allocate those devices to Adaptive Server. The remaining sections
in this chapter provide an overview that spans both device allocation and object
placement issues, providing pointers to chapters where appropriate.
Commands for managing disk resources

Table 6-3 lists the major commands a system administrator uses to allocate disk
resources to Adaptive Server, and provides references to the chapters that
discuss those commands.
Table 6-3: Commands for allocating disk resources
Command Task See
disk init Makes a physical device available to a particular Chapter 7, “Initializing
name = "dev_name" Adaptive Server. Assigns a database device Database Devices”
physname = "phys_name"...
name (dev_name) that is used to identify the
device in other Adaptive Server commands.
sp_deviceattr logicalname, Changes the dsync setting of an existing Chapter 7, “Initializing
optname, optvalue database device file. Database Devices”
sp_diskdefault "dev_name"... Adds dev_name to the general pool of default Chapter 7, “Initializing
database space. Database Devices”

CHAPTER 6 Overview of Disk Resource Issues
Command Task See

disk resize Dynamically increases the size of database Chapter 7, “Initializing
name = “device_name”, devices. Database Devices”
size = additional_space
disk mirror Mirrors a database device on a specific physical Chapter 2, “Mirroring
name = "dev_name" device. Database Devices,” in
mirror = "phys_name"...
System
Administration
Guide: Volume 2
Table 6-4 lists the commands used in object placement. For information about
how object placement affects performance, see Chapter 1, “Controlling
Physical Data Placement,” in the Performance and Tuning Series: Physical
Database Tuning.
Table 6-4: Commands for placing objects on disk resources
Command Task See
create database...on dev_name Makes database devices available to a particular Chapter 6,
or Adaptive Server database. The log on clause to “Creating and
alter database...on dev_name create database places the database’s logs on a Managing User
particular database device. Databases,” in
System
Administration
Guide: Volume 2
create database... When used without the on dev_name clause, Chapter 6,
or these commands allocate space on the default “Creating and
alter database... database devices. Managing User
Databases,” in
System
Administration
Guide: Volume 2
sp_addsegment seg_name, Creates a segment—a named collection of Chapter 8, “Creating
dbname, devname space—from the devices available to a and Using Segments
and particular database. in System
sp_extendsegment seg_name, Administration
dbname, devname Guide: Volume 2
create table...on seg_name Creates database objects, placing them on a Chapter 8, “Creating
or specific segment of the database’s assigned disk and Using Segments
create index...on seg_name space. in System
Administration
Guide: Volume 2

Considerations in storage management decisions
Command Task See

create table... When used without on seg_name, tables and Chapter 8, “Creating
or indexes occupy the general pool of space and Using Segments
create index... allocated to the database (the default devices). in System
Administration
Guide: Volume 2
Considerations in storage management decisions

The system administrator must make many decisions regarding the physical
allocation of space to Adaptive Server databases. The major considerations in
these choices are:
• Recovery – disk mirroring and maintaining logs on a separate physical
device provide two mechanisms for full recovery in the event of physical
disk failures.
• Performance – for tables or databases where speed of disk reads and writes
is crucial, properly placing database objects on physical devices yields
performance improvements. Disk mirroring slows the speed of disk
writes.
Recovery
Recovery is the key motivation for using several disk devices. You can mirror
database devices to achieve nonstop recovery. You can also ensure full
recovery by storing a database’s log on a separate physical device.
Keeping logs on a separate device

Unless a database device is mirrored, full recovery requires that a database’s
transaction log be stored on a different device from the actual data (including
indexes) of a database. In the event of a hard disk failure, you can create an up-
to-date database by loading a dump of the database and then applying the log
records that were safely stored on another device. See Chapter 6, “Creating and
Managing User Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2 for
information about the log on clause of create database.

Mirroring
Nonstop recovery in the event of a hard disk failure is guaranteed by mirroring
all Adaptive Server devices to a separate physical disk. See Chapter 2,
“Mirroring Database Devices,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
Performance
You can improve system performance by placing logs and database objects on
separate devices:
• Placing a table on one hard disk and nonclustered indexes on another
ensures that physical reads and writes are faster, since the work is split
between two disk drives.
• Splitting large tables across two disks can improve performance,
particularly for multiuser applications.
• When log and data share devices, user log cache buffering of transaction
log records is disabled.
• Partitioning provides multiple insertion points for a heap table, adds a
degree of parallelism to systems configured to perform parallel query
processing, and makes it possible to distribute a table’s I/O across multiple
database devices.
See Chapter 1, “Controlling Physical Data Placement,” in the Performance and
Tuning Series: Physical Database Tuning for a detailed discussion of how
object placement affects performance.
Status and defaults at installation time

The installation program and scripts initialize the master device and set up the
master, model, sybsystemprocs, sybsecurity, and temporary databases for you.
When you install Adaptive Server, the system databases, system-defined

segments, and database devices are organized as follows:
• The master, model, and tempdb databases are installed on the master
device.
• The sybsystemprocs database is installed on a device that you specified.

System tables that manage storage
• Three segments are created in each database: system, default, and

logsegment.
• The master device is the default storage device for all user-created
databases.
Note After initializing new devices for default storage, remove the master
device from the default storage area with sp_diskdefault. Do not store user
databases and objects on the master device. See “Designating default
devices” on page 290.
• If you install the audit database, sybsecurity, it is located on its own device.

Two system tables in the master database, sysusages and sysdevices, and three
more in each user database (syssegments, sysindexes, and syspartitions) track
the placement of databases, tables (including the transaction log table, syslogs),
and indexes. The relationship between the tables is illustrated in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1: System tables that manage storage

vstart between low, high
SYSUSAGES
Transactions SYSDEVICES
Transactions
One row
for each N 1
fragment
One row for
Master N segmap each device
database
User
database N segmap
SYSSEGMENTS
Transactions SYSINDEXES
Student Info
1 N
One row segment segment
for each
segment
One row for

1 each table,
index or
N table with
SYSPARTITIONS
Transactions text
One row for
each data or
index
partition
The sysdevices table

The sysdevices table in the master database contains one row for each
database device and may contain a row for each dump device (tape, disk, or
operating system file) available to Adaptive Server.

The disk init command adds entries for database devices to master..sysdevices.
Dump devices, added using sp_addumpdevice, are discussed in Chapter 11,
“Developing a Backup and Recovery Plan,” in the System Administration
Guide: Volume 2
sysdevices stores two names for each device:
• A logical name or device name, used in all subsequent storage-

management commands, is stored in the name column of sysdevices. This
is usually a user-friendly name, perhaps indicating the planned use for the
device, for example, “logdev” or “userdbdev.”
• The physical name is the actual operating system name of the device. Use
this name only in the disk init command; after that, all Adaptive Server data
storage commands use the logical name.
Place a database or transaction log on one or more devices by specifying the
logical name of the device in the create database or alter database statement.
The log on clause to create database places a database’s transaction log on a
separate device to ensure full recoverability. The log device must also have an
entry in sysdevices before you can use log on.
A database can reside on one or more devices, and a device can store one or
more databases. See Chapter 6, “Creating and Managing User Databases,” in
System Administration Guide: Volume 2 for information about creating
databases on specific database devices.
The sysusages table

The sysusages table in the master database keeps track of the space you assign
to all Adaptive Server databases.
create database and alter database allocate new space to the database by adding
a row to sysusages for each database device or device fragment. When you
allocate only a portion of the space on a device with create or alter database,
that portion is called a fragment.
sp_addsegment, sp_dropsegment, and sp_extendsegment change the segmap
column in sysusages for the device that is mapped or unmapped to a segment.
See Chapter 8, “Creating and Using Segments in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.

The syssegments table

The syssegments table, one in each database, lists the segments in a database.
A segment is a collection of the database devices and fragments available to a
particular database. Tables and indexes can be assigned to a particular
segment—and therefore to a particular physical device—or can span a set of
physical devices.
create database makes default entries in syssegments. sp_addsegment and
sp_dropsegment to add and remove entries from syssegments.
The sysindexes table

The sysindexes table lists each table and index and the segment where each
table, clustered index, nonclustered index, and chain of text pages is stored. It
also lists other information such as the max_rows_per_page setting for the table
or index.
The create table, create index, and alter table commands create new rows in
sysindexes. Partitioning a table changes the function of sysindexes entries for
the table.
The syspartitions table

The syspartitions table lists each table and index partition and the segment
where the partition is stored. syspartitions maintains key storage management
information such as the first page of a data or index page chain, the last page
of a heap, the root page of an index partition, and so on.
Use create table, create index and alter table to create new rows in syspartitions.


CH A PTE R 7 Initializing Database Devices
Topic Page
Database devices 281
Using the disk init command 282
disk init syntax 282
Getting information about devices 288
Dropping devices 290
Designating default devices 290
Increasing the size of devices with disk resize 292
Database devices
A database device stores the objects that make up databases. The term
device does not necessarily refer to a distinct physical device: it can refer
to any piece of a disk (such as a disk partition) or a file in the file system
that is used to store databases and their objects.
Each database device or file must be prepared and made known to
Adaptive Server before it can be used for database storage. This process
is called initialization.
After a database device has been initialized, it can be:
• Allocated to the default pool of devices for the create and alter
database commands
• Assigned to the pool of space available to a user database

• Assigned to a user database and used to store one or more database
objects
• Assigned to store a database’s transaction logs

Using the disk init command
Using the disk init command

A system administrator initializes new database devices with the disk init
command, which:
• Maps the specified physical disk device or operating system file to a
database device name
• Lists the new device in master..sysdevices
• Prepares the device for database storage
Note Before you run disk init, see the installation documentation for your
platform for information about choosing a database device and preparing it for
use with Adaptive Server. You may want to repartition the disks on your
computer to provide maximum performance for your Sybase databases.
disk init divides the database devices into allocation units, groups of 256
logical pages. The size of the allocation unit depends on which logical page
size your server is configured for (2, 4, 8, or 16K). In each allocation unit, the
disk init command initializes the first page as the allocation page, which
contains information about the database (if any) that resides on the allocation
unit.
Warning! After you run the disk init command, dump the master database. This
makes recovery easier and safer in case master is damaged. See Chapter 13,
“Restoring the System Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
disk init syntax

See the Reference Manual: Commands for the disk init syntax.
Specifying a logical device name

The device_name must be a valid identifier. This name is used in the create
database and alter database commands, and in the system procedures that
manage segments. The logical device name is known only to Adaptive Server,
not to the operating system on which the server runs.

CHAPTER 7 Initializing Database Devices
Specifying a physical device name

The physname of the database device gives the name of a raw disk partition
(UNIX), foreign device, or the name of an operating system file. On PC
platforms, you typically use operating system file names for physname.
Choosing a device number

Adaptive Server accepts, but does not require, the disk init vdevno parameter. If
you specify a vdevno, you may choose any currently unused identifier from 1
to 2,147,483,647 (virtual device ID 0 is used by the master device). For
example, specifying vdevno = 33 assigns virtual device ID 33 to a device. If
you do not specify a vdevno, Adaptive Server chooses a number higher than the
highest vdevno currently listed in sysdevices.
The number of database devices you can create is limited by the number of
devices configuration parameter. Adaptive Server is initially configured for 10
devices. Use sp_configure to change the value for number of devices.
Your operating system may also limit the number of devices your installation
can use concurrently. To the operating system, each Sybase device counts as
one open file.
Adaptive Server automatically specifies the next available identifying number
for the database device. This is the virtual device number (vdevno). You need
not specify this number when you issue the disk init command.
If you manually select the vdevno, it must be unique among the devices used
by Adaptive Server. Device number 0 represents the master device. Legal
numbers are 1 – 2,147,483,647. You can choose any unused vdevno within that
range.
To see the numbers already in use for vdevno, look in the vdevno column of the
report from sp_helpdevice, or use the following query to list all the device
numbers currently in use:
select vdevno from master..sysdevices
where status & 2=2
Here, status & 2=2 specifies physical disk.

disk init syntax
Specifying the device size

To indicate the size of the device, use ‘k’ or ‘K’ for kilobytes, ‘m’ or ‘M’ for
megabytes, ‘g’ or ‘G’ for gigabytes, and ‘t’ or ‘T’ for terabytes. Sybase
recommends that, to avoid confusion in the actual number of pages allocated,
you always include the unit specifier in both the disk init and create database
commands. Enclose the unit specifier in single or double quotes or in brackets.
Theoretically, you can create as many as 2,147,483,647 disk devices, each of
which can be as large as 2,147,483,648 2K-blocks. The maximum installation
size becomes a function of database size, hardware, and operating system
limits.
The following guidelines apply to the syntax for disk init:
• If you do not include a unit specifier for the size argument of disk init or
disk reinit, size is measured, by default, in number of virtual pages. Thus,
if you enter size = 15000, Adaptive Server assumes 15,000 virtual
pages. A virtual page is 2048 bytes.
• You can increase, but not decrease, the size of an existing database device
using the disk resize command.
• If you are planning to use the new device for the creation of a new
database, the minimum size depends on the logical page size used by the
server, described in Table 7-1:
Table 7-1: Minimum database sizes
Logical page Minimum
size database size
2K 3MB
4K 6MB
8K 12MB
16K 24MB
You cannot have a database smaller than the model database. A model database
larger than the minimums listed above, determines the minimum database size.
Adaptive Server allocates and manages database space in allocation units,
which are groups of 256 logical pages. The smallest database you can create
(using create database) is 1MB; therefore, the size of the smallest usable
database device is the larger of 1MB or 256 logical pages (for a 2K or 4K
logical page size, this is 1MB for a 8K logical page size, this is 2MB, for a 16K
logical page size, this is 4MB.

Keep this grouping of 256 pages in mind when you decide how large to make
a device to avoid wasting space. For example, if your installation uses a 16k
logical page size, specifying a device as size = '31M' leaves 3MB wasted at
the end of the device, since an allocation unit is 4MB.
If you are initializing a raw device, determine the size of the device from your
operating system, as described in the installation guide for your platform. Use
the total size available, up to the maximum for your platform. After you have
initialized the disk for use by Adaptive Server, you cannot use any space on that
raw device for any other purpose.
disk init uses size to compute the value for the high virtual page number in
sysdevices.high. The values for sysdevices.high and sysdevices.low are virtual
page numbers in 2K-byte blocks, which is the Adaptive Server unit of physical
disk management. This may not be the same as your installation's logical page
size
Note If the physical device does not contain the number of blocks specified by
the size parameter, disk init fails. If you use the optional vstart parameter, the
physical device must contain the sum of the blocks specified by both the vstart
and size parameters, or the command fails.
Specifying the dsync setting (optional)

For devices initialized on UNIX operating system files, the dsync setting
controls whether or not writes to those files are buffered. When the dsync
setting is on, Adaptive Server opens a database device file using the UNIX
dsync flag, which ensures that writes to the device file occur directly to the
physical storage media, and that Adaptive Server can recover data on the
device in the event of a system failure.
When dsync is off, writes to the device file may be buffered by the UNIX file
system, and the recovery of data on the device cannot be ensured. Turn off
dsync only when data integrity is not required.
Note The dsync setting is ignored for devices initialized on raw partitions.
Instead, writes to the database device take place directly to the physical media.

disk init syntax
Performance implications of dsync

Using the dsync setting with database device files incurs several performance
trade-offs:
• Adaptive Server does not support asynchronous I/O on operating system
files for HP-UX.
• If database device files use the dsync option, the Adaptive Server engine
that is writing to the device file waits until the write operation completes.
This may cause poor performance during update operations.
• When dsync is on, write operations to database device files may be slower
compared to earlier versions of Adaptive Server (where dsync is not
supported). This is because Adaptive Server must write data to disk
instead of simply copying cached data to the UNIX file system buffer.
In cases where highest write performance is required (but data integrity
after a system failure is not required) turning dsync off yields device file
performance similar to earlier Adaptive Server versions. For example, you
may consider storing tempdb on a dedicated device file with dsync
disabled, if performance is not acceptable while using dsync.
• Response time for read operations is generally better for devices stored on
UNIX operating system files as compared to devices stored on raw
partitions. Data from device files can benefit from the UNIX file system
cache as well as the Adaptive Server cache, and more reads may take place
without requiring physical disk access.
Limitations and restrictions of dsync

The following limitations and restrictions apply to using dsync:
• For the master device, dsync is always set to true and you cannot change
the setting.
• If you change a device file’s dsync setting using the sp_deviceattr
procedure, restart Adaptive Server for the change to take effect.
• When you upgrade from an Adaptive Server earlier than version 12.x,
dsync is set to true only for the master device file. Use sp_deviceattr to
change the dsync setting for any other device files.
• Adaptive Server ignores the dsync setting for database devices stored on
raw partitions. Writes to devices stored on raw partitions are always
directly to the physical media.

• The directio and dsync parameters are mutually exclusive. If a device has
dsync set to true, you cannot set directio to true for the same device. To
enable directio for a device, you must first reset dsync to false.
Using directio to bypass operating system buffer

The directio parameter for disk init, disk reinit, and sp_deviceattr allows you to
configure Adaptive Server to transfer data directly to disk, bypassing the
operating system buffer cache. directio performs I/O in the same manner as raw
devices and provides the same performance benefit as raw devices, but has the
ease of use and manageability of file system devices. You cannot set directio for
the master device. directio is a static parameter; restart Adaptive Server for it to
take effect.
Note directio is not available on all platforms. If you issue disk init with the
directio parameter on a platform on which it is not supported, Adaptive Server
issues the message No such parameter: 'directio'.
By default, the directio option is set to false (off) for all platforms.
Note Devices used for databases for which recovery is not important (for
example, tempdb), may, by default, have dsync set to false. For these devices,
enabling directio may have an adverse performance effect, so carefully review
device use before you enable directio.
This example creates a device named “user_disk” that uses directio to write data
directly to disk:
disk init
name = "user_disk",
physname = "/usr/u/sybase/data/userfile1.dat",
size = 5120, directio = true
To initializes 10MB of a disk on a UNIX operating system file, enter:
disk reinit
name = "user_disk",
physname = "/usr/u/sybase/data/userfile1.dat",
size = 5120, directio = true
By default, directio is disabled for all existing devices; enable it using
sp_deviceattr:

Getting information about devices
sp_deviceattr device_name, directio, [true | false]

For example, the following enables directio disk writes for the “user_disk”
device:
sp_deviceattr user_disk, directio, true
Other optional parameters for disk init

vstart is the starting virtual address, or the offset, for Adaptive Server to begin
using the database device. vstart accepts the following optional unit specifiers:
k or K (kilobytes), m or M (megabytes), g or G (gigabytes) and t or T
(terabytes). The size of the offset depends on how you enter the value for vstart:
• If you do not specify a unit size, vstart uses 2K pages for its starting
address. For example, if you specify vstart = 13, Adaptive Server uses
13 * 2K pages as the offset for the starting address.
• If you specify a unit value, vstart uses the value you enter as the starting
address. For example, if you specify vstart = "13M", Adaptive Server
sets the starting address offset at 13MB.
The default, and usually preferred value, of vstart is 0. If the specified device
does not have the sum of vstart + size blocks available, the disk init command
fails.
The optional cntrltype keyword specifies the disk controller. Its default value is
0. Reset it only if instructed to do so by your system administrator.
Note To perform disk initialization, the user who started Adaptive Server must
have the appropriate operating system permissions on the device that is being
initialized.
Getting information about devices

sp_helpdevice provides information about the devices in the sysdevices table.
When used without a device name, sp_helpdevice lists all the devices available
on Adaptive Server. When used with a device name, it lists information about
that device. Here, sp_helpdevice is used to report information about the master
device:

sp_helpdevice master
device_name physical_name description
----------- -------------- ------------------------------------------
master d_master special, default disk, physical disk, 30 MB
status cntrltype vdevno vpn_low vpn_high

------ ---------- ------- ------- ---------
3 0 0 0 10239
Each row in master..sysdevices describes:

• A dump device (tape, disk, or file) to be used for backing up databases, or
• A database device to be used for database storage.
The initial contents of sysdevices are operating-system-dependent. sysdevices
entries usually include:
• One for the master device
• One for the sybsystemprocs database, which you can use to store
additional databases such as pubs2 and sybsyntax, or for user databases
and logs
• Two for tape dump devices
If you installed auditing, there is a separate device for sybsecurity.
The vpn_low and vpn_high columns represent the page numbers that have been
assigned to the device. For dump devices, these columns represent the media
capacity of the device.
The status field indicates the type of device, whether a disk device is used as a
default storage device when users issue a create or alter database command
without specifying a database device, disk mirroring information, and dsync
settings.
Table 7-2: Status bits in sysdevices
Bit Meaning
1 Default disk (may be used by any create or alter database
command that does not specify a location)
2 Physical disk
4 Logical disk (not used)
8 Skip header (used with tape dump devices)
16 Dump device
32 Serial writes

Dropping devices
Bit Meaning
64 Device mirrored
128 Reads mirrored
256 Secondary mirror side only
512 Mirror enabled
2048 Used internally; set after disk unmirror, side = retain
4096 Primary device needs to be unmirrored (used internally)
8192 Secondary device needs to be unmirrored (used internally)
16384 UNIX file device uses dsync setting (writes occur directly to
physical media)
For more information about dump devices and sp_addumpdevice, See Chapter
11, “Developing a Backup and Recovery Plan in the System Administration
Guide: Volume 2.
Dropping devices
To drop database and dump devices, use sp_dropdevice:
sp_dropdevice logicalname
You cannot drop a device that is in use by a database. You must drop the
database first.
sp_dropdevice removes the device name from sysdevices. sp_dropdevice does
not remove an operating system file; it only makes the file inaccessible to
Adaptive Server. Use operating system commands to delete a file after using
sp_dropdevice.
Designating default devices

To create a pool of default database devices to be used by all Adaptive Server
users for creating databases, use sp_diskdefault after the devices are initialized.
sp_diskdefault marks these devices in sysdevices as default devices. Whenever
users create (or alter) databases without specifying a database device, new disk
space is allocated from the pool of default disk space.
The syntax for sp_diskdefault is:

sp_diskdefault logicalname, {defaulton | defaultoff}

After adding user devices, use the defaultoff option to remove the master device
from the pool of default space:
sp_diskdefault master, defaultoff
The following designates sprocdev, the device that holds the sybsystemprocs
database, a default device:
sp_diskdefault sprocdev, defaulton
Adaptive Server can have multiple default devices. They are used in the order
in which they appear in the sysdevices table (that is, alphabetical order). When
the first default device is filled, the second default device is used, and so on.
Note After initializing a set of database devices, you may want to assign them
to specific databases or database objects rather than adding them to the default
pool of devices. For example, you may want to make sure a table never grows
beyond the size of a particular device.
Choosing default and nondefault devices

sp_diskdefault lets you plan space usage for performance and recovery, while
allowing users to create or alter databases.
Do not use these devices as default devices:
• The master device
• The device used for sybsecurity
• Any device intended solely for logs
• Devices where high-performance databases reside
You can use the device that holds sybsystemprocs for other user databases.
Note If you are using disk mirroring or segments, exercise caution in deciding
which devices you add to the default list. In most cases, devices that are to be
mirrored, or databases that contain objects placed on segments should
specifically allocate devices, rather than being made part of default storage.

Increasing the size of devices with disk resize

The disk resize command allows you to increase the size of your database
devices dynamically, rather than initializing a new device. For example, if
/sybase/testdev.dat requires an additional 10MB of space, you can run disk
resize and allocate this amount of space to the device. The create and alter
database commands can use this added space.
Use disk resize to increase the size for both devices on raw partitions and for
file systems. The minimum amount of space by which you can increase a
device is 1MB or an allocation unit, whichever is greater.
Page size Allocation unit size Minimum incremental size
2K 0.5MB 1MB
4K 1MB 1MB
8K 2MB 2MB
16K 4MB 4MB
You cannot use disk resize on dump or load devices.

Any properties that are set on the device continue to be set after you increase
its size. That is, if a device has dsync set before you increase its size, it has
dsync set afterwards. Also, any access rights that were set before you increased
the size of the device remain set.
A user with the sa_role can execute the disk resize command, which:
• Updates the high value in master....sysdevices, and
• Prepares the additional space for database storage.
Use audit trails on disk resize to track the number of times a device is resized.
The device being resized is always online and available for users during the
resize operation.
Resizing a disk requires that:
• You have already initialized the device with disk init.
• device_name must refer to a valid logical device name.
• You disable mirroring while the resize operation is in progress. You can
reestablish mirroring when the resize operation is complete.
In this example, the configuration of the device testdev is:
sp_helpdevice testdev

----------- ------------------- -------------

------- --------- ------------- ------------- --------------
testdev /sybase/dev/testdev.dat special, dsync on, directio off,
physical disk, 10.00MB
16386 0 1 0 5119
To increase the size of testdev by 4MB using disk resize, enter:
disk resize
name = "test_dev",
size = "4M"
testdev.dat is now 14MB:
sp_helpdevice testdev
----------- ------------------- -------------
------- --------- ------------- ------------- --------------
testdev /sybase/dev/testdev.dat special, dsync on, directio off,
physical disk, 14.00MB
16386 0 1 0 7167
See the Reference Manual: Commands for disk resize syntax.
Insufficient disk space

During the physical initialization of the disk, if an error occurs due to
insufficient disk space, disk resize extends the database device to the largest
size possible before the error occurs.
For example, on a server that uses 4K logical pages, if you try to increase the
size of the device by 40MB, but only 39.5MB is available, the device is
extended only by 39.5MB.
You cannot decrease the size of a device with disk resize.


CH A PTE R 8 Setting Database Options
Topic Page
Using the sp_dboption procedure 295
Database option descriptions 296
Viewing the options on a database 297
Database options control:

• Transaction behavior
• Table-colum defaults
• User access restrictions
• Performance of recovery and bcp operations
• Log behavior
The system administrator and the database owner can use database options
to configure settings for an entire database. Database options differ from
sp_configure parameters, which affect the entire server, and set options,
which affect only the current session or stored procedure.
Using the sp_dboption procedure

Use sp_dboption to change settings for an entire database. The options
remain in effect until they are changed. sp_dboption:
• Displays a complete list of the database options when it is used
without a parameter
• Changes a database option when used with parameters
You can change options only for user databases. You cannot change
options for the master database. To change a database option in a user
database (or to display a list of the database options), execute sp_dboption
while using the master database.

Database option descriptions
The syntax is:

sp_dboption [dbname, optname, {true | false}]
Note Changes to model’s database options do not affect tempdb or current

user-defined multiple temporary databases when you restart Adaptive
Server. These changes appear only in databases that you create after you
change the model database. Restarting Adaptive Server clears objects and
data contained in the temporary databases, but does not reset database
options.
Database option descriptions

All users with access to the master database can execute sp_dboption with
no parameters to display a list of the database options. The report from
sp_dboption looks like this:
sp_dboption
Settable database options.
--------------------
abort tran on log full
allow nulls by default
async log service
auto identity
dbo use only
ddl in tran
delayed commit
identity in nonunique index
no chkpt on recovery
no free space acctg
read only
select into/bulkcopy/pllsort
single user
trunc log on chkpt
trunc. log on chkpt.
unique auto_identity index
For a report on which options have been set in a particular database,
execute sp_helpdb in that database.
See the Commands Reference: Procedures for information about each
database option in detail.

CHAPTER 8 Setting Database Options
Viewing the options on a database

Use sp_helpdb to determine the options that are set for a particular
database. sp_helpdb lists each active option in the “status” column of its
output.
The following example shows that the read only option is turned on in
mydb:
sp_helpdb mydb
name db_size owner dbid created status
----- ------- ----- ---- ------------ -------------------
mydb 20.0 MB sa 5 Mar 05, 2005 read only
device_fragments size usage created free kbytes

----------------- ------ ------------ -------- -----------
master 10.0 MB data and log Mar 05 2005 1792
device segment
------------------------------ ------------------------------
master default
master logsegment
master system
To display a summary of the options for all databases, use sp_helpdb
without specifying a database:
sp_helpdb
name db_size owner dbid created status
------------- -------- ----- ---- ------------ -------------------
master 48.0 MB sa 1 Apr 12, 2005 mixed log and data
model 8.0 MB sa 3 Apr 12, 2005 mixed log and data
pubs2 20.0 MB sa 6 Apr 12, 2005 select into/
bulkcopy/pllsort, trunc log on chkpt, mixed log and data
sybsystemdb 8.0 MB sa 5 Apr 12, 2005 mixed log and data
sybsystemprocs 112.0 MB sa 4 Apr 12, 2005 trunc log on chkpt,
mixed log and data
tempdb 8.0 MB sa 2 Apr 12, 2005 select into/
bulkcopy/pllsort, trunc log on chkpt, mixed log and data

Viewing the options on a database

CH A PTE R 9 Configuring Character Sets, Sort
Orders, and Languages
This chapter discusses Adaptive Server internationalization and

localization support issues.
Topic Page
Understanding internationalization and localization 299
Advantages of internationalized systems 300
A sample internationalized system 301
Elements of an internationalized system 303
Selecting the character set for your server 303
Selecting the sort order 313
Selecting a language for system messages 321
Setting up your server: examples 323
Changing the character set, sort order, or message language 325
Installing date strings for unsupported languages 335
Internationalization and localization files 337
Understanding internationalization and localization

Internationalization is the process of enabling an application to support
multiple languages and cultural conventions.
An internationalized application uses external files to provide language-
specific information at execution time. Because it contains no language-
specific code, an internationalized application can be deployed in any
native language environment without code changes. A single version of a
software product can be adapted to different languages or regions,
conforming to local requirements and customs without engineering
changes. This approach to software development saves significant time
and money over the lifetime of an application.

Advantages of internationalized systems
Localization is the process of adapting an internationalized product to meet the

requirements of one particular language or region, for example Spanish,
including providing translated system messages; translations for the user
interface; and the correct formats for date, time, and currency. One version of
a software product may have many localized versions.
Sybase provides both internationalization and localization support. Adaptive
Server includes the character set definition files and sort order definition files
required for data processing support for the major business languages in
Western Europe, Eastern Europe, the Middle East, Latin America, and Asia.
Sybase Language Modules provide translated system messages and formats for
Chinese (Simplified), French, German, Japanese, Korean, Brazilian
Portuguese, and Spanish. By default, Adaptive Server comes with U.S. English
message files.
This chapter describes the available character sets and language modules and
summarizes the steps necessary to change the default character set, sort order,
or message language for Adaptive Server.
Advantages of internationalized systems

The task of designing an application to work outside its country of origin can
seem daunting. Often, programmers think that internationalizing means hard-
coding dependencies based on cultural and linguistic conventions for just one
country.
A better approach is to write an internationalized application: that is, one that
examines the local computing environment to determine what language to use
and loads files containing language-specific information at runtime.
When you use an internationalized application, a single application can be
deployed in all countries. This has several advantages:
• You write and maintain one application.
• The application can be deployed, without change, in new countries as
needed. You need only supply the correct localization files.
• All sites can expect standard features and behavior.

CHAPTER 9 Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and Languages
A sample internationalized system

An internationalized system may include internationalized client applications,
gateways, and servers running on different platforms in different native
language environments.
For example, an international system might include the following components:
• Order processing applications in New York City, Mexico City, and Paris
(Client-Library applications)
• An inventory control server in Germany (Adaptive Server)
• An order fulfillment server in France (Adaptive Server)
• A central accounting application in Japan (an Open Server application
working with an Adaptive Server)
In this system, the order processing applications:
• Query the inventory control server to determine if requested items are in
stock
• Place orders with the order fulfillment server
• Send financial information to the accounting application
The inventory control server and the order fulfillment server respond to
queries, and the accounting application collects financial data and generates
reports.
The system looks like this:

A sample internationalized system
Figure 9-1: Example of an international system

Order processing
New York City (PC)
Order fulfillment
English France
Order processing Inventory control

Mexico City (UNIX) Germany
Spanish
Order processing Accounting gateway Account server

Paris (Mac) Japan Japan
French
In this example, all applications and servers use local languages and character
sets to accept input and output messages.

Elements of an internationalized system

There are three elements that you can manipulate to configure your server
language in an internationalized environment. Sybase suggests that you review
these three elements and carefully plan the client/server network you want to
create.
• Character set – the language in which the server sends and receives data to
and from the client servers. Select the character set after carefully planning
and analyzing the language needs of all client servers.
• Sort order – sort order options are dependent on the language and character
set you select.
• System messages – messages display in one of several languages provided
by Sybase. If your server language is not one of the languages provided,
your system messages display in English, the default.
The following sections provide details about each of these elements.
Selecting the character set for your server

All data is encoded in your server in a special code. For example, the letter “a”
is encoded as “97” in decimal. A character set is a specific collection of
characters (including alphabetic and numeric characters, symbols, and
nonprinting control characters) and their assigned numerical values, or codes.
A character set generally contains the characters for an alphabet, for example,
the Latin alphabet used in the English language, or a script such as Cyrillic used
with languages such as Russian, Serbian, and Bulgarian. Character sets that are
platform-specific and support a subset of languages, for example, the Western
European languages, are called native or national character sets. All
character sets that come with Adaptive Server, except for Unicode UTF-8, are
native character sets.

A script is a writing system, a collection of all the elements that characterize

the written form of a human language—for example, Latin, Japanese, or
Arabic. Depending on the languages supported by an alphabet or script, a
character set can support one or more languages. For example, the Latin
alphabet supports the languages of Western Europe (see Group 1 in Table 9-1
on page 305). On the other hand, the Japanese script supports only one
language, Japanese. Therefore, the Group 1 character sets support multiple
languages, while many character sets, such as those in Group 101, support only
one language.
The language or languages that are covered by a character set is called a
language group. A language group can contain many languages or only one
language; a native character set is the platform-specific encoding of the
characters for the language or languages of a particular language group.
Within a client/server network, you can support data processing in multiple
languages if all the languages belong to the same language group (see Table 9-
1 on page 305). For example, if data in the server is encoded in a Group 1
character set, you could have French, German, and Italian data and any of the
other Group 1 languages in the same database. However, you cannot store data
from another language group in the same database. For example, you cannot
store Japanese data with French or German data.
Unlike the native character sets just described, Unicode is an international
character set that supports over 650 of the world’s languages, such as Japanese,
Chinese, Russian, French, and German. Unicode allows you to mix different
languages from different language groups in the same server, no matter what
the platform. See “Unicode” on page 306 for more information.
Since all character sets support the Latin script, and therefore English, a
character set always supports at least two languages—English and one other
language.
Many languages are supported by more than one character set. The character
set you install for a language depends on the client’s platform and operating
system.
Adaptive Server supports the following languages and character sets:

Table 9-1: Supported languages and character sets

Language
group Languages Character sets
Group 1 Western European: Albanian, Catalan, ASCII 8, CP 437, CP 850, CP 860, CP 863,
Danish, Dutch, English, Faeroese, Finnish, CP 1252a , ISO 8859-1, ISO 8859-15,
French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish, Macintosh Roman, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISO-
Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, 15, CP 858
Swedish
Group 2 Eastern European: Croatian, Czech, Estonian, CP 852, CP 1250, ISO 8859-2, Macintosh
Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Polish, Central European
Romanian, Slovak, Slovene (and English)
Group 4 Baltic (and English) CP 1257
Group 5 Cyrillic: Bulgarian, Byelorussian, Macedonian, CP 855, CP 866, CP 1251, ISO 8859-5, Koi8,
Russian, Serbian, Ukrainian (and English) Macintosh Cyrillic
Group 6 Arabic (and English) CP 864, CP 1256, ISO 8859-6
Group 7 Greek (and English) CP 869, CP 1253, GREEK8, ISO 8859-7,
Macintosh Greek
Group 8 Hebrew (and English) CP 1255, ISO 8859-8
Group 9 Turkish (and English) CP 857, CP 1254, ISO 8859-9, Macintosh
Turkish, TURKISH8
Group 101 Japanese (and English) CP 932 DEC Kanji, EUC-JIS, Shift-JIS
Group 102 Simplified Chinese (PRC) (and English) CP 936, EUC-GB, GB18030
Group 103 Traditional Chinese (ROC) (and English) Big 5, CP 950b , EUC-CNS, Big 5 HKSCS
Group 104 Korean (and English) EUC-KSC, cp949
Group 105 Thai (and English) CP 874, TIS 620
Group 106 Vietnamese (and English) CP 1258
Unicode Over 650 languages UTF-8
a. CP 1252 is identical to ISO 8859-1 except for the 0x80–0x9F code points which are mapped to characters in CP 1252.
b. CP 950 is identical to Big 5.
Note The English language is supported by all character sets because the first
128 (decimal) characters of any character set include the Latin alphabet
(defined as “ASCll-7”). The characters beyond the first 128 differ between
character sets and are used to support the characters in different native
languages. For example, code points 0-127 of CP 932 and CP 874 both support
English and the Latin alphabet. However, code points 128-255 support
Japanese characters in CP 932 and code points 128-255 support Thai characters
in CP 874.

The following character sets support the European currency symbol, the
“euro”: CP 1252 (Western Europe); CP 1250 (Eastern Europe); CP 1251
(Cyrillic); CP 1256 (Arabic); CP 1253 (Greek); CP 1255 (Hebrew); CP 1254
(Turkish); CP 874 (Thai); iso15, roman9 and CP858. Unicode UTF-8 also
supports:
• Traditional Chinese on the Windows and Solaris platforms
• Arabic, Hebrew, Thai, and Russian on the Linux platform
Note iso_1 and ISO 8859-1 are different names for the same character set.
To mix languages from different language groups you must use Unicode. If
your server character set is Unicode, you can support more than 650 languages
in a single server and mix languages from any language group.
Unicode
Unicode is the first character set that enables all the world’s languages to be
encoded in the same data set. Prior to the introduction of Unicode, if you
wanted to store data in, for example, Chinese, you had to choose a character set
appropriate for that language—to the exclusion of most other languages. It was
either impossible or impractical to mix character sets, and thus diverse
languages, in the same data set.
Sybase supported Unicode in the form of three datatypes: unichar, univarchar,
and unitext. These datatypes store data in the UTF-16 encoding of Unicode.
UTF-16 is an encoding wherein Unicode scalar values are represented by a
single 16-bit value (or, in rare cases, as a pair of 16-bit values). The three
encodings are equivalent insofar as either encoding can be used to represent
any Unicode character. The choice of UTF-16 datatypes, rather than a UTF-16
server default character set, promotes easy, step-wise migration for existing
database applications.
Adaptive Server supports Unicode literals in SQL queries and a wide range of
sort orders for UTF-8.

The character set model used by Adaptive Server is based on a single,

configurable, server-wide character set. All data stored in Adaptive Server,
using any of the “character” datatypes (char, varchar, nchar, nvarchar, and text),
is interpreted as being in this character set. Sort orders are defined using this
character set, as are language modules—collections of server messages
translated into local languages.
During the connection dialog, a client application declares its native character
set and language. If properly configured, the server thereafter attempts to
convert any character data between its own character set and that of the client
(character data includes any data stored in the database, as well as server
messages in the client’s native language).This works well as long as the
server’s and client’s character sets are compatible. It does not work well when
characters are not defined in the other character set, as is the case for the
character sets SJIS, used for Japanese, and KOI8, used for Russian and other
Cyrillic languages. Such incompatibilities are the reason for Unicode, which
can be thought of as a character superset, including definitions for characters
in all other character sets.
The Unicode datatypes unichar, univarchar, and unitext are completely
independent of the traditional character set model. Clients send and receive
Unicode data independently of whatever other character data they send and
receive.
Character set installation

Adaptive Server version 12.5.1 and later supports the 4-byte form of UTF-8.
This form is used to represent the same rare Unicode characters that are
represented in UTF-16 by pairs of 16-bit values (“surrogate pairs”). Prior to
Adaptive Server version 12.5.1, only the 3-byte forms of UTF-8 were
supported. If you have installed the UTF-8 character set in an Adaptive Server
server earlier than version 12.5.1, you should reinstall it to enable the use of the
4-byte form of UTF-8.
The UTF-16 encoding of Unicode includes “surrogate pairs,” which are pairs
of 16-bit values that represent infrequently used characters. Additional
checking is built in to Adaptive Server to ensure the integrity of surrogate pairs.
You can switch this checking off by setting the configuration parameter
“enable surrogate processing” to 0. This yields slightly higher performance,
although the integrity of surrogate pairs is no longer guaranteed.

Unicode also defines “normalization,” which is the process by which all

possible representations of a single character are transformed into a single
representation. Many base characters followed by combining diacritical marks
are equivalent to precomposed characters, although their bit patterns are
different. For example, the following two sequences are equivalent:
0x00E9 -- é (LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE)
0x00650301 -- e (LATIN SMALL LETTER E), ´ (COMBINING ACUTE ACCENT)
The enable unicode normalization configuration parameter controls whether or
not Adaptive Server normalizes incoming Unicode data.
Significant performance increases are possible when the default Unicode
sortorder is set to “binary” and the enable Unicode normalization configuration
parameter is set to 1. This combination allows Adaptive Server to make several
assumptions about the nature of the Unicode data, and code has been
implemented to take advantage of these assumptions.
Functions
All functions taking char parameters have been overloaded to accept unichar as
well. Functions with more than one parameter, when called with at least one
unichar parameter, results in implicit conversion of any non-unichar parameters
to unichar.
To guarantee the integrity of surrogate pairs when enable surrogate processing
is set to 1 (the default), the string functions do not allow surrogate pairs to be
split. Positions are modified to fall at the beginning of a surrogate pair.
Several functions have been added to round out the unichar support. Included
are the functions to_unichar() and uscalar(), which are analogous to char() and
ascii(). The functions uhighsurr() and ulowsurr() allow the explicit handling of
surrogate pairs in user code.
There are restrictions when using unitext with functions. For information, see
the restriction description under the “Usage” section for each function.
Using unichar columns

When using the isql or bcp utilities, Unicode values display in hexadecimal
form unless the -Jutf8 flag is used, indicating the client’s character set is UTF-8.
In this case, the utility converts any Unicode data it receives from the server
into UTF-8. For example:
% isql -Usa -P -Jiso_1

1> select unicode_name from people where unicode_name = 'Jones'

2> go
unicode_name
------------------------------------------------------------------|
0x004a006f006e00650073
(1 row affected)
whereas:
% isql -Usa -P -Jutf8
1> select unicode_name from people where unicode_name = 'Jones'
2> go
unicode_name
------------------------------------------------------------------
Jones
(1 row affected)
This facilitates ad hoc queries. Not all terminal windows are capable of
displaying the full repertoire of Unicode characters, but simple tests involving
ASCII characters are greatly simplified.
Using unitext
The variable-length unitext datatype can hold up to 1,073,741,823 Unicode
characters (2,147,483,646 bytes). You can use unitext anywhere you use the text
datatype, with the same semantics. unitext columns are stored in UTF-16
encoding, regardless of the Adaptive Server default character set.
Open Client interoperability

The Open Client libraries support the datatype cs_unichar, which can be bound
to user variables declared as an array of short integers. This Open Client
datatype interfaces directly with the server’s unichar, unitext, and univarchar.
Java interoperability
The internal JDBC driver efficiently transfers unichar data between SQL and
Java contexts.
Going from SQL to Java, the class java.sql.ResultSet provides a number of
“get” methods to retrieve data from the columns of a result set. Any of these
get methods work with columns defined as unichar, unitext, or univarchar. The
method getString() is particularly efficient since no conversion needs to be
performed.

Use the setString() method of the class java.sql.PreparedStatement to go from

Java to SQL. The internal JDBC driver copies Java string data directly into the
SQL parameter defined as unichar, unitext, or univarchar.
The external JDBC driver (jConnect) has been modified to support the same
seamless interface as the internal driver.
Limitations
Because the earlier releases of Adaptive Server did not include a
Unicode-based language parser, a restriction was imposed on the use of the
new Unicode datatypes. To use the new datatypes, the server required its
default character set to be configured as UTF-8. This restriction has been
removed in Adaptive Server release 12.5.1 and later. Unicode datatypes can be
used regardless of the server’s default character set.
Selecting the server default character set

When you configure your server, you must specify a default character set for
the server. The default character set is the character set in which the server
stores and manipulates data. Each server can have only one default character
set.
By default, the installation tool assumes that the native character set of the
platform operating system is the server’s default character set. However, you
can select any character set supported by Adaptive Server as the default on
your server (see Table 9-1 on page 305).
For example, if you are installing the server on IBM RS/6000 running AIX, and
you select one of the Western European languages to install, the installation
tool assumes the default character set to be ISO 8859-1.
If you are installing a Unicode server, select UTF–8 as your default character
set.
For non-Unicode servers, determine what platform most of your client systems
use and use the character set for this platform as the default character set on the
server.
This has two advantages:
• The number of unmappable characters between character sets is
minimized.

Since there is usually not a complete one-to-one mapping between the

characters in two character sets, there is a potential for some data loss. This
is usually minor because most unconverted characters are special symbols
that are not commonly used or are specific to a platform.
• This minimizes the character set conversion that is required.
When the character set on the client system differs from the default
character set on the server, data must be converted in order to ensure data
integrity. Although the measured performance decrease that results from
character set conversion is insignificant, it is good practice to select the
default character set that results in the fewest conversions.
For example, if most of your clients use CP 850, specify CP 850 on your server.
You can do this even if your server is on an HP-UX system (where its native
character set for the Group 1 languages is ROMAN8).
Note Sybase strongly recommends that you decide which character set to use
as your default before you create any databases or make any changes to the
Sybase-supplied databases.
In the example below (Figure 9-2), 175 clients all access the same Adaptive
Server. The clients are on different platforms and use different character sets.
The critical factor that allows these clients to function together is that all of the
character sets in the client/server system belong to the same language group
(see Table 9-1 on page 305). The default language for the Adaptive Server is
CP 850, which is the character set used by the largest number of clients. This
allows the server to operate most efficiently, with the least amount of character
set conversion.

Figure 9-2: Clients using different character sets in the same language
group
CP 850
100 Clients
ASE ISO 8859-1

CP 850
50 Clients
Macintosh Roman
25 Clients
To help you choose the default character set for your server, the following
tables list the most commonly used character sets by platform and language.

Table 9-2: Popular Western European client platforms

Platform Language Character set
Win 95, 98 U.S. English, Western Europe CP 1252
Win NT 4.0 U.S. English, Western Europe CP 1252
Win 2000 U.S. English, Western Europe CP 1252
Sun Solaris U.S. English, Western Europe ISO 8859-1
HP-UX 10,11 U.S. English, Western Europe ROMAN8
IBM AIX 4.x U.S. English, Western Europe ISO 8859-1
Table 9-3: Popular Japanese client platforms

Win 95, 98 Japanese CP 932 for Windows
Win NT 4.0 Japanese CP 932 for Windows
Win 2000 Japanese CP 932 for Windows
Sun Solaris Japanese EUC-JIS
HP-UX 10,11 Japanese EUC-JIS
IBM AIX 4.x Japanese EUC-JIS
Table 9-4: Popular Chinese client platforms

Win 95, 98 Chinese (simplified) CP 936 for Windows
Win NT 4.0 Chinese (simplified) CP 936 for Windows
Win 2000 Chinese (simplified) CP 936 for Windows
Sun Solaris Chinese (simplified) EUC-GB
HP-UX 10,11 Chinese (simplified) EUC-GBS
IBM AIX 4.x Chinese (simplified) EUC-GB
Selecting the sort order

Different languages sort the same characters differently. For example, in
English, Cho would be sorted before Co, whereas in Spanish, the opposite is
true. In German, β is a single character, however in dictionaries it is treated as
the double character ss and sorted accordingly. Accented characters are sorted
in a particular order so that aménité comes before amène, whereas if you
ignored the accents, the reverse would be true. Therefore, language-specific
sort orders are required so that characters are sorted correctly.

Each character set comes with one or more sort orders that Adaptive Server
uses to collate data. A sort order is tied to a particular language or set of
languages and to a specific character set. The same sort orders can be used for
English, French, and German because they sort the same characters identically,
for example, A, a, B, b, and so on. Or the characters are specific to one of the
languages—for example, the accented characters, é , à, and á, are used in
French but not in English or German—and therefore, there is no conflict in
how those characters are sorted. The same is not true for Spanish however,
where the double letters ch and ll are sorted differently. Therefore, although the
same character sets support all four languages, there is one set of sort orders for
English, French and German, and a different set of sort orders for Spanish.
In addition, a sort order is tied to a particular character set. Therefore, there is
one set of sort orders for English, French, and German in the ISO 8859-1
character set, another set in the CP 850 character set, and so on. The sort orders
available for a particular character set are located in sort order definition files
(*.srt files) in the character set directory. For a list of character sets and their
available sort orders, see Table 9-5 on page 316.
Using sort orders

Sort orders are used to:
• Create indexes
• Store data into indexed tables
• Specify an order by clause
Different types of sort orders

All character sets are offered with a binary sort order at a minimum, which
blindly sorts all data based only on the arithmetic value of the code assigned to
represent each letter (the “binary” code) in the character set. Binary sort order
works well for the first 128 characters of each character set (ASCII English)
and for Asian languages.When a character set supports more than one language
(for example, Group 1 or Unicode) the binary sort order most likely give
incorrect results, and you should select another sort order.
Character sets may also have one or more of the following dictionary sort
orders:

• Dictionary order, case-sensitive, accent-sensitive – sorts uppercase and

lowercase letters separately. Dictionary order recognizes the various
accented forms of a letter and sorts them after the associated unaccented
letter.
• Dictionary order, case-insensitive, accent-sensitive – sorts data in
dictionary order but does not recognize case differences. Uppercase letters
are equivalent to their lowercase counterparts and are intermingled in
sorting results. Useful for avoiding duplicate entries in tables of names.
• Dictionary order, case-insensitive, accent-sensitive, order with preference
– does not recognize case difference in determining equivalency of items.
A word in uppercase is equivalent to the same word in lowercase.
Preference is given to uppercase letters (they appear first) if all other
conditions are equal.
Using case-insensitive with preference may cause poor performance in
large tables when the columns specified in an order by clause match the
key of the table’s clustered index. Do not select case-insensitive order with
preference unless your installation requires that uppercase letters be sorted
before lowercase letters in otherwise equivalent strings for order by
clauses.
• Dictionary order, case-insensitive, accent-insensitive – treats accented
forms of a letter as equivalent to the associated unaccented letter. It
intermingles accented letters in sorting results.
Selecting the default sort order

Sybase servers can support only one default sort order at a time. If your users
are using the same language or their languages use the same sort order, then
select the desired sort order. For example, if your users are using French data
and expect French sorting, then you can pick one of the French dictionary sort
orders. Or if your users are using data in multiple languages and the languages
use the same sort order, for example English, French, and German, you can
pick one sort order and it works for all your users in all languages.
However, if you have users using different languages that require different sort
orders, for example French and Spanish, then you must select one of the sort
orders as the default. If you pick, for example, a French sort order, your
Spanish users will not see the ch and ll double characters sorted as they would
expect. The installation procedure, by default, configures the server with the
binary sort order.

You can use the sortkey function to setup customized alternative sort orders for
your data—one for each language.These sort orders can be selected
dynamically to meet the needs of different users. The sortkey function is
separate from the default sort order, but can coexist in the same server. The
range and depth of sort orders provided by the sortkey function is better than
those provided by the default sort order mechanism. For more information, see
sortkey and compare in the Reference Manual: Building Blocks.
Table 9-5: Available sort orders
Language or script Character sets Sort orders
All languages UTF-8 Multiple sort orders, see Table 9-7 for list
Cyrillic: Bulgarian, CP 855, CP 866, CP 1251, ISO Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Byelorussian, 8859-5, Koi8, Macintosh Cyrillic
Macedonian, Russian,
Serbian, Ukrainian
Eastern European: CP 852, ISO 8859-2, CP 1250 Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Czech, Slovak Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive,
with preference
Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent insensitive
English, French, ASCII 8, CP 437, CP850, CP 860, Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
German CP 863, CP 1252a, ISO 8859-1, Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
ISO 8859-15, Macintosh Roman,
Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive,
ROMAN8, ROMAN9, ISO 15
with preference
English, French, CP 850, CP 858 Alternate dictionary order, case sensitive
German Alternate dictionary order, case sensitive, accent
insensitive
Alternate dictionary order, case sensitive, with
preference
Greek ISO 8859-7 Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Hungarian ISO 8859-2 Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
Japanese EUCJIS, SJIS, DECKANJI General purpose case-insensitive dictionary
ordering
Kazakh 87 50
Russian CP 866, CP 1251, ISO 8859-5, Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Koi8, Macintosh Cyrillic Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
Scandinavian CP 850 Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Dictionary order, case insensitive, with preference

Language or script Character sets Sort orders

Simplified Chinese EUC-GB, GB-18030, CP936 General purpose case-insensitive dictionary
ordering
Spanish ASCII 8, CP 437, CP850, CP 860, Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
CP 863, CP 1252, ISO 8859-1, ISO Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
8859-15, Macintosh Roman,
ROMAN8
Thai CP 874, TIS 620 Dictionary order
Turkish ISO 8859-9 Dictionary order, case sensitive, accent sensitive
Dictionary order, case insensitive, accent sensitive
Western European CP 1252 Dictionary order, case insensitive, case sensitive,
with preference, accent insensitive, Spanish
dictionary, Spanish case insensitive, Spanish accent
insensitive
If your language does not appear here, there is no language-specific sort order
for your language. Select a binary sort order and then investigate whether the
sortkey function meets your needs. As this table illustrates, many languages
have more than one sort order.
Chinese Pinyin sort order

Pinyin, more formally known as “Hanyu Pinyin,” uses the Roman alphabet to
represent the standard Chinese pronunciation system. Pinyin consists of a
system of transliteration to Roman alphabets for reading and writing Mandarin
without Chinese characters. Pinyin uses accents to represent the four tones of
Mandarin.
Earlier versions of Adaptive Server used the Simplified Chinese (GB) sort
orders, gbpinyin and gbpinyinocs, using the Unilib character set, significantly
impacting the performance of databases using the GB character sets.
Adaptive Server version 15.0.3 automatically uses the gbpinyin and gbpinyinocs
sort orders, eliminating a processing step and significantly improving
performance.
In earlier versions, the default size of unilib cache configuration parameter was
268 KB. In version 15.0.3, the default has been increased to 302 KB.
Improved performance occurs in queries that access ASCII and gbpinyin data.
However, if the data set has a mixture of other characters, you may not see any
performance improvement.

See Chapter 9, “Configuring Character Sets, Sort Orders, and Languages” in

the System Administration Guide for information about configuring Adaptive
Server to use the gbpinyin and gbpinyinocs sort orders.
Selecting case-insensitive sort orders for Chinese and Japanese character sets
Use two stored procedures to select case-insensitive sort orders:
• sp_helpsort
• sp_configure
sp_helpsort
sp_helpsort lists the available case-insensitive sort orders.
sp_helpsort
-----------
Name ID
-------------------------
nocase_eucgb 52
nocase_cp936 52
nocase_gb18030 52
nocase_eucjis 52
nocase_sjis 52
nocase_deckanji 52
sp_configure
To switch to a case-insensitive sort order, enter:
sp_configure 'default sortorder id', 52
Selecting the default Unicode sort order

The default Unicode sort order is distinctly different from the sort order for the
server’s default character set. This separate configuration parameter is a static
parameter that requires that you restart your server and reindex the unichar data
if it is changed. This sort order is identified using a string parameter, rather than
a numeric parameter, to guarantee that the sort order is unique.
Table 9-6 lists the available default Unicode sort orders.

Table 9-6: Default Unicode sort orders

Name ID Description
defaultml 20 Default Unicode multi-lingual ordering
thaidict 21 Thai dictionary ordering
iso14651 22 Ordering as per ISO14651 standard
utf8bin 24 Ordering for UTF-16 that matches the UTF-8 binary
binary 25 Binary sort
altnoacc 39 Alternate accent-insensitive
altdict 45 Alternate dictionary ordering
altnocsp 46 Alternate case-insensitive with preference
scandict 47 Scandinavian dictionary ordering
scannocp 48 Scandinavian case-insensitive with preference
bin_utf8 50 UTF-8 binary sort order
dict 51 General-purpose dictionary ordering
nocase 52 General-purpose case-insensitive dictionary ordering
nocasep 53 General-purpose case-insensitive with preference
noaccent 54 General-purpose accent-insensitive dictionary ordering
espdict 55 Spanish dictionary ordering
espnocs 56 Spanish case-insensitive dictionary ordering
espnoac 57 Spanish accent-insensitive dictionary ordering
rusnocs 59 Russian case-insensitive dictionary ordering
cyrnocs 64 Cyrillic case-insensitive dictionary ordering
elldict 65 Greek dictionary ordering
hundict 69 Hungarian dictionary ordering
hunnoac 70 Hungarian accent-insensitive dictionary ordering
hunnocs 71 Hungarian case-insensitive dictionary ordering
turknoac 73 Turkish accent-insensitive dictionary ordering

Table 9-7 lists the loadable sort orders.

Table 9-7: Loadable sort orders
Name ID Description
cp932bin 129 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of CP932
dynix 130 Chinese phonetic ordering
gb3213bn 137 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of GB2312
cyrdict 140 Common cyrillic dictionary ordering
turdict 155 Turkish Dictionary ordering
euckscbn 161 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of EUCKSC
gbpinyin 163 Chinese phonetic ordering
rusdict 165 Russian dictionary ordering
sjisbin 179 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of SJIS
eucjisbn 192 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of EUCJIS
big5bin 194 Ordering that matches the binary
ordering of BIG5
To view this sort order list in Adaptive Server, use sp_helpsort. See the
You can add sort orders using external files in the $SYBASE/collate/Unicode
directory. The names and collation IDs are stored in syscharsets. The names of
external Unicode sort orders do not have to be in syscharsets before you can
set the default Unicode sort order.
Note External Unicode sort orders are provided by Sybase. Do not attempt to
create external Unicode sort orders.
Sort order associated with Unicode data is completely independent of the sort
order associated with traditional character data. All relational expressions
involving the Unicode datatypes are performed using the Unicode sort order.
This includes mixed-mode expressions involving Unicode and non-Unicode
data. For example, in the following query the varchar character constant ‘Mü’
is implicitly cast to unichar and the comparison is performed according to the
Unicode sort order:
select * from authors where unicode_name > 'Mü'

The same holds true for all other comparison operators, as well as the
concatenation operator “+”, the operator “in”, and the operator “between.”
Once again, the goal is to retain compatibility with existing database
applications.
Tables joins based on equality (equijoins) deserve special mention. These are
generally optimized by the server to take advantage of indexes that defined on
the participating columns. When a unichar column is joined with a char
column, the latter requires a conversion, and since the character sort order and
the Unicode sort order are distinct, the optimizer will ignore the index on the
char column.
In Adaptive Server version 12.5.1 and later, when the server’s default character
set is configured to UTF-8, you can configure the server's default sort order (for
char data) to be any of the above sort orders. Prior to this version, the binary
sort order “bin_utf8” (ID=50) was the only well-behaved sort order for UTF-8.
Although not required, the sort order for char data in UTF-8 can be selected so
that it corresponds with the sort order for unichar.
There is a potential confusion regarding choice of binary sort orders for
Unicode. The sort order named “binary” is the most efficient one for unichar
data (UTF-16), and is thus the default. This order is based on the Unicode
scalar value, meaning that all 32-bit surrogate pairs are placed after all 16-bit
Unicode values. The sort order named “utf8bin” is designed to match the order
of the default (most efficient) binary order for UTF-8 char data, namely
“bin_utf8”. The recommended matching combinations are thus “binary” for
unichar and “binary” for UTF-8 char, or “utf8bin” for unichar and “bin_utf8”
for UTF-8 char. The former favors unichar efficiency, while the latter favors
char efficiency. Avoid using “utf8bin” for UTF-8 char, since it is equivalent to
“bin_utf8” but less efficient.
Selecting a language for system messages

Any installation of Adaptive Server can use Language Modules containing
files of messages in different languages. Adaptive Server provides Language
Modules for messages in the following languages: English, Chinese
(Simplified), French, German, Japanese, Korean, Brazilian Portuguese, and
Spanish. If your client language is not one of these languages, you see system
messages in English, the default language.

Selecting a language for system messages
Each client can choose to view messages in their own language at the same
time, from the same server; for example, one client views system messages in
French, another in Spanish, and another in German. To do this, however, all
selected languages must be part of the same language group. For example,
French, Spanish and German are all part of language group 1. Japanese, on the
other hand, is part of language group 101, which contains no other languages.
Therefore, if Japanese is your server language, you can display system
messages only in Japanese or English. Remember that all language groups can
display messages in English. There is also a server-wide default language, used
if the user has not selected a specific language. If you use Unicode, you can
view system messages in any of the supported languages.
You can select the language for your system messages in one of two ways:
• Select a language as part of your user profile
• Enter a language in the locales.dat file
Table 9-8 displays the supported system message languages and their language
groups. Each user can select only one language per session for system
messages.
Table 9-8: Supported system messages
Language group System message languages Character sets
Group 1 French, German, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese ASCII 8, CP 437, CP 850, CP 860,
CP 863, CP 1252, ISO 8859-1, ISO
8859-15, Macintosh Roman, ROMAN8
Group 2 Polish Cp 1250, CP 852, ISO 8859-2
Group 101 Japanese CP 932, DEC Kanji, EUC-JIS, Shift-JIS
Group 102 Simplified Chinese (PRC) CP 936, EUC-GB, GB18030
Group 104 Korean EUC-KSC, CP 949
Group 105 Thai CP 874, TIS 620
Unicode French, German, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, UTF-8
Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Korean
All Other Language English
Groups
Install Language Modules for all languages in which clients will receive
messages. These Language Modules, located in the locales subdirectory of the
Adaptive Server installation directory, are part of a group of files called
localization files. For information about localization files and the software
message directory structure, see “Types of localization files” on page 338.

Setting up your server: examples

This section discusses setup options and the steps necessary to implement
them. This is only a sample, and is meant to suggest ideas and methods for your
own setup process.
A Spanish-version server
This examples shows how to set up a new server with all clients using the same
language. To do this:
1 Select the server language, in this case, Spanish. By reviewing Table 9-1
on page 305, you see that Spanish is part of language group 1. Based on
your platform, select a character set from language group 1. Sybase
recommends that you select the character set used by the greatest number
of clients. Or, if you think your company might someday expand into other
countries and languages, you might consider installing Unicode (see
“Selecting the character set for your server” on page 303).
2 Install the Spanish Language Module in the server. This allows clients to
view system messages in Spanish.
3 Select the default sort order. By referring to Table 9-5 on page 316, you
see that Spanish has three possible sort orders, in addition to binary sort
order. Select a sort order.
4 Restart the server.
A U.S.-based company in Japan

This example involves clients in Japan, who want to enter data, sort data, and
receive system messages in Japanese, while submitting data to a server that is
accessed by English-only users:
1 Select the default character set for your server. If you install a character set
from language group 101 (Japanese), you can support both Japanese and
English data in the same server.
2 Install the Japanese Language Module so that system messages are
available in Japanese.

Setting up your server: examples
3 Select the sort order. By referring to Table 9-5 on page 316, you can see
that a binary sort order is the only sort order available for Japanese.
Therefore, both the English and Japanese clients have a default binary sort
order. Consider using the sortkey function to provide solutions for both
audiences.
4 Make sure that each Japanese user requests Japanese messages by default.
Since you are using a character set from language group 101, and you have
already installed the Japanese Language Module, your client in Japan sees
messages in Japanese, while clients in the U.S. can choose to see messages
in either English or Japanese.
A Japan-based company with multinational clients

This company is located in Japan, and has clients in France, Germany, and
Spain. You need to mix European and Asian languages in the same server.
1 Select the default server language and character set. Since your company
is based in Japan and most of your clients are located in Japan, the default
server language should be Japanese. But you also want your clients in
France, Germany, and Spain to be able to send and receive data in their
native languages. By reviewing Table 9-1 on page 305, you can see that
Japanese is part of language group 101, while French, German, and
Spanish are part of language group 1. Since the languages you need are not
part of the same language group, the only way you can have all of these
languages on the same server is to select Unicode as your default character
set.
2 Install the Language Modules for Japanese, French, German, and Spanish.
3 Select the binary sort order, since this is the only sort order available for
the Unicode character set. (You can, however, consider using the sortkey
function inside your application code to supply data sorted according to
each user’s preference.)
4 Select Japanese as the default language for system messages. Clients in
other countries can select their own native language for messages.

Changing the character set, sort order, or message

language
Even after you have configured your server, a system administrator can change
the default character set, sort order, or message language used by Adaptive
Server. Because a sort order is built on a specific character set, changing
character sets always involves a change in sort order. However, you can change
the sort order without changing character sets, because more than one sort
order may be available for a character set.
To display Adaptive Server’s default sort order, character set, and a table of its
primary sort orders, enter:
sp_helpsort
Changing the default character set

Adaptive Server can have only one default character set, the character set in
which data is stored in its databases. When you install Adaptive Server, you
specify a default character set.
Warning! Read the following carefully, and exercise caution when changing
the default character set in Adaptive Server. Sybase strongly recommends that
you perform backups before you change a default character set.
When you change the default character set in Adaptive Server, you must
convert any existing data to the new default character set. Conversion is
unnecessary only if:
• There is no user data in the server.
• It is acceptable to destroy user data in the server.
• You are absolutely certain that data in the server uses only ASCll-7. In this
case, you can change the default without first copying your data out of the
server.
In all other cases, you must convert the existing data as follows:
1 Copy the data out using bcp.
2 Change the default character set.
3 Use bcp with the appropriate flags for data conversion to copy the data
back into the server.

Changing the character set, sort order, or message language
See the Utility Guide for more information about using bcp to copy data.
Warning! After converting data to a different character set (particularly to

UTF-8), the data may be too large for the allocated column size. Re-create the
columns affected with a larger size.
Code conversion between the character set of the existing data and the new
default character set must be supported. If it is not, conversion errors will occur
and the data is not converted correctly. See Chapter 10, “Configuring
Client/Server Character Set Conversions,” for more information about
supported character set conversions.
Even if conversions are supported between the character sets, some errors may
occur due to minor differences between the character sets, or because some
characters do not have equivalents in other character sets. Rows containing
problematic data may not get copied back into the database, or data may
contain partial or invalid characters.
Changing the sort order with a resources file

Adaptive Server character sets can be changed using the resource file. The
sample resource file sqlloc.rs is located in $SYBASE/ASE-
12_5/init/sample_resource_files/.
The resource file from the Adaptive Server 12.5.1 installation looks similar to
the following:
sybinit.release_directory: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.server_name: PUT_YOUR_SERVER_NAME_HERE
sqlsrv.sa_login: sa
sqlsrv.sa_password:
sqlsrv.default_language: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.language_install_list: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.language_remove_list: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.default_characterset: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.characterset_install_list: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.characterset_remove_list: USE_DEFAULT
sqlsrv.sort_order: USE_DEFAULT
# An example sqlloc resource file...
# sybinit.release_directory: USE_DEFAULT
# sqlsrv.server_name: PUT_YOUR_SERVER_NAME_HERE
# sqlsrv.sa_login: sa
# sqlsrv.sa_password:

# sqlsrv.default_language: french
# sqlsrv.language_install_list: spanish,german
# sqlsrv.language_remove_list: USE_DEFAULT
# sqlsrv.default_characterset: cp437
# sqlsrv.characterset_install_list: mac,cp850
# sqlsrv.characterset_remove_list: USE_DEFAULT
# sqlsrv.sort_order: dictionary
Changing the default sort order

Adaptive Server can have only one default sort order, the collating sequence it
uses to order data. When you consider changing the sort order for character
data on a particular Adaptive Server, keep this in mind: all of your
organization’s Adaptive Servers should have the same sort order. A single sort
order enforces consistency and makes distributed processing easier to
administer.
You may have to rebuild your indexes after changing the default sort order. For
more information, see “Reconfiguring the character set, sort order, or message
language” on page 327.
Reconfiguring the character set, sort order, or message language

This section summarizes the steps to take before and after changing Adaptive
Server’s default character set, sort order, or message language. For procedures
on how to configure the character set, sort order, or message language for a new
server, see the configuration documentation for your platform.
Back up all databases in Adaptive Server before and after you change character
sets or sort orders. After you back up your databases, use bcp to copy the data
in and out of your databases if:
• A database contains character data and you want to convert the data to a
new character set. Do not load a database dump of the data into a server
that uses the new default character set. Adaptive Server assumes the
loaded data is in the new character set, and corrupts the data.
• You are changing the default sort order only and not the default character
set. You cannot load a database from a dump performed prior to changing
the sort order—if you attempt to, an error message appears, and Adaptive
Server aborts the load.

• You change the default character set, and either the old or the new sort
order is not binary. You cannot load a database dump that was made before
you changed the character set.
You cannot reload your data from a database dump once you have reconfigured
the default character set and sort order (unless both old and new character sets
use a binary sort order and no conversion is required between the old and new
character sets). See “Changing the default character set” on page 325 for more
information,
Unicode examples
In the following example, a fictitious database named xpubs is modified to use
univarchar columns.
Schema
Assume a database was created using the following script on a server that has
all the installation defaults, namely character set “iso_1” and default sort order
ID 50, “binary_iso_1”.
> create database xpubs
> go
> use xpubs
> go
> create table authors (au_id int, au_lname
varchar(255), au_fname varchar(255))
> go
> create index au_idx on authors(au_lname, au_fname)
> go
Then the data was loaded into the server using a series of inserts and updates.
Converting to UTF-8
The first step towards using Unicode is to extract the data and convert it to
UTF-8 form.
% bcp xpubs..authors out authors.utf8.bcp -c -Jutf8 -Usa -P
The next step to install UTF-8 as the default character set in the server:
% charset -Usa -P binary.srt utf8
% isql -Usa -P
> sp_configure 'default sortorder id', 50, 'utf8'

> go
> shutdown
> go
Restart the server to modify the default character set and re-create indexes on
the system tables. Restart the server a second time, then reload the data:
% isql -Usa -P
> sp_dboption xpubs, 'select into', true
> go
> use xpubs
> go
> checkpoint
> go
> delete from authors
> go
> quit
% bcp xpubs..authors in authors.utf8.bcp -c -Jutf8 -Usa -P
Migrating selected columns to unichar

With a working database running with UTF-8 as the default character set, it
becomes a simple matter to convert select columns to univarchar:
% isql -Usa -P
> use xpubs
> go
> alter table authors modify au_lname univarchar(255),
au_fname univarchar(255)
> go
The columns are modified to the new datatypes, the data is converted in place,
and the index is re-created.
Migrating to or from unitext

Currently, the alter table modify command does not support text, image, or
unitext columns. To migrate from a text to a unitext column, you must first use
bcp, create a table with unitext columns, and then use bcp again to place data
into the new table. This migration path only works when you invoke bcp with
-Jutf8 option.

Preliminary steps
Before you run the installation program to reconfigure Adaptive Server:
1 Dump all user databases and the master database. If you have made
changes to model or sybsystemprocs, dump them also.
2 Load the Language Module if it is not already loaded (see the
configuration documentation for your platform for complete instructions).
3 If you are changing the Adaptive Server default character set, and your
current databases contain non ASCII-7 data, use bcp to copy the existing
data out of your databases.
Once you have loaded the Language Module, you can run the Adaptive Server
installation program, which allows you to:
• Install or remove message languages and character sets included with
Adaptive Server
• Change the default message language or character set
• Select a different sort order
See the configuration documentation for your platform for instructions on
using the installation program
Note Before you change the character set or sort order, Adaptive Server must
have as many open databases as there are databases managed by the server. If
Adaptive Server does not have a sufficient number of open databases when it
is re-started after a change in sort order, Adaptive Server prints this message to
the error log and the server will revert to the former sort order:
The configuration parameter 'number of open databases'
must be at least as large as the number of databases,
in order to change the character set or sort order." Re-
start Adaptive Server, use sp_configure to increase
'number of open databases' to at least %d, then re-
configure the character set or sort order
To reconfigure the language, character set, or sort order, use the sqlloc utility,
described in Utility Guide. If you are using Windows, use the Server Config
utility, described in Chapter 3, “Default Adaptive Server Configuration,” in the
Configuration Guide.
If you installed additional languages but did not change the Adaptive Server
character set or sort order, you have completed the reconfiguration process.

If you changed the Adaptive Server default character set, and your current
databases contain non ASCII-7 data, copy your data back into your databases,
using bcp with the necessary flags to enable conversion.
If you changed the Adaptive Server default sort order or character set, see
“Reconfiguring the character set, sort order, or message language” on page
327.
Setting the user’s default language

If you install an additional language, users running client programs can run
sp_modifylogin to set that language as their default language, or set the LANG
variable on the client machine, with the appropriate entries in locales.dat.
Recovery after reconfiguration

Every time Adaptive Server is stopped and restarted, recovery is performed
automatically on each database. Automatic recovery is discussed in detail in
Chapter 11, “Developing a Backup and Recovery Plan,” in the System
After recovery is complete, the new sort order and character set definitions are
loaded.
If you have changed the sort order, Adaptive Server switches to single-user
mode to allow the necessary updates to system tables and to prevent other users
from using the server. Each table with a character-based index is automatically
checked to see if any indexes have been corrupted by the sort order change.
Character-based indexes in tables are automatically rebuilt, if necessary, using
the new sort order definition.
After the system indexes are rebuilt, character-based user indexes are marked
“suspect” in the sysindexes system table. User tables with suspect indexes are
marked “read-only” in sysobjects to prevent updates to these tables and use of
the “suspect” indexes until they have been checked and, if necessary, rebuilt.
Range-partitioned user tables are checked for character-based partition keys,
and are marked “suspect” if the sort order change or character set change might
cause partition corruption.

Next, the new sort order information replaces the old information in the area of
the disk that holds configuration information. Adaptive Server then shuts down
so that it starts for the next session with a complete and accurate set of system
information.
Using sp_indsuspect to find corrupt indexes

After Adaptive Server shuts down, restart it, and use sp_indsuspect to find the
user tables that need to be reindexed.
sp_indsuspect [tab_name]
where tab_name is the name of the table you are investigating. If tab_name is
missing, sp_indsuspect creates a list of all tables in the current database that has
indexes marked “suspect” when the sort order changes.
This example shows that running sp_indsuspect in mydb database yields one
suspect index:
sp_indsuspect
Suspect indexes in database mydb
Own.Tab.Ind (Obj_ID, Ind_ID) =
dbo.holdings.h_name_ix(160048003, 2)
Rebuilding indexes after changing the sort order

dbcc reindex checks the integrity of indexes on user tables by running a “fast”
version of dbcc checktable. For details, see Chapter 10, “Checking Database
Consistency,” in the System Administration Guide: Volume 2. dbcc reindex
drops and rebuilds the indexes where the sort order used is not consistent with
the new sort order. When dbcc reindex discovers the first index-related error, it
displays a message, then rebuilds the inconsistent indexes. The system
administrator or table owner should run dbcc reindex after changing the sort
order in Adaptive Server.
dbcc reindex ({table_name | table_id})
Run this command on all tables listed by sp_indsuspect as containing suspect
indexes. For example:
dbcc reindex(titles)
One or more indexes are corrupt. They will be rebuilt.
In the preceding example, dbcc reindex discovers one or more suspect indexes
in the table titles; it drops and re-creates the appropriate indexes.

If the indexes for a table are already correct, or if there are no indexes for the
table, dbcc reindex does not rebuild any indexes. It displays a message instead.
If a table is suspected of containing corrupt data, the command is aborted. If
that happens, an error message instructs the user to run dbcc checktable.
When dbcc reindex finishes successfully, all “suspect” marks on the table’s
indexes are removed. The “read-only” mark on the table is also removed, and
the table can be updated. These marks are removed whether or not any indexes
have to be rebuilt.
dbcc reindex does not reindex system tables. System indexes are checked and
rebuilt, if necessary, as an automatic part of recovery after Adaptive Server is
restarted following a sort order change.
Upgrading text data after changing character sets

If you have changed an Adaptive Server character set to a multibyte character
set, use dbcc fix_text to upgrade text values.
A text value can be large enough to cover several pages; therefore, Adaptive
Server must be able to handle characters that span page boundaries. To do so,
Adaptive Server requires additional information on each of the text pages. The
system administrator or table owner must run dbcc fix_text on each table that
has text data to calculate the new values needed.
To see the names of all tables that contain text data, use:
select sysobjects.name
from sysobjects, syscolumns
where syscolumns.type = 35
and sysobjects.id = syscolumns.id
The system administrator or table owner must run dbcc fix_text to calculate the
new values needed.
The syntax of dbcc fix_text is:
dbcc fix_text (table_name | table_id)
The table named must be in the current database.
dbcc fix_text opens the specified table, calculates the character statistics
required for each text value, and adds the statistics to the appropriate page
header fields. This process can take a long time, depending on the number and
size of the text values in a table. dbcc fix_text can generate a large number of
log records, which may fill up the transaction log. dbcc fix_text performs
updates in a series of small transactions so that if a log becomes full, only a
small amount of work is lost.

If you run out of log space, clear out your log (see Chapter 12, “Backing Upa
and Restoring User Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2).
Then restart dbcc fix_text, using the same table that was being upgraded when
the original dbcc fix_text halted. Each multibyte text value contains information
that indicates whether it has been upgraded, so dbcc fix_text upgrades only the
text values that were not processed in earlier passes.
If your database stores its log on a separate segment, you can use thresholds to
manage clearing the log. See Chapter 16, “Managing Free Space with
Thresholds,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
If dbcc fix_text cannot acquire a needed lock on a text page, it reports the
problem and continues with the work, like this:
Unable to acquire an exclusive lock on text page 408.
This text value has not been recalculated. In order to
recalculate those TEXT pages you must release the lock
and reissue the dbcc fix_text command.
Retrieving text values after changing character sets

If you attempt to retrieve text values after changing to a multibyte character set,
and you have not run dbcc fix_text, the command fails with this error message:
Adaptive Server is now running a multi-byte character
set, and this TEXT column’s character counts have not
been recalculated using this character set. Use dbcc
fix_text before running this query again.
If you have changed the sort order or character set and errors occurred, see
“How to Manually Change Sort Order or Default Character Set” in the
Adaptive Server Enterprise Troubleshooting and Error Messages Guide.
Handling suspect partitions

Partitions are marked suspect for two reasons:
• A sort order or character set change on a range-partitioned table
• A cross-platform dump and load with a hash-partitioned table
If the table is marked with suspect partitions:
• All updates and cursor activities are suspended on this table.
• No alter table commands, except partition by, are allowed. create index and
drop index are not allowed on a table with suspect partitions.

• The select command is allowed on tables containing suspect partitions.

However, the optimizer treats such tables as round-robin partitioned
tables, to avoid using the possibly corrupt partition condition.
Fixing tables with suspect partitions

• If the partition condition needs fixing after a sort-order change, you can use
alter table with the partition by option to repartition a table that has suspect
partitions.
• If the partition condition does not need fixing, you can use the reorg rebuild
table command to rebuild the table, redistributing only the data rows
among the partitions.
• If the indexes as well as the partitions on a table are marked suspect, use
partition by or reorg rebuild to fix both the suspect index and suspect
partitions.
Handling suspect partitions in cross-platform dump and load operations

• During the first online database command, after you execute load database
across two platforms with different endian types, the hash partition is
marked suspect.
• Any global clustered index on a round-robin partition, which has an
internally generated partition condition with a unichar or varchar partition
key, is marked suspect.
• After the database is online, use sp_post_xpload to fix the suspect
partitions and indexes.
Installing date strings for unsupported languages

Use sp_addlanguage to install names for the days of the week and months of
the year for languages that do not have language modules. With
sp_addlanguage, lets you define:
• A language name and (optionally) an alias for the name

• A list of the full names of months and a list of abbreviations for the month
names
• A list of the full names of the days of the week

Installing date strings for unsupported languages
• The date format for entering dates (such as month/day/year)

• The number of the first day of the week
For example to add the information for Italian:
sp_addlanguage italian, italiano,
"gennaio,febbraio,marzo,aprile,maggio,giugno,luglio,agosto,settembre,ottobre,
novembre,dicembre",
"genn,feb,mar,apr,mag,giu,lug,ago,sett,ott,nov,dic",
"lunedi,martedi,mercoledi,giovedi,venerdi,sabato,domenica",
dmy, 1
sp_addlanguage enforces strict data entry rules. The lists of month names,
month abbreviations, and days of the week must be comma-separated lists with
no spaces or line feeds (returns). Also, they must contain the correct number of
elements (12 for month strings, 7 for day-of-the-week strings.)
Valid values for the date formats are: mdy, dmy, ymd, ydm, myd, and dym. The
dmy value indicates that the dates are in day/month/year order. This format
affects only data entry; to change output format, you must use the convert
function.
Server versus client date interpretation

Generally, date values are resolved on the client. When a user selects date
values, Adaptive Server sends them to the client in an internal format. The
client uses the common.loc file and other localization files in the default
language subdirectory of the locales directory on the client to convert the
internal format to character data. For example, if the user’s default language is
Spanish, Adaptive Server looks for the common.loc file in
/locales/spanish/char_set. It uses the information in the file to display, for
example, 12 febrero 2007.
Assume that the user’s default language is set to Italian, a language for which
Adaptive Server does not provide a language module, and that the date values
in Italian have been added. When the client connects to the server and looks for
the common.loc file for Italian, it does not find the file. The client prints an
error message and connects to the server. If the user then selects date values,
the dates are displayed in U.S. English format.To display the date values added
with sp_addlanguage, use the convert function to force the dates to be
converted to character data at the server.
The following query generates a result set with the dates in U.S. English
format:

select pubdate from titles

The query below, however, returns the date with the month names in Italian:
select convert(char(19),pubdate) from titles
Internationalization and localization files
Types of internationalization files

The files that support data processing in a particular language are called
internationalization files. Several types of internationalization files come with
Adaptive Server.
Table 9-9: Internationalization files
File Location Purpose and contents
charset.loc In each character set Character set definition files that define the lexical properties of each
subdirectory of the character, such as alphanumeric, punctuation, operand, and uppercase or
charsets directory lowercase. Used by Adaptive Server to correctly process data.
*.srt In each character set Defines the sort order for alphanumeric and special characters, including
subdirectory of the ligatures, diacritics, and other language-specific considerations.
charsets directory
*.xlt In each character set Terminal-specific character translation files for use with utilities such as bcp
subdirectory of the and isql. For more information about how the.xlt files are used, see Chapter
charsets directory 10, “Configuring Client/Server Character Set Conversions,” and the Utility
Guide.
Warning! Do not alter any of the internationalization files. If you need to

install a new terminal definition or sort order, contact your local Sybase office
or distributor.

Character sets directory structure

Figure 9-3 shows the directory structure for the Western European character
sets that come with Adaptive Server. There is a separate subdirectory for each
character set in the charsets directory. Within the subdirectory for each
character set (for example, cp850) are the character set and sort order definition
files and terminal-specific files.
If you load additional character sets, they also appear in the charsets directory:
Figure 9-3: Structure of the charsets directory
charsets
cp850 iso_1 cp437 mac roman8 charset_name
charset.loc charset.loc charset.loc charset.loc charset.loc charset.loc

*.srt *.srt *.srt *.srt *.srt *.srt
*.xlt
The following global variables contain information about character sets:

Table 9-10: Global variables used for character sets
Global variable Description
@@char_convert Contains 0 if character set conversion is not in effect. Contains 1 if character set conversion
is in effect.
@@client_csname The client’s character set name. Set to NULL if client character set has never been
initialized; otherwise, contains the name of the character set for the connection.
@@client_csid The client’s character set ID. Set to -1 if client character set has never been initialized;
otherwise, contains the client character set ID from syscharsets for the connection.
@@client_csexpan Returns the expansion factor used when converting from server's character set to client's
sion character set.
@@maxcharlen The maximum length, in bytes, of a character in the Adaptive Server default character set.
@@ncharsize The maximum length, in bytes, of a character set in the current server default character set.
@@unicharsize Equals 2.
Types of localization files

Adaptive Server includes several localization files for each Language Module,
as shown in Table 9-11.

Table 9-11: Localization files

File Location Purpose and contents
locales.dat In the locales directory Used by client applications to identify the default message
language and character set.
server.loc In the character set Software messages translated into the local language. Sybase
subdirectories under each products have product-specific *.loc files. If an entry is not
language subdirectory in the translated, the software message or string appears in U.S. English
$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/local instead of the local language.
es directory
common.loc In each language and character Contains the local names of the months of the year and their
set directory of the locales abbreviations, and information about the local date, time, and
directory money formats.
All Adaptive Server-related locales files (used by dataserver, sqlloc, syconfig,

and so on) are in $SYBASE/SYBASE_ASE/locales. All Open Client/Server-
related locales files (ctlib, ctisql, ctbcp, optdiag, installjava, and so on) are located
in $SYBASE/locales.
Warning! Do not alter any of the localization files. If you need to alter any
information in those files, contact your local Sybase office or distributor.
Software messages directory structure

Figure 9-4 shows how localization files are arranged. Within the locales
directory is a subdirectory for each language installed. There is always a
us_english subdirectory. (On PC platforms, this directory is called english.)
During installation, when you are prompted to select the languages you want
installed on Adaptive Server, the installation program lists the supported
software message languages. If you install language modules for additional
languages, you see subdirectories for those languages. Within each language
subdirectory are subdirectories for the supported character sets; for example,
cp850 is a supported character set for us_english. Software message files for
each Sybase product reside in the character set subdirectories.

Figure 9-4: Messages directory structure
locales
locales.dat
us_english language2
cp850 iso_1 cp437 mac roman8 char_set1 char_set2

server.loc server.loc server.loc server.loc server.loc server.loc server.loc
common.loc common.loc common.loc common.loc common.loc common.loc common.loc
Message languages and global variables

The following global variables contain information about languages:
@@langid Contains the local language ID of the language currently in use (specified in syslanguages.langid)
@@language Contains the name of the language currently in use (specified in syslanguages.name)

CH A PTE R 1 0 Configuring Client/Server
Character Set Conversions
Topic Page
Character set conversion 341
Supported character set conversions 342
Choosing a conversion type 344
Enabling and disabling character set conversion 347
Error handling in character set conversion 348
Conversions and changes to data lengths 349
Specifying the character set for utility programs 350
Display and file character set command line options 350
Character set conversion

In a heterogeneous environment, Adaptive Server may need to
communicate with clients running on different platforms using different
character sets. Although different character sets may support the same
language group (for example, ISO 8858-1 and CP 850 support the group
1 languages), they may encode the same characters differently. For
example, in ISO 8859-1, the character à is encoded as 0xE0 in
hexadecimal. However, in CP 850 the same character is encoded as 0x85
in hexadecimal.
To maintain data integrity between your clients and servers, data must be
converted between the character sets. The goal is to ensure that an “a”
remains an “a” even when crossing between machine and character set
boundaries. This process is known as character set conversion.

Supported character set conversions
Supported character set conversions

Character set conversion occurs between a pair of character sets. The supported
conversions in any particular client/server system depend on the character sets
used by the server and its clients. One type of character set conversion occurs
if the server uses a native character set as the default; a different type of
conversion is used if the server default is Unicode UTF-8.
Conversion for native character sets

Adaptive Server supports character set conversion between native character
sets belonging to the same language group. If the server has a native character
set as its default, the clients’ character sets must belong to the same language
group. Figure 10-1 is an example of a Western European client/server system.
In this example, the clients’ character sets and the Adaptive Server default
character set all belong to language group 1. Data is correctly converted
between the client character sets and the server default character set. Since they
all belong to the same language group, the clients can view all data on the
server, no matter which client submitted the data.
Figure 10-1: Character set conversion when server and client character
sets belong to the same language group
French client: Roman8

Adaptive
Server German client: ISO 8859-1
CP 850
Spanish client: Macintosh Roman
For a list of the language groups and supported character sets, see Table 9-1 on
page 305.

CHAPTER 10 Configuring Client/Server Character Set Conversions
Conversion in a Unicode system

Adaptive Server also supports character set conversion between UTF-8 and
any native character set that Sybase supports. In a Unicode system, since the
server default character set is UTF-8, the client character set may be a native
character set from any language group. Therefore, a Japanese client (group
101), a French client (group 1), and an Arabic client (group 6) can all send and
receive data from the same server. Data from each client is correctly converted
as it passes between each client and the server.
Figure 10-2: Character set conversion in a Unicode system
French client: CP 1252 (Group 1)

Adaptive
Server Japanese client: CP 932 (Group 101)
UTF-8
Arabic client: CP 1256 (Group 6)
Each client can view data only in the language supported by its character set.
Therefore, the Japanese client can view any Japanese data on the server, but it
cannot view Arabic or French data. Likewise, the French client can view
French or any other Western European language supported by its character set,
but not Japanese or Arabic.
Figure 10-3: Viewing Unicode data
French data French: CP 1252
ASE
Japanese data Japanese: CP 932
UTF-8
Arabic data
Arabic: CP 1256
An additional character set, ASCII-7, is a subset of every character set,

including Unicode, and is therefore compatible with all character sets in all
language groups. If either the Adaptive Server or the client’s character set is
ASCII-7, any 7-bit ASCII character can pass between the client and server
unaltered and without conversion.

Choosing a conversion type
Sybase recommends that you do not configure a server for ASCII-7. You can
achieve the same benefits of compatibility by restricting each client to use only
the first 128 characters of each native character set.
Adaptive Server direct conversions

Adaptive Server direct conversions are between two native character sets of the
same language group. For example, Adaptive Server supports conversion
between CP 437 and CP 850, because both belong to language group 1.
Adaptive Server direct conversions exist between many, but not all, native
character sets of a language group (see Table 10-1 on page 345).
Unicode conversions
Unicode conversions exists for all native character sets. When converting
between two native character sets, Unicode conversion uses Unicode as an
intermediate character set. For example, to convert between the server default
character set (CP 437), and the client character set (CP 860), CP 437 is first
converted to Unicode; Unicode is then converted to CP 860.
Unicode conversions may be used either when the default character set of the
server is UTF-8, or a native character set. You must specifically configure your
server to use Unicode conversions (unless the server’s default character set is
UTF-8).
Earlier versions of Adaptive Server used direct conversions, and it is the
default method for character set conversions. However, Unicode conversions
allow easier and less complex character set conversion. While Adaptive Server
direct conversions are still supported, Sybase now also uses Unicode
conversions to provide complete conversion support for all character sets and
has no plans to add new direct conversions.

To determine the conversion options that are available for your client/server
system, see Table 10-1 on page 345.

Non-Unicode client/server systems

In a non-Unicode system, the character sets of the server and clients are native
character sets; therefore, you can use the Adaptive Server direct conversions.
However, there are some character sets for which there is no Adaptive Server
direct conversion; in this situation, you must use Unicode conversions.
• If all character sets in your client/server system are column 1 of Table 10-
1, use the Adaptive Server direct conversions. The character sets must all
belong to the same language group.
• If the character sets in your client/server system are in column 2 of Table
10-1, or some combination of columns 1 and 2, configure your server to
use Unicode conversions. Again, the character sets must all belong to the
same language group.
For example, assume the server default character set is CP 850 and the clients’
character sets are either ISO 8859-1 or ROMAN 8. Table 10-1 shows that
direct conversions exist between CP 850 and the client character sets. Now,
suppose you add a client using CP 1252. Since there is no direct conversion
between CP 1252 and CP 850, (the default server character set), you must use
Unicode conversions to convert between CP 1252 and CP 850. When you have
a mixture of character sets—some where you can use Adaptive Server direct
conversions and others where you must use Unicode conversions—you can
specify that a combination of Adaptive Server direct conversion and Unicode
conversion be used.
Unicode client/server systems

If your server default is Unicode UTF-8, then all conversions are between
UTF-8 and the native character set being used on the client systems. In a
Unicode system, Unicode conversions are used exclusively.
Table 10-1: Conversion methods for character sets
Language Column 1 – Adaptive Server direct conversions and Column 2 – Unicode
group Unicode conversions conversions only
Group 1 CP 437, CP 850, ISO 8859-1, Macintosh Roman CP 860, CP 1252, ISO 8859-15,
CP 863
Group 2 CP 852, CP 1250, CP 8859-1, Macintosh Central European ISO 8859-2
Group 4 No conversions needed (only one character set supported)
Group 5 CP 855, CP 866, CP 1251, ISO 8859-5, Koi8, Macintosh Cyrillic
Group 6 CP 864, CP 1256, ISO 8859-6

Language Column 1 – Adaptive Server direct conversions and Column 2 – Unicode

group Unicode conversions conversions only
Group 7 CP 869, CP 1253, GREEK8, ISO 8859-7, Macintosh Greek
Group 8 CP 1255, ISO 8859-8
Group 9 CP 857, CP 1254, ISO 8859-9, Macintosh Turkish, TURKISH8
Group 101 DEC Kanjii, EUC-JIS, Shift-JIS CP 932
Group 102 CP 936, EUG-GB, GB18303
Group 103 Big 5, CP 950, EUC-CNS
Group 104 EUCKSC, CP 949
Group 105 CP 874, TIS 620
Group 106 No conversions needed (only one character set supported)
Unicode No conversions needed (only one character set supported)
Configuring the server

By default, Adaptive Server uses direct conversions to convert data between
different character sets. To use the Unicode conversions, Use sp_configure to
set the enable unicode conversions option to either 1 or 2.
• If you set sp_configure “enable unicode conversions” to 1:
This setting uses Adaptive Server direct conversions or Unicode
conversions. Adaptive Server first checks to see if an Adaptive Server
direct conversion exists for the server and client character set. If a direct
conversion is used; if no direct conversion exists, the Unicode conversion
is used.
Use this setting if the character sets in your client/server system fall into
both columns 1 and 2 in Table 10-1.
• If you set sp_configure “enable unicode conversions” to 2:
This setting uses Unicode conversions only. Adaptive Server uses Unicode
conversions, without attempting to find an Adaptive Server direct
conversion.
Use this setting if the client/server conversions result in a change in the
data length (see “Conversions and changes to data lengths” on page 349)
If all character sets fall into column 2 in Table 10-1, set enable unicode
conversions to 2 to always use Unicode conversions.
For Adaptive Server version 15.0 and later, the default value for enable unicode
conversions is 1.

If the server default is UTF-8, the server automatically uses Unicode

conversions only.
Enabling and disabling character set conversion

A client that is requesting a connection identifies its character set to Adaptive
Server. Adaptive Server compares the client character set with its default
character set, and if the two names are identical, no conversion is required. If
the names differ, Adaptive Server determines whether it supports conversion
between its default and the client’s character set. If it does not, it sends an error
message to the client and continues with the login process. If it does, character
set conversion is automatically enabled. If the default character set of the server
is UTF-8, Unicode conversions are automatically used. If the default is a native
character set, the server uses Adaptive Server direct conversions, unless the
user requests Unicode conversions.
You can disable character set conversion at the server level. You may want to
do this if:
• All of your clients are using the same character set as the server default,
and therefore, no conversion is required.
• Conversion between the client character set and the server default is not
supported.
• You want to store data in the server without changing the encoding.
To disable character set conversion at the server level, set the disable character
set conversion parameter to 1.
You can control character set conversion at the connection level using the set
char_convert command from within a client session. set char_convert off turns
conversion off between a particular client and the server. You may want to set
char_convert off if the client and the server use the same character set, which
makes conversion unnecessary. set char_convert on turns conversion back on.
Characters that cannot be converted

Some characters may not be converted, if:

Error handling in character set conversion
• The character exists (is encoded) in the source character set, but does not
exist in the target character set. For example, the OE ligature is part of the
Macintosh character set (code point 0xCE). This character does not exist
in the ISO 8859-1 character set. If the OE ligature exists in data that is
being converted from the Macintosh to the ISO 8859-1 character set, it
causes a conversion error.
• The character exists in both the source and the target character set, but in
the target character set, the character is represented by a different number
of bytes than in the source character set.
For example, 1-byte accented characters (such as á, è) are 2-byte
characters in UTF-8; 2-byte Thai characters are 3-byte characters in UTF-
8. Avoid this limitation by configuring the enable unicode conversion
option to 1 or 2.
Error handling in character set conversion

The Adaptive Server character set conversion reports errors when a character
exists in the client’s character set but not in the server’s character set, or vice
versa. Adaptive Server must guarantee that data successfully converted on
input to the server can be successfully converted back to the client’s character
set when the client retrieves that data. To do this effectively, Adaptive Server
must avoid putting suspect data into the database.
When Adaptive Server encounters a conversion error in the data being entered,
it generates this message:
Msg 2402, Severity 16 (EX_USER):
Error converting client characters into server’s
character set. Some character(s) could not be converted.
A conversion error prevents query execution on insert and update statements.
If this occurs, review your data for problem characters and replace them.
When Adaptive Server encounters a conversion error while sending data to the
client, it replaces the bytes of the suspect characters with ASCII question marks
(?). The query batch continues to completion. When the statement is complete,
Adaptive Server sends the following message:
Msg 2403, Severity 16 (EX_INFO):
WARNING! Some character(s) could not be converted into
client’s character set. Unconverted bytes were changed
to question marks ('?').

Conversions and changes to data lengths

In some cases, converting data between the server’s character set and the
client’s character set results in a change to the length of the data, for example,
when the character set on one system uses one byte to represent each character
and the character set on the other system requires two bytes per character.
When character set conversion results in a change in data length, there are two
possibilities:
• The data length decreases, as in the following examples:
• Greek or Russian in multibyte UTF-8 to a single-byte Greek or
Russian character set
• Japanese two-byte Hankaku Katakana characters in EUC-JIS to
single-byte characters in Shift-JIS
• The data length increases, as in the following examples:
• Single-byte Thai to multibyte Thai in UTF-8
• Single-byte Japanese characters in Shift-JIS to two-byte Hankaku
Katakana in EUC-JIS
Configuring your system and application

If you are using UTF-8 anywhere in your client/server system, or using a
Japanese character set, you are likely to encounter changes in data length as a
result of character set conversion. You must configure your server to handle
changes in data length. You may also need to set up your client to handle
changes in data length.
1 Configure the server to use Unicode conversions. See “Configuring the
server” on page 346. If the data length increases between the server and
the client, you must also complete steps 2 and 3.
2 The client must be using Open Client 11.1 or later. It must inform the
server that it can handle CS_LONGCHAR data at connection time, using
the Open Client ct_capability function.
The capability parameter must be set to CS_DATA_LCHAR and the value
parameter must be set to CS_TRUE, where connection is a pointer to a
CS_CONNECTION structure:
CS_INT capval = CS_TRUE
ct_capability(connection,CS_SET,CS_CAP_RESPONS,

Specifying the character set for utility programs
CS_DATA_LCHAR,&capval)
3 When conversions result in an increase in data length, char and varchar
data are converted to the client’s character set and are sent to the client as
CS_LONGCHAR data. The client application must be coded to extract the
data received as CS_LONGCHAR.

The Sybase utility programs assume that the default character set of the client
platform is the same character set the client is using. However, sometimes the
client character set differs from the character set for the platform. For this
reason, you may need to specify the client character set at the command line.
A command line option for the isql, bcp, and defncopy utilities specifies the
client’s character set, and temporarily overrides settings of the LANG variable
or settings in locales.dat.
-J charset_name (UNIX and PC) sets the client’s character set to the
charset_name.
If yo omit the client character set’s command line flag, the platform’s default
character set is used. See the Utility Guide.
Display and file character set command line options

Although the focus of this chapter is on character set conversion between
clients and Adaptive Server, there are two other places where you may need
character set conversion:
• Between the client and a terminal
• Between the client and a file system
Figure 10-4 illustrates the paths and command line options that are available in
the standalone utilities isql, bcp, and defncopy.

Figure 10-4: Where character set conversion may be needed
-a display_charset
-J client_charset
Terminal
display
Client Adaptive
-q datafile_charset Server
File (bcp only)
system
The -J or /clientcharset command line option specifies the character set used by
the client when it sends and receives character data to and from Adaptive
Server.
Setting the display character set

Use the -a command line option if you are running the client from a terminal
with a character set that differs from the client character set. In Figure 10-4, the
-a option and the -J option are used together to identify the character set
translation file (.xlt file) needed for the conversion.
Use -a without -J only if the client character set is the same as the default
character set.
Setting the file character set

Use the -q command line option if you are running bcp to copy character data
to or from a file system that uses a character set that differs from the client
character set. In Figure 10-4, use the -q or /filecharset option and the -J or
/clientcharset option together to identify the character set translation file (.xlt
file) needed for the conversion.


CH A PTE R 11 Diagnosing System Problems
This chapter discusses diagnosing and fixing system problems.

Topic Page
How Adaptive Server uses error messages 353
Adaptive Server error logging 356
Backup Server error logging 365
Killing processes 366
Housekeeper functionality 370
Configuring Adaptive Server to save SQL batch text 373
Shutting down servers 378
Learning about known problems 380
How Adaptive Server uses error messages

When Adaptive Server encounters a problem, it displays an error message
that includes:
• A message number, which uniquely identifies the error message
• A severity level number between 10 and 24, which indicates the type
and severity of the problem
• An error state number, which allows unique identification of the
line of Adaptive Server code at which the error was raised
• An error message, which tells you what the problem is, and may
suggest how to fix it
For example, if you try to access a table that does not exist, you see:
select * from publisher
publisher not found. Specify owner.objectname or use
sp_help to check whether the object exists (sp_help
may produce lots of output).

How Adaptive Server uses error messages
There may be more than one error message for a single query. If there is more
than one error in a batch or query, Adaptive Server usually reports only the first
one. Subsequent errors are reported the next time you execute the batch or
query.
Error messages are stored in master..sysmessages, which is updated with each
new version of Adaptive Server. Here are the first few rows (from an Adaptive
Server that uses us_english as the default language):
select error, severity, description
from sysmessages
where error >=101 and error <=106
and langid is null
error severity description
----- -------- --------------------------------------------------
101 15 Line %d: SQL syntax error.
102 15 Incorrect syntax near '%.*s'.
103 15 The %S_MSG that starts with ’%.*s’ is too long.
Maximum length is %d.
104 15 Order-by items must appear in the select-list if
the statement contains set operators.
105 15 Unclosed quote before the character string '%.*s'.
106 16 Too many table names in the query. The maximum
allowable is %d.
(6 rows affected)
You can query sysmessages. to generate a custom list of error messages:
• If your server supports more than one language, sysmessages stores each
message in each language. The column langid is NULL for us_english and
matches the syslanguages.langid for other languages installed on the
server.
• The dlevel column in sysmessages is currently unused.
• The sqlstate column stores the SQLSTATE value for error conditions and
exceptions defined in ANSI SQL92.
• Message numbers 17000 and higher are system procedure error messages
and message strings.

CHAPTER 11 Diagnosing System Problems
Error messages and message numbers

The combination of message number (error) and language ID (langid) uniquely
identifies each error message. Messages that share the same message number
but have different language IDs indicate translations.
select error, description, langid
from sysmessages
where error = 101
error description langid
----- -------------------------------------- ------
101 Line %d: SQL syntax error. NULL
101 Ligne %1!: erreur de syntaxe SQL. 1
101 Zeile %1!: SQL Syntaxfehler. 2
(3 rows affected)
The error message text describes the problem. The descriptions often include a
line number, a reference to a type of database object (a table, column, stored
procedure, and so forth), or the name of a particular database object.
In the description field of sysmessages, a percent sign (%) followed by a
character or character string serves as a placeholder for these pieces of data,
which Adaptive Server supplies when it encounters the problem and generates
the error message. “%d” is a placeholder for a number; “%S_MSG” is a
placeholder for a type of database object; “%.*s”—all within quotes—is a
placeholder for the name of a particular database object. Table 11-1 on
page 356 lists placeholders and what they represent.
For example, the description field for message number 103 is:
The %S_MSG that starts with '%.*s' is too long. Maximum
length is %d.
The actual error message that appears to a user might be:
The column that starts with 'title' is too long. Maximum
length is 80.
For errors that you report to Technical Support, include the numbers, object
types, and object names. (See “Reporting errors” on page 364.)
Variables in error message text

Table 11-1 explains the symbols that appear in the text provided with each error
message explanation:

Adaptive Server error logging
Table 11-1: Error text symbols key

Symbol Stands for
%d, %D Decimal number
%x,%X,%.*x,%lx, %04x, %08lx Hexadecimal number
%s Null-terminated string
%.*s, %*s, %*.s String, usually the name of a particular database object
%S_type Adaptive Server-defined structure
%c Single character
%f Floating-point number
%ld Long decimal
%lf Double floating-point number

Error messages from Adaptive Server are sent only to the user’s screen.
The stack trace from fatal error messages (severity levels 19 and higher) and
error messages from the kernel are sent to an error log file. The name of this
file varies; see the configuration documentation for your platform or the Utility
Guide.
Note The error log file is owned by the user who installed Adaptive Server (or
the person who started Adaptive Server after an error log was removed).
Permissions or ownership problems with the error log at the operating system
level can block successful start-up of Adaptive Server.
Adaptive Server creates an error log for you if one does not already exist.
Specify the location of the error log at start-up with the errorlogfile parameter
in the runserver file or at the command line. The Sybase installer utility
configures the runserver file with $SYBASE/install as the location of the error
log if you do not choose an alternate location. If you do not specify the location
in the runserver file or at the command line, the location of the error log is the
directory from which you start Adaptive Server. For more information about
specifying the location of the error log, see dataserver in the Utility Guide.
Note Always start Adaptive Server from the same directory, or with the
runserver file or the error log flag, so that you can locate your error log.

Each time you start a server, messages in the error log provide information on
the success (or failure) of the start and the recovery of each database on the
server. Subsequent fatal error messages and all kernel error messages are
appended to the error log file. To reduce the size of the error log by deleting old
or unneeded messages, “prune” the log while Adaptive Server is shut down.
Error log format

Entries in the error log include:
• The engine involved for each log entry. The engine number is indicated by
a 2-digit number. If only 1 engine is online, the display is “00.”
• The family ID of the originating thread:
• In serial processing, the display is “00000.”
• In parallel processing, the display is the server process ID number of
the parent of the originating thread.
• The server process ID of the originating thread:
• In serial processing, this is the server process ID number of the thread
that generated the message. If the thread is a system task, then the
display is “00000.”
• In parallel processing, this is the server process ID number of the
originating thread.
• The date, displayed in the format yyyy/mm/dd, which allows you to sort
error messages by date.
• The time, displayed in 24-hour format, which includes seconds and
hundredths of a second.
• The word “server” or “kernel.” This entry is for Sybase Technical Support
use only.
• The error message itself.
Figure 11-1 shows two examples of a line from an error log:

Figure 11-1: Error log format

Single-engine server
00:00000:00008:1997/05/16 15:11:46.58 server Process id 9
killed by Hostname danish, Host process id 3507.
Multiengine server Server process ID Date and time
Family ID
00:00345:00023:1997/04/16 12:48:58.76 server The

Engine number
configuration option 'allow updates to system tables' has
been changed by 'sa' from '1' to '0'.'
Severity levels
The severity level of a message indicates the type and severity of the problem
that Adaptive Server has encountered. For maximum integrity, when Adaptive
Server responds to error conditions, it displays messages from sysmessages,
but takes action according to an internal table. A few corresponding messages
differ in severity levels, so you may occasionally notice a difference in
expected behavior if you are developing applications or procedures that refer
to Adaptive Server messages and severity levels.
Warning! You can create your own error numbers and messages based on
Adaptive Server error numbers (for example, by adding 20,000 to the Adaptive
Server value). However, you cannot alter the Adaptive Server-supplied system
messages in the sysmessages system table.
You can add user-defined error messages to sysusermessages with

sp_addmessage. See the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Users should inform the system administrator whenever problems that

generate severity levels of 17 and higher occur. The system administrator is
responsible for resolving them and tracking their frequency.
If the problem has affected an entire database, the system administrator may
have to use the database consistency checker (dbcc) to determine the extent of
the damage. The dbcc may identify some objects that have to be removed. It
can repair some damage, but you may have to reload the database.

For more information, see the following chapters in System Administration

Guide: Volume 2:
• dbcc is discussed in Chapter 10, “Checking Database Consistency,” in the
• Loading a user database is discussed in Chapter 12, “Backing Upa and
Restoring User Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2
• Loading system databases is discussed in Chapter 13, “Restoring the
System Databases,” in System Administration Guide: Volume 2.
Severity levels 10 – 18
Error messages with severity levels 10–16 are generated by problems that are
caused by user errors. These problems can be corrected by the user. Severity
levels 17 and 18 do not terminate the user’s session.
Error messages with severity levels 17 and higher should be reported to the
system administrator or database owner.
Level 10: Status information

Messages with severity level 10 are not errors at all. They provide additional
information after certain commands have been executed and, typically, do not
display the message number or severity level. For example, after a create
database command, Adaptive Server displays a message telling the user how
much of the requested space has been allocated for the new database.
Level 11: Specified database object not found

Messages with severity level 11 indicate that Adaptive Server cannot find an
object that is referenced in a command.
This is often because the user has made a mistake in typing the name of a
database object, because the user did not specify the object owner’s name, or
because of confusion about which database is current. Check the spelling of
object names, use the owner names if the object is not owned by the user or
“dbo,” and make sure you are in the correct database.

Level 12: Wrong datatype encountered

Messages with severity level 12 indicate a problem with datatypes. For
example, the user may have tried to enter a value of the wrong datatype in a
column or to compare columns of different and incompatible datatypes.
To correct comparison problems, use the convert function with select. See the
Reference Manual: Building Blocks or the Transact-SQL Users Guide.
Level 13: User transaction syntax error

Messages with severity level 13 indicate that something is wrong with the
current user-defined transaction. For example, the user may have issued a
commit transaction command without having issued a begin transaction, or they
may have tried to roll back a transaction to a savepoint that has not been
defined (sometimes there may be a typing or spelling mistake in the name of
the savepoint).
Severity level 13 can also indicate a deadlock, in which case the deadlock
victim’s process is rolled back. The user must restart his or her command.
Level 14: Insufficient permission to execute command

Messages with severity level 14 mean that the user does not have the necessary
permission to execute the command or access the database object. they can ask
the owner of the database object, the owner of the database, or the system
administrator to grant them permission to use the command or object in
question.
Level 15: Syntax error in SQL statement

Messages with severity level 15 indicate that the user has made a mistake in the
syntax of the command. The text of these error messages includes the line
numbers on which the mistake occurs and the specific word near which it
occurs.
Level 16: Miscellaneous user error

Most error messages with severity level 16 reflect that the user has made a
nonfatal mistake that does not fall into any of the other categories. Severity
level 16 and higher can also indicate software or hardware errors.

For example, the user may have tried to update a view in a way that violates the
restrictions. Another error that falls into this category is unqualified column
names in a command that includes more than one table with that column name.
Adaptive Server has no way to determine which one the user intends. Check
the command syntax and working database context.
Messages that ordinarily have severities greater than 16 show severity 16 when
they are raised by dbcc checktable or dbcc checkalloc so that checks can
continue to the next object. When you are running the dbcc utility, check the
Error Messages and Troubleshooting Guide for information about error
messages between 2500 and 2599 with a severity level of 16.
Note Levels 17 and 18 are usually not reported in the error log. Users should
be instructed to notify the system administrator when level 17 and 18 errors
occur.
Level 17: Insufficient resources

Error messages with severity level 17 mean that the command has caused
Adaptive Server to run out of resources or to exceed some limit set by the
system administrator. The user can continue with their work, although they
may not be able to execute a particular command.
These system limits include the number of databases that can be open at the
same time and the number of connections allowed to Adaptive Server. They are
stored in system tables and can be checked with sp_configure. See Chapter 5,
“Setting Configuration Parameters,” for more information on changing
configuration variables.
The database owner can correct the level 17 error messages indicating that the
user has run out of space. Other level 17 error messages should be corrected by
the system administrator.
Level 18: Nonfatal internal error detected

Error messages with severity level 18 indicate an internal software bug.
However, the command runs to completion, and the connection to Adaptive
Server is maintained. The user can continue with the work they are doing,
although they may not be able to execute a particular command. An example
of a situation that generates severity level 18 is Adaptive Server detecting that
a decision about the access path for a particular query has been made without
a valid reason.

Since problems that generate such messages do not keep users from their work,
users tend not to report them. However, users should be instructed to inform
the system administrator every time an error message with this severity level
(or higher) occurs so that the system administrator can report them.
Severity levels 19 – 26
Fatal problems generate error messages with severity levels 19 and higher.
They break the user’s connection to Adaptive Server (some of the higher
severity levels shut down Adaptive Server). To continue working, the user
must restart the client program.
When a fatal error occurs, the process freezes its state before it stops, recording
information about what has happened. The process is then killed and
disappears.
When the user’s connection is broken, he or she may or may not be able to
reconnect and resume working. Some problems with severity levels in this
range affect only one user and one process. Others affect all the processes in
the database. In some cases, the system administrator must restart Adaptive
Server. These problems do not necessarily damage a database or its objects, but
they can. They may also result from earlier damage to a database or its objects.
Other problems are caused by hardware malfunctions.
Error messages from the kernel are directed to the error log file.
Level 19: Adaptive Server fatal error in resource

Error messages with severity level 19 indicate that some nonconfigurable
internal limit has been exceeded and that Adaptive Server cannot recover
gracefully. You must reconnect to Adaptive Server.
Level 20: Adaptive Server fatal error in current process

Error messages with severity level 20 indicate that Adaptive Server has
encountered a bug in a command. The problem has affected only the current
process, and the database is unlikely to have been damaged. Run dbcc
diagnostics. The user must reconnect to Adaptive Server.

Level 21: Adaptive Server fatal error in database processes

Error messages with severity level 21 indicate that Adaptive Server has
encountered a bug that affects all the processes in the current database.
However, it is unlikely that the database itself has been damaged. Restart
Adaptive Server and run dbcc diagnostics. The user must reconnect to
Adaptive Server.
Level 22: Adaptive Server fatal error: Table integrity suspect

Error messages with severity level 22 indicate that the table or index specified
in the message has been previously damaged by a software or hardware
problem.
The first step is to restart Adaptive Server and run dbcc to determine whether
other objects in the database are also damaged. Whatever the report from dbcc
may be, The problem may be only in the cache, and not on the disk itself. If so,
restarting Adaptive Server fixes the problem.
If restarting does not help, then the problem is on the disk as well. Sometimes,
the problem can be solved by dropping the object specified in the error
message. For example, if the message tells you that Adaptive Server has found
a row with length 0 in a nonclustered index, the table owner can drop the index
and re-create it.
Adaptive Server takes any pages or indexes offline that it finds to be suspect
during recovery. Use sp_setsuspect_granularity to determine whether recovery
marks an entire database or only individual pages as suspect. See
sp_setsuspect_granularity in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
The user must reconnect to Adaptive Server.
Level 23: Fatal error: Database integrity suspect

Error messages with severity level 23 indicate that the integrity of the entire
database is suspect due to previous damage caused by a software or hardware
problem. Restart Adaptive Server and run dbcc diagnostics.
Even when a level 23 error indicates that the entire database is suspect, the
damage may be confined to the cache, and the disk itself may be fine. If so,
restarting Adaptive Server with startserver fixes the problem.

Level 24: Hardware error or system table corruption

Error messages with severity level 24 reflect a media failure or (in rare cases)
the corruption of sysusages. The system administrator may have to reload the
database. You may need to call your hardware vendor.
Level 25: Adaptive Server internal error

Users do not see level 25 errors; this level is used only for Adaptive Server
internal errors.
Level 26: Rule error

Error messages with severity level 26 reflect that an internal locking or
synchronization rule has been broken. You must shut down and restart
Adaptive Server.
Reporting errors
When you report an error to Sybase Technical Support, include:
• The message number, level number, and state number.
• Any numbers, database object types, or database object names that are
included in the error message.
• The context in which the message was generated, that is, the command that
was running at the time. You can help by providing a hard copy of the error
log.

Backup Server error logging

Like Adaptive Server, Backup Server creates an error log if one does not
already exist. Specify the location of the error log at start-up with the
error_log_file parameter in the runserver file or at the command line. The
Sybase installer configures the runserver file with $SYBASE/install as the
location of the error log if you do not choose an alternate location during
installation. If you do not specify the location in the runserver file or at the
command line, the location of the error log is the directory from which you start
Backup Server. Use the backupserver -V option (bcksvr -V on Windows NT) to
limit the messages printed to the error log. See the sections describing Backup
Server in the Utility Guide.
Backup Server error messages are in this form:
MMM DD YYY: Backup Server:N.N.N.N: Message Text
Backup Server message numbers consist of four integers separated by periods,
in the form N.N.N.N. Messages in the form N.N.N are sent by Open Server.
The four components of a Backup Server error message are
major.minor.severity.state:
• The major component generally indicates the functional area of the
Backup Server code where the error occurred:
• 1 – system errors.
• 2 – Open Server event errors.
• 3 – Backup Server remote procedure call errors.
• 4 – I/O service layer errors.
• 5 – network data transfer errors.
• 6 – volume-handling errors.
• 7 – option-parsing errors.
Major error categories 1– 6 may result from Backup Server internal errors
or a variety of system problems. Major errors in category 7 are almost
always due to problems in the options you specified in your dump or load
command.
• minor numbers are assigned in order within a major category.
• severity is:
• 1 – informational, no user action necessary.

Killing processes
• 2, 3 – an unexpected condition, possibly fatal to the session, has

occurred. The error may have occurred with usage, environment, or
internal logic, or any combination of these factors.
• 4 – an unexpected condition, fatal to the execution of the Backup
Server, has occurred. The Backup Server must exit immediately.
• state codes have a one-to-one mapping to instances of the error report
within the code. If you need to contact Technical Support about Backup
Server errors, the state code helps determine the exact cause of the error.
Killing processes
A process is a unit of execution carried out by Adaptive Server. Each process
is assigned a unique process identification number when it starts. This number
is called a spid. These numbers are stored, along with other information about
each process, in master..sysprocesses. Processes running in a parallel-
processes environment create child processes, each of which has its own spids.
Several processes create and assign spids: starting Adaptive Server, login tasks,
checkpoints, the housekeeper tasks, and so on. You can see most of the
information by running sp_who.
Running sp_who on a single-engine server shows the sp_who process running
and all other processes that are “runnable” or in one of the sleep states. In multi-
engine servers, there can be a process running for each engine.
The kill command gets rid of an ongoing process. The most frequent reason for
killing a process is that it interferes with other users, and the person responsible
for running it is not available. The process may hold locks that block access to
database objects, or there may be many sleeping processes occupying the
available user connections. A system administrator can kill most running or
"runnable" processes, including those that are waiting for:
• An alarm, such as a waitfor command
• Network sends or receives
• A lock
• Synchronization messages from another process in a family

Adaptive Server allows you to kill processes only if it can cleanly roll back any
uncompleted transactions and release all system resources that are used by the
process. For processes that are part of a family, killing any of the child
processes also kills all other processes in the family. However, it is easiest to
kill the parent process. For a family of processes, the kill command is detected
more quickly if the status of the child processes is sync sleep.
Table 11-2 shows the status values that sp_who reports and when the kill
command takes effect.
Table 11-2: Status values reported by sp_who
Status Indicates Effects of kill command
recv sleep Waiting on a network read. Immediate.
send sleep Waiting on a network send. Immediate.
alarm sleep Waiting on an alarm such as: Immediate.
waitfor delay "10:00"
lock sleep Waiting on a lock acquisition. Immediate.
sync sleep Waiting on a synchronization message from Immediate. Other processes in the family
another process in the family. must also be brought to state in which they
can be killed.
sleeping Waiting on a disk I/O, or some other resource. Killed when it “wakes up,” usually
Probably indicates a process that is running, but immediate; a few sleeping processes do not
doing extensive disk I/O wake up and require a server restart to clear.
runnable In the queue of runnable processes. Immediate.
running Actively running on one of the server engines. Immediate.
infected Server has detected serious error condition; kill command not recommended. Server
extremely rare. restart probably required to clear process.
background A process, such as a threshold procedure, run by Immediate; use kill with extreme care.
Adaptive Server rather than by a user process. Recommend a careful check of
sysprocesses before killing a background
process.
log suspend Processes suspended by reaching the last-chance Immediate.
threshold on the log.
Only system administrators can issue the kill command; permission to use it
cannot be transferred.
The syntax is:
kill spid
You can kill only one process at a time, but you can perform a series of kill
commands in a batch. For example:
1> kill 7

Killing processes
2> kill 8
3> kill 9
4> go
A kill command is irreversible and cannot be included in a user-defined
transaction. spid must be a numeric constant; you cannot use a variable. Here
is some sample output from sp_who:
fid spid status loginame origname hostname blk dbname cmd
--- ---- --------- -------- -------- -------- --- ------ ----------------
0 1 recv sleep howard howard svr30eng 0 master AWAITING COMMAND
0 2 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master NETWORK HANDLER
0 3 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master DEADLOCK TUNE
0 4 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master MIRROR HANDLER
0 5 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master CHECKPOINT SLEEP
0 6 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master HOUSEKEEPER
0 7 recv sleep bill bill bigblue 0 master AWAITING COMMAND
0 8 recv sleep wilbur wilbur hazel 0 master AWAITING COMMAND
0 9 recv sleep joan joan luv2work 0 master AWAITING COMMAND
0 10 running foote foote svr47hum 0 master SELECT
(10 rows affected, return status = 0)
In the example above, processes 2–6 cannot be killed: they are system
processes. The login name NULL and the lack of a host name identify
processes them as system processes. NETWORK HANDLER, MIRROR
HANDLER, HOUSEKEEPER, and CHECKPOINT SLEEP (or, rarely,
CHECKPOINT) always appear in sp_who output. AUDIT PROCESS appears
if auditing is available.
Processes 1, 8, 9, and 10 can be killed, since they have the status values “recv
sleep,” “send sleep,” “alarm sleep,” and “lock sleep.”
In sp_who output, you cannot tell whether a is “recv sleep” belongs to a user
who is using Adaptive Server and may be pausing to examine the results of a
command, or whether a user has restarted a PC or other terminal, and left a
stranded process. Query the sysprocesses table to learn more about
questionable processes. For example, this query shows the host process ID and
client software used by process 8:
select hostprocess, program_name
from sysprocesses
where spid = 8
hostprocess program_name
----------- ----------------
3993 isql

This query, plus the information about the user and host from the sp_who
results, provides additional information for tracking down the process from the
operating system level.
Using kill with statusonly

The kill ...statusonly command reports on the progress of a server process ID
(spid) in rollback status. It does not terminate the spid. The statusonly report
displays the percent of rollback completed and the estimated length of time in
seconds before the rollback completes. To track the progress of a rollback, you
must run kill...with statusonly multiple times:
kill spid with statusonly
Where spid is the number of the process you are terminating.
For example, the following reports on the process of the rollback of spid
number 13:
kill 13 with statusonly
spid: 13 Transaction rollback in progress. Estimated rollback completion: 17%
Estimated time left: 13 seconds
If the rollback of the spid has completed when you issue kill...statusonly or if
Adaptive Server cannot roll back the specified spid, kill...statusonly returns the
following message:
Status report cannot be obtained. KILL spid:nn is not
in progress.
Using sp_lock to examine blocking processes

In addition to sp_who, sp_lock can help identify processes that are blocking
other processes. If the blk_spid column in the sp_who report indicates that
another process has been blocked while waiting to acquire locks, sp_lock can
display information about the blocking process. For example, process 10 in the
sp_who output above is blocked by process 7. To see information about process
7, execute:
sp_lock 7
For more information about locking in Adaptive Server, see the Performance
and Tuning Series: Locking and Concurrency Control.

Housekeeper functionality
The housekeeper task provides important functionalities:
• The housekeeper consists of three tasks: housekeeper wash, housekeeper
garbage collection, and housekeeper chores. sp_who recognizes all three
tasks, as the following output shows:
fid spid status loginame origname hostname blk_sp
id dbname cmd block_xloid
---- ----- ---------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------
------- --------- ------------- -------------
0 5 sleeping henry NULL luv2work 0
master tempdb select 0
0 6 sleeping joe NULL NULL 0
master tempdb HK GC 0
0 7 sleeping NULL NULL NULL 0
master tempdb HK CHORES 0

• The general automatic restart of housekeeper-related system tasks: you
need not restart the server if these system tasks quit unexpectedly.
• A system administrator can change all housekeeper task priorities.
sp_showpsexe, as well as sp_who, recognizes all three housekeeper
names.
For more information about sp_who and sp_showpsexe, see the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
Housekeeper wash
Washing buffers is an optional task that, if enabled, runs only during idle times.
You can turn off this task using the configuration parameter housekeeper free
write percent. The housekeeper wash task is the only housekeeper task for
which you use this configuration parameter.
Housekeeper chores
The housekeeper chores task th runs only at idle times, and does not use a
common configuration parameter. It manages miscellaneous chores, such as:

• Flushing table statistics.

• Flushing account statistics.
• Handling timeout of detached transactions. You can turn off this task using
the configuration parameter dtm detach timeout period.
• Checking licence usage. You can turn off this task using the configuration
parameter license information.
Housekeeper garbage collection

There are two forms of garbage collection, lazy and aggressive. These terms
describe two distinct tests for finding empty pages.
• Lazy garbage collection refers to an inexpensive test to find empty pages.
This test may not be effective during long-running transactions, and empty
pages may accumulate. Lazy garbage collection is inexpensive to use, but
can lower performance, which is affected by the fragmentation of
allocated table space, and by the accumulation of empty pages that must
be evaluated during queries.
• Aggressive garbage collection refers to a sophisticated test for empty
pages. This test is more expensive than the lazy garbage collection test,
because it checks each deleted row in a page to determine whether the
deleted transactions are committed.
Use the enable housekeeper GC configuration parameter to configure the
delete command and the housekeeper garbage collection task for
aggressive or lazy garbage collection.
The aggressive housekeeper garbage collection self-tunes the frequency
with which the housekeeper garbage collection task examines the
housekeeper list, so that the frequency of examination matches the rate at
which the application generates empty pages.
Running at user priority

The housekeeper garbage collection task operates at the priority level of an
ordinary user, competing for CPU time with ordinary user tasks. This behavior
prevents the list of empty pages from growing faster than the housekeeper can
delete them.

Configuring enable housekeeper GC

To configure Adaptive Server for garbage collection task, use:
sp_configure "enable housekeeper GC", value
For example, enter:
sp_configure "enable housekeeper GC", 4
The valid values for the enable housekeeper GC configuration parameter are:
• 0 – disables the housekeeper garbage collection task, but enables lazy
garbage collection by the delete command. You must use reorg
reclaim_space to deallocate empty pages. This is the cheapest option with
the lowest performance impact, but it may cause performance problems if
many empty pages accumulate. Sybase recommends that you do not use
this value.
• 1 – enables lazy garbage collection, by both the housekeeper garbage
collection task and the delete command. This is the default value. If more
empty pages accumulate than your application allows, consider options 4
or 5. You can use the optdiag utility to obtain statistics of empty pages.
• 2 – reserved for future use.
• 3 – reserved for future use.
• 4 – enables aggressive garbage collection for both the housekeeper
garbage collection task and the delete command. This option is the most
effective, but the delete command is the most expensive. This option is
ideal if the deletes on your dataonly locked tables are in a batch.
• 5 – enables aggressive garbage collection for the housekeeper, and lazy
garbage collection by delete. This option is less expensive for deletes than
option 4. This option is suitable when deletes are caused by concurrent
transactions.
Using the reorg command

Garbage collection is most effective when you set enable housekeeper GC to 4
or 5. Sybase recommends that you set the parameter value to 5. However, if
performance considerations prevent setting this parameter to 4 or 5, and you
have an accumulation of empty pages, run reorg on the affected tables. You can
obtain statistics on empty pages through the optdiag utility.

When the server is shut down or crashes, requests to deallocate pages that the
housekeeper garbage collection task has not yet serviced are lost. These pages,
empty but not deallocated by the housekeeper garbage collection task, remain
allocated until you remove them by running reorg.
See Chapter 9, Using the reorg Command,” in the System Administration
Guide: Volume 2.
Configuring Adaptive Server to save SQL batch text

Occasionally, a query or procedure causes Adaptive Server Monitor to stop
responding. Users who have the system administrator role can configure
Adaptive Server to grant Adaptive Server Monitor access to the text of the
currently executing SQL batch. Viewing the SQL text of long-running batches
may help you debug “stuck” processes, or fine-tune long statements that are
heavy resource consumers.
You must configure Adaptive Server to collect the SQL batch text and write it
to shared memory, where the text can be read by Adaptive Server Monitor
Server (the server component of Adaptive Server Monitor). The client requests
might come from Monitor Viewer, which is a plug-in to Sybase Central, or
other Adaptive Server Monitor Server applications.
Configuring Adaptive Server to save SQL batch text also allows you to view
the current query plan in showplan format (as you would see after setting
showplan on). You can view the current query plan from within Adaptive
Server; see “Viewing the query plan of a SQL statement” on page 376. SQL
batches are viewable only through Adaptive Server Monitor Server. See the
Adaptive Server Monitor Server documentation for more information about
displaying the batch text.
Because the query or procedure you are viewing may be nested within a batch
of SQL text, the sysprocesses table includes columns for the line number,
statement number, and spid the statement that has stopped responding, so its
query plan can be analyzed.
By default, Adaptive Server does not save SQL batch text, so you must
configure Adaptive Server to allocate memory for this feature. Adaptive Server
Monitor access to SQL has no effect on performance if you have not
configured any memory to save SQL batches.

Allocating memory for batch text

Configure the amount of the SQL text batch you want to save. When text
saving is enabled, Adaptive Server copies the subsequent SQL text batches to
memory shared with SQL Server Monitor. Because each new batch clears the
memory for the connection and overwrites the previous batch, you can view
only currently executing SQL statements.
❖ Saving SQL text

1 Configure the amount of SQL text retained in memory (see “Configuring
the amount of SQL text retained in memory” on page 374).
2 Enable Adaptive Server to start saving SQL text (see “Enabling Adaptive
Server to start saving SQL text” on page 375).
Note You must have system administration privileges to configure and

save SQL text batches.
Configuring the amount of SQL text retained in memory

After installation, you must decide the maximum amount of SQL text that can
be copied to shared memory. To determine how much memory to allocate per
user, consider:
• SQL batches that exceed the allocated amount of memory are truncated
without warning. If you do not allocate enough memory for the batch
statements, the text you are interested in viewing might be the section of
the batch that is truncated.
• The more memory you allocate for SQL text from shared memory, the less
chance the problem statement will be truncated from the batch copied to
shared memory. However, Adaptive Server immediately rejects very large
values because they do not leave enough memory for data and procedure
caches.
Sybase recommends that you use an initial value of 1024 bytes per user
connection.
Use sp_configure with the max SQL text monitored configuration parameter to
allocate shared memory, where bytes_per_connection (the maximum number
of bytes saved for each client connection) is between 0 (the default) and
2,147,483,647 (the theoretical limit):
sp_configure "max SQL text monitored", bytes_per_connection

You must restart Adaptive Server for this parameter to take effect.
The total memory allocated for the SQL text from shared memory is the
product of bytes_per_connection multiplied by the number of user
connections.
Enabling Adaptive Server to start saving SQL text

After you allocate shared memory for SQL text, Adaptive Server saves a copy
of each SQL batch whenever you enable an Adaptive Server Monitor event
summary that includes SQL batches.
You may also have to reconfigure the Adaptive Server Monitor event buffer
scan interval for SQL text. See the Adaptive Server Monitor documentation.
SQL commands not represented by text

If you use Client-Library functions not represented by text (such as ct_cursor
or ct_dynamic) to issue SQL commands, Client-Library encodes the
information for efficiency, and Adaptive Server generally decodes and displays
key command information. For example, if you open a cursor with ct_cursor
and the command is running, the Adaptive Server Monitor event summary
displays the cursor name and the cursor declare statement.
Table 11-3 lists the Client-Library functions not represented by text:
Table 11-3: SQL commands not represented by text
Presentation
Client-Library routine DB-Library routine Presentation name data
ct_cursor N/A CLOSE_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_cursor N/A DECLARE_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_cursor N/A DELETE_AT_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_cursor N/A FETCH_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_fetch (when processing the results of N/A FETCH_CURSOR Cursor name,
ct_cursor) statement
ct_cursor CURSOR_ROWS, or N/A CURSOR_INFO Cursor name,
ct_cancel when the connection has statement
Client-Library cursors

Presentation
Client-Library routine DB-Library routine Presentation name data
ct_cursor N/A OPEN_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_cursor N/A UPDATE_AT_CURSOR Cursor name,
statement
ct_command (CS_RPC_CMD) (default dbrpcinit (only in DBLIB_RPC RPC name
behavior) version 10.0.1 or later)
ct_dynamic N/A DYNAMIC_SQL Dynamic
statement name,
statement
ct_command (CS_MSG_CMD N/A MESSAGE None
ct_param dbrpcparam PARAM_FORMAT None
ct_param dbrpcparam PARAMS None
ct_command (CS_RPC_CMD) (only dbrpcparam (in RPC RPC name
when a TDS version earlier than 5.0 is DB-Library versions
used) earlier than 10.0.1)
For more information about SQL commands not represented by text, see your
Open Client documentation.
Viewing the query plan of a SQL statement

Use sp_showplan and the spid of the user connection in question to retrieve the
query plan for the statement currently running on the connection. You can also
use sp_showplan to view the query plan for a previous statement in the same
batch.
declare @batch int
declare @context int
declare @statement int
execute sp_showplan <spid_value>, @batch_id= @batch output,
@context_id= @context output, @stmt_num=@statement output
where:
• batch_id – is the unique number for a batch.
• context_id – is a unique number for every procedure (or trigger) executed
in the batch.
• stmt_num – is the number of the current statement within a batch.

Adaptive Server uses the unique batch ID to synchronize the query plan with
the batch text and other data retrieved by Adaptive Server Monitor.
Note You must be a system administrator to execute sp_showplan.
For example, to see the query plan for the current statement for spid 99, enter:
declare @batch int
declare @context int
declare @statement int
exec sp_showplan 99, @batch output, @context output, @statement output
You can run the query plan procedure independently of Adaptive Server
Monitor, regardless of whether or not Adaptive Server has allocated shared
memory for SQL text.
Viewing previous statements

To see the query plan for the previous statement in the same batch, issue
sp_showplan with the same values as the original query, but subtract one from
the statement number. Using this method, you can view all the statements in
the statement batch back to query number one.
Viewing a nested procedure

Although sp_showplan allows you to view the query plan for the current
statement, the actual statement that is running may exist within a procedure (or
within a nested chain of procedures) called from the original SQL batch. Table
11-4 shows the columns in sysprocesses that contain information about these
nested statements.
Table 11-4: sysprocesses columns for nested statements
Column Datatype Specifies
id Integer The object ID of the running procedure (or 0 if no procedure is running)
stmtnum Integer The current statement number within the running procedure (or the SQL batch statement
number if no procedure is running)
linenum Integer The line number of the current statement within the running stored procedure (or the line
number of the current SQL batch statement if no procedure is running)
This information is saved in sysprocesses, regardless of whether SQL text is

enabled or any memory is allocated for SQL text.

Shutting down servers
To display the id, stmtnum, and linenum columns, enter:

select id, stmtnum, linenum
from sysprocesses
where spid = spid_of_hung_session
Note You do not need the sa_role to run this select statement.
Shutting down servers

A system administrator can shut down Adaptive Server or Backup Server
using:
shutdown [backup_server_name] [with {wait|nowait}]
The default for the shutdown command is with wait. That is, shutdown and
shutdown with wait do exactly the same thing.
Shutting down Adaptive Server

If you do not provide a server name, shutdown shuts down the Adaptive Server
you are using. When you issue a shutdown command, Adaptive Server:
1 Disables logins, except for system administrators
2 Performs a checkpoint in each database, flushing pages that have changed
from memory to disk
3 Waits for currently executing SQL statements or procedures to finish
In this way, shutdown minimizes the amount of work that automatic recovery
must do when you restart Adaptive Server.
The with nowait option shuts down Adaptive Server immediately. User
processes are aborted, and recovery may take longer after a shutdown with
nowait. You can help minimize recovery time by issuing a checkpoint command
before you issue a shutdown with nowait command.

Shutting down a Backup Server

To shut down a Backup Server, include the Backup Server name:
shutdown SYB_BACKUP
The default is with wait, so any dumps or loads in progress complete before the
Backup Server process halts. After you issue a shutdown command, no new
dump or load sessions can be started on the Backup Server.
To see the names of the Backup Servers that are accessible from your Adaptive
Server, execute sp_helpserver. Use the value in the name column in the
shutdown command. You can shut down a Backup Server only if it is:
• Listed in sysservers on your Adaptive Server, and

• Listed in your local interfaces file.
Use sp_addserver to add a Backup Server to sysservers.
Checking for active dumps and loads

To see the activity on your Backup Server before executing a shutdown
command, run sp_who on the Backup Server:
SYB_BACKUP...sp_who
spid status loginame hostname blk cmd
----- -------- -------- ---------- --- --------------
1 sleeping NULL NULL 0 CONNECT HANDLER
2 sleeping NULL NULL 0 DEFERRED HANDLER
3 runnable NULL NULL 0 SCHEDULER
4 runnable NULL NULL 0 SITE HANDLER
5 running sa heliotrope 0 NULL
Using nowait on a Backup Server

The shutdown backup_server with nowait command shuts down the Backup
Server, regardless of current activity. Use it only in severe circumstances. It can
leave your dumps or loads in incomplete or inconsistent states.
If you use shutdown with nowait during a log or database dump, check for the
message indicating that the dump completed. If you did not receive this
message, or if you are not sure whether the dump completed, your next dump
should be a dump database, not a transaction dump. This guarantees that you
are not relying on possibly inconsistent dumps.

Learning about known problems
If you use shutdown with nowait during a load of any kind, and you did not
receive the message indicating that the load completed, you may not be able to
issue further load transaction commands on the database. Run a full database
consistency check (dbcc) on the database before you use it. You may have to
reissue the full set of load commands, starting with load database.
Learning about known problems

The release bulletin is a valuable resource for learning about known problems
or incompatibilities with Adaptive Server and Backup Server. Reading the
release bulletin in advance can save you the time and guesswork of
troubleshooting known problems.

PA RT 2 Security Administration
The following chapters discuss security administration in

Adaptive Server:
• Chapter 13, “Getting Started With Security
Administration in Adaptive Server,” provides an
overview of the security features available in Adaptive
Server.
• Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive Server Logins,
Database Users, and Client Connections,” describes
methods for managing Adaptive Server login accounts
and database users.
• Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers,” discusses
the steps the system administrator and system security
officer of each Adaptive Server must execute to enable
remote procedure calls (RPCs).
• Chapter 16, “External Authentication,” describes the
network-based security services that enable you to
authenticate users and protect data transmitted among
machines on a network.
• Chapter 17, “Managing User Permissions,” describes
the use and implementation of user permissions.
• Chapter 18, “Auditing,” describes how to set up auditing
for your installation.
• Chapter 19, “Confidentiality of Data,” how to configure
Adaptive Server to ensure that all data is secure and
confidential
CH A PTE R 1 2 Introduction to Security
.
Topic Page
Introduction to security 383
What is “information security?” 383
Information security standards 384
Introduction to security
Information is possibly your company's greatest asset. Information needs
protection just like any other asset. As a system administrator, determine
how best to protect the information contained in company databases, and
who may access the information. Individual database servers need strong,
yet flexible, security support.
Users and the data they access may be located anywhere in the world,
connected by untrusted networks. Ensuring the confidentiality and
integrity of sensitive data and transactions in this environment is critical.
Information is useful only if it gets to the people who need it, when they
need it. With complex and dynamically changing business relationships,
it is critical that information gets only to authorized users.
What is “information security?”

These are some general guidelines when considering security for your
enterprise:
• Sensitive information should be kept confidential – determine which
users should have access to what information.

Information security standards
• The system should enforce integrity – the server should enforce rules and
constraints to ensure that information remains accurate and complete.
• The information should be available – even with all the safeguards in
place, anybody who needs access to the information should have it
available when the information is needed.
Identify what is it that your organization wants to protect, and what the outside
world requires from your organization:
• Identify the information assets and the security risks associated with them
if they become vulnerable or compromised.
• Identify and understand any laws, statutes, regulations, and contractual
agreements that apply to your organization and the information assets.
• Identify your organization’s business processes and the requirements they
impose on information assets, to balance practical considerations with the
security risks.
Security requirements change over time. Periodically reassess security
requirements to make sure they still reflect your organization’s needs.
Next, set up a series of controls and policies that meet the company's security
objectives, the result of which is an information security policy document that
clarifies decisions made for information security.
Adaptive Server contains a set of security features that help you enforce your
company’s security policies. For more information about security features in
Adaptive Server, see Chapter 13, “Getting Started With Security
Administration in Adaptive Server.”

Adaptive Server has been evaluated and validated in accordance with the
provisions of the Common Criteria Evaluation and Validation Scheme.
Adaptive Server also uses FIPS 140-2 certified modules for implementing
encryption functionality.
This section describes these certifications.

CHAPTER 12 Introduction to Security
Common Criteria configuration evaluation

Common Criteria for Information Techonology Security Evaluation is an
international standard (ISO/IEC 15408) for computer security certification.
Common Criteria is developed by the governments of Canada, France,
Germany, Netherland, UK and the United States.
Adaptive Server version 15.0.1 completed Common Criteria validation in
September, 2007. The Evaluated configuration consists of Adaptive Server
version 15.0.1 with the security and directory services option. The Adaptive
Server evaluation for security was carried out in accordance with the Common
Criteria Evaluation and Validation Scheme (CCEVS) process and scheme. The
criteria against which the Adaptive Server Enterprise was judged are described
in the Common Criteria for Information Technology Security Evaluation,
Version 2.3 and International Interpretations effective on August, 2005. If you
configure Adaptive Server as specified in the Supplement for Installing
Adaptive Server for Common Criteria Configuration, Adaptive Server satisfies
all of the security functional requirements stated in the Sybase Adaptive Server
Enterprise Security Target (Version 1.5).
Adaptive Server supports eight security functions:
• Cryptographic support – Adaptive Server supports transparent encryption
of data at the column level. SQL statements and extensions provide secure
key management.
• Security audit – an audit mechanism that checks access, authentication
attempts, and administrator functions. The security audit records the date,
time, responsible individual, and other details describing the event in the
audit trail.
• User data protection – Adaptive Server implements the discretionary
access control policy over applicable database objects: databases, tables,
views, stored procedures, and encryption keys.
• Identification and authentication – Adaptive Server provides its own
identification and authentication mechanism in addition to the underlying
operating system mechanism.
• Security management – functions that allow you to manage users and
associated privileges, access permissions, and other security functions
such as the audit trail. These functions are restricted based on discretionary
access control policy rules, including role restrictions.

• Protection of the TOE Security Function (TSF) – Adaptive Server keeps

its context separate from that of its users, and uses operating system
mechanisms to ensure that memory and files used by Adaptive Server
have the appropriate access settings. Adaptive Server interacts with users
through well-defined interfaces designed to ensure that its security
policies are enforced.
• Resource utilization – Adaptive Server provides resource limits to prevent
queries and transactions from monopolizing server resources.
• Target of Evaluation (TOE) access – Adaptive Server allows authorized
administrators to construct login triggers that restrict logins to a specific
number of sessions and restrict access based on time. Authorized
administrators can also restrict access based on user identities.
FIPS 140-2 validated cryptographic module

SSL is the standard for securing the transmission of sensitive information, such
as credit card numbers, stock trades, and banking transactions over the Internet.
SSL for Adaptive Server uses Certicom Security Builder GSE, a FIPS 140-2
level 1 validated cryptography module. See validation certificate #542, dated
June 2, 2005 at NIST Web site at http://csrc.nist.gov.
FIPS 140-2 certified Certicom Security Builder GSE is also used to encrypt
login passwords in transmitted login packet, in memory and on disk, if the
configuration parameter FIPS login password encryption is enabled.
Note A Security and Directory Services license is required to use SSL and to
enable the FIPS login password encryption parameter. If the parameter is not
enabled, OpenSSL security provider is used to perform login password
encryption.
Adaptive Server encrypted columns feature relies on symmetric- key

cryptography, and uses the same FIPS 140-2 validated cryptographic modules
as SSL. See the Users Guide for Encrypted Columns.
Note You must have an encrypted columns license to use the Adaptive Server
encrypted columns feature.

CH A PTE R 1 3 Getting Started With Security
Administration in Adaptive
Server
Topic Page
General process of security administration 387
Recommendations for setting up security 388
An example of setting up security 389
Discretionary access control 392
Security features in Adaptive Server 391
Identification and authentication 391
External authentication 392
Managing remote servers 392
Discretionary access control 392
Division of roles 393
Auditing for accountability 394
Confidentiality of data 395
General process of security administration

Table 13-1 describes the major tasks that are required to securely
administer Adaptive Server and refers you to the documentation that
contains the instructions for performing each task.
Table 13-1: General process for security administration
Task Description See
1. Install Adaptive This task includes preparing for installation, The installation documentation
Server, including loading files from your distribution medium, for your platform and Chapter 18,
auditing. performing the actual installation, and “Auditing”
administering required physical resources.

Recommendations for setting up security
Task Description See

2. Set up a secure This includes enabling auditing, granting roles to Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive
administrative individual users to ensure individual Server Logins, Database Users,
environment. accountability, assigning login names to system and Client Connections”
administrators and system security officers, and
establishing password and login policies.
3. Add user logins to the Add logins, create groups, add users to databases, Chapter 14, “Managing Adaptive
server; add users to drop and lock logins, and assign initial passwords. Server Logins, Database Users,
databases; establish Assign roles to users, create user-defined roles, and Client Connections”
groups and roles; set and define role hierarchies and mutual exclusivity
proxy authorization. of roles.
4. Administer Grant and revoke permissions for certain SQL Chapter 17, “Managing User
permissions for users, commands, executing certain system procedures, Permissions”
groups, and roles. and accessing databases, tables, particular table
columns, and views. Create access rules to enforce
fine-grained access control.
5. Configure encryption Configure Adaptive Server to use column-level Users Guide for Encrypted
in your database to encryption, decide which columnar data to Columns
encrypt sensitive data in encrypt, perform a one-time key creation
tables. Encrypt sensitive operation, and use alter table to perform initial data
data. encryption.
6. Establish integrity Add check constraints, domain roles, and Transact-SQL Users guide and
controls over data. referential constraints to validate incoming data. Reference Manual: Commands
7. Set up and maintain Determine what is to be audited, audit the use of Chapter 18, “Auditing,” and the
auditing. Adaptive Server, and use the audit trail to detect Adaptive Server installation and
penetration of the system and misuse of resources. configuration documentation for
your platform
8. Set up your installation Configure the server to use services, such as Chapter 16, “External
for advanced LDAP, PAM, or Kerberos- based user Authentication” and Chapter 19,
authentication authentication, data confidentiality with “Confidentiality of Data”
mechanisms and network encryption, data integrity.
security.
Recommendations for setting up security

The following describes logins and how they relate to security.
• Using the “sa” login – when you install Adaptive Server, a single login
called “sa” is configured with the system administrator and system
security officer roles, which means that the “sa” login has unlimited
control over what occurs in the database.

Use the “sa” login only during initial setup. Instead of allowing several
users to use the “sa” account, establish individual accountability by
assigning specific roles to individual administrators.
• Changing the “sa” login password – the “sa” login is configured initially
with a “NULL” password. Use sp_password to change the password
immediately after installation.
Warning! When logging in to Adaptive Server, do not use the -P option

of isql to specify your password because another user may have an
opportunity to see it.
• Enabling auditing – enable auditing early in the administration process so

that you have a record of privileged commands that are executed by
system security officers and system administrators. You might also want
to audit commands that are executed by those with other special roles,
such as operators when they dump and load databases
• Assigning login names – assign Adaptive Server login names that are the
same as their respective operating system login names. This makes
logging in to Adaptive Server easier, simplifies management of server and
operating system login accounts, and makes it easier to correlate the audit
data generated by Adaptive Server with that of the operating system.
An example of setting up security

This uses special roles assigned to the users listed in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2: Users to whom you will assign roles
Name Privilege Operating system login name
Rajnish Smith sso_role rsmith
Catherine Macar-Swan sa_role cmacar
Soshi Ikedo sa_role sikedo
Julio Rozanski oper_role jrozan
Alan Johnson dbo ajohnson
Table 13-3 shows the sequence of commands you might use to set up a secure
operating environment for Adaptive Server, based on the role assignments
shown in Table 13-2. After logging in to the operating system, issue these
commands using the initial “sa” account.

An example of setting up security
Table 13-3: Examples of commands used to set up security

Commands Result
• isql -Usa Logs in to Adaptive Server as “sa.” Both sa_role and sso_role are active.
• sp_audit “security”, “all”, “all”, “on”‘ Sets auditing options for server-wide, security-relevant events, and the
• sp_audit “all”, “sa_role”, “all”, “on” auditing of all actions that have sa_role or sso_role active.
• sp_audit “all”, “sso_role”, “all”, “on”‘
• sp_configure “auditing”, 1 Enables auditing.
Note Before you enable auditing, set up a threshold procedure for the audit trail and determine how to handle the
transaction log in sybsecurity. See Chapter 18, “Auditing.”
• sp_addlogin rsmith, js&2P3d, Adds logins and passwords for Rajnish, Catherine, Soshi, and Julio.
@fullname = "Rajnish Smith"
• sp_addlogin cmacar, Fr3ds#1, A default database is not specified for any of these users, so their default
@fullname = "Catherine Macar-Swan" database is master.
• sp_addlogin sikedo, mi5pd1s,
@fullname = "Soshi Ikedo"
• sp_addlogin jrozan, w1seCrkr,
@fullname = "Julio Rozanski"
• grant role sso_role to rsmith Grants the sso_role to Rajnish, the sa_role to Soshi and Catherine, and
• grant role sa_role to sikedo the oper_role to Julio.
• grant role sa_role to cmacar
• grant role oper_role to jrozan
• use sybsecurity Grants access to the auditing database, sybsecurity, by making Rajnish,
• sp_changedbowner rsmith who is the system security officer, the database owner. Alan is not
granted any system-defined roles.
use master Creates a new database sales_summary and makes Alan the owner of
sp_addlogin ajohnson, j06n50n, this database. Because he is the database owner, Alan can now create
@fullname = "Alan Johnson" users, create new database objects, and grant permissions to other users
in this database.
create database sales_summary
use sales_summary
sp_changedbowner ajohnson
sp_modifylogin ajohnson, 'defdb',
sales_summary
sp_locklogin sa,"lock" Locks the “sa” login so that no one can log in as “sa.” Individuals can
assume only the roles that are configured for them.
Note Do not lock the “sa” login until you have granted individual users the sa_role and sso_role roles and have
verified that the roles operate successfully.

Security features in Adaptive Server

Table 13-4 describes the security features in Adaptive Server.
Table 13-4: Major security features
Security feature Description
Identification and Ensures that only authorized users can log in to the system. In addition to password-based
authentication controls login authentication, Adaptive Server supports external authentication using Kerberos,
LDAP, or PAM.
Discretionary access Provides access controls that give object owners the ability to restrict access to objects,
controls (DAC) usually with the grant and revoke commands. This type of control is dependent on an
object owner’s discretion.
Division of roles Allows an administrator to grant privileged roles to specified users so only designated
users can perform certain tasks. Adaptive Server has predefined roles, called “system
roles,” such as system administrator and system security officer. In addition, Adaptive
Server allows system security officers to define additional roles, called “user-defined
roles.”
Auditing for Provides the ability to audit events such as logins, logouts, server start operations, remote
accountability procedure calls, accesses to database objects, and all actions performed by a specific user
or with a particular role active. Adaptive Server also provides a single option to audit a
set of server-wide security-relevant events.
Confidentiality of data Maintains confidentiality of data using encryption for client/server communication,
available with Kerberos or SSL. Column-level encryption preserves confidentiality of
data stored in the database. Inactive data is kept confidential with a password-protected
database backup.
Identification and authentication

Adaptive Server uses the server user identity (SUID) to uniquely identify a user
with a login account name. This identity is linked to a particular user identity
(UID) in each database. Access controls use the identity when determining
whether to allow access for the user with this SUID to an object.
Authentication verifies that a user is actually the person he or she claims to be.
Adaptive Server allows both internal and external mechanisms for
authentication.
Identification and authentication controls are discussed in Chapter 14,
“Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and Client
Connections.” In addition, see “Using proxy authorization” on page 587 and
Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers.”

External authentication
Security is often enhanced in large, heterogeneous applications by
authenticating logins with a central repository. Adaptive Server supports a
variety of external authentication methods:
• Kerberos – provides a centralized and secure authentication mechanism in
enterprise environments that includes the Kerberos infrastructure.
Authentication occurs with a trusted, third-party server called a key
distribution center to verify both the client and the server.
• LDAP user authentication – Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) provides a centralized authentication mechanism based on a
user’s login name and password.
• PAM user authentication – Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM)
provides a centralized authentication mechanism that uses operating
system interfaces for both administration and runtime application
operations.
For more information about each of these methods of external authentication,
see Chapter 16, “External Authentication.”
Managing remote servers

Internal mechanisms for administering logins and users between Adaptive
Servers are described in Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers.”
Discretionary access control

Object owners can grant access to the objects they own to other users. Object
owners can also grant other users the ability to pass the access permission to
other users. With Adaptive Server discretionary access control, you can give
various permissions to users, groups, and roles using the grant command. Use
the revoke command to rescind these permissions. The grant and revoke
commands give users permission to execute specified commands, and to access
specified tables, procedures, views, encryption keys, and columns.
Some commands can be used at any time by any user, with no permission
required. Others can be used only by users of a certain status, such as a system
administrator, and are not transferable.

The ability to assign permissions for the commands that can be granted and
revoked is determined by each user’s status (as system administrator, system
security officer, database owner, or database object owner), and whether a
particular user is granted a permission with the option to grant that permission
to other users.
Discretionary access control are discussed in Chapter 17, “Managing User
Permissions.”
Row-level access control

Row-level access control provides a powerful and flexible means of protecting
data, down to the row level. Administrators define access rules that are based
on the value of individual data elements, and the server transparently enforces
these rules. Once an administrator defines an access rule, it is automatically
invoked whenever the affected data is queried through applications, ad hoc
queries, stored procedures, views, and so on.
Using a rule-based access control simplifies both the security administration of
an Adaptive Server installation and the application development process
because the server, rather than the application, enforces security. These features
allow you to implement row-level access control:
• Access rules
• Application context facility
• Login triggers
• Domain integrity rules
See “Using row-level access control” on page 603.
Division of roles
The roles supported by Adaptive Server enable you to enforce and maintain
individual accountability. Adaptive Server provides system roles, such as
system administrator and system security officer, and user-defined roles, which
are created by a system security officer.
Roles provide individual accountability for users performing operational and
administrative tasks, and allow you to audit and attribute actions to these users.

Role hierarchy
A system security officer can define role hierarchies such that if a user has one
role, the user automatically has roles lower in the hierarchy. For example, the
“chief_financial_officer” role might contain both the “financial_analyst” and
the “salary_administrator” roles. The chief financial officer can perform all
tasks and see all data that can be viewed by salary administrators and financial
analysts.
Mutual exclusivity
You can define roles to be mutually exclusive either at the membership level,
or at the activation level. For example:
• You may not want to grant both the “payment_requestor” and
“payment_approver” roles to the same user.
• A user might be granted both the “senior_auditor” and the
“equipment_buyer” roles, but you may not want to permit the user to have
both roles enabled at the same time.
You can define system roles, as well as user-defined roles, to be in a role
hierarchy or to be mutually exclusive. For example, you might want a
“super_user” role to contain the system administrator, operator, and technical
support roles. Additionally, you may want to define the system administrator
and system security officer roles to be mutually exclusive for membership; that
is, a single user cannot be granted both roles.
See “Creating and assigning roles to users” on page 408.
Auditing for accountability

Adaptive Server includes a comprehensive auditing system. The auditing
system consists of:
• The sybsecurity database
• Configuration parameters for managing auditing
• sp_audit to set all auditing options
• sp_addauditrecord to add user-defined records to the audit trail

When you install auditing, you can specify the number of audit tables that
Adaptive Server uses for the audit trail. If you use two or more tables to store
the audit trail, you can set up a smoothly running audit system with no manual
intervention and no loss of records.
A system security officer manages the audit system and is the only user who
can start and stop auditing, set up auditing options, and process the audit data.
As a system security officer, you can establish auditing for events such as:
• Server-wide, security-relevant events
• Creating, dropping, and modifying database objects
• All actions by a particular user or all actions by users with a particular role
active
• Granting or revoking database access
• Importing or exporting data
• Logins and logouts
• All actions related to encryption keys
Auditing functionality is discussed in Chapter 18, “Auditing.”
Confidentiality of data
Adaptive server allows you to maintain the confidentiality of data by
encrypting client-server communications using the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) standard or using Kerberos. You can protect the confidentiality of data
by using column-level encryption in the database and encrypting backups for
offline data.
For more information see:
• SSL – Chapter 19, “Confidentiality of Data”
• Kerberos – Chapter 16, “External Authentication”
• Encrypted columns – Encrypted Columns Users Guide

Password-protected database backup

The dump and load database commands include a password parameter that
allows you to password-protect your database dumps. See Reference Manual:
Commands and Chapter 12, “Backing Upa and Restoring User Databases,” in

CH A PTE R 1 4 Managing Adaptive Server
Logins, Database Users, and
Client Connections
.
Topic Page
Choosing and creating a password 398
Adding logins to Adaptive Server 399
Login failure 400
Creating groups 401
Adding users to databases 402
Number of user and login IDs 405
Creating and assigning roles to users 408
Dropping users, groups, and user-defined roles 420
Locking or dropping Adaptive Server login accounts 422
Changing user information 423
Using aliases in databases 429
Getting information about users 431
Establishing a password and login policy 438
Monitoring license use 473
Getting information about usage: chargeback accounting 476
The responsibility of adding new logins to Adaptive Server, adding users

to databases, and granting them permission to use commands and
database objects is divided among the system security officer, system
administrator, and database owner.
These steps create login accounts for a particular server using sp_addlogin,
which stores account information in the syslogins table on that server. You
can also create and store login accounts on a LDAP server:
1 A system security officer uses sp_addlogin to create a server login
account for a new user.

Choosing and creating a password
2 A system administrator or database owner uses sp_adduser to add a user

to a database or assign a user to a group. See “Creating groups” on page
401. You can give a user access to a database using an alias. See “Adding
aliases” on page 429.
3 A system security officer grants specific roles to the user.
4 A system administrator, database owner, or object owner grants the user or
group specific permissions on specific commands and database objects.
Users or groups can also be granted permission to grant specific
permissions on objects to other users or groups. See Chapter 17,
“Managing User Permissions.”
Table 14-1 summarizes the system procedures and commands used for these
tasks.
Table 14-1: Adding users to Adaptive Server and databases
Command or
Task Required role procedure Database
Create new logins, assign passwords, System security officer sp_addlogin Any database
default databases, default language, and
full name
Create groups Database owner or system sp_addgroup User database
administrator
Create and assign roles System security officer create role, Master
grant role database
Add users to database and assign groups Database owner or system sp_adduser User database
administrator
Alias users to other database users Database owner or system sp_addalias User database
administrator
Grant groups, users, or roles permission Database owner, system grant User database
to create or access database objects and administrator, system security
run commands officer, or object owner
Choosing and creating a password

The system security officer assigns each user a password when adding the user
as a login to Adaptive Server. Users can modify their passwords at any time
using sp_password. See “Changing passwords” on page 424.
When you create your password:

CHAPTER 14 Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and Client Connections
• Do not use information such as your birthday, street address, or any other
word or number that has anything to do with your personal life.
• Do not use names of pets or loved ones.
• Do not use words that appear in the dictionary or words spelled
backwards.
The most difficult passwords to guess are those that combine uppercase and
lowercase letters and numbers. Never give anyone your password, and never
write it down where anyone can see it.
Passwords must:
• Be at least 6 characters long.
• Consist of any printable letters, numbers, or symbols.
• Be enclosed in quotation marks in sp_addlogin if they:
• Includes any character other than A – Z, a – z, 0 – 9,_, #, valid
single-byte or multibyte alphabetic characters, or accented alphabetic
characters
• Begin with a number 0 – 9
See “Password complexity checks” on page 446.
Adding logins to Adaptive Server

Use sp_addlogin to add a new login name to Adaptive Server. (Use sp_adduser
to give permission to access user databases.) Only the system security officer
can execute sp_addlogin.
See the Reference Manual: Procedures for complete sp_addlogin syntax.
The following statement sets up an account for the user “maryd” with the
password “100cents,” the default database (master), the default language, and
no full name:
sp_addlogin "maryd", "100cents"
The password requires quotation marks because it begins with 1.
After this statement is executed, “maryd” can log in to Adaptive Server. She is
automatically treated as a “guest” user in master, with limited permissions,
unless she has been specifically given access to master.

Login failure
The following statement sets up a login account (“omar_khayyam”) and

password (“rubaiyat”) and makes pubs2 the default database for this user:
sp_addlogin omar_khayyam, rubaiyat, pubs2
To specify a full name for a user and use the default database and language,
specify null in place of the defdb and deflanguage parameters. For example:
sp_addlogin omar, rubaiyat, null, null,
"Omar Khayyam"
Alternatively, you can specify a parameter name, in which case you do not have
to specify all the parameters. For example:
sp_addlogin omar, rubaiyat,
@fullname = "Omar Khayyam"
When you execute sp_addlogin, Adaptive Server adds a row to
master.dbo.syslogins, assigns a unique system user ID (suid) for the new user,
and fills in other information. When a user logs in, Adaptive Server looks in
syslogins for the name and password provided by the user. The password
column is encrypted with a one-way algorithm so it is not readable.
At login creation, the crdate column in syslogins is set to the current time.
The suid column in syslogins uniquely identifies each user on Adaptive Server.
A user’s suid remains the same, no matter what database he or she is using. The
suid 1 is always assigned to the default “sa” account that is created when
Adaptive Server is installed. Other users’ server user IDs are integers assigned
consecutively by Adaptive Server each time sp_addlogin is executed.
Login failure
Adaptive Server must successfully authenticate a user before he or she can
access data in Adaptive Server. If the authentication attempt fails, Adaptive
Server returns the following message and the network connection is
terminated:
isql -U bob -P badpass
Server 'ACCOUNTING'
Login failed.
CT-LIBRARY error:
ct_connect(): protocol specific layer: external error:
The attempt to connect to the server failed

This message is a generic login failure message that does not tell the
connecting user whether the failure resulted from a bad user name or a bad
password.
Although the client sees a generic message for a login failure to avoid giving
information to a malicious user, the system administrator may find the reason
for the failure to be important to help detect intrusion attempts and diagnose
user authentication problems.
Adaptive Server provides the reason for the login failure in the
Errornumber.Severity.State of the Other Information section of
sysaudits.extrainfo column. Login failure audits have event number 45 and
eventmod 2.
Set the sp_audit login parameter to on or fail to enable auditing for login failure:
sp_audit "login", "all", "all", "fail"
sp_audit "login", "all", "all", "on"
See “Auditing login failures.”
Creating groups
Groups let you grant and revoke permissions to more than one user in a single
statement, as well as allow you to provide a collective name to a group of users.
They are especially useful if you administer an Adaptive Server installation
that has a large numbers of users.
Create groups before adding users to a database, since sp_adduser can assign
users to groups as well as add them to the database.
You must have the system administrator or system security officer role, or be
the database owner to create a group with sp_addgroup. The syntax is:
sp_addgroup grpname
The group name, a required parameter, must adhere to the rules for identifiers.
The system administrator, system security officer, or the database owner can
use sp_changegroup to assign or reassign users to groups.
For examle, to set up the Senior Engineering group, use this command while
using the database to which you want to add the group:
sp_addgroup senioreng

Adding users to databases
sp_addgroup adds a row to sysusers in the current database. Therefore, each

group in a database, as well as each user, has an entry in sysusers.

The database owner or a system administrator can use sp_adduser to add a user
to a specific database. The user must already have an Adaptive Server login.
The syntax is:
sp_adduser loginame [, name_in_db [, grpname]]
where:
• loginame – is the login name of an existing user.
• name_in_db – specifies a name that is different from the login name by
which the user is to be known inside the database.
Use name_in_db to accommodate users’ preferences. For example, if
there are five Adaptive Server users named Mary, each must have a
different login name. Mary Doe might log in as “maryd”, Mary Jones as
“maryj”, and so on. However, if these users do not use the same databases,
each might prefer to be known simply as “mary” inside a particular
database.
If no name_in_db parameter is given, the name inside the database is the
same as loginame.
Note This capability is different from the alias mechanism described in

“Using aliases in databases” on page 429, which maps the identity and
permissions of one user to another.
• grpname – is the name of an existing group in the database. If you do not

specify a group name, the user is made a member of the default group
“public.” Users remain in “public” even if they are a member of another
group. See “Changing a user’s group membership” on page 427.
sp_adduser adds a row to the sysusers system table in the current database.
When a user has an entry in the sysusers table of a database, he or she:
• Can issue use database_name to access that database
• Will use that database by default, if the default database parameter was
issued as part of sp_addlogin

• Can use sp_modifylogin to make that database the default

This example shows how a database owner can give access permission to
“maryh” of the engineering group “eng,” which already exists:
sp_adduser maryh, mary, eng
This example shows how to give “maryd” access to a database, keeping her
name in the database the same as her login name:
sp_adduser maryd
This example shows how to add “maryj” to the existing “eng” group, keeping
her name in the database the same as her login name by using null in place of a
new user name:
sp_adduser maryj, null, eng
Users who have access to a database still need permissions to read data, modify
data, and use certain commands. These permissions are granted with the grant
and revoke commands, discussed in Chapter 17, “Managing User
Permissions.”
Adding a “guest” user to a database

Creating a user named “guest” in a database enables any user with an Adaptive
Server account to access the database as a guest user. If a user who has not been
added to the database as a user or an aliased user issues the use database_name
command, Adaptive Server looks for a guest user. If there is one, the user is
allowed to access the database, with the permissions of the guest user.
The database owner can use sp_adduser to add a guest entry to the sysusers
table of the database:
sp_adduser guest
The guest user can be removed with sp_dropuser, as discussed in “Dropping
users” on page 420.
If you drop the guest user from the master database, server users who have not
yet been added to any databases cannot log in to Adaptive Server.
Note Although more than one individual can be a guest user in a database,
Adaptive Server can still use the user’s server user ID, which is unique within
the server, to audit each user’s activity. See Chapter 18, “Auditing.”

“guest” user permissions

“guest” inherits the privileges of “public.” The database owner and the owners
of database objects can use grant and revoke to make the privileges of “guest”
either more or less restrictive than those of “public.” See Chapter 17,
“Managing User Permissions.”
When you install Adaptive Server, master..sysusers contains a guest entry.
“guest” user in user databases

In user databases, the database owner adds a guest user that permits all
Adaptive Server users to use that database, which saves the owner from having
to use sp_adduser to explicitly name each user as a database user.
You can use the guest mechanism to restrict access to database objects while
allowing access to the database.
For example, the owner of the titles table can grant select permission on titles
to all database users except “guest” by executing:
grant select on titles to public
sp_adduser guest
revoke all on titles from guest
“guest” user in installed system databases

Adaptive Server creates the system tempdb database and user-created
temporary databases with a guest user. Temporary objects and other objects
created in tempdb are automatically owned by user “guest.” sybsystemprocs,
sybsystemdb, and sybsyntax databases automatically include the “guest” user.
“guest” user in pubs2 and pubs3

The “guest” user entry in the sample databases allows new Adaptive Server
users to follow the examples in the Transact-SQL Users Guide. The guest is
given a wide range of privileges, including:
• select permission and data modification permission on all of the user
tables
• execute permission on all of the procedures
• create table, create view, create rule, create default, and create procedure
permissions

Adding a guest user to the server

The system security officer can use sp_addlogin to enter a login name and
password that visiting users are instructed to use. Typically, such users are
granted restricted permissions. A default database may be assigned.
Warning! A visitor user account is not the same as the “guest” user account.
All users of the visitor account have the same server user ID; therefore, you
cannot audit individual activity. Each “guest” user has a unique server ID, so
you can audit individual activity and maintain individual accountability.
Sybase recommends that you do not set up a visitor account to be used by more
than one user because you cannot maintain individual accountability.
You can use sp_login to add a visitor user account named “guest” to
master..syslogins. This “guest” user account takes precedence over the system
“guest” user account. If you add a visitor user named “guest” with sp_adduser,
this impacts system databases such as sybsystemprocs and sybsystemdb, which
are designed to work with system “guest” user in them.
Adding remote users

You can allow users on another Adaptive Server to execute stored procedures
on your server by enabling remote access. Working with the system
administrator of the remote server, you can also allow users of your server to
execute remote procedure calls to the remote server.
To enable remote procedure calls, you must reconfigure both the local and the
remote servers. See Chapter 15, “Managing Remote Servers.”
Number of user and login IDs

Adaptive Server supports over 2,000,000,000 logins per server and users per
database. Adaptive Server uses negative numbers as well as positive numbers
to increase the range of possible numbers available for IDs.
Limits and ranges of ID numbers

Number of user and login IDs
Table 14-2 describes the valid ranges for the ID types.

Table 14-2: Ranges for ID types
ID type Server limits
Logins per server (suid) 2 billion plus 32K
Users per database (uid) 2 billion less 1032193
Groups or roles per database 16,384 to 1,048,576
(gid)
Figure 14-1 illustrates the limits and ranges for logins, users, and groups.
Figure 14-1: Users, groups, and logins available in Adaptive Server
-32768 2 billion
(@@minsuid) 0 1 2 16383 1048576 (@@maxsuid)
sa
suid
probe
User IDs suid Group or role IDs
16384 1048576
(@@mingroupid) (@@maxgroupid)
-32768 SUIDs 2 billion
You may use negative values for user IDs (uid).

The server user ID (suid) associated with a group or a role in sysusers is not
equal to the negation of their user ID (uid). Every suid associated with a group
or a role in sysusers is set to -2 (INVALID_SUID).
Login connection limitations

Although Adaptive Server allows you to define more than two billion logins
per server, the actual number of users that can connect to Adaptive Server at
one time is limited by the:
• Value of the number of user connections configuration parameter, and

• Number of file descriptors available for Adaptive Server. Each login uses
one file descriptor for the connection.
Note The maximum number of concurrent tasks running on the server is

32,000.
❖ Allowing the maximum number of logins and simultaneous connections

1 Configure the operating system on which Adaptive Server is running for
at least 32,000 file descriptors.
2 Set the value of number of user connections to at least 32,000.
Note Before Adaptive Server can have more than 64K logins and
simultaneous connections, you must first configure the operating system
for more than 64K file descriptors. See your operating system
documentation for information about increasing the number of file
descriptors.
Table 14-3 lists the global variables for the server limits of logins, users, and
groups:
Table 14-3: Global variables for logins, users, and groups
Name of variable What it displays Value
@@invaliduserid Invalid user ID -1
@@minuserid Lowest user ID -32768
@@guestuserid Guest user ID 2
@@mingroupid Lowest group or role user ID 16384
@@maxgroupid Highest group or role user ID 1048576
@@maxuserid Highest user ID 2147483647
@@minsuid Lowest server user ID -32768
@@probesuid Probe server user ID 2
@@maxsuid Highest server user ID 2147483647
To issue a global variable, enter:

select variable_name
For example:
select @@minuserid
-----------
-32768

Creating and assigning roles to users

The final steps in adding database users are assigning them special roles, as
required, and granting permissions. For more information on permissions, see
Chapter 17, “Managing User Permissions.”
The roles supported by Adaptive Server let you enforce individual
accountability. Adaptive Server provides system roles, such as system
administrator and system security officer, and user-defined roles, which are
created and granted to users or other roles by a system security officer. Object
owners can grant database access as appropriate to each role.
System-defined roles
Table 14-4 lists the system roles, the value to use for the role_granted option
of the grant role or revoke role command, and the tasks usually performed by a
person with that role.
Table 14-4: System roles and related tasks
Value for
Role role_granted Description
System administrator sa_role Manages and maintains Adaptive Server
databases and disk storage
System security officer sso_role Performs security-related tasks
Operator oper_role Backs up and loads databases server-wide
Sybase Technical sybase_ts_role Analysis and repair of database structures
Support
Replication replication_role Replicate user data
Distributed transaction dtm_tm_role Coordinate transactions across servers
manager
High availability ha_role Administer and execute failover
Monitor and diagnosis mon_role Administer and execute performance and
diagnostic monitoring
Job Scheduler js_admin_role Administer Job Scheduler
administration
Job Scheduler user js_user_role, Create and run jobs through Job
js_client_role Scheduler
Real-time messaging messaging_role Administer and executer real-time
messaging
Web Services webservices_role Administer Web services
Key custodian keycustodian_role Create and manage encryption keys

System administrator privileges

System administrators:
• Handle tasks that are not application-specific
• Work outside the Adaptive Server discretionary access control system
The role of system administrator is usually granted to individual Adaptive
Server logins. All actions taken by that user can be traced to his or her
individual server user ID. If the server administration tasks at your site are
performed by a single individual, you may instead choose to use the “sa”
account that is installed with Adaptive Server. At installation, the “sa” account
user can assume the system administrator, system security officer, and operator
roles. Any user who knows the “sa” password can log in to that account and
assume any or all of these roles.
Having a system administrator operate outside the protection system serves as
a safety precaution. For example, if the database owner accidentally deletes all
the entries in the sysusers table, the system administrator can restore the table
(as long as backups exist). There are several commands that can be issued only
by a system administrator. They include disk init, disk refit, disk reinit, shutdown,
kill, disk mirror , mount, unmount and several monitoring commands.
In granting permissions, a system administrator is treated as the object owner.

If a system administrator grants permission on another user’s object, the
owner’s name appears as the grantor in sysprotects and in sp_helprotect output.
System administrators automatically assume the identity of a database owner
when they log in to a database, and assume all database owner privileges. This
automatic mapping occurs, regardless of any aliases assigned to the user. The
system administrator can perform tasks usually reserved for the database
owner such as dbcc commands, diagnostic functions, reading data pages, and
recovering data, or indexes.
System security officer privileges

System security officers perform security-sensitive tasks in Adaptive Server,
including:
• Granting the system security officer, operator, and key custodian roles
• Administering the audit system
• Changing passwords
• Adding new logins

• Dropping logins
• Locking and unlocking login accounts
• Creating and granting user-defined roles
• Administering network-based security
• Granting permission to use the set proxy or set session authorization
commands
The system security officer can access any database—to enable auditing —but,
in general, has no special permissions on database objects (except for
encryption keys and decrypt permission on encrypted columns. See the Users
Guide for Encrypted Columns). An exception is the sybsecurity database,
where only a system security officer can access the sysaudits table. There are
also several system procedures that can be executed only by a system security
officer.
System security officers can repair any changes inadvertently done to the
protection system by a user. For example, if the database owner forgets his or
her password, a system security officer can change the password to allow the
database owner to log in.
The system security officers share login management responsibilities with
system administrators. System security officers are responsible for adding,
locking, and unlocking logins.
System security officers can also create and grant user-defined roles to users,
other roles, or groups. See “Creating and assigning roles to users” on page 408.
Operator privileges
Users who have been granted the operator role can back up and restore
databases on a server-wide basis without having to be the owner of each
database. The operator role allows a user to use these commands on any
database:
• dump database
• dump transaction
• load database
• load transaction
• checkpoint

• online database
The system security officer grants the operator role.
Sybase Technical Support

A Sybase Technical Support engineer can use the Technical Support role to
display internal memory and on-disk data structures using trace output,
consistency checking, and patching data structures. This role is used for
analyzing problems and manually recovering data. Some actions necessary for
resolving these issues may require additional system roles for access. Sybase
recommends that the system security officer grant this role to a knowledgeable
Sybase engineer only while this analysis or repair is being done.
Replication role
The user maintaining Replication Server and ASE Replicator requires the
replication role. See the Replication Server Administration Guide and the ASE
Replicator Users Guide for information about this role.
Distributed Transaction Manager role

The distributed transaction manager (DTM) transaction coordinator uses this
role to allow system stored procedures to administer transactions across
servers. Clients using the DTM XA interface require this role. See Using
Adaptive Server Distributed Transaction Management Features.
High availability role

You must have the high availability role to configure the high availability
subsystem to administer primary and companion servers through commands
and stored procedures. See Using Sybase Failover in a High Availability
System.

Monitoring and diagnosis

This role is required to administer the Adaptive Server monitoring tables. You
must have this role to execute a monitoring table remote procedure call and to
administer the collection of monitored data. See the Performance and Tuning
Series: Monitoring Tables.
Job Scheduler roles

The Job Scheduler has three system roles to manage permissions for its
operation:
• js_admin_role – required to administer Job Scheduler, and provides access
to the stored procedures and allow you to modify, delete, and perform Job
Scheduler administrative operations.
• js_user_role – required for a user to create, modify, delete, and run
scheduled jobs using the Job Scheduler stored procedures.
• js_client_role – allows users to work with predefined jobs but not to create
or alter jobs.
See the Job Scheduler Users Guide for more information.
Real-time messaging role

Used by the real-time messaging subsystem (RTMS) execute msgsend,
msgrecv, and certain sp_msgadmin commands. See the Messaging Services
User’s Guide for more information.
Web Services role

Used by the Web services subsystem to execute create service, create existing
service, drop service, and alter service commands. See the Web Services Users
Guide.

Key custodian role

The key custodian role is responsible for key management: creating and
altering encryption keys, setting up the system encryption password, setting up
key copies for users, and so on. See the Encrypted Columns Users Guide.
User-defined roles
Planning user-defined roles

Before you implement user-defined roles, decide:
• The roles you want to create
• The responsibilities for each role
• The position of each in the role hierarchy
• Which roles in the hierarchy are mutually exclusive and if so, at the
membership or activation level
Avoid name conflicts when you create user-defined roles by following a
naming convention. For example, you can use the “_role” suffix for role
names. Adaptive Server does not check for such restrictions.
User-defined role names cannot duplicate user names. If a role must have the
same name as a user, avoid conflict by creating a new role, having it contain
the original role, and then granting the new role to the user.
After you have planned the roles to create and the relationships among them,
decide how to allocate roles according to business requirements and the
responsibilities of your users.
The maximum number of roles that a user can activate per user session is 127.
The minimum number of roles, 15, includes the system roles included with
Adaptive Server.
The maximum number of user-defined roles that can be activated server-wide
is 992. The first 32 roles are reserved for Sybase system roles.
Creating a user-defined role

Use the create role command to create a role. The syntax is:

create role role_name [with passwd "password"

[, {passwd expiration | min passwd length |
max failed_logins } option_value ]]
where:
• role_name – name of the new role.
• password – optional password. Must be specified by any user that is using
the role.
• passwd expiration – specifies the password expiration interval, in days. It
can be any value between 0 and 32767, inclusive.
• min passwd length – specifies the minimum password length required for
the specified role.
• max failed_logins – specifies the number of allowable failed login
attempts for the specified login.
• option_value – specifies the value for passwd expiration, min passwd
length, or max failed_logins.
For example, to create the intern_role without a password, enter:
create role intern_role
To create the doctor_role and assign the password “physician”, enter:
create role doctor_role with passwd "physician"
Only the system security officer can create user-defined roles.
Adding and removing passwords from a role

Only a system security officer can add or drop a password from a role.
Use the alter role command to add or drop a password from either a system or
user-defined role.:
alter role role_name
[add passwd password | drop passwd]
For example, to require the password “oper8x” for the oper_role, enter:
alter role oper_role add passwd oper8x
To drop the password from the role, enter:
alter role oper_role drop passwd

Role hierarchies and mutual exclusivity

A system security officer can define role hierarchies such that if a user has one
role, the user also has roles lower in the hierarchy. For example, the
“chief_financial_officer” role might contain both the “financial_analyst” and
the “salary_administrator” roles.
The chief financial officer can perform all tasks and see all data that can be
viewed by salary administrators and financial analysts.
Additionally, you can define a role’s mutual exclusivity to enforce static or
dynamic separation of duty policies. Roles can be defined to be mutually
exclusive for:
• Membership – one user cannot be granted two different roles. For
example, you might not want the “payment_requestor” and
“payment_approver” roles to be granted to the same user.
• Activation – one user cannot activate, or enable, two different roles. For
example, a user might be granted both the “senior_auditor” and the
“equipment_buyer” roles, but not permitted to have both roles enabled at
the same time.
System roles, as well as user-defined roles, can be defined to be in a role
hierarchy, or to be mutually exclusive. For example, you might want a
“super_user” role to contain the system administrator, operator, and Technical
Support roles. To enforce a separation of roles, you may want to define the
system administrator and system security officer roles to be mutually exclusive
for membership; that is, one user cannot be granted both roles.
Role hierarchies and mutual exclusivity

This section describes how to set up role hierarchies and enforce a separation
of roles.
Defining and changing mutual exclusivity of roles

To define mutual exclusivity between two roles, use:
alter role role1 { add | drop } exclusive { membership | activation } role2
For example, to define intern_role and specialist_role as mutually exclusive at
the membership level, enter:
alter role intern_role add exclusive membership
specialist_role

The example above restricts users who have membership in intern_role from
also being members of specialist_role.
To define the sso_role and sa_role as mutually exclusive at the activation level,
enter the following command, which prohibits a user who is a member of
sso_role and sa_role from assuming both roles simultaneously:
alter role sso_role add exclusive activation sa_role
Defining and changing a role hierarchy

Defining a role hierarchy involves choosing the type of hierarchy and the roles,
then implementing the hierarchy by granting roles to other roles.
For example:
grant role intern_role to specialist_role
grant role doctor_role to specialist_role
This grants to “specialist” all the privileges of both “doctor” and “intern.”
To establish a hierarchy with a “super_user” role containing the sa_role and
oper_role system roles, specify:
grant role sa_role to super_user
grant role oper_role to super_user
Note If a role requires a password to be contained within another role, the user
with the role that contains the other does not need to use the password for the
contained role. In the example above, assume that the “doctor” role usually
requires a password. The user who has the “specialist” role does not need to
enter the “doctor” password because “doctor” is contained within “specialist.”
Role passwords are only required for the highest level role.
When creating role hierarchies:

• You cannot grant a role to another role that directly contains it. This
prevents duplication.
In the example above, you cannot grant “doctor” to “specialist” because
“specialist” already contains “doctor.”
• You can grant a role to another role that does not directly contain it.

For example, in Figure 14-2, you can grant the “intern” role to the
“specialist” role, even though “specialist” already contains the “doctor”
role, which contains “intern.” If you subsequently dropped “doctor” from
“specialist,” then “specialist” still contains “intern.”
In Figure 14-2, “doctor” has “consultant” role permissions because
“consultant” has been granted to “doctor.” The “specialist” role also has
“consultant” role permissions because “specialist” contains the “doctor”
role, which in turn contains the “consultant.”
However, “intern” does not have “consultant” role privileges, because
“intern” does not contain the “consultant” role, either directly or indirectly.
Figure 14-2: Explicitly and implicitly granted privileges
specialist
doctor
consultant intern
• You cannot grant a role to another role that is contained by the first role.
This prevents “loops” within the hierarchy.
For example, in Figure 14-3, you cannot grant the “specialist” role to the
“consultant” role; “consultant” is already contained in “specialist.”
Figure 14-3: Granting a role to a role contained by grantor
NOT ALLOWED
specialist
doctor
consultant intern
• When the system security officer grants to a user a role that contains other
roles, the user implicitly gets membership in all roles contained by the
granted role. However, a role can be activated or deactivated directly only
if the user has explicit membership in that role.
• The system security officer cannot grant one role to another role that is
explicitly or implicitly mutually exclusive at the membership level with
the first role.

For example, in Figure 14-4, if the “intern” role is defined as mutually

exclusive at the membership level with the “consultant” role, the system
security officer cannot grant “intern” to the “doctor.”
Figure 14-4: Mutual exclusivity at membership
specialist
doctor
consultant
intern
• The user can activate or deactivate only directly granted roles.

For example, in the hierarchy shown in Figure 14-4, assume that you have
been granted the “specialist” role. You have all the permissions of the
“specialist” role, and, implicitly, because of the hierarchy, you have all the
permissions of the “doctor” and “consultant” roles. However, you can
activate only the “specialist” role. You cannot activate “doctor” or
“consultant” because they were not directly granted to you. See
“Activating and deactivating roles” on page 419.
Revoking roles from other roles is similar to granting roles to other roles.
It removes a containment relationship, and the containment relationship
must be a direct one.
For example:
• If the system security officer revokes the “doctor” role from “specialist,”
“specialist” no longer contains the “consultant” role or the “intern” role.
• The system security officer cannot revoke the “intern” role from
“specialist” because “intern” is not directly contained by “specialist.”
Setting up default activation at login

A system security officer can change the default role for any user. Individual
users can change only their own default settings.

When a user logs in to Adaptive Server, the user’s roles are not necessarily
active, depending upon how the role is set up as a default role. If a role has a
password associated with it, the user must use the set role command to activate
the role.
The system security officer or user determines whether to activate any roles
granted by default at login. sp_modifylogin sets the default status of user roles
individually for each user. sp_modifylogin only affects user roles, not system
roles.
By default, user-defined roles that are granted are not activated at login, but
system roles that are granted are automatically activated, if they do not have
passwords associated with them.
To set up a role to activate at login:
sp_modifylogin loginname, "add default role", role_name
To assign more than one default role to a user, use multiple sp_modifylogin
commands.
To ensure that a role is inactive at login:
sp_modifylogin loginname, "drop default role", role_name
For example, to change the default setting for Ralph’s intern_role to be active
automatically at login, execute:
sp_modifylogin ralph, "add default role", intern_role
Activating and deactivating roles

Roles must be active to have the access privileges of each role. A default role
cannot be active at login. If the role has a password, it is always inactive at
login.
To immediately activate or deactivate a role:
set role role_name [on|off]
To activate or deactivate a role that has an attached password, use:
set role role_name with passwd "password" [on|off]
For example, to activate the “financial_analyst” role with the password
“sailing19”, enter:
set role financial_analyst with passwd "sailing19" on

Setting up groups and adding users
Activate roles only when you need them, and turn them off when you no longer
need them. For example, when the sa_role is active, you assume the identity of
database owner within any database that you use. To turn off the system
administrator role and assume your “real” user identity, use:
set role sa_role off
If you are granted a role during a session, and you want to activate it
immediately, use set role to turn it on.
Setting up groups and adding users

The system security officer, the system administrator, or the database
administrator creates a group using sp_addgroup group_name.
You can grant and revoke permissions at the group level. Group permissions
are automatically passed to group members. Every database is created with a
group named “public” to which all users automatically belong. Add a user to a
group using sp_adduser and change a user’s group with sp_changegroup. See
“Changing a user’s group membership” on page 427.
Groups are represented by an entry in the sysusers table. You cannot use the
same name for creating a group and a user in the database (for example, you
cannot have both a group and a user named “shirley”).
Dropping users, groups, and user-defined roles

A system administrator, system security officer, or database owner can use
sp_dropuser or sp_dropgroup to drop users and groups from databases.
Dropping users
A database owner, system security officer, or a system administrator can use
sp_dropuser to deny an Adaptive Server user access to the database in which
sp_dropuser is executed. (If a “guest” user is defined in that database, the user
can still access that database as “guest.”)

The following is the syntax, where name_in_db is usually the login name,
unless another name has been assigned with sp_adduser:
sp_dropuser name_in_db
You cannot drop a user who owns objects. Since there is no command to
transfer ownership of objects, you must drop objects owned by a user before
you drop the user. To deny access to a user who owns objects, use sp_locklogin
to lock his or her account.
You also cannot drop a user who has granted permissions to other users. Use
revoke with cascade to revoke permissions from all users who were granted
permissions by the user to be dropped, then drop the user. You must then grant
permissions to the users again, if appropriate.
Dropping groups
The system security officer, the system administrator, or the database
administrator uses sp_dropgroup to drop a group. The syntax is:
sp_dropgroup grpname
You cannot drop a group that has members. If you try to do so, the error report
displays a list of the members of the group you are attempting to drop. To
remove users from a group, use sp_changegroup, discussed in “Changing a
user’s group membership” on page 427.
Dropping user-defined roles

To drop a role, the system security officer uses the following, where role_name
is the name of a user-defined role:
drop role role_name [with override]
with override revokes all access privileges granted to the role in every database
server-wide.
If you do not use the override option, you must revoke all privileges granted to
the role in all databases before you can drop the role. If you do not, the
command fails. To revoke privileges, use the revoke command
You need not drop memberships before dropping a role. Dropping a role
automatically removes any user’s membership in that role, regardless of
whether you use the with override option.

Locking or dropping Adaptive Server login accounts
Locking or dropping Adaptive Server login accounts

To prevent a user from logging in to Adaptive Server, you can either lock or
drop an Adaptive Server login account. Locking a login account maintains the
suid so that it cannot be reused.
Warning! Adaptive Server may reuse the server user ID (suid) of a dropped
login account when the next login account is created. This occurs only when
the dropped login holds the highest suid in syslogins; however, it can
compromise accountability if execution of sp_droplogin is not being audited.
Also, it is possible for a user with the reused suid to access database objects that
were authorized for the old suid.
You cannot drop a login when:

• The user is in any database.
• The login is the last remaining user who holds the system security officer
or system administrator roles.
The system security officer can lock or drop a login using sp_locklogin or
sp_droplogin. If the system procedure is being logged for replication, the
system security officer must be in the master database when issuing the
command.
Locking and unlocking login accounts

Use sp_locklogin to lock and unlock accounts or to display a list of locked
accounts. You must be a system security officer to use sp_locklogin.
The syntax is:
sp_locklogin [ {login_name | "all"}, { "lock" | "unlock" } ]
where:
• login_name is the name of the account to be locked or unlocked. The login
name must be an existing valid account.
• all indicates to lock or unlock all login accounts on an Adaptive Server,
except those with sa_role.
• lock | unlock specifies whether the account is to be locked or unlocked.
To display a list of all locked logins, use sp_locklogin with no parameters.

You can lock an account that is currently logged in, and the user is not locked
out of the account until he or she logs out. You can lock the account of a
database owner, and a locked account can own objects in databases. In
addition, you can use sp_changedbowner to specify a locked account as the
owner of a database.
Adaptive Server ensures that there is always at least one unlocked system
security officer’s account and one unlocked system administrator’s account.
Dropping login accounts

A system security officer can use sp_droplogin to deny a user access to
Adaptive Server. The syntax is:
sp_droplogin login_name
sp_droplogin fails if the user identified by login_name exists as a database user
or alias in any database. Use sp_dropuser to drop the user from a database. See
“Dropping users” on page 420.
Locking logins that own thresholds

This section discusses thresholds and how they are affected by locked user
logins.
• As a security measure, threshold stored procedures are executed using the
account name and roles of the login that created the procedure.
• You cannot drop the login of a user who owns a threshold.
• If you lock the login of a user who owns a threshold, the user cannot
execute the stored procedure.
• The last-chance threshold, and thresholds created by the “sa” login are not
affected by sp_locklogin. If you lock the “sa” login, the last chance
threshold and thresholds created or modified by the “sa” user still fire.
Changing user information

Table 14-5 lists the system procedures you use to change passwords, default
database, default language, full name, or group assignment.

Table 14-5: System procedures for changing user information

Task Required role System procedure Database
Change your password None sp_password Any database
Change another user’s password System security officer sp_password Any database
Change authentication mechanism System security officer sp_modifylogin Any database
Change your default database, default None sp_modifylogin Any database
language, or full name
Change a login account’s default database, System administrator or sp_modifylogin Any database
default language, or full name system security officer
Change the group assignment of a user System administrator, sp_changegroup User database
database owner, or
system security officer
Changing passwords
All users can change their passwords at any time using sp_password. The
system security officer can use sp_password to change any user’s password.
See the Reference Manual: Procedures for the sp_password syntax.
For example, a user can change his or her own password from “3blindmice” to
“2mediumhot” using:
sp_password "3blindmice", "2mediumhot"
These passwords are enclosed in quotes because they begin with numbers.
In the following example, the system security officer whose password is
“2tomato” changes Victoria’s password to “sesame1”:
sp_password "2tomato", sesame1, victoria
Requiring new passwords

You may choose to use the systemwide password expiration configuration
parameter to establish a password expiration interval, which forces all
Adaptive Server users to change their passwords on a regular basis. See
Chapter 5, “Setting Configuration Parameters.” Even if you do not use
systemwide password expiration, it is important, for security reasons, that users
change their passwords periodically.
The configuration parameter is superseded by the password policy settings.

password expiration interval specifies the password expiration interval in days.

It can be any value between 0 and 32767, inclusive. For example, if you create
a new login on August 1, 2007 at 10:30 a.m., with a password expiration
interval of 30 days, the password expires on August 31, 2007 at 10:30 a.m.
The column pwdate in the syslogins table records the date of the last password
change. The following query selects all login names whose passwords have not
changed since September 15, 2007:
select name, pwdate
from syslogins
where pwdate < "Sep 15 2007"
Null passwords
Do not assign a null password. When Adaptive Server is installed, the default
“sa” account has a null password. The following example shows how to change
a null password to a valid one:
sp_password null, "8M4LNCH"
Note Do not enclose “null” in quotes in the statement.
Logging in after lost password

You can use dataserver -plogin_name if your site encounters any of these
situations:
• All system administrator login accounts are locked.
• All system security officer login accounts are locked.
• The password for sa_role or sso_role has been lost.
The dataserver parameter, with the -p parameter allows you to set a new
password for these accounts and roles. login_name is the name of the user or
the name of the role (sa_role or sso_role) for which the password must be reset.
When you start with the -p parameter, Adaptive Server generates, displays, and
encrypts a random password and saves it in master..syslogins or in
master..syssrvroles as that account or role’s new password.
Sybase strongly recommends that you change the password when the server
restarts. For example, to reset the password for user rsmith who has sa_role:
dataserver -prsmith

To reset the password of the sso_role:

dataserver -psso_role
Changing user defaults

Any user can use sp_modifylogin to change his or her full name, default
authentication method, default database, default language, and default role.
Use sp_modifylogin to set password length and expiration, to limit failed login
attempts, and to specify that a login script be run automatically when a user
logs in. A system administrator can change these settings for any user. The
syntax is:
sp_modifylogin login_name, option, value
where:
• login_name – is the name of the user whose account you are modifying.
• option – specifies the option that you are changing. See sp_modifylogin in
the Reference Manual: Procedures for a list of available options.
• value – is the new value for the specified option.
After you execute sp_modifylogin to change the default database, the user is
connected to the new default database the next time he or she logs in. However,
sp_modifylogin does not automatically give the user access to the database.
Unless the database owner has set up access with sp_adduser, sp_addalias, or
with a guest user mechanism, the user is connected to master even after his or
her default database has been changed.
This example changes the default database for “anna” to pubs2:
sp_modifylogin anna, defdb, pubs2
This example changes the default language for “claire” to French:
sp_modifylogin claire, deflanguage, french
This example changes the full name for “mtwain” to “Samuel Clemens.”
sp_modifylogin mtwain, fullname, "Samuel Clemens"

Changing a user’s group membership

A system administrator, system security officer, or the database owner can use
sp_changegroup to change a user’s group affiliation. Each user can be a
member of only one group other than “public,” of which all users are always
members.
Before you execute sp_changegroup:
• The group must exist.
• The user must have access to the current database (must be listed in
sysusers).
The syntax for sp_changegroup is:

sp_changegroup grpname, username
For example, to change the user “jim” from his current group to the group
“management,” use:
sp_changegroup management, jim
To remove a user from a group without assigning the user to another group, you
must change the group affiliation to “public”:
sp_changegroup "public", jim
The name “public” must be in quotes because it is a reserved word. This
command reduces Jim’s group affiliation to “public” only.
When a user changes from one group to another, the user loses all permissions
that he or she had as a result of belonging to the old group, but gains the
permissions granted to the new group.
The assignment of users into groups can be changed at any time.
Changing user process information

The set command includes options that allow you to assign each client an
individual name, host name, and application name. This is useful for
differentiating among clients in a system where many clients connect to
Adaptive Server using the same name, host name, or application name.
The partial syntax for the set command is:
set [clientname client_name | clienthostname host_name |
clientapplname application_name]

Where client_name is the name you are assigning the client, host_name is the
name of the host from which the client is connecting, and application_name is
the application that is connecting to Adaptive Server. These parameters are
stored in the clientname, clienthostname, and clientapplname columns of the
sysprocesses table.
For example, if a user logs in to Adaptive Server as “client1,” you can assign
them an individual client name, host name, and application name using
commands similar to:
set clientname 'alison'
set clienthostname 'money1'
set clientapplname 'webserver2'
This user now appears in the sysprocesses table as user “alison” logging in
from host “money1” and using the “webserver2” application. However,
although the new names appear in sysprocesses, they are not used for
permission checks, and sp_who still shows the client connection as belonging
to the original login (in the case above, client1). set clientname does not
perform the same function as set proxy, which allows you to assume the
permissions, login name, and suid of another user.
You can set a client name, host name, or application name for only your current
client session (although you can view the connection information for any client
connection). Also, this information is lost when a user logs out. These
parameters must be reassigned each time a user logs in. For example, the user
“alison” cannot set the client name, host name, or application name for any
other client connection.
Use the client’s system process ID to view their connection information. For
example, if the user “alison” described above connects with a spid of 13, issue
the following command to view all the connection information for this user:
select * from sysprocesses where spid = 13
To view the connection information for the current client connection (for
example, if the user “alison” wanted to view her own connection information),
enter:
select * from sysprocesses where spid = @@spid

Using aliases in databases

The alias mechanism allows you to treat two or more users as the same user
inside a database so that they all have the same privileges. This mechanism is
often used so that more than one user can assume the role of database owner.
A database owner can use the setuser command to impersonate another user in
the database. You can also use the alias mechanism to set up a collective user
identity.
For example, suppose that several vice presidents want to use a database with
identical privileges and ownerships. If you add the login “vp” to Adaptive
Server and the database and have each vice president log in as “vp,” there is no
way to tell the individual users apart. Instead, alias all the vice presidents, each
of whom has his or her own Adaptive Server account, to the database user
name “vp.”
Note Although more than one individual can use the alias in a database, you
can still maintain individual accountability by auditing the database operations
performed by each user. See Chapter 18, “Auditing.”
The collective user identity from using aliases implies set-ownership for
database objects. For example, if user “loginA” is aliased to dbo in in database
db1, all objects created by “loginA” in db1 are owned by dbo. However,
Adaptive Server concretely records an object’s ownership in terms of the login
name and the creator’s database user ID. See “Concrete identification” on page
569. An alias cannot be dropped from a database if he or she concretely owns
objects in that database.
Note You cannot drop the alias of a login if that login created objects in the
database. In most cases, use aliases only for users who do not own tables,
procedures, views, or triggers.
Adding aliases
To add an alias for a user, use sp_addalias:
sp_addalias loginame, name_in_db
where:

Using aliases in databases
• loginame – is the name of the user who wants an alias in the current
database. This user must have an account in Adaptive Server but cannot be
a user in the current database.
• name_in_db – is the name of the database user to whom the user specified
by loginame is to be linked. The name_in_db must exist in sysusers in the
current database.
Executing sp_addalias maps the user name specified by loginame to the user
name specified by name_in_db. It does this by adding a row to the system table
sysalternates.
When a user tries to use a database, Adaptive Server checks for the user’s
server user ID number (suid) in sysusers. If it is not found, Adaptive Server
then checks sysalternates. If the user’s suid is found there, and it is mapped to
a database user’s suid, the first user is treated as the second user while the first
user is using the database.
For example, suppose that Mary owns a database. She wants to allow both Jane
and Sarah to use the database as if they were its owner. Jane and Sarah have
logins on Adaptive Server but are not authorized to use Mary’s database. Mary
executes the following commands:
sp_addalias jane, dbo
exec sp_addalias sarah, dbo
Warning! Users who are aliased to the database owner have all the permissions
and can perform all the actions that can be performed by the database owner,
with respect to the database in question. A database owner should carefully
consider the implications of vesting another user with full access to a database.
Dropping aliases
Use sp_dropalias to drop the mapping of an alternate suid to a user ID. Doing
this deletes the relevant row from sysalternates. The syntax is the following,
where loginame is the name of the user specified by loginame when the name
was mapped with sp_addalias:
sp_dropalias loginame
After a user’s alias is dropped, the user no longer has access to the database.

You cannot drop an alias if the aliased login created any objects or thresholds.
Before using sp_dropalias to remove an alias that has performed these actions,
remove the objects or procedures. If you still need them after dropping the
alias, re-create them with a different owner.
Getting information about aliases

To display information about aliases, use sp_helpuser. For example, to find the
aliases for “dbo,” execute:
sp_helpuser dbo
Users_name ID_in_db Group_name Login_name
---------- -------- ---------- ----------
dbo 1 public sa
(1 row affected)
Users aliased to user.
Login_name
----------------------
andy
christa
howard
linda
Getting information about users

Table 14-6 lists procedures you can use to obtain information about users,
groups, and current Adaptive Server usage.

Table 14-6: Reporting information about Adaptive Server users and

groups
Task Procedure
Report current Adaptive Server users and processes sp_who
Display information about login accounts sp_displaylogin
Report users and aliases in a database sp_helpuser
Report groups within a database sp_helpgroup
Reporting on users and processes

Use sp_who to report information about current users and processes on
Adaptive Server:
sp_who [loginame | "spid"]
where:
• loginame – is the user’s Adaptive Server login name. If you provide a
login name, sp_who reports information about processes being run by that
user.
• spid – is the number of a specific process.
For each process run, sp_who reports the security-relevant information for the
server process ID, its status, the login name of the process user, the real login
name (if login_name is an alias), the name of the host computer, the server
process ID of a process that is blocking this one (if any), the name of the
database, and the command being run.
If you do not provide a login name or spid, sp_who reports on processes being
run by all users.
The following example shows the security-relevant results from executing
sp_who without a parameter:
spid status loginame origname hostname blk dbname cmd

---- ------- -------- --------- -------- --- ------ -------------
1 running sa sa sunbird 0 pubs2 SELECT
2 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master NETWORK HANDLER
3 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master MIRROR HANDLER
4 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master AUDIT PROCESS
5 sleeping NULL NULL 0 master CHECKPOINT SLEEP

sp_who reports NULL for the loginame for all system processes.

Getting information about login accounts

Use sp_displaylogin to display information about a specified login account—or
login names matching a wild-card pattern—including any roles granted, where
loginame (or the wildcard matching pattern) is the user login name pattern
about which you want information:
sp_displaylogin [loginame | wildcard]
If you are not a system security officer or system administrator, you can display
information only about your own account. If you are a system security officer
or system administrator, you can use the loginame | wildcard parameter to
access information about any account.
sp_displaylogin displays your server user ID, login name, full name, any roles
that have been granted to you, date of last password change, default database,
default language, whether your account is locked, any auto-login script,
password expiration interval, whether password has expired, the login
password encryption version used, and the authentication mechanism specified
for the login.
sp_displaylogin displays all roles that have been granted to you, so even if you
have made a role inactive with the set command, that role appears. For
example, this displays the roles for the sa:
sp_displaylogin 'sa'
Suid: 121
Loginame: mylogin
Fullname:
Default Database: master
Default Language:
Auto Login Script:
Configured Authorization:
sa_role (default ON)
sso_role (default ON)
oper_role (default ON)
sybase_ts_role (default ON)
Locked: NO
Date of Last Password Change: Aug 10 2006 11:17AM
Password expiration interval: 0
Password expired: NO
Minimum password length: 6
Maximum failed logins: 0
Current failed login attempts:
Authenticate with: NONE
Login password encryption: SYB-PROP, SHA-256
Last login date : Aug 17 2006 5:55PM

(return status = 0)
Getting information about database users

Use sp_helpuser to report information about authorized users of the current
database, where name_in_db is the user’s name in the current database:
sp_helpuser [name_in_db]
If you give a user’s name, sp_helpuser reports information about that user. If
you do not give a name, it reports information about all users.
The following example shows the results of executing sp_helpuser without a
parameter in the database pubs2:
sp_helpuser
Users_name ID_in_db Group_name Login_name
---------- -------- ---------- ----------
dbo 1 public sa
marcy 4 public marcy
sandy 3 public sandy
judy 5 public judy
linda 6 public linda
anne 2 public anne
jim 7 senioreng jim
Finding user names and IDs

To find a user’s server user ID or login name, use suser_id and suser_name.
Table 14-7: System functions suser_id and suser_name
To find Use With the argument
Server user ID suser_id (["server_user_name"])
Server user name (login name) suser_name ([server_user_ID])
The arguments for these system functions are optional. If you do not provide
one, Adaptive Server displays information about the current user.
This example shows how to find the server user ID for the user “sandy:”
select suser_id("sandy")
------
3

This example shows how a system administrator whose login name is “mary”
issues the commands without arguments:
select suser_name(), suser_id()
------------------------------ ------
mary 4
To find a user’s ID number or name inside a database, use user_id and
user_name.
Table 14-8: System functions user_id and user_name
To find Use With the argument
User ID user_id ([“db_user_name”])
User name user_name ([db_user_ID])
The arguments for these functions are optional. If you do not provide one,
Adaptive Server displays information about the current user. For example:
select user_name(10)
----------------------------------------------------
NULL
(1 row affected)
select user_name( )
----------------------------------------------------
dbo
(1 row affected)
select user_id("joe")
----------------------------------------------------
NULL
(1 row affected)
Displaying information about roles

Table 14-9 lists the system procedures and functions to use to find information
about roles.
Table 14-9: Finding information about roles
To display information about Use See
The role ID of a role name role_id system function “Finding role IDs and names” on page
436
The role name of a role ID role_name system “Finding role IDs and names” on page
function 436

To display information about Use See

System roles show_role system function “Viewing active system roles” on page
436
Role hierarchies and roles that have been sp_displayroles system “Displaying a role hierarchy” on page
granted to a user or users procedure 437
Whether one role contains another role in a role_contain system “Viewing user roles in a hierarchy” on
role hierarchy function page 437
Whether two roles are mutually exclusive mut_excl_roles system “Determining mutual exclusivity” on
function page 437
Roles that are active for the current session sp_activeroles system “Determining role activation” on page
procedure 437
Whether you have activated the correct role proc_role system function “Checking for roles in stored
to execute a procedure procedures” on page 438
Logins, including roles that have been sp_displaylogin system “Getting information about login
granted procedure accounts” on page 433
Permissions for a user, group, or role sp_helprotect system “Reporting on permissions” on page
procedure 591
Finding role IDs and names

To find a role ID when you know the role name:
role_id(role_name)
Any user can execute role_id. If the role is valid, role_id returns the server-wide
ID of the role (srid). The syssrvroles system table contains an srid column with
the role ID and a name column with the role name. If the role is not valid,
role_id returns NULL.
To find a role name when you know the role ID, use role_name:
role_name(role_id)
Any user can execute role_name.
Viewing active system roles

Use show_role to display the currently active system roles for the specified
login:
show_role()
If you have not activated any system role, show_role returns NULL. If you are
a database owner, and you execute show_role after using setuser to impersonate
another user, show_role returns your own active system roles, not those for
whom you are impersonating.

Any user can execute show_role.
Note The show_role function does not include information about user-defined
roles.
Displaying a role hierarchy

You can use sp_displayroles to see all roles granted to your login name or see
the entire hierarchy tree of roles displayed in table format:
sp_displayroles {login_name | rolename [, expand_up | expand_down]}
Any user can execute sp_displayroles to see his or her own roles. Only the
system security officer can view information about roles granted to other users.
Viewing user roles in a hierarchy

Use role_contain to determine whether any role you specify contains any other
role you specify:
role_contain (["role1", "role2"])
If role1 is contained by role2, role_contain returns 1.
Any user can execute role_contain.
Determining mutual exclusivity

Use the mut_excl_roles function to determine whether any two roles assigned
to you are mutually exclusive, and the level at which they are mutually
exclusive:
mut_excl_roles(role1, role2, {membership | activation})
Any user can execute mut_excl_roles. If the specified roles, or any role
contained by either specified role, are mutually exclusive, mut_excl_roles
returns 1; if the roles are not mutually exclusive, mut_excl_roles returns 0.
Determining role activation

To find all active roles for the current login session of Adaptive Server, use:
sp_activeroles [expand_down]
expand_down displays the hierarchy of all roles contained by any roles granted
to you.

Establishing a password and login policy
Any user can execute sp_activeroles.
Checking for roles in stored procedures

Use proc_role within a stored procedure to guarantee that only users with a
specific role can execute the procedure. Only proc_role provides a fail-safe way
to prevent inappropriate access to a particular stored procedure.
You can use grant execute to grant execute permission on a stored procedure to
all users who have been granted a specified role. Similarly, revoke execute
removes this permission.
However, grant execute permission does not prevent users who do not have the
specified role from being granted execute permission on a stored procedure. To
ensure, for example, that all users who are not system administrators can never
be granted permission to execute a stored procedure, use proc_role within the
stored procedure itself to check whether the invoking user has the correct role
to execute the procedure.
proc_role takes a string for the required role and returns 1 if the invoker
possesses it. Otherwise, it returns 0.
For example, here is a procedure that uses proc_role to see if the user has the
sa_role role:
create proc test_proc
as
if (proc_role("sa_role") = 0)
begin
print "You don’t have the right role"
return -1
end
else
print "You have System Administrator role"
return 0

Adaptive Server includes several controls for setting policies for logins, roles,
and passwords for internal authentication.
In Adaptive Server, the system security officer can:

• Specify the maximum allowable number of times an invalid password can

be entered for a login or role before that login or role is automatically
locked
• Log in after a lost password
• Manually log and unlock logins and roles
• Display login password information
• Specify the minimum password length required server-wide, or for a
specific login or role
• Check for password complexity of logins
• Enable custom password checks of logins
• Set the password expiration interval
• Secure login passwords stored on a disk and in memory
• Use only the SHA-256 algorithm for storing passwords on disk
• Consider login password character set
• Perform upgrade and downgrade behavior
• Lock inactive login accounts
• Use passwords in a high availability environment
Setting and changing the maximum login attempts

Setting the maximum number of login attempts allowed provides protection
against “brute-force” or dictionary-based attempts to guess passwords. A
system security officer can specify a maximum number of consecutive login
attempts allowed, after which the login or role is automatically locked. The
number of allowable failed login attempts can be set for the entire server, or for
individual logins and roles. Individual settings override the server-wide
setting.
The number of failed logins is stored in the logincount column in
master..syslogins. A successful login resets the number of failed logins to 0.
❖ Setting the server-wide maximum failed logins

• By default, maximum failed logins is turned off and this check is not applied
to passwords. Use sp_passwordpolicy to set server-wide maximum number
of failed logins for logins and roles.

To set the number of failed logins allowed, enter:

sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'maximum failed logins', number
See sp_passwordpolicy in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Setting the maximum failed logins for specific logins

• To set the maximum failed logins for a specific login at creation, use
sp_addlogin.
This example creates the new login “joe” with the password “Djdiek3”
and sets the maximum number of failed login attempts for the login “joe”
to 2:
sp_addlogin joe, "Djdiek3", pubs2, null, null, null,
null, 2
See sp_addlogin in Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Setting the maximum failed logins for specific roles

• To set the maximum failed logins for a specific role at creation, use create
role.
This example creates the intern_role role with the password “temp244”,
and sets the maximum failed logins for intern_role to 20:
create role intern_role with passwd "temp244",
maximum failed logins 20
See create role Reference Manual: Commands.
❖ Changing the maximum failed logins for specific logins

• Use sp_modifylogin to set or change the maximum failed logins for an
existing login.
Changes the maximum failed logins for the login “joe” to 40:
sp_modifylogin "joe", "max failed_logins", "40"

sp_modifylogin only effects user roles, not system roles. For details on the
syntax and rules, see sp_modifylogin.
See sp_modifylogin in Reference Manual: Procedures.

❖ Changing the maximum failed logins for specific roles

• Use alter role to set or change the maximum failed logins for an existing role.
Example 1 Changes the maximum failed logins allowed for physician_role
to 5:
alter role "all overrides" set maximum failed logins -1
Example 2 Removes the overrides for the maximum failed logins for all
roles:
alter role physician_role set maximum failed logins 5
For details on the syntax and rules for using maximum failed logins, see alter
role.
Logging in after losing a password

Use the dataserver -plogin_name parameter to specify the name of the system
security officer or system administrator at the server start-up. This allows you
to set a new password for these account if there is no way to recover a lost
password.
When you start with the -p parameter, Adaptive Server generates, displays, and
encrypts a random password and saves it in master..syslogins as that account’s
new password.
You can use dataserver -p to reset the password for sa_role and sso_role. Use
dataserver -p when you have lost the password for either of these roles, that
require a password to become active.
For example, if the server is started with:
dataserver -psa_role
Adaptive Server displays this message:
New password for role 'sa_role' : qjcdyrbfkxgyc0
If sa_role does not have a password, and it is started with -psa_role, Adaptive
Server prints an error message in the error log.
Sybase strongly recommends that you change the password for the login or role
when the server restarts.

Locking and unlocking logins and roles

A login or role can be locked when:
• Its password expires, or
• The maximum number of failed login attempts occur, or
• The system security officer manually locks it.
❖ Locking and unlocking logins

• The system security officer can use sp_locklogin to lock or unlock a login
manually.
For example:
sp_locklogin "joe" , "lock"
sp_locklogin "joe" , "unlock"
Information about the lock status of a login is stored in the status column
of syslogins.
See sp_locklogin in Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Locking and unlocking roles

• The system security officer can use alter role to lock or unlock a role
manually.
For example:
alter role physician_role lock
alter role physician_role unlock
Information about the lock status of a role is stored in the status column of
syssrvroles.
See alter role Reference Manual: Commands.
❖ Unlocking logins and roles at server start-up

• Automatic login lockouts can cause a site to end up in a situation where all
accounts capable of unlocking logins (system administrators and system
security officers) are locked. Use the -u flag with the dataserver utility to
unlock a specific login or role when you start Adaptive Server.
See dataserver in the Utility Guide.

Displaying password information

This section discusses how to display password information for logins and
roles.
❖ Displaying password information for specific logins

• Use sp_displaylogin to display the password settings for a login.
This example displays information about the login joe:
sp_displaylogin joe
Suid: 3
Loginame: joe
Fullname:
Default Language:
Auto Login Script:
Locked: NO
Date of Last Password Change: Sep 22 2008 3:50PM
Current failed login attempts: 2
Authenticate with: ANY
Login Password Encryption: SHA-256
Last login date: Sep 18 2008 10:48PM
See sp_displaylogin in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Displaying password information for specific roles

• Use sp_displayroles to display the password settings for a role.
This example displays information about the physician_role role:
sp_displayroles physician_role, "display_info"
Role name = physician_role
Locked : NO
Date of Last Password Change : Nov 24 1997 3:35PM
Password expiration interval = 5
Password expired : NO
Minimum password length = 4
Maximum failed logins = 10
Current failed logins = 3
See sp_displayroles in the Reference Manual: Procedures.

Checking passwords for at least one digit

The system security officer can instruct the server to check for at least one digit
in a password using the server-wide configuration parameter, check password
for digit. If set, this parameter does not affect existing passwords. By default,
checking for digits is off.
This example activates the check password functionality:
sp_configure "check password for digit", 1
This deactivates the check password functionality:
sp_configure "check password for digit", 0
See sp_configure in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Setting and changing minimum password length

The configurable password allows you to customize passwords to fit your
needs such as using four-digit personal identification numbers (PINs) or
anonymous logins with NULL passwords.
Note Adaptive Server uses a default value of 6 for minimum password length.
Sybase recommends that you use a value of 6 or more for this parameter.
The system security officer can specify:

• A globally enforced minimum password length
• A per-login or per-role minimum password length
The per-login or per-role value overrides the server-wide value. Setting
minimum password length affects only new passwords created after setting the
value.
❖ Setting minimum password length for a specific login

• To set the minimum password length for a specific login at creation, use
sp_addlogin.
This example creates the new login “joe” with the password “Djdiek3”,
and sets the minimum password length for “joe” to 8:
sp_addlogin joe, "Djdiek3", @minpwdlen=8

For details on the syntax and rules for using minimum password length, see
sp_addlogin in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Setting minimum password length for a specific role

• To set the minimum password length for a specific role at creation, use
create role.
This example creates the new role intern_role with the password
“temp244” and sets minimum password length for intern_role to 0:
create role intern_role with passwd "temp244", min
passwd length 0
The original password is seven characters, but the password can be
changed to one of any length because minimum password length is set to 0.
See create role in the Reference Manual: Commands.
❖ Changing minimum password length for a specific login

• Use sp_modifylogin to set or change minimum password length for an
existing login. sp_modifylogin effects only user roles, not system roles.
Example 1 Changes minimum password length for the login “joe” to 8
characters.
sp_modifylogin "joe", @option="min passwd length",
@value="8"

Example 2 Changes the value of the overrides for minimum password

length for all logins to eight characters.
sp_modifylogin "all overrides", @option="min passwd
length", @value="8"
Example 3 Removes the overrides for the minimum password length for
all logins.
sp_modifylogin "all overrides", "min passwd length",
@value="-2"
See sp_modifylogin in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
❖ Changing minimum password length for a specific role

• Use alter role to set or change minimum password length for an existing role.

Example 1 Sets the minimum length for physician_role, an existing role,

to 5 characters:
alter role physician_role set min passwd length 5
Example 2 Overrides the minimum password length for all roles:
alter role "all overrides" set min passwd length -1
See alter role in the Reference Manual: Commands.
Password complexity checks

You can use these options, which support password complexity checks, in a
stored procedure interface; their values are stored in the
master.dbo.sysattributes table.
To turn off an individual option, enter:

sp_passwordpolicy 'clear', option
To turn off all password policy options, enter:
sp_passwordpolicy 'clear'
See the Reference Manual: Procedures for the complete sp_passwordpolicy
syntax.
Disallowing simple passwords

disallow simple password checks to see if the password contains the login name
as a substring. You can set it to:
• 0 – (default) turns off the option, and allows simple passwords.
• 1 – turns the option on, and disallows simple passwords.
To set this option, enter:
sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'disallow simple passwords', 1
When you disallow simple passwords, you cannot use your login name as a
substring in your password. You must set it to something complex. For
example:
sp_password 'old_complex_password', BHotAcha789, johnd
The login johnd now has a password of BHotAcha789, which does not
contain the login name as a substring.

However, if you change the login password entering the following, the login
johnd is now a substring of the new password johnd123, and the command
fails:
sp_password 'old_complex_password', johnd123, johnd
Custom password-complexity checks

Adaptive Server allows you to custom-configure password checking rules
using sp_extrapwdchecks and sp_cleanpwdchecks.
These stored procedures are defined and located in the master database and are
automatically invoked during Adaptive Server password complexity checks,
and when dropping a login, respectively. See “Enabling custom password
checks” on page 452 for an example of how to create these custom stored
procedures.
Specifying characters in a password

Use these sp_passwordpolicy parameters to specify the minimum number of
characters (digits, upper and lower characters, and so on) in a password:
• min digits in password – the minimum number of digits in a password.
Disabled by default. Valid values are:
• 0 through 16 – the minimum number of digits that must exist in a
password.
• -1 – the password cannot contain digits.
• min alpha in password – the minimum number of alphabetic characters
allowed in a password. This value must be at least the sum of minimum
number of uppercase characters and minimum number of lowercase
characters. Disabled by default. Valid values are:
• 0 through 16 – the minimum number of special characters required for
a password.
• -1 – the password cannot contain special characters.
• min special char in password – the minimum number of special characters
for a password. Valid values are:
• 0 through 16 – the minimum number of special characters required for
a password.
• -1 – the password cannot contain special characters.

• min upper char in password – the minimum number of uppercase letters for
a password. Disabled by default. Valid values are:
• 0 through 16 – the number of uppercase letters required for a
password.
• -1 – the password cannot contain uppercase characters.
• min lower char in password – the minimum number of lowercase letters for
a password. Valid values are:
• 0 through 16 – the number of uppercase letters required for a
password.
• -1 – the password cannot contain uppercase characters.
• minimum password length – the minimum password length. You can set a
minimum password length from 0 to 30. The value you specify with must
be at least the sum of all other minimum requirements. For example,
minimum password length must be set to at least 10 if you have set:
• minimum digits in password to 3
• minimum special characters in password to 2
• minimum uppercase characters in password to 2
• minimum lowercase characters in password to 3
• password expiration – the number of days a password can exist before it

expires. You specify this value on a global basis. Disabled by default.
Valid values are:
• 0 – the password will never expire.
• 1 through 32767 – the number of days the password can exist without
expiring.
• password exp warn interval – the number of days before a password expires
that the password expiration warning messages displays. These messages
display with every successful login until the password is changed or it
expires. This value must be less than or equal to the password expiration.
Disabled by default.
Valid values are 0 to 365.
• maximum failed logins – the maximum number of failed logins that can
occur before the login is locked. Specify this value globally. Disabled by
default. Valid values are:

• 0 – logins are never locked, regardless of the number of failed login

attempts.
• 1 through 32767 – the number of failed logins that can occur before
the login is locked.
• expire login changes the login status to expired when a system security
officer creates or resets a login. The login is then required to change the
password on the first login. Disabled by default. Valid values are:
• 0 – new or reset logins will not expire.
• 1 – new or reset logins expire; you must reset your password at the
first login.
See sp_passwordpolicy in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Password complexity option cross-checks

Some password complexity options have interaction implications:
• minimum password length must be at least the sum of min digits in password,
min alpha in password, and min special characters in password.
• min alpha in password must be at least the sum of min upper char in
password and min lower char in password.
• systemwide password expiration must be greater than password exp warn

interval.
For the purpose of the above cross-checks, if Adaptive Server encounters a

password complexity option value of -1, it interprets that as a value of 0. If an
option is not set, Adaptive Server interprets the option value to be 0 as well.
Adaptive Server prints warnings for each new password complexity option that
fails to satisfy the cross-checks. Option setting, however, is successful.
Setting password complexity checks

Table 14-10: Password complexity checks
Password checks and Configuration Password complexity Per-login overrides
policies for Adaptive parameters specified options specified using specified using
Server authentication using sp_configure sp_passwordpolicy sp_modifylogin
Password expiration system-wide password system-wide password password expiration
expiration expiration
Digits in password check password for digit min digits in password N/A

Password checks and Configuration Password complexity Per-login overrides

policies for Adaptive parameters specified options specified using specified using
Server authentication using sp_configure sp_passwordpolicy sp_modifylogin
Alphabetic characters in N/A min alpha in password N/A
password
Password length minimum password length minimum password length min passwd length
Failed logins lockout maximum failed logins maximum failed logins max failed_logins
Disallow simple N/A disallow simple passwords N/A
passwords
Special characters in N/A min special char in password N/A
password
Uppercase letters in N/A min upper char in password N/A
password
Lowercase letters in N/A min lower char in password N/A
password
Password expiration N/A password exp warn interval N/A
warning interval
Resetting your password N/A expire login N/A
at first login
Custom password N/A N/A N/A
complexity checks
Set the password complexity options at the:

• Login level using sp_addlogin or sp_modifylogin.
• Global level using the new sp_passwordpolicy or sp_configure.
Because you can set password configuration options on a global and per-login
basis, and using old and new parameters, the order of precedence in which the
password options is applied is important.
When applying password options, the order of precedence is:
1 Existing per-login parameters
2 Password complexity options
3 Existing global password options
Examples Example 1 This sets the minimum password length for “johnd” to 6:
sp_addlogin @login_name = 'johnd',
@passwd = 'complex_password',
@minpwdlen = 6

These global options for login “johnd” create two minimum password length
requirements for login “johnd”, and sets restrictions about digits in the
password:
sp_configure 'minimum password length', 8
sp_configure 'check password for digit', 'true'
sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'min digits in password', 2
If you then try to create a password for login “johnd”:
sp_password @caller_password = 'old_complex_password',
@new_password = 'abcd123', @login_name = 'johnd'
Adaptive Server checks the password in the following order:
1 Per-login existing options check: minimum password length must be
greater than 6. This is true and the check passes.
2 New options: minimum digits in password must be greater than 2. This is
true and the check passes.
3 Existing global options: minimum password length specified here is not
checked because there is already a per-login check for the login “johnd”.
4 The check password for digit option is redundant because it is already
checked when the minimum number of digits is turned on and set to 2.
Once Adaptive Server checks the designated sequence, and the new password
for login “johnd” passes these checks, the new password is successfully
created.
Example 2 If you enter the following for user “johnd”, Adaptive Server first
checks the per-login existing options, and determines the minimum password
length is set to 6, but that you have attempted to create a password with only 4
characters:
@new_password = 'abcd', @login_name = 'johnd'
The check fails, and Adaptive Server prints an error message. Once one
password complexity check fails, no additional options are checked.
Example 3 This example creates a new login with the following password
configuration options and sets the minimum password length for login johnd
to 4:
sp_addlogin @login_name = 'johnd', @passwd =
'complex_password', @minpwdlen = 4

This is a per-login, existing option. When you add the following, you have
created a global requirement that the minimum number of digits for a password
must be 1:
sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'min digits in password', 1
If you then attempt to create the password for login johnd as follows:
@ new_password = 'abcde', @login_name = 'johnd'
Adaptive Server performs the checks in the following order:
1 Per-login existing options check: the minimum password length of a new
password is 4. The password “abcde” is greater than 4, so this check
passes.
2 New global requirement check: the minimum digits in a password is set to
1, globally. This check fails.
Adaptive Server does not create a new password and prints an error message.
To create a new password, all the checks must pass.
Enabling custom password checks

Adaptive Server allows a system security officer to write user-defined stored
procedures that enable custom password checks.
For example, to implement password history checks, create a new user table to
store password histories:
create table pwdhistory
(
name varchar(30)not null, -- Login name.
password varbinary(30)not null, -- old password.
pwdate datetime not null, -- datetime changed.
changedby varchar(30)not null -- Who changed.
)
go
This user-defined stored procedure (sp_extrapwdchecks) can be called when
specifying a new password to save it in an encrypted form in the pwdhistory
table:
create proc sp_extrapwdchecks
(
@caller_password varchar(30), --the current password of caller

@new_password varchar(30), -- the new password of the target acct

@loginame varchar(30), -- user to change password on
)
as
begin
declare @current_time datetime,
@encrypted_pwd varbinary(30),
@changedby varchar(30),
@cutoffdate datetime
select @changedby = suser_name()
-- Change this line according to your installation.

-- This keeps history of 12 months only.
select @current_time = getdate(),
@cutoffdate = dateadd(month,-12,getdate())
select @encrypted_pwd = internal_encrypt(@new_password)
delete master..pwdhistory
where name = @loginame
and pwdate < @cutoffdate
if not exists ( select 1 from master..pwdhistory

and password = @encrypted_pwd )
begin
insert master..pwdhistory
select @loginame, internal_encrypt(@new_password),
@current_time, @changedby
return (0)
end
else
begin
raiserror 22001 --user defined error message
end
end
Use sp_addmessage to add the user-defined message 22001. A raiserror
22001 indicates a custom password-complexity check error and leads to a
failure of sp_addlogin or sp_password.
The following user-defined stored procedure (sp_cleanpwdchecks) can be used
to clean-up the password history using sp_extrapwdchecks.
create proc sp_cleanpwdchecks

(
@loginame varchar(30)
-- user to change password on
)
as
begin
delete master..pwdhistory
end
go
Once the two procedures above are defined and installed in the master
database, they are called dynamically during the password complexity checks.
Setting the login and role expiration interval for a password

System administrators and system security officers can:
Use To
sp_addlogin Specify the expiration interval for a login password at creation.
sp_modifylogin Change the expiration interval for a login password.
sp_modifylogin affects only user roles, not system roles.
create role Specify the expiration interval for a role password at creation
(only the system security officer can issue create role).
alter role Change the expiration interval for a role password (only the
system security officer can issue alter role).
The following rules apply to password expiration for logins and roles:
• A password expiration interval assigned to individual login accounts or
roles overrides the global password expiration value. This allows you to
specify shorter expiration intervals for sensitive accounts or roles, such as
system security officer passwords, and more relaxed intervals for less
sensitive accounts such as an anonymous login.
• A login or role for which the password has expired is not directly
activated.
• The password expires at the time of day when the password was last
changed after the number of days specified by password expiration interval
has passed.

For details on the syntax and rules for the commands and system procedures,
see the appropriate Reference Manual.
Password expiration turned off for pre-12.x passwords

Password expiration did not affect roles in versions earlier than Adaptive
Server 12.x. In Adaptive Server 12.x and later, password expiration is
deactivated for any existing user-defined role passwords.
Circumventing password protection

Circumventing the password-protection mechanism may be necessary in
automated login systems. You can create a role that can access other roles
without passwords.
A system security officer can bypass the password mechanism for certain users
by granting the password-protected role to another role, and grant the
password-protected role to one or more users. Activation of this role
automatically activates the password-protected role without having to provide
a password.
For example:
Jane is the system security officer for ABC Inc., which uses automated login
systems. Jane creates the following roles:
• financial_assistant
create role financial_assistant with passwd "L54K3j"
• accounts_officer
create role accounts_officer with passwd "9sF6ae"

• chief_financial_officer
create role chief_financial_officer

Jane grants the roles of financial_assistant and accounts_officer to the
chief_financial_officer role:
grant role financial_assistant, accounts_officer to

chief_financial_officer
Jane then grants the chief_financial_officer role to Bob:
grant role chief_financial_officer to bob
Bob logs in to Adaptive Server and activates the chief_financial_officer role:

set role chief_financial_officer on

The roles of financial_assistant and accounts_officer are automatically activated
without Bob providing a password. Bob can now access everything under the
financial_assistant and accounts_officer roles without having to enter the
passwords for those roles.
Creating a password expiration interval for a new login

Use sp_addlogin to set the password expiration interval for a new login.
This example creates the new login “joe” with the password “Djdiek3”, and
sets the password expiration interval for “joe” to 2 days:
sp_addlogin joe, "Djdiek3", null, null, null, 2
The password for “joe” expires after 2 days from the time of day the login
account was created, or 2 days from when the password was last changed.
See sp_addlogin in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Creating a password expiration interval for a new role

Use create role to set the password expiration interval for a new role.
This example creates the new role intern_role with the password “temp244”,
and sets the password expiration interval for intern_role to 7 days:
create role intern_role with passwd "temp244", passwd expiration 7
The password for intern_role expires after 7 days from the time of day you
created the role, or 2 days from when the password was last changed.
See create role in the Reference Manual: Commands.
Creation date added for passwords

Passwords are stamped with a creation date equal to the upgrade date of a given
server. The creation date for login passwords is stored in the pwdate column of
syslogins. The creation date for role passwords is stored in the pwdate column
of syssrvroles.

Changing or removing password expiration interval for login or role

Use sp_modifylogin to change the password expiration interval for an existing
login, add a password expiration interval to a login that did not have one, or
remove a password expiration interval. sp_modifylogin only effects login
passwords, not role passwords.
This example changes the password expiration interval for the login “joe” to 5
days:
sp_modifylogin "joe", @option="passwd expiration", @value="5"
The password expires 5 days from the time of day you ran password expiration.

See sp_modifylogin in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Securing login passwords on the network

Adaptive Server allows the use of asymmetric encryption to securely transmit
passwords from client to server using the RSA public key encryption
algorithm. Adaptive Server generates the asymmetric key pair and sends the
public key to clients that use a login protocol. For example, the client encrypts
the user’s login password with the public key before sending it to the server.
The server decrypts the password with the private key to begin the
authentication of the client connecting.
You can configure Adaptive Server to require clients to use a login protocol.
Set the Adaptive Server configuration parameter net password encryption reqd
to require all user name- and password-based authentication requests to use
RSA asymmetric encryption. See “net password encryption required” on page
181.
Generating an asymmetric key pair

Adaptive Server generates a new key pair:
• At each server start-up,
• Automatically at 24-hour intervals using the Adaptive Server housekeeper
mechanism, and
• When an administrator with sso_role requests key pair regeneration.

The key pair is kept in memory. A message is recorded in the error log and in
the audit trail when the key pair is regenerated.
To generate the key pair on demand, use:
sp_passwordpolicy "regenerate keypair"
Note Depending on the system load, there may be a delay between the time
this command is executed and the time the key pair is actually generated. This
is because the housekeeper task runs at a low priority and may be delayed by
higher priority tasks.
To generate the key pair at a specific time, use:

sp_passwordpolicy "regenerate keypair", “datetime string”
For example, a datetime string of “Jan 16, 2007 11:00PM” generates the key
pair at the specified time. The datetime string can also just be a time of day,
such as “4:07a.m.”. When only time of day is specified, key-pair regeneration
is scheduled for that time of day in the next 24 hour period.
Server option "net password encryption"

Adaptive Server also acts as a client when establishing a remote procedure call
(RPC).
When connecting to remote servers, Adaptive Server uses the net password
encryption option to determine whether it will use password encryption.
Adaptive Server uses either RSA or Sybase proprietary algorithms when this
server option is set to true. The command to enable net password encryption is:
sp_serveroption server, "net password encryption",
"true"
The setting is stored in master..sysservers and you can display the value of
server options using the sp_helpserver stored procedure.

The default value for net password encryption is true for any new server added
using sp_addserver. During upgrade, Adaptive Server sets net password
encryption to true for sysservers entries with an ASEnterprise class value. No
other server classes are modified. This improves password security between
two communicating Adaptive Servers.
Note The administrator can optionally reset net password encryption to false if
you encounter problems establishing a connection to a server. However, if the
option is set to false, passwords are transmitted in clear text on the network.
Backward compatibility
• Sybase recommends that you use the RSA algorithm to protect passwords
on the network.
• To use the RSA algorithm, you must have Adaptive Server version 15.0.2
and new Connectivity SDK clients (version 15.0 ESD #7 and later.)
Sybase provides the net password encryption reqd configuration parameter
and the net password encryption server option to allow settings equivalent
to versions earlier than 15.0.2 and maintain backward compatibility with
older clients and older servers.
• Older clients that do not support the RSA algorithm can set the property to
encrypt passwords using the Sybase proprietary algorithm, which has been
available version 12.0. Adaptive Server then uses the Sybase proprietary
algorithm.
• New clients that support both RSA and Sybase proprietary algorithms can
set properties for both algorithms. When communicating with such clients,
Adaptive Server 15.0.2 uses RSA encryption. A pre-15.0.2 Adaptive
Server uses the Sybase proprietary algorithm.
Securing login passwords stored on disk and in memory

Login passwords used by Adaptive Server to authenticate client connections
are stored securely on disk as SHA-256 hash digest. The SHA-256 algorithm
is a one-way encryption algorithm. The digest it produces cannot be decrypted,
making its storage on disk secure. To authenticate the user connection, the
SHA-256 algorithm is applied to the password sent by the client, and the result
compared with the value stored on disk.

To prevent dictionary-based attacks on login passwords stored on disk, a salt is

mixed with the password before the SHA-256 algorithm is applied. The salt is
stored along with the SHA-256 hash, and used during login authentication.
To ease the transition to the new on-disk encryption algorithm when migrating
from versions earlier than 15.0.2. Adaptive Server includes the password
policy allow password downgrade. After an upgrade from versions earlier than
15.0.2, the policy has a value of 1 to indicate that passwords are stored in both
the Sybase proprietary algorithm used in earlier releases and the new SHA-256
algorithm used in Adaptive Server 15.0.2.
As long as passwords are stored in both old and new forms, you can downgrade
Adaptive Server to Adaptive Server 15.0 or 15.0.1 without resetting user
passwords. When the policy allow password downgrade is set to 0, passwords
are stored only in SHA-256 form, which is incompatible with older releases.
When downgrading to previous releases, only passwords stored in SHA-256
are reset to random passwords and stored in the old form compatible with older
releases. See “Backward compatibility” on page 459.
Sybase recommends using only SHA-256 as soon as you are certain that there
will be no downgrades to an earlier versions. Consider the trade-offs when
making this decision; should there be a need to downgrade to a pre-15.0.2
release, it requires administrator intervention to unlock user login passwords.
Using only the SHA-256 algorithm

To end the period when password downgrade is allowed, execute:
sp_passwordpolicy set, "allow password downgrade", 0
Before executing this command, examine login accounts with sp_displaylogin
to determine if the login account has been used, and whether the password is
stored in SHA-256 encoding. If is not, the account is automatically locked and
reset with a generated password. To use the account again, you must unlock the
account and give the user a newly generated password.
You may want to save the output from this command because it can contain
information about locked login accounts and generated passwords for those
accounts.
When the password downgrade period ends:
• The datetime when the password downgrade period ended is recorded in
master.dbo.sysattributes.

• The value of each password column in syslogins is rewritten to use only the
new password on-disk structure.
• The logins that have not transitioned to the new algorithm have the
password reset to a new server-generated password in SHA-256 format,
and the login is locked. The generated password is displayed only to the
administrator executing the sp_passwordpolicy procedure above. The lock
reason is set to 3 (“Login or role not transitioned to SHA-256”).
After the sp_passwordpolicy procedure completes:
• Login authentication uses only SHA-256.
• Only the new password on-disk structure for the password column is used.
• Attempts to use the locked logins fail authentication. To use the locked
logins, you must unlock the login with sp_locklogin and the user must use
the password generated by sp_passwordpolicy. Alternatively, you may
prefer to assign a new password instead of the generated password for
locked login accounts.
Example 1 This example prepares an upgraded server to use only SHA-256. Examine
login accounts to determine which encryption is used by the account using
sp_displaylogin.
1> sp_displaylogin login993
2> go
Suid: 70
Loginame: login933
Fullname:
Default Language:
Auto Login Script:
Locked: NO
Date of Last Password Change: Apr 20 2007 2:55PM
Login Password Encryption: SYB-PROP
Last login date:
(return status = 0)

The value SYB-PROP from the line Login Password Encryption: SYB-PROP
indicates that only the Sybase-proprietary encryption is used for this account.
This login has not been used before they upgrade to Adaptive Server version
15.0.2, and will be locked, and its password reset if sp_passwordpolicy 'set',
'allow password downgrade', 0 is executed.
After the first login to the account after upgrading to Adaptive Server 15.0.2,
the line changes to show that both old and new encryption is used:
Login Password Encryption: SYB-PROP,SHA-256
This is the desired state for all active login accounts, so that executing
sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'allow password downgrade', 0 does not lock and reset
the password for accounts.
After you execute sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'allow password downgrade', 0, only
SHA-256 encryption is used, and you see:
Login Password Encryption: SHA-256
Login accounts that show this value are now using the stronger, on-disk
encryption algorithm.
When all passwords have been changed to use the new algorithm, reexecuting
sp_passwordpolicy shows no accounts reset or locked:
1> sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'allow password downgrade', 0

2> go
Old password encryption algorithm usage eliminated from 0 login accounts,
changes are committed.
(return status = 0)
Example 2 In this example, 990 out of 1000 login accounts have transitioned to the SHA-
256 algorithm, but 10 accounts are still using SYB-PROP algorithm:
1> sp_passwordpolicy 'set', 'allow password downgrade', 0
2> go
Old password encryption algorithm found for login name login1000, suid 3,
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to EcJxKmMvOrDsC4
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to MdZcUaFpXkFtM1
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to ZePiZdSeMqBdE6
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to IfWpXvGlBgDgW7
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to JhDjYnGcXwObI8

ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to QaXlRuJlCrFaE6

ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to HlHcZdRrYcKyB2
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to UvMrXoVqKmZvU6
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to IxIwZqHxEePbX5
ver1 =5, ver2 = 0, resetting password to HxYrPyQbLzPmJ3
Old password encryption algorithm usage eliminated from 10 login accounts,
changes are committed.
(return status = 1)
Note The login name, suid, and generated password appear to the
administrator executing the procedure. The output of the command shows all
10 accounts that have not transitioned are reset (and locked).
Character set considerations for passwords

Passwords and other sensitive data that is encrypted must determine the
character set of the clear text to accurately interpret the result when it is
decrypted, or when hash values are compared during authentication.
For example, a client connects to Adaptive Server using isql and establishes a
new password. Regardless of the character set used in the client, characters are
always converted to the server’s default character set for processing within
Adaptive Server. Assuming the Adaptive Server default character set is
“iso_1,” consider the procedure call:
sp_password old_passwd, new_passwd
The parameters are varchar, and are expressed as a quoted string and stored
with “iso_1” encoding before encryption. If the Adaptive Server default
character set changes later, the encrypted password remains an encrypted string
of characters encoded with the original default character set. This may result in
authentication failure due to mismatched character mapping. Although
changing the default character set is a rare occurrence, it becomes more
important when migration occurs between platforms.
Adaptive Server converts the clear text password to canonical form before
encryption so that the password can be used across platforms, chip
architectures, and character sets.
To use canoncial form for storage in syslogins:

1 Convert the clear text password string to UTF-16.

2 Convert the UTF-16 string to network byte order.
3 Append a small buffer (the salt) with random bytes to the password.
4 Apply the SHA-256 hash algorithm.
5 Store digest, salt, and version in the password column.
At authentication time:
1 Convert the clear text password string to UTF-16.
2 Convert the UTF-16 string to network byte order.
3 Append the salt from the password column in syslogins to the password.
4 Apply the hash algorithm.
5 Compare results with password column in syslogins, if they match then
authentication is successful.
Upgrade and and downgrade behavior

This section contains information about upgrading and downgrading Adaptive
Server between versions.
Behavior changes on upgraded master database

When you upgrade the master database, Adaptive Server maintains encrypted
passwords in syslogins catalogs using algorithms from the earlier- and the
upgaded version of Adaptive Server in the password column.
Users can call sp_displaylogin to determine which “Login password encryption”
a login uses.
On first authentication of a login after an upgrade:
• The user authenticates using the contents of the password column and the
old algorithm.
• Adaptive Server updates the password column with the old encryption
algorithm followed by the new encryption algorithm.
On subsequent authentication of a login after upgrade, before “allow password
downgrade” is set to 0, the user authenticates using the new algorithm.

Behavior changes in a new master database

In a new Adaptive Server master database, or in an upgraded master database
after allow password downgrade is set to 0, the server maintains encrypted
passwords in syslogins using only the new algorithm in the password column.
Only the SHA-256 algorithm authenticates the connection requests and stores
the password on disk.
Issue sp_passwordpolicy to determine if a server was upgraded (for example,
from version 15.0 to 15.0.2) and maintains passwords using algorithms from
the pre- and post-upgraded server, or if the server is newly installed and
includes a master database that uses the most recent algorithm (from the 15.0.2
version):
sp_passwordpolicy "list", "allow password downgrade"
Retaining password encryption after upgrading then downgrading

If you upgrade to an Adaptive Server 15.0.2 or later, then downgrade to an
earlier version, use sp_downgrade to retain and use the password encryption
functionality from the 15.0.2 and later server. By default, Adaptive Server lets
you downgrade passwords after an upgrade, until you end the password
downgrade period.
Note Running sp_downgrade, shutting down the server, then restarting the
same version of Adaptive Server from which you downgraded removes the
changes made by sp_downgrade. You must re-run sp_downgrade to redo the
changes. See the Installation Guide for information about running
sp_downgrade.
Adding space before you upgrade

Adaptive Server requires additional space in the master database, and
transaction log. Use alter database to add additional space to the master
database, and transaction log.
Encryption algorithms and password policies:
• Increase the space required for syslogins by about 30%.
• Increase the maximum row length by 135 bytes per login account.

• Decrease the ratio of rows per page from about 16 rows per 2K page to 12
rows per 2K page between Adaptive Server versions 15.0.1 and 15.0.2.
There is a period of time during the downgrade when the value for allow
password downgrade is 1 (when both old and new password encryption
algorithms are used); the ratio further decreases to about 10 rows per 2K
page.
For example, if Adaptive Server 15.0.1 has 1,000 login accounts, and the
data fits into 59 pages, the same number of login accounts may require
approximately 19 additional pages in Adaptive Server 15.0.2 on a new
master database, or 33 additional pages if you upgraded from 15.0.1 (with
allow password downgrade set to 1).
The transaction log requires additional space for the updated password column.
When users first log in, Adaptive Server requires about 829 2K pages per 1,000
logins, and about 343 pages per 1,000 logins for password changes users make
during the upgrade and downgrade. To ensure there is sufficient log space,
verify that there is approximately one 2K page of free log space per login
before starting the password upgrade or downgrade, and when users first login
to Adaptive Server version 15.0.2 and later.
Downgrading
Adaptive Server supports downgrading from version 15.0.2 or later to version
15.0 or 15.0.1. If you are downgrading to an earlier version of Adaptive Server,
you may need to perform additional actions.
If allow password downgrade is 0 or NULL, or if a password has been stored in
syslogins with only the SHA-256 algorithm, use sp_displaylogin on login
accounts to determine which algorithm is used, or sp_downgrade "prepare" to
determine which accounts are reset.
The prepare option reports whether the server is ready to be downgraded. If the
prepare option fails, it reports errors that must be fixed. If a downgrade is
performed on the server before the errors are fixed, the downgrade fails. For
login passwords, prepare reports which passwords are reset during the
downgrade.
Run sp_downgrade "prepare" to verify whether you should run sp_downgrade:
sp_downgrade 'prepare','15.0.1',1
Checking databases for downgrade readiness.
There are no errors which involve encrypted columns.
Allow password downgrade is set to 0. Login passwords

may be reset, if old encryption version of password is

not present.
Warning: New password encryption algorithm found for

login name user103, suid 103.
Password will be reset during the downgrade phase.
sp_downgrade 'prepare' completed.

(return status = 0)
sp_droplogin 'probe'
If the login has user entries in databases, from the master database, drop users
from databases, and then drop the login:
use master
sp_dropuser 'probe'
The probe login is re-created when you run installmaster on the downgraded
server.
Before executing sp_downgrade, Sybase recommends that you drop statistics
for syslogins, and syssrvroles. Doing this avoids invalid column information,
such as the length of password column, in sysstatistics from being recorded
during the downgrade.
To drop statistics for syslogins, and syssrvroles, enter:
delete statistics master..syslogins
delete statistics master..syssrvroles
In this example, the execution of sp_downgrade locks, and resets the login
password for user103. The random password generated by Adaptive Server is
shown only to the client who executes sp_downgrade. The administrator can
redirect this output to a file so that these passwords are retained, or the
administrator can manually reset them once the downgrade is complete, and
the server is restarted.
sp_downgrade 'downgrade','15.0.1',1
Checking databases for downgrade readiness.
There are no errors which involve encrypted columns.
Allow password downgrade is set to 0. Login passwords

may be reset, if old encryption
version of password is not present.
Warning: New password encryption algorithm found for
login name user103, suid 103 .
Password is reset during the downgrade phase.

Executing downgrade step 1 [sp_passwordpolicy

'downgrade'] for :
- Database: master (dbid: 1)
New password encryption algorithm found for login name

user103, suid 103.
Resetting password to 'ZdSuFpNkBxAbW9'.
Total number of passwords reset during downgrade = 1
[ ... output from other downgrade steps ..]

(return status = 0)
Additional messages appear in the error log to identify steps that occurred
during sp_downgrade:
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:34:07.81 server Preparing ASE downgrade from 1502
to 1501.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.09 server Preparing ASE downgrade from 1502
to 1501.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.19 server Starting downgrading ASE.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.20 server Downgrade : Downgrading login
passwords.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.22 server Downgrade : Starting password
downgrade.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.23 server Downgrade : Removed sysattributes
rows.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.23 server Downgrade : Updated 1 passwords.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.24 server Downgrade : Removed columns in
syslogins -
lastlogindate, crdate, locksuid, lockreason, lockdate are removed.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.26 server Downgrade : Truncated password
lengths.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.28 server Downgrade : Successfully
completed password
downgrade.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:35:59.28 server Downgrade : Marking stored
procedures to
be recreated from text.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:36:03.69 server Downgrade : Dropping Sysoptions
system
table.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:36:03.81 server Downgrade : Setting master
database minor
upgrade version.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:36:03.83 server Downgrade : Setting user

databases minor
upgrade version.
00:00000:00006:2007/05/21 05:36:03.90 server ASE downgrade completed.
sp_downgrade makes catalog changes, and modifies password data. The server
must be in single user mode to successfully execute sp_downgrade. To start the
server in single user mode, and to allow only the System Administrator to log
in, use the -m command line option to start the server.
After running sp_downgrade, shut down the 15.0.2 server to avoid new logins
or other actions that may modify data or system catalogs. If you restart
Adaptive Server at version 15.0.2 after running sp_downgrade, the earlier
version shuts down and you are again upgraded to the version 15.0.2 or later
level.
Expiring passwords when allow password downgrade is set to 0

Expire passwords in syslogins at the end of the password downgrade period.
To configure login passwords to expire, use:
sp_passwordpolicy "expire login passwords"[, "[loginame | wildcard]"
To configure role passwords to expire, use:
sp_passwordpolicy "expire role passwords"[, "[rolename | wildcard]"
To configure stale login passwords to expire, use:
sp_passwordpolicy "expire stale login passwords", "datetime"
To configure stale role passwords to expire, use:
sp_passwordpolicy "expire stale role passwords", "datetime"
Passwords that are not changed since the date you set in the datetime parameter
of the sp_passwordpolicy "expire stale login passwords," expire when you
execute the command. Users are automatically required to change their
passwords after the password downgrade period ends.
You can also lock stale logins or roles; however this requires you to reset the
password manually for legitimate users to access their login account again.
Showing the current value of allow password downgrade

To obtain the current value of allow password downgrade enter:
sp_passwordpolicy list, "allow password downgrade"

The result set includes the current value, and a message indicating its meaning.
If you have upgraded the master database, and are maintaining passwords with
the old and new encodings, the result is:
go
value message
-------- -----------------------------------------------------
1 Password downgrade is allowed.
(1 row affected)
For an upgraded master database that only uses new password encryption, the
result is:
go
value message
-------- -----------------------------------------------------
0 Last Password downgrade was allowed on <datetime>.
(1 row affected)
For a new master database on Adaptive Server 15.0.2 that only uses new
password encryption, the result is:
go
value message
-------- -----------------------------------------------------
NULL New master database.
(1 row affected)
Last login and locking inactive accounts

Adaptive Server provides security for user accounts by:
• Tracking the creation date.
• Recording the last login time for an account.
• Determining which accounts are stale and locked due to inactivity.
• Recording the reason an account is locked, and the identity of the user who
locked the account.

Using syslogins to track if an account is locked

syslogins includes the lastlogindate, crdate, locksuid, lockreason, and lockdate
columns to support the last login, and locking inactive accounts, letting an
account owner or administrator know if an account is locked, when it was
locked, who locked it, and the reason why it was locked.
At login creation, the crdate column is set to the current time.
If the enable last login updates password policy option is set to 1, the
lastlogindate column is set to the datetime of the login, and the previous value
of the column is stored in the PSS of the login session.The update to syslogins
and the PSS can occur at each login to Adaptive Server. The default value for
enable last login updates a new master database or an upgraded database is 1.
To disable this option execute the procedure using administrator priveledges:
sp_passwordpolicy "set", "enable last login updates", 0
@@lastlogindate is specific to each user login session, and can be used by that
session to determine the date and time of the previous login to the account. If
the account has not been previously used or if enable last login updates is 0, the
value of @@lastlogindate is NULL.
The transaction log does not log updates to syslogins..lastlogindate.
Administrators with sso_role can lock login accounts that are inactive for a
given number of days, using::
sp_locklogin 'all', 'lock', [@except], 'number of inactive days'
This command has no effect if enable last login updates is set to 0 or the value
of the lastlogindate column is NULL. The range of values for number of inactive
days is 1 – 32767 (days).
The lockreason column specifies the reason a login was locked. The value of
the lockdate column is set to the current datetime.
When an account is unlocked, columns lockreason, lockdate, and locksuid are
reset to NULL.
The lockdate, locksuid, and lockreason columns are set internally by Adaptive
Server. Table 14-11 describes the lockreasons and the value of locksuid.
Table 14-11: The reasons and values of locksuid
lockreason
value locksuid value Explanation of lockreason value
NULL NULL Account has not been locked.
0 suid of caller of sp_locklogin Account locked by locksuid by manually executing
sp_locklogin.

lockreason
value locksuid value Explanation of lockreason value
1 suid of caller of sp_locklogin Account locked due to account inactivity, locksuid has
manually executed sp_locklogin 'all', 'lock', 'ndays'.
2 suid of attempted login Account locked by Adaptive Server due to failed login
attempts reaching maximum failed logins.
3 suid of caller of sp_passwordpolicy Account locked by locksuid as the password downgrade
set, "allow password downgrade", 0 period has ended, and login or role has not transitioned to
SHA-256.
Using passwords in a high-availability environment

Password security impacts configuration of high availability, the behavior of
passwords in syslogins between primary, and companion servers.
High-availability configuration
The primary and companion servers must have equivalent allow password
downgrade values before you configure them for high availability. The allow
password downgrade quorum attribute checks whether the value of allow
password downgrade is the same on both primary, and secondary servers.
If allow password downgrade on the primary server is 1, and 0 on the secondary

server, then the output of sp_companion is:
1> sp_companion "primary_server",configure
2> go
Step: Access verified from Server:'secondary_server' to
Server:'primary_server'.
Step: Access verified from Server:'primary_server' to
Server:'secondary_server'.
Server 'secondary_server', Procedure 'sp_companion', Line 392:
Configuration operation 'configure' can not proceed due to Quorum Advisory Check
failure. Please run 'do_advisory' command to find the incompatible attribute
and fix it.
Attribute Name Attrib Type Local Value Remote Value Advisory

-------------- ----------- ----------- ------------ --------
allow password downg allow password 0 1 2
(1 row affected)
(return status = 1)

A value of 2 in the Advisory column indicates that the user cannot proceed with
the cluster operation unless the values on both companions match.
sp_companion do_advisory also lists the difference in the value of allow
password downgrade on both servers.
Run sp_passwordpolicy ‘allow password downgrade’ independently on both the

primary, and secondary servers to synchronize the value, and to ensure both
servers are in the same state.
Passwords updated after upgrade

Upon the first connection to the primary server after upgrading and configuring
for high availability, the user login password synchronizes on both the primary
and companion servers with the same on-disk encryption format. This avoids
password reset or locking when the allow password downgrade period ends, and
passwords are downgraded to an earlier version of Adaptive Server. Login
passwords continue to be used without being reset or locked by
sp_passwordpolicy or sp_downgrade.
After successfully setting up high-availability environment, end the allow

password downgrade period separately on the primary and companion servers.
Similarly, downgrade to an earlier version of Adaptive Server, execute
sp_downgrade separately on the primary and companion servers.
Monitoring license use

The License Use Monitor allows a system administrator to monitor the number
of user licenses used in Adaptive Server, and to securely manage the license
agreement data. That is, you can ensure that the number of licenses used on
your Adaptive Server does not exceed the number specified in your license
agreement.
The License Use Monitor tracks the number of licenses issued; it does not
enforce the license agreement. If the License Use Monitor reports that you are
using more user licenses than specified in your license agreement, see your
Sybase sales representative.
You must have system administrator privileges to configure the License Use
Monitor; by default the monitor is turned off when Adaptive Server is installed
or upgraded.

Monitoring license use
See “Configuring the License Use Monitor,” below.
How licenses are counted

A license is the combination of a host computer name and a user name. If a user
logs in to Adaptive Server multiple times from the same host machine, one
license is used. However, if the user logs in once from host A, and once from
host B, two licenses are used. If multiple users log in to Adaptive Server from
the same host, but with different user names, each distinct combination of user
name and host name uses one license.
Configuring the License Use Monitor

Use sp_configure to specify the number of licenses in your license agreement,
where number is the number of licenses:
sp_configure "license information" , number
This example sets the maximum number of user licenses to 300, and reports an
overuse for license number 301:
sp_configure "license information", 300
If you increase the number of user licenses, you must also change the license
information configuration parameter.
Monitoring license use with the housekeeper task

After you configure the License Use Monitor, the housekeeper task determines
how many user licenses are in use, based on the user ID and the host name of
each user logged in to Adaptive Server. The License Use Monitor updates a
variable that tracks the maximum number of user licenses in use:
• If the number of licenses in use is the same or has decreased since the
previous housekeeper run, the License Use Monitor does nothing.
• If the number of licenses in use has increased since the previous
housekeeper run, the License Use Monitor sets this number as the
maximum number of licenses in use.

• If the number of licenses in use is greater than the number allowed by the
license agreement, the License Use Monitor issues this message to the
error log:
Exceeded license usage limit. Contact Sybase Sales
for additional licenses.
The housekeeper chores task runs during Adaptive Server idle cycles. Both the
housekeeper free write percent and the license information configuration
parameter must be set to values greater than or equal to 1 for the License Use
Monitor to track license use.
For more information about the housekeeper chores task, see Chapter 3, “Using
Engines and CPUs,” in the Performance and Tuning Series:Basics.
Logging the number of user licenses

The syblicenseslog system table is created in the master database when you
install or upgrade Adaptive Server. The License Use Monitor updates the
columns in syblicenseslog at the end of each 24-hour period, as shown in Table
14-12.
Table 14-12: Columns in syblicenseslog table
Column Description
status -1 – housekeeper cannot monitor licenses.
0 – number of licenses not exceeded.
1 – number of licensees exceeded.
logtime Date and time the log information was inserted.
maxlicenses Maximum number of licenses used during the previous 24 hours.
syblicenseslog looks similar to this:
status logdate maxlicenses

------ -------------------------- -----------
0 Jul 17 1998 11:43AM 123
0 Jul 18 1998 11:47AM 147
1 Jul 19 1998 11:51AM 154
0 Jul 20 1998 11:55AM 142
0 Jul 21 1998 11:58AM 138
0 Jul 21 1998 3:14PM 133
In this example, the number of user licenses used exceeded the limit on July
19, 1998.

Getting information about usage: chargeback accounting
If Adaptive Server is shut down, License Use Monitor updates syblicenseslog

with the current maximum number of licenses used. Adaptive Server starts a
new 24-hour monitoring period when it is restarted.
The second row for July 21, 1998 was caused by a shutdown and restart of the
server.
Getting information about usage: chargeback

accounting
When a user logs in to Adaptive Server, the server begins accumulating CPU
and I/O usage for that user. Adaptive Server can report total usage for an
individual, or for all users. Information for each user is stored in the syslogins
system table in the master database.
Reporting current usage statistics

The system administrator can use sp_reportstats or sp_clearstats to get or clear
current total usage data for individuals or for all users on Adaptive Server.
Displaying current accounting totals

sp_reportstats displays current accounting totals for Adaptive Server users. It
reports total CPU and total I/O, as well as the percentage of those resources
used. It does not record statistics for the “sa” login (processes with an suid of
1), checkpoint, network, and mirror handlers.
Initiating a new accounting interval

Adaptive Server accumulates CPU and I/O statistics until you clear the totals
from syslogins by running sp_clearstats. sp_clearstats initiates a new
accounting interval for Adaptive Server users and executes sp_reportstats to
print out statistics for the previous period.
Choose the length of your accounting interval by deciding how to use the
statistics at your site. For example, to do monthly cross-department charging
for the percentage of Adaptive Server CPU and I/O usage, run sp_clearstats
once a month.

For detailed information about these stored procedures, see the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
Specifying the interval for adding accounting statistics

A system administrator can use configuration parameters to decide how often
accounting statistics are added to syslogins.
To specify how many machine clock ticks accumulate before accounting
statistics are added to syslogins, use the cpu accounting flush interval
configuration parameter. The default value is 200. For example:
sp_configure "cpu accounting flush interval", 600
To find out how many microseconds a tick is on your system, run the following
query in Adaptive Server:
select @@timeticks
To specify how many read or write I/Os accumulate before the information is
added (flushed) to syslogins, use the i/o accounting flush interval configuration
parameter. The default value is 1000. For example:
sp_configure "i/o accounting flush interval", 2000
I/O and CPU statistics are flushed when a user accumulates more I/O or CPU
usage than the specified value. The information is also flushed when the user
exits an Adaptive Server session.
The minimum value allowed for either configuration parameter is 1. The
maximum value allowed is 2,147,483,647.

Getting information about usage: chargeback accounting

CH A PTE R 1 5 Managing Remote Servers
This chapter discusses the steps the system administrator and system
security officer of each Adaptive Server must execute to enable remote
procedure calls (RPCs).
Topic Page
Overview 479
Managing remote servers 480
Adding remote logins 486
Password checking for remote users 490
Getting information about remote logins 491
Configuration parameters for remote logins 491
Overview
Users on a local Adaptive Server can execute stored procedures on a
remote Adaptive Server. Executing an RPC sends the results of the remote
process to the calling process, which usually appears on the user’s screen.
To enable RPCs, the system administrator and system security officer of
each Adaptive Server must execute the following steps:
• On the local server:
• System security officer – use sp_addserver to list the local server
and remote server in the system table master..sysservers.
• List the remote server in the interfaces file or directory service
for the local server.
• Restart the local server so the global variable @@servername is
set to the name of the local server. If this variable is not set
properly, users cannot execute RPCs from the local server on any
remote server.
• On the remote server:

• System security officer – use sp_addserver to list the server

originating the RPC in the system table master..sysservers.
• To allow the user who is originating the remote procedure access to
the server, a system security officer uses sp_addlogin, and a system
administrator uses sp_addremotelogin.
• Add the remote login name as a user of the appropriate database and
grant that login permission to execute the procedure. (If execute
permission is granted to “public,” the user does not need to be granted
specific permission.)
Figure 15-1 shows how to set up servers for remote access.
Figure 15-1: Setting up servers to allow remote procedure calls
The user “joe” on ROSE needs to access stored procedures on ZINNIA
ROSE ZINNIA
sp_addserver ROSE, local sp_addserver ROSE

sp_addserver ZINNIA sp_addlogin joe
sp_addremotelogin ROSE, joe
interfaces files must have an entry
for ZINNIA sp_adduser joe (in the appropriate database)
grant execute on procedure_name to joe
For operating-system-specific information about handling remote servers, see

the installation documentation for your platform.

Table 15-1 lists the tasks related to managing remote servers, and the system
procedures you use to perform the tasks.

CHAPTER 15 Managing Remote Servers
Table 15-1: Tasks related to managing remote servers

To Use See
Add a remote server sp_addserver “Adding a remote server” on page 481
Manage remote server names sp_addserver “Managing remote server names” on page 482
Change server connection options sp_serveroption “Setting server connection options” on page 483
Display information about servers sp_helpserver “Getting information about servers” on page 485
Drop a server sp_dropserver “Dropping remote servers” on page 485
Adding a remote server

A system security officer uses sp_addserver to add entries to the sysservers
table. On the server originating the call, you must add one entry for the local
server, and one for each remote server that your server will call.
When you create entries for a remote server, you can either:
• Refer to them by the name listed in the interfaces file, or
• Provide a local name for the remote server. For example, if the name in the
interfaces file is “MAIN_PRODUCTION,” you may want to call it simply
“main.”
The syntax is:
sp_addserver lname [{, local | null}
[, pname]]
where:
• lname – provides the local “call name” for the remote server. If this name
is not the same as the remote server’s name in the interfaces file, provide
that name as the third parameter, pname.
The remote server must be listed in the interfaces file on the local machine.
If it is not listed, copy the interfaces file entry from the remote server and
append it to your existing interfaces file. Keep the same port numbers.

• local – identifies the server being added as a local server. The local value is
used only after starting up, or after a restart, to identify the local server
name so that it can appear in messages printed out by Adaptive Server. null
specifies that this server is a remote server.
Note For users to successfully run RPCs from the local server, add the
local server using the local option, and restart it. The restarting is required
to set the global variable @@servername.
• pname – is the remote server listed in the interfaces file for the server
named lname. This optional argument permits you to establish local
aliases for any other Adaptive Server, Open Server, or Backup Server that
you may need to communicate with. If you do not specify pname, to lname
is the default.
Examples of adding remote servers

This example creates an entry for the local server named DOCS:
sp_addserver DOCS, local
This example creates an entry for a remote server named GATEWAY:
sp_addserver GATEWAY
To run a remote procedure such as sp_who on the GATEWAY server, execute
either:
GATEWAY.sybsytemprocs.dbo.sp_who
or:
GATEWAY...sp_who
This example gives a remote server called MAIN_PRODUCTION the local
alias “main:”
sp_addserver main, null, MAIN_PRODUCTION
The user can then enter:
main...sp_who
Managing remote server names

The master.dbo.sysservers table has two server name columns:

• srvname is the unique server name that users must supply when executing
remote procedure calls.
• srvnetname is the server’s network name, which must match the name in
the interfaces file.
To add or drop servers from your network, use sp_addserver to update the
server’s network name in srvnetname.
For example, to remove the server MAIN from the network, and move your
remote applications to a server named TEMP, use the following statement to
change the network name, while keeping the local alias:
sp_addserver MAIN, null, TEMP
sp_addserver displays a message telling you that it is changing the network
name of an existing server entry.
Setting server connection options

sp_serveroption sets the server options timeouts, net password encryption, rpc
security model A, and rpc security model B, which affect connections with
remote servers. Additionally, if you have set the remote procedure security
model to rpc security model B, you can use sp_serveroption to set these options:
security mechanism, mutual authentication, use message confidentiality, and use
message integrity.
The options you specify for sp_serveroption do not affect communication

between Adaptive Server and Backup Server.
The following sections describe timeouts, net password encryption, rpc security
model A, and rpc security model B. For information about the additional options
you can specify when rpc security model B is on, see “Establishing security for
remote procedures” on page 508.
Using the timeouts option

A system administrator can use the timeouts option to disable and enable the
normal timeout code used by the local server.
By default, timeouts is set to true, and the site handler process that manages
remote logins times out if there has been no remote user activity for one
minute. By setting timeouts to false on both of the servers involved in remote
procedure calls, the automatic timeout is disabled. to change timeouts to false
use:

sp_serveroption GATEWAY, "timeouts", false

After you set timeouts to false on both servers, when a user executes an RPC in
either direction, the site handler on each machine runs until one of the servers
is shut down. When the server is brought up again, the option remains false, and
the site handler is reestablished the next time a user executes an RPC. If users
execute RPCs frequently, it is probably efficient in terms of system resources
to set this option to false, since there is some system overhead involved in
setting up the physical connection.
Using the net password encryption option

A system security officer can use net password encryption to specify whether
connections with a remote server are to be initiated with a client-side password
encryption handshake or with the usual unencrypted password handshake
sequence. The default is false.
If net password encryption is set to true:
1 The initial login packet is sent without passwords.
2 The client indicates to the remote server that encryption is desired.
3 The remote server returns an encryption key, which the client uses to
encrypt its plain text passwords.
4 The client then encrypts its own passwords, and the remote server uses the
key to authenticate them when they arrive.
This example sets net password encription to true:
sp_serveroption GATEWAY, "net password encryption",
true
Using the rpc security model options

The rpc security model A and rpc security model B options specify the type of
security that is available for RPCs. If you use model A, the default, Adaptive
Server does not support security services such as message confidentiality via
encryption between the two servers.
For security model B, the local Adaptive Server gets a credential from the
security mechanism and uses the credential to establish a secure physical
connection with the remote Adaptive Server. With this model, you can choose
one or more of these security services: mutual authentication, message
confidentiality via encryption, or message integrity.

To set security model A for the server GATEWAY, execute:

sp_serveroption GATEWAY, "rpc security model A",
true
For information about how to set up servers for security model B, see
“Establishing security for remote procedures” on page 508.
Getting information about servers

sp_helpserver reports on servers. Without an argument, sp_helpserver provides
information about all the servers listed in sysservers. When you include a
server name, sp_helpserver provides information about that server only:
sp_helpserver [server]
sp_helpserver checks for both srvname and srvnetname in the
master..sysremotelogins table.
For operating-system-specific information about setting up remote servers, see

the installation documentation for your platform.
Dropping remote servers

A system security officer can use sp_dropserver to drop servers from
sysservers:
sp_dropserver server [, droplogins]
where:
• server – is the name of the server you want to drop.
• droplogins – allows you to drop a remote server and all of that server’s
remote login information. If you do not use droplogins, you cannot drop a
server that has remote logins associated with it.
The following statement drops the GATEWAY server and all of the remote
logins associated with it:
sp_dropserver GATEWAY, droplogins
You do not have to use droplogins to drop the local server; that entry does not
have remote login information associated with it.

Adding remote logins

The system security officer and system administrator of any Adaptive Server
share control over which remote users can access the server, and what identity
the remote users assume. The system administrator uses sp_addremotelogin to
add remote logins and sp_dropremotelogin to drop remote logins. The system
security officer uses sp_remoteoption to control whether password checking is
required.
Mapping users’ server IDs

Logins from a remote server can be mapped to a local server in three ways:
• A particular remote login can be mapped to a particular local login name.
For example, user “joe” on the remote server might be mapped to
“joesmith”.
• All logins from one remote server can be mapped to one local name. For
example, all users sending remote procedure calls from the MAIN server
might be mapped to “remusers”.
• All logins from one remote server can use their remote names.
The first option can be combined with the other two options, and its specific
mapping takes precedence over the other two more general mappings. The
second and third options are mutually exclusive; you can use either of them,
but not both.
Changing the Use sp_dropremotelogin to remove the old mapping.
mapping option
Use sp_addremotelogin to add remote logins:
sp_addremotelogin remoteserver [, loginame
[, remotename]]
If the local names are not listed in master..syslogins, use sp_addlogin to add
them as Adaptive Server logins before you add the remote logins.
Only a system administrator can execute sp_addremotelogin. See the Reference
Manual: Procedures.

Mapping remote logins to particular local names

The following example maps the login “pogo” from a remote system to the
local login “bob”. The user logs in to the remote system as “pogo”. When
“pogo” executes remote procedure calls from GATEWAY, the local system
maps the remote login name to “bob”.
sp_addlogin bob
sp_addremotelogin GATEWAY, bob, pogo
Mapping all remote logins to one local name

The following example creates an entry that maps all remote login names to the
local name “albert”. All names are mapped to “albert”, except those with
specific mappings, as described in the previous section. For example, if you
mapped “pogo” to “bob”, and then the rest of the logins to “albert”, “pogo” still
maps to “bob”.
sp_addlogin albert
sp_addremotelogin GATEWAY, albert
If you use sp_addremotelogin to map all users from a remote server to the same
local name, use sp_remoteoption to specify the “trusted” option for those users.
For example, if all users from server GATEWAY that are mapped to “albert”
are to be trusted, specify:
sp_remoteoption GATEWAY, albert, NULL, trusted, true
If you do not specify logins as trusted, they cannot execute RPCs on the local
server unless they specify passwords for the local server when they log in to
the remote server. Users can run ct_remote_pwd to specify a password for
server-to-server connections when they use Open Client Client-Library. isql
and bcp do not permit users to specify a password for RPC connections. See
“Password checking for remote users” on page 490 for more information about
sp_remoteoption.
Warning! Do not map more than one remote login to a single local login, as it
reduces individual accountability on the server. Audited actions can be traced
only to the local server login, not to the individual logins on the remote server.

If you are using If users are logged in to the remote server using unified login, the logins must
network-based be designated as trusted on the local server, or they must specify passwords for
security
the server when they log in to the remote server.
Warning! Using the trusted mode of sp_remoteoption reduces the security of

your server, as passwords from such “trusted” users are not verified.
Keeping remote login names for local servers

To enable remote users to keep their remote login names while using a local
server:
1 Use sp_addlogin to create a login for each login from the remote server.
2 Use sp_addremotelogin for the server to create an entry in
master..sysremotelogins with a null value for the remote login name and a
value of -1 for the suid. For example:
sp_addremotelogin GATEWAY
Example of remote user login mapping

This statement displays the local and remote server information recorded in
master..sysservers:
select srvid, srvname from sysservers
srvid srvname
----- ----------
0 SALES
1 CORPORATE
2 MARKETING
3 PUBLICATIONS
4 ENGINEERING
The SALES server is local. The other servers are remote.
This statement displays information about the remote servers and users stored
in master..sysremotelogins:
select remoteserverid, remoteusername, suid
from sysremotelogins
remoteserverid remoteusername suid
-------------- -------------- ------

1 joe 1
1 nancy 2
1 NULL 3
3 NULL 4
4 NULL -1
By matching the value of remoteserverid in this result and the value of srvid in
the previous result, you can find the name of the server for which the
remoteusername is valid. For example, in the first result, srvid 1 indicates the
CORPORATE server; in the second result, remoteserverid 1 indicates that same
server. Therefore, the remote user login names “joe” and “nancy” are valid on
the CORPORATE server.
The following statement shows the entries in master..syslogins:
select suid, name from syslogins
suid name
------ ------------
1 sa
2 vp
3 admin
4 writer
The results of all three queries together show:
• The remote user name “joe” (suid 1) on the remote CORPORATE server
(srvid and remoteserverid 1) is mapped to the “sa” login (suid 1).
• The remote user name “nancy” (suid 2) on the remote CORPORATE
server (srvid and remoteserverid 1) is mapped to the “vp” login (suid 2).
• The other logins from the CORPORATE server (remoteusername
“NULL”) are mapped to the “admin” login (suid 3).
• All logins from the PUBLICATIONS server (srvid and remoteserverid 3)
are mapped to the “writer” login (suid 4).
• All logins from the ENGINEERING server (srvid and remoteserverid 4)
are looked up in master..syslogins by their remote user names (suid -1).
• There is no remoteserverid entry for the MARKETING server in
sysremotelogins. Therefore, users who log in to the MARKETING server
cannot run remote procedure calls from that server.

Password checking for remote users
The remote user mapping procedures and the ability to set permissions for
individual stored procedures give you control over which remote users can
access local procedures. For example, you can allow the “vp” login from the
CORPORATE server to execute certain local procedures and all other logins
from CORPORATE to execute the procedures for which the “admin” login has
permission.
Note Typically, the passwords for users on the remote server must match
passwords on the local server.
Password checking for remote users

A system security officer can use sp_remoteoption to determine whether
passwords are checked when remote users log in to the local server. By default,
passwords are verified (this is the “untrusted” mode). In trusted mode, the local
server accepts remote logins from other servers and front-end applications
without user-access verification for the particular login.
When sp_remoteoption is used with arguments, it changes the mode for the
named user:
sp_remoteoption [remoteserver, loginame, remotename,
optname, {true | false}]
For example, to set trusted mode for the user “bob”, enter
sp_remoteoption GATEWAY, pogo, bob, trusted,
true
Effects of using the untrusted mode

The effects of the untrusted mode depend on the user’s client program. isql and
some user applications require that logins have the same password on the
remote server and the local server. You can write Open Client applications to
allow local logins to have different passwords on different servers.

To change your password in “untrusted” mode, you must first change it on all
the remote systems you access before you can change it on your local server. If
you change your password on the local server first, when you issue the remote
procedure call to execute sp_password on the remote server, your passwords no
longer match.
The syntax for changing your password on the remote server is:
remote_server...sp_password caller_passwd, new_passwd
On the local server, the syntax is:
sp_password caller_passwd, new_passwd
See “Changing passwords” on page 424.
Getting information about remote logins

sp_helpremotelogin prints information about the remote logins on a server. The
following example shows the remote login “pogo” mapped locally to login
name “bob”, with all other remote logins keeping their remote names:
sp_helpremotelogin
server remote_user_name local_user_name options
--------- ---------------- ----------------- --------
GATEWAY **mapped locally** **use local name** untrusted
GATEWAY pogo bob untrusted
Configuration parameters for remote logins

Table 15-2 shows the configuration parameters that affect RPCs. All these
configuration parameters are set using sp_configure and do not take effect until
Adaptive Server is restarted.

Configuration parameters for remote logins
Table 15-2: Configuration parameters that affect RPCs

Configuration parameter Default
allow remote access 1
number of remote logins 20
number of remote sites 10
number of remote connections 20
remote server pre-read packets 3
See the individual configuration parameter descriptions in Chapter 5, “Setting

Configuration Parameters.”

CH A PTE R 1 6 External Authentication
This chapter describes the Adaptive Server features that enable you to
authenticate users with authentication data stored in repositories that are
external to Adaptive Server.
Topic Page
Configuring Adaptive Server for network-based security 494
Concurrent Kerberos authentication 530
Configuring Adaptive Server for LDAP user authentication 530
Configuring Adaptive Server for authentication using PAM 551
LDAPS user authentication enhancements 548
Enhanced login controls 555
You can enhance the security for large, heterogeneous applications by

authenticating logins with a central repository. Adaptive Server supports
these external authentication methods:
• Kerberos – provides a centralized and secure authentication
mechanism in enterprise environments that employ the Kerberos
infrastructure. Authentication occurs with a trusted, third-party server
called a key distribution center (KDC) that verifies both the client and
the server.
• LDAP user authentication – Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP) provides a centralized authentication mechanism based on a
user’s login name and password.
• PAM user authentication – Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM)
provides a centralized authentication mechanism that uses interfaces
provided by the operating system for administration and runtime
application interfaces.

Configuring Adaptive Server for network-based security
Configuring Adaptive Server for network-based

security
Figure 16-1 shows a client application using a security mechanism to ensure a
secure connection with Adaptive Server.
Figure 16-1: Establishing secure connections between a client and
Adaptive Server
Security mechanism
connection
Client application Adaptive Server

The secure connection between a client and a server can be used for login
authentication and message protection.
If a client requests authentication services:
1 The client validates the login with the security mechanism. The security
mechanism returns a credential, which contains security-relevant
information.
2 The client sends the credential to Adaptive Server.
3 Adaptive Server authenticates the client’s credential with the security
mechanism. If the credential is valid, a secure connection is established
between the client and Adaptive Server.
If the client requests message protection services:
1 The client uses the security mechanism to prepare the data packet it sends
to Adaptive Server.
Depending upon which security services are requested, the security
mechanism might encrypt the data or create a cryptographic signature
associated with the data.

CHAPTER 16 External Authentication
2 The client sends the data packet to Adaptive Server.

3 Upon receiving the data packet, Adaptive Server uses the security
mechanism to perform any required decryption and validation.
4 Adaptive Server returns results to the client, using the security mechanism
to perform the security functions that were requested; for example,
Adaptive Server may return the results in encrypted form.
Security services and Adaptive Server

Depending on the security mechanism you choose, Adaptive Server allows you
to use one or more of these security services:
• Unified login – authenticates users once, without requiring them to supply
a name and password every time they log in to an Adaptive Server.
• Message confidentiality – encrypts data over the network.
• Mutual authentication – verifies the identity of the client and the server.
Mutual authentication can be requested only by the client; it cannot be
required by Adaptive Server.
• Message integrity – verifies that data communications have not been
modified.
• Replay detection – verifies that data has not been intercepted by an
intruder.
• Out-of-sequence check – verifies the order of data communications.
• Message origin checks – verifies the origin of the message.

• Remote procedure security – establishes mutual authentication, message

confidentiality, and message integrity for remote procedure
communications.
Note The security mechanism you are using may not employ all of these
services. See “Getting information about available security services” on
page 517.
Administering network-based security

Table 16-1 provides an overall process for using the network-based security
functions provided by Adaptive Server. You must install Adaptive Server
before you can complete the steps in Table 16-1.
Table 16-1: Administering network-based security
Step Description See
1. Set up configuration files: Edit the libtcl.cfg file. • “Setting up configuration files
• libtcl.cfg Edit the objectid.dat file. for security” on page 497
• objectid.dat Edit the interfaces file or Directory • The Open Client/Server
Service. Configuration Guide for your
• interfaces (or directory service)
platform
2. Make sure the security The security administrator must add • The documentation supplied
administrator for the security names and passwords for users and with your security mechanism
mechanism has created logins for servers in the security mechanism. • “Identifying users and servers
each user and for the Adaptive For DCE, the security administrator must to the security mechanism” on
Server and Backup Server. create a keytab file for server entries. page 502
3. Configure security for your Use sp_configure. “Configuring Adaptive Server
installation. for security” on page 503
4. Restart Adaptive Server. Activates the use security services The Configuration Guide for
parameter. your platform
5. Add logins to Adaptive Server to Use sp_addlogin to add users. Optionally, “Adding logins to support
support enterprise-wide login. specify a default secure login with unified login” on page 507
sp_configure.
6. Determine the security model for Use sp_serveroption to choose the “Establishing security for remote
remote procedures, and set up the security model A or B. procedures” on page 508
local and remote servers for RPC
security.

Step Description See

7. Connect to the server and use Use isql_r or Open Client Client-Library • “Connecting to the server and
security services. to connect to Adaptive Server, specifying using the security services” on
the security services you want to use. page 514
• The Open Client/Server
Configuration Guide for your
platform
• “Security Features” in the
Open Client Client-Library/C
Reference Manual
8. Check the security services and Use the functions show_sec_services “Getting information about
security mechanisms that are and is_sec_services_on to check which available security services” on
available. security services are available. page 517
For a list of security mechanisms and
their security services supported by
Adaptive Server, use select to query the
syssecmechs system table.
Setting up configuration files for security

Configuration files are created during installation at a default location in the
Sybase directory structure.
Table 16-2: Names and locations for configuration files
File name Description Location
libtcl.cfg The driver configuration file contains information UNIX platforms:
regarding directory, security, and network drivers, $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config
and any required initialization information. Windows platforms:
%SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%\ini
objectid.dat The object identifiers file maps global object UNIX platforms: $SYBASE/config
identifiers to local names for character set, Windows platforms: %SYBASE%\ini
collating sequence, and security mechanisms.
UNIX: interfaces The interfaces file contains connection and security UNIX platforms: $SYBASE
Desktop information for each server listed in the file. Desktop platforms: SYBASE_home\ini
platforms: sql.ini
Note In Adaptive Server version 12.5.1 and later,
you can use a Directory Service instead of the
interfaces file.
For a detailed description of the configuration files, see the Open Client/Server
Configuration Guide for your platform.

Specifying security information for the server

Use an interfaces file or a Directory Service to provide information about the
servers in your installation.
The interfaces file contains network and security information for servers. To
use security services, the interfaces file must include line for “secmech” that
specifies the global identifier or identifiers of the security services you plan to
use.
Adaptive Server supports Directory Services to keep track of information
about servers. A Directory Service manages the creation, modification, and
retrieval of information about network servers. The advantage of using a
Directory Service is that you do not need to update multiple interfaces files
when a new server is added to your network or when a server moves to a new
address. To use security services with a Directory Service, you must define the
secmech security attribute to point to one or more global identifiers of the
security services you plan to use.
UNIX tools for specifying the security mechanism

To specify the security mechanism or mechanisms:
• If you are using the interfaces file, use the dscp utility.
• If you are using a Directory Service, use the dscp_r utility.
Note The dsedit tool, which helps you create entries for either the
interfaces file or a Directory Service, is available on UNIX platforms.
However, it does not support the creation of secmech entries for security
mechanisms.
For more information about dscp, see the Open Client/Server Configuration
Guide for UNIX.
Desktop tools for specifying server attributes

To provide information about the servers for your installation in the sql.ini file
or a Directory Service, use the dsedit utility. This utility provides a graphical
user interface for specifying server attributes such as the server version, name,
and security mechanism. For the security mechanism attribute, you can specify
one or more object identifiers for the security mechanisms you plan to use. For
information about using dsedit, see the Open Client/Server Configuration
Guide for Desktop Platforms.

Preparing libtcl.cfg to use network-based security

libtcl.cfg and libtcl64.cfg (for 64-bit applications) contain information about
three types of drivers:
• Network (Net-Library)
• Directory Services
• Security
A driver is a Sybase library that provides an interface to an external service
provider. Drivers are dynamically loaded so that you can change the driver
used by an application without relinking the application.
Entries for network drivers

The syntax for a network driver entry is:
driver=protocol description
where:
• driver – is the name of the network driver.
• protocol – is the name of the network protocol.
• description – is a description of the entry. This element is optional.
Note If you do not specify a network driver, an appropriate driver for your
application and platform is automatically used. For example, for UNIX
platforms, a driver that can handle threads is automatically chosen when
security services are being used.
Entries for Directory Services

Directory Services entries apply if you want to use a Directory Service instead
of the interfaces file. See the configuration documentation for your platform,
and the Open Client/Server Configuration Guide for your platform.
Entries for security drivers

The syntax for a security driver entry is:
provider=driver init-string
where:

• provider – is the local name for the security mechanism. The mapping of
the local name to a global object identifier is defined in objectid.dat.
The default local names are:
• “dce” – for the DCE security mechanism.
• “csfkrb5” – for the CyberSAFE or MIT Kerberos security
mechanism.
• “LIBSMSSP” – for Windows LAN Manager on Windows NT or
Windows 95 (clients only).
If you use a local mechanism name other than the default, change the local
name in the objectid.dat file (For an example, see “The objectid.dat file”
on page 502).
• driver – is the name of the security driver. The default location of all
drivers for UNIX platforms is $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/lib. The default
location for Windows platform is %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%\dll.
• init-string – is an initialization string for the driver. This element is
optional. The value for init-string varies by driver:
• DCE driver – the following is the syntax for init-string, where
cell_name is the name of your DCE cell:
secbase=/.../cell_name
• Kerberos driver – the following is the syntax for init-string, where
realm is the default Kerberos realm name:
secbase=@realm
• Windows NT LAN Manager – init-string is not applicable.
UNIX platform information

No special tools for editing the libtcl.cfg file are available. Use your favorite
editor to comment and uncomment the entries that are already in place after
you install Adaptive Server.
After you install Adaptive Server on a UNIX platform, the libtcl.cfg file
already contains entries for the three sections of the file:
• [DRIVERS]
• [DIRECTORY]
• [SECURITY]
The sections do not have to be in a specific order.

Make sure that the entries you do not want to use are commented (begin with
“;”) and the entries you want are uncommented (do not begin with “;”).
For more information, see the Open Client/Server Configuration Guide for
UNIX
Sample libtcl.cfg for Sun Solaris

[DRIVERS]
;libtli.so=tcp unused ; This is the non-threaded tli driver.
;libtli_r.so=tcp unused ; This is the threaded tli driver.
[DIRECTORY]
;dce=libsybddce.so ditbase=/.:/subsys/sybase/dataservers
;dce=libsybddce.so ditbase=/.:/users/cfrank
[SECURITY]
dce=libsybsdce.so secbase=/.../svrsole4_cell
This libtcl.cfg file uses the DCE security service. This file does not use
Directory Services because all [DIRECTORY] section entries are commented.
Because all entries in the [DRIVERS] section for network drivers are also
commented, appropriate drivers are automatically chosen by the system.
Adaptive Server automatically chooses a threaded driver when you use
security services, and chooses an unthreaded driver for applications that cannot
work with threaded drivers. For example, Backup Server does not support
security services and does not work with a threaded driver.
Desktop platform information

The ocscfg utility automatically creates section headings for the libtcl.cfg file;
you can also use osccfg to edit the libtcl.cfg file.
This is a sample libtcl.cfg file for desktop platforms:
[NT_DIRECTORY]
ntreg_dsa=LIBDREG ditbase=software\sybase\serverdsa
[DRIVERS]
NLWNSCK=TCP Winsock TCP/IP Net-Lib driver
NLMSNMP=NAMEPIPE Named Pipe Net-Lib driver
NLNWLINK=SPX NT NWLINK SPX/IPX Net-Lib driver
NLDECNET=DECNET DecNET Net-Lib driver
[SECURITY]
NTLM=LIBSMSSP

See the Open Client/Server Configuration Guide for Desktop Platforms.
The objectid.dat file

The objectid.dat file maps global object identifiers, such as the one for the DCE
service (for example, an identifier like 1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.1) to local names,
such as “dce”. The objectid.dat file contains sections such as [CHARSET] for
character sets and [SECURITY] for security services. Following is a sample
objectid.dat file:
secmech]
1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.1 = dce
1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.3 = NTLM
1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.6 = csfkrb5
Use a text editor to change this file only if you have changed the local name of
a security service in the libtcl.cfg file.
For example, if you changed:
[SECURITY]
dce=libsybsdce.so secbase=/.../svrsole4_cell
to:
[SECURITY]
dce_group=libsybsdce.so secbase=/.../svrsole4_cell
Change the objectid.dat in libtcl.cfg to reflect the change. Simply change the
local name in the line for DCE in objectid.dat:
1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.1 = dce_group
Note You can specify only one local name per security mechanism.
Identifying users and servers to the security mechanism

The security administrator for the security mechanism must define principals
(both users and servers) to the security mechanism. Table 16-3 lists tools you
can use to add users and servers.

Table 16-3: Defining users and servers to the security mechanism

Security mechanism Command or tool
DCE Use the dcecp’s user and create commands to create a new principal (user or server). In
addition, use the keytab create command to create a DCE keytab file, which contains a
principal’s password in encrypted form.
When you define a server to DCE, use command options that specify that the new
principal can act as a server.
Kerberos See your Kerberos vendor-specific tools for information about defining users and
servers. See “Using Kerberos” on page 518 for more information about Kerberos and
Adaptive Server.
Windows NT LAN Run the User Manager tool to define users to the Windows NT LAN Manager. Define
Manager the Adaptive Server name as a user to Windows NT LAN Manager and display Adaptive
Server as that user name.
Note In a production environment, control access to files that contain the keys
of the servers and users. If users can access the keys, they can create a server
that impersonates your server.
See the documentation available from the third-party provider of the security
mechanism for detailed information about how to perform required
administrative tasks.
Configuring Adaptive Server for security

Adaptive Server includes several configuration parameters for administering
network-based security. To set these parameters, you must be a system security
officer. All parameters for network-based security are part of the
“Security-Related” configuration parameter group.
Enabling network-based security

To enable or disable network-based security, use sp_configure to set the use
security services configuration parameter. .
If use security services is set to 1, Adaptive Server supports a security

mechanism when both of the following circumstances are true:
• The security mechanism’s global identifier is listed in the interfaces file or
Directory Service.

• The global identifier is mapped in objectid.dat to a local name that is listed

in libtcl.cfg.
For information about how Adaptive Server determines which security
mechanism to use for a particular client, see “Using security mechanisms for
the client” on page 516.
Requiring unified login

To require all users, other than the system security officer, to be authenticated
by a security mechanism, set the unified login required configuration parameter
to 1. Only the user with the sso_role can log in to the server with a user name
and password when this configuration parameter is set:
sp_configure "unified login required", [0|1]
For example, to require all logins to be authenticated by a security mechanism,
execute:
sp_configure "unified login required", 1
Establishing a secure default login

When a user with a valid credential from a security mechanism logs in to
Adaptive Server, the server checks whether the user name exists in
master..syslogins. If it does, Adaptive Server uses that user name. For example,
if a user logs in to the DCE security mechanism as “ralph,” and “ralph” is in
master..syslogins, Adaptive Server uses all roles and authorizations defined for
“ralph” in the server.
However, if a user with a valid credential logs in to Adaptive Server, but is
unknown to the server, the login is accepted only if a secure default login is
defined with sp_configure. Adaptive Server uses the default login for any user
who is not defined in master..syslogins, but who is preauthenticated by a
security mechanism. The syntax is:
sp_configure "secure default login", 0, login_name
The default value for secure default login is “guest.”
A secure default login must also be a valid login in master..syslogins. For
example, to set the “gen_auth” as the default login:
1 Use sp_addlogin to add the login as a valid user in Adaptive Server:
sp_addlogin gen_auth, pwgenau
This procedure sets the initial password to “pwgenau”.

2 Designate the login as the security default:

sp_configure "secure default login", 0, gen_auth
Adaptive Server uses this login for a user who is preauthenticated by a
security mechanism but is unknown to Adaptive Server.
Note More than one user can assume the suid associated with the secure
default login. Therefore, you might want to activate auditing for all
activities of the default login. You may also want to consider using
sp_addlogin to add all users to the server.
See “Adding logins to support unified login” on page 507 and “Adding logins
to Adaptive Server” on page 399.
Mapping security mechanism login names to server names

Some security mechanisms may allow login names that are invalid in Adaptive
Server. For example, login names that are longer than 30 characters, or login
names containing special characters such as !, %, *, and & are invalid in
Adaptive Server. All login names in Adaptive Server must be valid identifiers.
See Chapter 3, “Expressions, Identifiers, and Wildcard Characters,” in the
Reference Manual.
Table 16-4 shows how Adaptive Server converts invalid characters in login
names:
Table 16-4: Conversion of invalid characters in login names
Invalid characters Converts to
Ampersand & Underscore _
Apostrophe ’
Backslash \
Colon :
Comma ,
Equals sign =
Left quote ‘
Percent %
Right angle bracket >
Right quote ’
Tilde ~

Invalid characters Converts to

Caret ^ Dollar sign $
Curly braces { }
Exclamation point !
Left angle bracket <
Parenthesis ( )
Period .
Question mark ?
Asterisk * Pound sign #
Minus sign -
Pipe |
Plus sign +
Quotation marks "
Semicolon ;
Slash /
Square brackets [ ]
Requiring message confidentiality with encryption

To require all messages into and out of Adaptive Server to be encrypted, set the
msg confidentiality reqd configuration parameter to 1. If this parameter is 0 (the
default), message confidentiality is not required but may be established by the
client. The syntax is:
sp_configure configuration_parameter, [0 | 1]
For example, to require that all messages be encrypted, execute:
sp_configure "msg confidentiality reqd", 1
Requiring data integrity

Adaptive Server allows you to use the msg integrity reqd configuration
parameter to require that one or more types of data integrity be checked for all
messages. Set msg integrity reqd to 1 to require that all messages be checked for
general tampering. If msg integrity reqd is 0 (the default), message integrity is
not required but may be established by the client if the security mechanism
supports it.

Memory requirements for network-based security

Allocate approximately 2K additional memory per secure connection. The
value of the max total_memory configuration parameter specifies the amount of
memory that Adaptive Server requires at start-up. For example, if your server
uses 2K logical pages, and if you expect the maximum number of secure
connections occurring at the same time to be 150, increase the max
total_memory parameter by 150, which increases memory allocation by 150 2K
blocks.
The syntax is:
sp_configure “max total_memory”, value
For example, if Adaptive Server requires 75,000 2K blocks of memory,
including the increased memory for network-based security, execute:
sp_configure "max total_memory", 75000
see Chapter 3, “Configuring Memory,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.
Adding logins to support unified login

When users log in to Adaptive Server with a preauthenticated credential,
Adaptive Server:
1 Checks whether the user is a valid user in master..syslogins. If the user is
listed in master..syslogins, Adaptive Server accepts the login without
requiring a password.
2 If the user name is not in master..syslogins, Adaptive Server checks
whether a default secure login is defined. If the default login is defined, the
user is logged in successfully using the default. If a default login is not
defined, the user cannot log in.
Therefore, consider whether you want to allow only those users who are
defined as valid logins to use Adaptive Server, or whether you want users to be
able to log in with the default login. To define the default, add the default login
in master..syslogins and use sp_configure. See “Establishing a secure default
login” on page 504.

General procedure for adding logins

Follow the general procedure described in Table 16-5 to add logins to the
server and, optionally, to add users with appropriate roles and authorizations to
one or more databases.
Table 16-5: Adding logins and authorizing database access
Command or
Task Required role procedure See
1. Add a login for the System security officer sp_addlogin “Adding logins to Adaptive Server” on
user. page 399
2. Add the user to one System administrator or sp_adduser – “Adding users to databases” on page
or more databases. Database owner execute this 402
procedure from
within the database.
3. Add the user to a System administrator or sp_changegroup – • “Changing a user’s group
group in a database. Database owner execute this membership” on page 427
procedure from • sp_changegroup in the Reference
within the database. Manual
4. Grant system roles System administrator or grant role • “Creating and assigning roles to
to the user. system security officer users” on page 408
• grant in the Reference Manual
5. Create System security officer create role • “Creating and assigning roles to
user-defined roles grant role users” on page 408 in the Reference
and grant the roles to Manual
users. • grant in the Reference Manual
• create role in the Reference Manual
6. Grant access to Database object owners Chapter 17, “Managing User
database objects. Permissions”
Establishing security for remote procedures

Adaptive Server acts as the client when it connects to another server to execute
a remote procedure call (RPC).
One physical connection is established between the two servers. The servers
use the physical connection to establish one or more logical connections—one
logical connection for each RPC.

Security model A
In security model A, which is the default, Adaptive Server does not support
security services such as message confidentiality via encryption between the
two servers.
Security model B
In security model B, the local Adaptive Server receives a credential from the
security mechanism and uses the credential to establish a secure physical
connection with the remote Adaptive Server. You can use one or more of these
security services with model B:
• Mutual authentication – the local server authenticates the remote server by
retrieving the credential of the remote server and verifying it with the
security mechanism. The credentials of both servers are authenticated and
verified.
• Message confidentiality via encryption – messages are encrypted when
sent to the remote server, and results from the remote server are encrypted.
• Message integrity – messages between the servers are checked for
tampering.
Unified login and the remote procedure models

If the local server and remote server are set up to use security services, you can
use unified login on both servers with either model, using one of these two
methods:
• The system security officer defines a user as “trusted” with
sp_remoteoption on the remote server. A security mechanism such as DCE
authenticates the user and password. The user gains access to the local
server using a “unified login” and executes an RPC on the remote server.
The user is trusted on the remote server and does not need to supply a
password.
• A user specifies a password for the remote server when he or she connects
to the local server. The facility to specify a remote server password is
provided by the ct_remote_pwd routine available with Open Client
Client-Library/C. See the Open Client Client-Library/C Reference
Manual.

Establishing the security model for RPCs

To establish the security model for RPCs for model A and B, use
sp_serveroption. The syntax is:
sp_serveroption server, optname, [true | false]
To establish the security model, set optname to rpc security model A or rpc
security model B. server names the remote server.
For example, to set security model B for remote server TEST3, execute:
sp_serveroption test3, "rpc security model B", true
The default model is “A.” No server options need to be set for model A.
See Reference Manual: Procedures.
Rules for setting up security model B for RPCs

Follow these rules when setting up security model B for RPCs:
• Both servers must be using security model B.
• Both servers must be using the same security mechanism, and that security
mechanism must support the security services set with sp_serveroption.
• The system security officer of the local server must specify any security
services that are required by the remote server. For example, if the remote
server requires that all messages use the message confidentiality security
service, the system security officer must use sp_serveroption to activate
use message confidentiality.
• Logins that are authenticated by a security mechanism and log in to

Adaptive Server using “unified login” cannot execute RPCs on the remote
procedure unless the logins are specified as “trusted” on the remote server,
or the login specifies the password for the remote server. Users, when they
use Open Client Client-Library, can use the routine ct_remote_pwd to
specify a password for server-to-server connections. A system
administrator on Adaptive Server can use sp_remoteoption to specify that
a user is trusted to use the remote server without specifying a password.
Preparing to use security model B for RPCs

Table 16-6 provides steps for using security model B to establish security for
RPCs.

Table 16-6: Using security model B for RPCs

Task, who performs it, Command, system procedure, or
and where tool See
System administrator from the UNIX: dscp “Specifying security information for
operating system: Desktop: dsedit the server” on page 498
1. Make sure the interfaces file dscp in the Open Client/Server
or the Directory Service Configuration Guide for UNIX
contains an entry for both dsedit in the Open Client/Server
servers and a secmech line Configuration Guide for Desktop
listing the security Platforms
mechanism.
System security officer on sp_addserver “Adding a remote server” on page
remote server: Example: 481
2. Add the local server to sp_addserver "lcl_server" sp_addserver in the Reference
master..sysservers. Manual.
System security officer on sp_addlogin “Adding logins to Adaptive Server”
remote server: Example: on page 399
3. Add logins to sp_addlogin user1, "pwuser1" sp_addlogin in the Reference Manual
master..syslogins.
System security officer on sp_configure – to set use security “Establishing the security model for
remote server: services. RPCs” on page 510
4. Set use security services on, sp_serveroption – to set the RPC security “Enabling network-based security”
and set the rpc security model model. on page 503
B as the model for connections Example: use security services in Chapter 5,
with the local server. “Setting Configuration Parameters”
sp_configure "use security
services", 1 sp_configure and sp_serveroption in
sp_serveroption lcl_server, the Reference Manual: Procedures
"rpc security model B", true
System administrator on sp_remoteoption “Password checking for remote
remote server: Example: users” on page 490
5. Optionally, specify certain sp_remoteoption lcl_server, sp_remoteoption in the Reference
users as “trusted” to log in to user1, user1, trusted, true Manual: Procedures
the remote server from the
local server without supplying
a password.
System security officer on sp_addserver “Adding a remote server” on page
local server: Example: 481
6. Add both the local server sp_addserver lcl_server, local sp_addserver in the Reference
and the remote server to sp_addserver rem_server Manual: Procedures
master..sysservers.

Task, who performs it, Command, system procedure, or

and where tool See
System security officer on sp_addlogin “Adding logins to Adaptive Server”
local server: Example: sp_addlogin user1, on page 399
7. Add logins to "pwuser1" sp_addlogin in the Reference Manual:
master..logins. Procedures
System security officer on sp_configure – to set use security “Establishing the security model for
local server: services. RPCs” on page 510
8. Set use security services on, sp_serveroption – to set the RPC security “Enabling network-based security”
and set the rpc security model model. on page 503
B as the model for connections Example: use security services in Chapter 5,
with the remote server. “Setting Configuration Parameters”
sp_configure "use security
services", 1 sp_configure and sp_serveroption in
sp_serveroption rem_server, the Reference Manual: Procedures
"rpc security model B", true
System security officer on sp_serveroption “Setting server connection options”
local server: Example: on page 483
9. Specify the security sp_serveroption rem_server, sp_serveroption in the Reference
mechanism and the security "security mechanism", dce Manual: Procedures
services to use for connections sp_serveroption rem_server,
with the remote server. "use message integrity", true
Example of setting up security model B for RPCs

This example assumes that:
• A local server, “lcl_serv,” runs RPCs on a remote server, “rem_serv.”
• Both servers use security model B and the DCE security service.
• The mutual authentication and message integrity RPC security services
are in effect.
• “User1” and “user2” use unified logins to log in to the local server,
“lcl_serv,” and run RPCs on “rem_serv.” These users are “trusted” on
“rem_serv” and need not specify a password for the remote server.
• “User3” does not use a unified login, is not trusted, and must supply a
password to Adaptive Server when logging in.
To set up security for RPCs between the servers:
The interfaces file or Directory Service must have entries for “rem_serv” and
“lcl_serv.” Each entry should specify the “dce” security service. For example,
you might have these interfaces entries, as created by the dscp utility:

## lcl_serv (3201)
lcl_serv
master tli tcp /dev/tcp \x00020c8182d655110000000000000000
query tli tcp /dev/tcp \x00020c8182d655110000000000000000
secmech 1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.1
## rem_serv (3519)
rem_serv
master tli tcp /dev/tcp \x000214ad82d655110000000000000000
query tli tcp /dev/tcp \x000214ad82d655110000000000000000
secmech 1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.1
System security officer on remote server “rem_serv” issues:
sp_addserver ’lcl_serv’
sp_addlogin user1, "eracg12"
sp_addlogin user2, "esirpret"
sp_addlogin user3, "drabmok"
sp_configure "use security services", 1
sp_serveroption lcl_serv, "rpc security model B", true
sp_serveroption lcl_serv, "security mechanism", dce
System administrator on remote server “rem_serv” issues:
sp_remoteoption lcl_serv, user1, user1, trusted, true
sp_remoteoption lcl_serv, user2, user2, trusted, true
System security officer on local server “lcl_serv” issues::
sp_addserver lcl_serv, local
sp_addserver rem_serv
sp_addlogin user1, "eracg12"
sp_addlogin user2, "esirpret"
sp_addlogin user3, "drabmo1"
sp_configure "use security services", 1
sp_configure rem_serv, "rpc security model B", true
sp_serveroption rem_serv, "security mechanism", dce
sp_serveroption rem_serv, "mutual authentication" true
sp_serveroption rem_serv, "use message integrity" true
Note To use the security services on either server, you must restart the server
so the use security services static parameter takes effect.

Getting information about remote servers

sp_helpserver displays information about servers. When you run sp_helpserver
without an argument, it provides information about all the servers listed in
sysservers. You can specify a particular server to receive information about
that server. The syntax is:
sp_helpserver [server]
For example, to display information about the GATEWAY server, execute:
sp_helpserver GATEWAY
Connecting to the server and using the security services

The isql and bcp utilities include the following command line options to enable
network-based security services on the connection:
• -K keytab_file
• -R remote_server_principal
• -V security_options
• -Z security_mechanism
These options are described in the following paragraphs.

• -K keytab_file – can be used only with DCE security, and specifies a DCE
keytab file that contains the security key for the user logging in to the
server. You can create keytab files with the DCE dcecp utility—see your
DCE documentation.
If the -K option is not supplied, the isql user must be logged in to DCE. If
the user specifies the -U option, the name specified with -U must match the
name defined for the user in DCE.
• -R remote_server_principal – specifies the principal name for the server
as defined to the security mechanism. By default, a server’s principal name
matches the server’s network name (which is specified with the -S option
or the DSQUERY environment variable). The -R option must be used
when the server’s principal name and network name are not the same.

• -V security_options – specifies network-based user authentication. With

this option, the user must log in to the network’s security system before
running the utility. In this case, if a user specifies the -U option, the user
must supply the network user name known to the security mechanism; any
password supplied with the -P option is ignored. -V can be followed by a
security_options string of key-letter options to enable additional security
services. These key letters are:
• c – enables data confidentiality service.
• i – enables data integrity service.
• m – enables mutual authentication for connection establishment.
• o – enables data origin stamping service.
• r – enables data replay detection.
• q – enables out-of-sequence detection.
• -Z security_mechanism – specifies the name of a security mechanism to

use on the connection.
Security mechanism names are defined in the libtcl.cfg configuration file. If no
security_mechanism name is supplied, the default mechanism is used. See the
Open Client/Server Configuration Guide for your platform.
If you log in to the security mechanism and then log in to Adaptive Server, you
do not need to specify the isql -U option because Adaptive Server gets the user
name from the security mechanism. For example, consider the following
session:
svrsole4% dce_login user2
Enter Password:
svrsole4% $SYBASE/bin/isql_r -V
1> select suser_name()
2> go
------------------------------
user2
For this example, “user2” logs in to DCE with dce_login and then logs in to
Adaptive Server without specifying the -U option. The -V option without
parameters implicitly specifies one security service: unified login.
For more information about Adaptive Server utilities, see the Utility Guide.

If you are using Client-Library to connect to Adaptive Server, you can define
security properties before connecting to the server. For example, to check
message sequencing, set the CS_SEC_DETECTSEQ property. For
information about using security services with Client-Library, see the Open
Client Client-Library/C Reference Manual.
Example using security services

This example assumes that your login is “mary” and you want to use the DCE
security mechanism with unified login (always in effect when you specify the
-V option of isql or bcp), message confidentiality, and mutual authentication for
remote procedures. You want to connect to server WOND and run remote
procedures on GATEWAY with mutual authentication. Assuming that a system
security officer has set up both WOND and GATEWAY for rpc model B, added
you as a user on both servers, and defined you as a remote, “trusted” user on
GATEWAY, you can use the following process:
1 Log in to the DCE security mechanism and receive a credential:
dce_login mary
2 Log in to the Adaptive Server with isql:
isql -SWOND -Vcm
3 Run:
GATEWAY...sp_who
GATEWAY...mary_prc1
GATEWAY...mary_prc2
Now, all messages that Mary sends to the server and receives from the server
are encrypted (message confidentiality), and when she runs remote procedures,
both the WOND and GATEWAY servers are authenticated.
Using security mechanisms for the client

Adaptive Server, when it is started, determines the set of security mechanisms
it supports. See “Determining supported security services and mechanisms”
on page 517. From the list of supported security mechanisms, Adaptive Server
must choose the one to be used for a particular client.
If the client specifies a security mechanism (for example with the -Z option of
isql), Adaptive Server uses that security mechanism. Otherwise, it uses the first
security mechanism listed in the libtcl.cfg file.

Getting information about available security services

Adaptive Server lets you determine:
• What security mechanisms and services are supported by Adaptive Server
• What security services are active for the current session
• Whether a particular security service is enabled for the session
Determining supported security services and mechanisms

A system table, syssecmechs, provides information about the security
mechanisms and security services supported by Adaptive Server. The table,
which is dynamically built when you query it, contains these columns:
• sec_mech_name – is the name of the security mechanism; for example, the
security mechanism might be “dce” or “NT LANMANAGER.”
• available_service – is the name of a security service supported by the
security mechanism; for example, the security service might be “unified
login.”
The table may have several rows for a single security mechanism: one row for
each security service supported by the mechanism.
To list all the security mechanisms and services supported by Adaptive Server,
run:
select * from syssecmechs
The result might look something like this:
sec_mech_name available_service
------------------------------ --------------------
dce unifiedlogin
dce mutualauth
dce delegation
dce integrity
dce confidentiality
dce detectreplay
dce detectseq
Determining active security services

To determine which security services are active for the current session, use the
function show_sec_services:
select show_sec_services()

--------------------------------------------------
unifiedlogin mutualauth confidentiality
(1 row affected)
Determining whether a security service Is enabled

To determine whether a particular security service, such as “mutualauth” is
enabled, use the function is_sec_service_on:
is_sec_service_on(security_service_nm)
Where security_service_nm is a security service that is available:
Use the security server that is returned when you query syssecmechs.
For example, to determine whether “mutualauth” is enabled, execute:
select is_sec_service_on("mutualauth")
-----------
1
(1 row affected)
A result of 1 indicates the security service is enabled for the session. A result
of 0 indicates the service is not in use.
Using Kerberos
Kerberos is a network authentication protocol that uses secret-key
cryptography so that a client can prove its identity to a server across a network
connection. User credentials are obtained when the user logs in to the operating
system, or by executing an authentication program. Each application uses these
credentials to perform authentication. Users only have to log in once, instead
of having to log in to each application.
Kerberos assumes the key distribution center (KDC) is running and properly
configured for your realm, and the client libraries are installed under or on each
client host in your realm. For configuration information, consult the
documentation and the reference pages that come with the Kerberos software.
Adaptive Server supports Kerberos through:
• CyberSafe Kerberos libraries
• MIT Kerberos libraries, version 1.3.1

• Native libraries
Note To enable Kerberos security options, you must have ASE_SECDIR, the
“Security and directory services” package.
Kerberos compatibility
Table 16-7 shows which variation of Kerberos is supported on which
platforms.
Table 16-7: Adaptive Server Kerberos interoperability
Generic security
Hardware platforms KDC server standard (GSS) client
Solaris 32 CSF, AD, MIT CSF, MIT, Native
Solaris 64 CSF, AD, MIT CSF, MIT, Native
Linux 32 CSF, AD, MIT MIT, Native
Windows 32 CSF, AD CSF
AIX 32 CSF CSF
Use the following keys to read the interoperability matrix:

• CSF – CyberSafe Ltd.
• AD – Microsoft Active Directory
• MIT – MIT version 1.3.1
Starting Adaptive Server under Kerberos

To start Adaptive Server under Kerberos, add the Adaptive Server name to the
KDC and extract the service key to a key table file. For example:
/krb5/bin/admin admin/ASE -k -t /krb5/v5srvtab -R”
addrn my_ase; mod
my_ase attr nopwchg; ext -n my_ase eytabfile.krb5”
Connecting as: admin/ASE
Connected to csfA5v01 in realm ASE.
Principal added.
Principal modified.
Key extracted.

Disconnected.
Note The administrator can also be authenticated using a password on the

command line. In this example, the -k option is used, which tells the
administrator to search the /krb5/v5srvtab file (specified using the -t option) for
the administrator and the Adaptive Server key, instead of prompting for a
password, which is useful for writing shell scripts.
Configuring Kerberos
The configuration process is similar, regardless of which variety of Kerberos
you use.
1 Set up Kerberos third-party software and create a Kerberos administrative
user. To do this, you must:
a Install Kerberos client software on machines where Open Client
Server clients or Adaptive Server will run. The following client
packages have been verified to work with:
• CyberSafe TrustBroker 4.0
• MIT Kerberos version 1.3.1
b Install the Kerberos KDC server on a separate, dedicated machine.
Note KDCs from CyberSafe TrustBroker 4.0, MIT Kerberos v.1.3.1,

and Microsoft Windows Active Directory have been verified for use
with Adaptive Server.
c Create an administrator account with administration privileges on the

Kerberos server. This account is used for subsequent client actions
such as creating principals from the client machines.
Note Execute the remainder of these steps on the Kerberos client

machine.
2 Add Kerberos principal for Adaptive Server ase120srv or

ase120srv@MYREALM.
3 Extract the keytab file for principal ase120srv@MYREALM and store it as
a file:
/krb5/v5srvtab

The following UNIX examples use the command line tool kadmin,
available with CyberSafe or MIT Kerberos (there are also GUI tools
available to administer Kerberos and users):
CyberSafe Kadmin:
% kadmin aseadmin
Principal - aseadmin@MYREALM
Enter password:
Connected to csfA5v01 in realm ASE.
Command: add ase120srv
Enter password:
Re-enter password for verification:
Principal added.
Command: ext -n ase120srv
Service Key Table File Name (/krb5/v5srvtab):
Key extracted.
Command: quit
Disconnected.
In a production environment, control the access to the keytab file. If a user
can read the keytab file, he or she can create a server that impersonates
your server.
Use chmod and chgrp so that /krb5/v5srvtab is:
-rw-r----- 1 root sybase 45 Feb 27 15:42 /krb5/v5srvtab
When using Active Directory as the KDC, log in to the Domain Controller
to add users and Adaptive Server principals. Use the Active Directory
Users and Computers wizard to guide you through creating users and
principals.
Extracting the keytab file for use with Adaptive Server requires an
optional tool called ktpass, which is included in the Microsoft Support
Tools package.
With Active Directory, extracting the keytab with ktpass is a separate step
from creating the principal. The keytab file on Windows for Adaptive
Server is located with the CyberSafe program files. For example,
c:\Program Files\CyberSafe\v5srvtab is the expected location of the
Adaptive Server keytab file when CyberSafe software is installed on the
C: drive.
4 Add a Kerberos principal for the user “sybuser1” as
“sybuser1@MYREALM”.

5 Start Adaptive Server and use isql to log in as “sa”. The following steps
configure Adaptive Server parameters to use Kerberos security services,
and create the user login account. These are the same on both Windows or
UNIX machines:
• Change configuration parameter use security services to 1:
sp_configure 'use security services', 1
• Add a new login for user, “sybuser1” and then add the user:
sp_addlogin sybuser1, password
6 Shut down Adaptive Server and modify administrative files and
connectivity configuration files.
• On UNIX platforms, the interfaces file is under $SYBASE/ and has an
entry that looks similar to:
ase120srv
master tli tcp myhost 2524
query tli tcp myhost 2524
secmech 1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.6
On Windows platforms, the sql.ini file is in %SYBASE%\ini, and has
an equivalent server entry that looks like:
[ase120srv]
master=TCP,myhost,2524
query=TCP,myhost,2524
secmech=1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.6
• The libtcl.cfg or libtcl64.cfg file is located in

$SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/ on UNIX platforms.The
SECURITY section should have an entry that looks similar to the
following for CyberSafe Kerberos client libraries:
[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libsybskrb.so secbase=@MYREALM
libgss=/krb5/lib/libgss.so
A 64-bit CyberSafe Kerberos client library entry follows:
[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libsybskrb64.so secbase=@MYREALM libgss=
\
/krb5/appsec-rt/lib/64/libgss.so
For a machine that uses MIT Kerberos client libraries, the entry looks
something like:

[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libsybskrb.so
secbase=@MYREALM
libgss=/opt/mitkrb5/lib/libgssapi_krb5.so
For a machine that uses Native OS provided libraries, such as Linux,
it looks similar to:
[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libsybskrb.so secbase=@MYREALM
libgss=/usr/kerberos/lib/libgssapi_krb5.so
On Windows, the %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%\ini\libtcl.cfg file
contains an entry like:
[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libskrb secbase=@MYREALM
libgss=C:\WinNT\System32\gssapi32.dll
Note The libgss=<gss shared object path> specifies the GSS

API library to be used. You must distinctly locate the Kerberos Client
libraries being used, especially when multiple versions are installed
on a machine.
• Also check the objectid.dat under $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/

and make sure the [secmech] section has an entry for csfkrb5:
[secmech]
1.3.6.1.4.1.897.4.6.6 = csfkrb5
7 You can use environment variables to override default locations of keytab
files, Kerberos configuration, and realm configuration files. This is
Kerberos-specific behavior and may not work consistently on all
platforms.
For example, use the CSFC5KTNAME environment variable on
CyberSafe UNIX platforms to specify the keytab file:
% setenv CSFC5KTNAME /krb5/v5srvtab
For MIT Kerberos, the equivalent environment variable is
KRB5_KTNAME.
See the vendor documentation for information about these environment
variables.

You may may need to modify the environment variable for dynamic
library search paths. On UNIX, the most commonly used environment
variable is LD_LIBRARY_PATH; on Windows, PATH is typically set to
include DLL locations. You may need to modify these environment
variables to enable applications to load the third-party objects correctly.
For example, this command adds the location of CyberSafe 32-bit
libgss.so shared object to the search path in a C-shell environment:
% set path = ( /krb5/lib $path )
8 Restart Adaptive Server. You should see:
00:00000:00000:2001/07/25 11:43:09.91 server
Successfully initialized the security mechanism
'csfkrb5'. The SQL Server will support use of this
security mechanism.
9 Use isql as UNIX user “sybuser1” (without the -U and -P arguments) to
connect:
% $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/bin/isql -Sase120srv -V
1>...
You can also use the encryption option:
$SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/bin/isql -Sase120srv –Vc
Using principal names

The principal name is the name the server uses to authenticate with the
Kerberos key distribution center (KDC). When you have multiple instances of
Adaptive Server running, you must have different principal names for each
Adaptive Server.
Specifying the Adaptive Server principal name

Use the DSLISTEN and DSQUERY environment variables, or the dataserver
-sserver_name command line option to specify the Adaptive Server name.
Use either the setenv command or the -k dataserver option to set the principal
name.
By default, the principal name is the name of Adaptive Server. To specify a
different name, set SYBASE_PRINCIPAL before starting Adaptive Server to
use Kerberos:
setenv SYBASE_PRINCIPAL <name of principal>

Once you have set an Adaptive Server principal name, Adaptive Server uses
the value of this variable to authenticate itself to Kerberos.
To specify an Adaptive Server principal name when starting Adaptive Server,
use:
-k <server principal name>
When you start an Adaptive Server with the Kerberos security mechanism
enabled, Adaptive Server first uses the principal name specified with the -k
option for Kerberos authentication. If the -k option is not specified, Adaptive
Server looks for the principal name in the environment variable
SYBASE_PRINCIPAL. If neither is specified, Adaptive Server uses the server
name for authentication.
Adaptive Server accepts Kerberos Open Client connections that use different
server principal names if the entry for the principal name is present in the
keytab file. To allow connections with different principal names:
• Pass an empty string as a parameter for the -k option, or
• Set the SYBASE_PRINCIPAL environment variable to "". For example:
export SYBASE_PRINCIPAL=""
Example In this example, the Adaptive Server name is “secure_ase” and the realm name
is “MYREALM.COM.” The Adaptive Server name is specified on the
command line with -s parameter to the dataserver. The current realm is
specified in libtcl.cfg by a secbase attribute value:
[SECURITY]
csfkrb5=libskrb.so libgss=/krb5/lib/libgss.so
secbase=@MYREALM.COM
The default Adaptive Server principal name is
“secure_ase@MYREALM.COM.” If the principal name defined in the
Adaptive Server keytab file is “aseprincipal@MYREALM.COM,” you can
override the default Adaptive Server principal name by setting a server
principal name using options 1 or 2 below:
• Option 1, specify -k '':
%
$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/bin/dataserver -dmaster.dat
-s secure_ase -k aseprincipal@MYREALM.COM
The Adaptive Server principal name used to authenticate with Kerberos is
“aseprincipal@MYREALM.COM.”
• Option 2, set SYBASE_PRINCIPAL:

setenv SYBASE_PRINCIPAL aseprincipal@MYREALM.COM

$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/bin/dataserver –dmaster.dat
-s secure_ase
“aseprincipal@MYREALM.COM,” the value of $SYBASE_PRINCIPAL.
• Option 3, neither -k nor SYBASE_PRINCIPAL is set:
% $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/bin/dataserver –dmaster.dat
-s secure_ase
“secure_ase@MYREALM.COM.”
Using sybmapname to handle user principal names

sybmapname converts external user principal names used in the Kerberos
environment to the namespace of Adaptive Server user logins. You can
customize the sybmapname shared object and map names specified in the
Kerberos input buffer to names suitable for a login to the Adaptive Server
output buffer.
Use the sybmapname shared object to perform the custom mapping between
the user principal name and the Adaptive Server login name. This shared object
is optionally loaded at server start-up, and the function syb__map_name
contained in the shared object is called after a successful Kerberos
authentication and just before the user principal is mapped to a login in the
syslogins table. This function is useful when the user principal name and the
login name to be mapped are not identical.
syb__map_name(NAMEMAPTYPE *protocol, char *orig,
int origlen, char *mapped, int *mappedlen)
where:
• NAMEMAPTYPE *protocol – refers to a structure reserved for usage of
this function.
• char *orig – is an input buffer that is not null-terminated.
• int origlen – is the input buffer length, which should be less than or
equal to 255 characters.
• char *mapped – is an output buffer that should not be null-terminated.
• int *mappedlen – is an output buffer length, which should be less than
or equal to 30.

syb__map_name returns a value greater than 0 if the mapping succeeds, or

returns a value of 0 if no mapping occurred, and it returns a value less than 0
when an error occurs in syb__map_name. When an error occurs, reporting the
mapping failure is written to the Adaptive Server error log.
For example, to authenticate a Kerberos user on Adaptive Server:
1 Configure Adaptive Server to use the Kerberos security mechanism. See
“Using Kerberos” on page 518 and Open Client/Server documentation,
and the white paper titled “Configuring Kerberos for Sybase” on the
Sybase Web site at http://www.sybase.com/detail?id=1029260.
A sample sybmapname.c file is located in

$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/sample/server/sybmapname.c.
2 Modify sybmapname.c to implement your logic. See “Precautions when
using sybmapname” on page 529.
3 Build the shared object or DLL using the generic platform-specific
makefile supplied. You may need to modify the makefile to suit your
platform-specific settings.
4 Place the resulting shared object generated in a location specified in your
$LD_LIBRARY_PATH on UNIX machines, and PATH variable on
Windows machines. The file should have read and execute permissions for
the “sybase” user.
Note Sybase recommends that only the “sybase” user is allowed read and
execute permissions, and that all other access should be denied.
Verifying your login to Adaptive Server using Kerberos authentication

To verify your login to Adaptive Server using Kerberos authentication, assume
that:
• $SYBASE refers to your release and installation directory.
• $SYBASE_ASE refers to the Adaptive Server version directory that
contains your server binary.
• $SYBASE_OCS refers to the Open Client/Server version directory.
Example 1 If a client’s principal name is user@REALM, and the
corresponding entry in syslogins table is user_REALM, you can code
sybmapname to accept the input string user@realm and to convert the input
string to the output string user_REALM.

Example 2 If the client principal name is user, and the corresponding entry
in syslogins table is USER, then sybmapname can be coded to accept the input
string user and convert this string to uppercase string USER.
sybmapname is loaded by Adaptive Server at runtime and uses its logic to do
the necessary mapping.
The following actions and output illustrate the sybmapname function described
in Example 2. The sybmapname.c file containing the customized definition for
syb__map_name() should be compiled and built as a shared object (or DLL),
and finally placed in the appropriate path location. Start Adaptive Server with
the Kerberos security mechanism enabled.
To initialize the Ticket Granted Ticket (TGT), which is a encrypted file that
provides identification:
$ /krb5/bin/kinit johnd@public
Password for johnd@public:
$
To list the TGT:
$ /krb5/bin/klist
Cache Type: Kerberos V5 credentials cache
Cache Name: /krb5/tmp/cc/krb5cc_9781
Default principal: johnd@public
Log in as “sa” and verify the user login for “johnd”:
$ $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/bin/isql -Usa -P
-Ipwd`/interfaces
1>
1> sp_displaylogin johnd

2> go
No login with the specified name exists.
(return status = 1)
1> sp_displaylogin JOHND

2> go
Suid: 4
Loginame: JOHND
Fullname:
Default Language:
Auto Login Script:
Locked: NO

(return status = 0)
Successful Kerberos authentication, maps lower-case johnd to uppercase
JOHND using the sybmapname utility, and allows user johnd to log in to
Adaptive Server:
$ $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/bin/isql -V -I'pwd'/interfaces
1>
Precautions when using sybmapname

When coding for sybmapname:
• Use caution when making modifications to the sample sybmapname.c
program. Avoid using code that may create a segmentation fault, that may
call exit, that may call system calls, that may change UNIX signals, or that
makes any blocking calls. Improper coding or calls may interfere with the
Adaptive Server engine.
Note Sybase bears no responsibility for coding errors in sybmapname.
• Code defensively, check all pointers before no longer referencing them,

and avoid system calls. The functions you write must be quick name-
filtering functions.
• Do not use goto statements since, depending on the platform, they may
cause unexpected side effects.
• If you use multiple realms, use caution when mapping the user principal
names to a suitable login name to reflect the realm information. For
example, if you have two users whose user principal names are
userA@REALMONE and userB@REALMTWO, respectively, map them to the
login names userA_REALMONE and userB_REALMTWO, instead of userA
or userB. This distinguishes the two users who belong to different realms.

Concurrent Kerberos authentication
Concurrent Kerberos authentication

Adaptive Server version 15.0.3 supports concurrent Kerberos authentication,
whereas earlier versions used locking mechanisms during Kerberos
authentication to protect internal data structures.
When there are concurrent logins using Kerberos authentication, Adaptive
Server now establishes multiple Kerberos authentication sessions.
Version 15.0.3 also resolves an issue with concurrent login sessions, which
may be blocked during Kerberos authentication. This concurrency issueo
ccurs when you use prior versions of Adaptive Server with MIT version 1.3.x
and 1.4.x Kerberos GSSAPI libraries.
Configuring Adaptive Server for LDAP user

authentication
The LDAP user authentication allows client applications to send user name and
password information to Adaptive Server for authentication by the LDAP
server instead of syslogins. Authentication using the LDAP server allows you
to use server-wide passwords instead of Adaptive Server or application-
specific passwords.
LDAP user authentication is ideal if you want to simplify and centralize user
administration, or want to avoid unnecessary complexities for user
administration.
LDAP user authentication works with directory servers that meet Version 3 of
the LDAP protocol standard, including Active Directory, iPlanet, and
OpenLDAP Directory Server.
Use one of these authentication algorithms with LDAP user authentication:
• Composed DN for authentication, available for Adaptive Server version
12.5.1 or later, or,
• Searched DN for authentication, available for Adaptive Server version
12.5.2 and later.
These algorithms differ in how they obtain a user’s distinguished name (DN).
The primary data structure used with the LDAP protocol is the LDAP URL.

An LDAP URL specifies a set of objects or values on an LDAP server.

Adaptive Server uses LDAP URLs to specify an LDAP server and search
criteria to use to authenticate login requests.
The LDAP URL uses this syntax:
ldapurl::=ldap://host:port/node/attributes [base | one | sub] filter
where:
• host – is the host name of the LDAP server.
• port – is the port number of the LDAP server.
• node – specifies the node in the object hierarchy at which to start the
search.
• attributes – is a list of attributes to return in the result set. Each LDAP
server may support a different list of attributes.
• base | one | sub – qualifies the search criteria. base specifies a search of
the base node; one specifies a search of the base node and one sublevel
below the base node; sub specifies a search of the base node and all node
sublevels.
• filter – specifies the attribute or attributes to be authenticated. The filter can
be simple, such as uid=*, or compound, such as (uid=*)(ou=group).
Composed DN algorithm
This is the login sequence when you use the composed DN algorithm:
1 Open Client connects to an Adaptive Server listener port.
2 The Adaptive Server listener accepts the connection.
3 Open Client sends an internal login record.
4 Adaptive Server reads the login record..
5 Adaptive Server binds to the LDAP server with a DN composed from the
primary URL and the login name from the login record. This bind also
uses the password from the login record.
6 The LDAP server authenticates the user, returning either a success or
failure message.
7 If the Primary URL specifies a search, then Adaptive Server sends the
search request to the LDAP server.

Configuring Adaptive Server for LDAP user authentication
8 The LDAP server returns the results of the search.

9 Adaptive Server accepts or rejects the login, based on the search results.
Searched DN algorithm
This is the login sequence when you use the searched DN algorithm:
1 Open Client connects to an Adaptive Server listener port.
2 The Adaptive Server listener accepts the connection.
3 Open Client sends an internal login record.
4 Adaptive Server reads the login record.
5 Adaptive Server binds to the LDAP server with a directory server access
account.
The connection established in steps 5 and 6 may persist between
authentication attempts from Adaptive Server to reuse connections to DN
searches.
failure message.
7 Adaptive Server sends search requests to the LDAP server based on the
login name from the login record and the DN lookup URL.
9 Adaptive Server reads the results to obtain an a value of attribute from the
DN lookup URL.
10 Adaptive Server uses the value of attribute as the DN and the password
from the login record to bind to the LDAP server.
failure message.
12 If the primary URL specifies a search, Adaptive Server sends the search
request to the LDAP server.
14 Adaptive Server accepts or rejects the login, based on the search results.
Adaptive Server reports a generic login failure to the client if any of these
authentication criteria are not met.

You may skip steps 12 and 13 by not specifying search criteria in the primary
or secondary URL strings. The authentication completes, displaying the
success or failure returned by step 11.
Configuring LDAP
These are the steps for configuring Adaptive Server for LDAP authentication.
Configuring LDAP in 1 Specify the Adaptive Server LDAP URL search strings and access account
new Adaptive Server values.
installations
2 Set enable ldap user auth to 2.
3 Add users in the LDAP directory server using LDAP vendor-supplied
tools.
4 Add users to Adaptive Server using sp_addlogin. You can also use
sp_maplogin to automatically create login accounts upon authentication or
apply other login controls.
Migrating existing To avoid disruption of service in existing server installations, migrate Adaptive
Adaptive Servers to Server to LDAP:
LDAP
• Specify an LDAP URL search string to Adaptive Server.
• Set the configuration parameter enable ldap user auth to 1.
• Add users in the LDAP directory server.
• When all users are added to the LDAP server, set enable ldap user auth to
2 to require all authentications to be performed with LDAP, or use
sp_maplogin to override configuration parameters with login controls.
LDAP user authentication administration

Use sp_ldapadmin to create or list an LDAP URL search string, verify an
LDAP URL search string or login, and specify the access accounts and tunable
LDAP user authentication (LDAPUA) related parameters. You must have the
SSO role to execute sp_ldapadmin.
See the Reference Manual: Commands.

Composed DN If you use a simple LDAP server topology and schema, you can use a
examples composed DN algorithm for user authentication. If you use commercially
available schemas (for example, iPlanet Directory Servers or OpenLDAP
Directory Servers), users are created as objects in the same container in the
LDAP server tree, and Adaptive Server determines the user’s DN from the
object’s location. However, there are restrictions on the LDAP server’s
schema:
• You must specify the filter with the attribute name that uniquely identifies
the user to be authenticated.
• You must specify the filter with the attribute name=*. The asterisk is a
wildcard character. The appropriate attribute name to use in the filter
depends on the schema used by the LDAP server.
• The Adaptive Server login name is the same as the short user name for
example, a UNIX user name.
• The DN uses the short user name rather than a full name with embedded
spaces or punctuation. For example, jqpublic meets the restriction for a DN,
but “John Q. Public” does not.
iPlanet example LDAP vendors may use different object names, schema, and attributes than
those used in these examples. There are many possible LDAP URL search
strings, and valid sites may also extend schemas locally or use them in ways
that differ from each other:
• This example uses the uid=* filter. To compose the DN, Adaptive Server
replaces the wildcard with the Adaptive Server login name to be
authenticated, and appends the resulting filter to the node parameter in the
LDAP URL. The resulting DN is:
uid=myloginname,ou=People,dc=mycomany,dc=com
• After a successful bind operation, Adaptive Server uses the connection to
search for attribute names, such as uid, that are equal to the login name:
sp_ldapadmin set_primary_url,
'ldap://myhost:389/ou=People,dc=mycompany,dc=com??sub?uid=*'
• This example uses the schema defined in OpenLDAP 2.0.25, with an
attribute name of cn.
The composed DN is cn=myloginname,dc=mycompany,dc=com:
'ldap://myhost:389/dc=mycompany,dc=com??sub?cn=*'

Searched DN Use the searched DN to use an Active Directory server or other LDAP server
examples environment that does not meet the restrictions to use the composed DN
algorithm.
• Perform these steps for an Active Directory server using a commercially
available user schema from a Windows 2000 Server.
a Set the access account information:
sp_ldapadmin set_access_acct,
'cn=Admin Account, cn=Users, dc=mycompany, dc=com',
'Admin Account secret password'
b Set the primary URL:
sp_ldapadmin set_primary_url, 'ldap://hostname:389/
c Set the DN lookup URL search string:
sp_ldapadmin set_dn_lookup_url,
'ldap://hostname:389/cn=Users,dc=mycompany,dc=com?distinguishedName
?one?samaccountname=*'
On Windows 2000, the short name is typically referred to as the “User Logon
Name” and is given the attribute name samaccountname in the default schema.
This is the attribute name used to match the Adaptive Server login name. The
DN for a user contains a full name with punctuation and embedded spaces (for
example, cn=John Q. Public, cn=Users, dc=mycomany, dc=com. The
DN on Windows does not use the short name, so the searched DN algorithm is
appropriate for sites using the Active Directory schema (the default) as the
LDAP server. The primary URL does not specify a search. Instead, it relies on
the bind operation for authentication.
Examples using You can use LDAP URL search strings to restrict access to groups of users on
search filters to LDAP servers. For example, to restrict logins to users in an accounting group.
restrict Adaptive
Server access use a compound filter to restrict access to the group of users where attribute
group=accounting.
• The following LDAP URL string uses the composed DN algorithm for an
iPlanet server:
'ldap://myhost:389/ou=People,dc=mycompany,
dc=com??sub?(&(uid=*)(group=accounting))'
Adaptive Server binds with DN
uid=mylogin,ou=People,dc=mycompany,dc=com. After successfully
binding with this identity, it searches for:
"ou=People,dc=mycompany,dc=com??sub?(&(uid=mylogin)(group=accounting))"

Authentication succeeds if this search returns any objects.

• These examples use LDAP URL strings with compound filters:
'ldap://myhost:389/ou=people,dc=mycompany,dc=com??s
ub?(&(uid=*)(ou=accounting) (l=Santa Clara))'
sp_ldapadmin, set_primary_url,
'ldap://myhost:389/ou=people,dc=mycompany,dc=com??s
ub?(&(uid=*)(ou=Human%20Resources))'
LDAP user authentication password information changes

There are two LDAP user authentication-related informational messages that
Adaptive Server obtains from the LDAP server and passes to the client:
• If you log in to an Adaptive Server using an LDAP authentication
mechanism with an LDAP user authentication password that is about to
expire, you see:
Your password will expire in <number> days.
• If you attempt to log in to Adaptive Server using an LDAP authentication
mechanism after the LDAP server administrator resets your password or
after your LDAP server password has expired, you see message 4002:
Login failed
If auditing is enabled and the errors auditing option is turned on, message
4099 is sent to the audit log:
Your LDAP password has expired.
Note Configure your LDAP server to give this additional information.

Additionally, Adaptive Server must support the transmission of LDAP
password controls to an LDAP client.

Failover support
When a major failure occurs in the LDAP directory server specified by the
primary URL, and the server no longer responds to network requests, Adaptive
Server attempts to connect to the secondary LDAP directory server specified
by the secondary URL. Adaptive Server uses the LDAP function ldap_init to
determine if it can open a connection to the LDAP directory server. A null or
invalid primary URL string causes Adaptive Server to attempt to fail over to a
secondary URL. Failures returned by LDAP bind or search operations do not
cause Adaptive Server to fail over to the secondary URL.
Adaptive Server logins and LDAP user accounts

Once you enable LDAP user authentication, choose and set an authentication
algorithm and URL strings, you must configure the user accounts. The LDAP
administrator creates and maintain accounts in the LDAP server, and the
database administrator creates and maintains accounts in Adaptive Server.
Alternatively, the database administrator can choose administration options
that allow flexibility with login accounts when integrating Adaptive Server
with external authentication mechanisms such as LDAP server. The database
administrator continues to administer the Adaptive Server account roles,
default database, default language, and other login-specific attributes using
traditional commands and procedures.
Table 16-8 describes the updates to syslogins table Adaptive Server makes at
login time. These updates assume that LDAP user authentication is configured,
the login is not restricted from using LDAP, and you have not set the create
login mapping.

Table 16-8: Updates to syslogins from LDAP

LDAP server
Does the row exist in authentication
syslogins? succeeds? Changes in syslogins
No Yes No change, login fails
No No No change, login fails
Yes Yes Update row if password has
changed
Yes No No change
Secondary lookup server support

Adaptive Server provides uninterrupted support to Adaptive Server clients that
are authenticated by an LDAP server. You can specify a secondary LDAP
lookup server to fail over from a primary LDAP server in the event of the
LDAP server failure or planned downtime.
The health of the URL set is monitored through the following states:
• INITIAL – indicates that LDAP user authentication is not configured.
• RESET – indicates that the URL has been entered with Adaptive Server
administrative commands.
• READY – indicates that the URL is ready to accept connections.
• ACTIVE – indicates that the URL has performed a successful LDAP user
authentication.
• FAILED – indicates that there is a problem connecting to the LDAP server.
• SUSPENDED – indicates that the URL is in maintenance mode, and will
not be used.
The following sequence of events describe the failover and manual failback:
1 The primary and secondary URL sets are configured and in a READY
state.
2 The connections are authenticated using the primary server infrastructure.
3 The primary server fails, and its state is changed to FAILED.
4 Connections automatically begin authentication through the secondary
server infrastructure.

5 The primary server is repaired and brought back online by an LDAP

administrator. The primary LDAP server state is changed by an Adaptive
Server administrator to READY.
6 New connections are authenticated using the primary server.
Note Once Adaptive Server has failed over to the secondary LDAP server, a
database administrator must manually activate the primary LDAP server
before it can be used again.
When Adaptive Server encounters errors connecting to an LDAP server, it

retries the authentication three times. If the errors persist, the LDAP server is
marked as FAILED. See “Troubleshooting LDAP user authentication errors”
on page 546 for information on the LDAP errors that force Adaptive Server
into a retry loop.
Use sp_ldapadmin to configure secondary lookup LDAP servers.
• To set the secondary DN lookup URL, enter:
sp_ldapadmin set_secondary_dn_lookup_url, <URL>
• To set the administrative access account for the secondary DN lookup

URL, enter:
sp_ldapadmin set_secondary_access_acct, <DN>, <password>
• To suspend the use of a primary or secondary URL for authentication,

enter:
sp_ldapadmin suspend, {primary | secondary}
• To activate the set of primary or secondary URLs for authentication, enter:

sp_ldapadmin activate, {primary | secondary}
• To display details about the primary and secondary LDAP server settings
and status, enter:
sp_ldapadmin list
sp_ldapadmin list combines previous outputs from list_access_acct and

list_urls. It has the following expected output for the primary and
secondary servers:
• Search URL
• Distinguished name lookup URL

• Access account DN
• Active [true | false]
• Status [ready | active | failed | suspended | reset]
Adaptive Server version 12.5.4 and later includes the following sp_ldapadmin
options that support secondary servers.
• To display DN lookup URLs for the secondary server, enter:
sp_ldapadmin list_urls
• To display the administrative account for the secondary DN lookup URL,

enter:
sp_ldapadmin list_access_acct
• To display subcommands, enter:

sp_ldapadmin help
LDAP server state transitions

Table 16-9 – Table 16-14 list LDAP server state transitions when each
sp_ldapadmin commands is executed.
Table 16-9 shows the state transitions when you execute sp_ldapadmin
set_URL, where set_URL represents one of these commands:
• set_dn_lookup_url
• set_primary_url
• set_secondary_dn_lookup_url
• set_secondary_url

Table 16-9: State transitions when sp_ldapadmin set_URL is executed

Initial state Final state
INITIAL RESET
RESET RESET
READY READY
ACTIVE RESET
FAILED RESET
SUSPENDED RESET
suspend.
Table 16-10: State transitions when sp_ldapadmin suspend is executed
INITIAL Error
RESET SUSPENDED
READY SUSPENDED
ACTIVE SUSPENDED
FAILED SUSPENDED
SUSPENDED SUSPENDED
activate.
Table 16-11: State transitions when sp_ldapadmin activate is executed

INITIAL Error
RESET READY
READY READY
ACTIVE ACTIVE
FAILED READY
SUSPENDED READY
The following tables show the LDAP server state transitions carried out
implicitly by Adaptive Server.
Table 16-12 shows the state transitions when Adaptive Server is restarted:

Table 16-12: State transitions when Adaptive Server is restarted

INITIAL INITIAL
RESET RESET
READY READY
ACTIVE READY
FAILED FAILED
SUSPENDED SUSPENDED
Adaptive Server only attempts an LDAP login if the LDAP server is in a

READY or ACTIVE state. Table 16-13 shows the state transitions:
Table 16-13: State transitions when an LDAP login succeeds
READY ACTIVE
ACTIVE ACTIVE
Table 16-14 shows the state transitions when an LDAP login fails:
Table 16-14: State transitions when an LDAP login fails
READY FAILED
ACTIVE FAILED
LDAP user authentication tuning

Configure and tune Adaptive Server options based on the load of incoming
connections and the Adaptive Server-LDAP server infrastructure. Configure
these options based on the number of simultaneous incoming requests:
• Use sp_configure to set max native threads, which indicates the number of
native threads per engine.
• Use sp_ldapadmin to configure max_ldapua_native_threads, which
indicates the number of LDAP user authentication native threads per
engine.
Configure the set_timeout option (which indicates the LDAP server bind and
search timeouts) based on the network and the health of the Adaptive
Server/LDAP server infrastructure.

Configure the set_abandon_ldapua_when_full option to specify Adaptive

Server behavior when incoming connections have consumed
max_ldapua_native_threads:
Use these sp_ldapadmin options to configure the LDAP server for better
performance:
• set_max_ldapua_desc – manages the concurrency of the LDAPUA
connection requests. If you are using a distinguished name algorithm,
setting set_max_ldapua_desc to a larger number expedites the LDAPUA
connections Adaptive Server is processing.
• set_num_retries – sets the number of attempts. Tune this number according
to the number of transient errors between Adaptive Server and the LDAP
server. You can nullify transient errors by configuring the number of
retries.
• set_log_interval – controls the number of messages sent to the Adaptive
Server error log for diagnostic purposes. Using a low number clutters the
error log may be helpful in identifying specific errors. Using a large
number sends fewer messages to the error log, but does not have the same
investigative value. Tune set_log_interval according to your error log size.
Adding tighter controls on login mapping

Use sp_maplogin to map users that are authenticated with LDAP or PAM to the
local Adaptive Server login.
Note To map a user authenticated with Kerberos, use sybmapname instead of

sp_maplogin.
Only users with sso_role can create or modify login mappings using
sp_maplogin.
Adaptive Server avoids conflicts between an authentication mechanism setting

for a login and a mapping that uses the login. Potential mapping conflicts are
detected by the stored procedures sp_maplogin, sp_modifylogin, or sp_addlogin.
These controls do not allow maps:
• From one Adaptive Server login name to another login name
• From an external name that already exists as a local login
• To a nonexistent login name

Additionally, when the authentication mechanism is specified with a mapping,

the mechanism is checked with the authentication mechanism set in the target
login.
If a target login’s authentication mechanism restricts the login to use a
particular authentication mechanism, then the mechanism specified with the
mapping must match either that specified for the login or match the “ANY”
authentication mechanism.
When sp_maplogin detects that a conflict exists, sp_maplogin fails and reports
an error that identifies the conflict.
Similarly, sp_modifylogin and sp_addlogin check for an existing mapping that
may conflict with the authenticate with option for the user login.
When sp_modifylogin or sp_addlogin detect a conflict, an error is reported to
identify any conflicts with a login mapping.
Examples Example 1 Maps an LDAP user to the Adaptive Server “sa” login. A
company has adopted LDAP as their repository for all user accounts and has a
security policy that requires LDAP authentication of all users including
database administrators, “adminA” and “adminB,” who may manage hundreds
of Adaptive Servers. Auditing is enabled, and login events are recorded in the
audit trail.
To map these administrator accounts to “sa,” enter:
sp_maplogin LDAP, 'adminA', 'sa'
go
sp_maplogin LDAP, 'adminB', 'sa'
go
Require all users to authenticate using LDAP authentication:
sp_configure 'enable ldap user auth', 2
go
When “adminA” authenticates during login to Adaptive Server, the
distinguished name associated with “adminA” rather than only “sa” is recorded
in the login audit event. This allows each individual performing an action to be
identified in the audit trail.
Because the “adminA” and “adminB” password is set in the LDAP server,
there is no need to maintain the “sa” password on all Adaptive Servers being
managed.
This example also allows different external identities and passwords to be used
for authentication, while their actions within Adaptive Server still require the
special privileges associated with “sa” account.

Example 2 Uses both PAM and LDAP to map users to application logins. A
company has adopted both PAM and LDAP authentication but for different
purposes. The company security policy defines LDAP as the authentication
mechanism for general user accounts, and PAM for special users, such as for a
middle-tier application. A middle-tier application may establish a pool of
connections to Adaptive Server to handle requests on behalf of users of the
middle-tier application.
Configure Adaptive Server for both LDAP and PAM user authentication:
go
sp_configure 'enable pam user auth', 2
go
Establish an Adaptive Server login appX locally with permissions that are
appropriate for the middle-tier application:
sp_addlogin 'appX', password
go
sp_modifylogin appX, 'authenticate with', PAM
go
Instead of hard-coding a simple password in “appX” and maintaining the
password consistently in several different Adaptive Servers, develop a custom
PAM module to authenticate the application in a centralized repository using
additional facts to verify the middle-tier application.
Client application login “appY” requires LDAP authentication of the user with
its LDAP identity and password. Use sp_maplogin to map all LDAP
authenticated users to login “appY,”
sp_addlogin 'appY', password
go
sp_maplogin LDAP, NULL, 'appY'
go
Users of “appY” are authenticated with their company identity and password,
then mapped to a local Adaptive Server login “appY” to execute database
actions. Authentication has occurred with the identity of the LDAP user, which
is recorded in the audit trail, and executes with permissions appropriate to the
application login “appY.”

Troubleshooting LDAP user authentication errors

Adaptive Server may experience the following transient errors when
communicating with the LDAP server. These errors are generally resolved by
retrying the connection. If the errors persist after three retry attempts, Adaptive
Server marks the LDAP server as FAILED.
• LDAP_BUSY – server is busy.
• LDAP_CONNECT_ERROR – error during a connection.
• LDAP_LOCAL_ERROR – error on the client side.
• LDAP_NO_MEMORY – cannot allocate memory on the client side.
• LDAP_OPERATIONS_ERROR – error on the server side.
• LDAP_OTHER – unknown error code.
• LDAP_ADMINLIMIT_EXCEEDED – a search has exceeded a limit.
• LDAP_UNAVAILABLE – server cannot process the request.
• LDAP_UNWILLING_TO_PERFORM – server is not going to process
the request.
• LDAP_LOOP_DETECT – a loop has been detected during a referral.
• LDAP_SERVER_DOWN – server is not reachable (connection fails).
• LDAP_TIMEOUT – LDAP API fails because operation does not
complete in the user-specified amount of time.
Transient errors and a large number of simultaneous login requests may lead to
a large number of repeated error messages in the error log. To increase the
readability of the log, this error message logging algorithm is used:
1 If a message is being logged for the first time, log it.
2 If the last time the message was logged was greater than 3 minutes:
• Log the error message.
• Log the number of times the message was repeated since the message
was last printed.
• Log the time elapsed, in minutes, since the message was printed.
Authentication failures arising from the following are not considered LDAP
errors and are not conditions for retrying the authentication request:
• Bind failure due to bad password or an invalid distinguished name.

• A search after a successful bind that returns a result set of 0 or no attribute

value.
Syntax errors found while parsing the URL are caught when an LDAP URL is
set, and therefore do not fall into any of the above categories.
Configuring an LDAP server

User authentication for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
supports the Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS)
protocol, providing secure data transmission between Adaptive Server and an
LDAP server.
❖ Configure a connection to an LDAP server

1 Make sure that all trusted root certificates are located in the same file.
After you define the trusted servers, Adaptive Server configures a secure
connection, where servername is the name of the current Adaptive Server.
If you:
• Have defined $SYBASE_CERTDIR, Adaptive Server loads
certificates from $SYBASE_CERTDIR/servername.txt (for UNIX) or
%SYBASE_CERTDIR%\servername.txt (for Windows).
• Have not defined $SYBASE_CERTDIR, Adaptive Server loads
certificates from
$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/certificates/servername.txt (for UNIX) or
%SYBASE%\%SYBASE_ASE%\certificates\servername.txt (for
Windows).
2 Restart Adaptive Server to change the trusted root certificate file.
3 Use sp_ldapadmin, specifying ldaps:// URLs instead of ldap:// URLs, to
establish a secure connection to a secure port of the LDAP server.
4 Establish a TLS session over a plain TCP connection:
sp_ldapadmin 'starttls_on_primary', {true | false}
or
sp_ldapadmin 'starttls_on_secondary', {true | false}
Note LDAP server connections do not have a connect timeout option; if the
LDAP server stops responding, all login connections also stop responding.

LDAPS user authentication enhancements
LDAPS user authentication enhancements

In earlier versions of Adaptive Server, if you modify the Certifying Authority
(CA) trusted root file, you must restart Adaptive Server for the modifications
to take effect. Adaptive Server version 15.0.3 and later supports modifications
to the trusted root file, so that restarting the the server is unnecessary. A new
subcommand, reinit_descriptors, which unbinds the LDAP server descriptors
and reinitializes the user authentication subsystem. For the syntax of this
option see the Reference Manual: Procedures.
• This command requires System Security Officer permissions.
• If the trusted root file is modified without execution of this command by a
user with System Security Officer permissions, the housekeeping utility
chores task uses a new chore, designed to reinitialize the user
authentication subsystem every 60 minutes.
Automatic LDAP user authentication and failback

Adaptive Server 15.0.3 provides support for a secondary LDAP server.
Previously, after bringing a failed primary LDAP server online, it was
necessary to activate the LDAP server manually, in order to authenticate new
LDAP logins and move them to the primary LDAP server.
In versions 15.0.3 and later, a new chore has been added to Adaptive Server’s
housekeeping utility to activate an LDAP server automatically:
'set_failback_interval' – for syntax, see “Setting the LDAP failback time
interval” on page 549.
'The set_failback_interval option in sp_ldapadmin set_failback_interval sets the
interval between attempts to activate failed LDAP servers; if you do not set this
parameter, the default value is 15 minutes. See sp_ldapadmin in the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
If the primary URL is marked FAILED, the housekeeper task attempts to
activate it, using the primary access account distinguished name (DN) and
password. If you have not configured a primary access account, the
housekeeper task attempts to use an anonymous bind. If the bind operation fails
on the first attempt, the housekeeper task retries the bind operation for the
number of retry times configured. If the bind operation succeeds, the primary
URL is marked READY.

If the secondary URL is marked FAILED, the housekeeper task attempts to

activate the secondary URL in a similar way.
The reinit_descriptors option in sp_ldapadmin executes when the certificate file
is modified, in which case it reinitializes the LDAP user authentication
subsystem every 60 minutes.
After you set the failback interval, the housekeeper task checks for failed
LDAP servers each time it sweeps through its chores. When it finds a failed
LDAP server, it attempts to activate the LDAP server when the failback time
interval expires.
Setting the LDAP failback time interval

The syntax for sp_ldapadmin set_failback_interval is:
sp_ldapadmin 'set_failback_interval', time_in_minutes
Where time_in_minutes is a value from -1 to 1440 minutes (24 hours).
• A value of 0 indicates that failing back is manual. That is, the housekeeper
task does not attempt to automatically fails back the LDAP server. You
must perform this task manually.
• A value of -1 sets the fail over time interval to 15 minutes, the default.
• If you issue sp_ldapadmin 'set_failback_interval' without any parameters,
sp_ldapadmin displays the value to which the fail back interval is set.
• If you issue sp_ldapadmin without any parameters, sp_ldapadmin includes

the failback time interval in the output:
sp_ldapadmin
----------------
Primary:
URL: ''
DN Lookup URL: ''
Access Account: ''
Active: 'FALSE'
Status: 'NOT SET
StartTLS on Primary LDAP URL: 'TRUE'
Secondary:
URL: ''
DN Lookup URL: ''
Access Account: ''
Active: 'FALSE'
Status: 'NOT SET'

Login mapping of external authentication
StartTLS on Secondary LDAP URL: 'FALSE'

Timeout value: '-1'(10000) milliseconds
Log interval: '3' minutes
Number of retries: '3'
Maximum LDAPUA native threads per Engine: '49'
Maximum LDAPUA descriptors per Engine: '20'
Abandon LDAP user authentication when full: 'false'
Failback interval: '-1'(15) minutes
(return status = 0)
Examples
This example sets the LDAP failback time interval to 60 minutes:
sp_ldapadmin 'set_failback_interval' 60
This example sets the LDAP failback
time interval to the default, 15 minutes:
sp_ldapadmin 'set_failback_interval' -1
This example displays the value to which the failback interval is set:
sp_ldapadmin 'set_failback_interval'
The LDAP property 'set_failback_interval' is set to '15
minutes'.
Login mapping of external authentication

When you configure an external authentication mechanism, if there is exactly
one mapping of an external user to an internal Adaptive Server login, and if it
is successfully authenticated, Adaptive Server updates the internal login’s
password to match the external user’s password. For example, under these
conditions:
1 USER1 has an Adaptive Server login name of user_ase with
password user_password. Another user has an LDAP login
name of user_ldap with password
user_ldappasswd
2 Adaptive Server has a one to one mapping for user_ldap to user_ase.

3 User user_ldap logs in to Adaptive Server using password

user_ldappasswd
4 Adaptive Server updates the user_ase password to user_ldapppasswd.

In the following example, if you configure an external authentication
mechanism by mapping an external user to an Adaptive Server internal login
and the authentication fails over to Adaptive Server, you can log in with the
external user name and correct Adaptive Server password. Adaptive Server
internally uses the mapped internal login to authenticate the external user:
1 A user has an Adaptive Server login name of user_ase with password
user_password
2 Another user has an LDAP login name of user_ldap

Adaptive Server maps user_ldap to user_ase
3 If you enable LDAP:
4 If the LDAP server is shutdown or crashes, user_ldap can log in to
Adaptive Server using login name user_ldap and password
user_password.
Configuring Adaptive Server for authentication using

PAM
Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM) support allows multiple
authentication service modules to be stacked and made available without
modifying the applications that require authentication.
PAM integrates Adaptive Server with Solaris and Linux operating systems and
simplifies the management and administration of user accounts and
authentication mechanisms, thus reducing the total cost of ownership. Users
can customize or write their own authentication and authorization modules.
Note PAM support is currently available on Linux and on Solaris platforms.

For more information on PAM user authentication, see your operating system
documentation.

Configuring Adaptive Server for authentication using PAM
Figure 16-2: PAM architecture

Client Server
Authentication syslogins
Account management
Password management
Session management
LDAP Server
Authentication
PAM
Account management
Integrated
PAM API PAM SPI login, DCE
and so on
Custom
authentication
Adaptive Server passes the login name and credentials obtained from the login
packet to the PAM API. PAM loads a service provider module as specified in
the operating system configuration files and calls appropriate functions to
complete the authentication process.
Enabling PAM in Adaptive Server

Both Linux and Solaris have predefined PAM modules. You can use one of
these modules, or create one of your own. When creating your own modules,
follow the guidelines in your operating system documentation on creating a
PAM module.
Note PAM modules you create should comply with RFC 86.0 “Unified Login
With Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM).” Adaptive Server supports
the authentication management module of the RFC. It does not support the
account management, session management, or password management
modules.

Configuring operating system s

To enable PAM support, configure your operating system as follows:
• For Solaris, add the following line to /etc/pam.conf:
ase auth required /user/lib/security/$ISA/pam_unix.so.1
• For Linux, create a new file called /etc/pam.d/ase, and add:
auth requried /lib/security/pam_unix.so
For more information on how to create these entries, see your operating system
documentation.
Running a 32- and 64-bit server on the same machine

$ISA is an environment variable that allows 32- and 64-bit libraries to run
together.
On Solaris 32-bit machines, $ISA is replaced by an empty string, while on 64-
bit machines, it is replaced by the string “sparcv9”.
To use both 32- and 64-bit servers, place the 32-bit PAM module in a directory,
and place the 64-bit version in a subdirectory of this directory.
The entry in pam.conf should look similar to:
$ ls /usr/lib/security/pam_sec.so.1
pam_sec.so.1 -> /SYBASE/pam_whatever_32bits.so.1
$ ls /usr/lib/security/sparcv9/pam_sec.so.1
pam_sec.so.1 -> /SYBASE/pam_sec_64bits.so.1
ase auth required

/usr/lib/security/$ISA/pam_sec.so.1
Note $ISA is the only variable allowed in pam.conf.
Configuring Adaptive Server for PAM user authentication

enable pam user auth enables PAM user authentication support:
sp_configure "enable pam user auth", 0 | 1 | 2
where:
• 0 – disables PAM authentication. This is the default.

Configuring Adaptive Server for authentication using PAM
• 1 – indicates Adaptive Server first attempts PAM authentication, and then

uses syslogins authentication if PAM authentication fails.
• 2 – indicates only PAM authentication may be used.
Note When PAM is enabled, password management is delegated to the PAM

service providers.
Adaptive Server logins and PAM user accounts

After you have set enable PAM user authentication and completed the PAM
configuration for both Adaptive Server and the operating system, you must
configure the user accounts. The operating system or network security
administrator creates and maintains user accounts in the PAM service provider,
and the database administrator creates and maintains accounts in Adaptive
Server. Alternatively, the database administrator can choose administration
options that allow flexibility with login accounts when integrating Adaptive
Server with external authentication mechanisms such as PAM. The database
administrator continues to administer the Adaptive Server account roles,
default database, default language, and other login-specific attributes using
traditional commands and procedures.
Table 16-15 describes updates to syslogins made at login time. It assumes that\
PAM user authentication is configured, the login is not restricted from using
PAM, and you have not set the create login mapping.\

Table 16-15: Updates to syslogins from PAM

Does the row exist in PAM authentication
syslogins? succeeds? Changes in syslogins
No Yes No change, login fails
No No No change, login fails
Yes Yes Update row if password has
changed
Yes No No change
Enhanced login controls

Configure Adaptive Server to allow the server-wide authentication mechanism
according to the methods discussed in the LDAP and PAM sections earlier. You
can also configure Adaptive Server to specify the authentication mechanism
for each individual login on the server using Adaptive Server enhanced login
controls described below.
Login-specific controls may be useful when a server is transitioning between
authentication mechanisms or for server-specific logins that local server
administration may require: they are not associated with a centrally managed
user login.
Forcing authentication
You can force a login to use a specific authentication process by using these
parameters for sp_modifylogin and sp_addlogin:
• ASE – use Adaptive Server internal authentication using passwords from
syslogins table.
• LDAP – use external authentication with an LDAP server.
• PAM – use external authentication with PAM.
• ANY – by default, users are authenticated using this authentication method.

A user with ANY authentication means that Adaptive Server checks if
there is any external authentication mechanism defined, and if there is, it
is used. Otherwise, it uses Adaptive Server authentication.
Adaptive Server checks for external authentication mechanisms in the
following order:

1 LDAP.
2 Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM). If both LDAP and PAM are
enabled, PAM authentication is never attempted for a user.
3 If neither PAM nor LDAP is enabled, Adaptive Server uses syslogins to
authenticate the login.
Login accounts such as “sa” continue to be validated using the syslogins
catalog. Only the SSO role can set authenticate for a login.
For example, the following authenticates the login with sp_modifylogin:
sp_modifylogin "nightlyjob", "authenticate with", "ASE"
sp_displaylogin "nightlyjob"
Displays output similar to:
Suid: 1234
Loginname: nightlyjob
Fullname: Batch Login
. . .
Date of Last Password Change: Oct 2 2003 7:38 PM
Password expired: N
Minimum password length:
Authenticate with: ASE
Mapping logins using sp_maplogin

Use sp_maplogin to map logins:
sp_maplogin (authentication_mech | null),
(client_username | null), (action | login_name | null)
where:
• authentication_mech – is one of the valid values specified for the
authenticate with option in sp_modifylogin.
• client_username – is an external user name, which can be an operating

system name, a user name for an LDAP server, or anything else the PAM
library understands. A null value indicates that any login name is valid.

• action – indicates create login or drop. When you use create login, the login
is created as soon as is authenticated. Use drop to remove logins.
• login_name is an Adaptive Server login that already exists in syslogins.
This example maps external user “jsmith” to the Adaptive Server user “guest.”
Once authenticated, “jsmith” has the privileges of “guest.” The audit login
record shows both the client_username and the Adaptive Server user name:
sp_maplogin NULL, "jsmith", "guest"
This example tells Adaptive Server to create a new login for all external users
authenticated with LDAP, if a login does not already exist:
sp_maplogin LDAP, NULL, "create login"
Displaying mapping information

sp_helpmaplogin displays mapping information:
sp_helpmaplogin [ (authentication_mech | null), (client_username | null) ]

where authentication_mech is one of the valid values specified for authenticate
with option in sp_modifylogin, and client_username is an external user name.
If you do not include any parameters, sp_helpmaplogin displays login

information about all users currently logged in to Adaptive Server. You can
restrict the output to specific sets of client user names or authentication
mechanists by using the parameters listed above.
This displays information about all logins:
sp_helpmaplogin
authentication client name login name
-------------- ----------- ------------------
NULL jsmith guest
LDAP NULL create login
Determining the authentication mechanism

Use the @@authmech global variable to determine the authentication
mechanism Adaptive Server uses.

For example, if Adaptive Server is enabled for LDAP user authentication with
failover (enable ldap user auth = 2) and user “Joe” is an external user with
authentication set to ANY, when Joe logs in, Adaptive Server attempts to
authenticate Joe, using LDAP user authentication. If Joe fails authentication as
a user in LDAP, Adaptive Server authenticates Joe using Adaptive Server
authentication, and if that succeeds, he logs in successfully.
@@authmech global has this value:
select @@authmech
----------------------------------
ase
If Adaptive Server is configured for strict LDAP user authentication (enable
ldap user auth = 2) and Joe is added as a valid user in LDAP, when Joe logs in,
the value for @@authmech is:
select @@authmech----------------------------------
ldap

CH A PTE R 1 7 Managing User Permissions
This chapter describes the use and implementation of user permissions.

Topic Page
Overview 559
Permissions on system procedures 564
Database owner privileges 562
Other database user privileges 564
Database object owner privileges 563
Granting and revoking permissions 565
Granting and revoking roles 584
Acquiring the permissions of another user 586
Reporting on permissions 591
Using views and stored procedures as security mechanisms 596
Using row-level access control 603
Overview
Discretionary access controls (DACs) allow you to restrict access to
objects and commands based on a user’s identity, group membership and
active roles. The controls are “discretionary” because a user with a certain
access permission, such as an object owner, can choose whether to pass
that access permission on to other users.
Adaptive Server’s discretionary access control system recognizes the
following types of users:
• Users possessing one or more system defined roles: system
administrator, system security officer, operator, and other roles
• Database owners
• Database object owners
• Other users

Overview
System administrators operate outside the DAC system and have access
permissions on all database objects at all times except encryption keys (see
User Guide for Encrypted Columns). System security officers can always
access the audit trail tables in the sybsecurity database.
Database owners do not automatically receive permissions on objects owned
by other users; however, they can:
• Temporarily acquire all permissions of a user in the database by using the
setuser command to assume the identity of that user.
• Permanently acquire permission on a specific object by using the setuser

command to assume the identity of the object owner, and then using grant
commands to grant the permissions.
For details on assuming another user’s identity to acquire permissions on a
database or object, see “Acquiring the permissions of another user” on page
586.
Object owners can grant access to those objects to other users and can also
grant other users the ability to pass the access permission to other users. You
can give various permissions to users, groups, and roles with the grant
command, and rescind them with the revoke command. Use grant and revoke
to give users permission to:
• Create databases
• Create objects within a database
• Execute certain commands such as dbcc and set proxy
• Access specified tables, views, stored procedures, encryption keys, and
columns
grant and revoke can also be used to set permissions on system tables.
For permissions that default to “public,” no grant or revoke statements are

needed.
Some commands can be used at any time by any user, with no permission
required. Others can be used only by users of a particular status and they are
not transferable.
The ability to assign permissions for the commands that can be granted and
revoked is determined by each user’s role or status (as system administrator,
database owner, system security officer, or database object owner), and by
whether the user was granted a role with permission that includes the option to
grant that permission to other users.

CHAPTER 17 Managing User Permissions
You can also use views and stored procedures as security mechanisms. See
“Using views and stored procedures as security mechanisms” on page 596.
Permissions for creating databases

Only a system administrator can grant permission to use the create database
command. The user that receives create database permission must also be a
valid user of the master database because all databases are created while using
master.
In many installations, the system administrator maintains a monopoly on create

database permission to centralize control of database placement and database
device space allocation. In these situations, a system administrator creates new
databases on behalf of other users, and then transfers ownership to the
appropriate user.
To create a database that is to be owned by another user:
1 Issue the create database command in the master database.
2 Switch to the new database with the use command.
3 Execute sp_changedbowner.
Changing database ownership

Use sp_changedbowner to change the ownership of a database. Often, system
administrators create the user databases, then give ownership to another user
after some of the initial work is complete. Only the system administrator can
execute sp_changedbowner.
Sybase suggests that you transfer ownership before the user has been added to
the database, and before the user has begun creating objects in the database.
The new owner must already have a login name on Adaptive Server, but cannot
be a user of the database, or have an alias in the database. You may have to use
sp_dropuser or sp_dropalias before you can change a database’s ownership, and
you may have to drop objects before you can drop the user.
Issue sp_changedbowner in the database whose ownership is to be changed.
The syntax is:
sp_changedbowner loginame [, true ]

Database owner privileges
This example makes “albert” the owner of the current database and drops
aliases of users who could act as the old “dbo:”
sp_changedbowner albert
Include the true parameter to transfer aliases and their permissions to the new
“dbo.”
Note You cannot change the ownership of the master, model, tempdb, or
sybsystemprocs databases and should not change the ownership of any other
system databases.
Database owner privileges

Database owners and system administrators are the only users who can grant
object creation permissions to other users (except for create encryption key and
create trigger permission which can only be granted by the system security
officer). The database owner has full privileges to do anything inside that
database, and must explicitly grant permissions to other users with the grant
command.
Permission to use the following commands is automatically granted to the
database owner and cannot be transferred to other users:
• checkpoint
• dbcc
• alter database
• online database
• drop database
• dump database
• dump transaction
• grant (object creation permissions)
• load database
• load transaction
• revoke (object creation permissions)

• setuser
Database owners can grant or revoke permission to:

• Use these commands: create default, create procedure, create rule, create
table, create view.
Database owners can grant permission to use create database, set tracing,
and connect if they have the sa_role and are in the master database.
Database owners can grant permission to use set session authorization,
create trigger, and create encryption key if they have the sso_role.
• all – if you are the database owner, all grants permisions for all create
commands except create database, create trigger and create encryption key.
If you have the sa_role, all grants permissions for create database, set
tracing, and connect as well, if you issue the grant command in the master
database.
• default permissions on system tables
• Use dbcc commands:checkalloc, checkcatalog, checkdb, checkindex,
checkstorage, checktable, checkverify, fix_text, indexalloc, reindex,
tablealloc, textalloc, tune
Database object owner privileges

A user who creates a database object (a table, view, encryption key, or stored
procedure) owns the object and is automatically granted all object access
permissions on it. Users other than the object owner, including the owner of the
database, are automatically denied all permissions on that object, unless they
are explicitly granted by either the owner or a user who has grant permission
on that object.
As an example, suppose that Mary is the owner of the pubs2 database, and has
granted Joe permission to create tables in it. Now Joe creates the table
new_authors; he is the owner of this database object.
Initially, object access permissions on new_authors belong only to Joe. Joe can
grant or revoke object access permissions for this table to other users.
The following object altering permissions default to the owner of a table and
cannot be transferred to other users:
• alter table

Other database user privileges
• drop table
• create index
Permission to use the grant and revoke commands to grant specific users select,
insert, update, delete, references, decrypt, truncate table, update statistics, delete
statistics, and execute permissions on specific database objects can be
transferred, using the grant with grant option command.
Permission to drop an object—a table, view, index, stored procedure, rule,
encryption key, trigger, or default—defaults to the object owner and cannot be
transferred.
Other database user privileges

At the bottom of the hierarchy are other database users. Permissions are
granted to or revoked from them by object owners, database owners, users who
were granted permissions, system administrator or a system security officer.
These users are specified by user name, group name, or the keyword public.
Permissions on system procedures

Set permissions on system procedures in the sybsystemprocs database, where
the system procedures are stored.
Security-related system procedures can be run only by system security officers.
Certain other system procedures can be run only by system administrators.
Some of the system procedures can be run only by database owners. These
procedures make sure that the user executing the procedure is the owner of the
database from which they are being executed.
Other system procedures can be executed by any user who has been granted
permission. A user must have permission to execute a system procedure in all
databases, or in none of them.

Users who are not listed in sybsystemprocs..sysusers are treated as “guest” in

sybsystemprocs, and are automatically granted permission on many of the
system procedures. To deny a user permission on a system procedure, the
system administrator must add him or her to sybsystemprocs..sysusers and
issue a revoke statement that applies to that procedure. The owner of a user
database cannot directly control permissions on the system procedures from
within his or her own database.
Granting and revoking permissions

You can control the following types of permissions with grant and revoke:
• Object access permissions
• Permission to select from functions
• Permission to execute commands
• Permission to execute dbcc commands
• Permission to execute some set commands
• Default permissions on system tables
Each database has its own independent protection system. Having permission
to use a certain command in one database does not give you permission to use
that command in other databases.
Object access permissions

Object access permissions regulate the use of certain commands that access
certain database objects. For example, you must explicitly be granted
permission to use the select command on the authors table. Object access
permissions are granted and revoked by the object owner (and system
administrators or system security officers), who can grant them to other users.
Table 17-1 lists the types of object access permissions and the objects to which
they apply.

Table 17-1: Permissions and the objects to which they apply

Permission Object
select Table, view, column
update Table, view, column
insert Table, view
delete Table, view
references Table, column
execute Stored procedure
truncate table Table
delete statistics Table
update statistics Table
decrypt Table, view, column
select Encryption key
The references permission refers to referential integrity constraints that you

can specify in an alter table or create table command. The decrypt permission
refers to the permission required to decrypt an encrypted column. An
encryption key’s select permission refers to the permissions required to use
encryption keys in create table, alter table or select into command to encrypt
columns. The other permissions refer to SQL commands. Object access
permissions default to the object’s owner, or system administrators or system
security officers for decrypt on an encrypted column and select on an
encryption key, and can be granted to other users.
Use the grant command to grant object access permissions. The syntax is:
grant {all [privileges]| permission_list}
on { table_name [(column_list)]
| view_name[(column_list)]
| stored_procedure_name}
to {public | name_list | role_name}
[with grant option]
Use the revoke command to revoke object access permissions. The syntax is:
revoke [grant option for]
{all [privileges] | permission_list}
on { table_name [(column_list)]
| view_name [(column_list)]
| stored_procedure_name}
from {public | name_list | role_name}
[cascade]

• all or all privileges specifies all permissions applicable to the specified

object, except decrypt permission. All object owners can use all with an
object name to grant or revoke permissions on their own objects. If you are
granting or revoking permissions on a stored procedure, all is the same as
execute.
Note insert, update statistics, delete statistics, truncate table, and delete
permissions do not apply to columns, so you cannot include them in a
permission list (or use the keyword all) if you specify a column list.
• permission_list is the list of permissions that you are granting. If you name
more than one permission, separate them with commas. Table 17-2
illustrates the access permissions that can be granted on each type of
object:
Table 17-2: Object access permissions
Object permission_list can include
Table or view select, insert, delete, update, references, truncate table, update statistics, decrypt, delete statistics
references applies to tables but not views; the other permissions apply to both tables and views.
update statistics, delete statistics, and truncate table apply to tables on, not views.
Column select, update, references
Stored procedure execute
Encryption key select
You can specify columns in the permission_list or the column_list, but not
both.
• on specifies the object for which the permission is being granted or
revoked. You can grant or revoke permissions for only one table, view,
encryption key, or stored procedure object at a time. You can grant or
revoke permissions for more than one column at a time, but all the
columns must be in the same table or view. You can grant or revoke
permissions only on objects in your current database.
• public refers to the group “public,” which includes all Adaptive Server
users. public means slightly different things for grant and revoke:
• For grant, public includes the object owner. Therefore, if you have
revoked permissions from yourself on your object, and later you grant
permissions to public, you regain the permissions along with the rest
of “public.”
• For revoke, public excludes the owner.

• name_list includes:
• Group names
• User names
• A combination of user and group names, each separated from the next
by a comma
• role_name is an Adaptive Server system-defined or user-defined role. You
can create and define a hierarchy of user-defined roles and grant them
privileges based on the specific role granted. System-defined roles include
sa_role (system administrator), sso_role (system security officer), and
oper_role (operator). You cannot create or modify system-defined roles.
• with grant option in a grant statement allows the users specified in name_list
to grant the specified object access permissions to other users. If a user has
with grant option permission on an object, that permission is not revoked
when permissions on the object are revoked from public or a group of
which the user is a member.
• grant option for revokes with grant option permissions, so that the users
specified in name_list can no longer grant the specified permissions to
other users. If those other users have granted permissions to other users,
you must use the cascade option to revoke permissions from them as well.
The user specified in name_list retains permission to access the object, but
can no longer grant access to other users. grant option for applies only to
object access permissions, not to object creation permissions.
• The cascade option in a revoke statement removes the specified object
access permissions from the user(s) specified in name_list, and also from
any users they granted those permissions to.
You may grant and revoke permissions only on objects in the current database.
If several users grant access to an object to a particular user, the user’s access
remains until access is revoked by all those who granted access or until a
system administrator revokes the access. That is, if a system administrator
revokes access, the user is denied access even though other users have granted
access.
Only a system security officer can grant or revoke permission to create
encryption keys. The database owner can create triggers on any user table.
Users can create triggers only on tables that they own.
Permission to issue the create trigger command is granted to users by default.

When the system security officer revokes permission for a user to create
triggers, a revoke row is added in the sysprotects table for that user. To grant
permission to that user to issue create trigger, issue two grant commands: the
first command removes the revoke row from sysprotects; the second inserts a
grant row. The system security officer must grant permission to create triggers.
If permission to create triggers is revoked, the user cannot create triggers even
on tables that the user owns. Revoking permission to create triggers from a user
affects only the database where the revoke command was issued.
Concrete identification
Adaptive Server identifies users during a session by login name. This
identification applies to all databases in the server. When the user creates an
object, the server associates both the owner’s database user ID (uid) and the
creator’s login name with the object in the sysobjects table. This information
concretely identifies the object as belonging to that user, which allows the
server to recognize when permissions on the object can be granted implicitly.
If an Adaptive Server user creates a table and then creates a procedure that
accesses the table, any user who is granted permission to execute the procedure
does not need permission to access the object directly. For example, by giving
user “mary” permission on proc1, she can see the id and descr columns from
table1, though she does not have explicit select permission on the table:
create table table1 (id int,
amount money,
descr varchar(100))
create procedure proc1 as select id, descr from table1
grant execute on proc1 to mary
There are, however, some cases where implicit permissions are only useful if
the objects can be concretely identified. One case is where aliases and
cross-database object access are both involved.
Special requirements for SQL92 standard compliance

When you have used the set command to turn ansi_permissions on, additional
permissions are required for update and delete statements. Table 17-3
summarizes the required permissions.

Table 17-3: ANSI permissions for update and delete

Permissions required:
set ansi_permissions off Permissions required: set ansi_permissions on
update update permission on columns update permission on columns where values are being set
where values are being set and
select permission on all columns appearing in the where clause
select permission on all columns on the right side of the set clause
delete delete permission on the table delete permission on the table from which rows are being deleted
and
select permission on all columns appearing in the where clause
If ansi_permissions is on and you attempt to update or delete without having all

the additional select permissions, the transaction is rolled back and you receive
an error message. If this occurs, the object owner must grant you select
permission on all relevant columns.
Examples of granting object access permissions

This statement gives Mary and the “sales” group permission to insert into and
delete from the titles table:
grant insert, delete
on titles
to mary, sales
This statement gives Harold permission to use the stored procedure makelist:
grant execute
on makelist
to harold
This statement grants permission to execute the custom stored procedure
sa_only_proc to users who have been granted the system administrator role:
grant execute
on sa_only_proc
to sa_role
This statement gives Aubrey permission to select, update, and delete from the
authors table and to grant the same permissions to other users:
grant select, update, delete

on authors
to aubrey
with grant option

Examples of revoking object access permissions

These two statements both revoke permission for all users except the table
owner to update the price and total_sales columns of the titles table:
revoke update
on titles (price, total_sales)
from public
This statement revokes permission from Clare to update the authors table, and
simultaneously revokes that permission from all users to whom she had granted
that permission:
revoke update
on authors
from clare
cascade
This statement revokes permission from operators to execute the custom stored
procedure new_sproc:
revoke execute
on new_sproc
from oper_role
Granting and revoking permissions for update statistics, delete statistics, and
truncate table
Adaptive Server allows you to grant and revoke permissions for users, roles,
and groups for the update statistics, delete statistics, and truncate table
commands. Table owners can also provide permissions through an implicit
grant by adding update statistics, delete statistics, and truncate table to a stored
procedure and then granting execute permissions on that procedure to a user or
role.
You cannot grant or revoke permissions for update statistics at the column
level. You must have the sso_role to run update statistics or delete statistics on
sysroles, syssrvroles, and sysloginroles security tables.
By default, users with the sa_role have permission to run update statistics and
delete statistics on system tables other than sysroles, syssrvroles and
sysloginroles, and can transfer this privilege to other users.
The partial syntax for grant and revoke is:

grant [truncate table | update statistics | delete statistics] on table_name
to {user_name | role_name | group_name}

revoke [truncate table | update statistics | delete statistics] on

table_name from {user_name | role_name | group_name}
You can also issue grant all to grant permissions on update statistics, delete
statistics, and truncate table.
For example, the following allows user “harry” to use truncate table and
updates statistics on the authors table:
grant truncate table on authors to harry
grant update statistics on authors to harry
The following revokes truncate table and update statistics privileges from
“harry” on the authors table:
revoke truncate table on authors from harry
revoke update statistics on authors from harry
The following allows user “billy” to use the delete statistics command on the
authors table:
grant delete statistics on authors to billy

The following revokes the delete statistics privileges from user “billy” on the
authors table:
revoke delete statistics on authors from billy

The following grants truncate table and update and delete statistics privileges to
all users with the oper_role (if users “billy” and “harry” possess the oper_role,
they can now run these commands on authors):
grant truncate table on authors to oper_role
grant update statistics on authors to oper_role
grant delete statistics on authors to oper_role
The following revokes truncate table and update and delete statistics privileges
from all users with the oper_role:
revoke truncate table on authors from oper_role
revoke update statistics on authors from oper_role
revoke delete statistics on authors from oper_role
Users “billy” and “harry” can no longer run these commands on authors.
You can also implicitly grant permissions for truncate table, delete statistics,
and update statistics through a stored procedure. For example, assuming “billy”
owns the authors table, he can run the following to grant “harry” privileges to
run truncate table and update statistics on authors:
create procedure sproc1
as

truncate table authors

update statistics authors
go
grant execute on sproc1 to harry
go
You can also implicitly grant permissions at the column level for update
statistics and delete statistics through stored procedures.
Note Once you grant permission to execute update statistics to a user, they also
have permission to execute variations of this command, such as update all
statistics, update partition statistics, update index statistics, update statistics table,
and so on. For example, the following grants “billy” permission to run all
variations of update statistics on the authors table:
grant update statistics on authors to billy
If you revoke a user’s permission to execute update statistics, you also revoke
their ability to execute the variations of this command.
You cannot grant variants of update statistics (for example, update index
statistics) separately. That is, you cannot issue:
grant update all statistics to harry
However, you can write stored procedures that control who executes these
commands. For example, the following grants “billy” execute permission for
update index statistics on the authors table:
create proc sp_ups as

update index statistics on authors
go
revoke update statistics on authors from billy
go
grant execute on sp_ups to billy
You cannot grant and revoke delete statistics permissions at the column level.
Although Adaptive Server audits truncate table as a global, miscellaneous
audit, it does not audit update statistics. To retain clear audit trails for both
truncate table and update statistics, Sybase recommends that you include both
commands in a stored procedure to which you grant users execute permission,
as described above.
The command fails and generates error number 10330 if a user issues update
statistics, delete statistics or truncate table and they:
• Do not own the table.

• Do not have the sa_role.

• Are not a database owner who has successfully used setuser to become the
user who is the owner of the table.
• Have not been granted update statistics, delete statistics, or truncate table
privileges.
Granting permissions on functions

Use grant select on builtin function_name to grant a user permission to use the
functions set_appcontext, get_appcontext, list_appcontext, and rm_appcontext.
The syntax is:
grant select on [builtin] function_name
to {name_list | role_list}
Where:
• builtin – Used to distinguish between a table and a grantable function with
the same name.
• function_name – Name of the function for which you are granting
permission. Functions for which select permission can be granted are
set_appcontext, get_appcontext, list_appcontext, and rm_appcontext.
• name_list – List of users’ database names and group names.

• role_list – List of the names of system or user-defined roles to which
permission is being granted, and cannot be a variable.
This grants select permission on the get_appcontext function to public:
grant select on builtin get_appcontext to public
Granting and revoking permissions to execute commands

This section describes how to grant and revoke permissions for users to execute
specific commands.

Granting permissions to execute commands

Object creation permissions regulate the use of commands that create objects.
Other than commands for creating objects, other commands like connect and
set session authorization can be granted. These permissions can be granted only
by a system administrator or a database owner (unless otherwise noted).
The commands are:
• connect
• create database
• create default
• create procedure
• create rule
• create table
• create view
• set session authorization
• create encryption key (only grantable by system security officer)
• create trigger (only grantable by system security officer)
The syntax for command permissions differs slightly from the syntax for object
access permissions. The syntax for grant is:
grant {all [privileges] | command_list}
to {public | name_list | role_name}
The syntax for revoke is:
revoke {all [privileges] | command_list}
from {public | name_list | role_name}
where:
• all or all privileges – can be used only by a system administrator or the
database owner. When used by a system administrator in the master
database, grant all assigns all create permissions, including create database
(except create encryption key and create trigger). If the system
administrator executes grant all from another database, all create
permissions are granted except create database, create trigger and create
encryption key. When the database owner uses grant all, Adaptive Server
grants all create permissions except create database, create trigger, and
create encryption key, and prints an informational message.

• command_list – is the object creation and other command permissions that

you are granting or revoking. Separate commands with commas. The list
can include create database, create default, create procedure, create rule,
create table, connect, create encryption key, set session authorization, create
view, and create trigger. create database permission can be granted only by
a system administrator, and only from within the master database. You
must have system security officer privileges to grant create encryption key,
set session authorization, and create trigger permissions.
• public – is all users except the database owner (who “owns” object creation
permissions within the database).
• name_list – is a list of user or group names, separated by commas.
• role_name – is the name of an Adaptive Server system or user-defined
role. You can create and define a hierarchy of user-defined roles and grant
them privileges based on the specific role granted.
Granting command permission examples

The first example grants Mary and John permission to use create database and
create table. Because create database permission is being granted, this
command can be executed only by a system administrator within the master
database. Mary and John’s create table permission applies only to the master
database.
grant create table, create database
to mary, john
This command grants permission to create tables and views in the current
database to all users:
grant create table, create view
to public
Revoking command permission example

This example revokes permission to create tables and rules from “mary:”
revoke create table, create rule
from mary

Granting proxy authorization

System security officers use the grant set proxy or grant set session authorization
command to give a user permission to impersonate another user within the
server. The user with this permission can then execute either set proxy or set
session authorization to become another user.
To grant proxy authorization permission, you must be a system security officer

and execute the grant command from the master database. The syntax is:
grant set proxy to user | role
[restricted role role_list | all | system]
where:
• role_list – list of roles you are restricting for the target login. If the grantees
do not yet have the roles in the role_list granted to them, set proxy to the
target login fails if the target login contains roles in the role_list granted.
• all – when used to grant set proxy to role_list, restricts granting the grantee
any new roles when switching identities.
• system – ensures the grantee has the same set of system roles as the target
login.
Example 1 Example 1: This example grants set proxy to user “joe” but restricts him from
switching identities to any user with the sa_role, sso_role, or admin_role roles
(however, if he already has these roles, he can set proxy for any user with these
roles):
grant set proxy to joe
restricted role sa_role, sso_role, admin_role
When “joe” tries to switch his identity to a user with admin_role (in this
example, Our_admin_role), the command fails unless he already has
admin_role:
set proxy Our_admin_role

Server 's', Line 2:Set session authorization permission
denied because the target login has a role that you do
not have and you have been restricted from using.
After “joe” is granted the admin_role and retries the command, it succeeds:
grant role admin_role to joe
Example 2 Example 2: Restricts “joe” from being granted any new roles when switching
identities:


restricted role all
“joe” can grant set proxy only to users who have the same (or a subset of) roles
that he has.
Example 3 Example 3: Restricts Joe from acquiring any new system roles when using set
proxy:
restricted role system
set proxy fails if the target login has system roles that joe lacks.
Granting permissions on dbcc commands

System administrators can grant the permission to execute dbcc commands to
users and roles that do not have system administrator-level privileges in
Adaptive Server. This discretionary access control allows system
administrators to control access to database objects or to certain database- and
server-level actions.
See the Reference Manual: Commands for the complete dbcc syntax.
Server-wide and database-specific dbcc commands

dbcc commands are either:
• Database-specific – dbcc commands that execute on a particular target

database (for example, checkalloc, checktable, checkindex, checkstorage,
checkdb, checkcatalog, checkverify, fix_text, indexalloc, reindex, tablealloc,
and textalloc). Although these commands are database-specific, only
system administrators can grant or revoke them.
• Server-wide – dbcc commands such as tune that are effective server-wide
and are not associated with any particular database. These commands are
granted server-wide by default and are not associated with any database.
System administrators can allow users to execute the dbcc command in all
databases by making them valid users in those databases. However, it may be
more convenient to grant dbcc to roles instead of individual users, since this
allows users to use databases as a “guest” user instead of requiring that they
each be added manually to the database.

From a security administration perspective, system administrators may prefer

to grant permission to execute database-specific dbcc commands server-wide.
For example, you can execute grant dbcc checkstorage on all databases to a
user-defined role called storage_admin_role, thereby eliminating the need to
execute grant dbcc checkstorage to storage_admin_role in every database.
The following commands are effective server-wide, but are not
database-specific:
• Server-wide dbcc commands such as tune.
• Database-specific dbcc commands that are granted server-wide, such as
grant dbcc checkstorage granted to storage_admin_role.
dbcc grantees and users in databases

grant dbcc and revoke dbcc work on users in databases.
Since roles are automatically added as users in a database on their first grant in
a database, there are no additional requirements when roles are granted dbcc
privileges. Logins must be valid users in the database where permissions are
granted. Valid users include “guest.”
For server-wide dbcc commands, the login must be a valid user in master, and
the system administrator must be in master when granting the permission.
For database-specific dbcc commands the login should be a valid user in the
target database.
Permissions on system tables

Permissions for use of the system tables can be controlled by the database
owner, just like permissions on any other tables. When a database is created,
select permission on some system tables is granted to public, and select
permission on some system tables is restricted to administrators. For some
other tables, a few columns have restricted select permissions for public.
To determine the current permissions for a particular system table, execute:
sp_helprotect system_table_name
For example, to check the permissions of syssrvroles in the master database,
execute:
use master
go

sp_helprotect syssrvroles
go
The default situation is that no users—including database owners—can modify
the system tables directly. Instead, the T-SQL commands and the system
procedures supplied with Adaptive Server modify the system tables. This helps
guarantee integrity.
Warning! Although Adaptive Server provides a mechanism that allows you to

modify system tables, Sybase strongly recommends that you do not do so.
Granting default permissions to system tables and stored procedures

The grant and revoke commands include the default permissions parameter.
installmodel or installmaster do not grant default permissions on any system
tables (see the table below). Instead, the default permissions on the system
tables are assigned when Adaptive Server builds a new database. The partial
syntax is:
grant default permissions on system tables
revoke default permissions on system tables
where default permissions on system tables specifies that you grant or revoke
the default permissions for the following system tables when you issue it from
any database:
sysalternates sysjars sysqueryplans systypes
sysattributes syskeys sysreferences sysusermessages
syscolumns syslogs sysroles sysusers
syscomments sysobjects syssegments sysxtypes
sysconstraints syspartitions sysstatistics
sysdepends sysprocedures systabstats
sysindexes sysprotects systhresholds
default permissions on system tables also makes the following changes:
• Revokes select on syscolumns(encrkeyid) from public

• Revokes select on syscolumns(encrkeydb) from public
• Grants select on syscolumns to sso_role
• Revokes sysobjects(audflags) permissions from public
• Grants permissions for sysobjects to sso_role

• Revokes select on all columns of sysencryptkeys from public

• Grants select on all columns of sysencryptkeys to sso_role
If you run this command from the master database, default permissions for the
following system tables are granted or revoked:
syscharsets syslanguages sysremotelogins systransactions
sysconfigures syslocks sysresourcelimits sysusages
syscurconfigs syslogins sysservers
sysdatabases sysmessages syssessions
sysdevices sysprocesses systimeranges
The command also makes the following changes:

• Revokes select on sysdatabases(audflags) from public
• Revokes select on syscolumns(encrkeyid) from public
• Revokes select on syscolumns(encrkeydb) from public
• Grants select on syscolumns to sso_role
• Revokes select on sysdatabases(deftabaud) from public
• Revokes select on sysdatabases(defvwaud) from public
• Revokes select on sysdatabases(defpraud) from public
• Revokes select on sysdatabases(audflags2) from public
• Grants select on sysdatabases to sso_role.
• Revokes select on syslogins(password) to public
• Revokes select on syslogins(audflags) from public
• Grants select on syslogins to sso_role
• Revokes select on syslisteners(net_type) from public
• Revokes select on syslisteners(address_info) from public
• grant select on syslisteners to sso_role
• Revokes select on syssrvroles(srid) from public
• Revokes select on syssrvroles(name) from public
• Revokes select on syssrvroles(password) from public
• Revokes select on syssrvroles(pwdate) from public

• Revokes select on syssrvroles(status) from public

• Revokes select on syssrvroles(logincount) from public
• grant select on syssrvroles to sso_role
• Revokes select on sysloginroles(suid) from public
• Revokes select on sysloginroles(srid) from public
• Revokes select on sysloginroles(status) from public
• Revokes select on sysloginroles to sso_role
Combining grant and revoke statements

Assign specific permissions to specific users, or, if most users are going to be
granted most privileges, it may be easier to assign all permissions to all users,
and then revoke specific permissions from specific users.
For example, a database owner can grant all permissions on the titles table to
all users by issuing:
grant all
on titles
to public
The database owner can then issue a series of revoke statements, for example:
revoke update
on titles (price, advance)
from public
revoke delete
on titles
from mary, sales, john
grant and revoke statements are order-sensitive: in case of a conflict, the most
recently issued statement supersedes all others.
Note Under SQL rules, you must use the grant command before using the
revoke command, but the two commands cannot be used within the same
transaction. Therefore, when you grant “public” access to objects, and then
revoke that access from an individual, there is a short period of time during
which the individual has access to the objects in question. To prevent this
situation, use the create schema command to include the grant and revoke
clauses within one transaction.

Understanding permission order and hierarchy

grant and revoke statements are sensitive to the order in which they are issued.
For example, if Jose’s group has been granted select permission on the titles
table and then Jose’s permission to select the advance column has been
revoked, Jose can select all the columns except advance, while the other users
in his group can still select all the columns.
A grant or revoke statement that applies to a group or role changes any
conflicting permissions that have been assigned to any member of that group
or role. For example, if the owner of the titles table has granted different
permissions to various members of the sales group, and wants to standardize,
he or she might issue the following statements:
revoke all on titles from sales
grant select on titles(title, title_id, type,
pub_id)
to sales
Similarly, a grant or revoke statement issued to public changes, for all users, all
previously issued permissions that conflict with the new regime.
The same grant and revoke statements issued in different orders can create
entirely different situations. For example, the following set of statements
leaves Jose, who belongs to the public group, without any select permission on
titles:
grant select on titles(title_id, title) to jose
revoke select on titles from public
In contrast, the same statements issued in the opposite order result in only Jose
having select permission and only on the title_id and title columns:
revoke select on titles from public
grant select on titles(title_id, title) to jose
When you use the keyword public with grant, you are including yourself. With
revoke on object creation permissions, you are included in public unless you are
the database owner. With revoke on object access permissions, you are
included in public unless you are the object owner. You may want to deny
yourself permission to use your own table, while giving yourself permission to
access a view built on it. To do this, you must issue grant and revoke statements
explicitly setting your permissions. You can reinstitute the permission with a
grant statement.

Granting and revoking roles
Grant dbcc and set proxy issue warning for fipsflagger

grant dbcc and set proxy issue the following warning when they are issued
while set fipsflagger option is enabled:
SQL statement on line number 1 contains Non-ANSI text.
The error is caused due to the use of DBCC.
Granting and revoking roles

After a role is defined, it can be granted to any login account or role in the
server, provided that it does not violate the rules of mutual exclusivity and
hierarchy. Table 17-4 lists the tasks related to roles, the role required to perform
the task, and the command to use.
Table 17-4: Tasks, required roles, and commands to use
Task Required role Command
Grant the sa_role role System administrator grant role
Grant the sso_role role System security officer grant role
Grant the oper_role role System security officer grant role
Grant user-defined roles System security officer grant role
Create role hierarchies System security officer grant role
Modify role hierarchies System security officer revoke role
Revoke system roles System security officer revoke role
Revoke user-defined roles System security officer revoke role
Granting roles
To grant roles to users or other roles, use:
grant role role_granted [{, role_granted}...]
to grantee [{, grantee}...]
where:
• role_granted – is the role being granted. You can specify any number of
roles to be granted.
• grantee – is the name of the user or role. You can specify any number of
grantees.

All roles listed in the grant statement are granted to all grantees. If you grant
one role to another, it creates a role hierarchy.
For example, to grant Susan, Mary, and John the “financial_analyst” and the
“payroll_specialist” roles, enter:
grant role financial_analyst, payroll_specialist
to susan, mary, john
Understanding grant and roles

Use the grant command to grant permission on objects to all users who have
been granted a specified role, whether system or user-defined. This allows you
to restrict use of an object to users who have been granted any of these roles:
• Any system-defined role
• Any user-defined role
A role can be granted only to a login account or another role.
However, grant permission does not prevent users who do not have the
specified role from being granted execute permission on a stored procedure. To
ensure, for example, that only system administrators can successfully execute
a stored procedure, use the proc_role system function within the stored
procedure itself. See “Displaying information about roles” on page 435 for
more information.
Permissions granted to roles override permissions granted to users or groups.
For example, assume John has been granted the system security officer role,
and sso_role has been granted permission on the sales table. If John’s
individual permission on sales is revoked, he can still access sales when he has
sso_role active because his role permissions override his individual
permissions.
In granting permissions, a system administrator is treated as the object owner.
If a system administrator grants permission on another user’s object, the
owner’s name appears as the grantor in sysprotects and in sp_helprotect output.
If several users grant access to an object to a particular user, the user’s access
remains until access is revoked by all those who granted access. If a system
administrator revokes access, the user is denied access, even though other users
have granted access.

Acquiring the permissions of another user
Revoking roles
Use revoke role to revoke roles from users and other roles:
revoke role role_name [{, role_name}...]from grantee [{, grantee}...]
where:
• role_name – is the role being revoked. You can specify any number of
roles to be revoked.
• grantee – is the name of the user or role. You can specify any number of
grantees.
All roles listed in the revoke statement are revoked from all grantees.
You cannot revoke a role from a user while the user is logged in.

Adaptive Server provides two ways to acquire another user’s identity and
permissions status:
• A database owner can use the setuser command to “impersonate” another
user’s identity and permissions status in the current database. See “Using
setuser” on page 586.
• proxy authorization allows one user to assume the identity of another
user on a server-wide basis. See “Using proxy authorization” on page 587.
Using setuser
A database owner may use setuser to:
• Access an object owned by another user
• Grant permissions on an object owned by another user
• Create an object that will be owned by another user
• Temporarily assume the DAC permissions of another user for some other
reason

While the setuser command enables the database owner to automatically

acquire another user’s DAC permissions, the command does not affect the
roles that have been granted.
setuser permission defaults to the database owner and cannot be transferred.
The user being impersonated must be an authorized user of the database.
Adaptive Server checks the permissions of the user being impersonated.
System administrators can use setuser to create objects that will be owned by
another user. However, system administrators operate outside the DAC
permissions system; therefore, they need not use setuser to acquire another
user’s permissions. The setuser command remains in effect until another
setuser command is given, the current database is changed, or the user logs off.
The syntax is:

setuser ["user_name"]
where user_name is a valid user in the database that is to be impersonated.
To reestablish your original identity, use setuser with no value for user_name.
This example shows how the database owner would grant Joe permission to
read the authors table, which is owned by Mary:
setuser "mary"
grant select on authors to joe
setuser /*reestablishes original identity*/
Using proxy authorization

With the proxy authorization capability of Adaptive Server, system security
officers can grant selected logins the ability to assume the security context of
another user, and an application can perform tasks in a controlled manner on
behalf of different users. If a login has permission to use proxy authorization,
the login can impersonate any other login in Adaptive Server.
Warning! The ability to assume another user’s identity is extremely powerful

and should be limited to trusted administrators and applications. grant set proxy
... restrict role can be used to restrict which roles users cannot acquire when
switching identities.

A user executing set proxy or set session authorization operates with both the
login name and server user ID of the user being impersonated. The login name
is stored in the name column of master..syslogins and the server user ID is
stored in the suid column of master..syslogins. These values are active across
the entire server in all databases.
Note set proxy and set session authorization are identical in function and can
be used interchangeably. The only difference between them is that set session
authorization is ANSI-SQL92-compatible, and set proxy is a Transact-SQL
extension.
Using set proxy to restrict roles

Grant set proxy...restrict role to restrict which roles cannot be acquired when
switching identities.
The syntax for set proxy is:
grant set proxy to user | role
[restrict role role_list | all | system]
where:
• role_list – list of roles you are restricting for the target login. The grantee
must have all roles on this list, or the set proxy command fails.
• all – ensures the grantee can run set proxy only for those users who have
the same roles, or a subset of the roles, as the grantee.
• system – ensures the grantee has the same set of system roles as the target
login.
For example, this grants set proxy to user “joe” but restricts him from switching
identities to any user with the sa, sso, or admin roles (however, if he already
has these roles, he can set proxy for any user with these roles):
restrict role sa_role, sso_role, admin_role
When “joe” tries to switch his identity to a user with admin_role (in this
example, Our_admin_role), the command fails unless he already has
admin_role:

Server 's', Line 2:Set session authorization permission
denied because the target login has a role that you do

not have and you have been restricted from using.

After “joe” is granted the admin_role and retries the command, it succeeds:
grant role admin_role to joe
For more information about the set proxy command, see the Reference
Manual: Commands.
Executing proxy authorization

Follow these rules when you execute set proxy or set session authorization:
• You cannot execute set proxy or set session authorization from within a
transaction.
• You cannot use a locked login for the proxy of another user. For example,
if “joseph” is a locked login, the following command is not allowed:
set proxy "joseph"
• You can execute set proxy or set session authorization from any database
you are allowed to use. However, the login_name you specify must be a
valid user in the database, or the database must have a “guest” user defined
for it.
• Only one level is permitted; to impersonate more than one user, you must
return to your original identity between impersonations.
• If you execute set proxy or set session authorization from within a
procedure, your original identity is automatically resumed when you exit
the procedure.
If you have a login that has been granted permission to use set proxy or set
session authorization, you can set proxy to impersonate another user. The
following is the syntax, where login_name is the name of a valid login in
master..syslogins:
set proxy login_name
or
set session authorization login_name
Enclose the login name in quotation marks.
For example, to set proxy to “mary,” execute:
set proxy "mary"

After setting proxy, check your login name in the server and your user name in
the database. For example, assume that your login is “ralph” and that you have
been granted set proxy authorization. You want to execute some commands as
“sallyn” and as “rudolph” in pubs2 database. “sallyn” has a valid name
(“sally”) in the database, but Ralph and Rudolph do not. However, pubs2 has a
“guest” user defined. You can execute:
set proxy "sallyn"
go
use pubs2
go
select suser_name(), user_name()
go
------------------------------ -------------------
sallyn sally
To change to Rudolph, you must first change back to your own identity. To do
so, execute:
set proxy "ralph"
go
------------------------------ --------------------
ralph guest
Notice that Ralph is a “guest” in the database.
Then execute:
set proxy "rudolph"
go
go
------------------------------ --------------------
rudolph guest
Rudolph is also a guest in the database because Rudolph is not a valid user in
the database.
Now, impersonate the “sa” account. Execute:
set proxy "ralph"
go
set proxy "sa"
go
go
--------------------------- --------------------
sa dbo

Proxy authorization for applications

Figure 17-1 shows an application server logging in to Adaptive Server with the
generic login “appl” to execute procedures and commands for several users.
While “appl” impersonates Tom, the application has Tom’s permissions.
Likewise, when “appl” impersonates Sue and John, the application has only
Sue’s and John’s permissions, respectively.
Figure 17-1: Applications and proxy authorization
Tom, Sue, and John establish sessions The application server (“appl”) on
with the Application Server: Adaptive Server executes:
Tom Sue John
set proxy "tom"
Application Server (SQL command for Tom)
logs in as “appl”
with set proxy set proxy "sue"
permission. (SQL command for Sue)
set proxy "John"

(SQL command for John)
Application Server Adaptive Server
Reporting on permissions
Table 17-5 lists the system procedures for reporting information about proxies,
object creation, and object access permissions:

Table 17-5: System procedures for reporting on permissions

To report information on Use
Proxies system tables
Users and processes sp_who
Permissions on database objects or users sp_helprotect
Permissions on specific tables sp_table_privileges
Permissions on specific columns in a table sp_column_privileges
Querying the sysprotects table for proxy authorization

To display information about permissions that have been granted to—or
revoked from—users, groups, and roles, query the sysprotects table. The action
column specifies the permission. For example, the action value for set proxy or
set session authorization is equal to 167.
You might execute this query:

select * from sysprotects where action = 167
The results provide the user ID of the user who granted or revoked the
permission (column grantor), the user ID of the user who has the permission
(column uid), and the type of protection (column protecttype). The protecttype
column can contain these values:
• 0 for grant with grant
• 1 for grant
• 2 for revoke
For more information about the sysprotects table, see the Reference Manual:
Building Blocks.
Displaying information about users and processes

sp_who displays information about all current Adaptive Server users and
processes or about a particular user or process. The results of sp_who include
the loginame and origname. If a user is operating under a proxy, origname
contains the name of the original login. For example, assume that “ralph”
executes the following, then executes some SQL commands:
set proxy susie
sp_who returns “susie” for loginame and “ralph” for origname.

sp_who queries the master..sysprocesses system table, which contains columns

for the server user ID (suid) and the original server user ID (origsuid).
For more information, see sp_who in the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Reporting permissions on database objects or users

Use sp_helprotect to report on permissions by database object or by user, and
(optionally) by user for a specified object. Any user can execute this procedure.
The syntax is:
sp_helprotect [name [, username [, "grant"
[,"none"|"granted"|"enabled"|role_name]]]]]
where:
• name – is either the name of the table, view, or stored procedure, or the
name of a user, group, or role in the current database. If you do not provide
a name, sp_helprotect reports on all permissions in the database.
• username – is a user’s name in the current database.
If you specify username, only that user’s permissions on the specified
object are reported. If name is not an object, sp_helprotect checks whether
name is a user, group, or role and if it is, lists the permissions for the user,
group, or role. If you specify the keyword grant, and name is not an object,
sp_helprotect displays all permissions granted by with grant option.
• grant – displays the permissions granted to name with grant option.
• none – ignores roles granted to the user.
• granted – includes information on all roles granted to the user.
• enabled – includes information on all roles activated by the user.
• role_name – displays permission information for the specified role only,

regardless of whether this role has been granted to the user.
For example, suppose you issue the following series of grant and revoke
statements:
grant select on titles to judy
grant update on titles to judy
revoke update on titles(contract) from judy
grant select on publishers to judy
with grant option

To determine the permissions Judy now has on each column in the titles table,
enter:
sp_helprotect titles, judy
grantor grantee type action object column grantable
------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ -------
dbo judy Grant Select titles All FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles advance FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles notes FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles price FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles pub_id FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles pubdate FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles title FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles title_id FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles total_sales FALSE
dbo judy Grant Update titles type FALSE
The first row shows that the database owner (“dbo”) gave Judy permission to
select all columns of the titles table. The rest of the lines indicate that she can
update only the columns listed in the display. Judy cannot give select or update
permissions to any other user.
To see Judy’s permissions on the publishers table, enter:
sp_helprotect publishers, judy
In this display, the grantable column indicates TRUE, meaning that Judy can
grant the permission to other users.
grantor grantee type action object column grantable
------- ------ ----- ------ ------ ------ -------
dbo judy Grant Select publishers all TRUE
Reporting permissions on specific tables

Use sp_table_privileges to return permissions information about a specified
table. The syntax is:
sp_table_privileges table_name [, table_owner
[, table_qualifier]]
where:
• table_name – is the name of the table, and is required.
• table_owner – can be used to specify the name of the table owner, if it is
not “dbo” or the user executing sp_table_privileges.

• table_qualifier – is the name of the current database.

Use null for parameters that you want to skip.
For example, this statement returns information about all permissions granted
on the titles table:
sp_table_privileges titles
For more information about the output of sp_table_privileges, see the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
Reporting permissions on specific columns

Use sp_column_privileges to return information about permissions on columns
in a table. The syntax is:
sp_column_privileges table_name [, table_owner
[, table_qualifier [, column_name]]]
where:
• table_name – is the name of the table.
• table_owner – can be used to specify the name of the table owner, if it is
not “dbo” or the user executing sp_column_privileges.
• table_qualifier – is the name of the current database.
• column_name – is the name of the column on which you want to see
permissions information.
Use null for parameters that you want to skip.
For example, this statement returns information about the pub_id column of the
publishers table:
sp_column_privileges publishers, null, null, pub_id

For more information about the output of sp_column_privileges, see the

Using views and stored procedures as security mechanisms
Using views and stored procedures as security

mechanisms
Views and stored procedures can serve as security mechanisms. You can give
users controlled access to database objects via a view or stored procedure
without granting them direct access to the data. For example, you might give a
clerk execute permission on a procedure that updates cost information in a
projects table without letting the user see confidential data in the table. To use
this feature, you must own the procedure or view as well as its underlying
objects. If you do not own the underlying objects, users must have permission
to access the objects. For more information about when permissions are
required, see “Understanding ownership chains” on page 599.
Adaptive Server makes permission checks, as required, when the view or
procedure is used. When you create the view or procedure, Adaptive Server
makes no permission checks on the underlying objects.
Using views as security mechanisms

Through a view, users can query and modify only the data they can see. The
rest of the database is neither visible nor accessible.
Permission to access the view must be explicitly granted or revoked, regardless
of the permissions on the view’s underlying tables. If the view and underlying
tables are owned by the same owner, no permissions need to be given on the
underlying tables. Data in an underlying table that is not included in the view
is hidden from users who are authorized to access the view but not the
underlying table.
By defining different views and selectively granting permissions on them, a
user (or any combination of users) can be restricted to different subsets of data.
Access can be restricted to:
• A subset of the rows of a base table (a value-dependent subset). For
example, you might define a view that contains only the rows for business
and psychology books to keep information about other types of books
hidden from some users.
• A subset of the columns of a base table (a value-independent subset). For
example, you might define a view that contains all the rows of the titles
table, but omits the price and advance columns, since this information is
sensitive.
• A row-and-column subset of a base table.

• The rows that qualify for a join of more than one base table. For example,
you might define a view that joins the titles, authors, and titleauthor tables.
This view hides personal data about authors and financial information
about the books.
• A statistical summary of data in a base table. For example, you might
define a view that contains only the average price of each type of book.
• A subset of another view, or of some combination of views and base tables.
Let’s say you want to prevent some users from accessing the columns in the
titles table that display money and sales amounts. You can create a view of the
titles table that omits those columns, and then give all users permission on the
view but only the Sales Department permission on the table:
grant all on bookview to public
grant all on titles to sales
An equivalent way of setting up these privilege conditions, without using a
view, is to use the following statements:
grant all on titles to public
revoke select, update on titles (price, advance,
total_sales)
from public
grant select, update on titles (price, advance,
total_sales)
to sales
One possible problem with the second solution is that users not in the sales
group who enter the select * from titles command might be surprised to see the
message that includes the phrase:
permission denied
Adaptive Server expands the asterisk into a list of all the columns in the titles
table, and since permission on some of these columns has been revoked from
nonsales users, access to these columns is denied. The error message lists the
columns for which the user does not have access.
To see all the columns for which they do have permission, the nonsales users
must name them explicitly. For this reason, creating a view and granting the
appropriate permissions on it is a better solution.
You can also use views for context-sensitive protection. For example, you can
create a view that gives a data entry clerk permission to access only those rows
that he or she has added or updated. To do so, add a column to a table in which
the user ID of the user entering each row is automatically recorded with a
default. You can define this default in the create table statement, like this:

create table testtable

(empid int,
startdate datetime,
username varchar(30) default user)
Next, define a view that includes all the rows of the table where uid is the
current user:
create view context_view
as
select *
from testtable
where username = user_name()
with check option
The rows retrievable through this view depend on the identity of the person
who issues the select command against the view. By adding with check option
to the view definition, you make it impossible for any data entry clerk to falsify
the information in the username column.
Using stored procedures as security mechanisms

If a stored procedure and all underlying objects are owned by the same user,
that owner can grant users permission to use the procedure without granting
permissions on the underlying objects. For example, you might give a user
permission to execute a stored procedure that updates a row-and-column subset
of a specified table, even though that user does not have any other permissions
on that table.
Roles and stored procedures

Use the grant execute command to grant execute permission on a stored
procedure to all users who have been granted a specified role. revoke execute
removes this permission. But grant execute permission does not prevent users
who do not have the specified role from being granted execute permission on
the stored procedure.
For further security, you can restrict the use of a stored procedure by using the
proc_role system function within the procedure to guarantee that a procedure
can be executed only by users who have a given role. proc_role returns 1 if the
user has a specific role (sa_role, sso_role, oper_role, or any user-defined role)
and returns 0 if the user does not have that role. For example, here is a
procedure that uses proc_role to see if the user has the system administrator
role:

create proc test_proc

as
if (proc_role("sa_role") = 0)
begin
print "You don’t have the right role"
return -1
end
else
print "You have SA role"
return 0
See “System Functions” in the Reference Manual: Building Blocks for more
information about proc_role.
Understanding ownership chains

Views can depend on other views or tables. Procedures can depend on other
procedures, views, or tables. These dependencies can be thought of as an
ownership chain.
Typically, the owner of a view also owns its underlying objects (other views
and tables), and the owner of a stored procedure owns all the procedures,
tables, and views referenced by the procedure.
A view and its underlying objects are usually all in the same database, as are a
stored procedure and all the objects it references; however, this is not required.
If objects are in different databases, a user wanting to use the view or stored
procedure must be a valid user or guest user in all of the databases containing
the objects. This prevents users from accessing a database unless the database
owner has authorized it.
When a user who has been granted execute permission on a procedure or view
uses it, Adaptive Server does not check permissions on any of the underlying
objects if:
• These objects and the view or procedure are owned by the same user, and
• The user accessing the view or procedure is a valid user or guest user in
each of the databases containing the underlying objects.

However, if all objects are not owned by the same user, Adaptive Server checks
object permissions when the ownership chain is broken. That is, if object A
references object B, and B is not owned by the user who owns object A,
Adaptive Server checks the permissions for object B. In this way, Adaptive
Server allows the owner of the original data to retain control over who is
authorized to access it.
Ordinarily, a user who creates a view needs to worry only about granting
permissions on that view. For example, say Mary has created a view called
auview1 on the authors table, which she also owns. If Mary grants select
permission to Sue on auview1, Adaptive Server allows Sue to access it without
checking permissions on authors.
However, a user who creates a view or stored procedure that depends on an
object owned by another user must be aware that any permissions he or she
grants depend on the permissions allowed by those other owners.
Example of views and ownership chains

Say Joe creates a view called auview2, which depends on Mary’s view auview1.
Joe grants Sue select permission on auview2.
Figure 17-2: Ownership chains and permission checking for views,
case 1
Sue’s permission Objects Ownership Checks
select auview2 Joe Sue not owner

Check permissions
select auview1 Mary Different owner

Check permissions
none authors Mary Same owner

No permission check
Adaptive Server checks the permissions on auview2 and auview1, and finds that
Sue can use them. Adaptive Server checks ownership on auview1 and authors
and finds that they have the same owner. Therefore, Sue can use auview2.

Taking this example a step further, suppose that Joe’s view, auview2, depends
on auview1, which depends on authors. Mary decides she likes Joe’s auview2
and creates auview3 on top of it. Both auview1 and authors are owned by Mary.
The ownership chain looks like this:
Figure 17-3: Ownership chains and permission checking for views,
case 2
select auview3 Mary Sue not owner

Check permissions
select auview2 Joe Different owner

Check permissions
select auview1 Mary Different owner

Check permissions

No permission check
When Sue tries to access auview3, Adaptive Server checks permissions on

auview3, auview2, and auview1. If Joe has granted permission to Sue on
auview2, and Mary has granted her permission on auview3 and auview1,
Adaptive Server allows the access. Adaptive Server checks permissions only if
the object immediately before it in the chain has a different owner (or if it is the
first object in the chain). For example, it checks auview2 because the object
before it—auview3—is owned by a different user. It does not check permission
on authors, because the object that immediately depends on it, auview1, is
owned by the same user.
Example of procedures and ownership chains

Procedures follow the same rules as views. For example, suppose the
ownership chain looks like this:

Figure 17-4: Ownership chains and permission checking for stored

procedures
execute proc4 Mary Sue not owner

Check permissions
none proc3 Mary Same owner

No permissions check
execute proc2 Joe Different owner

Check permissions
execute proc1 Mary Different owner

Check permissions

No permission check
To execute proc4, Sue must have permission to execute proc4, proc2, and proc1.
Permission to execute proc3 is not necessary because proc3 and proc4 have the
same owner.
Adaptive Server checks Sue’s permissions on proc4 and all objects it references
each time she executes proc4. Adaptive Server knows which referenced objects
to check: it determined this the first time Sue executed proc4, and it saved the
information with the procedure’s execution plan. Unless one of the objects
referenced by the procedure is dropped or redefined, Adaptive Server does not
change its initial decision about which objects to check.
This protection hierarchy allows every object’s owner to fully control access to
the object. Owners can control access to views and stored procedures, as well
as to tables.

Permissions on triggers
A trigger is a special kind of stored procedure used to enforce integrity,
especially referential integrity. Triggers are never executed directly, but only as
a side effect of modifying a table. You cannot grant or revoke permissions for
triggers.
Only an object owner can create a trigger. However, the ownership chain can
be broken if a trigger on a table references objects owned by different users.
The protection hierarchy rules that apply to procedures also apply to triggers.
While the objects that a trigger affects are usually owned by the user who owns
the trigger, you can write a trigger that modifies an object owned by another
user. If this is the case, any users modifying your object in a way that activates
the trigger must have permission on the other object as well.
If Adaptive Server denies permission on a data modification command because
a trigger affects an object for which the user does not have permission, the
entire data modification transaction is rolled back.
See Chapter 19, “Triggers: Enforcing Referential Integrity,” in the
Transact-SQL User’s Guide.
Using row-level access control

Row-level access control enables the database owner or table owner to create
a secure data access environment automatically, by providing:
• More granular data security: you can set permissions for individual rows,
not just tables and columns
• Automatic data filtering according to group, role, and application
• Data-level security encoded in the server
Row-level access control restricts access to data in a table’s individual rows,
through three features:
• Access rules that the database owner defines and binds to the table
• Application Context Facility, which provides built-in functions that
define, store, and retrieve user-defined contexts
• Login triggers that the database owner, sa_role, or the user can create

Adaptive Server enforces row-level access control for all data manipulation
languages (DMLs), preventing users from bypassing the access control to get
to the data.
The syntax for configuring your system for row-level access control is:
sp_configure "enable row level access", 1
This option slightly increases the amount of memory Adaptive Server uses, and
you need an ASE_RLAC license option. Row-level access control is a dynamic
option, so you need not restart Adaptive Server.
Access rules
To use the row-level access control feature, add the access option to the
existing create rule syntax. Access rules restrict any rows that can be viewed or
modified.
Access rules are similar to domain rules, which allow table owners to control
the values users can insert or update on a column. The domain rule applies
restrictions to added data, functioning on update and insert commands.
Access rules apply restrictions to retrieved data, enforced on select, update, and
delete operations. Adaptive Server enforces the access rules on all columns that
are read by a query, even if the columns are not included in the select list. In
other words, in a given query, Adaptive Server enforces the domain rule on the
table that is updated, and the access rule on all tables that are read.
For example:
insert into orders_table
select * from old_orders_table
In this query, if there are domain rules on the orders_table and access rules on
the old_orders_table, Adaptive Server enforces the domain rule on the
orders_table, because it is updated, and the access rule on the old_orders_table,
because it is read.
Using access rules is similar to using views, or using an ad hoc query with
where clauses. The query is compiled and optimized after the access rules are
attached, so it does not cause performance degradation. Access rules provide a
virtual view of the table data, the view depending on the specific access rules
bound to the columns.

Access rules can be bound to user-defined datatypes, defined with sp_addtype.

Adaptive Server enforces the access rule on user tables, which frees the table
owner or database owner from the maintenance task of binding access rules to
columns in the normalized schema. For instance, you can create a user-defined
type, whose base type is varchar(30), call it username, and bind an access rule
to it. Adaptive Server enforces the access rule on any tables in your application
that have columns of type username.
Application developers can write flexible access rules using Java and
application contexts, described in “Access rules as user-defined Java
functions” on page 610, and “Using the Application Context Facility” on page
613.
Syntax for access rules

Use the access parameter in the create rule syntax to create access rules.
create [or|and] access rule (access_rule_name)
as (condition)
Creating a sample table with access rules

This section shows the process of creating a table and binding an access rule to
it.
Creating a table A table owner creates and populates table T (username char(30), title char(30),
classified_data char(1024)):
AA, "Administrative Assistant","Memo to President"

AA, "Administrative Assistant","Tracking Stock
Movements"
VP1, "Vice President", "Meeting Schedule"
VP2, "Vice President", "Meeting Schedule"
Creating and binding The table owner creates access rule uname_acc_rule and binds it to the
access rules username column on table T.
create access rule uname_acc_rule

as @username = suser_name()
-----------
sp_bindrule uname_acc_rule, "T.username"
Querying the table When you issue the following query:
select * from T

Adaptive Server processes the access rule that is bound to the username
column on table T and attaches it to the query tree. The tree is then optimized
and an execution plan is generated and executed, as though the user had
executed the query with the filter clause given in the access rule. In other
words, Adaptive Server attaches the access rule and executes the query as:
select * from T where T.username = suser_name().
The condition where T.username = suser_name() is enforced by the
server. The user cannot bypass the access rule.
The result of an Administrative Assistant executing the select query is:
AA, "Administrative Assistant","Memo to President"
AA, "Administrative Assistant","Tracking Stock
Movements"
Dropping an access Before you drop an access rule, you must unbind it from any columns or
rule datatypes, using sp_unbindrule, as in the following example:
sp_unbindrule "T.username",
NULL, "all"
sp_unbindrule unbinds any domain rules attached to the column by default.
After you unbind the rule, you can drop it:

drop rule "rule_name"
For example:
drop rule "T.username"
Syntax for extended access rule

Each access rule is bound to one column, but you can have multiple access
rules in a table. create rule provides AND and OR parameters to handle
evaluating multiple access rules. To create AND access rules and OR access
rules, use extended access rule syntax:
• AND access rule:
create and access rule rule_name
• OR access rule
create or access rule rule_name as

You can bind AND access rules and OR access rules to a column or user-defined
datatype. With the extended access rule syntax, you can bind multiple access
rules to the table, although you can bind only one per column. When the table
is accessed, the access rules go into effect, the AND rules bound first by default,
and then the OR access rules.
If you bind multiple access rules to a table without defining AND or OR access,
the default access rule is AND.
If there is only one access rule on a row of the table and it is defined as an OR
access rule, it behaves as an AND access rule.
Using access and extended access rules

Create access rules The following steps create access rules:
create access rule empid1_access
as @empid = 1
create access rule deptno1_access

as @deptid = 2
The following steps create OR access rules:
create or access rule name1_access
as @name = "smith"
create or access rule phone_access
as @phone = "9999"
Create table This step creates a test table:
create table testtab1 (empno int, deptno int,name
char(10), phone char(4))
Bind rules to table The following steps bind access rules to the test table columns:
sp_bindrule empid1_access, "testtab1.empno"
/*Rule bound to table column.*/
(return status = 0)
sp_bindrule deptno1_access,"testtab1.deptno"
(return status = 0)
sp_bindrule name1_access,"testtab1.name"
(return status = 0)

sp_bindrule phone_access,"testtab1.phone"
(return status = 0)
Insert data into table The following steps insert values into the test table:
insert testtab1 values (1,1,"smith","3245")
(1 row affected)
insert testtab1 values(2,1,"jones","0283")
(1 row affected)
insert testtab1 values(1,2,"smith","8282")(1 row
affected)
insert testtab1 values(2,2,"smith","9999")
(1 row affected)
Access rule examples

The following examples show how access rules return specific rows containing
information limited by access rules.
Example 1 This example returns information from two rows:
/* return rows when empno = 1 and deptno = 2
and ( name = "smith" or phone = "9999" )
*/
select * from testtab1
empno deptno name phone
------------ ----------- ---------- -----
1 2 smith 8282
1 2 jones 9999
(2 rows affected)
/* unbind access rule from specific column */
sp_unbindrule "testtab1.empno",NULL,"accessrule"
/*Rule unbound from table column.*/
(return status = 0)
Example 2 This example returns information from four rows:

/* return rows when deptno = 2 and ( name = "smith"

or phone = "9999" )*/
----------- ----------- ---------- -----
1 2 smith 8282
2 2 smith 9999
3 2 smith 8888
1 2 jones 9999
(4 rows affected)
/* unbind all deptno rules from specific column */

sp_unbindrule "testtab1.deptno",NULL,"all"
/*Rule unbound from table column.*/
(return status = 0)
Example 3 This example returns information from six rows:
/* return the rows when name = "smith" or phone = "9999"
*/
----------- ----------- ---------- -----
1 1 smith 3245
1 2 smith 8282
2 2 smith 9999
3 2 smith 8888
1 2 jones 9999
2 3 jones 9999

Access rules and alter table command

When the table owner uses the alter table command, Adaptive Server disables
access rules during the execution of the command and enables them upon
completion of the command. The access rules are disabled to avoid filtering the
table data during the alter table command.
Access rules and bcp

Adaptive Server enforces access rules when data is copied out of a table using
the bcp. Adaptive Server cannot disable access rules, as it does with alter table,
because any user can use bcp who has select permission on the table.
For security purposes, the database owner should lock the table exclusively and
disable access rules during bulk copy out. The lock disables access to other
users while the access rules are disabled. The database owner should bind the
access rules and unlock the table after the data has been copied.
Access rules as user-defined Java functions

Access rules can use user-defined Java functions. For example, you can use
Java functions to write sophisticated rules using the profile of the application,
the user logged in to the application, and the roles that the user is currently
assigned for the application.
The following Java class uses the method GetSecVal to demonstrate how you
can use Java methods that use JDBC as user-defined functions inside access
rules:
import java.sql.*;
import java.util.*;
public class sec_class {

static String _url = "jdbc:sybase:asejdbc";
public static int GetSecVal(int c1)
{
try
{
PreparedStatement pstmt;
ResultSet rs = null;
Connection con = null;
int pno_val;
pstmt = null;

Class.forName("sybase.asejdbc.ASEDriver");
con = DriverManager.getConnection(_url);
if (con == null)
{
return (-1);
}
pstmt = con.prepareStatement("select classification

from sec_tab where id = ?");
if (pstmt == null)
{
return (-1);
}
pstmt.setInt(1, c1);
rs = pstmt.executeQuery();
rs.next();
pno_val = rs.getInt(1);
rs.close();
pstmt.close();
con.close();
return (pno_val);
}
catch (SQLException sqe)
{
return(sqe.getErrorCode());
}
catch (ClassNotFoundException e)
{
System.out.println("Unexpected exception : " +

e.toString());
System.out.println("\nThis error usually indicates that
" + "your Java CLASSPATH environment has not been set
properly.");
e.printStackTrace();

return (-1);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
System.out.println("Unexpected exception : " +
e.toString());
e.printStackTrace();
return (-1);
}
}
}
After compiling the Java code, you can run the same program from isql, as
follows.
For example:
javac sec_class.java
jar cufo sec_class. jar sec_class.class
installjava -Usa -Password -
f/work/work/FGAC/sec_class.jar -
-D testdb
From isql:
/*to create new user datatype class_level*/
sp_addtype class_level, int
/*to create the sample secure data table*/
create table sec_data (c1 varchar(30),
c2 varchar(30),
c3 varchar(30),
clevel class_level)
/*to create the classification table for each user*/
create table sec_tab (userid int, clevel class-level
int)
insert into sec_tab values (1,10)

declare @v1 int

select @v1 = 5
while @v1 > 0
begin

insert into sec_data values('8', 'aaaaaaaaaa',

'aaaaaaaaaa', 8)
'aaaaaaaaaa', 7)
'aaaaaaaaaa', 5)
'aaaaaaaaaa', 5)
'aaaaaaaaaa', 2)
'aaaaaaaaaa', 3)
select @v1 = @v1 -1
end
go
create access rule clevel_rule

@clevel <= sec_class.GetSecVal(suser_id())
go
create default clevel_def as

sec_class.GetSecVal(suser_id())
go
sp_bindefault clevel_def, class_level

go
sp_bindrule clevel, class_level

go
grant all on sec_data to public

go
grant all on sec_tab to public
go
Using the Application Context Facility

Applications on a database server must limit access to the data. Applications
are carefully coded to consider the profile of the user. For example, a Human
Resources application is coded to know which users are allowed to update
salary information.

The attributes that enable this coding comprise an application context. The
Application Context Facility (ACF) consists of three built-in functions that
provide a secure environment for data access, by allowing access rules to
compare against the intrinsic values assigned to users in a session.
An application context consists of context_name, attribute_name, and
attribute_value. Users define the context name, the attributes, and the values for
each context. You can use the default read-only application context that Sybase
provides, SYS_SESSION, to access some session-specific information. This
application context is shown as Table 17-6 on page 621. You can also create
your own application contexts, as described in “Creating and using application
contexts” on page 616.
The user profile, combined with the application profile, which is defined in a
table created by the system administrator, permits cumulative and overlapping
security schemes.
ACF allows users to define, store, and retrieve:
• User profiles (the roles authorized to a user and the groups to which the
user belongs)
• Application profiles currently in use
Any number of application contexts per session are possible, and any context
can define any number of attribute/value pairs. ACF context rows are specific
to a session, and not persistent across sessions; however, unlike local variables,
they are available across nested levels of statement execution. ACF provides
built-in functions that set, get, list, and remove these context rows.
Setting permissions for using application context functions

You execute an application context function in a select statement. The owner
of the function is the system administrator of the server. You can create, set,
retrieve, and remove application contexts using built-in functions.
The data used in the functions is defined in a table that contains all logins for
all tables, which created by the system administrator. For more information
about this table, see “Using login triggers” on page 623.
• set_appcontext() stores:
select set_appcontext ("titles", "rlac", "1")

• get_appcontext() supplies two parts of a context in a session, and retrieves
the third:

select get_appcontext ("titles", "rlac")

------------------------
1
For more information on these functions and on list_appcontext and
rm_appcontext, see “Creating and using application contexts” on page 616.
Granting and revoking Grant and revoke privileges to users, roles, and groups in a given database to
access objects in that database. The only exceptions are create database, set
session authorization, and connect. A user granted these privileges should be a
valid user in the master database. To use other privileges, the user must be a
valid user in the database where the object is located.
Using of functions means that unless special arrangements are made, any
logged-in user can reset the profiles of the session. Although Adaptive Server
audits built-in functions, security may be compromised before the problem is
noticed. To restrict access to these built-in functions, use grant and revoke
privileges. Only users with the sa_role can grant or revoke privileges on the
built-in functions. Only the select privilege is checked as part of the
server-enforced data access control checks performed by the functions.
Valid users Functions do not have an object ID and they do not have a home database.
Therefore, each database owner must grant the select privilege for the
functions to the appropriate user. Adaptive Server finds the user’s default
database and checks the permissions against this database. With this approach,
only the owner of the users’ default database needs to grant the select privilege.
If other databases should be restricted, the owner of those databases must
explicitly revoke permission from the user in those databases.
Only the application context built-in functions perform data access control
checks on the user when you grant and revoke privileges on them. Granting or
revoking privileges for other functions has no effect in Adaptive Server.
Privileges granted to public affect only users named in the table created by the
system administrator. For information about the table, see “Using login
triggers” on page 623. Guest users have privileges only if the sa_role
specifically grants it by adding them to the table.
A system administrator can execute the following commands to grant or revoke
select privileges on specific application context functions:
grant select on set_appcontext to user_role
grant select on set_appcontext to joe_user
revoke select on set_appcontext from joe_user

Creating and using application contexts

The following functions are available for creating and maintaining application
contexts. For more information, see the Reference Manual: Building Blocks.
• set_appcontext
• get_appcontext
• list_appcontext
• rm_appcontext
set_appcontext
Sets an application context name, attribute name, and attribute value, defined
by the attributes of an application, for a specified user session.
set_appcontext ("context_name", "attribute_name", "attribute_value")
• context_name – a row that specifies an application context name, saved as
the datatype char(30).
• attribute_name – a row that specifies an application context name, saved
as the datatype char(30)
• attribute_value – a row that specifies an application attribute value, saved
as the datatype char(255).
Examples
This example creates an application context called CONTEXT1, with an
attribute ATTR1 that has the value VALUE1:
select set_appcontext ("CONTEXT1", "ATTR1", "VALUE1")
---------------
0
This example shows an attempt to override the existing application context.
The attempt fails, returning -1:
select set_appcontext("CONTEXT1", "ATTR1", "VALUE1")
--------------
-1
This example shows how set_appcontext can include a datatype conversion in
the value:
declare@val numeric
select @val = 20

select set_appcontext ("CONTEXT1", "ATTR2",

convert(char(20), @val))
------------
0
This example shows the result when a user without appropriate permissions
attempts to set the application context. The attempt fails, returning -1:
select set_appcontext("CONTEXT1", "ATTR2", "VALUE1")
--------------
-1
Usage
• set_appcontext returns 0 for success and -1 for failure.
• If you set values that already exist in the current session, set_appcontext
returns -1.
• set_appcontext cannot override the values of an existing application
context. To assign new values to a context, remove the context and re-
create it using the new values.
• set_appcontext saves attributes as char datatypes. If you create an access
rule that must compare the attribute value to another datatype, the rule
should convert the char data to the appropriate datatype.
• All arguments in this function are required.
get_appcontext
Returns the value of the attribute in a specified context.
get_appcontext ("context_name", "attribute_name")
• context_name – a row specifying an application context name, saved as
datatype char(30).
• attribute_name – a row specifying an application context attribute name,
saved as datatype char(30).
Examples
This example shows VALUE1 returned for ATTR1:
select get_appcontext ("CONTEXT1", "ATTR1")
-----------
VALUE1

ATTR1 does not exist in CONTEXT2:

select get_appcontext("CONTEXT2", "ATTR1")
------------
NULL
This example shows the result when a user without appropriate permissions
attempts to get the application context:
select get_appcontext("CONTEXT1", "ATTR2")
select permisssion denied on built-in get_appcontext,
database dbid
----------
-1
Usage
• get_appcontext returns 0 for success and -1 for failure.
• If the attribute you require does not exist in the application context,
get_appcontext returns “null.”
• get_appcontext saves attributes as char datatypes. If you create an access

rule that compares the attribute value to other datatypes, the rule should
convert the char data to the appropriate datatype.
list_appcontext
Lists all the attributes of all the contexts in the current session.
list_appcontext ("context_name")
• context_name – names all the application context attributes in the session.
list_appcontext has a datatype of char(30).
Examples
To use list_appcontext, the user must have appropriate permissions. For more
information, see “Setting permissions for using application context functions”
on page 614.
This example shows the results of a user with appropriate permissions listing
the application contexts:
select list_appcontext ("*", "*")
Context Name: (CONTEXT1)
Attribute Name: (ATTR1) Value: (VALUE2)

Context Name: (CONTEXT2)

Attribute Name: (ATTR1) Value: (VALUE!)
-----------
0
This example shows a user without appropriate permissions attempting to list
the application contexts. The attempt fails, returning -1.
select list_appcontext()
Select permission denied on built-in
list_appcontext, database DBID
---------
-1
Usage
• list_appcontext returns 0 for success and -1 for failure.
• Since built-in functions do not return multiple result sets, the client
application receives list_appcontext returns as messages.
rm_appcontext
Removes a specific application context, or all application contexts.
rm_appcontext ("context_name", "attribute_name")
• context_name – a row specifying an application context name, saved as
datatype char(30).
• attribute_name – a row specifying an application context attribute name,
saved as datatype char(30).
Examples
The following three examples show how to remove an application context by
specifying some or all attributes. Use an asterisk ("*") to remove all attributes
in the specified context.
select rm_appcontext("CONTEXT1", "*")
---------
0
Use an asterisk ("*") to remove all the contexts and attributes.
select rm_appcontext("*", "*")
---------
0

This example shows a user attempting to remove a nonexistent context. The

attempt fails, returning -1.
select rm_appcontext("NON_EXISTING_CTX", "ATTR2")
---------
-1
This example shows the result of a user without appropriate permissions
attempting to remove an application context.
select rm_appcontext("CONTEXT1", "ATTR2")
---------
-1
Usage
• rm_appcontext returns 0 for success, -1 for failure.
SYS_SESSION system application context

The SYS_SESSION context shows the default predefined application context,
which provides session-specific pairs of attributes and values. The syntax for
using the context is:
select list_appcontext ("SYS_SESSION", "*")
Then:
select get_appcontext ("SYS_SESSION", "<attribute>")

Table 17-6: SYS_SESSION attributes and values

Attribute Value
username Login name
hostname Host name from which the client has connected
applname Name of the application as set by the client
suserid User ID of the user in the current database
groupid Group ID of the user in the current database
dbid ID of the user’s current database
dbname Current database
spid Server process ID
proxy_suserid The server user ID of the proxy
client_name Client name set by the middle-tier application, using the set
client_name command
client_applname Client application name set by the middle-tier application,
using the set client_applname command
client_hostname Client host name set by the middle-tier application, using the
set client_hostname command
language Current language the client is using by default or after using
the set language command (@@language)
character_set Character set the client is using (@@client_csname)
dateformat Date expected by the client, set using the set dateformat
command
is_showplan_on Returns YES if set showplan is on, NO if it is off
is_noexec_on Returns YES if set no exec is on, NO if it is off
Solving a problem using an access rule and ACF

This section shows the solution of a problem: each of five users, on different
security levels, should see only rows with a value less than or equal to his or
her security level. This solution uses access rules, with the Application Context
Facility, to display only the rows that one of the users, Dave, sees.
There are five logins:
• Anne has security level 1.
• Bob has security level 1.
• Cassie has security level 2.
• Dave has security level 2.

• Ellie has security level 4.

Users should see only rows with a value in rlac that is less than or equal to their
own security level. To accomplish this, create an access rule and apply ACF.
The rlac column is type integer, and appcontext arguments are type char.
create access rule rlac_rule as
@value <= convert(int, get_appcontext("titles",
"rlac"))
sp_bindrule rlac_rule, "titles.rlac"
/* log in as Dave and apply ACF value of 2*/
select set_appcontext("titles", "rlac", "2")
/*this value persists throughout the session*/

/*select all rows*/
select title_id, rlac from titles

---------------------
title_id rlac
PC8888 1
BU1032 2
PS7777 1
PS3333 1
BU1111 2
PC1035 1
BU2075 2
PS2091 1
PS2106 1
BU7832 2
PS1372 1
(11 rows affected)

Using login triggers
Note Some information in this section is from the article “Login Triggers in
ASE 12.5”. Copyright 1998–2002, Rob Verschoor/ Sypron B.V., at
http://www.sypron.nl/logtrig.html.
Login triggers execute a specified stored procedure every time a user logs in.
The login trigger is an ordinary stored procedure, except it executes in the
background. It is the last step in a successful login process, and sets the
application context for the user logging in.
Only the system security officer can register a login trigger to users in the
server.
To provide a secure environment, the system administrator must:
1 Revoke select privilege on the set_appcontext function. The owner of a
login trigger must have explicit permission to use set_appcontext, even if
the owner has sa_role.
2 Configure a login trigger from a stored procedure for each user, and
register the login trigger to the user.
3 Provide execute privilege to the login trigger that the user executes.
Creating login triggers

Create a login trigger as a stored procedure. Do not use the create trigger
command. The following sample creates a login trigger stored procedure in the
pubs2 database:
create loginproc as
declare @appname varchar(20)
declare @attr varchar(20)
declare @value varchar(20)
declare @retvalue int
declare apctx cursor for
select appname, attr, value from
pubs2.dbo.lookup where login = suser_name()
open apctx
fetch apctx into @appname, @attr, @value
While (@@sqlstatus = 0)
begin
select f@retval =
set_appcontext (rtrim (@appname),

rtrim(@attr), rtrim(@value))
fetch apctx into @appname, @attr, @value
end
go
grant execute on loginproc to public

go
To associate a specific user with the login trigger, run sp_modifylogin in the
user’s default database.
Configuring login triggers

You must have sso_role enabled to set, change, or drop a login trigger. The
object ID of the login trigger is stored in the syslogins.procid column. Login
triggers do not exist by default. They must be registered using sp_modifylogin.
The syntax is:
sp_modifylogin <login_name>, "login script", <sproc_name >
• login_name – the user’s login name.
• "login script" – type in as shown; “login script” tells sp_modifylogin that the
next parameter, “sproc_name”, is a login trigger.
• sproc_name – the name of the stored procedure configured as a login
trigger for this user.
Run this procedure from the user’s default database. The stored procedure you
are registering as a login trigger must be available in the user’s default
database, because Adaptive Server searches the sysobjects table in the user’s
default database to find the login trigger object.
Configuring the login The following example configures the stored procedure my_proc (which must
trigger exist in the database you want to configure) as a login trigger for Adaptive
Server login my_login:
sp_modifylogin my_login, "login script", my_proc
Again, you must execute the command from within the user’s default database.
Adaptive Server checks to see whether the login has execute permissions on
the stored procedure, but not until the user actually logs in and executes the
login trigger.
Dropping and Once you have configured a stored procedure as a login trigger, you cannot
changing the login drop it. You must unconfigure it first, either by dropping the login trigger
trigger
altogether, or by changing the login trigger to a different stored procedure. To
drop the login trigger, enter:

sp_modifylogin my_login, "login script", NULL

To change the login trigger to a different stored procedure, enter:
sp_modifylogin my_login, "login script", diff_proc
Displaying the login To display the current login trigger, use sp_displaylogin:
trigger
sp_displaylogin my_login
go
(....)
Default Database: my_db
Default Language:
Auto Login Script: my_proc
....
Executing a login trigger

Login triggers are different from ordinary stored procedures in that once they
are registered they execute in the background, without active user connections.
Once you have configured a login trigger, Adaptive Server automatically
executes it in the background as soon as the user logs in, but before the server
executes any commands from the client application.
If one login makes multiple concurrent connections, the login trigger executes
independently during each session. Similarly, multiple logins can configure the
same stored procedure to be a login trigger.
Background execution means that you cannot use some standard features of
stored procedures in a stored procedure configured as a login trigger. For
instance, you cannot pass any parameters without default values to or from the
procedure, nor does the procedure pass back any result values.
This special execution mode affects any stored procedures that are called by the
login trigger stored procedure, as well as any output generated by the login
trigger stored procedure itself.
You can also execute a login trigger stored procedure as a normal stored
procedure, for example, from isql. The procedure executes and behaves
normally, showing all output and error messages as usual.
Understanding login trigger output

The main effect of executing the stored procedure as a background task is that
output from the login trigger is not written to the client application, but to the
Adaptive Server error log file, as are some, but not all, error messages.

Output from print or raiserror messages is prefixed by the words background

task message or background task error in the error log. For example, the
statements print “Hello!” and raiserror 123456 in a login trigger appear in the
Adaptive Server error log as:
(....) background task message: Hello!
(....) background task error 123456: This is test
message 123456
However, not all output goes to the Adaptive Server error log:
• No result sets from select statements (which are normally sent to a client
connection) appear anywhere, not even in the Adaptive Server error log.
This information disappears.
• The following statements execute normally: insert...select and select...into
statements, as well as other DML statements which do not ordinarily send
a result set to the client application, and DDL statements ordinarily
allowed in a stored procedure.
Using login triggers for other applications

Login triggers are part of the row-level access control feature in Adaptive
Server. In this context, you can use a login trigger in combination with the
features for access rules and application contexts to set up row-level access
controls, once a session logs in to Adaptive Server. However, you can use login
triggers for other purposes as well.
Limiting the number of The following example limits the number of concurrent connections to
concurrent Adaptive Server that a specific login can make. Each of the commands
connections
described in steps 1 and 2 in the example are executed in the default database
of the user for whom the access needs to be restricted:
1 As system administrator, create the limit_user_sessions stored procedure:
create procedure limit_user_sessions
as
declare @cnt int,
@limit int,
@loginname varchar(32)
select @limit = 2 -- max nr. of concurrent logins
/* determine current #sessions */

select @cnt = count(*)
from master.dbo.sysprocesses
where suid = suser_id()

/* check the limit */

if @cnt > @limit
begin
select @loginname = suser_name()
print "Aborting login [%1!]: exceeds session
limit [%2!]",
@loginname, @limit
/* abort this session */
select syb_quit()
end
go
grant exec on limit_user_sessions to public

go
2 As system security officer, configure this stored procedure as a login
trigger for user “bob”:
sp_modifylogin "bob", "login script",
"limit_user_sessions"
go
3 Now, when user “bob” creates a third session for Adaptive Server, this
session is terminated by the login trigger calling the syb_quit() function:
% isql -SASE125 -Ubob -Pbobpassword
1> select 1
2> go
CT-LIBRARY error:
ct_results(): network packet layer: internal net
library error: Net-Library operation terminated due
to disconnect
4 This message appears in the Adaptive Server error log file:
(...) background task message: Aborting login [
my_login]: exceeds session limit [2]
Enforcing timed-based This example describes how system administrators can create a login trigger to
restrictions enforce time-based restrictions on user sessions. Each of the commands
described in steps 1 – 4 are executed in the default database of the user for
whom the access needs to be restricted:
1 As system administrator, create this table:
create table access_times (
suid int not null,

dayofweek tinyint,
shiftstart time,
shiftend time)
2 As system administrator, insert the following rows in table access_times.
These rows indicate that user “bob” is allowed to log into Adaptive Server
on Mondays between 9:00am and 5:00pm, and user “mark” is allowed to
login to Adaptive Server on Tuesdays between 9:00Am and 5:00PM
insert into access_times
select suser_id(‘bob’), 1, ‘9:00’, ‘17:00’
go
insert into access_times
select suser_id(‘mark’), 2, ‘9:00’, ‘17:00’
go
3 As system administrator, create the limit_access_time stored procedure,
which references the access_time table to determine if login access should
be granted:
create procedure limit_access_time as
declare @curdate date,
@curdow tinyint,
@curtime time,
@cnt int,
@loginname varchar(32)
-- setup variables for current day-of-week, time

select @curdate = current_date()
select @curdow = datepart(cdw,@curdate)
select @curtime = current_time()
select @cnt = 0
-- determine if current user is allowed access

select @cnt = count(*)
from access_times
where suid = suser_id()
and dayofweek = @curdow
and @curtime between shiftstart and shiftend
if @cnt = 0
begin
select @loginname = suser_name()
print "Aborting login [%1!]: login attempt past
normal working hours", @loginname
-- abort this session

return -4

end
go
grant exec on limit_access_time to public

go
4 As system security officer, configure the limit_access_time stored
procedure as a login trigger for users “bob” and “mark”:
sp_modifylogin "bob", "login script",
"limit_access_time"
go
sp_modifylogin "mark", "login script",
"limit_access_time"
go
5 On Mondays, user “bob” can successfully create a session:
isql -Ubob -Ppassword
1> select 1
2> go
-----------
1
(1 row affected)
However, user “mark” is denied access to Adaptive Server:
isql -Umark -Ppassword
1> select 1
2> go
CT-LIBRARY error:
ct_results(): network packet layer: internal net
library error: Net-Library operation terminated
due to disconnect
6 The following message is logged in the error log:
(...) server back-ground task message: Aborting
login [mark]: login attempt past normal working
hours
The above examples show how you can limit the number of concurrent
connections for a specific login and restrict access to specific times of day for
that login, but it has one disadvantage: the client application cannot easily
detect the reason the session was terminated. To display a message to the user,
such as “Too many users right now—please try later,” use a different approach.
Instead of calling the built-in function syb_quit(), which causes the server to
simply terminate the current session, you can deliberately cause an error in the
stored procedure to abort the login trigger stored procedure.

For example, dividing by zero aborts the login trigger stored procedure,
terminates the session, and causes a message to appear.
Login trigger restrictions

The following actions are restricted.
• You cannot use a login trigger to set session-specific options, such as set
nocount on, set rowcount on, and so on. Setting session options in any
stored procedure has an effect only inside that stored procedure.
• You cannot create #temp tables to use later in the session. Once the
procedure completes, the #temp tables drop away automatically and the
original session settings are restored, as in any other stored procedure.
• You should not use login triggers on the sa login; a failing login trigger can
lock you out of Adaptive Server.
• Do not use a login trigger for anything that may take longer than a few
seconds to process, or that risks processing problems.
Issues and information

• If you do not have access to the Adaptive Server error log, do not use login
triggers. Always check the Adaptive Server error log for error messages.
• For Adaptive Server version 15.0.2 and later, any exportable option set or
unset in a login trigger take effect in the login process when the server
starts.
To disable this behavior, execute set export_options off inside the login
trigger.
Adaptive Server versions 15.0.1, 12.5.4, and earlier required that you start
Adaptive Server with trace flag 4073 to enable the options for a login
trigger.
• A client application, like isql, is unaware of the existence or execution of
a login trigger; it presents a command prompt immediately after the
successful login, though Adaptive Server does not execute any commands
before the login trigger successfully executes. This isql prompt displays
even if the login trigger has terminated the user connection.

• The user logging in to Adaptive Server must have execute permission to

use the login trigger stored procedure. If no execute permission has been
granted, an error message appears in the Adaptive Server error log and the
user connection closes immediately (though isql still shows a command
prompt).
Adaptive Server error log shows a message similar to the following:
EXECUTE permission denied on object my_proc,
database my_db, owner dbo
• The login trigger stored procedure cannot contain parameters without
specified default values. If parameters without default values appear in the
stored procedure, the login trigger fails and an error similar to the
following appears in the Adaptive Server error log:
Procedure my_proc expects parameter @param1, which
was not supplied...
Disabling execute privilege on login triggers

A database owner or administrator can disable execute privilege on the login
trigger, or code the login trigger to permit access only at certain times. For
example, you may want to prohibit regular users from using the server while
the database owner or administrator is updating the table.
Note If the login trigger returns a minus number, the login fails.
Exporting set options from a login trigger

Adaptive Server allows options for the set command that are inside login
triggers to remain valid for the entire user session.
The following set options are automatically exported:
• showplan
• arithabort [overflow | numeric_truncation]
• arithignore [overflow]
• colnames
• format

• statistics io
• procid
• rowcount
• altnames
• nocount
• quoted_identifier
• forceplan
• fmtonly
• close on endtran
• fipsflagger
• self_recursion
• ansinull
• dup_in_subquery
• or_strategy
• flushmessage
• ansi_permissions
• string_rtruncation
• prefetch
• triggers
• replication
• sort_resources
• transactional_rpc
• cis_rpc_handling
• strict_dtm_enforcement
• raw_object_serialization
• textptr_parameters
• remote_indexes
• explicit_transaction_required

• statement_cache
• command_status_reporting
• proc_return_status
• proc_output_params
Setting global login triggers

Use sp_logintrigger to set a global login trigger that is executed at each user
login. To take user-specific actions, set a user specific login trigger using
sp_modifylogin or sp_addlogin.
Note You can activate this option by setting trace flag -T4073.


CH A PTE R 1 8 Auditing
This chapter describes how to set up auditing for your installation.

Topic Page
Introduction to auditing in Adaptive Server 635
Installing and setting up auditing 640
Setting global auditing options 657
Querying the audit trail 667
Understanding the audit tables 667
Introduction to auditing in Adaptive Server

A principal element of a secure system is accountability. One way to
ensure accountability is to audit events on the system. Many events that
occur in Adaptive Server can be recorded.
Auditing is an important part of security in a database management
system. An audit trail can be used to detect penetration of the system and
misuse of resources. By examining the audit trail, a system security officer
can inspect patterns of access to objects in databases and can monitor the
activity of specific users. Audit records are traceable to specific users,
which may act as a deterrent to users who are misusing the system.
Each audit record can log the nature of the event, the date and time, the
user responsible for it, and the success or failure of the event. Among the
events that can be audited are log ins and log outs, server starts, use of data
access commands, attempts to access particular objects, and a particular
user’s actions. The audit trail, or log of audit records, allows the system
security officer to reconstruct events that occurred on the system and
evaluate their impact.
The system security officer is the only user who can start and stop
auditing, set up auditing options, and process the audit data. As a system
security officer, you can establish auditing for events such as:
• Server-wide, security-relevant events

• Creating, deleting, and modifying database objects

• All actions by a particular user or all actions by users with a particular role
active
• Granting or revoking database access
• Importing or exporting data
• Log ins and log outs
Correlating Adaptive Server and operating system audit records

The easiest way to link Adaptive Server audit records with operating system
records is to make Adaptive Server login names the same as operating system
login names.
Alternatively, the system security officer can map users’ operating system
login names to their Adaptive Server login names. However, this approach
requires ongoing maintenance, as login names for new users must be recorded
manually.
The audit system

The audit system consists of:
• The sybsecurity database, which contains global auditing options and the
audit trail
• The in-memory audit queue, to which audit records are sent before they
are written to the audit trail
• Configuration parameters for managing auditing
• System procedures for managing auditing
The sybsecurity database

The sybsecurity database is created during the auditing installation process. In
addition to all the system tables found in the model database, it contains
sysauditoptions, a system table for keeping track of server-wide auditing
options, and system tables for the audit trail.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
sysauditoptions contains the current setting of global auditing options, such as

whether auditing is enabled for disk commands, remote procedure calls, ad hoc
user-defined auditing records, or all security-relevant events. These options
affect the entire Adaptive Server.
The audit trail

Adaptive Server stores the audit trail in system tables named sysaudits_01
through sysaudits_08. When you install auditing, you determine the number of
audit tables for your installation. For example, if you choose to have two audit
tables, they are named sysaudits_01 and sysaudits_02. At any given time, only
one audit table is current. Adaptive Server writes all audit data to the current
audit table. A system security officer can use sp_configure to set (or change)
which audit table is current.
Sybase recommends two or more audit tables, with each table on a separate
audit device. This allows you to set up a smoothly running auditing process in
which audit tables are archived and processed with no loss of audit records and
no manual intervention.
Warning! Sybase strongly recommends against using a single audit table on

production systems. If you use only a single audit table, you may lose audit
records. If you must use only a single audit table because of limited system
resources, see “Single-table auditing” on page 653 for instructions.
Figure 18-1 shows how the auditing process works with multiple audit tables.

Figure 18-1: Auditing with multiple audit tables
User processes
Audit queue
Audit process
pool of empty audit tables currently active audit tables pool of full audit tables
Archive
database on another device

(then normal dump and load)
The auditing system writes audit records from the in-memory audit queue to
the current audit table. When the current audit table is nearly full, a threshold
procedure can automatically archive the table to another database. The archive
database can be backed up and restored with the dump and load commands. Use
archive database access for read-only access to archived audit tables from
backup. See Chapter 14, “Archive Database Access,” in the System
Administration Guide, Volume 2. For more information about managing the
audit trail, see “Setting up audit trail management” on page 644.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
The audit queue

When an audited event occurs, an audit record first goes to the in-memory audit
queue. The record remains in memory until the audit process writes it to the
audit trail. You can configure the size of the audit queue with the audit queue
size parameter of sp_configure.
Before you configure the size of the audit queue, consider the trade-off
between the risk of losing records in the queue if the system crashes and the
loss of performance when the queue is full. As long as an audit record is in the
queue, it can be lost if the system crashes. However, if the queue repeatedly
becomes full, overall system performance is affected. If the audit queue is full
when a user process tries to generate an audit record, the process sleeps until
space in the queue becomes available.
Note Because audit records are not written directly to the audit trail, you
cannot count on an audit record’s being stored immediately in the current audit
table.
Auditing configuration parameters

Use these configuration parameters to manage the auditing process:
• auditing enables or disables auditing for the entire Adaptive Server. The
parameter takes effect immediately upon execution of sp_configure.
Auditing occurs only when this parameter is enabled.
• audit queue size establishes the size of the audit queue. Because the
parameter affects memory allocation, the parameter does not take effect
until Adaptive Server is restarted.
• suspend audit when device full controls the behavior of the audit process
when an audit device becomes full. The parameter takes effect
immediately upon execution of sp_configure.
• current audit table sets the current audit table. The parameter takes effect
immediately upon execution of sp_configure.
System procedures for auditing

Use these system procedures to manage the auditing process:
• sp_audit enables and disables auditing options. This is the only system
procedure required to establish the events to be audited.

Installing and setting up auditing
• sp_displayaudit displays the active auditing options.
• sp_addauditrecord adds user-defined audit records (comments) into the

audit trail. Users can add these records only if a system security officer
enables ad hoc auditing with sp_audit.

Table 18-1 provides a general procedure for setting up auditing.
Table 18-1: General procedure for auditing
Action Description See
1. Install auditing. Set the number of audit tables and assign devices for the audit “Installing the audit
trail and the syslogs transaction log in the sybsecurity system” on page 641 and
database. the Adaptive Server
installation and
configuration
documentation
2. Set up audit trail Write and establish a threshold procedure that receives control “Setting up audit trail
management. when the current audit table is nearly full. The procedure management” on page 644
automatically switches to a new audit table and archives the For single-table auditing,
contents of the current table. “Single-table auditing” on
In addition, this step involves setting the audit queue size and page 653
the suspend audit when device full configuration parameters.
3. Set up transaction Determine how to handle the syslogs transaction log in the “Setting up transaction log
log management in sybsecurity database, how to set the trunc log on chkpt database management” on page 650
the sybsecurity option and establishing a last-chance threshold procedure for
database. syslogs if trunc log on chkpt is off.
4. Set auditing Use sp_audit to establish the events to be audited. “Setting global auditing
options. options” on page 657
5. Enable auditing. Use sp_configure to turn on the auditing configuration “Enabling and disabling
parameter. Adaptive Server begins writing audit records to the auditing” on page 652
current audit table.
6. Restarting Use sp_audit restart to restart auditing if it fails. “Restarting auditing” on
auditing. page 656

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Installing the audit system

The audit system is usually installed with auditinit, the Sybase installation
program. Alternatively, you can install auditing without auditinit. For details,
see “Installing auditing with installsecurity” on page 641. Installation and
auditinit are discussed in the Adaptive Server installation and configuration
documentation for your platform.
When you install auditing, you can establish the number of system tables you
want to use for the audit trail, the device for each audit system table, and the
device for the syslogs transaction log.
Tables and devices for the audit trail

You can specify up to eight system tables (sysaudits_01 through sysaudits_08).
Plan to use at least two tables for the audit trail. Put each table on its own device
separate from the master device. If you do this, you can use a threshold
procedure to automatically archive the current audit table before it fills up and
switch to a new empty table for the subsequent audit records.
Device for the syslogs transaction log table

When you install auditing, you must specify a separate device for the
transaction log, which consists of the syslogs system table. The syslogs table,
which exists in every database, contains a log of the transactions that are
executed in the database.
Installing auditing with installsecurity

The $SYBASE/ASE-15_0/scripts directory contains installsecurity, a script for
installing auditing.
Note This example assumes a server that uses a logical page size of 2K.
To use installsecurity to install auditing:

1 Create the auditing devices and auditing database with the disk init and
create database commands. For example:
disk init name = "auditdev",
physname = "/dev/dsk/c2d0s4",
size = "10M"
disk init name = "auditlogdev",

size = "2M"
create database sybsecurity on auditdev
log on auditlogdev
2 Use isql to execute the installsecurity script:
cd $SYBASE/ASE-12_5/scripts
setenv DSQUERY server_name
isql -Usa -Ppassword -Sserver_name < installsecurity
3 Shut down and restart Adaptive Server.
When you have completed these steps, the sybsecurity database has one audit
table (sysaudits_01) created on its own segment. You can enable auditing at this
time, but should add more auditing tables with sp_addaudittable. For
information about disk init, create database, and sp_addaudittable, see the
Moving the auditing database to multiple devices

Place the sybsecurity database on its own device, separate from the master
database. If you have more than one audit table, place each table on its own
device. It can also be helpful to put each table on a separate segment which
points to a separate device. If you currently have sybsecurity on the same device
as master, or if you want to move sybsecurity to another device, use one of the
procedures described in the following sections. When you move the database,
you can specify whether to save your existing global audit settings.
Moving sybsecurity without saving global audit settings
Note These steps include dropping the sybsecurity database, which destroys all
audit records and global audit settings previously recorded in sybsecurity.
Before you drop the sybsecurity database, make sure you archive existing
records with a backup or by following instructions in “Archiving the audit
table” on page 645 to avoid losing any historical data that remains in the
sybsecurity tables.
To move the sybsecurity database without saving the global audit settings:
1 Execute the following to remove any information related to logins from
the syslogins system table:
sp_audit "all","all","all","off"

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
2 Drop the sybsecurity database.

3 Install sybsecurity again using the installation procedure described in
either:
• The configuration documentation for your platform, or
• “Installing auditing with installsecurity” on page 641.
4 During the installation process, place the sybsecurity database on one or
more devices, separate from the master device.
Moving sybsecurity and saving global audit settings
❖ To move the sybsecurity database and save the global audit settings
1 Dump the sybsecurity database:
dump database sybsecurity to "/remote/sec_file"
2 Drop the sybsecurity database:
drop database sybsecurity
3 Initialize the first device on which you want to place the sybsecurity
database:
disk init name = "auditdev",
size = "10M"
4 Initialize the device where you want to place the security log:
disk init name = "auditlogdev",
size = "2M"
5 Create the new sybsecurity database:
create database sybsecurity on auditdev
log on auditlogdev
6 Load the contents of the old sybsecurity database into the new database.
The global audit settings are preserved:
load database sybsecurity from "/remote/sec_file"
7 Run online database, which upgrades sysaudits and sysauditoptions if
necessary:
online database sybsecurity

8 Load the auditing system procedures using the configuration

documentation for your platform.
❖ Creating more than one sysaudits table in sybsecurity

1 Initialize the device where you want to place the additional table:
disk init name = "auditdev2",
size = "10M"
2 Extend the sybsecurity database to the device you initialized in step 1:
alter database sybsecurity on auditdev2 = "2M"
3 Run sp_addaudittable to create the next sysaudits table on the device you
initialized in step 1:
sp_addaudittable auditdev2
4 Repeat steps 1 – 3 for each sysaudits table.
Setting up audit trail management

To effectively manage the audit trail:
1 Be sure that auditing is installed with two or more tables, each on a
separate device. If not, consider adding additional audit tables and devices.
2 Write a threshold procedure and attach it to each audit table segment.
3 Set configuration parameters for the audit queue size and to indicate
appropriate action should the current audit table become full.
The following sections assume that you have installed auditing with two or
more tables, each on a separate device. If you have only one device for the audit
tables, skip to “Single-table auditing” on page 653.
Setting up threshold procedures

Before enabling auditing, establish a threshold procedure to automatically
switch auditing tables when the current table is full.
The threshold procedure for the audit device segments should:
• Make the next empty audit table current using sp_configure to set the
current audit table configuration parameter.
• Archive the audit table that is almost full using the insert...select command.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Changing the current audit table

The current audit table configuration parameter establishes the table where
Adaptive Server writes audit rows. As a system security officer, you can
change the current audit table with sp_configure, using the following syntax,
where n is an integer that determines the new current audit table:
sp_configure "current audit table", n
[, "with truncate"]
The valid values for n are:
• 1 means sysaudits_01, 2 means sysaudits_02, and so forth.
• 0 tells Adaptive Server to automatically set the current audit table to the
next table. For example, if your installation has three audit tables,
sysaudits_01, sysaudits_02, and sysaudits_03, Adaptive Server sets the
current audit table to:
The with truncate option specifies that Adaptive Server should truncate the new
table if it is not already empty. If you do not specify this option and the table is
not empty, sp_configure fails.
Note If Adaptive Server truncates the current audit table and you have not
archived the data, the table’s audit records are lost. Archive the audit data
before you use the with truncate option.
To execute sp_configure to change the current audit table, you must have the
sso_role active. You can write a threshold procedure to automatically change
the current audit table.
Archiving the audit table

You can use insert with select to copy the audit data into an existing table
having the same columns as the audit tables in sybsecurity.
Be sure that the threshold procedure can successfully copy data into the archive
table in another database:
1 Create the archive database on a separate device from the one containing
audit tables in sybsecurity.

2 Create an archive table with columns identical to those in the sybsecurity

audit tables. If such a table does not already exist, you can use select into
to create an empty one by having a false condition in the where clause. For
example:
use aud_db
go
select *
into audit_data
from sybsecurity.dbo.sysaudits_01
where 1 = 2
The where condition is always false, so an empty duplicate of sysaudits_01
is created.
The select into/bulk copy database option must be turned on in the archive
database (using sp_dboption) before you can use select into.
The threshold procedure, after using sp_configure to change the audit table, can
use insert and select to copy data to the archive table in the archive database.
The procedure can execute commands similar to these:
insert aud_db.sso_user.audit_data
select * from sybsecurity.dbo.sysaudits_01
Example threshold procedure for audit segments

This sample threshold procedure assumes that three tables are configured for
auditing:
declare @audit_table_number int
/*
** Select the value of the current audit table
*/
select @audit_table_number = scc.value
from master.dbo.syscurconfigs scc, master.dbo.sysconfigures sc
where sc.config=scc.config and sc.name = “current audit table”
/*
** Set the next audit table to be current.
** When the next audit table is specified as 0,
** the value is automatically set to the next one.
*/
exec sp_configure “current audit table”, 0, “with truncate”
/*
** Copy the audit records from the audit table
** that became full into another table.
*/
if @audit_table_number = 1

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
begin
insert aud_db.sso_user.sysaudits
select * from sysaudits_01
truncate table sysaudits_01
end
else if @audit_table_number = 2
begin
insert aud_db.sso_user.sysaudits
truncate table sysaudits_02
end
return(0)
Attaching the threshold procedure to each audit segment

To attach the threshold procedure to each audit table segment, use the
sp_addthreshold.
Before executing sp_addthreshold:

• Determine the number of audit tables configured for your installation and
the names of their device segments
• Have the permissions and roles you need for sp_addthreshold for all the
commands in the threshold procedure
Warning! sp_addthreshold and sp_modifythreshold check to ensure that

only a user with sa_role directly granted can add or modify a threshold. All
system-defined roles that are active when you add or modify a threshold
are inserted as valid roles for your login in the systhresholds table.
However, only directly granted roles are activated when the threshold
procedure fires.
Audit tables and their segments

When you install auditing, auditinit displays the name of each audit table and its
segment. The segment names are “aud_seg1” for sysaudits_01, “aud_seg2” for
sysaudits_02, and so forth. You can find information about the segments in the
sybsecurity database if you execute sp_helpsegment with sybsecurity as your
current database. One way to find the number of audit tables for your
installation is to execute the following SQL commands:
use sybsecurity
go
select count(*) from sysobjects

where name like "sysaudit%"

go
Get additional information about the audit tables and the sybsecurity database
by executing the following SQL commands:
sp_helpdb sybsecurity
go
use sybsecurity
go
sp_help sysaudits_01
go
sp_help sysaudits_02
go
...
Required roles and permissions

To execute sp_addthreshold, you must be either the database owner or a system
administrator. A system security officer should be the owner of the sybsecurity
database and, therefore, should be able to execute sp_addthreshold. In addition
to being able to execute sp_addthreshold, you must have permission to execute
all the commands in your threshold procedure. For example, to execute
sp_configure for current audit table, the sso_role must be active. When the
threshold procedure fires, Adaptive Server attempts to turn on all the roles and
permissions that were in effect when you executed sp_addthreshold.
To attach the threshold procedure audit_thresh to three device segments:
use sybsecurity
go
sp_addthreshold sybsecurity, aud_seg_01, 250, audit_thresh
go
The sample threshold procedure audit_thresh receives control when fewer than
250 free pages remain in the current audit table.
For more information about adding threshold procedures, see Chapter 16,
“Managing Free Space with Thresholds,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Auditing with the sample threshold procedure in place

After you enable auditing, Adaptive Server writes all audit data to the initial
current audit table, sysaudits_01. When sysaudits_01 is within 250 pages of
being full, the threshold procedure audit_thresh fires. The procedure switches
the current audit table to sysaudits_02, and, immediately, Adaptive Server
starts writing new audit records to sysaudits_02. The procedure also copies all
audit data from sysaudits_01 to the audit_data archive table in the audit_db
database. The rotation of the audit tables continues in this fashion without
manual intervention.
Setting auditing configuration parameters

Set the following configuration parameters for your auditing installation:
• audit queue size sets the number of records in the audit queue in memory.
• suspend audit when device full determines what Adaptive Server does if the
current audit table becomes completely full. The full condition occurs only
if the threshold procedure attached to the current table segment is not
functioning properly.
Setting the size of the audit queue

The default audit queue size is 100 bytes. The amount of memory consumed
by the audit queue pool is defined the audit queue size parameter, and includes
data buffers and overhead for the memory pool. However, the amount of
memory in the pool can vary between releases and chip architectures.
Use sp_configure to set the length of the audit queue. The syntax is:
sp_configure "audit queue size", [value]
value is the number of records that the audit queue can hold. The minimum
value is 1, and the maximum is 65,535. For example, to set the audit queue size
to 300, execute:
sp_configure "audit queue size", 300
For more information about setting the audit queue size and other configuration
parameters, see Chapter 5, “Setting Configuration Parameters.”

Suspending auditing if devices are full

If you have two or more audit tables, each on a separate device other than the
master device, and have a threshold procedure for each audit table segment, the
audit devices should never become full. Only if a threshold procedure is not
functioning properly would the “full” condition occur. Use sp_configure to set
the suspend audit when device full parameter to determine what happens if the
devices do become full. Choose one of these options:
• Suspend the auditing process and all user processes that cause an auditable
event. Resume normal operation after a system security officer clears the
• Truncate the next audit table and start using it. This allows normal
operation to proceed without intervention from a system security officer.
Use sp_configure to set this configuration parameter. You must have the
sso_role active. The syntax is:
sp_configure "suspend audit when device full",
[0|1]
• 0 – truncates the next audit table and starts using it as the current audit
table whenever the current audit table becomes full. If you set the
parameter to 0, the audit process is never suspended; however, older audit
records are lost if they have not been archived.
• 1 (the default value) – suspends the audit process and all user processes
that cause an auditable event. To resume normal operation, the system
security officer must log in and set up an empty table as the current audit
table. During this period, the system security officer is exempt from
normal auditing. If the system security officer’s actions would generate
audit records under normal operation, Adaptive Server sends an error
message and information about the event to the error log.
If you have a threshold procedure attached to the audit table segments, set
suspend audit when device full to 1 (on). If it is set to 0 (off), Adaptive Server
may truncate the audit table that is full before your threshold procedure has a
chance to archive your audit records.
Setting up transaction log management

This section describes guidelines for managing the transaction log in
sybsecurity.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
If the trunc log on chkpt database option is active, Adaptive Server truncates
syslogs every time it performs an automatic checkpoint. After auditing is
installed, the value of trunc log on chkpt is on, but you can use sp_dboption to
change its value.
Truncating the transaction log

If you enable the trunc log on chkpt option for the sybsecurity database, you do
not need to worry about the transaction log becoming full. Adaptive Server
truncates the log whenever it performs a checkpoint. With this option enabled,
you cannot use dump transaction to dump the transaction log, but you can use
dump database to dump the database.
If you follow the procedures in “Setting up threshold procedures” on page 644,

audit tables are automatically archived to tables in another database. You can
use standard backup and recovery procedures for this archive database.
If a crash occurs on the sybsecurity device, you can reload the database and
resume auditing. At most, only the records in the in-memory audit queue and
the current audit table are lost because the archive database contains all other
audit data. After you reload the database, use sp_configure with truncate to set
and truncate the current audit table.
If you have not changed server-wide auditing options since you dumped the
database, all auditing options stored in sysauditoptions are automatically
restored when you reload sybsecurity. If not, you can run a script to set the
options prior to resuming auditing.
Managing the transaction log with no truncation

If you use db_option to turn the trunc log on chkpt off, the transaction log may
fill up. Plan to attach a last-chance threshold procedure to the transaction log
segment. This procedure gets control when the amount of space remaining on
the segment is less than a threshold amount computed automatically by
Adaptive Server. The threshold amount is an estimate of the number of free log
pages that are required to back up the transaction log.

The default name of the last-chance threshold procedure is sp_thresholdaction,

but you can specify a different name with sp_modifythreshold, as long as you
have the sa_role active.
Note sp_modifythreshold checks to ensure you have “sa_role” active. See

“Attaching the threshold procedure to each audit segment” on page 647 for
more information.
Adaptive Server does not supply a default procedure, but Chapter 16,
“Managing Free Space with Thresholds,” in System Administration Guide:
Volume 2 contains examples of last-chance threshold procedures. The
procedure should execute the dump transaction command, which truncates the
log. When the transaction log reaches the last-chance threshold point, any
transaction that is running is suspended until space is available. The suspension
occurs because the option abort xact when log is full is always set to false for the
sybsecurity database. You cannot change this option.
With the trunc log on chkpt option disable, you can use standard backup and
recovery procedures for the sybsecurity database, but be aware that the audit
tables in the restored database may not be in sync with their status during a
device failure.
Enabling and disabling auditing

Use sp_configure with the auditing configuration parameter to enable or disable
auditing. The syntax is:
sp_configure "auditing", [0 | 1 ]
• 1 – enables auditing.
• 0 – disables auditing.
For example, to enable auditing, enter:

sp_configure "auditing", 1
Note When you enable or disable auditing, Adaptive Server automatically

generates an audit record. See event codes 73 and 74 in Table 18-5 on
page 669.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Single-table auditing
Sybase strongly recommends that you not use single-device auditing for
production systems. If you use only a single audit table, you create a window
of time while you are archiving audit data and truncating the audit table during
which incoming audit records are lost. There is no way to avoid this when using
only a single audit table.
If you use only a single audit table, your audit table is likely to fill up. The
consequences of this depend on how you have set suspend audit when device
full. If you have suspend audit when device full set to on, the audit process is
suspended, as are all user processes that cause auditable events. If suspend
audit when device full is off, the audit table is truncated, and you lose all the
audit records that were in the audit table.
For non-production systems, where the loss of a small number of audit records
may be acceptable, you can use a single table for auditing, if you cannot spare
the additional disk space for multiple audit tables, or you do not have additional
devices to use.
The procedure for using a single audit table is similar to using multiple audit
tables, with these exceptions:
• During installation, you specify only one system table to use for auditing.
• During installation, you specify only one device for the audit system table.
• The threshold procedure you create for archiving audit records is different
from the one you would create if you were using multiple audit tables.
Figure 18-2 shows how the auditing process works with a single audit table.

Figure 18-2: Auditing with a single audit table
User processes
Audit queue
Audit process
threshold procedure
Archive
audit table
database on another device

(then normal dump and load)
Establishing and managing single-table auditing

The steps to configure for single-table auditing is the same as for multiple-table
auditing. See Table 18-1 for more information.
Threshold procedure for single-table auditing

For single-table auditing, the threshold procedure should:
• Archive the almost-full audit table to another table, using the insert and
select commands.
• Truncate the audit table to create space for new audit records, using the
truncate table command.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Before you can archive your audit records, create an archive table that has the
same columns as your audit table. After you have done this, your threshold
procedure can use insert with select to copy the audit records into the archive
table.
Here is a sample threshold procedure for use with a single audit table:
create procedure audit_thresh as
/*
** copy the audit records from the audit table to
** the archive table
*/
insert aud_db.sso_user.audit_data
return(0)
go
/*
** truncate the audit table to make room for new
** audit records
*/
truncate table “sysaudits_01”
go
After you have created your threshold procedure, you will need to attach the
procedure to the audit table segment. For instructions, see “Attaching the
threshold procedure to each audit segment” on page 647.
Warning! On a multiprocessor, the audit table may fill up even if you have a
threshold procedure that triggers before the audit table is full. For example, if
the threshold procedure is running on a heavily loaded CPU, and a user process
performing auditable events is running on a less heavily loaded CPU, the audit
table may fill up before the threshold procedure triggers. The configuration
parameter suspend audit when device full determines what happens when the
audit table fills up. For information about setting this parameter, see
“Suspending auditing if devices are full” on page 650.
What happens when the current audit table is full?

When the current audit table is full:
1 The audit process attempts to insert the next audit record into the table.
This fails, so the audit process terminates. An error message is written to
the error log.

2 When a user attempts to perform an auditable event, the event cannot be

completed because auditing cannot proceed. The user process terminates.
Users who do not attempt to perform an auditable event are unaffected.
3 If you have login auditing enabled, no one can log in to the server except
a system security officer.
4 If you are auditing commands executed with the sso_role active, the
system security officer cannot execute commands.
Recovering when the current audit table is full

If the current audit device and the audit queue become full, the system security
officer becomes exempt from auditing. Every auditable event performed by a
system security officer after this point sends a warning message to the error log
file. The message states the date and time and a warning that an audit has been
missed, as well as the login name, event code, and other information that would
normally be stored in the extrainfo column of the audit table.
When the current audit table is full, the system security officer can archive and
truncate the audit table as described in “Archiving the audit table” on page
645. A system administrator can execute shutdown to stop the server and then
restart the server to reestablish auditing.
If the audit system terminates abnormally, the system security officer can shut
down the server after the current audit table has been archived and truncated.
Normally, only the system administrator can execute shutdown.
Restarting auditing
If the audit process is forced to terminate due to an error, sp_audit can be
manually restarted by entering:
sp_audit restart
The audit process can be restarted provided that no audit was currently running,
but the audit process must be enabled with sp_configure “auditing” 1.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Setting global auditing options

After you have installed auditing, you can use sp_audit to set auditing options.
The syntax for sp_audit is:
sp_audit option, login_name, object_name [,setting]
If you run sp_audit with no parameters, it provides a complete list of the
options. For details about sp_audit, see the Reference Manual: Procedures.
Note Auditing does not occur until you activate auditing for the server. For
information on how to start auditing, see “Enabling and disabling auditing” on
page 652.
Auditing options: types and requirements

The values you can specify for the login_name and object_name parameters to
sp_audit depend on the type of auditing option you specify:
• Global options apply to commands that affect the entire server, such as
booting the server, disk commands, and allowing ad hoc, user-defined
audit records. Option settings for global events are stored in the
sybsecurity..sysauditoptions system table.
• Database-specific options apply to a database. Examples include altering

a database, bulk copy (bcp in) of data into a database, granting or revoking
access to objects in a database, and creating objects in a database. Option
settings for database-specific events are stored in the master..sysdatabases
system table.
• Object-specific options apply to a specific object. Examples include
selecting, inserting, updating, or deleting rows of a particular table or view
and the execution of a particular trigger or procedure. Option settings for
object-specific events are stored in the sysobjects system table in the
relevant database.
• User-specific options apply to a specific user or system role. Examples
include accesses by a particular user to any table or view or all actions
performed when a particular system role, such as sa_role, is active. Option
settings for individual users are stored in master..syslogins. The settings for
system roles are stored in master..sysauditoptions.
Table 18-2 shows:

• Valid values for the option and the type of each option – global, database-
specific, object-specific, or user-specific
• Valid values for the login_name and object_name parameters for each
option
• The database to be in when you set the auditing option
• The command or access that is audited when you set the option
• An example for each option
The default value for all options is off.
Table 18-2: Auditing options, requirements, and examples
Database to
Option be in to set Command or access being
(option type) login_name object_name the option audited
adhoc all all Any Allows users to use sp_addauditrecord
(user-specific) Example: sp_audit "adhoc", "all", "all", "on"
(Enables ad hoc user-defined auditing records.)
all A login name all Any All actions of a particular user or by
(user-specific) or role users with a particular role active
Example sp_audit "all", "sa_role", "all", "on"
(Turns auditing on for all actions in which the sa_role is active.)
alter all Database to be Any alter database, alter table
(database-specific) audited
Example sp_audit @option = "alter", @login_name = "all",
@object_name = "master", @setting = "on"
(Turns auditing on for all executions of alter database and alter table in the master database.)
bcp all Database to be Any bcp in
Example sp_audit "bcp", "all", "pubs2"
(Returns the status of bcp auditing in the pubs2 database. If you do not specify a value for
setting, Adaptive Server returns the status of auditing for the option you specify)
bind all Database to be Any sp_bindefault, sp_bindmsg, sp_bindrule
Example sp_audit "bind", "all", "planning", "off"
(Turns bind auditing off for the planning database.)

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Database to
cmdtext Login name all Any SQL text entered by a user.
(user-specific) of the user to (Does not reflect whether or not the text
be audited in question passed permission checks or
not. eventmod always has a value of 1.)
Example sp_audit "cmdtext", "sa", "all", "off"
(Turns text auditing off for database owners.)
create all Database to be Any create database, create table, create
(database-specific) audited procedure, create trigger, create rule,
create default, sp_addmessage, create
view, create index, create function
Note Specify master for object_name to audit create database. You are also auditing the
creation of other objects in master.
Example sp_audit "create", "all", "planning", "pass"

(Turns on auditing of successful object creations in the planning database. The current status
of auditing create database is not affected because you did not specify the master database.)
dbaccess all Database to be Any Any access to the database from
(database-specific) audited another database
Example sp_audit "dbaccess", "all", "project", "on"
(Audits all external accesses to the project database.)
dbcc all all Any All dbcc commands that require
(global) permissions
Example sp_audit "dbcc", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits all executions of the dbcc command.)
delete all Name of the The database of delete from a table, delete from a view
(object-specific) table or view to the table or
be audited, or view (except
default view or tempdb)
default table
Example sp_audit "delete", "all", "default table", "on"
(Audits all delete actions for all future tables in the current database.)
disk all all Any disk init, disk refit, disk reinit, disk mirror,
(global) disk unmirror, disk remirror, disk resize
Example sp_audit "disk", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits all disk actions for the server.)

Database to
drop all Database to be Any drop database, drop table, drop
(database-specific) audited procedure, drop index, drop trigger, drop
rule, drop default, sp_dropmessage,
drop view, drop function
Example sp_audit "drop", "all", "financial", "fail"
(Audits all drop commands in the financial database that fail permission checks.)
dump all Database to be Any dump database, dump transaction
Example sp_audit "dump", "all", "pubs2", "on"
(Audits dump commands in the pubs2 database.)
encryption_key all Database to be Any alter encryption key
(database-specific) audited create encryption key
drop encryption key
sp_encryption
Example Audits all the above commands in the pubs2 database:
sp_audit "encryption_key", "all", "pubs2", "on"
errors all all Any Fatal error, non-fatal error
(global) Example sp_audit "errors", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits errors throughout the server.)
errorlog all all Any sp_errorlog or the errorlog_admin
function
Example sp_audit "errorlog", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits attempts to "change log" to move to a new Adaptive Server error log file.)
exec_procedure all Name of the The database of execute
(object-specific) procedure to be the procedure
audited or (except tempdb)
default
procedure
Example sp_audit "exec_procedure", "all", "default procedure", "off"
(Turns automatic auditing off for new procedures in the current database.)
exec_trigger all Name of the The database of Any command that fires the trigger
(object-specific) trigger to be the trigger
audited or (except tempdb)
default trigger
Example sp_audit "exec_trigger", "all", "trig_fix_plan", "fail"
(Audits all failed executions of the trig_fix_plan trigger in the current database.)

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Database to
func_dbaccess all Name of the Any Access to the database using the
(database-specific) database you following functions:
are auditing curunreserved_pgs, db_name, db_id,
lct_admin, setdbrepstat, setrepstatus,
setrepdefmode, is_repagent_enabled,
rep_agent_config, rep_agent_admin
Example sp_audit @option="func_dbaccess", @login_name="all",
@object_name = "strategy", @setting = "on"
(Audits accesses to the strategy database via built-in functions.)
func_obj_access all Name of any Any Access to an object using the following
(object-specific) object that has functions: schema_inc, col_length,
an entry in col_name, data_pgs, index_col,
sysobjects object_id, object_name, reserved_pgs,
rowcnt, used_pgs, has_subquery
Example sp_audit @option="func_obj_access", @login_name="all",
@object_name = "customer", @setting = "on"
(Audits accesses to the customer table via built-in functions.)
grant all Name of the Any grant
(database-specific) database to be
audited
Example sp_audit @option="grant", @login_name="all", @object_name =
"planning", @setting = "on"
(Audits all grants in the planning database.)
insert all Name of the The database of insert into a table, insert into a view
(object-specific) view or table to the object
which you are (except tempdb)
inserting rows,
or default view
or default table
Example sp_audit "insert", "all", "dpt_101_view", "on"
(Audits all inserts into the dpt_101_view view in the current database.)
install all Database to be Any install java
Example sp_audit "install", "all", "planning", "on"
(Audits the installation of java classes in database planning)
load all Database to be Any load database, load transaction
Example sp_audit "load", "all", "projects_db", "fail"
(Audits all failed executions of database and transaction loads in the projects_db database.)

Database to
login all all Any Any login to Adaptive Server
(global) Example sp_audit "login", "all", "all", "fail"
(Audits all failed attempts to log in to the server.)
login_locked all all Any
(global) Example sp_audit "login_locked", "all", "all", "on"
(Login is locked because of exceeding the configured number of failed login attempts.)
logout all all Any Any logout from Adaptive Server
Example sp_audit "logout", "all", "all", "off"
(Turns auditing off of logouts from the server.)
mount all all Any mount database
(global) Example sp_audit "mount", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits all mount database commands issued.)
password all all Any Setting of global password and login
policy options
Example sp_audit "password", "all", "all", "on"
quiesce all all Any quiesce database
(global) Example sp_audit "quiesce", "all", "all", "on"
(Turns auditing on for quiesce database commands.)
reference all Name of the Any create table, alter table
(object-specific) view or table to
which you are
inserting rows,
or default view
or default table
Example sp_audit "reference", "all", "titles", "off"
(Turns off auditing of the creation of references to the titles table.)
remove all all Any Audits the removal of Java classes
(database-specific) Example sp_audit "remove", "all", "planning", "on"
(Audits the removal of Java classes in the planning database.)
revoke all Database to be Any revoke
Example sp_audit "revoke", "all", "payments_db", "off"
(Turns off auditing of the execution of revoke in the payments_db database.)
rpc all all Any Remote procedure calls (either in or
(global) out)
Example sp_audit "rpc", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits all remote procedure calls out of or into the server.)

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Database to
security all all Any Server-wide security-relevant events.
(global) See the “security” option in Table 18-5.
Example sp_audit "security", "all", "all", "on"
(Audits server-wide security-relevant events in the server.)
select all Name of the The database of select from a table, select from a view
(object-specific) view or table to the object
which you are (except tempdb)
inserting rows,
or default view
or default table
Example sp_audit "select", "all", "customer", "fail"
(Audits all failed selects from the customer table in the current database.)
setuser all all Any setuser
(database-specific) Example sp_audit "setuser", "all", "projdb", "on"
(Audits all executions of setuser in the projdb database.)
table_access Login name all Any select, delete, update, or insert access in
(user-specific) of the user to a table
be audited.
Example sp_audit "table_access", "smithson", "all", "on"
(Audits all table accesses by the login named “smithson”.)
transfer_table all all Any Server-wide option. Does not appear in
(global) sysauditoptions.
Example sp_audit "transfer_table", "tdb1.table1", "all", "on"
(Audits server-wide transfer-relevant events in the server.)
truncate all Database to be Any truncate table
Example sp_audit "truncate", "all", "customer", "on"
(Audits all table truncations in the customer database.)
unbind all Database to be Any sp_unbindefault, sp_unbindrule,
(database-specific) audited sp_unbindmsg
Example sp_audit "unbind", "all", "master", "fail"
(Audits all failed attempts of unbinding in the master database.)
unmount all all Any unmount database
(global) Example sp_audit "unmount", "all", "all", "on"
(audits all attempts to unmount or create a manifest file with any database.)

Database to
update all Name The database of update to a table, update to a view
(object-specific) specifying the the object
object to be (except tempdb)
audited, default
table or default
view
Example sp_audit "update", "all", "projects", "on"
(Audits all attempts by users to update the projects table in the current database.)
view_access Login name all Any select, delete, insert, or update to a view
(user-specific) of the user to
be audited
Example sp_audit "view_access", "joe", "all", "off"
(Turns off view auditing of user “joe”.)
Examples of setting auditing options

Suppose you want to audit all failed deletions on the projects table in the
company_operations database and for all new tables in the database. Use the
object-specific delete option for the projects table and use default table for all
future tables in the database. You must be in the object’s database before you
execute sp_audit to set object-specific auditing options:
sp_audit "security", "all", "all", "fail"
For this example, execute:
use company_operations
go
sp_audit "delete", "all", "projects", "fail"
go
sp_audit "delete", "all", "default table",
"fail"
go

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Hiding system stored procedure and command password

parameters
When auditing is configured and enabled, and the sp_audit option 'cmdtext' is
set, system stored procedure and command password parameters are replaced
with a fixed length string of asterisks in the audit records contained in the audit
logs.
For example, executing:
sp_password 'oldpassword', 'newpassword'
when auditing is enabled and sp_audit cmdtext is set, results in output similar
to:
sp_password '******', '******'
This protects passwords from being seen by other with access to the audit log.
Determining current auditing settings

To determine the current auditing settings for a given option, use
sp_displayaudit. The syntax is:
sp_displayaudit [procedure | object | login | database | global |
default_object | default_procedure [, name]]
For more information, see sp_displayaudit in the Reference Manual:
Procedures.
Adding user-specified records to the audit trail

sp_addauditrecord allows users to enter comments into the audit trail. The
syntax is:
sp_addauditrecord [text] [, db_name] [, obj_name]
[, owner_name] [, dbid] [, objid]
All the parameters are optional:
• text – is the text of the message that you want to add to the extrainfo audit
table.
• db_name – is the name of the database referred to in the record, which is
inserted into the dbname column of the current audit table.

• obj_name – is the name of the object referred to in the record, which is

inserted into the objname column of the current audit table.
• owner_name – is the owner of the object referred to in the record, which
is inserted into the objowner column of the current audit table.
• dbid – is an integer value representing the database ID number of
db_name, which is inserted into the dbid column of the current audit table.
Do not place it in quotes.
• objid – is an integer value representing the object ID number of obj_name.
Do not place it in quotes. objid is inserted into the objid column of the
You can use sp_addauditrecord if:
• You have execute permission on sp_addauditrecord.
• The auditing configuration parameter was activated with sp_configure.
• The adhoc auditing option was enabled with sp_audit.
By default, only a system security officer and the database owner of sybsecurity
can use sp_addauditrecord. Permission to execute it may be granted to other
users.
Examples of adding user-defined audit records

The following example adds a record to the current audit table. The text portion
is entered into the extrainfo column of the current audit table, “corporate” into
the dbname column, “payroll” into the objname column, “dbo” into the
objowner column, “10” into the dbid column, and “1004738270” into the objid
column:
sp_addauditrecord "I gave A. Smith permission to view
the payroll table in the corporate database. This
permission was in effect from 3:10 to 3:30 pm on
9/22/92.", "corporate", "payroll", "dbo", 10,
1004738270
The following example inserts information only into the extrainfo and dbname
columns of the current audit table:
sp_addauditrecord @text="I am disabling auditing
briefly while we reconfigure the system",
@db_name="corporate"

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Querying the audit trail

To query the audit trail, use SQL to select and summarize the audit data. If you
follow the procedures discussed in “Setting up audit trail management” on
page 644, the audit data is automatically archived to one or more tables in
another database. For example, assume that the audit data resides in a table
called audit_data in the audit_db database. To select audit records for tasks
performed by “bob” on July 5, 1993, execute:
use audit_db
go
select * from audit_data
where loginname = "bob"
and eventtime like "Jul 5% 93"
go
This command requests audit records for commands performed in the pubs2
database by users with the system security officer role active:
where extrainfo like "%sso_role%"
and dbname = "pubs2"
go
This command requests audit records for all table truncations (event 64):
where event = 64
go
To query the audit trail using the name of an audit event, use the
audit_event_name function. For example, to request the audit records for all
database creation events, enter:
select * from audit_data where audit_event_name(event)
= “Create Database”
go
Understanding the audit tables

The system audit tables can be accessed only by a system security officer, who
can read the tables by executing SQL commands. The only commands that are
allowed on the system audit tables are select and truncate.
Table 18-3 describes the columns in all audit tables.

Table 18-3: Columns in each audit table

Column name Datatype Description
event smallint Type of event being audited. See Table 18-5 on page 669.
eventmod smallint More information about the event being audited. Indicates whether or not the
event in question passed permission checks. Possible values are:
• 0 = no modifier for this event.
• 1 = the event passed permission checking.
• 2 = the event failed permission checking.
spid smallint ID of the process that caused the audit record to be written.
eventtime datetime Date and time that the audited event occurred.
sequence smallint Sequence number of the record within a single event. Some events require
more than one audit record.
suid smallint Server login ID of the user who performed the audited event.
dbid int null Database ID in which the audited event occurred, or in which the object,
stored procedure, or trigger resides, depending on the type of event.
objid int null ID of the accessed object, stored procedure, or trigger.
xactid binary(6) null ID of the transaction containing the audited event. For a multi-database
transaction, this is the transaction ID from the database where the transaction
originated.
loginname varchar(30) null Login name corresponding to the suid.
dbname varchar(30) null Database name corresponding to the dbid.
objname varchar(30) null Object name corresponding to the objid.
objowner varchar(30) null Name of the owner of objid.
extrainfo varchar(255) null Additional information about the audited event. This column contains a
sequence of items separated by semicolons. For details, see “Reading the
extrainfo column” on page 668.
nodeid tinyint Server nodeid in a cluster where the event occurred.
Reading the extrainfo column

The extrainfo column contains a sequence of data separated by semicolons. The
data is organized in the following categories.
Table 18-4: Information in the extrainfo column
Position Category Description
1 Roles A list of active roles, separated by blanks.
2 Keywords or The name of the keyword or option that was used for the event. For example, for
Options the alter table command, the add column or drop constraint options might have
been used. If multiple keywords or options are listed, they are separated by
commas.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Position Category Description

3 Previous value If the event resulted in the update of a value, this item contains the value prior to
the update.
4 Current value If the event resulted in the update of a value, this item contains the new value.
5 Other information Additional security-relevant information that is recorded for the event.
6 Proxy information The original login name if the event occurred while a set proxy was in effect.
7 Principal name The principal name from the underlying security mechanism if the user’s login is
the secure default login, and the user logged in to Adaptive Server via unified
login. The value of this item is NULL if the secure default login is not being used.
This example shows an extrainfo column entry for the event of changing an
auditing configuration parameter.
sso_role;suspend audit when device full;1;0;;ralph;
This entry indicates that a system security officer changed suspend audit when
device full from 1 to 0. There is no “other information” for this entry. The sixth
category indicates that the user “ralph” was operating with a proxy login. No
principal name is provided.
The other fields in the audit record give other pertinent information. For
example, the record contains the server user ID (suid) and the login name
(loginname).
Table 18-5 lists the values that appear in the event column, arranged by
sp_audit option. The “Information in extrainfo” column describes information
that might appear in the extrainfo column of an audit table, based on the
categories described in Table 18-4.
Table 18-5: Values in event and extrainfo columns
Command or access to be
Audit option audited event Information in extrainfo
(Automatically Enabling auditing with: 73 —
audited event not sp_configure auditing
controlled by an
option)
(Automatically Disabling auditing with: 74 —
audited event not sp_configure auditing
controlled by an
option)
Unlocking Disabling auditing with: 74 —
Administrator’s sp_configure auditing
account
adhoc User-defined audit record 1 extrainfo is filled by the text parameter of
sp_addauditrecord

alter alter database 2 Subcommand keywords:
alter maxhold
alter size
inmemory
alter table 3 Subcommand keywords:
add/drop/modify column
replace columns
replace decrypt default
replace/add decrypt default
add constraint
drop constraint
If one or more encrypted columns are added,
extrainfo contains:
add/drop/modify column column1/keyname1,
[,column2/keyname2]
where keyname is the fully qualified name of
the key.
bcp bcp in 4 —
bind sp_bindefault 6 Other information: Name of the default
sp_bindmsg 7 Other information: Message ID
sp_bindrule 8 Other information: Name of the rule
all, create create database 9 Keywords or options: inmemory
cmdtext All commands 92 Full text of command, as sent by the client
create create database 9 —
create default 14 —
create procedure 11 —
create rule 13 —
create table 10 For encrypted columns, extrainfo contains
column names and keynames.
EK column1/keyname1[,column2 keyname2]
where EK is a prefix indicating that subsequent
information refers to encryption keys and
keyname is the fully qualified name of the key.
create trigger 12 —
create view 16 —
create index 104 Other information: Name of the index
create function 97 —
sp_addmessage 15 Other information: Message number

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
dbaccess Any access to the database by any 17 Keywords or options:
user use cmd
outside reference
dbcc dbcc all keywords 81 Keywords or options: Any of the dbcc
keywords such as checkstorage and the options
for that keyword.
delete delete from a table 18 Keywords or options: delete
delete from a view 19 Keywords or options: delete
disk disk init 20 Keywords or options: disk init
Other information: Name of the disk
disk mirror 23 Keywords or options: disk mirror
disk refit 21 Keywords or options: disk refit
disk reinit 22 Keywords or options: disk reinit
disk release 87 Keywords or options: disk release
disk remirror 25 Keywords or options: disk remirror
disk unmirror 24 Keywords or options: disk unmirror
disk resize 100 Keywords or options: disk resize
drop drop database 26 —
drop default 31 —
drop procedure 28 —
drop table 27 —
drop trigger 29 —
drop rule 30 —
drop view 33 —
drop index 105 Other information: Index name
drop function 98 —
sp_dropmessage 32 Other information: Message number
dump dump database 34 —
dump transaction 35 —

encryption_key sp_encryption 106 If password is set the first time:
ENCR_ADMIN system_encr_passwd
password ********
If the password is subsequently changed:
ENCR_ADMIN system_encr_passwd
password ******** ********
create encryption key 107 Keywords contain:
algorithm name-bitlength/IV
[random|NULL]/pad [random |NULL]
user/system
For example:
AES-128/IV RANDOM/PAD NULL USER
alter encryption key 108 default/not default
drop encryption key 109
AEK modify encryption 118 modify encryption
with user passwd
| for user username
{with login passwd
| with user passwd
| with keyvalue}
[for recovery
Note that keyvalue is displayed only for
replication of alter encryption key modify
encryption. For example, when user “stephen”
modifies his key copy, the following
information is saved:
MODIFY ENCRYPTION for user
stephen WITH USER PASSWD
AEK add encryption 119 add encryption for user user_name
for login association | recovery|with
keyvalue]
Note that keyvalue is displayed only for
replication of alter encryption key add
encryption.
alter encryption key drop encryption 120 drop encryption [for recovery | for user
user_name
See the Encrypted Columns Users Guide.
alter encryption key modify owner 121 modify owner [new owner user_name]

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
alter encryption key recover key 122 recovery key [with key_value]
with keyvalue is only used during replication of
alter encryption key
errorlog errorlog or errorlog_admin function 127 The parameters passed to errorlog_admin are
logged to identify the subcommand:
errorlog_admin (param1, param2,...).
errors Fatal error 36 Other information:
Error number.Severity.State
Non-fatal error 37 Other information:
Error number.Severity.State
exec_procedure Execution of a procedure 38 Other information: All input parameters
exec_trigger Execution of a trigger 39 —
func_obj_access, Accesses to objects and databases 86 —
func_dbaccess via Transact-SQL functions.
(Auditing must be enabled for the
sa_role to audit functions).
grant grant 40 —
insert insert into a table 41 Keywords or option:
• If insert is used: insert
• If select into is used: insert into followed by
the fully qualified object name
insert into a view 42 Keywords or options: insert
install install 93 —
load load database 43 —
load transaction 44 —
login Any login to the server 45 Other information:
• Host name and IP address of the machine
from which the login was performed.
• Error number.Severity.State for failed
logins.
login_locked Login locked due to exceeding the 112
configured number of failed login
attempts
logout Any logouts from the server 46 Other information: Host name
mount mount database 101 —
password sp_passwordpolicy and all its 115 Parameters for sp_passwordpolicy
actions except list.

quiesce quiesce database 96 —
reference Creation of references to tables 91 Keywords or options: reference
Other information: Name of the referencing
table
remove remove java 94 —
revoke revoke 47 —
rpc Remote procedure call from 48 Keywords or options: Name of client program
another server Other information: Server name, host name of
the machine from which the RPC was
executed.
Remote procedure call to another 49 Keywords or options: Procedure name
server
security connect to (CIS only) 90 Keywords or options: connect to
online database 83 —
proc_role function (executed from 80 Other information: Required roles
within a system procedure)
Regeneration of a password by an 76 Keywords or options: Setting SSO password
sso Other information: Login name
Role toggling 55 Previous value: on or off
Current value: on or off
Other information: Name of the role being set
Server start 50 Other information:
-dmasterdevicename
-iinterfaces file path
-Sservername
-eerrorfilename
sp_webservices 111 Keywords or options: deploy if deploying a
web service. deploy_all if deploying all web
services
sp_webservices 111 Keywords or options: undeploy if undeploying
a web service. undeploy_all if undeploying all
web services
Server shutdown 51 Keywords or options: shutdown
set proxy or 88 Previous value: Previous suid
set session authorization Current value: New suid

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
sp_configure 82 Keywords or options: SETCONFIG
Other information:
• If a parameter is being set: number of
configuration parameter
• If a configuration file is being used to set
parameters: name of the configuration file
sp_ssladmin administration 99 Keywords contains SSL_ADMIN addcert, if
enabled adding a certification.
Audit table access 61 —
create login, drop login 103 Keywords or options: create login, drop login
create, drop, alter, grant, or revoke 85 Keywords or options: create, drop, alter, grant,
role or revoke role
built-in functions 86 Keywords or options: Name of function
Security command or access to be 95 Other information contains 'Unlocking admin
audited, specifically, starting account'
Adaptive Server with -u option to
unlock the administrator’s
account..
Changes to the LDAP state changes 123 Keywords or options: Primary URL state and
secondary URL state
• Previous value
• Current value
Additional information indicates whether the
state change happened automatically or
because of a manually entered command.
The regeneration of asymmetric 117 Information in extrainfo
keypairs for network password
encryption by the system or
sp_passwordpolicy
select select from a table 62 Keywords or options:
select into
select
readtext
select from a view 63 Keywords or options:
select into
select
readtext
setuser setuser 84 Other information: Name of the user being set

table_access delete 18 Keywords or options: delete
insert 41 Keywords or options: insert
select 62 Keywords or options:
select into
select
readtext
update 70 Keywords or options:
update
writetext
truncate truncate table 64 —
transfer_table transfer table 136 transfer table
unbind sp_unbindefault 67 —
sp_unbindmsg 69 —
sp_unbindrule 68 —
unmount unmount database 102 —
create manifest file 116 Information in extrainfo
update update to a table 70 Keywords or options:
update
writetext
update to a view 71 Keywords or options:
update
writetext
view_access delete 19 Keywords or options: delete
insert 42 Keywords or options: insert
select 63 Keywords or options:
select into
select
readtext
update 71 Keywords or options:
update
writetext
Table 18-6 lists the values that appear in the event column, arranged by the
audit event.
Table 18-6: Audit event values
Audit event ID Command name Audit event ID Command name
1 ad hoc audit record 62 select table

CHAPTER 18 Auditing

2 alter database 63 select view
3 alter table 64 truncate table
4 bcp in 65 Reserved
5 Reserved 66 Reserved
6 bind default 67 unbind default
7 bind message 68 unbind rule
8 bind rule 69 unbind message
9 create database 70 update table
10 create table 71 update view
11 create procedure 72 Reserved
12 create trigger 73 auditing enabled
13 create rule 74 auditing disabled
14 create default 75 Reserved
15 create message 76 SSO changed password
16 create view 77 Reserved
17 access to database 78 Reserved
18 delete table 79 Reserved
19 delete view 80 role check performed
20 disk init 81 dbcc
21 disk refit 82 config
22 disk reinit 83 online database
23 disk mirror 84 setuser command
24 disk unmirror 85 UDR command
25 disk remirror 86 built-in function
26 drop database 87 Disk release
27 drop table 88 set SSA command
28 drop procedure 89 kill or terminate command
29 drop trigger 90 connect
30 drop rule 91 reference
31 drop default 92 command text
32 drop message 93 JCS install command
33 drop view 94 JCS remove command
34 dump database 95 Unlock admin account
35 dump transaction 96 quiesce database
36 Fatal error 97 create SQLJ function
37 Non-fatal error 98 drop SQLJ function


38 execution of stored 99 SSL administration
procedure
39 Execution of trigger 100 disk resize
40 grant 101 mount database
41 insert table 102 unmount database
42 insert view 103 login command
43 load database 104 create index
44 load transaction 105 drop index
45 login 106 sp_encryption (encrypted
column administration)
46 logout 107 create encryption key
47 revoke 108 Alter Encryption Key
as/not default
48 rpc in 109 drop encryption key
49 rpc out 110 deploy user-defined web
111 services
undeploy user defined
web services
50 server boot 112 login has been locked
51 server shutdown 113 quiesce hold security
52 Reserved 114 quiesce release
53 Reserved 115 Password administration
54 Reserved 116 create manifest file
55 role toggling 117 regenerate keypair
56 Reserved 118 alter encryptin key modify
encryption
57 Reserved 119 alter encryption key add
encryption
58 Reserved 120 alter encryption key drop
encryption
59 Reserved 121 alter encryption key
modify owner
60 Reserved 122 alter encryption key for
key recovery
61 access to audit table 123 LDAP state changes
127 Errorlog administration
136 transfer table

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
Monitoring failed login attempts

The audit option login_locked and the event Locked Login (value 112) record
when a login account is locked due to exceeding the configured number of
failed login attempts. This event is enabled when audit option login_locked is
set. To set login_locked, enter:
sp_audit "login_locked","all","all","ON"
If the audit tables are full and the event cannot be logged, a message with the
information is sent to the error log.
The host name and network IP address are included in the audit record.
Monitoring the audit logs for the Locked Login event (number 112) helps to
identify attacks on login accounts.
Auditing login failures

Although client applications may fail to login for many reasons, Adaptive
Server does not provide them with any detailed information about the login
failure. This is done to avoid giving information to malintentioned users
attempting to crack passwords or otherwise breach Adaptive Server’s
authentication mechanisms.
However, as a system administrator, detailed information is useful for
diagnosing Adaptive Server administrative or configuration problems, and it is
useful to security officers for investigating attempts to breach security.
This enables auditing for all login failures:
sp_audit "login", "all", "all", "fail"
In order to provide a barrier to inappropriate use of the information, only a user
granted the SSO role can access the audit trail information containing this
sensitive information.
Adaptive Server audits login failures for the following conditions:
• For Adaptive Server started as a Windows Service, if the Sybase
SQLServer service is paused (for example, by the Microsoft Management
Console for Services).
• If a remote server attempts to establish a site handler for server-to-server
RPCs, but insufficient resources (or any of the other conditions listed here)
cause the site handler initialization to fail.

• Using Adaptive Server for Windows with the Trusted Login or Unified
Login configuration, but the specified user is not a trusted administrator
(that is, an authentication failure).
• Adaptive Server does not support the SQL interface requested by the
client.
• A user is attempting to log into Adaptive Server when it is in single-user
mode. In single-user mode, exactly one user with the sa_role is allowed to
log in to Adaptive Server. Additional logins are prevented, even if they
have the sa_role.
• The syslogins table in the master database fails to open, indicating the
master database has an internal error.
• A client attempts a remote login, but sysremotelogins cannot be opened, or
there is no entry for the specified user account and no guest account exists.
• A client attempts a remote login and, although it finds an entry referring to
a local account for the specified user in sysremotelogins, the referenced
local account does not exist.
• A client program requests a security session (for example, a Kerberos
authentication), but the security session could not be established because:
• The Adaptive Server security subsystem was not initialized at startup.
• Insufficient memory resources for allocated structures.
• The authentication negotiation failed.
• An authentication mechanism is not found for the specified user.
• The specified password was not correct.
• syslogins does not contain the required entry for the specified login.
• The login account is locked.

• Adaptive Server has reached its limit for the number of user connections.
• The configuration parameter unified login required is set, but the login has
not been authenticated by the appropriate security subsystem.
• Adaptive Server’s network buffers are unavailable, or the requested packet
size is invalid.
• A client application requests a host-based communication socket
connection, but memory resources for the host-based communication
buffers are not available.

CHAPTER 18 Auditing
• A shutdown is in progress, but the specified user does not have the sa role.
• Adaptive Server could not open the default database for a login, and this
login does not have access to the master database.
• A client makes a high availability login fail over request, but the high
availability subsystem is does not have a high availability session for this
login, or the login is unable to wait for the fail over to complete.
• A client requests a high availability login setup, but the high availability
subsystem is unable to create the session or is unable to complete the TDS
protocol negotiations for the high availability session.
• Adaptive Server fails to setup tempdb for a login.
• TDS Login Protocol errors are detected.


CH A PTE R 1 9 Confidentiality of Data
This chapter describes how to configure Adaptive Server to ensure that all
data is secure and confidential.
Topic Page
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) in Adaptive Server 683
Kerberos confidentiality 704
Dumping and loading databases with password protection 704
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) in Adaptive Server

Adaptive Server Enterprise security services now support Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) session-based security. SSL is the standard for securing the
transmission of sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, stock
trades, and banking transactions, over the Internet.
While a comprehensive discussion of public-key cryptography is beyond
the scope of this document, the basics are worth describing so that you
have an understanding of how SSL secures Internet communication
channels. This document is not a comprehensive guide to public-key
cryptography.
The implementation of Adaptive Server SSL features assume that there is
a knowledgeable system security officer who is familiar with the security
policies and needs of your site, and who has general understanding of SSL
and public-key cryptography.

Internet communications overview

TCP/IP is the primary transport protocol used in client/server computing, and
is the protocol that governs the transmission of data over the Internet. TCP/IP
uses intermediate computers to transport data from sender to recipient. The
intermediate computers introduce weak links to the communication system
where data may be subjected to tampering, theft, eavesdropping, and
impersonation.
Public-key cryptography
Several mechanisms, known collectively as public-key cryptography, have
been developed and implemented to protect sensitive data during transmission
over the Internet. Public-key cryptography consists of encryption, key
exchange, digital signatures, and digital certificates.
Encryption Encryption is a process wherein a cryptographic algorithm is used to encode
information to safeguard it from anyone except the intended recipient. There
are two types of keys used for encryption:
• Symmetric-key encryption – is where the same algorithm (key) is used
to encrypt and decrypt the message. This form of encryption provides
minimal security because the key is simple, and therefore easy to decipher.
However, transfer of data that is encrypted with a symmetric key is fast
because the computation required to encrypt and decrypt the message is
minimal.
• Public/private key encryption – also known as asymmetric-key, is a pair
of keys that are made up of public and private components to encrypt and
decrypt messages. Typically, the message is encrypted by the sender with
a private key, and decrypted by the recipient with the sender’s public key,
although this may vary. You can use a recipient’s public key to encrypt a
message, who then uses his private key to decrypt the message.
The algorithms used to create public and private keys are more complex,
and therefore harder to decipher. However, public/private key encryption
requires more computation, sends more data over the connection, and
noticeably slows data transfer.
Key exchange The solution for reducing computation overhead and speeding transactions
without sacrificing security is to use a combination of both symmetric key and
public/private key encryption in what is known as a key exchange.

CHAPTER 19 Confidentiality of Data
For large amounts of data, a symmetric key is used to encrypt the original
message. The sender then uses either his private key or the recipient’s public
key to encrypt the symmetric key. Both the encrypted message and the
encrypted symmetric key are sent to the recipient. Depending on what key was
used to encrypt the message (public or private) the recipient uses the opposite
to decrypt the symmetric key. Once the key has been exchanged, the recipient
uses the symmetric key to decrypt the message.
Digital signatures Digital signatures are used for tamper detection and non-repudiation. Digital
signatures are created with a mathematical algorithm that generates a unique,
fixed-length string of numbers from a text message; the result is called a hash
or message digest.
To ensure message integrity, the message digest is encrypted by the signer’s
private key, then sent to the recipient along with information about the hashing
algorithm. The recipient decrypts the message with the signer’s public key.
This process also regenerates the original message digest. If the digests match,
the message proves to be intact and tamper free. If they do not match, the data
has either been modified in transit, or the data was signed by an imposter.
Further, the digital signature provides non-repudiation—senders cannot deny,
or repudiate, that they sent a message, because their private key encrypted the
message. Obviously, if the private key has been compromised (stolen or
deciphered), the digital signature is worthless for non-repudiation.
Digital certificates Digital Certificates are like passports: once you have been assigned one, the
authorities have all your identification information in the system. Like a
passport, the certificate is used to verify the identity of one entity (server,
router, Web sites, and so on) to another.
Adaptive Server uses two types of certificates:
• Server certificates – a server certificate authenticates the server that holds
it. Certificates are issued by a trusted third-party Certificate Authority
(CA). The CA validates the holder’s identity, and embeds the holder’s
public key and other identification information into the digital certificate.
Certificates also contain the digital signature of the issuing CA, verifying
the integrity of the data contained therein and validating its use.
• CA certificates (also known as trusted root certificates) – is a list of
trusted CAs loaded by the server at start-up. CA certificates are used by
servers when they function as a client, such as during remote procedure
calls (RPCs). Adaptive Server loads its CA trusted root certificate at
start-up. When connecting to a remote server for RPCs, Adaptive Server
verifies that the CA that signed the remote server’s certificate is a “trusted”
CA listed in its own CA trusted roots file. If it is not, the connection fails.

Certificates are valid for a period of time and can be revoked by the CA for
various reasons, such as when a security breach has occurred. If a certificate is
revoked during a session, the session connection continues. Subsequent
attempts to login fail. Likewise, when a certificate expires, login attempts fail.
The combination of these mechanisms protect data transmitted over the
Internet from eavesdropping and tampering. These mechanisms also protect
users from impersonation, where one entity pretends to be another (spoofing),
or where a person or an organization says it is set up for a specific purpose
when the real intent is to capture private information (misrepresentation).
SSL overview
SSL is an industry standard for sending wire- or socket-level encrypted data
over secure network connections.
Before the SSL connection is established, the server and the client exchange a
series of I/O round trips to negotiate and agree upon a secure encrypted session.
This is called the SSL handshake.
SSL handshake When a client requests a connection, the SSL-enabled server presents its
certificate to prove its identity before data is transmitted. Essentially, the
handshake consists of the following steps:
• The client sends a connection request to the server. The request includes
the SSL (or Transport Layer Security, TLS) options that the client
supports.
• The server returns its certificate and a list of supported cipher suites, which
includes SSL/TLS support options, algorithms used for key exchange, and
digital signatures.
• A secure, encrypted session is established when both client and server
have agreed upon a CipherSuite.
For more specific information about the SSL handshake and the SSL/TLS
protocol, see the Internet Engineering Task Force Web site at http://www.ietf.org.
For a list of cipher suites that Adaptive Server supports, see “Cipher Suites” on
page 696.
SSL in Adaptive Server

Adaptive Server’s implementation of SSL provides several levels of security.

• The server authenticates itself—proves that it is the server you intended to

contact—and an encrypted SSL session begins before any data is
transmitted.
• Once the SSL session is established, the client requesting a connection can
send his user name and password over the secure, encrypted connection.
• A comparison of the digital signature on the server certificate can
determine whether the data received by the client was modified before
reaching the intended recipient.
On most platforms, Adaptive Server uses SSL Plus(TM) library API from
Certicom Corp. However, for Windows Opteron X64, Adaptive Server uses
OpenSSL as the SSL provider.
SSL filter
The Adaptive Server directory service, such as the interfaces file, Windows
Registry, or LDAP service, defines the server address and port numbers, and
determines the security protocols that are enforced for client connections.
Adaptive Server implements the SSL protocol as a filter that is appended to the
master and query lines of the directory services.
The addresses and port numbers on which Adaptive Server accepts
connections are configurable, so you can enable multiple network and security
protocols for a single server. Server connection attributes are specified with
directory services, such as LDAP, or with the traditional Sybase interfaces file.
See “Creating server directory entries” on page 693.
All connection attempts to a master or query entry in the interfaces file with an
SSL filter must support the SSL protocol. A server can be configured to accept
SSL connections and have other connections that accept clear text
(unencrypted data), or use other security mechanisms.
For example, the interfaces file on UNIX that supports both SSL-based
connections and clear-text connections looks like this:
SYBSRV1
master tcp ether myhostname myport1 ssl
query tcp ether myhostname myport1 ssl
master tcp ether myhostname myport2
The SSL filter is different from other security mechanisms, such as DCE and
Kerberos, which are defined with SECMECH (security mechanism) lines in
the interfaces file (sql.ini on Windows).

Authentication via the certificate

The SSL protocol requires server authentication via a server certificate to
enable an encrypted session. Likewise, when Adaptive Server is functioning as
a client during RPCs, there must be a repository of trusted CAs that a client
connection can access to validate the server certificate.
The server certificate Each Adaptive Server must have its own server certificate file that is loaded at
start-up. The following is the default location for the certificates file, where
servername is the name of the Adaptive Server as specified on the command
line during start-up with the -s flag, or from the environment variable
$DSLISTEN:
UNIX $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/certificates/servername.crt
Windows %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_ASE%\certificates\servername.crt
The server certificate file consists of encoded data, including the server’s
certificate and the encrypted private key for the server certificate.
Alternatively, you can specify the location of the server certificate file when
using sp_ssladmin.
Note To make a successful client connection, the common name in the

certificate must match the Adaptive Server name in the interfaces file.
The CA trusted roots The list of trusted CAs is loaded by Adaptive Server at start-up from the trusted
certificate roots file. The trusted roots file is similar in format to a certificate file, except
that it contains certificates for CAs known to Adaptive Server. A trusted roots
file is accessible by the local Adaptive Server in the following, where
servername is the name of the server:
• UNIX – $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/certificates/servername.txt
• Windows – %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_ASE\certificates\servername.txt
The trusted roots file is only used by Adaptive Server when it is functioning as
a client, such as when performing RPC calls or Component Integration
Services (CIS) connections.
The system security officer adds and deletes CAs that are to be accepted by
Adaptive Server, using a standard ASCII-text editor.
Warning! Use the system security officer role (sso_role) within Adaptive
Server to restrict access and execution on security-sensitive objects.

Adaptive Server provides tools to generate a certificate request and to authorize

certificates. See “Using Adaptive Server tools to request and authorize
certificates” on page 692.
Connection types
This section describes various client-to-server and server-to-server
connections.
Client login to Open Client applications establish a socket connection to Adaptive Server
Adaptive Server similarly to the way that existing client connections are established. Before any
user data is transmitted, an SSL handshake occurs on the socket when the
network transport-level connect call completes on the client side and the accept
call completes on the server side.
Server-to-server Adaptive Server establishes a socket connection to another server for RPCs in
remote procedure the same way that existing RPC connections are established. Before any user
calls
data is transmitted, an SSL handshake occurs on the socket when the network
transport-level connect call completes. If the server-to-server socket
connection has already been established, the existing socket connection and
security context is reused.
When functioning as a client during RPCs, Adaptive Server requests the
remote server’s certificate during connection. Adaptive Server then verifies
that the CA that signed the remote server’s certificate is trusted; that is to say,
on its own list of trusted CAs in the trusted roots file. It also verifies that the
common name in the server certificate matches the common name used when
establishing the connection.
Companion server You can use a companion server to configure Adaptive Server for failover. You
and SSL must configure both the primary and secondary servers with the same SSL and
RPC configuration. When connections fail over or fail back, security sessions
are reestablished with the connections.
Open Client Component Integration Services, RepAgent, Distributed Transaction
connections Management, and other modules in Adaptive Server use Client-Library to
establish connections to servers other than Adaptive Server. The remote server
is authenticated by its certificate. The remote server authenticates the Adaptive
Server client connection for RPCs with user name and password.

Enabling SSL
Adaptive Server determines which security service it will use for a port based
on the interface file (sql.ini on Windows).
❖ Enabling SSL
1 Generate a certificate for the server.
2 Create a trusted roots file.
3 Use sp_configure to enable SSL. From a command prompt, enter:
sp_configure "enable ssl", 1
• 1 – enables the SSL subsystem at start-up, allocates memory, and SSL
performs wire-level encryption of data across the network.
• 0 (the default) – disables SSL. This value is the default.
4 Add the SSL filter to the interfaces file. See “Creating server directory
entries” on page 693.
5 Use sp_ssladmin to add a certificate to the certificates file. See
“Administering certificates” on page 693.
6 Shut down and restart Adaptive Server.
Note To request, authorize, and convert third-party certificates, see the Utility
Guide for information on the certauth, certreq, and certpk12 tools.
Unlike other security services, such as DCE, Kerberos, and NTLAN, SSL
relies neither on the “Security” section of the Open Client/Open Server
configuration file libtcl.cfg, nor on objects in objectid.dat.
The system administrator should consider memory use by SSL when planning
for total physical memory. You need approximately 40K per connection
(connections include user connections, remote servers, and network listeners)
in Adaptive Server for SSL connections. The memory is reserved and
preallocated within a memory pool and is used internally by Adaptive Server
and SSL Plus libraries as requested.
Obtaining a certificate
The system security officer installs server certificates and private keys for
Adaptive Server by:

• Using third-party tools provided with existing public-key infrastructure

already deployed in the customer environment.
• Using the Adaptive Server certificate request tool in conjunction with a
trusted third-party CA.
To obtain a certificate, you must request a certificate from a CA. If you request
a certificate from a third party and that certificate is in PKCS #12 format, use
the certpk12 utility to convert the certificate into a format that is understood by
Adaptive Server.
To test the Adaptive Server certificate request tool and to verify that the
authentication methods are working on your server, Adaptive Server provides
a tool, for testing purposes, that allows you to function as a CA and issue
CA-signed certificate to yourself.
The main steps to creating a certificate for use with Adaptive Server are:
1 Generate the public and private key pair.
2 Securely store the private key.
3 Generate the certificate request.
4 Send the certificate request to the CA.
5 After the CA signs and returns the certificate, store it in a file and append
the private key to the certificate.
6 Store the certificate in the Adaptive Server installation directory.
Third-party tools to Most third-party PKI vendors and some browsers have utilities to generate
request certificates certificates and private keys. These utilities are typically graphical wizards that
prompt you through a series of questions to define a distinguished name and a
common name for the certificate.
Follow the instructions provided by the wizard to create certificate requests.
Once you receive the signed PKCS #12-format certificate, use certpk12 to
generate a certificate file and a private key file. Concatenate the two files into
a servername.crt file, where servername is the name of the server, and place it
in the certificates directory under $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE. See the Utility
Guide.

Using Adaptive Server Adaptive Server provides two tools for requesting and authorizing certificates.
tools to request and certreq generates public and private key pairs and certificate requests. certauth
authorize certificates
converts a server certificate request to a CA-signed certificate.
Warning! Use certauth only for testing purposes. Sybase recommends that you
use the services of a commercial CA because it provides protection for the
integrity of the root certificate, and because a certificate that is signed by a
widely accepted CA facilitates the migration to the use of client certificates for
authentication.
Preparing the server’s trusted root certificate is a five-step process. Perform the
first two steps to create a test trusted root certificate so you can verify that you
are able to create server certificates. Once you have a test CA certificate
(trusted roots certificate) repeat steps three through five to sign server
certificates.
1 Use certreq to request a certificate.
2 Use certauth to convert the certificate request to a CA self-signed
certificate (trusted root certificate).
3 Use certreq to request a server certificate and private key.
4 Use certauth to convert the certificate request to a CA-signed server
certificate.
5 Append the private key text to the server certificate and store the
certificate in the server’s installation directory.
Note Adaptive Server includes the openssl open source utility in

$SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/bin. Use openssl to accomplish all certificate
management tasks implemented by certreq, certauth and certpk12. Sybase
includes this binary as a convenience, and is not responsible for any issues
incured using the binary. See www.openssl.org for details.
For information about Sybase utilities, certauth, certreq, and certpk12 for
requesting, authorizing and converting third-party certificates, see the Utility
Guide.
Note certauth and certreq are dependent on RSA and DSA algorithms. These
tools only work with crypto modules that use RSA and DSA algorithms to
construct the certificate request.

Creating server directory entries

Adaptive Server accepts client logins and server-to-server RPCs. The address
and port numbers where Adaptive Server accepts connections are configurable
so you can specify multiple networks, different protocols, and alternate ports.
In the interfaces file, SSL is specified as a filter on the master and query lines,
whereas security mechanisms such as DCE or Kerberos are identified with a
SECMECH line. The following example shows a TLI-based entry for an
Adaptive Server using SSL in a UNIX environment:
An entry for an Adaptive Server with SSL and DCE security mechanisms on
UNIX might look like:
SYBSRV1
master tcp ether myhostname myport1 ssl
query tcp ether myhostname myport1 ssl
master tcp ether myhostname myport2
SECMECH 1.3.6.1.4.897.4.6.1
An entry for the server with SSL and Kerberos security mechanisms on
Windows might look like:
[SYBSRV2]
query=nlwnsck, 18.52.86.120,2748,ssl
master=nlwnsck 18.52.86.120,2748,ssl
master=nlwnsck 18.52.86.120,2749
secmech=1.3.6.1.4.897.4.6.6
The SECMECH lines for SYBSRV1 and SYBSRV2 in the examples contain
an object identifier (OID) that refers to security mechanisms DCE and
Kerberos, respectively. The OID values are defined in:
• UNIX – $SYBASE/$SYBASE_OCS/config/objectid.dat
• Windows – %SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS\ini\objectid.dat
In these examples, the SSL security service is specified on port number
2748(0x0abc).
Note The use of SSL concurrently with a SECMECH security mechanism is

intended to facilitate migration from SECMECHs to SSL security.
Administering certificates
To administer SSL and certificates in Adaptive Server, use sp_ssladmin.
sso_role is required to execute the stored procedure.

sp_ssladmin is used to:
• Add local server certificates. You can add certificates and specify the
password used to encrypt private keys, or require input of the password at
the command line during start-up.
• Delete local server certificates.
• List server certificates.
The syntax for sp_ssladmin is:
sp_ssladmin {[addcert, certificate_path [, password|NULL]]
[dropcert, certificate_path]
[lscert]
[help]}
[lsciphers]
[setciphers, {"FIPS" | "Strong" | "Weak" | "All"
| quoted_list_of_ciphersuites}]
For example:
sp_ssladmin addcert, "/sybase/ASE-12_5/certificates/Server1.crt",
"mypassword"
This adds an entry for the local server, Server1.crt, in the certificates file in the
absolute path to /sybase/ASE-12_5/certificates
(x:\sybase\ASE-12_5\certificates on Windows). The private key is encrypted
with the password “mypassword”. The password should be the one specified
when you created the private key.
Before accepting the certificate, sp_ssladmin verifies that:
• The private key can be decrypted using the provided password (except
when NULL is specified).
• The private key and public key in the certificate match.
• The certificate chain, from root CA to the server certificate, is valid.
• The common name in the certificate matches the common name in the
interfaces file.

If the common names do not match, sp_ssladmin issues a warning. If the other
criteria fails, the certificate is not added to the certificates file.
Warning! Adaptive Server limits passwords to 64 characters. In addition,

certain platforms restrict the length of valid passwords when creating server
certificates. Select a password within these limits:
• Sun Solaris – both 32- and 64-bit platforms, 256 characters.
• Linux – 128 characters.
• IBM – both 32- and 64-bit platforms, 32 characters.
• HP – both 32- and 64-bit platforms, 8 characters.
• Windows – 256 characters.
The use of NULL as the password is intended to protect passwords during the
initial configuration of SSL, before the SSL-encrypted session begins. Since
you have not yet configured SSL, the password travels unencrypted over the
connection. You can avoid this by specifying the password as NULL during the
first login.
When NULL is the password, you must start dataserver with a -y flag, which
prompts the administrator for the private-key password at the command line.
After restarting Adaptive Server with an SSL connection established, use
sp_ssladmin again, this time using the actual password. The password is then
encrypted and stored by Adaptive Server. Any subsequent starts of Adaptive
Server from the command line use the encrypted password; you do not have to
specify the password on the command line during start-up.
An alternative to using a NULL password during the first login is to avoid a
remote connection to Adaptive Server via isql. You can specify “localhost” as
the hostname in the interfaces file (sql.ini on Windows) to prevent clients from
connecting remotely. Only a local connection can be established, and the
password is never transmitted over a network connection.
Note Adaptive Server has sufficient memory in its network memory pool to
allow sp_ssladmin addcert to set the certificate and private key password with
its default memory allocations. However, if another network memory
consumer has already allocated the default network memory, sp_ssladmin may
fail and display this error to the client:
Server 'servername', Procedure 'sp_ssladmin', Line 72:

Command 'addcert' failed to add certificate path

/work/REL125/ASE-12_5/certificates/servername.crt,
system error: ErrMemory.
(return status = 1)
Or the following message may appear in the error log:
... ssl_alloc: Cannot allocate using
ubfalloc(rnetmempool, 131072)
As a workaround, you can increase the additional network memory
configuration parameter. Adaptive Server needs about 500K bytes of memory
for sp_ssladmin addcert to succeed, so increasing additional network memory
by this amount may allow it to succeed. This memory is reused by the network
memory pool when needed, or you can return additional network memory to its
previous value after sp_ssladmin has successfully completed.
Performance
There is additional overhead required to establish a secure session, because
data increases in size when it is encrypted, and it requires additional
computation to encrypt or decrypt information. The additional memory
requirements for SSL increases the overhead by 50-60 percent for network
throughput or for establishing a connection. You must have approximately 40K
more memory for each user connection.
Cipher Suites
During the SSL handshake, the client and server negotiate a common security
protocol via a CipherSuite. Cipher Suites are preferential lists of
key-exchange algorithms, hashing methods, and encryption methods used by
SSL-enabled applications. For a complete description of Cipher Suites, visit
the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) organization at
http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2246.txt.
By default, the strongest CipherSuite supported by both the client and the
server is the CipherSuite that is used for the SSL-based session.

Adaptive Server supports the Cipher Suites that are available with the SSL Plus
library API and the cryptographic engine, Security Builder™, both from
Certicom Corp.
Note The Cipher Suites listed conform to the Transport Layer Specification
(TLS). TLS is an enhanced version of SSL 3.0, and is an alias for the SSL
version 3.0 Cipher Suites.
@@ssl_ciphersuite
The Transact-SQL global variable @@ssl_ciphersuite allows users to know
which cipher suite was chosen by the SSL handshake and verify that an SSL or
a non-SSL connection was established.
Adaptive Server sets @@ssl_ciphersuite when the SSL handshake completes.
The value is either NULL, indicating a non-SSL connection, or a string
containing the name of the cipher suite chosen by the SSL handshake.
For example, an isql connection using SSL protocol displays the cipher suite
chosen for it.
1> select @@ssl_ciphersuite
2> go
Output:
------------------------------
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
(1 row affected)
Setting SSL cipher suite preferences

In Adaptive Server, sp_ssladmin has two command options to display and set
cipher suite preferences: lsciphers and setciphers. With these options, the set of
cipher suites that Adaptive Server uses can be restricted, giving control to the
system security officer over the kinds of encryption algorithms that may be
used by client connections to the server or outbound connections from
Adaptive Server. The default behavior for use of SSL cipher suites in Adaptive
Server is the same as in earlier versions; it uses an internally defined set of
preferences for cipher suites.
To display the values for any set cipher suite preferences, enter:

sp_ssladmin lsciphers
To set a specific cipher suite preference, enter:
sp_ssladmin setciphers, {"FIPS" | "Strong" | "Weak" |
"All" | quoted_list_of_ciphersuites }
where:
• “FIPS” – is the set of encryptions, hash, and key exchange algorithms that
are FIPS-compliant. The algorithms included in this list are AES, 3DES,
DES, and SHA1.
• “Strong” – is the set of encryption algorithms using keys longer than 64
bits.
• “Weak” – is the set of encryption algorithms from the set of all supported
cipher suites that are not included in the strong set.
• “All” – is the set of default cipher suites.
• quoted_list_of_ciphersuites – specifies a set of cipher suites as a comma-

separated list, ordered by preference. Use quotes (“) to mark the beginning
and end of the list. The quoted list can include any of the predefined sets
as well as individual cipher suite names. Unknown cipher suite names
cause an error to be reported, and no changes are made to preferences.
The detailed contents of the predefined sets are in Table 19-1 on page 699.
sp_ssladmin setciphers sets cipher suite preferences to the given ordered list.
This restricts the available SSL cipher suites to the specified set of “FIPS”,
“Strong”, “Weak”, “All”, or a quoted list of cipher suites. This takes effect on the
next listener started, and requires that you restart Adaptive Server to ensure that
all listeners use the new settings.
You can display any cipher suite preferences that have been set using
sp_ssladmin lsciphers. If no preferences have been set, sp_ssladmin lsciphers
returns 0 rows to indicate no preferences are set and Adaptive Server uses its
default (internal) preferences.

Table 19-1: Predefined cipher suites in Adaptive Server

Set
name Cipher suite names included in the set
FIPS TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
Strong TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
Weak TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5
TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA
TLS_DHE_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA

Set
name Cipher suite names included in the set
All TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA
TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5
TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA
Table 19-2 describes Cipher suites no longer supported for Adaptive Server
15.0 and later. 15.0. Attempts to use use any dropped cipher suite results in an
SSLHandshake failure and a failure to connect to Adaptive Server.

Table 19-2: Dropped Cipher suites

Set name Cipher suite names dropped from the set
FIPS TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
Strong None dropped
Weak TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_RC4_56_SHA
Others TLS_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_DES40_CBC_SHA
TLS_DH_anon_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5
TLS_DH_anon_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_DH_anon_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
TLS_DH_anon_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5
TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA
Examples sp_ssladmin
On initial startup, before any cipher suite preferences have been set, no
preferences are shown by sp_ssladmin lscipher.
1> sp_ssladmin lscipher
2> go
Output:
Cipher Suite Name Preference
----------------- ----------
(0 rows affected)
(return status = 0)
The following example specifies the set of cipher suites that use FIPS
algorithms.
1> sp_ssladmin setcipher, 'FIPS'
The following cipher suites and order of preference are set for SSL connections:
---------------------------------------------------------------- -----------
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA 1
TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 3
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 4
TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 5
TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA 6
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA 7

TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA 8
TLS_RSA_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA 9
TLS_DHE_DSS_EXPORT1024_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA 10
A preference of 0 (zero) sp_ssladmin output indicates a cipher suite is not used
by Adaptive Server. The other, non-zero numbers, indicate the preference order
that Adaptive Server uses the algorithm during the SSL handshake. The client
side of the SSL handshake chooses one of these cipher suites that matches its
list of accepted cipher suites.
This example uses a quoted list of cipher suites to set preferences in Adaptive
Server:
1> sp_ssladmin setcipher, 'TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA,
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA'
2> go
The following cipher suites and order of preference are set for SSL connections:
---------------------------------------------------------------- -----------
Other considerations
When you upgrade to Adaptive Server version 12.5.3 and later, the cipher suite
preferences are the server defaults, and sp_ssladmin option lscipher displays no
preferences. The server uses its default preferences, those defined by “All”. The
system security officer should consider the security policies employed at his or
her site and the available SSL cipher suites to decide whether to restrict cipher
suites and which cipher suites are appropriate for the security policies.
If you upgrade from Adaptive Server version 12.5.3 and later and have set
cipher suite preferences, those preferences remain after upgrade. After the
upgrade is complete, review your server's cipher suite preferences with current
security policies and the lists of supported and unsupported cipher suites found
in tables Table 19-1. Omit any cipher suites that are not supported.
If you have set SSL cipher suite preferences and want to remove all preferences
from the server and use default preferences, delete the preferences from their
storage location in system catalogs using the following commands:
1> sp_configure 'allow updates to system tables', 1
2> go
1> delete from master..sysattributes where class=24

2> go

1> sp_configure 'allow updates to system tables', 0

2> go
These commands can be executed only by the system security officer or system
administrator.
Using SSL to specify a common name

The server name specified in the directory service entry can be different from
the common name the SSL server certificate uses to perform an SSL
handshake. This allows you to use a fully-qualified domain name for the SSL
certificate common name (for example, server1.bigcompany.com).
To add a common name to the interfaces file, use:
ase1
master tcp ether host_name port_number ssl="CN='common_name'"
query tcp ether host_name port_number ssl="CN='common_name'"
When clients use SSL to connect to an Adaptive Server that also uses SSL, the
SSL filter is placed after the port number in the interfaces file. The directory
service includes the common name, which you add either by using dsedit or a
text editor.
Specifying a common name with sp_listener

sp_listener includes the CN=common_name parameter, which allows you to
specify a common name for the SSL certificate. The syntax is:
sp_listener 'command','[protocol:]machine_name:port_number:
"CN=common_name"', 'engine_number'
Where CN=common_name is used only if you specify ssltcp as the protocol.
The common_name you specify here is validated against the common_name in
the SSL certificate. If you do not include CN=common_name, Adaptive Server
uses server_name to validate against the common name in the SSL certificate.
If you include a fully-qualified domain name in the certificate, it must match
the CN=common_name.
The attribute name “CN” is case insensitive (it can be “CN”, “cn” or “Cn”), but
the attribute value for the common name is case sensitive.
For example, to specify the common name ase1.big server 1.com:

Kerberos confidentiality
sp_listener 'start','ssltcp:blade1:17251:"CN=ase1.big server 1.com"','0'

See the Reference Manual: Procedures for more information about sp_listener.
Stored procedure sp_addserver changed

The filter parameter is enhanced to specify a common name. See the Reference
Manual: Procedures.
Kerberos confidentiality
You can also ensure the confidentiality of all messages with Adaptive Server.
To require all messages into and out of Adaptive Server to be encrypted, set the
msg confidentiality reqd configuration parameter to 1. If this parameter is 0 (the
default), message confidentiality is not required but may be established by the
client.
For example, to require that all messages be encrypted, execute:
sp_configure "msg confidentiality reqd", 1
For more information about using Message Confidentiality with Kerberos and
other Security Services supported, see “Administering network-based
security” on page 496.
Dumping and loading databases with password

protection
You can protect your database dump from unauthorized loads using the
password parameter of the dump database command. If you include the
password parameter when you make a database dump, you must also include
this password when you load the database.
The partial syntax for the password-protected dump database and load database
commands are:
dump database database_name to file_name [ with passwd = password ]

load database database_name from file_name [ with passwd = password

]
where:
• database_name – is the name of the database that is being dump or loaded.
• file_name – is the name of the dump file.
• password – is the password you provide to protect the dump file from
unauthorized users.
Your password must be between 6 and 30 characters long. If you provide a
password that is less than 6 or greater than 30 characters, Adaptive server
issues an error message. If you issue an incorrect password when you attempt
to load the database, Adaptive Server issues an error message and the
command fails.
For example, the following uses the password “bluesky” to protect the database
dump of the pubs2 database:
dump database pubs2 to “/Syb_backup/mydb.db” with passwd = “bluesky”
The database dump must be loaded using the same password:
load database pubs2 from “/Syb_backup/mydb.db” with passwd = “bluesky”
Passwords and earlier versions of Adaptive Server

You can use the password-protected dump and load commands only with
Adaptive Server version 12.5.2 and later. If you use the password parameter on
a dump of a 12.5.2 version of Adaptive Server, the load fails if you try to load
it on an earlier version of Adaptive Server.
Passwords and character sets

You can load the dump only to another server with the same character set. For
example, if you attempt to load a dump from a server that uses an ASCII
character set to a server that uses a non-ASCII character set, the load fails
because the value of the ASCII password is different from the non-ASCII
password.

Dumping and loading databases with password protection
Passwords entered by users are converted to Adaptive Server’s local character

set. Because ASCII characters generally have the same value representation
across character sets, if a user’s password is in an ASCII character set, the
passwords for dump and load are recognized across all character sets.
Adaptive Server version 15.0.2 and later allows you to store portable
passwords. See “Character set considerations for passwords” on page 463.

Index
Symbols converted to dollar sign in login names 506

| (pipe)
& (ampersand)
converted to pound sign in login names 506
translated to underscore in login names 505
+ (plus)
’ (apostrophe) converted to underscore in login names
505
? (question mark) converted to dollar sign in login names
* (asterisk)
506
?? (question marks)
select and 597
for suspect characters 348
\ (backslash)
“ ” (quotation marks)
translated to underscore in login names 505
::= (BNF notation)
enclosing parameter values 12
in SQL statements xxii
enclosing punctuation 399
^ (caret)
enclosing values 399
converted to dollar sign in login names 506
> (right angle bracket)
: (colon)
converted to underscore in login names 505
’ (right quote), converted to underscore in login names
, (comma)
505
; (semicolon) converted to pound sign in login names
in SQL statements xxiii
506
{} (curly braces)
/ (slash)
[ ] (square brackets)
= (equals sign)
! (exclamation point)
~ (tilde)
< (left angle bracket)
$ISA 553
@@client_csexpansion global variable 338
‘ (left quote), converted to underscore in login names
505
- (minus sign)
converted to pound sign in login names 506 Numerics
() (parentheses)
7-bit ASCII character data, character set conversion for
343
% (percent sign)
error message placeholder 355
translated to underscore in login names 505 A
. (period)
abstract plan cache configuration parameter 82

Index
abstract plan dump configuration parameter 82 aliases, user

abstract plan load configuration parameter 82 See also logins;users
abstract plan replace configuration parameter 83 creating 429
access 604 database ownership transfer and 562
restricting guest users 404 dropping 430, 431
access control, row level 603 help on 431
access permissions. See object access permissions all keyword
access protection. See permissions; security functions grant 567, 575
access rules revoke 575
alter table command 610 allocation
bcp 610 pages 282
creating 607 units 282
creating and binding 605 units See also size; space allocation
dropping 606 allow backward scans configuration parameter 86
examples 608 allow nested triggers configuration parameter 86
extended 606 allow procedure grouping configuration parameter
sample table 605 87
accounting, chargeback 476 allow remote access configuration parameter 87
accounts, server allow resource limits configuration parameter 88
See logins;users allow sendmsg configuration parameter 88
ACF (Application Context Facility), problem-solving with allow sql server async i/o configuration parameter 88
621 allow updates configuration parameter (now called
activating roles 419 allow updates to system tables) 14
Adaptive Server Plug-In (ASEP) allow updates to system tables configuration parameter
command line updates for 15.0.3 50 14, 89
Adaptive Server principal name 524 alter database command
adding omitting database device and 289, 290
comments to the audit trail 640 system tables and 278
database devices 209, 282–288 alter role command 414, 442
date strings 335 alternate identity. See alias, user
group to a database 401–402 alternate languages. See languages, alternate
guest users 403 and (&)
logins to server 399–400 translated to underscore in login names 505
months of the year 335 ansi_permissions option, set
remote logins 405, 486–488 permissions and 569
remote servers 480–485 apostrophe converted to underscore in login names
users to a database 209, 397 505
users to a group 402 Application Context Facility 613, 614
additional network memory configuration parameter 83 granting and revoking privileges 615
address, server 16 setting permissions 614
administering security, getting started 387–390 valid users 615
aggressive garbage collection 371 application contexts
priority level 371 built-in functions 616
aggressive housekeeper 371 using 616
aliases application design 208
server 482 applications

Index
proxy authorization and 591 configuration parameters 639

Arabic character set support 305 devices for 641
ASCII characters disabling 639
character set conversion and 343 displaying options for 640
ASEP (Adaptive Server Plug-In) enabling 639
Connecton Profile Description, Import, Export enabling and disabling 652
options 50 installing 641
features new to 15.0.3 51 managing the audit trail 644
new search tool 50 managing the transaction log 650
support for Windows Vista 51 overview 635
assigning queue, size of 91, 639
login names 389 sybsecurity database 30, 636
assymetric key pairs, generating 457 sysaudits_01...sysaudits_08 tables 667
asterisk (*) system procedures for 639
converted to pound sign in login names 506 threshold procedure for 644
select and 597 turning on and off 652
asynchronous I/O auditing configuration parameter 92, 652
limiting Server requests for 158 authentication 494
asynchronous prefetch mutual 495
configuring 141 authorizations. See permissions
@@char_convert global variable 338 automatic cluster takeover configuration parameter
@@client_csid global variable 338 92
@@client_csname global variable 338 automatic LDAP enhancements 548
@@langid global variable 340 automatic operations
@@language global variable 340 character conversions in logins 505
@@max_connections global variable 207 automatic user authentication enhancements 548
@@maxcharlen global variable 338 average cap size configuration parameter 90
@@ncharsize global variable 338
audit options
displaying 640
examples 658 B
setting 657 Backing up
audit queue 639, 649 master database 55
audit queue size configuration parameter 91, 639, backslash (\)
649 translated to underscore in login names 505
audit trail 30, 635, 667 backtracing errors. See error logs
adding comments 640, 665 Backup Server
changing current audit table 645 error messages 365
illustration with multiple audit tables 637 shutting down 379
managing 644 tape retention in days configuration parameter
querying 667 257
stacktrace of error messages 356 backups 41–44
threshold procedure for 644 hints 41–44
auditing 394, 635, 635–667 Backus Naur Form (BNF) notation xxii
See also audit options Baltic character set support 305
adding comments to the audit trail 640 base tables. See tables

Index
bcp (bulk copy utility) configuration parameters 77, 491

character set conversion and 350 database options 295–297
security services and 514 database owners 561
sort order changes and 327 default database 426
with access rules 610 passwords for login accounts 424
Big 5 server logins 426
similarities to CP 950 305 system tables, dangers of 11, 14
binary sort order of character sets user information 423–427
character set changes and database dumps 327 user’s group 427
BNF notation in SQL statements xxii user’s identity 586
brackets. See square brackets [ ] @@char_convert global variable 338
built-in functions character set conversions 341, 349
security 517 character sets 108
bytes See also Japanese character sets
character 348 Arabic 305
Baltic 305
changing 325
conversion between client and file system 350
C conversion between client and server 342–344
CA certificates 685 conversion between client and terminal 350
location of 688 conversion errors 347
trusted root certificate 685 conversion paths supported 342–348
cache partitions Cyrillic-script 305
configuring 141, 142 default 310
cache, procedure 225 definition 303
caches, data definition files 337
database integrity errors and 363 Eastern European 305
calls, remote procedure 479–492 encoding in different 341
timeouts 483 European currency symbol and 306
caps per ccb configuration parameter 93 for language groups 305
cascade option, revoke 568 Greek 305
case sensitivity Hebrew 305
in SQL xxiii ID number 108
certificates Japanese 305
administration of 693 Korean 305
authorizing 692 multibyte 333
CA certificates 685 multibyte, changing to 334
defined 685 reindexing after configuring 331–334
obtaining 690 Russian 305
public-key cryptography 685 Simplified Chinese 305
requesting 692 Thai 305
self-signed CA 692 Traditional Chinese 305
server certificates 685 translation files, terminal-specific 337, 351
chains, ownership 599 Turkish 305
changing Unicode 305
See also updating upgrading text values after changing 333

Index
Vietnamese 305 columns

Western European 305 permissions on 567, 595
character sets and password-protected dumps 705 comma (,)
characters converted to underscore in login names 505
disallowed in login names 505 in SQL statements xxiii
that cannot be converted 347 command
chargeback accounting 476 delete 371
charset.loc file 337 disk resize 292
charsets directory 338 reorg reclaim_space 371
checking passwords for at least one character 444 comments
checkpoint process 229 adding to audit trail 640, 665
recovery interval parameter and 230 common name, specifying with SSL 703
trunc log on chkpt database option 229 common.loc file 339
checktable option, dbcc 332 comparing values
CIPC large message pool size configuration datatype problems 360
parameter 94 compression memory size configuration parameter
CIPC regular message pool size configuration 99
parameter 94 concrete identification 569
cipher suites concurrent Kerberos authentication 530
defined 696 configuration (server)
supported 696 character sets 325
cis bulk insert batch size configuration parameter message language 325–330
95 network-based security 497
cis connect timeout configuration parameter 96 sort orders 325–333
cis cursor rows configuration parameter 96 configuration file
cis idle connectin timeout configuration parameter default name and location 64
97 specifying at start-up 69
cis packet size configuration parameter 97 storage of configured value 64
cis rpc handling configuration parameter 97 configuration file configuration parameter 100, 121,
@@client_csid global variable 338 241, 242
@@client_csname global variable 338 configuration parameter
clients max native threads per engine 162
assigning client name, host name, and application rtm thread idle wait period 235
name 427 configuration parameter, max transfer history 172
character set conversion 350 configuration parameters 81–266
Closed Problem Reports 380 audit-related 639
cluster heartbeat interval configuration parameter changing 491
98 chargeback accounting 477
cluster heartbeat retries configuration parameter 99 default settings of 63
cluster vote timeout configuration parameter 99 dtm detach timeout period 370
cntrltype option help information on 66
disk init 288 housekeeper free write percent 370
colon (:) listing values of 67
converted to underscore in login names 505 remote logins and 87, 491
column name configuring
unqualified 361 Kerberos 520

Index
conflicting permissions 583 creating

See also permissions database objects 273
connecting to Adaptive Server 16 databases 54, 561
connections groups 401–402
directory services 17 guest users 55, 403
interfaces files 16 master database 275
maximum user number 207 model database 275
consistency segments 276
checking databases 43 stored procedures 14
context-sensitive protection 597 sybsecurity database 641
conventions system procedures 14
See also syntax system tables 9
Transact-SQL syntax xxii tempdb database 275
used in the Reference Manual xxii triggers 568
copying selected data user aliases 429
See insert command; select command user-defined error messages 358
cost of a cpu unit configuration parameter 101 users 56
cost of a logical io configuration parameter 100 credential, security mechanism and 494
cost of a physical io configuration parameter 101 cross-platform dump and load, handling suspect
CP 1252 partitions 335
similarities to ISO 8859-1 305 cs_connection command, number of user connections
CP 950 and 209
similarities to Big 5 305 curly braces ({})
cp437 character set 108 converted to dollar sign in login names 506
cp850 character set 108 curly braces ({}) in SQL statements xxii
CPR files 380 current audit table configuration parameter 104, 645
cpu accounting flush interval configuration parameter current database 359
102, 477 current usage statistics 476
cpu grace time configuration parameter 103 current user
CPU usage set proxy and 590
per user 476 cursors
create database command row count, setting 96
default database size configuration parameter and custom password checks 452
109 custom password complexity checks 447
model database and 27 cyrillic character set support 305
omitting database device and 289, 290
permission to use 561
system tables and 9
create index command 273, 279 D
create procedure command 14 DAC. See discretionary access control (DAC)
create role command 414 data
create rule command, new functionality 604 See also permissions
create rule syntax 604 integrity of 506
create rule , syntax 605 data caches
create table command 273 configuring partitions 141, 142
create trigger command 568 database integrity errors and 363

Index
data dictionary. See system tables name inside database 421, 430
database administration 3–7 objects not transferred between 421
database device password forgotten by 410
space See segments; space allocation permissions granted by 575
database devices 281 permissions of 6, 560, 562
See also disk mirroring; dump devices; master See also database object owners 559
device setuser command and 586–587
adding 282–288 several users as same 429
default 290–291 tasks of 6
dropping 290 permissions
fragments 278 database size configuration variable 55
information about 289 databases
initializing 281–288 See also database objects; user databases
names of 276, 283 adding users 402–405
number of server-usable 187 auditing 641
placing objects on 275 backing up 27, 42, 55
database dumps creating 54
password-protected 704 creation permission 561
database object owners 6 default 26, 400, 426
See also database owners default storage for 24, 290
permissions 7, 560, 587 dropping users from 420
status not transferable 421 dumping 42
tasks of 6 errors affecting 363
database objects guest users 55
See also individual object names integrity concerns 363
access permissions for 7, 566 loading after character set change 327
assigning to devices 274 loading after sort order change 327
controlling user creation of 26 new 27
creating 26, 273, 563 number of open 196
dependent 600 options 295–297
dropping 563, 564 ownership of 561
dropping users who own 421 size 27
errors affecting 363 system 23
finding 359 database-specific dbcc, master and 579
maximum number of open 200 dataserver command
ownership 6, 421, 563 using to unlock logins and roles 442
permissions on 563 date parts
triggers on 603 alternate language 335
database options 295–297 dates
listing 296 adding date parts 335
setting 296 alternate language 335
showing settings 296 display formats 339
database owners 6 format in error messages 357
changing 561 days
error responsibilities of 359, 361 alternate language 335
login name 4, 6 dbcc and storage_admin_role command 579

Index
dbcc (database consistency checker) 43 character set ID number 108

database damage and 358, 363 configuration parameters 63
database-specific commands 578, 579 databases 26, 400
defined 578 language 111
described 578 permissions 27
discretionary access control 578 sort order 112, 113
grant dbcc and roles 579 system databases at installation 276
grant dbcc and users in databases 579 default sortorder id configuration parameter 113
grant dbcc checkstorage command and 579 default XML sortorder configuration parameter 113
server-wide commands 578, 579 defaulton | defaultoff option, sp_diskdefault 291
tune command and 579 defaults
when to use 363 See also database objects
DBISQL11 defncopy utility command
enhanced features of 51 See also Utility Programs manual
now separate product 51 character set conversion and 350
DB-Library programs delete command 371
number of user connections and 209 delete statistics syntax 571
“dbo” user name 4, 6 deleting
dbprocess command, number of user connections and files 290
209 users 56
DCE (Distributed Computing Environment) security denying access to a user 422, 423
mechanism 503 descending scans
deactivating roles 419 deadlocks and 86
deadlock checking period configuration parameter 105 detached transactions 116
deadlock pipe active configuration parameter 106 development server 36
deadlock pipe max messages configuration parameter device fragments 278
106 device shrinkage, disk resize 293
deadlock retries configuration parameter 106 devices 281
deadlocks 360 See also database devices; dump devices; master
descending scans and 86 device
deckanji character set 108 adding 282–288
default character set id configuration parameter 108 audit system 641
default database dropping 290
changing user’s 426 information listings on 289
default database devices initializing 281–288
designating 290 names for physical 283
default database size configuration parameter 109 number of user connections and 207, 209
default exp_row_size percent configuration parameter using separate 274
109 digital signature
default fill factor percent configuration parameter 110 defined 685
default language id configuration parameter 111 nonrepudiation 685
default network packet size configuration parameter 111 public-key cryptography 685
default segment 276 tamper detection 685
default settings direct updates
changing character set 325–334 to system tables 89
changing sort order 327–333 directory drivers 499

Index
example of entry in libtcl.cfg file 501 using 292

directory entries, creating 693 disks See database devices; devices; dump devices
directory services in libtcl.cfg file 17, 499 Distributed Transaction Management (DTM) 30
directory structure Distributed Transaction Processing (DTP) 30
character sets 338 DMA object pool size configuration parameter 116
internationalization files 338 drop logins option, sp_dropserver 485
localization files 340 drop role command 421
*.loc files 340 dropping
dirty pages 229 database devices 290
disable character set conversions configuration dump devices 290
parameter 114 groups 421
disable disk mirroring configuration parameter 115 guest users of master 403
disabling auditing 639 logins from servers 423
disallowing simple passwords 446 master device from default space pool 291
discretionary access control (DAC) 559–603 remote logins 485, 486
See also permissions servers 485
granting and revoking permissions 565 user aliases 430, 431
of dbcc commands 578 user from a database 420
overview 393 user-defined roles 421
stored procedures and 598 users from servers 423
system administrators and 560 users who own database objects 421
user alias and 586 dscp utility for specifying security mechanism 498
views for 596 dsedit utility for security services 498
disk controllers 288 dsync option
disk devices disk init 290
See also database devices; dump devices; space dtm detach timeout period configuration parameter
allocation 116, 370
disk I/O dtm lock timeout period configuration parameter 117
configuration parameters for 190 dump database command
database loads and 161, 187, 193 disk init and 282
disk i/o structures configuration parameter 115 master database and 42
disk init command 272, 278, 282–288 model database and 27
disk mirror command 273 dump database syntax 704
disk mirroring dump devices
disabling 115 dropping 290
enabling 115 information about 289
recovery and 275 sysdevices table and 277
status in sysdevices table 290 dump on conditions configuration parameter 118
disk reinit command dump, database 42
See also disk init command dynamic allocation on demand configuration
disk resize 273, 292 parameter 118
device shrinkage 293 dynamic configuration parameters 64
insufficient disk space 293
minimum size 292
mirroring 292
syntax 292

Index
E enabling
auditing 639
Eastern Europe
SSL 690
character set support 305
encoding characters 341
empty pages, accumulating 371
encryption
enable backupserver HA configuration parameter 119
key exchange 684
enable cis configuration parameter 119, 121, 122, 132
public/private key 684
enable DTM configuration parameter 120
public-key cryptography 684
enable encrypted columns configuration parameter 120
symmetric key 684
enable HA configuration parameter for high availability
encryption, password 141
122
engine memory log size configuration parameter 136
enable housekeeper GC configuration parameter 123,
engines
372
identification numbers 357
enable i/o fencing configuration parameter 124
number of 167
enable java configuration parameter 121, 125
enivronment variable
enable job scheduler configuration parameter 125
$ISA 553
enable ldap user auth configuration parameter 126
error logs 45, 362
enable literal autoparam configuration parameter 126
creation and ownership 356
enable logins during recovery configuration parameter
format 357
126, 127
location 15
enable merge join configuration parameter 127
purging 357
enable metrics capture configuration parameter 127, 128
error messages 355–364
enable monitoring configuration parameter 128
altering server-provided 339, 358
enable pam user auth configuration parameter 128
character conversion 348
enable query tuning mem limit configuration parameter
creating user-defined 358
129, 130
for fatal errors 362–364
enable real time messaging configuration parameter 130
numbering of 355
enable rep agent threads configuration parameter 130
severity levels of 358–364
enable row level access control configuration parameter
user-defined 358
131
errorlog pipe active configuration parameter 136
enable semantic partitioning configuration parameter
errorlog pipe max messages configuration parameter
131
137
enable sort-merge join and JTC configuration parameter
errors
132
See also error logs; error messages
enable SQL debugger configuration parameter 132
character conversion 347
enable stmt cache monitoring configuration parameter
fatal 362–364
133
logging 356
enable surrogate processing configuration parameter
multiple 354
133
reporting of 364
enable unicode conversion configuration parameter 133
server responses to 353–364
enable unicode conversions configuration parameter
state numbers 353
346
types of information logged 15
enable unicode normalization configuration parameter
user 359, 359–362
134
esp execution priority configuration parameter 137
enable webservices configuration parameter 134
esp execution stacksize configuration parameter 137
enable xact coordination configuration parameter 135
esp unload dll configuration parameter 138
enable xml configuration parameter 135

Index
eucjis character set 108 fillfactor

European currency symbol default fill factor percent configuration parameter
character sets 306 110
event buffers per engine configuration parameter filter parameter, in sp_addserver 704
138 finding
event log computer name configuration parameter database objects 359
139 user IDs 434
event logging configuration parameter 140 user names 434
exclamation point (!) users in a database 434
converted to dollar sign in login names 506 FIPS login password encryption configuration
executable code size + overhead configuration parameter 141
parameter 140 fix_text option, dbcc 333–334
execution For load 55
ESPs and XP Server priority 137 formats
expand_down parameter date, time, and money 339
sp_activeroles 437 locale, unsupported 335–337
expiration interval for passwords 454 formulas
expiration of passwords 454 user requirements and 208
expired passwords 256 forwarded rows
exporting set options 631 reducing with default exp_row_size configuration
extended cache size configuration parameter 141 parameter 109
extended stored procedures fragments, device space 278
configuration parameters 137–269 french
extended UNIX character set 108 character set support 305
functions
security 517
F
failures, media 364
fatal errors G
backtrace from kernel 356, 362 garbage collection
error messages for 362–364 aggressive test 371
severity levels 19 and up 362–364 lazy test 371
file descriptors 207 garbage collector
maximum per-process configured for your configuring aggressive 372
operating system 210 housekeeper utility 371
files German
character set translation (.xlt) 337 character set support 305
Closed Problem Reports (CPRs) 380 get_appcontext 616, 617
deleting 290 global async prefetch limit configuration parameter
error log 15, 356 141
interfaces 16 global cache partition number configuration parameter
internationalization 337 142
libtcl.cfg file 17 global login triggers 633
localization 338–339 grant command 560, 565–583
System Problem Reports (SPRs) 380 all keyword 575

Index
public group and 567 hash

roles and 585 defined 685
grant dbcc message digest 685
roles and 579 hash buckets (lock) 155
users in databases and 579 heap memory per user configuration parameter 143
grant option Hebrew
sp_helprotect 593 character set support 305
grant option for option, revoke 568 hierarchy
granting permissions. See permissions
access permissions 6 roles. See role hierarchies
create trigger permission 568 high availability
object creation permissions 6 installhasvss script 122
proxy authorization permission 577 insthasv script 122
roles to roles 416 setting enable HA 122
roles with grant role 584 high availability and passwords 472
granting and revoking permissions for users and roles 571 histogram tuning factor configuration parameter 143
granting default permissions on system tables 579–581 housekeeper chores 370
Greek configuration parameter license information 371
character set support 305 housekeeper free write percent configuration
groups parameter 145, 370
See also public group housekeeper garbage collector 371
changing 427 housekeeper task
conflicting permissions and 583 configuring 145
creating 401–402 license use monitoring 474
dropping 421 space reclamation and 123
grant and 570 statistics flushing 145
language 305 housekeeper utility
naming 401 functionality 370
public 56 housekeeper wash, housekeeper garbage collection,
revoke and 571 housekeeper chores 370
Guest users three tasks 370
creating 55 wash 370
guest users 565 wash task 145
adding 403
creating 403
databases 55
permissions 404 I
sample databases and 31, 404 I/O
guidelines, security 388 usage statistics 476
i/o accounting flush interval configuration parameter
146, 477
i/o batch sizet configuration parameter 147
H i/o polling process count configuration parameter
handling suspect partitions 334 148
hardware IBM character set 108
errors 364 Icons 50

Index
identification and authentication initializing

See also logins database devices 281–288
controls 391 installation, server
identities audit system 641
alternate 429 establishing security after 388–390
proxies and 587 interfaces file 17
session authorizations and 587 status after 275
identity burning set factor configuration parameter installhasvss script 122
149 installing
identity grab size configuration parameter 150 sample databases 31
identity of user. See aliases; logins; users insthasv script 122
identity reservation size configuration parameter insufficient disk space
150 disk resize 293
idle migration timeout configuration parameter 151 insufficient permission 360
IDs, user 409, 434 insufficient resource errors (Level 17) 361
system procedures and 14 interfaces file 16, 498
impersonating a user. See setuser command internal error, nonfatal 361–362
index descriptors international language support. See character sets;
maximum number open 198 languages
indexes internationalization
character set changes 333 a sample system 301
character-based 331 advantages 300
default fill factor percent percentage for 110 definition 299
object allocation maps of 195 directory structure for character sets 338
rebuilding 332 files 337
sort order changes 332 is_sec_service_on security function 518
suspect 332, 363 ISO 8859-1
individual accountability 389 similarities to CP 1252 305
information (server) iso_1 character set 108
changing user 423–427 isql utility command
configuration parameters 67 character set conversion and 350
database devices 289 number of user connections and 208
database options 296 passwords and 490
devices 289 security services and 514
dump devices 289 status and informational messages 359
error messages 355–364 system administration and 7
locked logins 422
logins 434
permissions 591–595
problems 356 J
remote server logins 491 Japanese character sets 108
remote servers 485 sjis (Shift-JIS) 108
user aliases 431 support 305
users, database 431–477 See also languages, alternate
information messages (server). See error messages; Java configuration parameters 242
severity levels job scheduler interval configuration parameter 151

Index
job scheduler tasks configuration parameter 152 us_english 111

joins @@language global variable 340
views and 597 language groups 304, 305
languages
on server 304
supported by a character set 304
K languages, alternate 337
-k option 525 See also character sets; charset.loc file; Japanese
kadmin 520 character sets
kanji. See Japanese character sets date formats in unsupported 335
Kerberos 518 localization files 321–340
compatibility 519 supported languages 300
configuring 520 Latin alphabet 305
CyberSafe Kerberos libraries 518 lazy garbage collection 371
keytab file 520 LDAP
licenses 519 access restrictions 18
MIT Kerberos libraries 518 defined 18
Native libraries 518 enhancements 548
Kerberos authentication 524 multiple directory services 19
concurrent 530 setting failback time interval 549
verifying 527 state transitions 540
kernel support 538
error messages 356, 362 syntax 549
key exchange versus the interfaces file 19
encryption 684 LDAP user authentication 542
public/private key 684 password changes 536
symmetric key 684 tighter controls on login mapping 543
key pairs, generating assymetric 457 troubleshooting 546
keys, table tuning 542
on system tables 11 levels, severity.
keytab file See severity levels, error
specifying for utility programs 514 libtcl.cfg file 17
kill command 366–369 example of 501
kill command, changes 369 preparing for network-based security 499
kill statusonly parameter 369 tools for editing 500
known problems 380 license information configuration parameter 152, 474
Korean license information, configuration parameter 371
character set support 305 license Security and Directory Services required 141
license use
error log messages 475
monitoring 473
L linkage, page
LAN Manager security mechanism 503 See also pages, data
@@langid global variable 340 linking users. See alias, user
language defaults 111 list_appcontext 616, 618
changing user’s 331 listing

Index
database options 296 login failures 157

load database syntax 704 login mapping 550
load, database successful logins 158
number of large i/o buffers configuration Windows NT event log in 139, 140
parameter 115, 161, 187, 193 logical
local and remote servers. See remote servers page sizes 35
local option, sp_addserver 482 login IDs, number of 405
local servers 482 login mapping
locales directory 322 tigher controls 543
locales.dat file 339 login names. See logins
localization 300 login password encryption 141
See also languages, alternate login process
files for 338–339 authentication 494
lock address spinlock ratio configuration parameter login triggers
153 and set options 631
lock hash buckets 155 configuring 623
lock hash table disabling execute privilege 631
configuring size of 153 displaying 625
lock hashtable size configuration parameter 153 dropping and changing 624
lock promotion thresholds executing 625
setting with sp_configure 215–235 issues 630
lock scheme issues and information 630
default 154 output 625
lock scheme configuration parameter 154 restrictions 630
lock shared memory configuration parameter 154 restrictions on 630
lock spinlock ratio configuration parameter 155 syntax for configuring 624
lock table spinlock ratio configuration parameter syntax for creating 623
156 understanding output 625
lock timeouts using 623
configuring server-wide 157 using for other applications 625
lock wait period configuration parameter 156 logins
locking 56 See also remote logins; users
by dbcc commands 334 adding to servers 399–400
logins 422, 439 alias 430, 431
locking logins 56 assigning names for 389
locking scheme database object owner 6
server-wide default 154 “dbo” user name 4, 6
locks displaying password information 443
quantity of 193 dropping 423
log audit logon failure configuration parameter 157 finding 434
log audit logon success configuration parameter identification and authentication 391
157 information on 434
log file. See error logs invalid names 505
log on option locking 56, 422, 439, 442
create database 278 maximum attempts, changing 440
logging maximum attempts, setting 439

Index
“sa” 388 max network packet size configuration parameter

unlocking 422, 442 163
logsegment log storage 276 max number network listeners configuration parameter
lookup server 166
secondary 538 max online engines configuration parameter 166
max online Q engines 167
max parallel degree configuration parameter 168
max pci slots configuration parameter 168
M max repartition degree configuration parameter 170
Macintosh character set 108, 348 max resource granularity configuration parameter
mail session, starting 250 170
management, space. See space allocation; storage max roles enabled per user configuration parameter
management 181, 413
managing users. See users max scan parallel degree configuration parameter
mapping 170
device name to physical name 282 max SQL text monitored configuration parameter 172
remote users 486–490 max transfer history, configuration parameter 172
mapping, login 550 @@max_connections global variable 207
master database 9, 25–26, 42 @@maxcharlen global variable 338
See also disk mirroring;system tables maximum buffers per lava operator configuration
backing up 42, 55 parameter 173
changing option settings 295 maximum dump conditions configuration parameter
creating 275 173
dropping guest users of 403 mci memory size configuration parameter 219
granting default permissions on system tables 581 membership keyword, alter role 415
guest user in 403 memory
keys for system tables in 11 See also space allocation
ownership of 562 audit records 91, 649
revoking default permissions on system tables 581 freeing from XP Server 138
sysdevices table 289 network-based security and 507
master device 24, 283, 289 number of open databases and 197
See also database devices memory alignment boundary configuration parameter
removing from default space pool 290, 291 175
sp_diskdefault and 291 memory per worker process configuration parameter
max async i/os per engine configuration parameter 158 176
max async i/os per server configuration parameter 159 message digest
max cis remote connections configuration parameter defined 685
160 hash 685
max concurrently recovered db configuration parameter messages
161, 187 confidentiality 495, 506
max memory configuration parameter 161 error 15, 355–364
max native threads for LDAP user authentication 542 fatal error 15
max native threads per engine configuration parameter integrity 495, 506
162 language setting for 300
max nesting level configuration parameter 162 origin checks 495
protection services for 494

Index
start-up 15 multibyte character sets 333

system 355–364 changing to 334
user-defined 358 default character set id configuration parameter
messaging memory configuration parameter 177 108
metadata caches configuration parameters 74–213 incompatible 348
metrics elap max configuration parameter 177 multilingual character set 108
metrics exec max configuration parameter 177 multiple directory services
metrics lio max configuration parameter 178 LDAP 19
metrics pio max configuration parameter 178 mut_excl_roles system function 437
Microsoft character set 108 mutual exclusivity of roles 394, 437
min pages for parallel scan 178
minimum
alphabetic characters in password 447
digits in password 447 N
number of uppercase letters in password 448 name of device 282
size, disk resize 292 sysdevices listing 278
minimum pages for a parallel scan configuration names
parameter 178 See also information (server); logins
minimum password length configuration parameter alias 430, 431, 586
179 column, in commands 361
minus sign (-) finding user 434
converted to pound sign in login names 506 for logins 389
miscellaneous user error 360 group 568
mistakes, user See errors; severity levels, error mapping remote user 487
mnc_full_index_filter configuration parameter 180 original identity 587
model database 55 remote server 481
model database 27 remote user 487
creating 275 server 482
keys for system tables in 11 system extended stored procedures 14
size 109, 284 system procedures 12
modifying user 402, 434, 564, 568
server logins 426 naming
money groups 401
local formats 339 servers 482
monitoring user-defined roles 413
spt_monitor table 13 Navigating
SQL text 172 to objects 50
Windows NT Performance Monitor 244 @@ncharsize global variable 338
monitoring tables nested trigger configuration parameter (now called
configuration options 74 allow nested triggers) 86
month values net password encryption option 484
alternate language 335 net password encryption reqd configuration parameter
MSDTC 120 181
msg confidentiality reqd configuration parameter network drivers 499
181 example of entry in libtcl.cfg file 501
msg integrity reqd configuration parameter 181 syntax for in libtcl.cfg file 499

Index
network-based security 493–518 number of oam trips configuration parameter 195

adding logins for unified login 507 number of open databases configuration parameter
configuring server for 503 196
connecting to server 514 number of open indexes configuration parameter 198
getting information about 514, 517 number of open objects configuration parameter 200
identifying users and servers 502 number of pre-allocated extents configuration
memory requirements 507 parameter 203
process for administering 496 number of Q engines at startup 204
remote procedure calls 508 number of remote connections configuration
security mechanism 502 parameter 204
setting up configuration files 497 number of remote logins configuration parameter
using 514 189, 205
networks number of remote sites configuration parameter 205
connections 16 number of sort buffers configuration parameter 206
directory services 17 number of threads for memory dumps, determining
interfaces files 16 189
software 38 number of user connections configuration parameter
nonrepudiation, digital signature 685 78, 207–209
nonstop recovery 275 number of users 405
NT LAN Manager security mechanism 503 number of worker processes configuration parameter
null keyword 210
in sp_addlogin 400 numbers
null passwords 425 engine 357
number (quantity of) error message 355
database devices 187 sort order 112, 113
engines 166 status bit (sysdevices) 289
locks 193
open databases on Server 196
open objects 200
seconds for acquiring locks 157 O
user connections (@@max_connections) 207 o/s file descriptors configuration parameter 210
number of alarms configuration parameter 182 object access permissions See permissions
number of aux scan descriptors configuration parameter object lockwait timing configuration parameter 211
183 object owners. See database object owners
number of backup connections configuration parameter object permissions
186 grant all 567, 575
number of ccbs configuration parameter 186 objectid.dat file 502
number of devices configuration parameter 187 location of 693
number of dtx participants configuration parameter 188 objects
number of histogram steps configuration parameter 191 icons 50
number of index trips configuration parameter 191 navigating to 50
number of large i/o buffers configuration parameter 193 See database objects
number of locks configuration parameter 193 old and new password complexity checks 449
number of login IDs 405 on keyword
number of mailboxes configuration parameter 194 grant 567
number of messages configuration parameter 195 revoke 567

Index
open index hash spinlock ratio configuration in SQL statements xxii

parameter 211 partition groups configuration parameter 218
open index spinlock ratio configuration parameter partition spinlock ratio configuration parameter218
212 partitions
open object spinlock ratio configuration parameter disk 283
212, 213 partitions, suspect, fixing tables 335
operating system commands partitions, suspect, handling 334
executing 14 password
operator role 5 expiration warnings 448
permissions 410 password changes for LDAP user authentication 536
optimization goals and configuration parameters 214 password complexity
optimization timeout limit configuration parameter cross-checks 449
214 custom password checks 452
options old and new 449
database 295–297 password complexity checks 446
remote logins 490 custom password complexity checks 447
remote servers 483 disallowing simple passwords 446
server 483 password expiration warnings 448
order of commands specifying a minimum number of alphabetic
grant and revoke statements 565–586 characters 447
out-of-sequence checks 495 specifying a minimum number of digits 447
overflow errors specifying a minimum number of uppercase
server stack 248 characters in password 448
overflow stack (stack guard size configuration password security 438–473
parameter) 247 generating an assymetric key pair 457
overriding user permissions 56 generating key pairs using sp_passwordpolicy 458
owners. See database object owners 575 securing login passwords on a network 457
ownership chains 599 password-protected database dumps 704
passwords 424
backward compatibility 459
changing 424
P checking for at least one character 444
packets, network choosing 398
size, configuring 164–165 choosing secure 398
page lock promotion HWM configuration parameter date of last change 433
215 displaying information 443
page lock promotion LWM configuration parameter downgrading 460
215, 234 encryption over network 484
page lock promotion PCT configuration parameter expiration interval 454
216 expiration of 454
pages, data 282 for roles 454
dirty 229 forgotten 410
parameters, procedure 400 high availability and 472
parentheses ( ) minimum length 444
converted to dollar sign in login names 506 null 425
parentheses () protecting 398

Index
protection against guessing 439 object 7, 563

remote users 484, 490 object access 565, 565–571
roles and 419 object creation 575
rules for 398 operator 410
sp_password 424 overriding 56
per object statistics active configuration parameter 220 ownership chains and 599
per opject statistics active configuration parameter 219 proxy authorization 577
percent sign (%) public group 564, 567, 583
error message placeholder 355 remote users 490
translated to underscore in login names 505 revoking 565–583
performance selective assignment of 582
audit queue size 91 stored procedures 490, 563, 567
default fill factor percent effect on 110 summary of 559
disk mirroring and 274 system administrator 560–561
ESPs and XP Server priority 137 system procedures 564
space allocation and 275 system tables 579
speed and 275 tables 563, 567
performance monitoring option configuration parameter tables compared to views 596
221 tempdb database 29
period (.) transfers and 562
converted to dollar sign in login names 506 triggers and 603
permission cache entries configuration parameter 222 using setuser 586
permissions views 596–598
See also discretionary access control (DAC) on views instead of columns 597
acquiring other users’ 586 physical resources, managing.
aliases and 429 See storage management
ansi_permissions option and 569 pinyin
assigned by database owners 575 gbpinyin, gbpinyinocs sort orders 317
assigning 575 size of unilib cache configuration parameter 317
concrete identification 569 size of unilib cache configuration parameter, 317
create database 561 transliterates Mandarin pronunciation 317
database object owners 7 use of accents 317
database owners 6, 560, 562 placeholders
default 27 error message percent sign (%) 355
denying 360 plan text pipe active configuration parameter 222
disk init 288 plan text pipe max messages configuration parameter
for creating triggers 568 223
granting 565–583 Pluggable Authentication Module (PAM)
group versus user 56 551
groups and 401 $ISA 553
guest users 403, 404 32- and 64-bit servers on the same machine 553
hierarchy of user 585 configuring Adaptive Server for PAM 553
information on 591–595 determining which module to use 552
insufficient (Level 14) 360 enable pam user auth 553
master database 26 password management 554
model database 27 RFC 86.0 552

Index
unified logins 552 overview 587

plus (+) using 587, 589
converted to pound sign in login names 506 public group 401
preferences, user name 402 See also groups
preventing garbage collection grant and 567, 576
accumulating empty pages 371 guest user permissions and 404
principal name permissions 564, 583
for Adaptive Server 524 revoke and 567
using sybmapname 526 sp_adduser and 402
with SYBASE_PRINCIPAL 524 sp_changegroup and 427
with the -k option 525 public keyword
print deadlock information configuration parameter grant 576
223 public membership 56
print recovery information configuration parameter public/private key encryption 684
224 public-key cryptography
priority certificates 684
XP Server 137 defined 684
proc_role system function digital signature 684
stored procedures and 438, 598 encryption 684
procedure cache 225, 363 pubs2 database
procedure calls. administering 31
See remote procedure calls image information in 32
procedures. See stored procedures; system procedures pubs3 database
process ID, status of 369 administering 31
process wait events configuration parameter 226
processes (server tasks) 366, 369
See also servers
administering Adaptive Server 387 Q
current on server 432 queries
information on 432 conversion errors, preventing 348
killing 366–369 question marks (??)
prod-consumer overlap factor 226 for suspect characters 348
production server 36 quorum hearbeat interval configuration parameter
protection mechanisms. See security functions; stored 226
procedures; views quorum heartbeat retries configuration parameter
protection system 227
context-sensitive 597 quotation marks (“ ”)
hierarchy (ownership chains) 599 converted to pound sign in login names 506
reports 591–595
summary 559
proxy authorization 586–595
executing 589 R
granting 577 read committed with lock configuration parameter
granting permission for 577 227
how applications use it 591 read only database option 331
how users use it 589 reads

Index
physical 275 reorg command

rebooting the server running manually 373
See restarts, server reorg reclaim_space command 371
record keeping 45–47 replay detection 495
configuration 46 reporting
contacts 46 errors 359, 361, 364
maintenance 46 usage statistics 476
system 47 reports
records, audit 639 See also information (server)
recovery server usage 476
configuration parameters for 228–230 reset configuration.
loading databases 327 See configuration parameters;reconfigure command
master database 42, 282 resource limits
nonstop 275 configuring 88
planning backups for 27 response time 259
after reconfiguration 327 restarts, server
sort order changes and 327 after reconfiguration 331
space allocation and 274 reindexing after 331
recovery interval in minutes configuration parameter from same directory 356
228–230 system tables and 331
long-running transactions and 228 temporary tables and 29
reestablishing original identity 587 restricted decrypt permission configuration parameter
remote logins 231
adding 486–488 retaindays option
configuration parameters for 87, 491 dump database 257
dropping 485, 486 dump transaction 257
options for 490 return status
timing out 483 system procedures 13
trusted or untrusted mode 488 revoke command 560, 565–583
remote procedure calls 479–492 public group and 567
configuration parameters for 491 revoking
example of setting security 512 create trigger permission 568
network-based security 508 default permissions from system tables 581
overall process for security model B 510 roles with revoke role 586
security models for 510 revoking default permissions on master database system
unified login and 509 tables 581
remote server pre-read packets configuration parameter RFC 86.0 552
231 rm_appcontext 616, 619
remote server users. See remote logins role hierarchies 394
remote servers 480–485 creating 585
adding 480–485 displaying 437
dropping 485 displaying with role_contain 437
information on 485 displaying with sp_displayroles 437
names of 481 role_contain system function 437
options for 483 roles
remote users. See remote logins activating 419

Index
configured for sa login 388 S

deactivating 419
“sa” login 388
in grant and revoke statements 568, 576
changing password for 389
locking 439, 442
configured with system administrator and system
maximum login attempts, changing 441
security officer roles 388
maximum login attempts, setting 440
security recommendations for using 388
passwords for 454
savepoints
permissions and 585
error (Level 13) 360
stored procedure permissions and 438
scan descriptors 183–185
stored procedures and 585, 598
scripts 304
unlocking 442
secmech specification 502
roles, system
secondary
operator 5
lookup server support 538
system administrator 4
lookup servers, using sp_ldapadmin 539
system security officer 5
secure default login 504
roles, user-defined
secure default login configuration parameter 238
planning 413
securing login passwords on a network 457
rolling back processes
security
recovery interval and 228
auditing 394
server stack capacity and 249
discretionary access control 393
roman8 character set 108
establishing after installation 388–390
row lock promotion HWM configuration parameter
identification and authentication controls 391
233
Kerberos 518
row lock promotion LWM configuration parameter
login features 438
234
roles 393
row lock promotion PCT configuration parameter
security administration
235
example of 389
row lock promotion thresholds
getting started 387–390
setting with sp_configure 233, 235
guidelines 388
rowlevel access control 603
Security and Directory Services, requirement of 141
rows, table
security drivers
sysindexes 279
example of entry in libtcl.cfg file 501
RPCs. See remote procedure calls
syntax for entries in libtcl.cfg file 499
rtm thread idle wait period configuration parameter
security functions 517
235
security mechanisms 516
rules
security models 509
See also database objects
example of model B 512
protection hierarchy 602
for RPCs 510
runnable process search count configuration
model B 510
parameter 236
setting up model B for RPCs 510
running out of space. See space
security services
running reorg command manually 373
example 494–495
russian
supported by Adaptive Server 495
segmap column, sysusages table
procedures that change 278
segments 279

Index
See also database devices; space allocation sort order consistency among 327
creating 276 stopping 378
default 276 syntax errors 360
logsegment 276 unlocking logins or roles at startup 442
syssegments table 279 user connections to 209
system segment 276 user information 431–477
select * command values for configuration parameters 63
error message 597 server-wide dbcc, master and 579
select into/bulkcopy/pllsort database option session authorization option, set 589
model database and 27 session migration timeout configuration parameter
select on syscomments.text column configuration 239
parameter 239 set command
send doneinproc tokens 239 roles and 419
sensitive information, views of 596 set options
separation of roles 393 exportable 631
sequence checks 495 set_appcontext 616
server aliases 482 setting timeout for LDAP user authentication 542
server authentication setuser command
server certificates 688 show_role and 436
server certificates 685 setuser, using 586
location of 688 7-bit ASCII character data, character set conversion for
server authentication 688 343
server information options. See information (server) severity levels, error 353, 358
server user name and ID 434 Backup Server 365
server.loc file 339 levels 10-18 (user errors) 359
server_name.cfg, default name of configuration file 64 levels 19-24 (fatal) 362
servers shared memory starting address configuration
See also processes (server tasks); remote servers parameter 240
adding new logins to 399–400 show_role system function 436
adding users to 399–400 show_sec_services security function 517
connecting 16 shutdown command 378–380
dropping logins from 423 shutting down servers 378
error message severity levels 358–364 simplified Chinese
error messages 356 character set support 305
fatal errors and 362–364 single-user mode 90, 331
installing 37, 275 size
interfaces files 16 See also space
local 482 dbcc fix_text transaction 333
monitoring performance 77 error log 15
names of 482 model database 109, 284
nonfatal internal errors 361–362 new database 27
passwords on 484, 490 tempdb database 28
remote 481–487 size of auto identity column configuration parameter
scheduler 259 241
shutting down 378 size of global fixed heap configuration parameter 241
single-user mode 90

Index
size of process object fixed heap configuration sp_dropalias system procedure 430, 431
parameter 242 sp_dropdevice system procedure 290
size of shared class heap configuration parameter sp_dropgroup system procedure 421
242 sp_droplogin system procedure 423
size of unilib cache configuration parameter 243 sp_dropremotelogin system procedure 486
sjis (Shift-JIS) character set. See Japanese character sets sp_dropsegment system procedure
slash (/) sysusages and 278
converted to pound sign in login names 506 sp_dropserver system procedure 485
sort order sp_dropuser system procedure 420
changing 327–331 sp_extendsegment system procedure
consistency among servers 327 sysusages and 278
default sortorder id 112, 113 sp_helpconfig system procedure 196, 198, 200
default XML sortorder 113 sp_helpdb system procedure 13
definition files 337 database option information 296
installing new 337 sp_helpdevice system procedure 13, 288
numbers 112 sp_helpindex system procedure 13
rebuilding indexes after changing 332 sp_helpjoins system procedure 11
sp_activeroles system procedure 437 sp_helpkey system procedure 11
sp_addalias system procedure 429 sp_helpremotelogin system procedure 491
sp_addauditrecord system procedure 665 sp_helprotect system procedure 593–594
sp_addgroup system procedure 401 sp_helpserver system procedure 485
sp_addlanguage system procedure 335 sp_helptext system procedure 13
sp_addlogin system procedure 399–400, 454, 456 sp_helpuser system procedure 431
sp_addremotelogin system procedure 486–488 sp_indsuspect system procedure 332
sp_addsegment system procedure sp_ldapadmin 539
sysusages and 278 sp_listener, specifying a common name 703
sp_addserver sp_locklogin system procedure 422
includes filter parameter 704 sp_logintrigger 633
sp_addserver system procedure 481–483 sp_maplogin 543
sp_adduser system procedure 27, 402–404 sp_modifylogin system procedure 331, 426, 454, 457
sp_audit system procedure sp_monitorconfig system procedure
setting options with 657 configuring number of open databases and 197
sp_changedbowner system procedure 561 configuring number of open indexes and 199
sp_changegroup system procedure 401, 427 configuring number of open objects and 200,
sp_column_privileges catalog stored procedure 595 202
sp_configure system procedure 67 sp_password system procedure 424
See also individual configuration parameter names sp_passwordpolicy syntax 458
configuring server for security services 503 sp_remoteoption system procedure 490–491
remote logins and 491 sp_reportstats system procedure 476
sp_countmetadata system procedure 197, 198, 200, sp_serveroption net password encryption description
201 458
sp_dboption system procedure 295–297 sp_serveroption system procedure 483
sp_deviceattr system procedure 272, 286 sp_showplan system procedure 376
sp_diskdefault system procedure 272, 290–291 sp_showpsexe system command, housekeeper output
sp_displaylogin system procedure 433 370
sp_displayroles system procedure 437 sp_table_privileges catalog stored procedure 594

Index
sp_who system procedure 432, 592 for companion servers 689

sp_who, housekeeper output 370 for RPCs 689
space Open Client 689
See also size; space allocation stack guard size configuration parameter 247
running out of 361 stack size configuration parameter 249
space allocation standalone utilities and character sets 350
See also database devices; segments; storage start mail session configuration parameter 250
management start xp server during reboot configuration parameter
commands summary 272 250
recovery/performance and 274 startup delay configuration parameter 251
sysusages table 278 state transitions
space reclamation LDAP server 540
enable housekeeper GC configuration parameter 123 statement pipe active configuration parameter 252
Spanish statement pipe max messages configuration parameter
character set support 305 252
#spdevtab temporary table 13 statement statistic active configuration parameter
speed (server) 253
system performance and 275 statement statistics active configuration parameter
#spindtab temporary table 13 253
spinlocks static configuration parameters 64
lock hash table 155 statistics
splitting flushing with housekeeper task 145
tables across two disks 275 housekeeper flushing and 145
SPR files 380 I/O usage 476
sproc optimize timeout limit configuration parameter status
243 information messages (Level 10) 359
spt_committab table 13 status bits in sysdevices 289
spt_monitor table 13 stem 578
spt_values table 13 steps
SQL batch capture configuration parameter 243, 244 administering security 387
sql server clock tick length configuration parameter 245 stopping
sql text pipe active configuration parameter 245, 246 Backup Server 379
sql text pipe max messages configuration parameter 246 Servers 378
square brackets [ ] space allocation
converted to pound sign in login names 506 storage management 271
in SQL statements xxii commands summary 272
.srt files 337 database device initialization 281–289
srvname column, sysservers table 483 default database devices 290–291
srvnetname column, sysservers table 483 defaults at installation 275
SSL issues 39–41, 274
common name, to specify 703 See also space 271
defined 686 system tables and 276–279
enabling SSL 690 stored procedure
filter, defined 687 triggers. See triggers
handshake 686 stored procedures
SSL connections See also database objects; system procedures

Index
checking for roles in 438 sys_session application context table 620, 621
creating 14 sysalternates table 430
granting execution permission to roles 438 See also sysusers table
ownership chains 599 sysconfigures table 80–81
permissions granted 567 syscurconfigs table 80–81
permissions on 490, 563, 567 sysdevices table 277, 288
procedure cache and 225 disk init and 278
remote user access to 490 sp_dropdevice and 290
roles and 598 sp_helpdevice and 288
as security mechanisms 598 status bits 289
system tables changes and 14 sysindexes table 279, 331
strict dtm enforcement configuration parameter 253 syslogins table
structure sp_addlogin effect on 400
internationalization files directory 338 syslogs table
localization files directory 339 modification of 11
suffix names, temporary table 29 syslogs transaction log for sybsecurity 650
suid (server user ID) 400 sysmessages table 354, 355
sun character set 108 sysobjects table 331
suser_id system function 434–435 sysremotelogins table 488
suser_name system function 434–435 syssegments table 279
suspect partitions, in cross-platform dump and load sysservers table 479, 480, 481, 485
335 sp_helpserver and 485, 514
suspend audit when device full configuration srvname column 483
parameter 254, 650 srvnetname column 483
syb__map_name 526 system administration tasks
syb_sendmsg port number configuration parameter accomplishing with Sybase Central 8
254, 255 System Administrator
Sybase Central, using for system administration tasks error responsibilities of 358, 361–364
8 resolving system problems 358, 361
SYBASE_PRINCIPAL 524 tasks for beginners 35–47
syblicenseslog table 475 system administrator 3–7
sybmapname 526 permissions 560–561
sybsecurity database 30, 636 system audit tables 667
sybsystemdb database 30 system catalogs. See system tables
sybsystemprocs database 12, 14, 28 system databases 23–30
See also databases system extended stored procedures 14
permissions and 565 system messages. See error messages 353
symbols system problems
in SQL statements xxii See also errors
symmetric key encryption 684 Server responses to 353–364
syntax severity levels 10 to 18 359–362
disk resize 292 severity levels 19 to 24 362–364
dump database 704 System Problem Reports (SPRs) 380
errors in 360 system procedure
load database 704 tables 13
syntax conventions, Transact-SQL xxii system procedures 12–14

Index
See also information (server); stored procedures; T

individual procedure names
Table editor 57
for adding users 397
table owners. See database object owners
for changing user information 423–427
tables
creating 14
See also database objects; system tables
for dropping aliases 431
context-sensitive protection of 597
for managing remote servers 480–485
dbcc checktable and 332
permissions 564
integrity damage to 363
on temporary tables 29
object allocation maps of 195
using 12
ownership chains for 599
system roles
permissions information on 594
activating 419
permissions on 563, 567
deactivating 419
permissions on, compared to views 596
granting with grant role 584
read-only 331
max_roles_enabled configuration parameter and 413
splitting across two disks 275
show_role and 436
suspect, fixing 335
system security officer 5
system procedure 13
system segment 276
temporary 28
system tables 9–11
underlying 596
See also individual table names
with suspect partitions, fixing 335
changes allowed to 580
without indexes 333
changes dangerous to 14
tamper detection, digital signature 685
corruption 364
tape retention in days configuration parameter 257
create database and 9, 278
tcp no delay configuration parameter 257
creation of 9
tempdb database 28–29
dbcc reindex and 333
See also databases
keys for 11
creating 275
permissions on 579
size of 28
querying 10, 14
temporary tables 28
reindexing and 333
terminals
server restarts and 331
character set conversion for 350
storage management relationships 276–279
installing new definitions 337
stored procedures and 10, 14
test servers 36–37
updating 11, 14
text datatype
for user databases 27
changing character sets and 333
systemwide password expiration configuration parameter
multibyte character sets and 333
256
text prefetch size configuration parameter 258
sysusages table 278
text values, dbcc fix_text upgrade of 333
corruption 364
Thai
sysusers table
permissions and 565
threshold procedures
sysalternates table and 430
audit trail 644
time
for acquiring locks 157
time slice configuration parameter 259
time values

Index
display format 339 U

timeouts option, sp_serveroption 483
underlying tables of views (base tables) 596
total data cache size configuration parameter 259
unichar datatype 306
traditional Chinese
Unicode 304, 306–310
character sets 305
transaction logs
unichar datatype 306
alter database and 278
univarchar datatype 306
create database and 278
UTF-16 306
device placement 274, 278
unified login 495
purging 334
mapping login names 505
trunc log on chkpt option and 229
remote procedure security models 509
transactions
requiring 504
error within 360
secure default login 504
long-running 228
unified login required 263
recovery and 228
univarchar datatype 306
two-phase commit 30
UNIX platforms, raw disk partition 283
transfer utility memory size configuration parameter
unlocking
261
login accounts 422, 442
transferring ownership.
roles 442
See database objects, ownership
untrusted mode, remote logins and 490
translation.
update statistics syntax 571
See character sets
updating
triggers
See also changing
See also database objects; stored procedures
allow updates to system tables configuration
creating 568
parameter and 14
nested 86
system procedures and 598
permissions and 603
text after character set change 333
troubleshooting LDAP user authentication 546
upgrade version configuration parameter 264
trunc log on chkpt database option
us_english language 111
recovery interval in minutes and 229
usage
truncate table syntax 571
disk resize 292
trusted mode
statistics 476
remote logins and 490
use security services configuration parameter 264,
trusted root certificate
503
CA certificate 685
user authentication enhancements 548
location of 688
user connections
tuning
memory allocated per 207–209
LDAP user authentication 542
user databases
monitoring performance 77
See also databases; permissions
turkish
master database control of 25
system tables for 27
two-phase commit
user-defined messages 358
transactions 30
user errors 359, 359–362
txn to pss ratio configuration parameter 261
user groups. See groups; public group
user IDs 409
displaying 433

Index
finding 434 users, object.See database object owners

number 1, Database Owner 14 using proxy authorization 587
user log cache size configuration parameter 265 UTF-16 306
user log cache spinlock ratio configuration parameter utility commands
266 See also Utility Programs manual
user mistakes. See errors; severity levels, error character sets and 350
user names 434, 564 utility, housekeeper, aggressive 371
changing 426
finding 434
preferences 402
user objects. See database objects V
user_id system function 435 variables in error messages 355
user_name system function 435 verification, user-access 484, 488
user-defined roles verifying Kerberos authentication 527
activating 419 Vietnamese
deactivating 419 character set support 305
dropping 421 views
granting with grant role 584 See also database objects
number of 413 dependent 600
planning 413 ownership chains 599
users permissions on 567, 596–598
See also aliases; groups; logins; remote logins security and 596
adding 397–402 virtual
aliases 429 address 288
application name, setting 427 page numbers 285
client host name, setting 427 visitor accounts 405
client name, setting 427 vstart option
creating 56 disk init 288
currently on database 432
currently on server 432
deleting 56
dropping from databases 420–421 W
dropping from groups 427 wait event timing configuration parameter 266
dropping from servers 423 wash, housekeeper task 145
errors by 359, 359–362 Western Europe
guest 55, 403, 565 character set support 305
IDs 409, 434 window of vulnerability 90
information on 431–477 Windows NT LAN Manager security mechanism 503
license use monitoring 473 with grant option option, grant 568
number of user connections and 208 with nowait option, shutdown 378, 379
number or 405 With override, database option 55
permissions to all or specific 582, 597 workload manager size configuration parameter 266
remote 486–490 write operations
single-user mode 90 physical 275
views for specific 597
visiting 405

Index
X
X/Open XA 120
xact 267
.xlt files 337
XP Server
freeing memory from 138
priority 137
xp_cmdshell context configuration parameter 268
xp_cmdshell system extended stored procedure 14

Index

System Administration Guide:: Adaptive Server Enterprise

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Administration Guide:: Adaptive Server Enterprise

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Administration Guide:: Adaptive Server Enterprise

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Administration Guide:

LAST REVISED: November 2009

Copyright © 2009 by Sybase, Inc. All rights reserved.

Sybase, Inc., One Sybase Drive, Dublin, CA 94568.

About This Book .......................................................................................................................... xv

PART 1 BASICS OF SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION

CHAPTER 1 Overview of System Administration.............................................. 3

CHAPTER 2 System and Optional Databases ................................................. 23

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 iii

CHAPTER 3 System Administration for Beginners......................................... 35

iv Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 5 Setting Configuration Parameters ............................................... 63

CHAPTER 6 Overview of Disk Resource Issues ............................................ 271

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 v

CHAPTER 7 Initializing Database Devices ..................................................... 281

CHAPTER 8 Setting Database Options .......................................................... 295

vi Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 10 Configuring Client/Server Character Set Conversions............ 341

CHAPTER 11 Diagnosing System Problems.................................................... 353

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 vii

PART 2 SECURITY ADMINISTRATION

CHAPTER 12 Introduction to Security.............................................................. 383

CHAPTER 13 Getting Started With Security Administration in Adaptive Server

viii Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 14 Managing Adaptive Server Logins, Database Users, and Client

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 ix

x Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 16 External Authentication .............................................................. 493

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xi

CHAPTER 17 Managing User Permissions ...................................................... 559

xii Adaptive Server Enterprise

CHAPTER 18 Auditing ........................................................................................ 635

CHAPTER 19 Confidentiality of Data ................................................................ 683

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xiii

xiv Adaptive Server Enterprise

This manual, the System Administration Guide: Volume 1, describes how

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xv

xvi Adaptive Server Enterprise

• The installation guide for your platform – describes installation,

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xvii

• Locking and Concurrency Control – describes how to use locking

• Monitoring Tables – describes how to query Adaptive Server

xviii Adaptive Server Enterprise

• Volume 1 – provides an introduction to the basics of system

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xix

• Web Services Users Guide – explains how to configure, use, and

xx Adaptive Server Enterprise

To access the Sybase Product Manuals Web site, go to Product Manuals at

❖ Finding the latest information on product certifications

2 Click Certification Report.

❖ Finding the latest information on component certifications

❖ Creating a personalized view of the Sybase Web site (including support

2 Click MySybase and create a MySybase profile.

❖ Finding the latest information on EBFs and software maintenance

2 Select EBFs/Maintenance. If prompted, enter your MySybase user name

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xxi

xxii Adaptive Server Enterprise

For a command with more options:

System Administration Guide: Volume 1 xxiii